JP7560436B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled to create an advantageous state for the player.

Some conventional gaming machines can be controlled to enter a game stop state in which the progress of the game is halted when the number of games in the advantageous zone reaches 1,500 or when the net increase in the awarded game value exceeds an upper limit (when a certain condition is met) (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2020-65820 A

However, the problem with Patent Document 1 is that there is room for improving marketability as a gaming machine that can be controlled to a game stop state in which the progress of the game is stopped.

The present invention was made with an eye on these problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can be controlled to a game stop state, thereby improving marketability.

The gaming machine of claim 1 comprises:
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A counter value relating to a difference between a game value used in a game and a game value to be awarded can be calculated;
It is possible to control a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state,
After the advantageous state ends, the special state can be controlled;
When the counter value is controlled to the special state and reaches an operating value during variable display, a game stop control is performed to stop the progress of the game;
When the counter value becomes the operation value while the game is being controlled to the advantageous state, the game stop control is not performed during the advantageous state , and after the advantageous state ends, the game stop control is performed without controlling the game to the special state;
When the game is controlled to the special state and the counter value reaches an operating value during the variable display, and the game stop control is performed, a display is displayed showing a predetermined message display indicating that the game progress is stopped;
When the counter value reaches an operating value while the game is being controlled to be in the advantageous state, and when the game stop control is performed after the advantageous state ends, a warning display is displayed to alert the player, and then the predetermined message display is displayed;
The predetermined message display, which is displayed when the counter value reaches the operating value during the variable display while the game is being controlled to the special state and the game stop control is performed , and the predetermined message display, which is displayed when the counter value reaches the operating value at a predetermined timing while the game is being controlled to the advantageous state and the game stop control is performed after the advantageous state ends, are a common display.
When the power is turned off during the game stop control and the power is turned on without initialization, the game stop control is not terminated,
When the power is turned off during the game stop control and the power is turned on with initialization, the game stop control ends.
When the power is turned on after a power outage occurs while the counter value is controlled to the advantageous state and the counter value is set to the operating value, the game is restored to the advantageous state, and after the advantageous state ends, the game stop control is performed without controlling the game to the special state.
It is characterized by the following.

The present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, or may have the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention as well as configurations other than the invention-specific matters.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. A diagram showing the numerical range of a jackpot and the numerical range of a miss with time-saving in the variable display of the first special chart in normal state or time-saving state. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. A front view showing a pachinko gaming machine in characteristic section 131SG. This is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like installed in a pachinko gaming machine in characteristic section 131SG. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing each random number, (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table, (C1) and (C2) are explanatory diagrams showing a jackpot type determination table, and (D) is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. An explanatory diagram showing a time-saving count determination table for each transition trigger. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a fluctuation pattern type determination table. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table. This is an explanatory diagram showing the expectation level of the reach performance of Super Reach. An explanatory diagram showing the difference in expectation between the reach effects of super reaches. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an example of a performance control command. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a game control data retention area. FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a performance control data storage area. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a start winning determination process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a random number value determination process when a prize is won. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of normal special symbol processing. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of normal special symbol processing. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol stopping process. FIG. 2 is a state transition diagram for explaining state transitions. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. An explanatory diagram showing the execution rate of the pre-reading preview performance. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display start setting process. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the determination ratio of the stopping symbols. An explanatory diagram showing performance control patterns for different fluctuation patterns. An explanatory diagram showing performance control patterns for different fluctuation patterns. A diagram showing the flow of presentation during variable display in the normal state. A diagram showing the flow of presentation during variable display in time-saving state A and special probability state. A diagram showing the flow of presentation during variable display in time-saving state B. A figure showing the progression of images when a low base weak reach A performance is executed. This is a timing chart showing the execution status of the low base weak reach A performance. A figure showing the progression of images when a low base weak reach B performance is executed. This is a timing chart showing the execution status of the low base weak reach B performance. A figure showing the progression of images when a low base strong reach A performance is executed. This is a timing chart showing the execution status of the low base strong reach A performance. A figure showing the progression of images illustrating a bad example of a low base strong reach A presentation. A figure showing the progression of images when the low base strong reach B performance is executed. This is a timing chart showing the execution status of the low base strong reach A performance. A figure showing the transition of images when a low-base strongest reach performance is executed. This is a timing chart showing the execution status of the low-base strongest reach presentation. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a transition of an image in a modified example of the title display part. A figure showing the progression of images when high base super reach A to D performances are executed. This is a timing chart showing the execution status of high base super reach A to D performances. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a position where title characters are displayed in a display area of an image display device. An explanatory diagram showing the presentation time of the super reach presentation. An explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the performance times of super reach performances. An explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the title characters and decorative patterns of the Super Reach performance. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution status of the expectation degree suggestion display. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the transition of images when a selection performance is executed. An explanatory diagram showing the number of operations required until the selection effect switches to the next title and the execution rate of the super reach effect when the selection effect is executed. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of the effects that can be executed during variable display. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram of the execution ratio of effects that can be executed during variable display. A figure showing the display status of the explanatory text displayed in the explanatory text display performance. This is a timing chart showing the display status of the explanatory text displayed in the explanatory text display performance. A diagram showing the execution status of the title color change effect. A diagram showing the timing at which the color of the title characters changes in a title color change presentation. A diagram showing the execution status of operation promotion presentation A. A diagram showing the execution status of operation promotion presentation B. A diagram showing the execution status of operation promotion presentation C. A figure showing the execution status of operation promotion presentation D. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing a display mode of an operation prompting image. A diagram showing the execution status of the jackpot start performance. A diagram showing the display status of the remaining number of times until Yu-time. A diagram showing the execution status of the Yu-time start performance. There is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the title text of the super reach performance, the explanatory text, the title text of the jackpot start performance, and the operation prompt text. An explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the title characters of the Super Reach performance and the title characters of the Yu-Time start performance. A diagram showing the arrangement of game effect lamps. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a mechanism for outputting to an LED driver. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a brightness data table. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a grandchild table based on timer management of a child table; FIG. A figure showing a brightness data table used in super reach performance. A diagram showing the settings of the parent table of weak reach common titles. A diagram showing the settings of the child table of the weak reach common title. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table of weak reach common titles. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table of weak reach common titles. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table of weak reach common titles. A diagram showing the settings of the parent table for the title Common Chance Up Red. A diagram showing the settings of the title common chance up red child table. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table for the Title Common Chance Up Red. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table for the Title Common Chance Up Red. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table for the Title Common Chance Up Red. A diagram showing the settings of the parent table for title common chance up money. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the settings of a title common chance up golden child table. A diagram showing the settings of the title common chance up money grandchild table. A diagram showing the settings of the title common chance up money grandchild table. A diagram showing the settings of the title common chance up money grandchild table. A diagram showing the settings of the parent table for the weak reach system weak reach A introduction. A diagram showing the settings of a child table for the weak reach system weak reach A introduction. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table when weak reach A is introduced in the weak reach system. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table when weak reach A is introduced in the weak reach system. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table when weak reach A is introduced in the weak reach system. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table when weak reach A is introduced in the weak reach system. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table when weak reach A is introduced in the weak reach system. A diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table for the weak reach system weak reach B introduction. A diagram showing the settings of a child table for the weak reach system weak reach B introduction. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table when weak reach B is introduced in the weak reach system. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table when weak reach B is introduced in the weak reach system. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table when weak reach B is introduced in the weak reach system. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table when weak reach B is introduced in the weak reach system. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table when weak reach B is introduced in the weak reach system. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table when weak reach B is introduced in the weak reach system. A diagram showing the settings of the parent table of strong reach common titles. A diagram showing the settings of the child table of the strong reach common title. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table of strong reach common titles. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table of strong reach common titles. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table of strong reach common titles. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table of strong reach common titles. A diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table for the strong reach system strong reach A introduction. A diagram showing the setting contents of a child table for the strong reach system strong reach A introduction. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table when the strong reach system strong reach A is introduced. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table when the strong reach system strong reach A is introduced. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table when the strong reach system strong reach A is introduced. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table when the strong reach system strong reach A is introduced. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table when the strong reach system strong reach A is introduced. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table when the strong reach system strong reach A is introduced. This figure shows the setting contents of the parent table for the strong reach system strong reach B introduction. A diagram showing the settings of a child table for the strong reach system strong reach B introduction. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table when strong reach B is introduced in the strong reach system. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table when strong reach B is introduced in the strong reach system. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table when strong reach B is introduced in the strong reach system. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table when strong reach B is introduced in the strong reach system. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table when strong reach B is introduced in the strong reach system. This figure shows the settings of the parent table for the introduction of the strongest reach title in the strongest reach series. A diagram showing the settings of a child table for the strongest reach type strongest reach title introduction. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when the strongest reach title is introduced in the strongest reach series. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when the strongest reach title is introduced in the strongest reach series. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when the strongest reach title is introduced in the strongest reach series. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when the strongest reach title is introduced in the strongest reach series. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when the strongest reach title is introduced in the strongest reach series. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when the strongest reach title is introduced in the strongest reach series. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when the strongest reach title is introduced in the strongest reach series. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when the strongest reach title is introduced in the strongest reach series. This figure shows the settings of the grandchild table when the strongest reach title is introduced in the strongest reach series. A diagram showing the settings of the parent table of high base reach common titles. A diagram showing the settings of the child table of the high base reach common title. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table of high base reach common titles. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table of high base reach common titles. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table of high base reach common titles. This figure shows the settings of the parent table for the introduction of high base reach system Reach A. A diagram showing the settings of the child table for the introduction of high base reach system reach A. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table when high base reach system reach A is introduced. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table when high base reach system reach A is introduced. A diagram showing the settings of the grandchild table when high base reach system reach A is introduced. This figure shows the settings of the parent table for the introduction of high base reach system Reach B. A diagram showing the settings of the child table for the introduction of high base reach system reach B. A diagram showing the settings of the parent table for the introduction of high base reach system Reach C. A diagram showing the settings of the child table for the introduction of high base reach system reach C. A diagram showing the settings of the parent table for the introduction of high base reach system reach D. A diagram showing the settings of the child table for the introduction of high base reach system reach D. This figure shows the relationship between the timing and brightness data that make up the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances. 1 is a front view showing an amusement machine according to an embodiment. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine. A block diagram showing the circuit configuration of the dispensing control board. FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an example of a performance control command. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern determination table. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table, (B) and (C) are explanatory diagrams showing a jackpot type determination table, and (D) is an explanatory diagram of a jackpot type. A schematic diagram showing the structure of the special variable winning ball device. An explanatory diagram of the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a data retention area for game control. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the data holding area for performance control, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the command buffer received at the time of starting winning. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of a display monitor. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of a display monitor. 13 is a flowchart showing a game control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing for game control. 10 is a flowchart showing a power interruption detection process. 13 is a flowchart showing a game stop monitoring process. 13 is a flowchart showing a special symbol process. 13 is a flowchart showing the start winning determination process. 13 is a flowchart showing the process of determining random numbers when a prize is won. 13 is a flowchart showing normal processing of special symbols. 13 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation pattern determination process. 13 is a flowchart showing a special symbol stopping process. A flowchart showing the jackpot end processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a game stop process. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of game stop timing. 13A is an explanatory diagram for when an error occurs, and FIG. 13B is an explanatory diagram for when the MY counter value reaches a specified value. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a control signal output from the game control board to the payout control board, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a control command transmitted and received between the game control board and the payout control board. 2 is a block diagram showing signal lines and the like used for transmitting and receiving control signals and control commands; A sequence diagram showing the transmission and reception of signals between the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer during normal operation. 13 is a flowchart showing a payout control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing a dispensing control timer interrupt process. FIG. 11 is a timing diagram for explaining communication between a card unit and a pachinko game machine. A timing diagram showing the transmission and reception of signals between the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer during normal operation. 13 is a flowchart showing a main processing for performance control. 13 is a flowchart showing the performance control process. 13 is a flowchart showing a pre-reading notice setting process. This is an explanatory diagram of whether or not a pre-reading preview performance is executed and the determination ratio of each display pattern. 13 is a flowchart showing a game stop indication display process. 13 is a flowchart showing a right-hit prompting display process. 13 is a flowchart showing a variable display start setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing the preview performance determination process. An explanatory diagram of whether or not a preview performance will be executed and the decision ratio of each performance pattern. A flowchart showing the special chart winning waiting process. 13 is a flowchart showing an ending production process. 13 is a flowchart showing a game stop presentation process. This is an explanatory diagram of the execution period and content of the performance during the pattern determination period, the ending performance, and the game stop performance. This is a timing chart showing the performance during the second pattern determination period. 11 is a timing chart showing an ending performance. 11 is a timing chart showing a game stop effect. An explanatory diagram showing the display mode at the start of a jackpot game. An explanatory diagram showing the display mode when controlled from the time-saving state or the special probability state to the normal state. An explanatory diagram showing the display mode of the game stop suggestion effect. An explanatory diagram showing the display mode of the game stop suggestion effect. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the display mode when the game is controlled to a stopped state. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the display mode when the game is controlled to a stopped state. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the display mode of the customer waiting demo performance. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a display mode of a game stop effect as a modified example. An explanatory diagram showing the display mode of the second pattern determination period performance as a modified example. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a display mode of a degree display LED as a modified example. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a display mode of a display monitor as a modified example. FIG. A timing diagram showing transmission and reception of signals between a game control microcomputer and a payout control microcomputer as a modified example. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the display mode when the pachinko game machine is started up in a game stopped state. FIG. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table in a modified example. (A) is an explanatory diagram of what happens when an error occurs in the modified example, (B) is an explanatory diagram of what happens when the MY counter value reaches a specified value in the modified example, and (C) is an explanatory diagram of the setting change state in the modified example.

[Form 1]
The gaming machine of form 1-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a fluctuation pattern is determined from among a plurality of fluctuation patterns including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command for designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of the control of the advantageous state is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
It is possible to display a variable display of decorative identification information (decorative pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (first special pattern, second special pattern),
The feature of this invention is that decorative identification information (decorative pattern) is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the specific reach (super reach performance), and in the title display part in the specific reach, a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach is displayed using the display position of the decorative identification information (decorative pattern) that has become the reach state.
According to this feature, when decorative identification information is displayed in a reach state, the player will pay attention to which decorative identification information has reached the reach state. Therefore, by displaying the title display corresponding to the specific reach using the display position of the decorative identification information that has reached the reach state in the title display part in the specific reach, the player can naturally pay attention to the title display, and as a result, the title display can be performed preferably.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 1-1,
The decorative identification information is displayed in a reach state of a first size (decorative pattern (large)) before the title display part in the specific reach (super reach performance), and then the decorative identification information (decorative pattern (large)) displayed in the reach state is displayed in a second size (decorative pattern (small)) smaller than the first size, and the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach performance) is displayed using the display position of the decorative identification information (decorative pattern (small)) displayed in the second size.
According to this feature, the decorative identification information displayed in a first size becomes a second size, thereby attracting the player's attention, and by using the display position of the decorative identification information of the second size to display a title display corresponding to a specific reach, it becomes easier to draw attention to the title display.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 1-1 or 1-2,
In the title display part in the specific reach, at the timing when the decorative identification information (decorative pattern) which has become the reach state is displayed, a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative identification information (decorative pattern) which has become the reach state.
According to this feature, at the timing when decorative identification information that has become a reach state is displayed in the title display part in a specific reach, the title display corresponding to the specific reach is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative identification information that has become the reach state, making it easier to draw attention to the title display.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-4 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1-1 to 1-3,
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) and a second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) which has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach,
The title display corresponding to the first reach and the title display corresponding to the second reach are characterized in that they appear overlapping with one of the decorative identification information (the decorative pattern on the left) of the decorative identification information that has reached the reach state.
According to this feature, the title display corresponding to the first reach and the title display corresponding to the second reach appear overlapping with one of the decorative identification information of the decorative identification information that has reached the reach state, making it easier to draw attention to the title displays.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-5 is the gaming machine according to aspect 1-4,
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a third reach (low base strongest reach effect) having a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect),
The title display corresponding to the third reach is characterized in that it appears overlapping both decoration identifying information (decorative patterns on both sides) that have entered the reach state.
According to this feature, the title display corresponding to the third reach, which has a higher expectation of being controlled to a more favorable state than the first reach and the second reach, appears overlapping with both decorative identification information that have reached the reach state, so that the title display corresponding to the third reach can be displayed in a more impactful manner.

The gaming machine of aspect 1-6 is the gaming machine according to aspect 1-5,
The title display corresponding to the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect), the title display corresponding to the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) and the title display corresponding to the third reach (low base strongest reach effect) are characterized in that they appear overlapping with one of the decorative identification information (decorative pattern on the left) or both of the decorative identification information (decorative patterns on both sides) of the decorative identification information that has reached the reach state, and are then displayed in a fixed position and are displayed overlapping with part of the decorative identification information (decorative patterns on both sides) that has reached the reach state even during the period in which they are displayed in the fixed position.
According to this feature, it becomes easier to draw attention to the title display even after the title display has been displayed in its fixed position.

[Form 2]
The gaming machine of form 2-1 is,
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means,
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not the game medium (game ball) is controlled to the advantageous state when the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-2 to PB1-10) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 to PB2-12) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state are selected as one of the fluctuation patterns;
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-JA and PB1-JB) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2 and PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-2 to PB1-10) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-4 to PA2-12) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title character) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until the result of the control of the advantageous state is notified,
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title character) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until the result of the advantageous state is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
It is possible to display a variable display of decorative identification information (decorative pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (first special pattern, second special pattern),
A first decoration identification information (an odd-numbered decorative pattern) is displayed in a reach state before a title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), and a title display (title characters) is displayed in the title display part so as to use the display position of the first decoration identification information (an odd-numbered decorative pattern) that has become the reach state;
In the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), the second decoration identification information (even numbered decoration pattern) is displayed in a reach state before the title display part, and in the title display part, a title display (title characters) is displayed so as to use the display position of the second decoration identification information (even numbered decoration pattern) that has become the reach state,
The first decoration identification information (odd numbered decorative pattern) is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance), and in the title display part, a title display (title characters) is displayed so as to use the display position of the first decoration identification information (odd numbered decorative pattern) that has become the reach state,
The present invention is characterized in that the second decorative identification information (even numbered decorative pattern) is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance), and in the title display part, the title display (title characters) is displayed so as to use the display position of the second decorative identification information (even numbered decorative pattern) that has become the reach state.
According to this feature, when decorative identification information is displayed in a reach state, the player will pay attention to which decorative identification information has reached the reach state. Therefore, by displaying the title display corresponding to the first reach and the second reach using the display position of the decorative identification information that has reached the reach state in the title display part in the first reach and the second reach, the player can naturally pay attention to the title display, and as a result, the title display can be performed preferably.

The gaming machine of aspect 2-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 2-1,
A feature of this invention is that the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) differs between when the first decorative identification information (odd-numbered decorative pattern) is displayed in a reach state and when the second decorative identification information (even-numbered decorative pattern) is displayed in a reach state.
According to this feature, when decorative identification information is displayed in a reach state, the expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state differs depending on which decorative identification information has reached the reach state, making it easier to draw attention to the title display.

[Form 3]
The gaming machine of form 3-1 is,
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means,
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not the game medium (game ball) is controlled to the advantageous state when the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-2 to PB1-10) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 to PB2-12) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, a fifth fluctuation pattern (PB1-11 to PB1-13) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a sixth fluctuation pattern (PA2-13 to PB2-15) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state are selected as one of the fluctuation patterns;
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-JA and PB1-JB) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2 and PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-2 to PB1-10) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-4 to PA2-12) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the fifth variation pattern is determined, a fifth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-11 to PB1-13) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the sixth variation pattern is determined, a sixth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-13 to PA2-15) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the fifth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (low base strongest reach presentation) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the sixth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (low base strongest reach presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title character) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until the result of the control of the advantageous state is notified,
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title character) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until the result of the advantageous state is notified,
The third reach (low-base strongest reach presentation) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the third reach, and an introduction part until the result of the advantageous state is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
It is possible to display a variable display of decorative identification information (decorative pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (first special pattern, second special pattern),
A first decoration identification information (an odd-numbered decorative pattern) is displayed in a reach state before a title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), and a title display (title characters) is displayed in the title display part so as to use the display position of the first decoration identification information (an odd-numbered decorative pattern) that has become the reach state;
In the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), the second decoration identification information (even numbered decoration pattern) is displayed in a reach state before the title display part, and in the title display part, a title display (title characters) is displayed so as to use the display position of the second decoration identification information (even numbered decoration pattern) that has become the reach state,
The first decoration identification information (odd numbered decorative pattern) is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance), and in the title display part, a title display (title characters) is displayed so as to use the display position of the first decoration identification information (odd numbered decorative pattern) that has become the reach state,
The second decoration identification information (even numbered decorative pattern) is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance), and in the title display part, a title display (title characters) is displayed so as to use the display position of the second decoration identification information (even numbered decorative pattern) that has become the reach state,
The first decoration identification information (odd numbered decorative pattern) is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the third reach (low base strongest reach performance), and in the title display part, a title display (title characters) is displayed so as to use the display position of the first decoration identification information (odd numbered decorative pattern) that has become the reach state,
The present invention is characterized in that the second decorative identification information (even numbered decorative pattern) is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the third reach (low base strongest reach performance), and in the title display part, the title display (title characters) is displayed so as to use the display position of the second decorative identification information (even numbered decorative pattern) that has become the reach state.
According to this feature, when the decorative identification information is displayed in a reach state, the player will pay attention to which decorative identification information has reached the reach state. Therefore, by displaying the title displays corresponding to the first reach, second reach, and third reach using the display position of the decorative identification information that has reached the reach state in the title display part in the first reach, second reach, and third reach, the player can naturally pay attention to the title displays, and as a result, the title display can be performed preferably.

[Form 4]
The gaming machine of form 4-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120);
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a fluctuation pattern is determined from among a plurality of fluctuation patterns including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command for designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of the control of the advantageous state is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
It is possible to display a variable display of decorative identification information (decorative pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (first special pattern, second special pattern),
A decoration identification information (decorative pattern) is displayed in a reach state before a title display part in the specific reach (super reach performance), and a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach is displayed in the title display part in the specific reach so as to use a display position of the decoration identification information (decorative pattern) that has become the reach state,
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
Controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (a weak reach common title, a strong reach common title, and a high base reach common title);
In the introduction part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of weak reach A of weak reach system, introduction of weak reach B of weak reach system, introduction of strong reach A of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach B of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach C of strong reach system, introduction of reach A of high base reach system, introduction of reach B of high base reach system, introduction of reach C of high base reach system, introduction of reach D of high base reach system).
According to this feature, when the decoration identification information is displayed in a reach state, the player pays attention to which decoration identification information has become the reach state, so by displaying the title display corresponding to the specific reach using the display position of the decoration identification information that has become the reach state in the title display part in the specific reach, the player can naturally pay attention to the title display as well. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display. As a result of these, the title display can be performed in a suitable manner.

[Form 5]
The gaming machine of form 5-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not the game medium (game ball) is controlled to the advantageous state when the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-5 to PB1-7) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-7 to 9) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state are selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns;
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-JB) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern (the variation pattern designation command designating PA2-3) is determined, a second command is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-5 to PB7) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-7 to PA2-9) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the first reach (low base weak reach B presentation),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach B presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the second reach (low base strong reach B presentation),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach B presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach B performance) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until the result of the advantageous state is notified,
The second reach (low base strong reach B performance) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until the result of the advantageous state is notified,
The second reach (low base strong reach B effect) has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach (low base weak reach B effect),
The first reach (low base weak reach B effect) and the second reach (low base strong reach B effect) are reaches in which a plurality of characters are used,
The first reach (low base weak reach B performance) is a reach in which a first character in the first reach (ally character "Yume Yume") and a second character in the first reach (enemy character "Boingo") are used, and it is notified that the first character (ally character "Yume Yume") will be controlled to the advantageous state,
The second reach (low base strong reach B performance) is a reach in which a first character in the second reach (ally characters "Jam" and "Nana") and a second character in the second reach (enemy character "Robo") are used, and it is notified that the first character (ally characters "Jam" and "Nana") will be controlled to the advantageous state.
The display means (image display device 5)
The introductory part of the second reach (low base strong reach B performance) starts with a display in which the first character in the second reach (ally characters "Jam" and "Nana") is arranged in the foreground and the second character in the second reach (enemy character "Robo") is arranged in the background,
The introductory part of the first reach (low base weak reach B presentation) is characterized in that it starts with a display in which the first character in the first reach (ally character "Yume Yume") is not in the foreground and the second character in the second reach (enemy character "Boingo") is not in the background.
According to this feature, for the second reach, which has a relatively high level of expectation, the first character, which is notified that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, starts from an arrangement in which the first character is at the front and the second character is at the back, allowing the player to empathize and making it easier for the player to intuitively recognize that the level of expectation is high, resulting in an optimal title display.

The gaming machine of aspect 5-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 5-1,
The first characters are characters who receive benefits if they win a battle (ally characters “Jam” and “Nana”),
The second character is a character (enemy character "robot") to which no benefit is given if the second character wins a battle,
At the start of the introductory part of the second reach (low base strong reach B presentation), the first characters (ally characters "Jam" and "Nana") are displayed in a position in front with their backs to you, and the second character (enemy character "Robo") is displayed in a position in the back facing you, with the first and second characters facing each other.
According to this feature, for the second reach, which has a relatively high expectation, the player's direction and the first character's direction are the same, making it easier for the player to empathize with the character and for the player to recognize that the expectation is high.

The gaming machine of aspect 5-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 5-1 or 5-2,
In the introductory part of the second reach (low base strong reach B presentation), the first character (ally characters "Jam" and "Nana") and the second character (enemy character "Robo") are displayed at a position including the display area in which the title display (title characters) was displayed in the title display part.
According to this feature, when a player who has been paying attention to the title display disappears, his or her gaze is naturally drawn to the first and second characters.

[Form 6]
The gaming machine of form 6-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not the game medium (game ball) is controlled to the advantageous state when the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-2 to PB1-10) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 to PB2-12) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state are selected as one of the fluctuation patterns;
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-JA and PB1-JB) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2 and PA2-3) is determined, a second command is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-2 to PB1-10) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-4 to PA2-12) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title character) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until the result of the control of the advantageous state is notified,
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title character) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until the result of the advantageous state is notified,
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) has a higher expectation of being controlled into the advantageous state (jackpot game state) than the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) has a longer execution time than the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
The first reach and the second reach are reaches in which dialogue subtitles are used,
The display means (image display device 5)
In the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), a title display (title characters) and dialogue subtitles are displayed,
In the introductory part of the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), the dialogue subtitles that were displayed in the title display part in the first reach are continuously displayed,
In the title display part of the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance), dialogue subtitles are not displayed, but the title display (title text) is displayed.
According to this feature, during the second reach, which has a relatively high expectation and a long execution time, the title display and dialogue subtitles are displayed so as not to overlap as much as possible, while during the first reach, which has a relatively low expectation and a short execution time, even if the dialogue subtitles and the title display overlap, the title display is ended first so that the player can also focus on the dialogue subtitles. This makes it possible to provide the title display and dialogue subtitles to the player in an optimal manner, and as a result, the title display can be performed in an optimal manner.

The gaming machine of aspect 6-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 6-1,
When a title display (title characters) and dialogue subtitles corresponding to the first reach are displayed in the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), the performance scene is not switched in the subsequent introductory part until the display of the dialogue subtitles that were displayed simultaneously with the title display (title characters) ends.
According to this feature, when a title display corresponding to the first reach and a dialogue subtitle are displayed in the title display part in the first reach, in the subsequent introductory part, the scene of the performance does not change until the display of the dialogue subtitle that was displayed simultaneously with the title display ends, so that attention can be drawn to the title display and then to the dialogue subtitle.

The gaming machine of aspect 6-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 6-1 or 6-2,
This is characterized in that when a title display (title characters) and dialogue subtitles corresponding to the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) are displayed in the title display part in the first reach, audio corresponding to the dialogue subtitles is output, while audio corresponding to the title display (title characters) is not output.
According to this feature, when a title display and dialogue subtitles are displayed simultaneously, audio corresponding to the dialogue subtitles is output while audio corresponding to the title display is not output, making it easier to hear the audio corresponding to the dialogue subtitles.

[Form 7]
The gaming machine of form 7-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120);
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When a gaming medium (a gaming ball) enters a start area (a first start winning hole, a second start winning hole), it is determined whether or not the gaming medium is controlled to the advantageous state (a big win gaming state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a fluctuation pattern is determined from among a plurality of fluctuation patterns including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command for designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that a specific reach (low base strongest reach effect, high base reach A to D effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base strongest reach performance, high base reach A to D performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base strongest reach performance, high base reach A to D performance) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of the control of the advantageous state is notified,
The title display of the specific reach (low base strongest reach performance, high base reach A to D performance) is composed of multiple characters ("Catch the Bakuchu with 6 people!", "Battle Reach A (Battle Reach B to D)"),
The display means (image display device 5) starts displaying the title display (title characters) of the specific reach in a first size (enlarged size) in which only a part of the multiple characters is visible in the title display part in the specific reach, and displays the title display (title characters) of the specific reach so that the display size is gradually reduced from the first size to a second size (reduced size) in which all of the multiple characters are visible,
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
Controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (strongest reach title of the strongest reach system, high base reach common title of the high base reach system);
In the introduction part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of strongest reach system strongest reach, introduction of high base reach system reach A (introduction of high base reach system reach B, introduction of high base reach system reach C, introduction of high base reach system reach D)).
According to this feature, in the title display part in the specific reach, the display is performed in a first size in which only some of the characters are visible, and then the size gradually decreases until all the characters are visible, so that the player can focus on the title display. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display. As a result of these, the title display can be performed in a suitable manner.

The gaming machine of aspect 7-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 7-1,
Before the title display part of the specific reach (low-base strongest reach performance) starts, a movable object (movable body 32) is moved so as to overlap with the front side of the display means (image display device 5),
During the period from when the movable object moves to when it returns to its initial position (falling effect), a background corresponding to the movement of the movable object (background dedicated to the falling effect) is displayed, and when the movable object returns to its initial position, a title display (title characters) is displayed at a first size (enlarged size) in which not all of the multiple characters are visible and the display area of the display means is filled so that the background becomes unvisible, and then a title display at a second size (reduced size) and a background corresponding to the title display (background dedicated to the title display) are displayed.
According to this feature, the reach title display method creates an impact while at the same time switching the background without creating an awkward feeling, allowing the title display to be viewed favorably by the player.

[Form 8]
The gaming machine of form 8-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120);
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a fluctuation pattern is determined from among a plurality of fluctuation patterns including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command for designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that a specific reach (low base strongest reach effect, high base reach A to D effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base strongest reach performance, high base reach A to D performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base strongest reach performance, high base reach A to D performance) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of the control of the advantageous state is notified,
The title display of the specific reach (low base strongest reach performance, high base reach A to D performance) is composed of multiple characters ("Catch the Bakuchu with 6 people!", "Battle Reach A (Battle Reach B to D)"),
The display means (image display device 5) displays, in the title display part in the specific reach, a plurality of characters from a state where the plurality of characters are displayed (a state where the plurality of characters are displayed in a fixed position at a reduced size) in an enlarged manner (enlarged until the entire display area is filled with a portion of the title characters), thereby ending the title display part, and displays a display corresponding to the introduction part in the specific reach (the background at the start of the introduction part) so as to be visible;
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
Controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (strongest reach title of the strongest reach system, high base reach common title of the high base reach system);
In the introduction part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of strongest reach system strongest reach, introduction of high base reach system reach A (introduction of high base reach system reach B, introduction of high base reach system reach C, introduction of high base reach system reach D)).
According to this feature, the player pays attention to the title display during the title display part, and the title display can be used appropriately to seamlessly switch to the display corresponding to the next introduction part. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display. As a result, the title display can be performed in a suitable manner.

[Mode 9]
The gaming machine of form 9-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not the game medium (game ball) is controlled to the advantageous state when the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-2 to PB1-10) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 to PB2-12) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state are selected as one of the fluctuation patterns;
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-JA and PB1-JB) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2 and PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-2 to PB1-10) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-4 to PA2-12) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title character) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until the result of the control of the advantageous state is notified,
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title character) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until the result of the advantageous state is notified,
The execution time (T1-1 to T2) of the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is different from the execution time (T2-1 to T2-3) of the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance),
The title display part is composed of a first part (title start period) from when the title display starts to when it is displayed at a fixed position, a second part (title display period) that is displayed at the fixed position, and a third part (title end period) from when the title display starts to when it is displayed at the fixed position to when it is ended,
The display means (image display device 5)
In a title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), a title display (title characters) is displayed so that the second part (title display period) is longer than the first part (title start period) and the third part (title end period), and the first part (title start period) is longer than the third part (title end period);
In the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance), the title display (title characters) is displayed so that the second part (title display period) is longer than the first part (title start period) and the third part (title end period), and the first part (title start period) is longer than the third part (title end period).
According to this feature, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the first reach and the second reach, the second part displayed in the fixed position is made the longest, so that attention can be drawn to the type of title display. Also, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the first reach and the second reach, the first part until it is displayed in the fixed position is made longer than the third part from the display in the fixed position until the display ends, so that it is possible to incite which title display will be displayed. Also, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the first reach and the second reach, the title display part can be made easier to understand by making the relationship of the execution times of the first part, second part, and third part the same.

[Form 10]
The gaming machine of form 10-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not the game medium (game ball) is controlled to the advantageous state when the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (a jackpot fluctuation pattern in a normal state) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (a miss fluctuation pattern in a normal state) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (a jackpot fluctuation pattern in a high probability state) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern (a miss fluctuation pattern in a high probability state) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state are selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns,
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern in a normal state) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating a deviation variation pattern in a normal state) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot variation pattern in a probability variation state) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command for designating a miss variation pattern in a probability variation state) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the first reach (super reach presentation in the normal state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (super reach presentation in a normal state) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the advantageous state will be controlled in the second reach (super reach performance in the probability variable state),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (super reach presentation in a probability variable state) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (super reach effect in a normal state) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until the result of the advantageous state is notified,
The second reach (super reach effect in a probability variable state) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until the result of the control of the advantageous state is notified,
The execution time (T1-1 to T2-1 to T3, T3) of the title display part in the first reach (super reach performance in normal state) is different from the execution time (T4) of the title display part in the second reach (super reach performance in the probability change state),
The first reach (super reach effect in a normal state) is a reach executed in a normal state, and the second reach (super reach effect in a probability variable state) is a reach executed in a special state (probability variable state) that is more advantageous than the normal state,
The title display part is composed of a first part (title start period) from when the title display starts to when it is displayed at a fixed position, a second part (title display period) that is displayed at the fixed position, and a third part (title end period) from when the title display starts to when it is displayed at the fixed position to when it is ended,
The display means (image display device 5)
displaying a title display (title characters) in a title display part in the first reach (super reach performance in a normal state) such that the second part (title display period) is longer than the first part (title start period) and the third part (title end period), and the first part (title start period) is longer than the third part (title end period);
In the title display part in the second reach (super reach performance in a probability variable state), the title display (title characters) is displayed so that the second part (title display period) is longer than the first part (title start period) and the third part (title end period), and the first part (title start period) is longer than the third part (title end period).
According to this feature, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the first reach executed in the normal state and the second reach executed in the special state, the second part displayed in the fixed position is made the longest, so that the type of title display can be drawn to. Also, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the first reach executed in the normal state and the second reach executed in the special state, the first part until it is displayed in the fixed position is made longer than the third part from the display of the fixed position to the end of the display, so that it is possible to inspire which title display will be displayed. Also, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the first reach executed in the normal state and the second reach executed in the special state, the title display part can be made easier to understand by making the relationship between the execution times of the first part, the second part, and the third part common.

The gaming machine of aspect 10-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 10-1,
The execution time (T4) of the title display part in the second reach (super reach performance in a special probability state) is shorter than the execution time (T1-1 to 2, T2-1 to 3, T3) of the title display part in the first reach (super reach performance in a normal state).
According to this feature, the execution time of the title display part in the second reach executed in the special state is relatively short, allowing the special state to progress at a good pace, while the execution time of the title display part in the first reach executed in the normal state is relatively long, allowing for strong excitement.

[Form 11]
The gaming machine of form 11-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120);
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a fluctuation pattern is determined from among a plurality of fluctuation patterns including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command for designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of the control of the advantageous state is notified,
The title display part is composed of a first part (title start period) from when the title display starts to when it is displayed at a fixed position, a second part (title display period) that is displayed at the fixed position, and a third part (title end period) from when the title display starts to when it is displayed at the fixed position to when it is ended,
the display means (image display device 5) displays a title display (title characters) in a title display part in the specific reach (super reach effect) such that the second part (title display period) is longer than the first part (title start period) and the third part (title end period), and the first part (title start period) is longer than the third part (title end period);
Controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (a weak reach common title, a strong reach common title, and a high base reach common title);
In the introduction part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of weak reach A of weak reach system, introduction of weak reach B of weak reach system, introduction of strong reach A of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach B of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach C of strong reach system, introduction of reach A of high base reach system, introduction of reach B of high base reach system, introduction of reach C of high base reach system, introduction of reach D of high base reach system).
According to this feature, the second part displayed at the fixed position is made the longest, thereby drawing attention to the type of title display. Also, the first part until it is displayed at the fixed position is made longer than the third part from the display at the fixed position until the display ends, thereby making it possible to arouse interest in which title display is to be displayed. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for the title display that is different from the luminance data table for the introductory part, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display. As a result of these, the title display can be performed in a suitable manner.

[Form 12]
The gaming machine of form 12-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120);
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state are selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns,
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command for designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that a specific reach (low base strong reach A to C performance, low base strongest reach performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C performance, low base strongest reach performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base strong reach A to C performance, low base strongest reach performance) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of the control of the advantageous state is notified,
The display means includes:
It is possible to display the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach effects) in a first mode (white mode) and the title display corresponding to the specific reach in a second mode (red mode) having a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than in the first mode,
In the title display part (title display part shown in FIG. 11-43) in the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C performance, low base strongest reach performance), an expectation indication corresponding to the specific reach is displayed in a first size, and then a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach is displayed in a second size larger than the first size,
When the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach is displayed in the first mode (white mode) and when the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach is displayed in the second mode (red mode), the expectation degree suggestion display is displayed in a common mode;
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
Controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (strongest reach title of the strongest reach type, strong reach common title of the strong reach type);
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (strong reach system strong reach C introduction, strongest reach system strongest reach introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction).
According to this feature, the title display corresponding to the specific reach is larger in size than the expectation suggestion display, and since the expectation is suggested by its appearance, it attracts the player's attention, but by displaying the expectation suggestion display before the title display, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the expectation suggestion first. Also, since the expectation suggestion display is performed in a common manner whether the title display is displayed in the first manner or the second manner, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the appearance of the subsequent title display.

[Form 13]
The gaming machine of form 13-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120);
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-5 to PB1-7) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-7 to PB2-9) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-8 to PB1-10) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-10 to PB2-12) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state are selected as one of the fluctuation patterns;
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-5 to PB7) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-7 to PA2-9) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-8 to PB1-10) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-10 to PA2-12) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the first reach (low base strong reach B presentation),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base strong reach B presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the second reach (low base strong reach C presentation),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach C presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base strong reach B performance) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until the result of the advantageous state is notified,
The second reach (low base strong reach C performance) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until the result of the advantageous state is notified,
The second reach (low base strong reach C effect) has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach (low base strong reach B effect),
The display means includes:
In the title display part of the first reach (low base strong reach B performance), an expectation indication is displayed in the first mode (3.5 stars),
In the title display part of the second reach (low base strong reach C performance), the expectation indication display is displayed in the second mode (four stars),
A highlight display is displayed so as to be common between the expectation suggestion display in the title display part of the first reach (low base strong reach B performance) and the expectation suggestion display in the title display part of the second reach (low base strong reach C performance),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
Controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
In the title display part of the first reach (low base strong reach B performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (strong reach system strong reach B title) for the title display part of the first reach,
In the title display part of the second reach (low base strong reach C performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (strong reach system strong reach C title) for the title display part of the second reach,
In the introduction part of the first reach (low base strong reach B performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (strong reach system strong reach B introduction) for the introduction part of the first reach,
In the introductory part of the second reach (low base strong reach C presentation), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (strong reach system strong reach C introduction) for the introductory part of the second reach.
According to this feature, development costs can be reduced by using the same highlighting whether the expectation level indication is displayed in the first mode in the title display part in the first reach or the second mode in the title display part in the second reach. Also, in the title display parts in the first reach and the second reach, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display of the first reach and the second reach that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part of the first reach and the second reach, so that the light emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light emitting mode according to the title display. As a result of these, the title display can be made to be suitable.

The gaming machine of aspect 13-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 13-1,
The expectation indication display is composed of a plurality of objects (star-shaped objects),
The first reach (low base strong reach B performance) is indicated by N (N is an integer) + 0.5 (3.5) objects,
The second reach (low base strong reach C performance) is indicated by N+1 (4) objects.
The expectation indication is characterized in that each object (star-shaped object) is highlighted, and the highlighting is performed in a common manner whether one object is highlighted or 0.5 object is highlighted.
According to this feature, whether highlighting one object or 0.5 objects, the highlighting is performed in a common manner, thereby reducing development costs.

The gaming machine of aspect 13-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 13-2,
The expectation degree suggestion display is characterized in that the time during which one object (star-shaped object) is highlighted and the time during which 0.5 object (star-shaped object) is highlighted are the same.
According to this feature, the time during which one object is highlighted and the time during which 0.5 objects are highlighted are made common, thereby making it possible to reduce development costs.

The gaming machine of aspect 13-4 is the gaming machine according to aspect 13-2 or 13-3,
The expectation level indication display is characterized in that a common emphasis sound (expectation level indication sound) is output whether one object (star-shaped object) is highlighted or 0.5 object (star-shaped object) is highlighted.
According to this feature, the same sound is output whether one object is highlighted or 0.5 objects are highlighted, thereby reducing development costs.

[Form 14]
The gaming machine of form 14-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a fluctuation pattern is determined from among a plurality of fluctuation patterns including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command for designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that a specific reach (low base strong reach A to C performance, low base strongest reach performance, high base reach A to D performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C performance, low base strongest reach performance, high base reach A to D performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base strong reach A to C performance, low base strongest reach performance, high base reach A to D performance) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of the control of the advantageous state is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
In the title display part of the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C performance, low base strongest reach performance, high base reach A to D performance), an expectation suggestion display consisting of a plurality of objects (star-shaped objects) can be displayed,
In the expectation indication display in the title display part of the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach effect, high base reach A to D effects), the first object (star-shaped object) is highlighted, then, while continuing the highlighting of the first object (star-shaped object), the second object (star-shaped object) is highlighted, and then, the highlighting of the first object (star-shaped object) is ended and the third object (star-shaped object) is highlighted.
According to this feature, in the title display part in a specific reach, an expectation suggestion display consisting of a plurality of objects can be displayed, and in the expectation suggestion display, highlighting of the second object begins before highlighting of the first object ends, but highlighting of the third object does not begin until highlighting of the first object ends, making it easier to recognize the number of objects suggesting expectation.

The gaming machine of aspect 14-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 14-1,
The expectation level indication display is characterized in that an emphasis sound (expectation level indication sound) is output each time an object (star-shaped object) is highlighted, and after the output of the emphasis sound (expectation level indication sound) for the highlighting of one object (star-shaped object) has been completed, an emphasis sound (expectation level indication sound) for the highlighting of the next object is output.
According to this feature, the emphasis sound for highlighting one object and the emphasis sound for highlighting the next object do not overlap, making it easier to recognize the number of objects suggesting the degree of expectation.

The gaming machine of aspect 14-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 14-1 or 14-2,
The expectation indication is composed of a plurality of objects (star-shaped objects) and characters (characters "expectation");
The object (star-shaped object) is highlighted in a size that overlaps with the text (text "Expectation").
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to both the multiple objects and characters that make up the expectation level suggestion display by highlighting the objects.

[Form 15]
The gaming machine of form 15-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120);
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a fluctuation pattern is determined from among a plurality of fluctuation patterns including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command for designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that a specific reach (low base strong reach A to C performance, low base strongest reach performance, high base reach A to D performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C performance, low base strongest reach performance, high base reach A to D performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base strong reach A to C performance, low base strongest reach performance, high base reach A to D performance) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of the control of the advantageous state is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
A plurality of pending displays corresponding to variable displays that have not yet started can be displayed;
In the title display part of the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C performance, low base strongest reach performance, high base reach A to D performance), an expectation suggestion display consisting of a plurality of objects (star-shaped objects) can be displayed,
In the title display part of the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C performance, low base strongest reach performance, high base reach A to D performance), the hold display is not displayed at the same time as the expectation suggestion display,
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
Controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (a strong reach type common title, a strongest reach type strongest reach title, and a high base reach type common title);
In the introduction part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of strong reach A of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach B of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach C of strong reach system, introduction of strongest reach system, introduction of reach A of high base reach system, introduction of reach B of high base reach system, introduction of reach C of high base reach system, introduction of reach D of high base reach system).
According to this feature, in the title display part in a specific reach, an expectation indication consisting of a plurality of objects is displayed, while by not displaying the hold indication at the same time as the expectation indication, it is possible to prevent the hold indication from being mistakenly recognized as an expectation indication. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display. As a result of these, the title display can be performed in a suitable manner.

The gaming machine of aspect 15-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 15-1,
The maximum number of active displays corresponding to the pending display and the started variable display is characterized by being equal to the maximum number (five) of objects (star-shaped objects) constituting the expectation indication display.
According to this feature, even if a specific reach occurs when the maximum number of pending displays and active displays are displayed, it is possible to prevent the pending displays and active displays from being mistakenly recognized as the maximum number of objects that make up the expectation indication display.

The gaming machine of aspect 15-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 15-1 or 15-2,
The hold display is terminated when the display means (image display device 5) displays in monochrome before the title display part starts.
This feature allows the hold display to end without any awkwardness.

[Form 16]
The gaming machine of form 16-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not the game medium (game ball) is controlled to the advantageous state when the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-2 to 4/PB1-14) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 to 6/PA2-16) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-5 to 7/PB1-15) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-7 to 9/PA2-17) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, a fifth fluctuation pattern (PB1-8 to 10/PB1-16) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a sixth fluctuation pattern (PA2-10 to 12/PA2-18) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state are selected from among a plurality of fluctuation patterns;
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-2 to PB1-4/PB1-14) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-4 to PA2-6/PA2-16) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-5 to PB1-7/PB1-15) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-7 to PA2-9/PA2-17) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the fifth variation pattern is determined, a fifth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-8 to PB1-10/PB1-16) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the sixth variation pattern is determined, a sixth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-10 to 12/PA2-18) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base strong reach A performance/high base reach A performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base strong reach A presentation/high base reach A presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the second reach (low base strong reach B performance/high base reach B performance),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach B presentation/high base reach B presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the fifth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (low base strong reach C effect/high base reach C effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the sixth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (low base strong reach C presentation/high base reach C presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base strong reach A performance/high base reach A performance) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until the result of the advantageous state is notified,
The second reach (low base strong reach B performance/high base reach B performance) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until the result of the advantageous state is notified,
The third reach (low base strong reach C effect/high base reach C effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the third reach, and an introduction part until the result of the advantageous state is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
In the title display part in the first reach (low base strong reach A performance/high base reach A performance), an expectation suggestion display consisting of a first number (3) of objects (star-shaped objects) can be displayed,
In the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach B performance/high base reach B performance), an expectation suggestion display consisting of a second number (3.5) of objects (star-shaped objects) greater than the first number can be displayed,
In the title display part in the third reach (low base strong reach C performance/high base reach C performance), an expectation suggestion display consisting of a third number (4) of objects (star-shaped objects) greater than the second number can be displayed,
the difference between the first number and the second number is the same as the difference between the second number and the third number (0.5);
The difference between the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state when the third reach (low base strong reach C performance/high base reach C performance) is executed and the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state when the second reach (low base strong reach B performance/high base reach B performance) is executed is greater than the difference between the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state when the second reach (low base strong reach B performance/high base reach B performance) is executed and the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state when the first reach (low base strong reach A performance/high base reach A performance) is executed.
According to this feature, when the number of objects displayed as an expectation level indication display in the title display part increases from a first number to a second number, the increase in the number of objects is the same as when the number of objects increases from the second number to a third number, but the increase in the expectation level of being controlled to an advantageous state is greater when the number of objects increases from the second number to the third number than when the number of objects increases from the first number to the second number. Therefore, as the number of objects increases, it can be expected that the number of objects will be controlled to an advantageous state more favorably than the increased number of objects, while on the other hand, when the number of objects is small, excessive expectations of being controlled to an advantageous state are not raised.

The gaming machine of aspect 16-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 16-1,
The plurality of fluctuation patterns include a seventh fluctuation pattern (PB1-11 to 13/PB1-17) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled by the advantageous state, and an eighth fluctuation pattern (PA2-13 to 15/PA2-19) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled by the advantageous state,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
When the seventh variation pattern is determined, a seventh command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-11 to PB1-13/PB1-17) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the eighth variation pattern is determined, an eighth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-13 to 15/PA2-19) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the seventh command is received, it is possible to notify that the fourth reach (low base strongest reach effect/high base reach D effect) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the eighth command is received, it is possible to notify that the fourth reach (low base strongest reach presentation/high base reach D presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The fourth reach (low base strongest reach performance/high base reach D performance) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the fourth reach, and an introduction part until the result of the advantageous state is notified,
The display means is capable of displaying an expectation indication display consisting of a fourth number (4.5) object (star-shaped object) that is greater than the third number in a title display part in the fourth reach (low base strongest reach performance/high base reach D performance),
the difference between the third number and the fourth number (0.5) is smaller than the difference between the first number and the third number (1);
The difference between the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state when the fourth reach (low base strongest reach performance/high base reach D performance) is executed and the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state when the third reach (low base strong reach C performance/high base reach C performance) is executed is greater than the difference between the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state when the third reach (low base strong reach C performance/high base reach C performance) is executed and the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state when the first reach (low base strong reach A performance/high base reach A performance) is executed.
According to this feature, the increase in the number of objects displayed as an expectation level indication display in the title display part is smaller when the number of objects increases from the third number to the fourth number than when it increases from the first number to the third number, but the increase in the expectation level that will be controlled to an advantageous state is greater when the number increases from the third number to the fourth number than when it increases from the first number to the third number. Therefore, the more the number of objects increases, the more it can be expected that the object will be controlled to an advantageous state even if the number of increased objects is small.

The gaming machine of aspect 16-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 16-2,
The difference between the third number and the fourth number is 0.5, and the difference between the first number and the third number is 1.
According to this feature, it can be expected that the number of objects displayed as an expectation level indication in the title display part will be controlled in a more favorable state when it increases by 0.5 from the third number to the fourth number, rather than when it increases by 1 from the first number to the third number.
The gaming machine of aspect 16-4 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects 16-1 to 16-3,
The difference between the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state when the third reach (high base reach C performance) is executed in a special state (probable change state) which is more advantageous than the normal state and the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state when the second reach (high base reach B performance) is executed is greater than the difference between the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state when the third reach (low base strong reach C performance) is executed in the normal state and the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state when the second reach (low base strong reach B performance) is executed.
According to this feature, it is possible to expect that a special state that is more advantageous than a normal state will be controlled to be an advantageous state when the number of objects displayed as an expectation level indication in the title display part increases.

[Form 17]
The gaming machine of form 17-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120);
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-2 to PB1-10) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 to PB2-12) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state are selected as one of the fluctuation patterns;
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-JA and PB1-JB) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2 and PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-2 to PB1-10) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-4 to PA2-12) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title character) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until the result of the control of the advantageous state is notified,
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title character) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until the result of the advantageous state is notified,
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) and the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) are both reaches executed in a normal state, and the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect),
The title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) is longer than the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
The display means (image display device 5)
In the title display part of the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance), an expectation suggestion display is displayed,
The expectation indication is not displayed in the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
Controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
In the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (weak reach common title) for the title display part of the first reach,
In the title display part of the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (common title for strong reach) for the title display part of the second reach,
In the introduction part of the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction) for the introduction part of the first reach,
In the introductory part of the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction) for the introductory part of the second reach.
According to this feature, the title display part in the second reach, which has a relatively high expectation, is longer than the title display part in the first reach, which has a relatively low expectation, and while an expectation suggestion display is displayed in the title display part in the second reach, an expectation suggestion display is not displayed in the title display part in the first reach, so that the player can physically recognize that the expectation of the second reach is higher than that of the first reach. Also, in the title display parts in the first reach and the second reach, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display of the first reach and the second reach, which is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part of the first reach and the second reach, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display. As a result of these, the title display can be performed suitably.

The gaming machine of aspect 17-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 17-1,
The title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) is composed of a prologue part (prologue display period) and a character display part (title start period, title display period, title end period),
The title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) does not have a prologue part (prologue display period) and is composed only of character display parts (title start period, title display period, title end period),
The character display part of the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) is longer than the character display part of the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance).
According to this feature, since the character display part of the title display part in the second reach is longer than the character display part of the title display part in the first reach, the player can intuitively recognize that the second reach has a higher expectation than the first reach.

The gaming machine of aspect 17-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 17-1 or 17-2,
The reach is executed in the normal state, and includes a third reach (low base strongest reach presentation) having a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the second reach (low base strong reach A to C presentation),
The title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) is composed of a prologue part (prologue display period) and a character display part (title start period, title display period, title end period),
The title display part in the third reach (low-base strongest reach performance) does not have a prologue part (prologue display period), and is composed only of text display parts (title start period, title display period, title end period),
The character display part of the title display part in the third reach (low base strongest reach performance) is longer than the character display part of the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance).
According to this feature, since the character display part of the title display part in the third reach is longer than the character display part of the title display part in the second reach, it is possible to intuitively recognize that the third reach has a higher expectation than the second reach.

[Form 18]
The gaming machine of form 18-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120);
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-2, 5, 8) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2 to 3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-2 to 10) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 to 12) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state are selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns;
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-2, 5, 8) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2 to PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-2 to PB1-10) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-4 to PA2-12) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) can be executed,
When the second command is received, the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) can be executed,
When the third command is received, the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) can be executed,
When the fourth command is received, the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) can be executed,
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) and the second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) are both reaches executed in a normal state,
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is a reach that does not notify the fact that it will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) as a performance result, and may be a reach that notifies the fact that it will not be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) as a performance result, or may be a reach that executes another reach (super reach performance).
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) is a reach that has a performance result in which it is notified that the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) will be controlled, and in which it is notified that the advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) will not be controlled,
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title character) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until it is notified whether the other reach is executed,
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title character) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until the result of the advantageous state is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
In the title display part of the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance), an expectation suggestion display is displayed,
The expectation indication is not displayed in the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
Controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
In the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (weak reach common title) for the title display part of the first reach,
In the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (common title for strong reach) for the title display part of the second reach,
In the introduction part of the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction) for the introduction part of the first reach,
In the introductory part of the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction) for the introductory part of the second reach.
According to this feature, while an expectation indication is displayed in the title display part in the second reach where it may be directly notified that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, an expectation indication is not displayed in the title display part in the first reach where it is not directly notified that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, so that it is possible to prevent the first reach from causing an excessive sense of expectation. Also, in the title display parts in the first reach and the second reach, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display of the first reach and the second reach that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part of the first reach and the second reach, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display. As a result of these, the title display can be performed in a suitable manner.

The gaming machine of aspect 18-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 18-1,
The title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is characterized in that it is possible to display a title display (title characters) in a confirmed state (gold color) that confirms that another reach (super reach performance) will be executed.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention even to the title display part in the first reach where the expectation indication display is not displayed.

[Form 19]
The gaming machine of form 19-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a fluctuation pattern is determined from among a plurality of fluctuation patterns including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command for designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that a specific reach (low base strong reach A to C performance, low base strongest reach) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C performance, low base strongest reach) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of the control of the advantageous state is notified,
The specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach) may be executed via a selection effect using a title display (title characters) corresponding to multiple reaches (super reach effects) including the specific reach,
The display means includes:
It is possible to display an expectation indication together with the title indication (title characters) in the title display part and the selection effect of the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effect, low base strongest reach),
When displaying the expectation indication in the title display part of the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C performance, low base strongest reach), a expectation indication consisting of a plurality of objects (star-shaped objects) is displayed in stages,
When the expectation indication display is displayed in the selection performance, the expectation indication display consisting of a plurality of objects (star-shaped objects) is not displayed in stages.
According to this feature, when an expectation suggestion display is displayed in the title display part of a specific reach, the expectation suggestion display made up of a plurality of objects is displayed in stages, whereas when an expectation suggestion display is displayed in a selection performance, the expectation suggestion display made up of a plurality of objects is not displayed in stages, thereby eliminating the annoyance of the expectation suggestion display being displayed in stages not only in the title display part but also in the selection performance preceding it.

The gaming machine of aspect 19-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 19-1,
The selection effect is an effect that changes stepwise from a reach with a low expectation (super reach effect) to a reach with a high expectation (super reach effect) by operating the effect operation means (push button 31B),
The time required for the selection effect to change by one step (the minimum time required to switch to the title image of the next super reach effect) may be shorter than the time required for the expectation indication display of the title display part of the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach) to be displayed by one step (the time for a star-shaped object to change from black to highlighted and then to gold).
This characteristic makes it possible to impart a sense of speed to the gradual changes in the selection presentation.

The gaming machine of aspect 19-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 19-2,
The selection presentation is a presentation that changes step by step from the current reach (super reach presentation) to a reach (super reach presentation) with one step higher expectation, and is characterized in that the number of operations of the presentation operation means (push button 31B) required to change to the next stage increases with each step change.
According to this feature, the higher the expectation of a reach, the more impatient the player can be.

The gaming machine of aspect 19-4 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects 19-1 to 19-3,
When the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C effects, low base strongest reach) is selected by the selection effect, the game starts from the title display part.
According to this feature, even when a specific reach is achieved via a selection performance, the game starts from the title display part, so that it is easy for the player to determine which reach has ultimately been achieved.

[Form 20]
The gaming machine of form 20-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120);
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a fluctuation pattern is determined from among a plurality of fluctuation patterns including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command for designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of the control of the advantageous state is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
After it is notified that the specific reach (super reach effect) will control the game to the advantageous state, a name display of the advantageous state (title character of the big win start effect) corresponding to the controlled advantageous state can be displayed.
The advantageous state name display (title character of the big win start performance) is displayed in a manner with greater movement than the title display corresponding to the specific reach (title character of the super reach performance),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
Controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (a weak reach common title, a strong reach common title, and a high base reach common title);
In the introduction part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of weak reach A of weak reach system, introduction of weak reach B of weak reach system, introduction of strong reach A of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach B of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach C of strong reach system, introduction of reach A of high base reach system, introduction of reach B of high base reach system, introduction of reach C of high base reach system, introduction of reach D of high base reach system).
According to this feature, in a specific reach, the situation in which the title display is performed is one in which it is not yet clear whether or not the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, whereas the situation in which the advantageous state name display is performed is one in which it has already been announced that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, and the game can be celebrated by moving the advantageous state name display more greatly. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display, and as a result, the title display can be performed in a suitable manner.

The gaming machine of aspect 20-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 20-1,
In the title display part of the specific reach (low base strong reach B, C performance, low base strongest reach performance, high base reach A to D), when the title display (title character) is displayed, a background dedicated to the title display is displayed,
The background of the advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start performance) is characterized by being displayed in a manner with greater movement than the background dedicated to the title display.
According to this feature, the background of the advantageous state name display can be moved more dramatically to celebrate being in an advantageous state.

[Mode 21]
The gaming machine of form 21-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120);
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When a gaming medium (a gaming ball) enters a start area (a first start winning hole, a second start winning hole), it is determined whether or not the gaming medium is controlled to the advantageous state (a big win gaming state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a fluctuation pattern is determined from among a plurality of fluctuation patterns including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command for designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of the control of the advantageous state is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
In the introductory part (operation prompting performance B, D) of the specific reach (super reach performance), a prompting character display (operation prompting character (small)) for prompting the player to take an action can be displayed.
The promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)) is displayed in a manner in which the movement is larger than that of the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
Controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (a weak reach common title, a strong reach common title, and a high base reach common title);
In the introduction part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of weak reach A of weak reach system, introduction of weak reach B of weak reach system, introduction of strong reach A of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach B of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach C of strong reach system, introduction of reach A of high base reach system, introduction of reach B of high base reach system, introduction of reach C of high base reach system, introduction of reach D of high base reach system).
According to this feature, the prompting character display displayed in the introduction part prompts the player to take an action, and by moving it more than the title display displayed in the title display part, the player can be intuitively prompted to take an action. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display, and as a result, the title display can be performed suitably.

The gaming machine of aspect 21-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 21-1,
In the introductory part of the specific reach (super reach effect), a special prompting character display (operation prompting character (large)) that prompts the player to take an action and suggests a more advantageous situation than the prompting character display (operation prompting character (small)) can be displayed;
The feature of this invention is that both the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)) and the special promotion character display (operation promotion character (large)) are displayed in a manner that shows greater movement than the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect).
According to this feature, whether the promotion character display or the special promotion character display is moved more than the title display displayed in the title display part, the player can be intuitively prompted to take an action.

The gaming machine of aspect 21-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 21-1 or 21-2,
The number of characters (3) of the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)) is less than the number of characters (7 to 13) of the title display (title characters).
According to this feature, since the number of characters in the promotional text display is smaller than the number of characters in the title display, the content of the text can be recognized even if the text is moved widely.

[Mode 22]
The gaming machine of form 22-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120);
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a fluctuation pattern is determined from among a plurality of fluctuation patterns including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command for designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of the control of the advantageous state is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of the control of the advantageous state is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
A display that is different from the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect) and that explains the content of the specific reach (explanatory characters) can be displayed.
The explanatory character display (explanatory character) is displayed in a manner with greater movement than the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
Controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (a weak reach common title, a strong reach common title, and a high base reach common title);
In the introduction part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of weak reach A of weak reach system, introduction of weak reach B of weak reach system, introduction of strong reach A of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach B of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach C of strong reach system, introduction of reach A of high base reach system, introduction of reach B of high base reach system, introduction of reach C of high base reach system, introduction of reach D of high base reach system).
According to this feature, the explanatory text display that is additionally displayed is displayed in a manner that has greater movement than the title display, so that the fact that the explanatory text display is added in addition to the title display can be drawn to. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for the title display that is different from the luminance data table for the introductory part, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display. As a result, the title display can be performed in a suitable manner.

The gaming machine of aspect 22-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 22-1,
The explanatory text display (explanatory text) is characterized in that it contains content that suggests that the specific reach (super reach effect) is advantageous.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw more attention to the fact that the explanatory text display has been added.

[Mode 23]
The gaming machine of form 23-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120);
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-2 to PB1-10) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 to PB2-12) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state are selected as one of the fluctuation patterns;
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-JA and PB1-JB) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2 and PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-2 to PB1-10) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-4 to PA2-12) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title character) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until the result of the advantageous state is notified,
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title character) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until the result of the advantageous state is notified,
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
The display means (image display device 5)
The title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) is displayed in a larger font size than the title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance);
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
Controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
In the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (weak reach common title) for the title display part of the first reach,
In the title display part of the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (common title for strong reach) for the title display part of the second reach,
In the introduction part of the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction) for the introduction part of the first reach,
In the introductory part of the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction) for the introductory part of the second reach.
According to this feature, the title display corresponding to the second reach, which has a relatively high expectation, is displayed in a larger font size than the title display corresponding to the first reach, which has a relatively low expectation, so that the title display alone can make the player intuitively recognize that the second reach has a higher expectation than the first reach. Also, in the title display parts of the first reach and second reach, the light-emitting means is controlled using brightness data tables for the title displays of the first reach and second reach, which are different from the brightness data tables for the introductory parts of the first reach and second reach, respectively, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display. As a result of these, the title display can be performed in a suitable manner.

The gaming machine of aspect 23-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 23-1,
The number of characters (10) constituting the title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) is greater than the number of characters (7, 8) constituting the title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach (low base strong reach B, C effect), but the display area (display area size) of the title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach (low base strong reach B, C effect) is larger than the display area (display area size) of the title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect).
According to this feature, the title display corresponding to the second reach occupies a larger display area per character, so that the player can intuitively recognize that the second reach has a higher expectation than the first reach.

[Form 24]
The gaming machine of form 24-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120);
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a fluctuation pattern is determined from among a plurality of fluctuation patterns including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command for designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of the control of the advantageous state is notified,
The title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect) is composed of multiple characters,
The display means (image display device 5)
It is possible to display a variable display of decorative identification information (decorative pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information (first special pattern, second special pattern),
The decoration identification information (decorative pattern (large)) of a first size is displayed in a reach state before a title display part in the specific reach (super reach effect), and then the decoration identification information (decorative pattern (small)) of a second size smaller than the first size is displayed in a reach state;
At least one character of the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect) is displayed in a size larger than the second size (decorative pattern (small));
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
Controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (a weak reach common title, a strong reach common title, and a high base reach common title);
In the introduction part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of weak reach A of weak reach system, introduction of weak reach B of weak reach system, introduction of strong reach A of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach B of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach C of strong reach system, introduction of reach A of high base reach system, introduction of reach B of high base reach system, introduction of reach C of high base reach system, introduction of reach D of high base reach system).
According to this feature, at least one character of the title display corresponding to the specific reach is displayed in a size larger than the decoration identification information reduced to the second size, so that the title display can be focused on in the title display part. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display. As a result of these, the title display can be performed in a suitable manner.

The gaming machine of aspect 24-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 24-1,
The present invention is characterized in that all characters of the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach performance) are displayed in a size smaller than the first size (decorative pattern (large)) and larger than the second size (decorative pattern (small)).
According to this feature, the decorative identification information can be reliably recognized when a reach state is reached, and thereafter, the decorative identification information is reduced in size and each character that makes up the title display is displayed at a size larger than the decorative identification information, thereby drawing attention to the title display in the title display part.

[Form 25]
The gaming machine of form 25-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120);
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a fluctuation pattern is determined from among a plurality of fluctuation patterns including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command for designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of the control of the advantageous state is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
In the introductory part (operation prompting performance B, D) of the specific reach (super reach performance), a prompting character display (operation prompting character (small)) for prompting the player to take an action can be displayed.
After it is notified that the specific reach (super reach effect) will control the game to the advantageous state, a name display of the advantageous state (title character of the big win start effect) corresponding to the controlled advantageous state can be displayed.
The advantageous state name display (title character of the big win start performance) is displayed larger than the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
Controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (a weak reach common title, a strong reach common title, and a high base reach common title);
In the introduction part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of weak reach A of weak reach system, introduction of weak reach B of weak reach system, introduction of strong reach A of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach B of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach C of strong reach system, introduction of reach A of high base reach system, introduction of reach B of high base reach system, introduction of reach C of high base reach system, introduction of reach D of high base reach system).
According to this feature, in a specific reach, the situation in which the promotion character display is performed is a situation in which it is not yet known whether or not the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, whereas the situation in which the advantageous state name display is performed is a situation in which it has already been announced that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, and the advantageous state name display is displayed larger than the promotion character display to congratulate the game being controlled to an advantageous state. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display, and as a result, the title display can be performed suitably.

The gaming machine of aspect 25-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 25-1,
The advantageous state name display (title characters of the big win start performance) is composed of a first character string ("BIG" or "REGULAR") and a second character string ("BONUS");
The first character string ("BIG" or "REGULAR") is displayed in the first position (the upper fixed position), and then the second character string ("BONUS") is displayed in the second position (the lower fixed position);
After the second character string ("BONUS") is displayed at the second position (lower fixed position), the first character string ("BIG" or "REGULAR") displayed at the first position (upper fixed position) and the second character string ("BONUS") displayed at the second position (lower fixed position) are gradually enlarged and displayed.
The first character string ("BIG" or "REGULAR") and the second character string ("BONUS") are displayed in the smallest character size when displayed at the first position (upper fixed position) and the second position (lower fixed position),
The size of the characters when the first character string ("BIG" or "REGULAR") and the second character string ("BONUS") are displayed in the first position (upper fixed position) and the second position (lower fixed position) is larger than the size of the characters constituting the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)).
According to this feature, the characters constituting the advantageous state name display are always displayed larger than the characters constituting the promotion character display, so that being controlled in an advantageous state can be more congratulated.

The gaming machine of aspect 25-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 25-1 or 25-2,
The smallest character among the characters constituting the advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start performance) is larger than the largest character among the characters constituting the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)).
According to this feature, the smallest character among the characters constituting the advantageous state name display is displayed larger than the largest character among the characters constituting the promotion character display, so that no matter which character you focus on, the advantageous state name display is displayed larger than the promotion character display, making it possible to more congratulate yourself on being controlled into the advantageous state.

The gaming machine of aspect 25-4 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects 25-1 to 25-3,
A special prompting character display (operation prompting character (large)) that suggests a more favorable situation than the prompting character display (operation prompting character (small)) can be displayed;
The special prompt character display (operation prompt character (large)) is characterized by being displayed larger than the advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start performance).
According to this feature, the special promotion character display, which suggests a more advantageous situation than the promotion character display, is displayed larger than the advantageous state name display, thereby allowing the player to sense the advantageous situation.

The gaming machine of aspect 25-5 is the gaming machine according to aspect 25-4,
The smallest character among the character strings constituting the special promotion character display (operation promotion character (large)) is characterized in that it is larger than the largest character among the character strings constituting the advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start performance).
According to this feature, the smallest character among the characters constituting the special promotion character display is displayed larger than the largest character among the characters constituting the advantageous state name display, so that no matter which character the player focuses on, the special promotion character display is displayed larger than the advantageous state name display, allowing the player to sense the advantageous situation.

[Mode 26]
The gaming machine of form 26-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120);
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state are selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns,
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command for designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of the control of the advantageous state is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
After it is notified that the specific reach (super reach effect) will control the game to the advantageous state, a name display of the advantageous state (title character of the big win start effect) corresponding to the controlled advantageous state can be displayed.
The advantageous state name display (title characters of the big win start performance) is displayed larger than the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach performance),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
Controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (a weak reach common title, a strong reach common title, and a high base reach common title);
In the introduction part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of weak reach A of weak reach system, introduction of weak reach B of weak reach system, introduction of strong reach A of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach B of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach C of strong reach system, introduction of reach A of high base reach system, introduction of reach B of high base reach system, introduction of reach C of high base reach system, introduction of reach D of high base reach system).
According to this feature, in a specific reach, the situation in which the title display is performed is one in which it is not yet clear whether or not the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, whereas the situation in which the advantageous state name display is performed is one in which it has already been announced that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, and the advantageous state name display is displayed larger than the title display to congratulate the game being controlled to an advantageous state. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display, and as a result, the title display can be performed in a suitable manner.

The gaming machine of aspect 26-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 26-1,
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a plurality of types of specific reaches having different title displays (title characters),
The advantageous state name display (title characters of the big win start performance) is characterized by being displayed larger than the title display (title characters) corresponding to any type of specific reach (super reach performance).
According to this feature, the advantageous state name display is displayed larger than the title display corresponding to any type of specific reach, thereby making it possible to celebrate being controlled into an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of aspect 26-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 26-2,
The smallest character among the character strings constituting the advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start performance) is larger than the largest character among the character strings constituting the title display (title character) corresponding to any type of specific reach (super reach performance).
According to this feature, the smallest character among the characters constituting the advantageous state name display is displayed larger than the largest character among the characters constituting the title display corresponding to any type of specific reach, so that no matter which character you focus on, the advantageous state name display is displayed larger than the title display corresponding to the specific reach, making it possible to more fully celebrate being controlled into an advantageous state.

[Mode 27]
The gaming machine of form 27-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120);
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state are selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns;
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating (PA2-2, PA2-3)) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2 and PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of the control of the advantageous state is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
In the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), before the title display part (operation prompt performance A), a prompting character display (operation prompt character (small)) to prompt the player to take an action can be displayed.
A title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is displayed larger than the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
Controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach common titles);
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction).
According to this feature, the promotional text display is displayed before the title display part, and the title display to be displayed thereafter is displayed larger than the promotional text display, thereby drawing attention to the title display. In addition, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for the title display, which is different from the luminance data table for the introduction part, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display, and as a result, the title display can be performed in a suitable manner.

The gaming machine of aspect 27-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 27-1,
After the prompting character display (operation prompting character (small)) is displayed, the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) develops and the title display part in the specific reach starts.
According to this feature, the promotional text display is displayed before the title display part in a series of flows, and the title display to be displayed thereafter is displayed larger than the promotional text display, thereby drawing attention to the title display.

The gaming machine of aspect 27-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 27-1 or 27-2,
The smallest character among the characters constituting the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is larger than the largest character among the characters constituting the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)).
According to this feature, the smallest character among the characters constituting the title display corresponding to the specific reach is displayed larger than the largest character among the characters constituting the promotion character display, so that the title display can be focused on regardless of which character is focused on.

[Mode 28]
The gaming machine of form 28-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120);
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state are selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns;
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating (PA2-2, PA2-3)) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2 and PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of the control of the advantageous state is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
In the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), before the title display part (operation prompt performance A), a prompting character display (operation prompt character (small)) to prompt the player to take an action can be displayed.
After it is notified that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) will control the game to the advantageous state, a display of the advantageous state name (title character of the big win start performance) corresponding to the controlled advantageous state can be displayed.
The advantageous state name display (title characters of the big win start performance) is displayed larger than the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
A title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is displayed larger than the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
Controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach common titles);
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction).
According to this feature, in a specific reach, the situation in which the title display is performed is a situation in which it is not yet clear whether or not the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, whereas the situation in which the advantageous state name display is performed is a situation after it has already been notified that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, and the advantageous state name display is displayed larger than the title display, so that the game can be celebrated for being controlled to an advantageous state. Also, by displaying a promotional character display before the title display part and displaying the title display displayed thereafter larger than the promotional character display, it is possible to draw attention to the title display. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display, and as a result, the title display can be performed in a suitable manner.

The gaming machine of aspect 28-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 28-1,
After the prompting character display (operation prompting character (small)) is displayed, the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is developed, the title display part in the specific reach starts, and after it is notified that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) will control the advantageous state, the advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start performance) is displayed.
According to this feature, a promotional text display is displayed before the title display part in a series of events, and the title display that is displayed afterwards is displayed larger than the promotional text display, thereby drawing attention to the title display, and then, after it is announced that a specific reach has resulted in control into an advantageous state, a display of the advantageous state name is displayed larger than the title display, allowing the player to celebrate being controlled into the advantageous state.

[Mode 29]
The gaming machine of form 29-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120);
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a fluctuation pattern is determined from among a plurality of fluctuation patterns including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command for designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of the control of the advantageous state is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
After it is notified that the specific reach (super reach effect) will control the game to the advantageous state, a name display of the advantageous state (title character of the big win start effect) corresponding to the controlled advantageous state can be displayed.
The advantageous state name display (title characters of the big win start performance) is displayed for a longer time than the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach performance),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
Controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (a weak reach common title, a strong reach common title, and a high base reach common title);
In the introduction part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of weak reach A of weak reach system, introduction of weak reach B of weak reach system, introduction of strong reach A of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach B of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach C of strong reach system, introduction of reach A of high base reach system, introduction of reach B of high base reach system, introduction of reach C of high base reach system, introduction of reach D of high base reach system).
According to this feature, in a specific reach, the situation in which the title display is performed is one in which it is not yet clear whether or not the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, whereas the situation in which the advantageous state name display is performed is one in which it has already been announced that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, and by displaying the advantageous state name display for a longer period of time than the title display, it is possible to celebrate the game being controlled to an advantageous state. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display, and as a result, the title display can be performed in a suitable manner.

The gaming machine of aspect 29-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 29-1,
The time from when the character string constituting the advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start performance) is all displayed to when at least a part of the character string is no longer displayed is longer than the time from when a part of the character string constituting the title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach performance) is displayed to when the whole of the character string is no longer displayed.
According to this feature, the time during which the congratulatory advantageous state name display is clearly visible is made longer than the time during which the title display, the purpose of which is to encourage the possibility of control over the advantageous state, is displayed, thereby giving the player a sense of satisfaction.

The gaming machine of aspect 29-3 is the gaming machine of aspect 29-1 or 28-2,
After the advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start performance) is displayed, the advantageous state name display is switched to an operation suggestion display (right hit promotion image (small) and right hit promotion image (large)) that suggests an operation method during the advantageous state, and control is performed to gain an advantage by operating the operation method suggested by the operation suggestion display (operation method for shooting the game ball toward the right game area 2R) after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the display was switched to the operation suggestion display,
The time required to switch from the advantageous state name display (title letters of the jackpot start effect) to the operation suggestion display (right hit promotion image (small) and right hit promotion image (large)) is shorter than the time required to end the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect).
According to this feature, the advantageous state name display is switched to the operation suggestion display in a short time, and then after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, control is performed to give an advantage by operating in the operation method suggested by the operation suggestion display, thereby preventing the player from being disadvantaged by changing the operation method during the period when the advantageous state name display is ended.

[Form 30]
The gaming machine of form 30-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120);
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state are selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns,
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command for designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of the control of the advantageous state is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
In the introductory part (operation prompting performance B, D) of the specific reach (super reach performance), a prompting character display (operation prompting character (small)) for prompting the player to take an action can be displayed.
After it is notified that the specific reach (super reach effect) will control the game to the advantageous state, a name display of the advantageous state (title character of the big win start effect) corresponding to the controlled advantageous state can be displayed.
The advantageous state name display (title character of the big win start performance) is displayed for a longer time than the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
Controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (a weak reach common title, a strong reach common title, and a high base reach common title);
In the introduction part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of weak reach A of weak reach system, introduction of weak reach B of weak reach system, introduction of strong reach A of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach B of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach C of strong reach system, introduction of reach A of high base reach system, introduction of reach B of high base reach system, introduction of reach C of high base reach system, introduction of reach D of high base reach system).
According to this feature, in a specific reach, the situation in which the promotion character display is performed is a situation in which it is not yet known whether or not the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, whereas the situation in which the advantageous state name display is performed is a situation after it has already been notified that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, and by displaying the advantageous state name display for a longer period of time than the promotion character display, it is possible to celebrate the game being controlled to an advantageous state. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display, and as a result, the title display can be performed suitably.

The gaming machine of aspect 30-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 30-1,
The prompting character display (operation prompting character (small)) is displayed until the prompted action is performed or until the effective time for the prompted action has elapsed;
The time for which the advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start performance) is displayed is characterized by being longer than the time from when the prompting character display (operation prompting character (small)) is displayed until the time during which the prompted action is not taken and the time during which the prompted action is valid has elapsed.
According to this feature, after the prompting character display is displayed, the advantageous state name display is displayed for a longer period of time than the period of time that would be displayed if the prompted action was not taken, thereby allowing the player to be congratulated for being controlled into the advantageous state.

The gaming machine of aspect 30-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 30-1 or 30-2,
The time from when the character string constituting the advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start performance) is all displayed to when at least a part of the character string disappears is longer than the time when the prompt character display (operation prompt character (small)) is displayed.
According to this feature, the time for which the congratulatory advantageous state name display is clearly visible is set to be longer than the time for which the promotional text display, the purpose of which is to encourage the player to take action, is displayed, thereby giving the player a sense of satisfaction.

The gaming machine of aspect 30-4 is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 30-1 to 30-3,
A special prompting character display (operation prompting character (large)) that suggests a more favorable situation than the prompting character display (operation prompting character (small)) can be displayed;
The promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)) is a promotion character (character that encourages an operation) that is displayed without accompanying a promotion introduction display (promotion introduction performance),
The special operation prompting display (operation prompting character (large)) is a prompting introduction display (promotion introduction performance) followed by a prompting character (character encouraging an operation),
The advantageous state name display (title characters of the big win start performance) is displayed for a longer period of time than the special prompt character display (operation prompt character (large)).
According to this feature, the time for which the advantageous state name display, which has a congratulatory meaning, is displayed is longer than the time for which the special promotion character display accompanied by the promotion introduction display is displayed, thereby giving the player a sense of satisfaction.

[Mode 31]
The gaming machine of form 31-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120);
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state are selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns;
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating (PA2-2, PA2-3)) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2 and PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of the control of the advantageous state is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
In the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), before the title display part (operation prompt performance A), a prompting character display (operation prompt character (small)) to prompt the player to take an action can be displayed.
A title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is displayed for a longer time than the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
Controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach common titles);
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction).
According to this feature, the promotional text display is displayed before the title display part, and the title display that is displayed thereafter is displayed for a longer time than the promotional text display, thereby drawing attention to the title display. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display, and as a result, the title display can be performed in a suitable manner.

The gaming machine of aspect 31-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 31-1,
The time from when the character string constituting the title display (title characters) is entirely displayed until at least a part of the character string disappears is longer than the time when the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)) is displayed.
According to this feature, the time during which the title display is clearly visible is set to be longer than the time during which the promotion text display, the purpose of which is to encourage the player to take an action, is displayed, thereby drawing attention to the title display.

The gaming machine of aspect 31-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 31-1 or 31-2,
A special prompting character display (operation prompting character (large)) that suggests a more favorable situation than the prompting character display (operation prompting character (small)) can be displayed;
The promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)) is a promotion character (character that encourages an operation) that is displayed without accompanying a promotion introduction display (promotion introduction performance),
The special operation prompting display (operation prompting character (large)) is a prompting introduction display (promotion introduction performance) followed by a prompting character (character encouraging an operation),
The time period during which the title display (title characters) is displayed is longer than the time period during which the special prompting character display (operation prompting character (large)) is displayed.
According to this feature, the time for which the title display is displayed is made longer than the time for which the special promotion character display accompanying the promotion introduction display is displayed, so that attention can be drawn to the title display.

[Mode 32]
The gaming machine of form 32-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120);
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state are selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns;
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating (PA2-2, PA2-3)) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2 and PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that a specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of the control of the advantageous state is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
In the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), before the title display part (operation prompt performance A), a prompting character display (operation prompt character (small)) to prompt the player to take an action can be displayed.
After it is notified that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) will control the game to the advantageous state, a display of the advantageous state name (title character of the big win start performance) corresponding to the controlled advantageous state can be displayed.
The advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start performance) is displayed for a longer time than the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
A title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is displayed for a longer time than the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
Controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach common titles);
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction).
According to this feature, in a specific reach, the situation in which the title display is performed is a situation in which it is not yet clear whether or not the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, whereas the situation in which the advantageous state name display is performed is a situation after it has already been notified that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, and the advantageous state name display is displayed for a longer period of time than the title display, so that the game can be celebrated for being controlled to an advantageous state. Also, by displaying the promotion character display before the title display part and displaying the title display that is displayed thereafter for a longer period of time than the promotion character display, it is possible to draw attention to the title display. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display, and as a result, the title display can be performed in a suitable manner.

[Mode 33]
The gaming machine of form 33-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-2 to PB1-10) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 to PB1-12) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, a fifth fluctuation pattern (PB1-14) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a sixth fluctuation pattern (PA2-16) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, a seventh fluctuation pattern (PB1-15 to PB1-17) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and an eighth fluctuation pattern (PA2-17 to PB1-19) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state are selected as one of the fluctuation patterns;
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-JA and PB1-JB) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2 and PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-2 to PB1-10) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-4 to PA2-12) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the fifth variation pattern is determined, a fifth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-14) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the sixth variation pattern is determined, a sixth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-16) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the seventh variation pattern is determined, a seventh command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-15 to PB1-17) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the eighth variation pattern is determined, an eighth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-17 to PA2-19) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means includes:
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the fifth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (high base reach A presentation) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the sixth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (high base reach A presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the seventh command is received, it is possible to notify that the fourth reach (high base reach B to D performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the eighth command is received, it is possible to notify that the fourth reach (high base reach B to D performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title character) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until the result of the control of the advantageous state is notified,
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title character) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until the result of the advantageous state is notified,
The third reach (high base reach A performance) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the third reach, and an introduction part until the result of the advantageous state is notified,
The fourth reach (high base reach B to D performance) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title character) corresponding to the fourth reach, and an introduction part until the result of the advantageous state is notified,
The first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) and the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) are reaches executed in a normal state,
The third reach (high base reach A performance) and the fourth reach (high base reach B to D performance) are reaches executed in a special state (probable change state) that is more advantageous than the normal state,
The second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
The fourth reach (high base reach B to D performance) has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the third reach (high base reach A performance),
The third reach (high base reach A effect) has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect),
The display means includes:
In the title display part in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance), an expectation suggestion display consisting of a plurality of objects (star-shaped objects) can be displayed,
The expectation indication can be displayed in the title display part in the third reach (high base reach A performance),
The expectation indication can be displayed in the title display part in the fourth reach (high base reach A performance),
This is characterized in that the expectation indication is not displayed in the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance).
According to this feature, since the first reach in the normal state has a lower expectation than the second reach in the normal state, the expectation suggestion display is displayed in the second reach, but the expectation suggestion display is not displayed in the first reach, thereby preventing excessive expectation that the first reach will control the game to an advantageous state. On the other hand, since the third reach in the special state, which is more advantageous than the normal state, has a lower expectation than the fourth reach in the special state, but is higher expectation than the first reach in the normal state, the expectation suggestion display is displayed in both the third reach and the fourth reach, thereby allowing expectation that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state in both the third reach and the fourth reach.

[Form 34]
The gaming machine of form 34-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120);
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (a jackpot fluctuation pattern in a normal state) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (a miss fluctuation pattern in a normal state) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (a jackpot fluctuation pattern in a high probability state) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled in the advantageous state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern (a miss fluctuation pattern in a high probability state) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled in the advantageous state are selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns,
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern in a normal state) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating a deviation variation pattern in a normal state) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot variation pattern in a probability variation state) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command for designating a miss variation pattern in a probability variation state) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the first reach (super reach presentation in the normal state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (super reach presentation in a normal state) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the advantageous state will be controlled in the second reach (super reach performance in the probability variable state),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (super reach presentation in a probability variable state) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (super reach effect in a normal state) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until the result of the advantageous state is notified,
The second reach (super reach effect in a probability variable state) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until the result of the control of the advantageous state is notified,
The first reach (super reach effect in the normal state) is a reach executed in the normal state,
The second reach (super reach effect in a probability variable state) is a reach executed in a special state (probability variable state) that is more advantageous than the normal state,
The title display part in the second reach (super reach performance in a probability variable state) is shorter than the title display part in the first reach (super reach performance in a normal state),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
Controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
In the title display part in the first reach (the super reach performance in the normal state), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (a weak reach common title, a strong reach common title) for the title display part of the first reach,
In the title display part in the second reach (super reach performance in a probability variable state), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (high base reach common title) for the title display part of the second reach,
In an introduction part of the first reach (super reach performance in a normal state), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction) for the introduction part of the first reach,
In the introductory part of the second reach (super reach performance in a special probability state), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (introduction of high base reach system reach A, introduction of high base reach system reach B, introduction of high base reach system reach C, introduction of high base reach system reach D) for the introductory part of the second reach.
According to this feature, the title display part of the second reach in the special state is made shorter than the title display part of the first reach in the normal state, so that the special state can be advanced at a good tempo. Also, in the title display part of the first reach and the second reach, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display of the first reach and the second reach, which is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part of the first reach and the second reach, so that the light emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light emitting mode according to the title display. As a result of these, the title display can be performed in a suitable manner.

The gaming machine of aspect 34-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 34-1,
The frequency with which the second reach (super reach performance in the special state) occurs in the special state (special probability state) is higher than the frequency with which the first reach (super reach performance in the normal state) occurs in the normal state.
According to this feature, even if the frequency of the second reach occurring in the special state increases, the special state can be progressed at a good pace.

[Form 35]
The gaming machine of form 35-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
Determining whether or not the game medium (game ball) is controlled to the advantageous state when the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-2 to PB1-10) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 to PB2-12) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-11 to PB1-13) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-13 to PB2-15) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state are selected as one of the fluctuation patterns;
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-2 to PB1-10) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-4 to PA2-12) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-11 to PB1-13) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-13 to PA2-15) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The game can be controlled to a plurality of states, including a normal state, a special state after a specific number of times is reached (time-saving state B (Yu-time)), which is a state in which the start condition is more easily established than in the normal state and in which the result of the variable display is not a specific display result (the special display result of a "jackpot"), and is controlled based on the execution of the variable display a specific number of times (900 times),
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the second reach (low base strongest reach presentation),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the advantageous state (jackpot game state) is not controlled in the second reach (low base strongest reach presentation),
The first reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title character) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until the result of the advantageous state is notified,
The second reach (low-base strongest reach presentation) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until the result of the advantageous state is notified,
The second reach (low base strongest reach effect) has a higher expectation of becoming the advantageous state than the first reach (low base strong reach A to C effect),
The display means (image display device 5)
In the title display part in the first reach (low base strong reach A to C performance), a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach is displayed in a first display operation mode (a display mode in which the title characters are displayed while moving from the left side of the display area to the center),
In a title display part in the second reach (low-base strongest reach presentation), a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach is displayed in a second display operation mode (a display mode in which the title characters are displayed reduced from an enlarged display) different from the first display operation mode,
When the special state (time-saving state B (Yu-Time)) is entered after the specific number of times has been reached, a display indicating that the special state will be entered after the specific number of times has been reached (title characters of the Yu-Time start presentation) is displayed in the second display operation mode (a display mode in which the title characters are displayed reduced from an enlarged display).
According to this feature, when the special state is controlled after the specific number of times is reached, the display indicating that the special state will be controlled after the specific number of times is reached is displayed in the same second display operation mode as the title display of the second reach, which has a relatively high expectation, so that the special state after the specific number of times is recognized as being highly advantageous.

The gaming machine of aspect 35-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 35-1,
When terminating the display (title characters of the Yu-Time start presentation) indicating that control will be made to a special state (time-saving state B (Yu-Time)) after the specific number of times has been reached, the display is terminated in the same display operation mode as the display operation mode (display mode in which the title characters are erased while expanding) when terminating the title display (title characters) of the title display part in the second reach (low-base strongest reach presentation).
According to this feature, even when the display indicating that control will be given to a special state after a specific number of times is reached is terminated, it is terminated in the same display operation mode as when terminating the title display of the second reach, which has a relatively high expectation, so that it can be recognized that the special state after a specific number of times is highly advantageous.

[Form 36]
The gaming machine of form 36-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120);
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a fluctuation pattern is determined from among a plurality of fluctuation patterns including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command for designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The game can be controlled to a plurality of states, including a normal state, a special state after a specific number of times is reached (time-saving state B (Yu-time)), which is a state in which the start condition is more easily established than in the normal state and in which the result of the variable display is not a specific display result (the special display result of a "jackpot"), and is controlled based on the execution of the variable display a specific number of times (900 times),
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of the control of the advantageous state is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
When the special state (time-saving state B (Yu-time)) is controlled after the specific number of times is reached, a display (title character of the Yu-time start effect) indicating that the special state will be controlled after the specific number of times is reached can be displayed,
The size of the characters constituting the display (title characters of the Yu-time start effect) indicating that the special state will be entered after the specific number of times has been reached is larger than the size of the characters constituting the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect);
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
Controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (a weak reach common title, a strong reach common title, and a high base reach common title);
In the introduction part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of weak reach A of weak reach system, introduction of weak reach B of weak reach system, introduction of strong reach A of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach B of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach C of strong reach system, introduction of reach A of high base reach system, introduction of reach B of high base reach system, introduction of reach C of high base reach system, introduction of reach D of high base reach system).
According to this feature, the situation in which the title display is performed in a specific reach is a situation in which it is not yet known whether or not the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, whereas the display indicating that the game will be controlled to a special state after the specific number of times is a situation in which the game will be controlled to a special state after the specific number of times is reached, and by making the size of the characters constituting the display indicating that the game will be controlled to a special state after the specific number of times is larger than the size of the characters constituting the title display corresponding to the specific reach, it is possible to celebrate the game being controlled to a special state after the specific number of times is reached. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display, and as a result, the title display can be performed in a suitable manner.

The gaming machine of aspect 36-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 36-1,
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a plurality of types of specific reaches having different title displays (title characters),
The characters constituting the display (title characters of the Yu-time start effect) indicating that the special state will be entered after the specific number of times has been reached are characterized by being larger than the characters constituting the title display (title characters) corresponding to any type of specific reach (super reach effect).
According to this feature, the characters constituting the display indicating that the player will be controlled to a special state after a specific number of times is reached are displayed larger than the characters constituting the title display corresponding to any type of specific reach, thereby allowing the player to celebrate the player being controlled to a special state after a specific number of times is reached.

The gaming machine of aspect 36-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 36-2,
The smallest character among the character strings constituting the display (title character of the Yu-time start effect) indicating that the special state will be entered after the specific number of times has been reached is larger than the largest character among the character strings constituting the title display (title character) corresponding to any type of specific reach (super reach effect).
According to this feature, the smallest character among the characters constituting the display indicating that the player will be controlled to a special state after a specific number of times is reached is displayed larger than the largest character among the characters constituting the title display corresponding to any type of specific reach, so that no matter which character you focus on, the display indicating that the player will be controlled to a special state after a specific number of times is reached is displayed larger than the title display corresponding to the specific reach, making it even more congratulatory that the player will be controlled to a special state after a specific number of times is reached.

[Mode 37]
The gaming machine of form 37-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120);
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a fluctuation pattern is determined from among a plurality of fluctuation patterns including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command for designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The game can be controlled to a plurality of states, including a normal state, a special state after a specific number of times is reached (time-saving state B (Yu-time)), which is a state in which the start condition is more easily established than in the normal state and in which the result of the variable display is not a specific display result (the special display result of a "jackpot"), and is controlled based on the execution of the variable display a specific number of times (900 times),
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of the control of the advantageous state is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
When the special state (time-saving state B (play time)) is controlled after the specific number of times is reached, a display (title character of the play time start effect) indicating that the special state will be controlled after the specific number of times is reached can be displayed,
The display time of the display (title characters of the Yu-time start effect) indicating that the special state will be entered after the specific number of times is reached is longer than the display time of the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
Controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (a weak reach common title, a strong reach common title, and a high base reach common title);
In the introduction part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of weak reach A of weak reach system, introduction of weak reach B of weak reach system, introduction of strong reach A of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach B of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach C of strong reach system, introduction of reach A of high base reach system, introduction of reach B of high base reach system, introduction of reach C of high base reach system, introduction of reach D of high base reach system).
According to this feature, the situation in which the title display is performed in a specific reach is a situation in which it is not yet clear whether or not the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, whereas the display indicating that the game will be controlled to a special state after the specific number of times is reached is a situation in which the game will be controlled to a special state after the specific number of times is reached, and by displaying the display indicating that the game will be controlled to a special state after the specific number of times is reached longer than the title display corresponding to the specific reach, the game can be celebrated for being controlled to a special state after the specific number of times is reached. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display, and as a result, the title display can be performed suitably.

The gaming machine of aspect 37-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 37-1,
The time from when all of the characters constituting the display (title characters of the Yu-time start effect) indicating that the special state will be entered after the specific number of times has been reached to when at least a part of the characters are no longer displayed is longer than the time from when a part of the characters constituting the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach effect) is displayed to when all of the characters are no longer displayed.
According to this feature, the time during which the display indicating that the player will be controlled to a special state after a certain number of congratulatory counts is reached is clearly visible is longer than the time during which the title display intended to encourage the player to assume the possibility of being controlled to an advantageous state is displayed, thereby giving the player a sense of satisfaction.

[Mode 38]
The gaming machine of form 38-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120);
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a fluctuation pattern is determined from among a plurality of fluctuation patterns including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command for designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The game can be controlled to a plurality of states, including a normal state, a special state after a specific number of times is reached (time-saving state B (Yu-time)), which is a state in which the start condition is more easily established than in the normal state and in which the result of the variable display is not a specific display result (the special display result of a "jackpot"), and is controlled based on the execution of the variable display a specific number of times (900 times),
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of the control of the advantageous state is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
In the normal state, a display indicating the number of times remaining until the special state after the specific number of times is reached (characters indicating the number of times remaining until the play time) can be displayed;
The size of the characters constituting the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (super reach performance) is larger than the size of the characters constituting the display (remaining number of times until Yu-time) indicating the number of times remaining until the special state after the specific number of times is reached,
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
Controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (a weak reach common title, a strong reach common title, and a high base reach common title);
In the introduction part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of weak reach A of weak reach system, introduction of weak reach B of weak reach system, introduction of strong reach A of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach B of strong reach system, introduction of strong reach C of strong reach system, introduction of reach A of high base reach system, introduction of reach B of high base reach system, introduction of reach C of high base reach system, introduction of reach D of high base reach system).
According to this feature, the size of the characters constituting the title display corresponding to the specific reach is made larger than the size of the characters constituting the display showing the number of times remaining until the special state after the specific number of times is reached, so that attention can be drawn to the title display corresponding to the specific reach. Also, in the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the light emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light emitting mode according to the title display. As a result of these, the title display can be performed in a suitable manner.

The gaming machine of aspect 38-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 38-1,
The specific reach (super reach effect) includes a first reach (low base weak reach A, B effect) and a second reach (low base strong reach A to C effect) which has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach,
A display showing the remaining number of times until the special state after the specific number of times has been reached (characters indicating the remaining number of times until Yu-time) is displayed during the execution of the first reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), but is not displayed during the execution of the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance).
According to this feature, in the first reach, which has a low expectation, the number of times remaining until the special state is reached after the specific number of times is reached is displayed, making it possible to make the player aware of the number of times until the special state is reached after the specific number of times is reached, whereas in the second reach, which has a high expectation, the number of times remaining until the special state is reached after the specific number of times is not displayed, making it possible to draw attention to the presentation and also to alleviate the player's disappointment when there are only a few times until the special state is reached after the specific number of times is reached.

The gaming machine of aspect 38-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 38-2,
When it is notified that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance), the game is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) without displaying again the display (characters of the remaining number of times until the play time) indicating the remaining number of times until the special state after the specific number of times is reached,
When it is notified that the advantageous state will not be achieved in the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance), a display showing the remaining number of times until the special state after the specific number of times is reached (characters showing the remaining number of times until the Yu-time) is displayed again after the second reach (low base strong reach A to C performance) ends.
According to this feature, when it is notified that the advantageous state will be controlled in the second reach, the remaining number of times until the special state after the specific number of times is reached is not displayed again, so that the player's disappointment can be alleviated when there are only a few number of times until the special state after the specific number of times is reached. Also, when it is notified that the advantageous state will not be controlled in the second reach, the remaining number of times until the special state after the specific number of times is reached is displayed again after the end of the second reach, so that the player can feel relieved as soon as possible when there are only a few number of times until the special state after the specific number of times is reached.

[Mode 39]
The gaming machine of embodiment 39-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120);
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a fluctuation pattern is determined from among a plurality of fluctuation patterns including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command for designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The game can be controlled to a plurality of states, including a normal state, a special state after a specific number of times is reached (time-saving state B (Yu-time)), which is a state in which the start condition is more easily established than in the normal state and in which the result of the variable display is not a specific display result (the special display result of a "jackpot"), and is controlled based on the execution of the variable display a specific number of times (900 times),
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of the control of the advantageous state is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
At the timing (operation prompting performances A to D) related to the specific reach (super reach performance), a prompting character display (operation prompting character (small)) for prompting the player to take an action can be displayed.
In the normal state, a display indicating the number of times remaining until the special state after the specific number of times is reached (characters indicating the number of times remaining until the play time) can be displayed;
The size of the characters constituting the prompt character display (operation prompt character (small)) is larger than the size of the characters constituting the display (remaining number of times until the play time) indicating the number of times remaining until the special state after the specific number of times is reached,
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
Controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (a weak reach common title, a strong reach common title);
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction).
According to this feature, by making the size of the characters constituting the prompting character display that prompts the player to take an action at a timing related to a specific reach larger than the size of the characters constituting the display indicating the number of times remaining until the special state after the specific number of times is reached, it is possible to draw attention to the prompting character display and effectively prompt the player to take an action. Also, in the title display part, since the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, it is possible to make the light emitting means emit light in a suitable light emitting mode according to the title display, and as a result, the title display can be performed in a suitable manner.

The gaming machine of aspect 39-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 39-1,
When the promotion character display (operation promotion character (small)) is displayed before the title display part (operation promotion performance A) in the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C performance), a display indicating the remaining number of times until the special state after the specific number of times is reached (remaining number of times until Yu-time character) is displayed at the same time,
When the prompting character display (operation prompting character (small)) is displayed in the introductory part (operation prompting performance D) of the specific reach (low base strong reach A to C performance), the display indicating the number of times remaining until the special state after the specific number of times is reached (number of times remaining until Yu-time) is not displayed.
According to this feature, before the development into the specific reach, the remaining number of times until the special state after the specific number of times is reached is displayed at the same time as the promotion character display, so that the player can be made aware of the remaining number of times until the special state after the specific number of times is reached, and the operation promotion display in the introduction part does not display the remaining number of times until the special state after the specific number of times is reached, so that the player is informed of whether or not the advantageous state will be controlled.

[Form 40]
The gaming machine of form 40-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120);
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a fluctuation pattern is determined from among a plurality of fluctuation patterns including a first fluctuation pattern (jackpot fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (miss fluctuation pattern) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first fluctuation pattern is determined, a first command (a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a jackpot fluctuation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command for designating a miss variation pattern) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The game can be controlled to a plurality of states, including a normal state, a special state after a specific number of times is reached (time-saving state B (Yu-time)), which is a state in which the start condition is more easily established than in the normal state and in which the result of the variable display is not a specific display result (the special display result of a "jackpot"), and is controlled based on the execution of the variable display a specific number of times (900 times),
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (super reach effect),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (super reach effect) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (super reach effect) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of the control of the advantageous state is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
After it is notified that the specific reach (super reach effect) will control the game to the advantageous state, a name display of the advantageous state (title character of the big win start effect) corresponding to the controlled advantageous state can be displayed.
In the normal state, a display indicating the number of times remaining until the special state after the specific number of times is reached (characters indicating the number of times remaining until the play time) can be displayed;
Before displaying the advantageous state name display (title character of the jackpot start performance), the display indicating the remaining number of times until the special state after the specific number of times is reached (characters of the remaining number of times until the play time) is ended,
The size of the characters constituting the advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start performance) is larger than the size of the characters constituting the display indicating the remaining number of times until the special state after the specific number of times is reached (characters of the remaining number of times until the play time),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
Controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (a weak reach common title, a strong reach common title);
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction).
According to this feature, the situation in which the advantageous state name display is performed is a situation after the fact that it has already been notified that it will be controlled to the advantageous state, and there is no need for a display indicating the number of times remaining until the special state after the specific number of times is reached, so that the display indicating the number of times remaining until the special state after the specific number of times is reached is terminated before the advantageous state name display is displayed, and the size of the characters constituting the advantageous state name display is made larger than the size of the characters constituting the display indicating the number of times remaining until the special state after the specific number of times is reached, thereby making it possible to celebrate the control to the advantageous state. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for the title display that is different from the luminance data table for the introduction part, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting mode according to the title display, and as a result, the title display can be performed suitably.

The gaming machine of aspect 40-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 40-1,
Regardless of the number of times remaining until the special state (time-saving state B (Yu-time)) after the specific number of times is reached, the size of the characters constituting the display (characters of the remaining number of times until Yu-time) indicating the number of times remaining until the special state after the specific number of times is reached is the same,
The size of the characters constituting the advantageous state name display (title characters of the jackpot start performance) is larger than the size of the characters constituting the display showing the number of times remaining until the special state occurs after the specific number of times is reached (characters indicating the number of times remaining until Yu-time).
According to this feature, regardless of the number of times remaining until the special state is reached after the specific number of times has been reached, the size of the characters constituting the advantageous state name display can be made larger than the size of the characters constituting the display indicating the number of times remaining until the special state is reached after the specific number of times has been reached, thereby allowing the player to celebrate being controlled into the advantageous state.

The gaming machine of aspect 40-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 40-1 or 40-2,
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100) is characterized in that it determines a special fluctuation pattern (time-saving B start fluctuation pattern) when the game medium (game ball) first enters the start area (first start winning port, second start winning port) in a special state (time-saving state B (Yu-time)) after a specific number of times has been reached.
According to this feature, when the game medium first enters the starting area in the special state after the specific number of times is reached, a presentation according to the special variation pattern can be executed.

[Form 41]
The gaming machine of form 41-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120);
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state are selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns;
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating (PA2-2, PA2-3)) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2 and PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of the control of the advantageous state is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
The title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) can be changed from a first state (white state) to a second state (red or gold state) and displayed.
In a title display part that displays a title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), when the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is changed from the first aspect (white aspect) to the second aspect (red or gold aspect), the time during which the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is displayed in the second aspect (red or gold aspect) is longer than the time during which the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is displayed in the first aspect (white aspect),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
Controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
In the title display part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach common titles);
In the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction).
According to this feature, when the title display corresponding to a specific reach is changed from the first state to the second state in the title display part that displays the title display corresponding to the specific reach, the time during which the title display corresponding to the specific reach is displayed in the second state is made longer than the time during which the title display corresponding to the specific reach is displayed in the first state, so that the change to the second state can be reliably recognized. Also, in the title display part, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the light-emitting means can be made to emit light in a suitable light-emitting state according to the title display. As a result of these, the title display can be performed in a suitable manner.

The gaming machine of aspect 41-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 41-1,
In the title display part that displays the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) may be changed from the first aspect (white aspect) to the second aspect (red or gold aspect) or may remain unchanged in the first aspect (white aspect),
When changing the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) from the first aspect (white aspect) to the second aspect (red or gold aspect), at a specific timing (when a time t1 has elapsed from the start of the title display period), the title display (title characters) is changed from the first aspect (white aspect) to the second aspect (red or gold aspect) and a specific sound effect (specific sound) is output.
In the case where the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is not changed from the first state (white state), when the specific timing is reached (when a time t1 has elapsed from the start of the title display period), the display is not changed from the first state (white state) and the specific sound effect (specific sound) is output.
According to this feature, a specific sound effect is output when the title display corresponding to a specific reach changes from a first state to a second state at a specific timing, and also when the title display does not change from the first state at the specific timing, so that the output of the specific sound effect can create anticipation of a change to the second state.

The gaming machine of aspect 41-3 is the gaming machine according to aspect 41-1 or 41-2,
The second aspect includes a plurality of aspects (red, gold),
When the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is changed from the first state (white state) to the second state (red, gold state), a specific sound effect (specific sound) is output regardless of the type of second state (red, gold state) to which it is changed.
According to this feature, when the title display corresponding to a specific reach changes from a first state to a second state at a specific timing, a specific sound effect is output regardless of the type of second state to which it is changed, so that the output of the specific sound effect draws attention to the type of second state to which it is changed.

[Form 42]
The gaming machine of form 42-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5),
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state are selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns;
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating (PA2-2, PA2-3)) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2 and PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of the control of the advantageous state is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
The title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) can be changed from a first state (white state) to a second state (red state) and displayed.
The title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) can be changed from the first mode (white mode) to a third mode (gold mode) which has a higher expectation of being controlled to a favorable state than the second mode (red mode), and displayed.
In the title display part that displays the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), in either case where the title display (title letters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is changed from the first aspect (white aspect) to the second aspect (red aspect) or the third aspect (gold aspect), the display is characterized in that it is displayed so as to change from the first aspect (white aspect) to a common display aspect (an aspect that appears to glow) and then to the second aspect (red aspect) or the third aspect (gold aspect).
According to this feature, in the title display part that displays the title display corresponding to a specific reach, whether the title display corresponding to the specific reach is changed from the first mode to the second mode or from the first mode to the third mode, the display is changed to a common display mode and then changed to the second mode or the third mode. Therefore, by changing from the first mode to the common display mode, the player can expect until the end that the display will change to the third mode, which has a higher expectation than the second mode, until the display changes from the common display mode to the second mode or the third mode.

The gaming machine of aspect 42-2 is the gaming machine according to aspect 42-1,
The common display mode is a mode in which the characters constituting the title display (title characters) are illuminated, and is characterized in that when the light clears, it changes to the second mode (red mode) or the third mode (gold mode).
According to this feature, the characters constituting the title display light up, thereby encouraging the change to the second or third mode.

[Form 43]
The gaming machine of form 43-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120);
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a fluctuation pattern is determined from among a plurality of fluctuation patterns including a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-JA) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-JB) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the first reach (low base weak reach A presentation),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the second reach (low base weak reach B presentation),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base weak reach B presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A performance) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until the result of the advantageous state is notified,
The second reach (low base weak reach B performance) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach, and an introduction part until the result of the advantageous state is notified,
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
Controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
In the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A performance) and the title display part in the second reach (low base weak reach B performance), a brightness data table (weak reach common title) for a common title display part is used to control the light emitting means;
In the introduction part of the first reach (low base weak reach A performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (weak reach system weak reach A introduction) for the introduction part of the first reach,
In the introductory part of the second reach (low base weak reach B presentation), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (weak reach system weak reach B introduction) for the introductory part of the second reach.
According to this feature, by making the brightness data table corresponding to the title display part common for two different reaches, an increase in cost and capacity can be prevented, and by using the brightness data table corresponding to each of the introductory parts, it is possible to appropriately stimulate the period until notification of whether or not an advantageous state is achieved, and as a result, it is possible to perform an appropriate title display.

[Form 44]
The gaming machine of form 44-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120);
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, a fifth fluctuation pattern (PB1-2 to 4) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a sixth fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 to 6) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, a seventh fluctuation pattern (PB1-5 to 7/PB1-8 to 10) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and an eighth fluctuation pattern (PA2-7 to 9/PA2-10 to 12) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state are determined;
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-JA) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-JB) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the fifth variation pattern is determined, a fifth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-2 to PB1-4) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the sixth variation pattern is determined, a sixth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-4 to PA2-6) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the seventh variation pattern is determined, a seventh command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-5 to PB1-7/PB1-8 to PB1-10) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the eighth variation pattern is determined, an eighth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-7 to PA2-9/PA2-10 to PA2-12) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the first reach (low base weak reach A presentation),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the second reach (low base weak reach B presentation),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base weak reach B presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the fifth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (low base strong reach A presentation) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the sixth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (low base strong reach A presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the seventh command is received, it is possible to notify that the fourth reach (low base strong reach B performance/low base strong reach C performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the eighth command is received, it is possible to notify that the fourth reach (low base strong reach B performance/low base strong reach C performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A performance) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until the result of the advantageous state is notified,
The second reach includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach (low base weak reach B performance), and an introduction part until the result of the advantageous state is notified,
The third reach includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the third reach (low base strong reach A performance), and an introduction part until the result of the advantageous state is notified,
The fourth reach includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the fourth reach (low base strong reach B effect/low base strong reach C effect), and an introduction part until the result of the advantageous state is notified.
The third reach (low base strong reach A performance) and the fourth reach (low base strong reach B performance/low base strong reach C performance) have a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach (low base weak reach A performance) and the second reach (low base weak reach B performance),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
Controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
In the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A performance) and the title display part in the second reach (low base weak reach B performance), a brightness data table (weak reach common title) for the first title display part which is common to the first reach is used to control the light emitting means;
In the title display part in the third reach (low base strong reach A performance) and the title display part in the fourth reach (low base strong reach B performance/low base strong reach C performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a common brightness data table (strong reach common title) for the second title display part,
In the introduction part of the first reach (low base weak reach A performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (weak reach system weak reach A introduction) for the introduction part of the first reach,
In the introduction part of the second reach (low base weak reach B performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (weak reach system weak reach B introduction) for the introduction part of the second reach,
In the introduction part of the third reach (low base strong reach A performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (strong reach system strong reach A introduction) for the introduction part of the third reach,
In the introductory part of the fourth reach (low base strong reach B performance/low base strong reach C performance), the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part of the fourth reach (strong reach system strong reach B introduction/strong reach system strong reach C introduction).
According to this feature, by using a common brightness data table corresponding to the title display part for the high expectation reach 2 and the low expectation reach 2, an increase in cost and capacity is prevented, and by using a corresponding brightness data table for each of the introductory parts, it is possible to appropriately stimulate the period until notification of whether or not an advantageous state will be achieved, and as a result, an appropriate title display can be performed.

[Form 45]
The gaming machine of form 45-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120);
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, a third fluctuation pattern (PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a fourth fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, a fifth fluctuation pattern (PB1-2 to PB1-4) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a sixth fluctuation pattern (PB1-J) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state. determining a fluctuation pattern from among a plurality of fluctuation patterns including a fluctuation pattern (PA2-4 to 6), a seventh fluctuation pattern (PB1-5 to 7/PB1-8 to 10) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, an eighth fluctuation pattern (PA2-7 to 9/PA2-10 to 12) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state, a ninth fluctuation pattern (PB1-11 to 13) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a tenth fluctuation pattern (PA2-13 to 15) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state;
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-JA) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-JB) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the fifth variation pattern is determined, a fifth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-2 to PB1-4) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the sixth variation pattern is determined, a sixth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-4 to PA2-6) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the seventh variation pattern is determined, a seventh command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-5 to PB1-7/PB1-8 to PB1-10) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the eighth variation pattern is determined, an eighth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-7 to PA2-9/PA2-10 to PA2-12) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the ninth variation pattern is determined, a ninth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PB1-11 to PB1-13) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the tenth variation pattern is determined, a tenth command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-13 to PA2-15) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the first reach (low base weak reach A presentation),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the first reach (low base weak reach A presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in the second reach (low base weak reach B presentation),
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the second reach (low base weak reach B presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the fifth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (low base strong reach A presentation) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the sixth command is received, it is possible to notify that the third reach (low base strong reach A presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the seventh command is received, it is possible to notify that the fourth reach (low base strong reach B performance/low base strong reach C performance) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the eighth command is received, it is possible to notify that the fourth reach (low base strong reach B performance/low base strong reach C performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the ninth command is received, it is possible to notify that the fifth reach (low base strongest reach presentation) will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
When the tenth command is received, it is possible to notify that the fifth reach (low base strongest reach presentation) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The first reach (low base weak reach A performance) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the first reach, and an introduction part until the result of the advantageous state is notified,
The second reach includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the second reach (low base weak reach B performance), and an introduction part until the result of the advantageous state is notified,
The third reach includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the third reach (low base strong reach A performance), and an introduction part until the result of the advantageous state is notified,
The fourth reach includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the fourth reach (low base strong reach B effect/low base strong reach C effect), and an introduction part until the result of the advantageous state is notified,
The fifth reach includes a title display part that displays a title display (title characters) corresponding to the fifth reach (low-base strongest reach presentation), and an introduction part until the result of the advantageous state is notified,
The third reach (low base strong reach A performance) and the fourth reach (low base strong reach B performance/low base strong reach C performance) have a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first reach (low base weak reach A performance) and the second reach (low base weak reach B performance),
The fifth reach (low base strongest reach effect) has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than any of the first reach (low base weak reach A effect), the second reach (low base weak reach B effect), the third reach (low base strong reach A effect), and the fourth reach (low base strong reach B effect/low base strong reach C effect),
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
Controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
In the title display part in the first reach (low base weak reach A performance) and the title display part in the second reach (low base weak reach B performance), a brightness data table (weak reach common title) for the first title display part which is common to the first reach is used to control the light emitting means;
In the title display part in the third reach (low base strong reach A performance) and the title display part in the fourth reach (low base strong reach B performance/low base strong reach C performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (strong reach common title) for a second title display part which is common to the third reach (low base strong reach A performance),
In the title display part in the fifth reach (low base strongest reach performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (strongest reach series strongest reach title) for the third title display part for the fifth reach,
In the introduction part of the first reach (low base weak reach A performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (weak reach system weak reach A introduction) for the introduction part of the first reach,
In the introduction part of the second reach (low base weak reach B performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (weak reach system weak reach B introduction) for the introduction part of the second reach,
In the introduction part of the third reach (low base strong reach A performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (strong reach system strong reach A introduction) for the introduction part of the third reach,
In an introduction part of the fourth reach (low base strong reach B performance/low base strong reach C performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (strong reach system strong reach B introduction/strong reach system strong reach C introduction) for the introduction part of the fourth reach,
In the introductory part of the fifth reach (low base strongest reach presentation), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table (strongest reach system strongest reach introduction) for the introductory part of the fifth reach.
According to this feature, by making the brightness data table corresponding to the title display part common for the high expectation 2 reach and the low expectation 2 reach, an increase in costs and capacity can be prevented, and by using the corresponding brightness data table for each of the introduction parts, it is possible to appropriately stimulate the period until notification of whether or not an advantageous state will be achieved, and further, by providing a dedicated brightness data table for the title display part and introduction part for the reach with the highest expectation, interest is heightened, and as a result, an ideal title display can be achieved.

[Form 46]
The gaming machine of form 46-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120);
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state are selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns;
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating (PA2-2, PA2-3)) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2 and PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of the control of the advantageous state is notified,
The display means (image display device 5)
The title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) can be changed from a first state (white) to a second state (red or gold) and displayed.
The light emission control means (performance control CPU 120)
Controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
In the title display part in the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), when the title display (title characters) is not changed to the second mode (red or gold), a first brightness data table (weak reach common title (white)) is used to control the light emitting means,
In the title display part in the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), when the title display (title characters) is changed to a second mode (red or gold), the light emitting means is controlled using a second brightness data table (weak reach common title (red) or weak reach common title (gold));
In the introductory part of the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), regardless of whether the title display (title characters) corresponding to the specific reach has changed to the second form (red or gold) or not, the light-emitting means is controlled using a common brightness data table for the introductory part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction).
According to this feature, by using a common brightness data table corresponding to each introduction part whether the title display is not changed to the second mode in the title display part of a specific reach or is changed to the second mode, an increase in cost and capacity is prevented, and by using a corresponding brightness data table for each title display part, it is possible to appropriately present the title display whether the title display is not changed to the second mode or is changed to the second mode, resulting in an appropriate title display.

[Form 47]
The gaming machine of form 47-1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player by executing a variable display of specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart) and deriving a specific display result (a special chart display result of "jackpot") as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 100);
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120);
A display means (image display device 5);
A plurality of light emitting means (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4);
A light emission control means (performance control CPU 120);
The game control means (game control microcomputer 100)
When the game medium (game ball) enters the start area (first start winning hole, second start winning hole), it is determined whether or not the game medium is controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state);
Execute variable display of the specific identification information (first special chart, second special chart),
Based on the result of the judgment, a first fluctuation pattern (PB1-JA, PB1-JB) which is a fluctuation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a second fluctuation pattern (PA2-2, PA2-3) which is a fluctuation pattern not controlled to the advantageous state are selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns;
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command (a variation pattern designation command designating (PA2-2, PA2-3)) is transmitted to the performance control means;
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command (a variation pattern designation command designating PA2-2 and PA2-3) is transmitted to the performance control means;
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
When the first command is received, it is possible to notify that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) in a specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance),
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is not controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state),
The specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is configured to include a title display part that displays a title display (title character) corresponding to the specific reach, and an introduction part until the result of the control of the advantageous state is notified,
The title display part in the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is
A first part (title start period) from when the title display corresponding to the specific reach starts to when the title display is displayed at a fixed position;
A second part (title display period, title end period) after the title display corresponding to the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance) is displayed at the fixed position,
The performance control means (performance control CPU 120)
Controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
In the first part (title start period) of the title display part in the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), a brightness data table for the first part (weak reach title start) is used to control the light emitting means,
In the second part (title display period, title end period) of the title display part in the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), a brightness data table for the second part (weak reach title display) is used to control the light emitting means,
In the introductory part of the specific reach (low base weak reach A, B performance), the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the introductory part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction).
According to this feature, by using a brightness data table corresponding to the first part from when the title display starts to be displayed in the fixed position in a specific reach until the title display is displayed in the fixed position, a brightness data table corresponding to the second part after the title display is displayed in the fixed position, and a brightness data table corresponding to the introduction part, it is possible to suitably stimulate the period during which the title display is performed and the period until notification of whether or not an advantageous state will be achieved, and as a result, it is possible to perform an appropriate title display.

[Example]
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS A gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described below.

[Basic explanation]
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

[Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1]
1 is a front view of a pachinko game machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is broadly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and game balls as game media are shot into this game area by a predetermined ball shooting device.

Note that the "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, a variable display of multiple types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described below). Variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative symbols described below, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that variations also include a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed flashing. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as the display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described below). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or variation.

The special pattern variably displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A is also called the "first special pattern," and the special pattern variably displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B is also called the "second special pattern." A special pattern game using the first special pattern is also called the "first special pattern game," and a special pattern game using the second special pattern is also called the "second special pattern game." There may be only one type of special pattern display device that variably displays the special patterns.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (electro luminescence) device, and displays various presentation images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. Various presentation images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, multiple types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) that are different from the special patterns are variably displayed as decorative identification information. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. Note that the special game and the variable display of decorative patterns that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

The screen of the image display device 5 may be provided with a display area for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display that is being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display-compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of reserved variable displays is also called the reserved memory number. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also called the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also called the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also called the total reserved memory number.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, each of which includes a plurality of LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided to the right of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning hole that is always kept in a constant open state so that game balls can enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) forms a second start winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by the solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable winning ball device 6B, for example, has an electric tulip-type device having a pair of movable pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable pieces are in a vertical position, so that the tip of the movable pieces approaches the winning ball device 6A, and the second start winning hole is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable pieces of the variable winning ball device 6B are in a tilted position, so that the second start winning hole is in an open state in which the game ball can enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the second special game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to devices that include an electric tulip-type device.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three locations are provided at the lower left of the game area and one location is provided above the variable winning ball device 6B), general winning openings 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a game ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out as prize balls.

Between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 3), and the large winning opening door forms the large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door (for the special electric device) is in the OFF state, the large prize opening door closes the large prize opening, and game balls cannot enter (pass through) the large prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door is in the ON state, the large prize opening door opens the large prize opening, and game balls can easily enter the large prize opening.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 14 balls) are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball enters the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each winning port, including the general winning port 10, is also called a "winning". In particular, a winning ball into the starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) is also called a starting winning port.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (the lower left of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers showing "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbols may also include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

A pass gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided to the right of the image display device 5. When the game ball passes through the pass gate 41, a regular game is executed.

A regular symbol pending display 25C is provided below the regular symbol display 20. The regular symbol pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the regular symbol pending memory number, which is the number of regular symbol games that are pending execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the very bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L, 8R for playing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 on the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the playing area. Furthermore, an attacca lamp 9c is provided near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the gaming board 2.

At a predetermined position on the game board 2 (above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 (described later) that operates according to the performance is provided. The movable body 32 is also provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d and the above-mentioned main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and attacca lamp 9c may be collectively referred to as the game effect lamp 9. The main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d are each configured to include an LED.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided, which is operated by the player or the like to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or game balls lent by a predetermined ball lending machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may also be provided with a payout section (ball supply tray) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. Operations on the stick controller 31A are detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

At a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that the player can press to give a predetermined command. The operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

Figure 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11, housed in a board case 201, is mounted on the rear of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting change switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting change switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing settings such as the probability of winning a jackpot and the ball payout rate in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting change switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is disposed in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is disposed to the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured, for example, using a seven-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are disposed directly in front of the main board 11 when the back surface of the game board 2 is viewed with the game machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive win ratio, winning combination ratio, and base. The consecutive win ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning port (attacker) to the total number of winning balls. The winning combination ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have entered the second start winning port (electric chute) and the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning port (attacker) to the total number of winning balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of winning balls to the number of game balls shot out. When in a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. When in a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values to be changed or confirmed.

When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The gaming machine frame 3 is provided with a rotatable glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and is configured so that the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the gaming area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a, which is formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201, including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52, from the rear side. The security cover 50A is a roughly L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

[Outline of game progress]
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player rotating the ball hitting operation handle 30 provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on the passing cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on the passing is reserved up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal winning". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal losing". When a "normal winning" occurs, an opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B in an open state for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B.

In addition, if the game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when the special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to the jackpot game state described below (when a start winning occurs but the special game based on the start winning cannot be played immediately), the special game based on that entry will be put on hold until a specified upper limit number (for example, 4) is reached.

In the special game, if a specific special symbol (a jackpot symbol, for example, "7"; the actual symbol varies depending on the type of jackpot, as described below) is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it is a "jackpot", and if a special symbol different from the jackpot symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") is displayed as a stopped special symbol, it is a "miss". Note that "misses" in this pachinko game machine 1 include "misses with time reduction" that are controlled to a high base state (time reduction state) from the next variable display without going through a jackpot game.

After the display result in the special game becomes "jackpot," the game is controlled to a jackpot game state, which is an advantageous state for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 9), whichever comes first. The predetermined period is the maximum period during which the large prize opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as the maximum opening period. This cycle in which the large prize opening is open is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until the predetermined maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the jackpot gaming state, the player can get prize balls by making the gaming ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The more rounds there are in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the upper limit opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

The "jackpot" has a jackpot type set. For example, there are multiple types of opening modes of the jackpot opening (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time-saving state, special state, etc.), and the jackpot type is set according to these. There may be jackpot types that offer many prize balls, jackpot types that offer few prize balls, or jackpot types that offer almost no prize balls.

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (period during which the special symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state and by improving the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in the regular symbol game more than in the normal state. The time-saving state is an advantageous state for the player because it is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

In the probability variable state (probability fluctuating state), in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is executed, which increases the probability that the display result will be a "jackpot" compared to the normal state. The probability variable state is an even more advantageous state for the player, as it not only improves the efficiency of special symbol fluctuation, but also makes it easier to get a "jackpot."

The time-saving state or the probability of a special bonus state will continue until one of the end conditions is met first, such as the specified number of special games being played or the start of the next big win game state. The end condition of the state in which the specified number of special games have been played is also called a count-cut (count-cut time-saving state, count-cut probability of a special bonus state, etc.).

The normal state refers to a game state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state and a probability-varying state, and is a state in which the pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in the normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified return process is not executed after the power is turned on).

The state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability/high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability/high base state, and the normal state is a low probability/low base state. A high probability state and a low base state is also called a high probability low base state.

The game state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (e.g., a specific area in a big prize opening) during a big win game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game state may be controlled to a special probability state after the big win game state.

[Progress of the production, etc.]
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects to notify the progress of the game or to liven up the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effects are described below. The effects are executed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, turning on and off the game effect lamp 9, operation of the movable body 32, or any effect device including some or all of these may be used.

As an effect that is executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the image display device 5, a variable display of decorative patterns begins in response to the start of the first or second special pattern game. At the timing when the display result (also called the determined special pattern) in the first or second special pattern game is displayed statically, the determined decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns is also displayed statically (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts to when it ends, the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, which will be described later.

In addition, when the above-mentioned reach state occurs during the variable display of the decorative symbols, a reach effect is executed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple types of reach effects are executed with different rates (also called jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation) of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" depending on the performance state. Reach effects include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than a normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative patterns (for example, "7") are displayed stopped in line on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of a "probability jackpot" that is controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, odd decorative symbols (e.g., "7") are displayed in a line, and in the case of a "non-probability jackpot (normal jackpot)" that is not controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, even decorative symbols (e.g., "6") may be displayed in a line. In this case, odd decorative symbols are also called probability jackpot symbols, and even decorative symbols are also called non-probability jackpot symbols (normal symbols). After a reach state is reached with non-probability jackpot symbols, a promotion effect may be executed that ultimately results in a "probability jackpot".

When the display result of the special game is a "miss," the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") as a "non-reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss," after the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination as a "reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. Preview effects include a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently being executed, and a pre-reading preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is on hold). As a pre-reading preview effect, an effect that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

In addition, the image display device 5 may temporarily stop the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then resume the variable display, thereby executing a pseudo consecutive performance in which a single variable display appears to be multiple variable displays.

Even during a jackpot game state, a jackpot performance is executed to notify the player of the jackpot game state. The jackpot performance may be a performance to notify the player of the number of rounds or a promotion performance to show that the value of the jackpot game state is increasing.

In addition, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo performance is executed).

[Board configuration]
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like, as shown in Fig. 3. In addition, various boards, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board, are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also equipped. The various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit mounting boards configured to realize specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on the electronic circuit board.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17, and by operating the power switch 91 (turning it ON), power from an AC power source such as an external power source such as a commercial power supply, such as 100V AC, can be supplied from the power supply board 17 to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 is equipped with, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), and a power supply circuit for converting a specified DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (for example, 12V DC or 5V DC).

The main board 11 is the main control board, and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of special games (including reserved game management), execution of regular games (including reserved game management), jackpot game status, game status, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes the programs stored in the ROM 101 to perform processes that control the progress of the game (processes that realize the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as data on the variation patterns described below, performance control commands described below, and various tables referenced when making various decisions described below) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the programs stored in the ROM 101 may be deployed to the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is configured to include, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the first special pattern display device 4A, the second special pattern display device 4B, the normal pattern display device 20, the first hold display device 25A, the second hold display device 25B, the normal hold display device 25C, etc., solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23), and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The switch circuit 110 receives a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, an IC with a built-in watchdog timer, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal is turned off when the specified power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a specified value, and is turned on when the period during which the specified power supply voltage is below the specified value continues for longer than the power-off reference time. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, pressing the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81 and solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device and the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door.

The main board 11 is connected to a display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90. The door open sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3, including the glass door frame 3a.

As part of controlling the progress of the game, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 according to the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. The presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various determination results in the main board 11 (for example, the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable pattern used when executing the special game (described in detail later)), the game status (for example, the start or end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot opening, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notifying errors, and notifying of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes the programs stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for executing performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The presentation control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute a presentation based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the content of the operation).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the performance based on instructions to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays a performance image on the image display unit 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display unit 5 based on an instruction to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal designating the on/off state of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the performance image and to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal to operate the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or to a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the turning on and off of the lamp.

In addition, the control of sound output, turning on/off of the lamp (such as supplying a sound designation signal or a lamp signal), and control of the movable body 32 (such as supplying a signal to operate the movable body 32) may be performed by the performance control CPU 120.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for performance) used to execute various performances. The random numbers for performance may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for taking in performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

The boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with the pachinko game machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

[Action]
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

[Major operations of main board 11]
First, a description will be given of the main operations of the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and a game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. Fig. 4 is a flowchart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Then, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). The initial settings include setting the stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and setting the RAM 102 to be accessible.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery condition is met (step S3). The recovery condition can be met when the clear signal is off, backup data is present, and the backup RAM is normal. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, if a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, for example, an on-state clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it is sufficient to determine in step S3 that the recovery condition is not met. The backup data only needs to be able to be stored in the RAM 102, which serves as the backup RAM for game control. In step S3, it is sufficient to check or inspect the presence or absence of backup data and the presence or absence of data errors to determine whether the recovery condition can be met.

If the recovery condition is met (step S3; Yes), recovery processing (step S4) is executed, followed by setting confirmation processing (step S5). The recovery processing in step S4 sets a working area based on the contents stored in RAM 102. By setting the working area using the backup data stored in RAM 102, the game state when the power supply was stopped is restored, and if, for example, a special symbol was changing, it is sufficient if the change of the special symbol can be resumed from the state before the stoppage.

If the recovery condition is not met (step S3; No), an initialization process (step S6) is executed, and then a setting change process (step S7) is executed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clearing process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102, and the execution of the clearing process sets initial values in the working area.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether a predetermined setting confirmation condition is met. The setting confirmation condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed when the recovery condition is met in step S3, including the clear signal being in the OFF state. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be met when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the clear signal being in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

If the setting confirmation condition is met in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting confirmation state in which the setting values set therein can be confirmed, and a setting confirmation start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by viewing them on the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is to end, a setting confirmation end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. In the game stop state, the launch of game balls by operating the ball-hitting handle, the detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20 may be controlled to stop displaying a losing symbol or the like, or to display a symbol corresponding to a game stop state other than a losing symbol. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated with it may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether a predetermined setting change condition is met. The setting change condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state, and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting change condition may also include the clear signal being in the ON state.

When the setting change condition is met in the setting change process of step S7, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting change state in which the setting value set therein can be changed, and a setting change start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is updated and displayed sequentially each time the setting change switch 52 is operated. After that, when the setting key 51 is turned off by an attendant at the game center or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is turned off. When the setting change state is to be ended, a setting change end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be in a play stop state, just as when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the associated play stop state may also end.

When the performance control board 12 receives a setting check start command or a setting change start command, it may perform control to notify the user that the setting is being checked or changed. For example, it may display a specific image on the image display device 5, output a specific sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, or cause a light-emitting component such as the game effect lamp 9 to emit light in a specific manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and the setting change process of step S7 are executed, making it possible to control the device to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 and the setting confirmation process of step S5 are executed, making it possible to control the device to the setting confirmation state. When power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off, if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 is executed but the device is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed but the device is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time (e.g., every 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10). After that, a loop process is entered. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can execute timer interrupt process periodically.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. 5. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 5 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch processing to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main side error processing, it performs an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1, and can issue a warning if necessary depending on the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output processing, it outputs data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots), start information (information indicating the number of start winnings), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability fluctuation state has occurred) that are supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1 (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process is executed to update at least a portion of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, the execution and reservation management of the special symbol game, the control of the jackpot game state, the control of the game state, etc. are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process at each timer interrupt, enabling the execution and reservation management of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), and the opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol hit". The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of reserved normal symbols is displayed by lighting the normal symbol reservation display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes a command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set a performance control command for transmission in each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, a process is performed to transmit the performance control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the performance control board 12. After executing the command control processing, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Figure 6 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S25 shown in Figure 5. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning judgment process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a start winning, store the reserved information in a specified area of the RAM 102, and update the reserved memory number. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of big win) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as reserved information. In addition, a process for predicting and judging the display result and the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value may be executed. After the reserved information and the reserved memory number are stored, a transmission setting is performed to transmit a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the judgment results such as the occurrence of a start winning, the reserved memory number, and the predictive judgment. The performance control command at the time of the start winning that has been transmitted and set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special pattern process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 4.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S120), a transmission setting is made to transmit a performance control command corresponding to each step to the performance control board 12.

The normal special pattern processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "0" (initial value). In this normal special pattern processing, a determination is made as to whether or not to start the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game based on the presence or absence of reserved information. In addition, in the normal special pattern processing, based on a random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is to be a "jackpot" and, if it is a "jackpot", the type of jackpot is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the normal special pattern processing, a determined special pattern (either a jackpot pattern or a losing pattern) to be stopped and displayed in the special pattern game is set in response to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "1", and the normal special pattern processing is terminated. In addition, the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed in priority to the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also called special pattern 2 priority consumption). Also, the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also known as winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which decision values compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a pre-determined result of whether or not the display result is a "jackpot". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when a fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2" and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special game (special game variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of the variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special pattern change process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "2". This special pattern change process includes a process for making settings to change the special pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B, and a process for measuring the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special pattern change time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change reaches the special pattern change time, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "3", and the special pattern change process ends.

The special pattern stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "3". This special pattern stop process includes a process for setting the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B to stop the fluctuation of the special pattern and to stop displaying (deriving) the confirmed special pattern that is the display result of the special pattern. If the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "4". If the display result is a "miss", when the time-saving state or the probability bonus state is controlled and the end of the number-cutting is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special pattern process flag is updated, the special pattern stop process ends.

The pre-opening process for the jackpot in step S114 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "4". This pre-opening process for the jackpot includes a process for setting the jackpot opening port to open by starting the execution of a round in the jackpot game state based on the display result being "jackpot". When the jackpot opening port is opened, a process for supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening port is executed. At this time, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the maximum open period for opening the jackpot opening port and the maximum number of times the round can be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5" and the pre-opening process for the jackpot is completed.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the jackpot opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the jackpot opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the jackpot opening is to be returned to a closed state, a process for stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door is executed, and then the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "6", and the jackpot opening process is terminated.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "6". This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of times the round that opens the big prize opening has been executed has reached a set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. When the number of times the round has been executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", whereas when the number of times the round has been executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "7". When the value of the special chart process flag is updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7". This jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation is executed as a presentation operation that notifies the end of the jackpot game state has elapsed, and a process of making various settings for starting special rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When such settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured so that the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball output rate change according to the setting value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball output rate change by using a display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the setting value. For example, the setting value is made up of six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest winning probability of a jackpot, and the winning probability of a jackpot decreasing as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. In this example, when the setting value is set to 6, the player has the highest advantage, and the advantage decreases stepwise as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. If the winning probability of a jackpot changes according to the setting value, the ball output rate may also change according to the setting value. The winning probability of a jackpot is constant regardless of the setting value, while the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may change according to the setting value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set one of a number of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by sending a setting value designation command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

Figure 7 shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table. Figure 7 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and Figure 7 (B) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the second special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol. The display result judgment table is a collection of data stored in ROM 101. In the display result judgment table, a winning judgment value compared with the random number value MR1 according to a set value is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is updated randomly within the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result judgment table, a display result judgment table common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be used.

As shown in FIG. 7(A), when the variable special chart is the first special chart, if the setting value is 1 and the game state is normal or time-saving, the value can be a number in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", 65317 to 65535 are assigned to "miss with time-saving", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Also, when the setting value is 1 and the game state is a probability variable state, among the hit determination values mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Note that when the setting value in the first special chart is 2 to 6 and the game state is normal or time-saving, it is as shown in FIG. 7(A).

As shown in FIG. 7(B), when the variable special chart is the second special chart, if the setting value is 1 and the game state is normal or time-saving, the value can be a number in the range of 0 to 65535, and of the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", 65317 to 65425 are assigned to "miss with time-saving", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Also, when the setting value is 1 and the game state is a probability variable state, of the aforementioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Note that when the setting value in the second special chart is 2 to 6 and the game state is normal or time-saving, it is as shown in FIG. 7(B).

Now, looking at the numerical range of hit determination values assigned to "jackpot" and "miss with time-saving" in each display result determination table, as shown in FIG. 8, in the display result determination table for the first special chart when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit determination values from 1020 to 1237 is set as a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set (1020 to 1237 is assigned to "jackpot"), while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value is set from 1238 as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. This non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5, and the range of 1238 to 1346 for setting value 6.

In other words, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is normal or time-saving, when the setting value is 1, among the hit judgment values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, only values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while when the setting value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1238 as the setting value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a jackpot is increased by increasing the non-common numerical range that is adjacent to the common numerical range as the set value increases, with 1020 being the reference value for determining a jackpot (jackpot reference value).

Furthermore, in the display result judgment table for the first special chart when the game state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the range of 65317 to 65535 among the hit judgment values is set as the common numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value for judging a time-saving miss regardless of the setting value. If we focus on the case where the setting value is 6, as described above, the hit judgment value is set to 1020 to 1346 as the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and the time-saving miss judgment value is set to the range of 65317 to 65535 with 65317 as the reference value for the time-saving miss (time-saving miss reference value) in a numerical range different from the range of the jackpot judgment value of the setting value 6 (1020 to 1346), so that the numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the jackpot judgment value that changes according to each setting value.

In addition, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is in a special probability state, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1346 is set as a common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set (1020 to 1346 is assigned to "jackpot"), while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value is set from 1347 as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. This non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to the range of 1347 to 1383 for setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for setting value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for setting value 4, the range of 1347 to 1556 for setting value 5, and the range of 1347 to 1674 for setting value 6.

In other words, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is in the high probability state, when the setting value is 1, among the hit judgment values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, only values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to "jackpot", while when the setting value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1347 as the setting value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a jackpot is increased by increasing the non-common numerical range that is adjacent to the common numerical range as the set value increases, with 1020 being the reference value for determining a jackpot (jackpot reference value).

In the display result judgment table for the second special chart when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1237 is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set (1020 to 1237 is assigned to "jackpot"), while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value is set from 1238 as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. This non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5, and the range of 1238 to 1346 for setting value 6.

In other words, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, in the second special chart display result judgment table when the game state is normal or time-saving, when the set value is 1, among the hit judgment values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, only values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while when the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a jackpot is increased by increasing the non-common numerical range that is adjacent to the common numerical range as the set value increases, with 1020 being the reference value for determining a jackpot (jackpot reference value).

Furthermore, in the display result judgment table for the second special chart when the game state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the range of 65317 to 65425 among the hit judgment values is set as the common numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value for judging a time-saving miss regardless of the setting value. If we focus on the case where the setting value is 6, as described above, the hit judgment value is set to 1020 to 1346 as the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and the time-saving miss judgment value is set to the range of 65317 to 65425 with 65317 as the reference value for the time-saving miss (time-saving miss reference value) in a numerical range different from the range of the jackpot judgment value of the setting value 6 (1020 to 1346), so that the numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the jackpot judgment value that changes according to each setting value.

In the second special symbol display result determination table when the game state is in a probability bonus state, the hit determination value range of 1020 to 1346 is set as a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value. The other features of the second special symbol display result determination table are the same as those of the first special symbol display result determination table.

As described above, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the common numerical range for a miss with time-saving is set to 65317 to 65535 regardless of the setting value when the gaming state is normal or when the time-saving state, and when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the common numerical range for a miss with time-saving is set to 65317 to 65425 regardless of the setting value when the gaming state is normal or when the time-saving state. In other words, when the gaming state is normal or when the time-saving state, the rate at which the variable display result is a miss with time-saving is the same for all setting values, so it is possible to prevent the setting value from making the game excessively gambling-oriented. Furthermore, for the time-saving miss, which is assigned a common judgment value for each setting value, the setting is set to a continuous numerical range from 65317, which is the time-saving miss reference value, for all setting values, so that the processing load on the CPU 103 for determining whether the variable display result is a time-saving miss can be reduced.

In addition, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, six setting values can be set, from 1 to 6, but the setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. Also, the smaller the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it may be for the player.

The jackpot type may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The fluctuation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the fluctuation pattern judgment table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may differ depending on the set value, so that the setting value may be suggested by the frequency at which normal reaches and super reaches are executed. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may be common regardless of the set value. In addition, it may be possible to execute any setting suggestion performance at different rates depending on the set value.

[Major operations of the performance control board 12]
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be described. When the performance control board 12 receives a power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process as shown in the flowchart of Fig. 9. When the performance control main process shown in Fig. 9 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the registers of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12. In addition, it executes an initial operation control process (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return it to the origin position and control to perform a predetermined operation check.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on or not (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, for example based on the register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, an interrupt occurs to receive a performance control command from the main board 11, in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 becomes ON. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt to be prohibited, but if a CPU that does not automatically become interrupt prohibited is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt prohibition command (DI command). In response to an interrupt due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, among the input ports included in the I/O 125. The performance control command taken in at this time is stored in a performance control command reception buffer provided in, for example, the RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then sets the interrupt to permitted and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various presentation control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the presentation control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read presentation control commands are performed. For example, the read presentation control command is stored in a specified area of the RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in the RAM 122 is turned on so that which presentation control command was received and the contents specified by the presentation control command can be confirmed in the presentation control process process, etc. In addition, if the presentation control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process, for example, control is performed to operate various performance devices, such as the display operation of the performance image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LEDs, and the driving operation of the movable body 32. In addition, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are made regarding the control contents of the performance operations using the various performance devices in accordance with the performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing in step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Before returning to step S73, other processes may be executed.

Figure 10 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 of Figure 9 as the performance control process processing. In the performance control process processing shown in Figure 10, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a look-ahead preview setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead preview setting process, for example, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing the look-ahead preview performance are made based on the performance control command at the time of the start winning transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, processing is executed to display the hold display based on the number of hold memories identified from the performance control command.

After executing the processing of step S161, the performance control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processing of steps S170 to S175 as described below, depending on the value of a performance process flag provided in, for example, RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various performances such as reach performances and various advance notice performances are executed, and the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the performance control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute a performance) that reflects the determined result is set. After that, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display performance process of step S172 is a process executed when the performance process flag value is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the movable body 32, to output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and to turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14, thereby executing various performance controls during the variable display of the decorative pattern. After performing such performance control, for example, in response to the reading of an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the performance control pattern, or the reception of a command specifying the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern from the main board 11, the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3" and the performance process during variable display ends.

The special winning wait process of step S173 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "3". In this special winning wait process, the presentation control CPU 120 judges whether or not a presentation control command designating the start of a jackpot game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a presentation control command designating the start of a jackpot game state is received, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "4". Also, when a command designating the start of a jackpot game state is not received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it is judged that the display result in the special winning game was a "miss", and the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value of "0". When the value of the presentation process flag is updated, the special winning wait process is terminated.

The jackpot performance process of step S174 is executed when the performance process flag value is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the jackpot gaming state is to end, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the ending performance process, and the jackpot performance process ends.

The ending presentation process of step S175 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "7". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the settings. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

[Variations of the basic description]
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes when a win is made, but it may also be an enclosed type gaming machine that encloses gaming media and awards points when a win is made.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol showing "- ") may be displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be achieved by repeatedly turning on and off the pattern. Furthermore, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the display result may not include the symbol showing "- ").

In the above basic explanation, a pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as the gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to slot machines (e.g., slot machines equipped with one or more of big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.)) that can play a game in which medals are inserted and a predetermined bet amount is set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of the control lever, and when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button, a specific combination of symbols is formed, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out to the player.

The programs and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to being distributed or provided to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, but may be distributed by being pre-installed in a storage device of the computer device or the like. Furthermore, the programs and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communications processing unit.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory, or by directly executing the game using the hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions of comparison of various percentages such as the execution percentage of effects (such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) may include one being a percentage of "0%". For example, they may also include one being a percentage of "0%" and the other being a percentage of "100%" or a percentage less than "100%".

[Description of Characteristic Part 131SG]
Next, the pachinko game machine 1 with respect to the characteristic part 131SG will be described. In the description of each step of the flowchart in the characteristic part 131SG, for example, "step S1" may be abbreviated to "S1" or "131SGS1", "normal reach" may be abbreviated to "N reach" and "super reach" to "SP reach". In addition, in the characteristic part 131SG, "variable" may be referred to as "variable display". In addition, detailed description will be omitted for configurations similar to those of the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description or configurations having similar functions but different shapes or positions, etc., by assigning the same reference numerals. In the following, the front side of FIG. 11-1 is the front (front, front) side of the pachinko game machine 1, and the back side is the back (rear) side, and the description will be based on the up, down, left and right directions when the pachinko game machine 1 is viewed from the front side. In this embodiment, the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the surface facing the player playing the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment differs from the description in FIG. 7 in that it is not possible to set one of a number of setting values (e.g., 1 to 6) that have different rates at which the jackpot display result is displayed, and is described as a gaming machine in which a "miss with time reduction" is not provided as a variable display result, and the jackpot probability is set to approximately 1/319.

In addition, after the gaming machine is powered on (when RAM clear processing is executed) or after a jackpot occurs, if the next jackpot does not occur even though the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (900 times in this embodiment) in succession in a low probability state, the machine may be controlled to time-saving state B (also called rescue time-saving state or rescue time-saving) out of the multiple types of time-saving states. This rescue time-saving state is provided to rescue players who have played for a long period of time but have not yet won a jackpot (for example, to reduce the amount of money invested in playing), and in this embodiment, it is a gaming state also called "play time".

In this embodiment, when the game is controlled to the jackpot game state of jackpot A among the multiple types of jackpots, 110 variable displays are performed in the time-saving state A (low probability/high base state) among the multiple types of time-saving states, so the number of variable displays remaining from the end of the time-saving state A to the arrival of the rescue time-saving state is 790, while when the game is controlled to the jackpot game state of either jackpot B or jackpot C among the multiple types of jackpots, 110 variable displays are performed in the probability variable state (high probability/high base state), so the number of variable displays remaining from the end of the probability variable state to the arrival of the rescue time-saving state is 900. Also, in this embodiment, the number of variable displays in the time-saving state B (low probability/high base state) based on the value of the rescue time-saving count counter becoming "0" is 1100.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-1, a first special chart reserved memory display area 130SG005D is provided at the bottom left of the image display device 5, capable of displaying a reserved display corresponding to a first special chart reserved memory that has been started but for which variable display has not yet been executed, and a second special chart reserved memory display area 130SG005U is provided at the bottom right of the image display device 5, capable of displaying a reserved display corresponding to a second special chart reserved memory that has been started but for which variable display has not yet been executed. And an active display area 130SG005F is provided at the bottom center of the image display device 5 for displaying a reserved display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed as an active display.

The right part of the image display device 5 can display a fourth symbol 131SG005J to notify the player that a variable display is being performed, and a small symbol 131SG005M, which is variable displayed in the same manner as the variable display of the decorative symbol in the center of the image display device 5, and the top right part of the image display device 5 can display a remaining number of times to reach the rescue time reduction display 131SG005Z, which shows the remaining number of times to reach the rescue time reduction, which is the number of remaining variable displays until the game is controlled to the time reduction state B (rescue time reduction state) described below.

The left side of the image display device 5 on the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1 is formed as a left game area 2L where game balls can flow down, and the right side of the image display device 5 on the game board 2 is formed as a right game area 2R where game balls can flow down. Game balls that are weakly shot out by the launching device flow down a first path as the left game area 2L, and game balls that are strongly shot out by the launching device flow down a second path as the right game area 2R.

Furthermore, a first reserved memory display area 131SG005D is provided at the bottom left of the image display device 5, which indicates the number of reserved memories of the first special chart by the number displayed on the reserved display, and a second reserved memory display area 131SG005U is provided at the bottom right of the image display device 5, which indicates the number of reserved memories of the second special chart by the number displayed on the reserved display. Furthermore, an active display area 131SG005F is provided at the bottom center of the image display device 5, which displays the reserved display corresponding to the variable display currently being executed as an active display.

In this embodiment, the special variable winning ball device 7 has a first large winning opening and a second large winning opening formed along the flow direction of the game balls. The first large winning opening can be changed between an open state where game balls can enter and a closed state where game balls cannot enter by driving a large winning opening door (not shown) to open and close by driving a solenoid 131SG082A (see FIG. 11-2). The second large winning opening can be changed between an open state where game balls can enter and a closed state where game balls cannot enter by driving a large winning opening door (not shown) to open and close by driving a solenoid 131SG082B (see FIG. 11-2).

Furthermore, a first count switch 131SG023A capable of detecting a gaming ball is provided in the first large prize opening, and a second count switch 131SG023B capable of detecting a gaming ball is provided in the second large prize opening.

In other words, game balls flowing down the left game area 2L (first path) can win in the general winning port 10 and the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A, and game balls flowing down the right game area 2R (second path) can win in the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the general winning port 10, and the first or second large winning port formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and can also pass through the passing gate 41.

In addition, in this embodiment, the switch circuit 110 is connected to the first count switch 131SG023A, the second count switch 131SG023B, and the jackpot start switch 131SG024 built into the jackpot start gate 131SG042.

There are multiple obstacle nails between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7. For this reason, game balls flowing down the left game area 2L cannot win in the second start winning hole or the large winning hole, and game balls flowing down the right game area 2R cannot win in the first start winning hole.

As shown in FIG. 11-2, at a predetermined position on the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1 in this embodiment (for example, the lower left position of the game area), there are a first special pattern display device 131SG004A capable of variable display of the first special pattern, a second special pattern display device 131SG004B capable of variable display of the second special pattern, a first reserved indicator 131SG025A capable of displaying the first reserved memory number, a second reserved indicator 131SG025B capable of displaying the second reserved memory number, a normal pattern display device 131SG020 capable of variable display of normal patterns, a normal reserved indicator 131SG025C capable of displaying the normal reserved memory number, a jackpot The game information display section includes a round indicator 131SG131 capable of displaying the number of rounds (jackpot type) of the jackpot game during play, a right-hit lamp 131SG132 that lights up in a game state in which a game ball is shot toward the right game area 2R, such as a jackpot game state, a high probability/high base state (high probability state), or a low probability/high base state (time-saving state), a high probability/high base state (high probability state), a high probability lamp 131SG133 that lights up when the game is in a high probability/high base state (high probability state), and a time-saving lamp 131SG134 that lights up in a high probability/high base state (high probability state) and a low probability/high base state (time-saving state). Note that, when the game state is normal, the right-hit lamp 131SG132 exceptionally lights up from the timing when the variable display stops if the variable display result is a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 11-2, the main board 11 is equipped with an information output circuit for outputting game information (signals) to an external device such as a management computer of the gaming center where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, via a terminal board (not shown).

In this embodiment, the second large prize opening has a V prize opening and a discharge outlet downstream of the V prize opening. In addition, a variable V prize opening device (V lid) is provided upstream of the V prize opening. The variable V prize opening device changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid. In other words, the game balls flowing down the second large prize opening can pass through the V prize opening when the variable V prize opening device is in the open state, and cannot pass through the V prize opening and instead flow down to the discharge outlet when the variable V prize opening device is in the closed state.

As shown in FIG. 11-2, the main board 11 is provided with a V switch 131SG023B1 that can detect, via the switch circuit 110, that the gaming ball has passed through the V entry port located downstream of the second large entry port, and an ejection switch 131SG023B2 that can detect that the gaming ball has passed through the ejection port.

The performance control board 12 is also connected to a vibration motor 61 built into the push button 31B and a movable body motor 207 for operating the movable body 32. The lamp control board 14 is also connected to a right-hit LED 131SG031 for encouraging a right-hit operation, a first special symbol LED 131SG032 that lights up during the variable display of the first special symbol, a second special symbol LED 131SG033 that lights up during the variable display of the second special symbol, a first hold LED 131SG034A that lights up when the first hold memory number is 1 to 2, and a first hold LED 131SG035A that lights up when the first hold memory number is 3 to 4. 31SG034B, a second pending LED 131SG035A that lights up when the second pending memory number is 1 to 2, a second pending LED 131SG035B that lights up when the second pending memory number is 3 to 4, a button LED 62 built into the push button 31B, a movable body LED 208 built into the movable body 32, and frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 provided on the gaming machine frame 3 are connected.

Figure 11-3 (A) is an explanatory diagram illustrating the random number value counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in Figure 11-3 (A), in this embodiment, on the main board 11 side, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, the random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern, the random number value MR5 for determining the normal chart display result, and the random number value MR6 for determining the initial value of MR5 are controlled to be countable. In addition, random number values other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. These random number values MR1 to MR6 may be counted by updating by software using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built into the gaming control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the gaming control microcomputer 100. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called gaming random numbers.

In this embodiment, the random numbers MR1 to MR6 are set to the ranges shown in FIG. 11-3(A), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the ranges of the random numbers MR1 to MR6 may be different depending on the settings set in the pachinko game machine 1.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101 and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The CPU 103 also executes a random number generation program, making it possible to generate all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11 side.

The ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data used to control the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of judgment tables prepared for the CPU 103 to make various judgments and decisions. The ROM 101 also stores table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation pattern judgment table that stores a plurality of variation patterns that become the variable display mode of each pattern in the variable display of special patterns, normal patterns, etc.

Figure 11-3 (B) shows an example of the configuration of a special chart display result judgment table stored in ROM 101. In this embodiment, a common special chart display result judgment table is used for the first special chart and the second special chart as the special chart display result judgment table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and separate special chart display result judgment tables may be used for the first special chart and the second special chart.

The special pattern display result determination table is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" before a determined special pattern that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in a special pattern game using a first special pattern by the first special pattern display device 4A or a special pattern game using a second special pattern by the second special pattern display device 4B, based on a random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result.

In the special chart display result judgment table in this embodiment, a numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" or "miss" depending on whether the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state).

In the special chart display result judgment table, the table data indicating the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is judgment data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the special chart display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot". In the special chart display result judgment table in this embodiment, when the game state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values are assigned to the special chart display result of a "jackpot" than when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, in the probability variable state (high probability state) in which the probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and that it is controlled to a jackpot game state is higher (about 1/80.02 in this embodiment) than the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and that it is controlled to a jackpot game state when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state) (about 1/319.68 in this embodiment). That is, in the special chart display result judgment table, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a probability variable state (high probability state), the judgment data is assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control to a jackpot gaming state so that the probability of deciding to control to a jackpot gaming state is higher than when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state.

The judgment tables stored in ROM 101 include the first special symbol display result judgment table and the second special symbol display result judgment table shown in FIG. 7, as well as the jackpot type judgment table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. 11-3 (C1) and the jackpot type judgment table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 11-3 (C2), as well as a fluctuation pattern type judgment table, a fluctuation pattern judgment table, a normal symbol display result judgment table (not shown), and a normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table (not shown).

The pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment is configured so that the probability of winning a jackpot (ball payout rate) does not change depending on the set value, but it may also be configured so that the probability of winning a jackpot (ball payout rate) changes depending on the set value.

[Big hit type determination table]
11-3(C1) and 11-3(C2) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. Of these, FIG. 11-3(C1) is a table for determining the jackpot type using reserved memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning slot (i.e., when the first special symbol is variably displayed). Also, FIG. 11-3(C1) is a table for determining the jackpot type using reserved memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning slot (i.e., when the second special symbol is variably displayed).

The jackpot type determination table is a table that is referenced when a decision is made to make the variable display result a jackpot pattern, to determine the type of jackpot as one of jackpots A to C, based on the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot type.

Now, the types of jackpots in this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 11-3 (D). In this embodiment, the jackpot types provided are jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C, for which time-saving control is executed for a maximum of 110 variable displays after the end of the jackpot game state. In addition, these jackpots A, B, and C are also jackpots for which special control is executed for a maximum of 110 variable displays after the end of the jackpot game by the game ball entering the V winning port after entering the second large winning port in the first round of the jackpot game state.

In this embodiment, the open state of the variable V winning ball device (V lid) includes a short open state (e.g., 0.1 seconds) in which the open state lasts for a short period of time, and a long open state (e.g., 15 seconds) in which the open state lasts for a long period of time. In the first round of the jackpot game state, jackpot A causes the variable V winning ball device to be in a short open state, and in the first round of the jackpot game state, jackpot B and jackpot C cause the variable V winning ball device to be in a long open state.

The jackpot game state resulting from "jackpot A" is a normal opening jackpot that changes the second large prize entry port to an open state advantageous to the player in the first round, and changes the first large prize entry port to an open state advantageous to the player in the second to sixth rounds. In addition, with "jackpot A", the variable V prize entry ball device is in a short open state in the first round, making it extremely difficult to get the game ball to enter the V prize entry port, and it is not expected that the special bonus control will be executed, so it is essentially a normal jackpot.

The jackpot game state resulting from "jackpot B" is a normal opening jackpot that changes the second large prize entry port to an open state advantageous to the player in the first round, and changes the first large prize entry port to an open state advantageous to the player in the second to sixth rounds. In addition, with "jackpot B", the variable V prize entry device is in a long open state in the first round, making it extremely easy to get the game ball to enter the V prize entry port, and it is expected that the special chance control will be executed, making it a virtual special chance jackpot.

The jackpot game state resulting from "jackpot C" is a normal opening jackpot that changes the second large prize entry port to an open state advantageous to the player in the first round, and changes the first large prize entry port to an open state advantageous to the player in the second to tenth rounds. In addition, with "jackpot C", the variable V prize entry ball device is in a long open state in the first round, making it extremely easy to get the game ball to enter the V prize entry port, and it is expected that the special chance control will be executed, making it a virtual special chance jackpot.

In this embodiment, three types of jackpots, A to C, are provided as jackpot types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or less types of jackpots, or four or more types of jackpots may be provided.

As shown in FIG. 11-3 (C1), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), of the range of MR2 determination values from 0 to 299, 0 to 149 is assigned to jackpot A, and 150 to 299 is assigned to jackpot B. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11-3 (C2), in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), of the range of MR2 determination values from 0 to 299, 0 to 99 is assigned to jackpot B, and 100 to 299 is assigned to jackpot C.

In other words, in this embodiment, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, there is a 50% probability that the game ball will enter the V winning hole in the first round of the jackpot game state, and both the special probability control and the time-saving control are implemented after the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, there is a 100% probability that the game ball will enter the V winning hole in the first round of the jackpot game state, and both the special probability control and the time-saving control are implemented after the jackpot game ends.

In this embodiment, even if a jackpot A occurs, it is possible but extremely rare for a V entry to occur when the V lid is in a short open state, so in the case of a jackpot A, it will be explained as not having a V entry and the special rate control not being executed. Also, even if a jackpot B or jackpot C occurs, it is possible but extremely rare for a V entry not to occur when the V lid is in a long open state, so in the case of a jackpot B or jackpot C, it will be explained as having a V entry and the special rate control being executed.

In this embodiment, the type of jackpot is determined using MR2, which is a random number value for determining the type of jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the type of jackpot may be determined using MR1, which is a random number value for determining the result of the special chart display.

In addition, in this embodiment, for example, as the jackpot type for the second special symbol, a form having jackpots B and C in which 110 times of probability variable control and time-saving control can be executed after the end of the jackpot game state is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a jackpot D in which time-saving control is executed 1009 times (probability variable state: 110 times + time-saving state A: 899 times) after the end of the jackpot game state may be provided. By doing so, it is almost certain that the next jackpot will be won, which increases interest. In addition, even if a jackpot does not occur in the 110 times probability variable state after the end of jackpot D and the probability variable control ends, after 899 variable displays are executed without a jackpot occurring in time-saving state A (low probability/high base state), simply executing one variable display in the normal state will further control to time-saving state B (rescue time-saving state) described later, which increases interest.

[Time-saving count]
FIG. 11-4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the number of time-saving times for each transition trigger. As shown in FIG. 11-4, in this embodiment, if a jackpot A occurs and the game ball does not enter the high probability region, (1) the time-saving control is performed 110 times, and (2) the low probability control is performed 110 times, and the game enters the high probability region. In addition, if either a jackpot B or a jackpot C occurs and the game ball enters the high probability region, (1) the time-saving control is performed 110 times, and (2) the game enters the high probability region. In this embodiment, ... In addition, when 900 variable displays are performed in a low probability state without being controlled to a jackpot, (1) time-saving control is performed 1100 times, and (2) the game is controlled to a time-saving state B (in this embodiment, a play time with 1100 time-saving times) in which low probability control is performed 1100 times. However, even if 900 fluctuations are performed again in a low probability state without being controlled to a jackpot after the end of the time-saving state B, the game is not controlled to the time-saving state B again based on this.

The rescue time-saving achievement rate is the rate at which the game is controlled to a time-saving state via rescue time-saving. The time-saving state via rescue time-saving is controlled by performing variable display n times (900 times in this embodiment) without being controlled to a jackpot game state, so the rescue time-saving achievement rate K can be calculated as follows.

K={(1-ML)^n}×100
(K = rescue time reduction achievement rate, ML = jackpot probability, n = variable display number)

Specifically, for example, if the jackpot probability ML in this embodiment is approximately 1/319, the rescue time reduction achievement rate K will be 5.9%. In addition, in the case of a gaming machine that allows the setting value to be set, if the rescue time reduction achievement rate is set to be higher as the jackpot probability is set to a lower value, the player can be rescued even if the jackpot probability is set to a low value.

[Fluctuation pattern]
11-5 and 11-6 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the variation patterns in this embodiment. The variation patterns in this embodiment are roughly classified into a loss variation pattern in which the variable display result is a loss and a big win variation pattern in which the variable display result is a big win.

As shown in Figure 11-5, the miss fluctuation patterns can be broadly divided into non-reach miss fluctuation patterns (fluctuation pattern type: non-reach fluctuation pattern) in which no reach performance is executed and a miss occurs, normal reach fluctuation patterns (fluctuation pattern type: normal reach fluctuation pattern) in which a normal reach reach performance is executed and a miss occurs, low base weak super reach fluctuation patterns (fluctuation pattern type: low base weak super reach fluctuation pattern) in which a low base weak super reach A reach performance or a low base weak super reach B reach performance is executed in a normal state (low base state) and a miss occurs, and normal state (low base state) The fluctuation pattern of low base strong Super Reach A (fluctuation pattern type: low base strong Super Reach A fluctuation pattern) in which a reach performance of low base strong Super Reach A is finally executed and a miss is obtained in a normal state (low base state), the fluctuation pattern of low base strong Super Reach B (fluctuation pattern type: low base strong Super Reach B fluctuation pattern) in which a reach performance of low base strong Super Reach B is finally executed and a miss is obtained in a normal state (low base state), and the fluctuation pattern of low base strong Super Reach C (fluctuation pattern type: low base strong Super Reach C fluctuation pattern) in which a reach performance of low base strong Super Reach C is finally executed and a miss is obtained in a normal state (low base state). The fluctuation pattern of the low base Strong Super Reach C in which the reach performance of the low base Strongest Super Reach is finally executed and a miss in the normal state (low base state) (the fluctuation pattern type is the fluctuation pattern of the low base Strongest Super Reach); the fluctuation pattern of the high base Super Reach A in which the reach performance of the high base Super Reach A is finally executed and a miss in the time-saving state A or the probability variable state (high base state) (the fluctuation pattern type is the fluctuation pattern of the high base Super Reach A); the fluctuation pattern of the high base Super Reach B in which the reach performance of the high base Super Reach B is finally executed in the time-saving state A or the probability variable state (high base state) There are fluctuation patterns for high base super reach B (fluctuation pattern type: high base super reach B fluctuation pattern) in which the reach effect of high base super reach C is finally executed in time-saving state A or high probability state (high base state) and results in a miss, and fluctuation patterns for high base super reach C (fluctuation pattern type: high base super reach C fluctuation pattern) in which the reach effect of high base super reach D is finally executed in time-saving state A or high probability state (high base state) and results in a miss (fluctuation pattern type: high base super reach D fluctuation pattern).

The four types of non-reach fluctuation patterns are: PA1-1, in which the special chart fluctuation time is 12000 ms and no reach performance is executed when the number of reserved memories of the variable display target special chart is two or less in the normal state; PA1-2, in which the special chart fluctuation time is 5000 ms and no reach performance is executed when the number of reserved memories of the variable display target special chart is three in the normal state; PA1-3, in which the special chart fluctuation time is 2000 ms and no reach performance is executed during time-saving control (time-saving state A or special probability state); and PA1-4, in which the special chart fluctuation time is 500 ms and no reach performance is executed during time-saving control (time-saving state B).

For the normal reach type of fluctuation pattern, there is one type of fluctuation pattern, PA2-1, in which the special chart fluctuation time is 20,000 ms and the normal reach reach performance is executed, resulting in a miss.

There are two types of fluctuation patterns for the low base weak super reach type: PA2-2, where the special chart fluctuation time is 43,000 ms and the reach performance of low base weak super reach A is executed, resulting in a miss, and PA2-3, where the special chart fluctuation time is 53,000 ms and the reach performance of low base weak super reach B is executed, resulting in a miss.

The three types of fluctuation patterns for the fluctuation pattern type low base strong super reach A are PA2-4, where the special chart fluctuation time is 63,000 ms, and the reach performance of low base weak super reach A is executed followed by the reach performance of low base strong super reach A, resulting in a miss; PA2-5, where the special chart fluctuation time is 73,000 ms, and the reach performance of low base weak super reach B is executed followed by the reach performance of low base strong super reach A, resulting in a miss; and PA2-6, where the special chart fluctuation time is 40,000 ms, and the reach performance of low base weak super reach A or low base weak super reach B is not executed, and the reach performance of low base strong super reach A is executed, resulting in a miss.

The three types of fluctuation patterns for the fluctuation pattern type low base strong super reach B are PA2-7, where the special chart fluctuation time is 78,000 ms, and the reach performance of low base weak super reach A is executed followed by the reach performance of low base strong super reach B, resulting in a miss; PA2-8, where the special chart fluctuation time is 83,000 ms, and the reach performance of low base weak super reach B is executed followed by the reach performance of low base strong super reach B, resulting in a miss; and PA2-9, where the special chart fluctuation time is 45,000 ms, and the reach performance of low base weak super reach A or low base weak super reach B is not executed, and the reach performance of low base strong super reach B is executed, resulting in a miss.

The three types of fluctuation patterns for the fluctuation pattern type low base strong super reach C are PA2-10, where the special chart fluctuation time is 88,000 ms, and the reach performance of low base weak super reach A is executed followed by the reach performance of low base strong super reach C, resulting in a miss; PA2-11, where the special chart fluctuation time is 93,000 ms, and the reach performance of low base weak super reach B is executed followed by the reach performance of low base strong super reach C, resulting in a miss; and PA2-12, where the special chart fluctuation time is 50,000 ms, and the reach performance of low base weak super reach A or low base weak super reach B is not executed, and the reach performance of low base strong super reach C is executed, resulting in a miss.

The three types of fluctuation patterns for the low base strongest super reach type are PA2-13, where the special chart fluctuation time is 98,000 ms, and the reach performance of low base weak super reach A is executed, followed by the reach performance of low base strongest super reach, resulting in a miss; PA2-14, where the special chart fluctuation time is 103,000 ms, and the reach performance of low base weak super reach B is executed, followed by the reach performance of low base strongest super reach, resulting in a miss; and PA2-15, where the special chart fluctuation time is 60,000 ms, and the reach performance of low base weak super reach A or low base weak super reach B is not executed, and the reach performance of low base strongest super reach is executed, resulting in a miss.

For the high base super reach A fluctuation pattern, there is one type of fluctuation pattern, PA2-16, where the special chart fluctuation time is 30,000 ms and the reach performance of the high base super reach A is executed and results in a miss. For the high base super reach B fluctuation pattern, there is one type of fluctuation pattern, PA2-17, where the special chart fluctuation time is 30,000 ms and the reach performance of the high base super reach B is executed and results in a miss. For the high base super reach C fluctuation pattern, there is one type of fluctuation pattern, PA2-18, where the special chart fluctuation time is 30,000 ms and the reach performance of the high base super reach C is executed and results in a miss. For the high base super reach D fluctuation pattern, there is one type of fluctuation pattern, PA2-19, where the special chart fluctuation time is 30,000 ms and the reach performance of the high base super reach D is executed and results in a miss.

Also, as shown in Figure 11-6, the jackpot fluctuation patterns are similar to the miss fluctuation patterns in that the following fluctuation patterns are provided: non-reach, normal reach, low base strong super reach A, low base strong super reach B, low base strong super reach C, low base strongest super reach, high base super reach A, high base super reach B, high base super reach C, and high base super reach D.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-6, as a non-reach fluctuation pattern type, there is one type of fluctuation pattern PB1-18 in which the special chart fluctuation time is 500 ms + 15,000 ms and no reach performance is executed during time-saving control (time-saving state B).

For the normal reach type of fluctuation pattern, there is one type of fluctuation pattern PB1-1, where the special chart fluctuation time is 20,000 ms + 15,000 ms and the normal reach reach performance is executed to result in a jackpot.

The three types of fluctuation patterns for the low base strong super reach A fluctuation pattern type are PB1-2, where the special chart fluctuation time is 63,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and the reach performance of low base weak super reach A is executed, followed by the reach performance of low base strong super reach A, resulting in a jackpot; PB1-3, where the special chart fluctuation time is 73,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and the reach performance of low base weak super reach B is executed, followed by the reach performance of low base strong super reach A, resulting in a jackpot; and PB-4, where the special chart fluctuation time is 40,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and the reach performance of low base weak super reach A or low base weak super reach B is not executed, and the reach performance of low base strong super reach A is executed, resulting in a jackpot.

The three types of fluctuation patterns for the fluctuation pattern type low base strong super reach B are PB1-5, where the special chart fluctuation time is 78,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and the reach performance of low base weak super reach A is executed, followed by the reach performance of low base strong super reach B, resulting in a jackpot; PB1-6, where the special chart fluctuation time is 83,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and the reach performance of low base weak super reach B is executed, followed by the reach performance of low base strong super reach B, resulting in a jackpot; and PB1-7, where the special chart fluctuation time is 45,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and the reach performance of low base weak super reach A or low base weak super reach B is not executed, and the reach performance of low base strong super reach B is executed, resulting in a jackpot.

The three types of fluctuation patterns for the fluctuation pattern type low base strong super reach C are PB1-8, where the special chart fluctuation time is 88,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and the reach performance of low base weak super reach A is executed, followed by the reach performance of low base strong super reach C, resulting in a jackpot; PB1-9, where the special chart fluctuation time is 93,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and the reach performance of low base weak super reach B is executed, followed by the reach performance of low base strong super reach C, resulting in a jackpot; and PB1-10, where the special chart fluctuation time is 50,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and the reach performance of low base weak super reach A or low base weak super reach B is not executed, and the reach performance of low base strong super reach C is executed, resulting in a jackpot.

The three types of fluctuation patterns for the low base strongest super reach type are PB1-11, where the special chart fluctuation time is 98,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and the reach performance of low base weak super reach A is executed, followed by the reach performance of low base strongest super reach, resulting in a jackpot; PB1-12, where the special chart fluctuation time is 103,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and the reach performance of low base weak super reach B is executed, followed by the reach performance of low base strongest super reach, resulting in a jackpot; and PB1-13, where the special chart fluctuation time is 60,000 ms + 15,000 ms, and the reach performance of low base weak super reach A or low base weak super reach B is not executed, and the reach performance of low base strongest super reach is executed, resulting in a jackpot.

For the high base super reach A fluctuation pattern, there is one type of fluctuation pattern PB1-14, where the special chart fluctuation time is 30000ms + 15000ms, and the reach performance of the high base super reach A is executed to result in a jackpot. For the high base super reach B fluctuation pattern, there is one type of fluctuation pattern PB1-15, where the special chart fluctuation time is 30000ms + 15000ms, and the reach performance of the high base super reach B is executed to result in a jackpot. For the high base super reach C fluctuation pattern, there is one type of fluctuation pattern PB1-16, where the special chart fluctuation time is 30000ms + 15000ms, and the reach performance of the high base super reach C is executed to result in a jackpot. The variation pattern type for high base super reach D is a variation pattern of PB1-17, in which the special chart variation time is 30,000 ms + 15,000 ms and the reach performance of high base super reach D is executed, resulting in a jackpot.

[Fluctuation pattern type determination table/fluctuation pattern determination table]
The judgment table stored in ROM 101 includes a plurality of fluctuation pattern type judgment tables for determining a fluctuation pattern type according to a game state and a variable display result, and a plurality of fluctuation pattern type judgment tables for determining a fluctuation pattern according to a fluctuation pattern determined in the fluctuation pattern type judgment table, a game state, a variable display result, and the number of reserved memories of special patterns that execute a variable display (number of reserved memories subject to variable display).

In the variation pattern setting process in this embodiment, a variation pattern type determination table is selected according to the game state and the variable display result. Next, the selected variation pattern type determination table is compared with the random number value MR3 read in step 131SGS55 of the normal special symbol processing to determine the variation pattern type.

For example, when the game state is normal and the variable display result is a miss, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A shown in Figure 11-7 (A) is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A is compared with the value of the random number value MR3 to determine the fluctuation pattern type. If the value of the random number value MR3 is in the range of 0 to 3299, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "non-reach", if the value of the random number value MR3 is in the range of 3300 to 4053, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "normal reach", if the value of the random number value MR3 is in the range of 4054 to 4073, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "low base weak super reach", if the value of the random number value MR3 is in the range of 4074 to 4081, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "low base strong super reach A", if the value of the random number value MR3 is in the range of 4082 to 4089, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "low base strong super reach B", if the value of the random number value MR3 is in the range of 4090 to 4094, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "low base strong super reach C", and if the value of the random number value MR3 is in the range of 4095, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "low base strongest super reach".

In addition, if the game state is the time-saving state A or the probability variable state and the variable display result is a miss, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B shown in Figure 11-7 (B) is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B is compared with the value of the random number value MR3 to determine the fluctuation pattern type. If the value of the random number value MR3 is in the range of 0 to 3849, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "non-reach", if the value of the random number value MR3 is in the range of 3850 to 4048, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "normal reach", if the value of the random number value MR3 is in the range of 4049 to 4066, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "high base super reach A", if the value of the random number value MR3 is in the range of 4067 to 4083, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "high base super reach B", if the value of the random number value MR3 is in the range of 4084 to 4094, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "high base super reach C", and if the value of the random number value MR3 is in the range of 4095, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "high base super reach D".

In addition, if the game state is time-saving state B and the variable display result is a miss, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C shown in FIG. 11-7 (C) is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C is compared with the value of the random number value MR3 to determine the fluctuation pattern type. If the value of the random number value MR3 is in the range of 0 to 4095, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "non-reach."

Also, if the game state is normal and the variable display result is a jackpot, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A shown in FIG. 11-7 (D) is selected, and the fluctuation pattern type is determined by comparing the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A with the value of the random number value MR3. If the value of the random number value MR3 is in the range of 0 to 1298, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "normal reach", if the value of the random number value MR3 is in the range of 1299 to 1934, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "low base strong super reach A", if the value of the random number value MR3 is in the range of 1935 to 2676, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "low base strong super reach B", if the value of the random number value MR3 is in the range of 2677 to 3706, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "low base strong super reach C", and if the value of the random number value MR3 is in the range of 3707 to 4095, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "low base strongest super reach".

In addition, if the game state is the time-saving state A or the probability variable state and the variable display result is a miss, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B shown in FIG. 11-7 (E) is selected, and the fluctuation pattern type is determined by comparing the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B with the value of the random number value MR3. If the value of the random number value MR3 is in the range of 0 to 25, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "normal reach", if the value of the random number value MR3 is in the range of 26 to 975, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "high base super reach A", if the value of the random number value MR3 is in the range of 976 to 2075, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "high base super reach B", if the value of the random number value MR3 is in the range of 2076 to 3380, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "high base super reach C", and if the value of the random number value MR3 is in the range of 3381 to 4095, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "high base super reach D".

In addition, if the game state is time-saving state B and the variable display result is a miss, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table C shown in FIG. 11-7 (F) is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C is compared with the value of the random number value MR3 to determine the fluctuation pattern type. If the value of the random number value MR3 is in the range of 0 to 4095, the fluctuation pattern type is determined to be "non-reach."

After the type of variation pattern is determined as described above, one of the variation pattern determination tables shown in Figures 11-8 to 11-10 is selected according to the game state, the variable display result, and the reserved memory number of special symbols that execute the variable display (reserved number of symbols to be variable displayed), and the selected variation pattern determination table is compared with the random number value MR3 read in step 131SGS55 of the normal processing of the special symbols to determine the type of variation pattern.

For example, if the variable display result is a miss, the game state is normal, and the number of reserved memories for variable display is 0 to 2, the miss variation pattern determination table A shown in FIG. 11-8 (A) is selected, and the variation pattern is determined by comparing the miss variation pattern determination table A with the value of the random number value MR4. At this time, if the determined variation pattern type is a non-reach, the variation pattern is determined to be PA1-1 if the value of the random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255. If the determined variation pattern type is a normal reach, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-1 if the value of the random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255. If the determined variation pattern type is a low base weak super reach, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-2 if the value of the random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 199, and the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-3 if the value of the random number value MR4 is within the range of 200 to 255.

When the determined type of fluctuation pattern is low base strong super reach A, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-4, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 89 to 173, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-4, and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 174 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-5. When the determined type of fluctuation pattern is low base strong super reach B, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-7, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 89 to 173, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-8, and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 174 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-9.

If the determined type of fluctuation pattern is low base strong super reach C, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-10, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 89 to 173, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-11, and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 174 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-12. If the determined type of fluctuation pattern is low base strongest super reach, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-13, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 89 to 173, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-14, and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 1743 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-15.

In addition, if the variable display result is a miss, the game state is normal, and the number of reserved memories for variable display is three, the miss variation pattern determination table B shown in FIG. 11-8 (B) is selected, and the variation pattern is determined by comparing the miss variation pattern determination table B with the value of the random number value MR4. At this time, if the determined variation pattern type is a non-reach, the variation pattern is determined to be PA1-2 if the value of the random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255. If the determined variation pattern type is a normal reach, the variation pattern is determined to be PA2-1 if the value of the random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255.

If the determined type of fluctuation pattern is low base strong super reach A, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-4, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 89 to 173, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-4, and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 173 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-5. If the determined type of fluctuation pattern is low base strong super reach B, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-7, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 89 to 173, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-8, and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 174 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-9.

If the determined type of fluctuation pattern is low base strong super reach C, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-10, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 89 to 173, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-11, and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 174 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-12. If the determined type of fluctuation pattern is low base strongest super reach, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 88, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-13, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 89 to 173, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-14, and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 174 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-15.

In addition, if the variable display result is a miss and the game state is time-saving state A or a sure-win state, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C shown in FIG. 11-9 (A) is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined by comparing the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C with the value of the random number value MR4. At this time, if the determined fluctuation pattern type is a non-reach, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA1-3 if the value of the random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255. If the determined fluctuation pattern type is a normal reach, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-1 if the value of the random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255.

If the determined type of fluctuation pattern is high base super reach A, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-16 if the value of random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255. If the determined type of fluctuation pattern is high base super reach B, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-17 if the value of random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255. If the determined type of fluctuation pattern is high base super reach C, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-18 if the value of random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255. If the determined type of fluctuation pattern is high base super reach D, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA2-19 if the value of random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255.

In addition, if the variable display result is a miss and the game state is time-saving state B, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table D shown in FIG. 11-9 (B) is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined by comparing the miss fluctuation pattern determination table D with the value of the random number value MR4. At this time, if the determined fluctuation pattern type is a non-reach, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA1-4 if the value of the random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255.

In addition, if the variable display result is a jackpot and the game state is normal, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A shown in FIG. 11-10 (A) is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined by comparing the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A with the value of the random number value MR4. At this time, if the determined fluctuation pattern type is a normal reach, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-1 if the value of the random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255.

If the determined type of fluctuation pattern is low base strong super reach A, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 81, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-2, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 82 to 166, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-3, and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 167 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-4. If the determined type of fluctuation pattern is low base strong super reach B, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 81, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-5, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 82 to 166, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-6, and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 167 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-7.

If the determined type of fluctuation pattern is low base strong super reach C, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 81, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-8, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 82 to 166, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-9, and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 167 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-10. If the determined type of fluctuation pattern is low base strongest super reach, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 0 to 81, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-11, if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 82 to 166, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-12, and if the value of random number MR4 is within the range of 167 to 255, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-13.

In addition, if the variable display result is a jackpot and the game state is time-saving state A or a sure-win state, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B shown in FIG. 11-10 (B) is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined by comparing the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B with the value of the random number value MR4. At this time, if the determined fluctuation pattern type is a normal reach, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-1 if the value of the random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255.

If the determined fluctuation pattern type is high base super reach A, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-14 if the value of random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255. If the determined fluctuation pattern type is high base super reach B, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-15 if the value of random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255. If the determined fluctuation pattern type is high base super reach C, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-16 if the value of random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255. If the determined fluctuation pattern type is high base super reach D, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-17 if the value of random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255.

In addition, if the variable display result is a jackpot and the game state is time-saving state B, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table C shown in FIG. 11-10 (C) is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined by comparing the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table C with the value of the random number value MR4. At this time, if the determined fluctuation pattern type is a non-reach, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-18 if the value of the random number value MR4 is within the range of 0 to 255.

[Super Reach Performance Expectations]
The jackpot expectation rate when the variation pattern type and the variation pattern are determined as described above is as shown in Figures 11-11 (A) to (C). The jackpot expectation rate of the super reach performance is the rate of a jackpot when the corresponding super reach performance is executed, and is a value calculated by dividing the rate of a jackpot when the corresponding super reach performance is executed by the sum of the rate of a jackpot when the corresponding super reach performance is executed and the rate of a miss when the corresponding super reach performance is executed.

As shown in Figure 11-11 (A), of the Super Reach reach effects executed when the game state is normal, the low base weak Super Reach A and low base weak Super Reach B reach effects do not directly result in a jackpot, so the expected jackpot probability is 0% for each. However, the low base weak Super Reach A and low base weak Super Reach B reach effects can develop into other Super Reach (low base strong Super Reach A-C, low base strongest reach) reach effects, and the expected probability of development from low base weak Super Reach A to other Super Reach reach effects is approximately 44%, and the expected probability of development from low base weak Super Reach B to other Super Reach reach effects is approximately 68%. The expected rate of development of a Super Reach performance is the rate at which the corresponding Super Reach performance develops into another Super Reach performance when executed, and is a value calculated by dividing the rate at which the corresponding Super Reach performance develops into another Super Reach performance by the sum of the rate at which the corresponding Super Reach performance develops into another Super Reach performance and the rate at which the corresponding Super Reach performance is executed and does not develop into another Super Reach performance, but is a miss.

In addition, among the Super Reach reach effects that are executed when the game state is normal, the expected jackpot probability of the low base strong Super Reach A reach effect is approximately 20%, the expected jackpot probability of the low base strong Super Reach B reach effect is approximately 25%, the expected jackpot probability of the low base strong Super Reach C reach effect is approximately 35%, and the expected jackpot probability of the low base strongest Super Reach reach effect is approximately 55%. Furthermore, the jackpot expectancy of the reach performances of low base strong Super Reach A to C and low base strongest Super Reach differs depending on whether it develops from low base weak Super Reach A, whether it develops from low base weak Super Reach B, or whether it is executed directly without going through low base weak Super Reach A or B. The jackpot expectancy of the reach performance of low base strong Super Reach A developed from low base weak Super Reach A is approximately 19%, the jackpot expectancy of the reach performance of low base strong Super Reach A developed from low base weak Super Reach B is approximately 20%, the jackpot expectancy of the reach performance of low base strong Super Reach A executed directly without going through B is approximately 21%, the jackpot expectancy of the reach performance of low base strong Super Reach B developed from low base weak Super Reach A is approximately 24%, and the jackpot expectancy of the reach performance of low base strong Super Reach B developed from low base weak Super Reach B is approximately 23%. The expected jackpot probability of the reach performance is about 25%, the expected jackpot probability of the reach performance of low base strong super reach B executed directly without going through B is about 27%, the expected jackpot probability of the reach performance of low base strong super reach C developed from low base weak super reach A is about 33%, the expected jackpot probability of the reach performance of low base strong super reach C developed from low base weak super reach B is about 35%, the expected jackpot probability of the reach performance of low base strong super reach C executed directly without going through B is about 37%, the expected jackpot probability of the reach performance of low base strongest super reach developed from low base weak super reach A is about 53%, the expected jackpot probability of the reach performance of low base strongest super reach developed from low base weak super reach B is about 55%, the expected jackpot probability of the reach performance of low base strongest super reach executed directly without going through B is about 57%.

As shown in Figure 11-11 (B), when the game state is time-saving state A, the expected jackpot probability of the reach performance of high base super reach A is approximately 14%, the expected jackpot probability of the reach performance of high base super reach B is approximately 16%, the expected jackpot probability of the reach performance of high base super reach C is approximately 27%, and the expected jackpot probability of the reach performance of high base super reach D is approximately 70%.

As shown in Figure 11-11 (C), when the game state is in a special state, the expected jackpot probability of the reach effect of high base Super Reach A is approximately 40%, the expected jackpot probability of the reach effect of high base Super Reach B is approximately 45%, the expected jackpot probability of the reach effect of high base Super Reach C is approximately 60%, and the expected jackpot probability of the reach effect of high base Super Reach D is approximately 90%.

As described below, in the Super Reach performance, it is possible to display an expectation indication display that indicates the jackpot expectation of the corresponding Super Reach performance by the number of stars. As shown in Figure 11-11 (A), among the Super Reach that are executed when the gaming state is in the normal state, the expectation indication display is not displayed in the reach performances of low base weak Super Reach A and B, while the expectation indication display in the reach performance of low base strong Super Reach A displays 3 stars, the expectation indication display in the reach performance of low base strong Super Reach B displays 3.5 stars, the expectation indication display in the reach performance of low base strong Super Reach C displays 4 stars, and the expectation indication display in the reach performance of low base strongest Super Reach displays 4.5 stars. As shown in Figures 11-11 (B) and (C), when the game state is in the time-saving state A and the probability bonus state, the expectation indication display for the reach performance of high base super reach A displays 3 stars, the expectation indication display for the reach performance of high base super reach B displays 3.5 stars, the expectation indication display for the reach performance of high base super reach C displays 4 stars, and the expectation indication display for the reach performance of high base super reach D displays 4.5 stars.

In the Super Reach reach performance executed when the game state is normal and in the Super Reach reach performance executed when the game state is in a special probability state, the same number of stars may be displayed in the expectation indication display, but as shown in Figures 11-12 (A) and (B), even if the number of stars displayed in the expectation indication display is the same, the suggested jackpot expectation is not the same. In the case where the number of stars displayed in the expectation indication display is the same, a higher jackpot expectation is suggested in the Super Reach reach performance executed when the game state is in a special probability state than in the Super Reach reach performance executed when the game state is normal.

In addition, whether it is a Super Reach reach performance that is executed when the gaming state is normal or a Super Reach reach performance that is executed when the gaming state is in a special state, the suggested probability of a jackpot increases for every 0.5 increase in the number of stars displayed in the expectation suggestion display, and as shown in Figures 11-12 (A) and (B), in the expectation suggestion display of a Super Reach reach performance in either gaming state, the more stars there are, the greater the increase in the suggested probability of a jackpot. Also, as shown in Figures 11-12 (A) and (B), the increase in the jackpot expectation rate when the number of stars displayed in the expectation rate suggestion display increases from 3 to 3.5 is the same for both the Super Reach reach performance executed when the game state is normal and the Super Reach reach performance executed when the game state is in a special probability state, but the increase in the jackpot expectation rate when the number of stars displayed in the expectation rate suggestion display increases from 3.5 to 4, or from 4 to 4.5, is greater for the Super Reach reach performance executed when the game state is in a special probability state than for the Super Reach reach performance executed when the game state is normal.

[Performance control command]
FIG. 11-13(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the performance control command in this embodiment. The performance control command is, for example, a two-byte configuration, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in FIG. 11-13(A) is only an example, and other command formats may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-13(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. Command 81XXH is a variation pattern designation command that specifies the variation pattern (variation time) of the decorative symbols etc. that are variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is set arbitrarily according to the contents of the instruction by the performance control command. In addition, in the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the specified variation pattern etc.

Command 8C00H is a variable display result specification command, which is a presentation control command that specifies a variable display result such as a special pattern or a decorative pattern. In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-13 (B), different EXT data is set depending on the determination result (predetermined result) of whether the variable display result is a "miss" or a "jackpot", and the determination result (jackpot type determination result) of which of multiple types of jackpot type should be used if the variable display result is a "jackpot".

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-13(B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command in which the variable display result is "miss". Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot A". Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot B". Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot C".

Command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command that specifies the stopping (confirmation) of the variable display of decorative patterns in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5.

Command 9000H is an initialization specification (power-on specification) command for displaying the initial screen when power is turned on in the image display device 5. Command 9200H is a power outage recovery specification command for displaying a power outage recovery screen on the image display device 5 indicating that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been restored from a power outage (power outage) state.

Command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, for example, different EXT data is set depending on the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is not performed (low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed (high base state, time-saving state).

Command A0XXH is a jackpot start command (also called a "fanfare command") that specifies the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot game state. Command A1XXH is a large prize opening open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening is in an open state during a jackpot game state. Command A2XXH is a large prize opening post-open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening has changed from an open state to a closed state during a jackpot game state. Command A3XXH is a jackpot end command that specifies the display of an effect image at the end of a jackpot game state.

In the jackpot start designation command and jackpot end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result, for example by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. Alternatively, in the jackpot start designation command and jackpot end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be made different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. In the jackpot opening notification command and the jackpot opening after notification command, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game state (for example, "1" to "10").

Command B100H is a first start port entry designation command that notifies the first start condition for executing a special symbol game using a first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (first start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A being detected by the first start port switch 22A. Command B200H is a second start port entry designation command that notifies the second start condition for executing a special symbol game using a second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (second start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B being detected by the second start port switch 22B.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command that notifies the first reserved memory number in order to display the reserved memory number of special figures in a identifiable manner in the first reserved memory display area 132SG005D, etc. Command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command that notifies the second reserved memory number in order to display the reserved memory number of special figures in a identifiable manner in the second reserved memory display area 132SG005U, etc. The first reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the first start port entry designation command is transmitted based on, for example, the first start condition being satisfied when the game ball passes (enters) the first start entry port. The second reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the second start port entry designation command is transmitted based on, for example, the second start condition being satisfied when the game ball passes (enters) the second start entry port. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command may be sent in response to the start of execution of the special game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is met (when the pending memory number is reduced).

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command or the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total pending memory number may be sent. In other words, the total pending memory number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total pending memory number.

Command C4XXH is a pattern designation command that specifies the winning result at the time of the initial winning. Command C6XXH is a variable category designation command that specifies the variable category of the winning result at the time of the initial winning.

Command D100H is a jackpot start switch passing notification command that notifies the player that the game ball has passed the jackpot start switch 131SG024 when the variable display result is a jackpot, i.e., that the jackpot game has started. Command D200H is a V win notification command that notifies the player that the game ball has passed the V switch 131SG023B1 during a jackpot game, i.e., that the game state will be controlled to a high probability state after the jackpot game ends.

Command E1XXH is a remaining time-saving count notification command that notifies the number of remaining time-saving control times in the time-saving state excluding rescue time-saving (time-saving state A). Command E2XXH is a remaining chance-of-chance-number notification command that notifies the number of remaining chance-of-chance-control times in the chance-of-chance-chance state.

Command F100H is a right-hit LED on notification command that notifies the right-hit LED131SG031 to light up. Command F101H is a right-hit LED off notification command that notifies the right-hit LED131SG031 to light up.

Command 91XXH is a command to specify the number of times rescue time-saving is performed upon recovery, and is a performance control command that converts the value of the rescue time-saving counter to a hexadecimal number and specifies it when the power is restored. With the command to specify the number of times rescue time-saving is performed upon recovery, different EXT data is set according to each digit (first, second, third, fourth digit) of the value of the rescue time-saving counter when the power is restored (a four-digit value), as shown in FIG. 11-13 (C), for example.

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-13 (C), commands 9100H to 910FH are recovery time reduction number specification 1 commands that specify the first digit of the value of the recovery time reduction number. Commands 9110H to 911FH are recovery time reduction number specification 2 commands that specify the second digit of the value of the recovery time reduction number. Commands 9130H to 913FH are recovery time reduction number specification 3 commands that specify the third digit of the value of the recovery time reduction number. Commands 9140H to 914FH are recovery time reduction number specification 4 commands that specify the fourth digit of the value of the recovery time reduction number.

Command 94XXH is a rescue time reduction count designation command, which is a presentation control command that designates the remaining number of variable display times (126 times or less) until rescue time reduction occurs. With the rescue time reduction count designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-13 (D), different EXT data is set according to the remaining number of variable display times (126 times or less) until rescue time reduction occurs.

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-13 (D), command 9400H is a command specifying number A of rescue time reductions that specifies that the rescue time reduction has been reached. Command 9401H is a command specifying number B of rescue time reductions that specifies that 1 to 125 times remain until the rescue time reduction is reached. Command 947EH is a command specifying number C of rescue time reductions that specifies that 126 times remain until the rescue time reduction is reached. Command 947FH is a command specifying number D of rescue time reductions that specifies that 127 or more times remain until the rescue time reduction is reached.

Command 96XXH is a rescue time reduction number 2 designation command, which is a performance control command that designates the remaining number of variable displays (in units of 100) until the rescue time reduction occurs. In the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command, for example, a value corresponding to the remaining number of variable displays (in units of 100) until the rescue time reduction occurs is set in the EXT data of the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command. For example, if the remaining number of variable displays until the rescue time reduction occurs is 100, command 9601H is sent as the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command, and if the remaining number of variable displays is 700, command 9607H is sent as the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command. Command 9F00(H) is a customer waiting demonstration display designation command that designates a customer waiting demonstration.

[Game control data storage area]
The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 11-2 may be a backup RAM, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power source created in a predetermined power supply board. In other words, even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped, part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 are stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power source discharges and the backup power source is unable to supply power). In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, i.e., the control state of the game control means (such as a special chart process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary to restore the control state to the state before the occurrence of a power outage, etc., based on the data, when the power is restored after a power outage, etc. occurs. In addition, the data corresponding to the control state and the data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

In this RAM 102, for example, a game control data holding area 131SG150 as shown in FIG. 11-14 is provided as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The game control data holding area 131SG150 shown in FIG. 11-14 includes a first special chart reserve memory unit 131SG151A, a second special chart reserve memory unit 131SG151B, a regular chart reserve memory unit 131SG151C, a game control flag setting unit 131SG152, a game control timer setting unit 131SG153, a game control counter setting unit 131SG154, and a game control buffer setting unit 131SG155.

The first special symbol reservation memory unit 131SG151A stores reservation data of a special symbol game (a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) in which a game ball has passed (entered) through the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A and a start winning (first start winning) has occurred but has not yet started. As an example, the first special symbol reservation memory unit 131SG151A associates reservation numbers with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game ball) into the first start winning port, and stores the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern type, and the random number value MR4 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the establishment of the first start condition when the game ball passes (enters), as reservation data until the number of memories reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The upper limit of reserved data (reserved memory) that can be stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit 131SG151B is always 4 regardless of the game state. The reserved data stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 131SG151A in this way indicates that the execution of the special chart game using the first special chart is reserved, and becomes reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be hit based on the variable display result (special chart display result) in this special chart game.

The second special symbol reservation memory unit 131SG151B stores reservation data of a special symbol game (a special symbol game using a second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B) in which a game ball has passed (entered) through the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a start winning (second start winning) has occurred but has not yet started. As an example, the second special symbol reservation memory unit 131SG151B associates the reserved number with the winning order (the order of detection of the game ball) into the second start winning port, and stores the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern type, and the random number value MR4 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the establishment of the second start condition in the game ball's passage (entry), as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The upper limit of reserved data (reserved memory) that can be stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit 131SG151B is always 4, regardless of the game status. The reserved data stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit 131SG151B thus indicates that the execution of a special chart game using the second special chart is reserved, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be hit based on the variable display result (special chart display result) in this special chart game.

In other words, in this embodiment, a maximum of four reserved memories can be stored as the first special chart reserved memory (reserved memories that can be stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 131SG151A), and a maximum of four reserved memories can be stored as the second special chart reserved memory (reserved memories that can be stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit 131SG151B).

The reserved information (first reserved information) based on the establishment of the first start condition by the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning port, and the reserved information (second reserved information) based on the establishment of the second start winning condition by the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning port may be stored in a common reserved memory unit in association with the reserved number. In this case, start port data indicating whether the game ball passed (entered) the first or second start winning port may be included in the reserved information and stored in association with the reserved number.

When variable display is executed, first, if there is a second special symbol reserved memory in the normal special symbol processing (see FIG. 6), the CPU 103 reads out the random numbers MR1 to MR4 from the second special symbol reserved memory 131SG151B and then shifts the contents of the second special symbol reserved memory 131SG151B. In other words, if the random numbers MR1 to MR4 are stored as reserved memories for reserved number 1 in the second special symbol reserved memory 131SG151B, the CPU 103 reads out the random numbers MR1 to MR4 stored as reserved memories for reserved number 1, erases the reserved memories for reserved number 1, and re-stores the reserved memories stored as reserved memories for reserved number 2 as reserved memories for reserved number 1, the reserved memories stored as reserved memories for reserved number 3 as reserved memories for reserved number 2, and the reserved memories stored as reserved memories for reserved number 4 as reserved memories for reserved number 3.

In addition, if no reserved memory is stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit 131SG151B, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first special chart reserved memory exists. If the first special chart reserved memory exists, the CPU 103 reads the random number values MR1 to MR4 from the first special chart reserved memory unit 131SG151A and then shifts the memory contents of the first special chart reserved memory unit 131SG151A. In other words, when the random number values MR1 to MR4 are stored as the reserved memory of reserved number 1 in the first special chart reserved memory unit 131SG151A, the CPU 103 reads out the values of the random number values MR1 to MR4 stored as the reserved memory of reserved number 1, erases the reserved memory of reserved number 1, and re-stores the reserved memory stored as reserved memory of reserved number 2 as reserved memory of reserved number 1, the reserved memory stored as reserved memory of reserved number 3 as reserved memory of reserved number 2, and the reserved memory stored as reserved memory of reserved number 4 as reserved memory of reserved number 3.

Then, the CPU 103 executes a judgment of the variable display result based on the random number value MR1 read from the first special pattern reserved memory unit 131SG151A or the second special pattern reserved memory unit 131SG151B (if the variable display result is a jackpot, it also judges the type of jackpot based on the random number value MR2), and then in the variation pattern judgment process (see FIG. 6), it judges the variation pattern type using a variation pattern type judgment table that differs depending on the game state, the variable display result, and the number of reserved memories of the special pattern that executes the variable display, and then it further determines the variation pattern using a variation pattern judgment table that differs depending on the determined variation pattern type, the game state, the number of reserved memories, etc.

In other words, in this embodiment, the CPU 103 can determine the variation pattern in the variation pattern setting process according to the number of reserved memories subtracted by 1 from the number of reserved memories immediately before the variable display.

The regular symbol reserve memory unit 131SG151C stores reserve information for regular symbol games that have not yet been started by the regular symbol display device 20, even though a game ball has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the regular symbol reserve memory unit 131SG151C associates the game balls with reserve numbers in the order in which they are detected by the gate switch 21, and stores numerical data indicating a random number value MR4 for determining the regular symbol display result extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the passage of the game ball as reserved data, until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 131SG152 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated depending on the progress of the game on the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 131SG152 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 131SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 131SG153 stores data indicating the timer values of multiple types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 131SG154 is provided with multiple types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 131SG154 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 131SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting some or all of the game random numbers in a manner that allows the CPU 103 to update them by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 131SG154, random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR6, are stored as random count values, and the numerical data indicating each random number is updated periodically or irregularly according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the updating operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scrambling or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 104.

The game control buffer setting unit 131SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 131SG155 stores data indicating the buffer values in each of multiple types of buffers.

[Performance control data storage area]
The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 is provided with a performance control data holding area 131SG190 as shown in Fig. 11-15(A) as an area for holding various data used to control performance operations. The performance control data holding area 131SG190 shown in Fig. 11-15(A) includes a performance control flag setting unit 131SG191, a performance control timer setting unit 131SG192, a performance control counter setting unit 131SG193, and a performance control buffer setting unit 131SG194.

The performance control flag setting unit 131SG191 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated according to the performance operation state, such as the display state of the performance image on the screen of the image display device 5, and the performance control commands sent from the main board 11. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 131SG191 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit 131SG192 is provided with multiple types of timers that are used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as the display operation of a performance image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the performance control timer setting unit 131SG192 stores data indicating the timer values of each of the multiple types of timers.

The performance control counter setting unit 131SG193 is provided with multiple types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control counter setting unit 131SG193 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit 131SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting unit 131SG194 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of multiple types of buffers.

In this embodiment, the data constituting the start winning time receiving command buffer 131SG194A as shown in FIG. 11-15 (B) is stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting unit 131SG194. The start winning time receiving command buffer 131SG194A is provided with a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total reserved memory number of the first special chart reserved memory (for example, "4"). The start winning time receiving command buffer 131SG194A is provided with a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total reserved memory number of the second special chart reserved memory (for example, "4"). When a start winning occurs in the first start winning port or the second start winning port, a set of four commands, namely, a start winning port winning designation command (first start winning port winning designation command or second start winning port winning designation command), a pattern designation command, a variable category designation command, and a reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command or second reserved memory number notification command), is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special pattern reserved memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special pattern reserved memory in the start winning reception command buffer 131SG194A are provided with storage areas (entries) for storing these start winning port winning designation commands, the area for storing pattern designation commands, the area for storing variable category designation commands, the area for storing reserved memory number notification commands, and the area for storing reserved display flags, in association with the reserved memory number, and for storing them separately as the first special pattern reserved memory and the second special pattern reserved memory.

When the start condition is met and the variable display of the top reserved memory (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") begins, the contents (data) of the reserved memory for which the start condition is met are copied to the active display buffer 131SG194B in FIG. 11-15 (C), and the contents of the copied reserved memory are themselves deleted from the start winning time reception command buffer 131SG194A. The contents of the storage areas lower than the deleted reserved memory are then shifted one by one to the higher storage areas.

As described above, when the variable display of the reserved memory (buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") begins, the contents (data) of the reserved memory for which the start condition is met are copied to the active display buffer 131SG194B, so as shown in FIG. 11-15 (C), a storage area similar to that of the start winning reception command buffer 131SG194A is provided. In other words, an area for storing the start winning designation command, an area for storing the pattern designation command, an area for storing the variable category command, an area for storing the reserved memory count notification command, and an area for storing the reserved display flag are provided.

In this embodiment, if a start win occurs when no variable display is being executed and no reserved memory exists, the start win designation command, pattern designation command, variable category command, and reserved memory number notification command based on the start win are stored in the active display buffer 131SG194B without passing through the start win reception command buffer 131SG194A. The reserved display flag is set by the performance control CPU 120 executing the advance notice setting process (S161) described below.

The contents stored in the active display buffer 131SG194B are cleared (deleted) during the special chart hit waiting process that is executed when the variable display ends.

The reserved display flag is a flag that indicates the display mode of the reserved display or the active display that corresponds to the variable display being executed. Details will be described later, but in this embodiment, the display mode of these reserved displays and active displays (the value of the reserved display flag) can suggest the rate at which the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state.

[Start winning judgment process]
FIG. 11-16 is a flow chart showing the start winning judgment process (S101) shown in FIG. 6. In the start winning judgment process, the CPU 103 first judges whether the first start opening switch 22A is on or not based on a detection signal from the first start opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A (131SGS101). At this time, if the first start opening switch 22A is on (131SGS101; Y), it judges whether the first special chart reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special chart game using the first special chart, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number) or not (131SGS102). The CPU 103 may specify the first special chart reserved memory number by reading the first reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 131SG154, for example. When the number of reserved first special charts in 131SGS102 is not the upper limit (131SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 131SG155 is set to "1" (131SGS103).

When the first start port switch 22A is off in 131SGS101 (131SGS101; N) or when the first special symbol reserved memory number has reached the upper limit in 131SGS102 (131SGS102; Y), the second start port switch 22B, which is provided corresponding to the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, is judged to be on or not (131SGS104). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (131SGS104; Y), it is judged to be whether the second special symbol reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the second special symbol, has reached a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number) (131SGS105). The CPU 103 can specify the number of reserved second special figures by reading the second reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the second reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 131SG154, for example. When the second reserved memory count in 131SGS105 is not the upper limit value (131SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 131SG155 is set to "2" (131SGS106).

After executing either of the processes of 131SGS103 and 131SGS106, the number of reserved memories corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, is updated to add 1 (131SGS107). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first reserved memory count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second reserved memory count value is added by 1. Thus, the first reserved memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning port and the first start condition corresponding to the special game using the first special game is established. In addition, the second reserved memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning port and the second start condition corresponding to the special game using the second special game is established. At this time, the total reserved memory number is also updated to add 1 (131SGS108). For example, the total reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 131SG154, can be updated to add 1.

After executing the process of 131SGS108, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of winning, the random number value MR3 for determining the type of fluctuation pattern, and the random number value MR4 for determining the fluctuation pattern from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 131SG154 (131SGS109). The numerical data indicating each of the random number values thus extracted and the start port buffer value are stored by being set as reserve information at the top of the free entry in the special chart reserve memory unit (131SGS110).

The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the type of hit are used to determine whether the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "big hit" or a "small hit", and further to determine the type of big hit or small hit when the variable display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The random number value MR3 for determining the type of variation pattern and the random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern are used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol. By executing the processing of 131SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used to determine the variable display state including the variable display result and the variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol.

Following the processing of 131SGS110, the sending setting of the start port winning designation command according to the start port buffer value is performed (131SGS111). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, and the setting is performed to send the first start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, and the setting is performed to send the second start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. The start port winning designation command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special pattern process is completed.

Following the processing of 131SGS111, the CPU 103 executes a winning random number value determination process (131SGS112). After that, the CPU 103 performs settings for sending a pending memory number notification command to the performance control board 12, for example by storing the storage address of the pending memory number notification command table in the ROM 101 in a buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer (131SGS113). The pending memory number notification command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed.

After executing the process of 131SGS113, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is "1" (131SGS114). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" (Y in 131SGS114), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (131SGS115), and then the process of 2390SGS104 is advanced to. In contrast, if the start port buffer value is "2" (N in 131SGS114), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (131SGS116), and then the start winning process is terminated. This ensures that the process based on the detection of both valid start winnings can be completed reliably, even if both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect the start winning of a valid game ball.

[Random value judgment process when winning]
FIG. 11-17(A) is a flow chart showing an example of a process executed by the 131SGS112 in FIG. 11-17 as a winning random number value determination process. In this embodiment, when the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started, the special symbol normal process (FIG. 6) determines whether or not to control the special symbol display result (the variable display result of the special symbol) to a "jackpot" game state. In addition, in the variable pattern setting process (FIG. 6), a variable pattern that specifically specifies the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is determined. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected at the start winning hole (the first start winning hole or the second start winning hole), the CPU 103 executes the winning random number value determination process of S112 to determine whether or not it is determined that the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as the special symbol display result. As a result, before the variable display of special patterns and decorative patterns based on the detection of a gaming ball entering the starting winning hole begins, in other words, before it is determined whether or not a jackpot will be reached at the start of the variable display, it is determined that the special pattern display result will be a "jackpot," and based on this determination result, the presentation control CPU 120, etc., will execute pre-reading predictions such as panel display presentations and hold prediction presentations, as will be described later.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 11-17, the CPU 103 first identifies the game state (step 131SGS121) and selects the display result determination table shown in FIG. 11-3 (B) (step 131SGS122). Then, in step 131SGS123a, the CPU 103 compares the random number value MR1 extracted in step 131SGS109 with the display result determination table, and determines whether the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range.

If the random number value MR1 is outside the range for determining a jackpot, i.e., if the variable display result is a miss, a setting is made for sending a symbol designation command corresponding to the miss (step 131SGS126a). Then, it is determined whether the game state is normal or not (step 131SGS126b). If the game state is normal, the miss variable pattern type determination table A shown in FIG. 11-7(A) is selected and the process proceeds to step 131SGS131 (step 131SGS126c).

If the game state is not the normal state, it is further determined whether the game state is the time-saving state B or not (step 131SGS126d). If the game state is not the time-saving state B, that is, if the game state is the time-saving state A or the guaranteed bonus state, the loss fluctuation pattern type determination table B shown in FIG. 11-7 (B) is selected and the process proceeds to step 131SGS131 (step 131SGS126e), and if the game state is the time-saving state B, the loss fluctuation pattern type determination table C shown in FIG. 11-7 (C) is selected and the process proceeds to step step 131SGS131 (step 131SGS126f).

In step 131SGS123a, if the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination value range, the CPU 103 sets the transmission of a pattern designation command corresponding to the jackpot (step 131SGS129). Then, it determines whether the game state is normal or not (step 131SGS130a). If the game state is normal, it selects the jackpot fluctuation pattern type determination table A shown in FIG. 11-7 (D). If the game state is time-saving state A or high probability state, it selects the jackpot fluctuation pattern type determination table B shown in FIG. 11-7 (E). If the game state is time-saving state B, it selects the jackpot fluctuation pattern type determination table C shown in FIG. 11-7 (F), and proceeds to step 131SGS131 (step 131SGS130b, step 131SGS130d, step 131SGS130e).

In step 131SGS131, the CPU 103 compares the selected fluctuation pattern type determination table with the random number value MR3 extracted in step 131SGS109, and determines the fluctuation category from non-reach, super reach, or other (normal reach). For example, if the random number value MR3 is a fluctuation pattern type of non-reach, the fluctuation category is determined to be non-reach, if the random number value MR3 is a fluctuation pattern type of normal reach, the fluctuation category is determined to be other (normal reach), and if the random number value MR3 is any of low base weak super reach A/B, low base strong super reach A, low base strong super reach B, low base strong super reach C, low base strongest super reach, high base super reach A, high base super reach B, high base super reach C, and high base super reach D, the fluctuation category is determined to be super reach. Then, the sending of a variable category designation command (one of those shown in FIG. 11-17 (B)) according to the judgment result is set, and the winning random number judgment process is terminated (step 131 SGS132).

The commands set for transmission are sent to the performance control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process shown in FIG. 5.

[Game control main processing]
11-18 is a flow chart showing the game control main process in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the processes in steps S1 to S7, S8 to S9, and S10 to S12 are the same as those shown in FIG.

In this embodiment, when a performance control command instructing recovery from a power outage is sent in step S7, the CPU 103 checks the value of a rescue time reduction counter for counting the number of variable display times remaining until the rescue time reduction occurs, sets the current rescue time reduction counter value converted to a hexadecimal number, and controls the sending of a rescue time reduction number designation command upon recovery to the performance control CPU 120 (step 131SGS0013).

Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the current value of the rescue time reduction counter and controls to send a rescue time reduction number designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 131SGS0014). For example, if the current value of the rescue time reduction counter is 1 to 125 times, the CPU 103 controls to send command 9401H as the rescue time reduction number designation command. Therefore, in this embodiment, if the RAM clear process is not performed when the gaming machine is turned on and the recovery process is performed, the rescue time reduction number designation command is sent and the remaining number of variable display times until the current rescue time reduction is notified.

In this embodiment, when power is restored after a power outage, a command to specify the number of times to shorten the time for recovery and a command to specify the number of times to shorten the time for recovery are sent separately from the command at the time of recovery, but this is not limited to this form. For example, the EXT data of the command at the time of recovery (e.g., a command to specify power on) sent in step S7 may be configured to be set to a value corresponding to the number of times remaining until the time for recovery is shortened, and then sent.

In addition, when a RAM clear is requested in step S3, when there is no backup data in step S4, or when an abnormality is detected in the backup RAM in step S5, a clear process is performed on the area including the area of the rescue time reduction counter in the initialization process of step S8.

Also, when the CPU 103 transmits a presentation control command instructing initialization in step S9, it sets the rescue time reduction counter to "900" (step 131SGS0015). Therefore, in this embodiment, if the RAM clear process is executed when the gaming machine is powered on, the rescue time reduction counter is set to "900". That is, in this embodiment, if the RAM clear process is executed when the gaming machine is powered on and a jackpot is not generated even after 900 variable displays are executed, rescue time reduction is performed and the time reduction state B is entered. Note that, in this embodiment, since the presentation control command instructing initialization transmitted in step S9 corresponds to the initial value ("900") set in the rescue time reduction counter, the CPU 103 can also specify the initial value to be set in the rescue time reduction counter based on the transmission of the presentation control command instructing initialization.

Next, the CPU 103 checks the value of the rescue time reduction counter (which is set to "900" in this embodiment), converts the current value of the rescue time reduction counter into a hexadecimal number, sets the value, and transmits a recovery time reduction number designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 131SGS0016).

In this way, the rescue time reduction counter is set before the timer interrupt process, which is the game progress process, is executed, so that the variable display does not start before the rescue time reduction counter is set, and the number of times until the rescue time reduction can be reliably managed.

In this embodiment, the rescue time reduction counter is initially set to "900" when the RAM clear process is executed when the gaming machine is powered on, but this is not the only option, and the rescue time reduction counter may not be initially set when the RAM clear process is executed. If configured in this way, gameplay can be started from the continuation of the rescue time reduction counter value from the previous day, reducing the investment required to reach the rescue time reduction, and the game can be configured in a way that is not disadvantageous to the player.

In addition, when configured as described above, the system may be configured so that the initial setting of the rescue time reduction counter is not performed only when the clear switch is detected to be on (step S3; Yes) and the RAM clear process is performed, and the initial setting of the rescue time reduction counter is performed when a RAM abnormality is detected (steps S4, S5; No) and the RAM clear process is performed.

[Time-saving flag, guaranteed win flag]
In this embodiment, when any of the conditions for controlling the time-saving state is satisfied, the time-saving flag can be set. The time-saving flag includes a time-saving flag A and a time-saving flag B. In the following description, erasing (or clearing) the flag may be described as resetting the flag.

The time-saving flag A is set when the game is controlled to time-saving state A via jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C. This time-saving flag A is set when the jackpot game state of jackpot A ends, and is cleared when time-saving state A ends (when a jackpot occurs during time-saving state A, or when 110 times of time-saving control end and the game is controlled to the normal state).

The time-saving flag B is set when the game is in the time-saving state B controlled via the rescue time-saving function. This time-saving flag B is set when 900 variable displays that do not result in a jackpot pattern have been executed since the RAM was cleared, or when 900 variable displays that do not result in a jackpot pattern have been executed in a low probability state after the jackpot game state ends, and is erased when the time-saving state B ends (when a jackpot occurs during the time-saving state B, when the time-saving control ends after 1100 times and the game is controlled to the normal state, etc.).

The high probability flag is set when the game is controlled to the high probability state. In this embodiment, if a V is won in the first round of a jackpot game, the game state is controlled to the high probability state when the jackpot game ends, and the high probability flag is set accordingly. This high probability flag is erased when the high probability state ends (when a jackpot occurs during the high probability state, when the 110th high probability control is executed and the game is controlled to the normal state, etc.). For example, the high probability flag is erased when step 131SGS69A in FIG. 11-20 described later is judged as YES, based on the fact that it is the 110th time since the variable display has been controlled to the high probability state.

[Special pattern normal processing]
11-19 and 11-20 are flow charts showing the normal special symbol processing (step S110) in the special symbol processing. In the normal special symbol processing, the CPU 103 checks the value of the total reserved memory number (step 131SGS51). Specifically, the count value of the total reserved memory number counter for counting the total number of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is checked. If the total reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 103 checks whether the second reserved memory number is 0 (step 131SGS52). Specifically, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the second reserved memory number counter for counting the second reserved memory number is 0. If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 103 sets data indicating "second" to the special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol processing is being performed for the first special symbol or the second special symbol) (step 131SGS53). If the second reserved memory count is 0 (i.e., if only the first reserved memory count is accumulated), the CPU 103 sets data indicating "first" to the special pattern pointer (step 131SGS54).

In this embodiment, the processing of steps 131SGS52 to S54 is executed, so that the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol. In other words, the second start condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is controlled to be satisfied with priority over the first start condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol.

In addition, the present embodiment is not limited to the above embodiment, and the display may be configured to perform variable display of the first special symbol and variable display of the second special symbol in the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot, for example.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number stored in the storage area in the RAM 102 corresponding to the reserved memory number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer, and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 131SGS55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 reads out each random number stored in the storage area in the first reserved memory number buffer corresponding to the first reserved memory number=1, and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads out each random number stored in the storage area in the second reserved memory number buffer corresponding to the second reserved memory number=1, and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the reserved memory number counter indicated by the special pattern pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 131SGS56). Specifically, when the special pattern pointer indicates "first," the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the first reserved memory number counter, and shifts the contents of each storage area in the first reserved memory number buffer. When the special pattern pointer indicates "second," the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the second reserved memory number counter, and shifts the contents of each storage area in the second reserved memory number buffer.

In other words, when the special symbol pointer indicates "1st", the CPU 103 stores each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102 in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n-1. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "2nd", the CPU 103 stores each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102 in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n-1.

Therefore, the order in which the random numbers stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to each first pending memory number (or each second pending memory number) are extracted always matches the order of the first pending memory number (or second pending memory number) = 1, 2, 3, 4.

Then, the CPU 103 reduces the value of the combined pending memory count by 1. That is, the count value of the combined pending memory count counter is decremented by 1 (step 131 SGS57). The CPU 103 stores the value of the combined pending memory count counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a specified area of the RAM 102.

Next, the CPU 103 reads the random number for hit determination from the random number buffer area (step 131SGS61) and executes the jackpot determination module (step 131SGS62). In this case, the CPU 103 reads the random number for hit determination extracted in the start winning determination process (step S101) and stored in advance in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer, and performs a jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module is a program that executes a process to compare a predetermined jackpot determination value with the random number for hit determination, and decides that a jackpot has occurred if they match. In other words, it is a program that executes a jackpot determination process. In this case, if the probability variable flag indicating that the jackpot state is in a probability variable state is not set (if the state is in a low probability state), the CPU 103 performs a jackpot determination using a jackpot determination value for low probability. Also, if the probability variable flag is set (if the state is in a high probability state), the CPU 103 performs a jackpot determination using a jackpot determination value for high probability. When the value of the random number for determining a win matches any of the jackpot determination values, the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a jackpot.

If it is determined that a jackpot has been reached (step 131SGS63; Yes), the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating that a jackpot has been reached (step 131SGS64). The CPU 103 then determines the type of jackpot to be the type (jackpot A, jackpot B, or jackpot C) that corresponds to the value that matches the value of the type-determining random number stored in the random number buffer area (step 131SGS65). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the type-determining random number extracted in the start winning determination process (step S101) and stored in advance in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer, and determines the type of jackpot. Then, the process proceeds to step 131SGS70. On the other hand, if it is not determined that a jackpot has been reached (step 131SGS63; No), the process proceeds to step 131SGS66.

In this embodiment, by performing normal special pattern processing, a rescue time-saving condition (reducing the value of the rescue time-saving counter to "0") can occur to control to rescue time-saving regardless of the variable display result (jackpot, miss). In this embodiment, the time-saving state A is set based on a jackpot A being reached, and the time-saving state B is set based on the fact that no next jackpot has occurred even after a predetermined number of variable displays (900 in this embodiment) have ended, but it is assumed that the variable display result of the variable display for which the rescue time-saving condition is met will be a jackpot. Therefore, when the variable display result of the variable display for which the rescue time-saving condition is met is a jackpot, the system is configured to control to the time-saving state A based on the jackpot being reached.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the time-saving counter for counting the number of times the variable display is executed during the time-saving state is 0 (step 131SGS66). If the value of the time-saving counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the time-saving counter (step 131SGS67) and checks whether the value of the time-saving counter after the subtraction is 0 (step 131SGS68). If the value of the time-saving counter after the subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets a time-saving end flag indicating that the time-saving state will end when the variable display ends (step 131SGS69).

In this embodiment, steps 131SGS66 to 131SGSS69 are executed before the counting process of the variable display number until the rescue time reduction from step 131SGS71 onwards, and the time reduction counter is decremented, but this is not the only processing mode. For example, the time reduction counter may be decremented after the counting process of the variable display number until the rescue time reduction from step 131SGS71 onwards. In this case, for example, in the case of a variable display that is a rescue time reduction, if the time reduction counter is set to "110" (see step 131SGS172) and then the decrement process is executed, the value of the time reduction counter is decremented by one extra, so in the case of a variable display that is a rescue time reduction, the time reduction counter may be configured to be incremented by one again after the decrement process. Also, the time reduction counter may be configured to be set to "111", which is one more than the time reduction counter, in advance.

Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the high probability flag is set (step 131SGS69A). If the high probability flag is set (i.e., the game is in a high probability state), the process proceeds to step 131SGS84. In this embodiment, the process of step 131SGS69A is executed, and if the game is in a high probability state, the process of steps 131SGS70 and after (particularly the process of step 131SGSS71) is not executed. Therefore, even if a variable display is executed when the game state is in a high probability state (in this embodiment, during Extreme Battle Rush), the value of the rescue time reduction counter is not decremented. If the high probability flag is not set (i.e., the game is not in a high probability state), the process proceeds to step 131SGSS70.

In this embodiment, when the high probability flag is set, the process proceeds to step 131SGSS84 without executing the processes after step 131SGSS70. However, this is not limited to the above. When the high probability flag is set, the process proceeds to step 131SGSS70, but the process of step 131SGSS71 may not be executed. In other words, the value of the rescue time reduction counter is not updated, but a rescue time reduction number designation command or rescue time reduction number 2 designation command corresponding to the value of the unupdated rescue time reduction counter may be sent.

Next, the CPU 103 judges whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 0 (step 131SGS70; Yes). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 0 (step 131SGS70; Yes), the process proceeds to step 131SGS84. If the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 0 at this point, it means that the game has already been controlled to the time reduction state (time reduction state B) via the rescue time reduction (time that is controlled to the time reduction state B, or time that is controlled to the normal state after 1100 fluctuations in the time reduction state B), and a jackpot has not occurred, which is the trigger for setting the rescue time reduction counter to 900. Also, if the value of the rescue time reduction counter is not 0 (step 131SGS70; No), the value of the rescue time reduction counter is decremented by 1 (step 131SGS71). In addition, in this embodiment, the processing of step 131SGS71 is executed, and the value of the rescue time reduction counter is updated uniformly regardless of whether the variable display of the first special pattern is executed or the variable display of the second special pattern is executed.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 127 or more (step 131SGS72). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 126 or less (step 131SGS72; No), the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the value of the rescue time reduction counter to the EXT data and controls the transmission of a rescue time reduction number designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 131SGS73). For example, if the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 1, the CPU 103 controls the transmission of command 9401H as the rescue time reduction number designation command. Also, if the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 126, the CPU 103 controls the transmission of command 947EH as the rescue time reduction number designation command.

Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 0 (step 131SGS74). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is not 0, the CPU 103 proceeds to step 131SGS84. If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets a rescue time reduction determination flag indicating that the rescue time reduction has occurred and that the time reduction state will be controlled to B at the end of the fluctuation (step 131SGS75). Then, the CPU 103 proceeds to step 131SGS84.

On the other hand, if the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 127 or more (step 131SGS72; Yes), the CPU 103 sets 7FH uniformly as the EXT data and controls to send the command 957FH as the rescue time reduction number designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 131SGS76). Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the remaining variable display number until the rescue time reduction is a number in units of 100 (in this embodiment, 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, or 800) (step 131SGS77). Note that whether the remaining variable display number until the rescue time reduction is a number in units of 100 can be determined by checking the value of the rescue time reduction counter. If the remaining variable display count until the rescue time reduction is in units of 100, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the value of the rescue time reduction counter in the EXT data and controls the transmission of a rescue time reduction count 2 designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 131SGS78). For example, if the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 100, the CPU 103 controls the transmission of command 9601H as the rescue time reduction count 2 designation command. Also, if the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 800, the CPU 103 controls the transmission of command 9608H as the rescue time reduction count 2 designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 131SGS84.

In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) counts the number of variable displays remaining until the rescue time reduction and transmits a rescue time reduction number designation command or a rescue time reduction number 2 designation command, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the presentation control CPU 120 may be configured to count the number of variable displays remaining until the rescue time reduction and execute the teasing presentation or countdown presentation described below.

In addition, for example, if the rescue time reduction counter is set (set to "900") at the time of the rescue time reduction so that rescue time reductions can occur consecutively, the rescue time reduction number designation command or rescue time reduction number 2 designation command may be sent only the first time the rescue time reduction occurs, and the rescue time reduction number designation command or rescue time reduction number 2 designation command may not be sent the second or subsequent time the rescue time reduction occurs.

Next, the CPU 103 determines the stopping pattern of the special pattern according to the result of the determination of the jackpot type (step 131SGS84). In this case, for example, if it is determined to be a jackpot A, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "2", if it is determined to be a jackpot B, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "3", if it is determined to be a jackpot C, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "7", and if it is determined to be a miss, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "-". The CPU 103 also stores the determined stopping pattern of the special pattern in a stopping pattern storage area provided in the RAM 102 (step 131SGS85).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the variable pattern setting process (step S111) (step 131SGS86).

[Special symbol stop processing]
11-21 is a flow chart showing the special symbol stop process (step S113) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 first judges whether the symbol determination period timer is operating (step 131SGS131). If the symbol determination period timer is not operating, the CPU 103 performs a derived display of the special symbol stop symbol (step 131SGS132). Then, it judges whether the big win flag is set (step 131SGS133).

If the jackpot flag is set, the game status flags such as the time-saving A flag, time-saving B flag, and probability bonus flag are cleared (step 131SGS134), the time-saving count counter is cleared (step 131SGS135), and the jackpot start command transmission setting corresponding to the jackpot type is performed, and the process proceeds to step 131SGS147 (step 131SGS136). The jackpot start command transmission setting is transmitted to the performance control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process (see FIG. 5).

Also, if the jackpot flag is not set in step 131SGS133, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the rescue time-saving determination flag is set (step 131SGS140). If the rescue time-saving determination flag is not set, proceed to step 131SGS147. If the rescue time-saving determination flag is set, the rescue time-saving determination flag is cleared and the time-saving B flag indicating that the time-saving state is B is set (steps 131SGS141 and 131SGS142). Furthermore, the time-saving count counter is set to 1100 corresponding to the time-saving state B (rescue time-saving), and the time-saving state B designation command is set for transmission (steps 131SGS143 and 131SGS144). The time-saving state B designation command that has been set for transmission is transmitted to the performance control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process (see FIG. 5).

The right hit lamp 131SG132 starts to light up, and the right hit LED lighting notification command is set for transmission (steps 131SGS145 and 131SGS146). The right hit LED lighting notification command that has been set for transmission is sent to the performance control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process (see FIG. 5).

Then, the pattern determination period timer is set to a value corresponding to the pattern determination period of 0.5 seconds, and a pattern determination command is set for transmission, and the process proceeds to step 131SGS149 (step 131SGS147, step 131SGS148). The pattern determination command set for transmission is transmitted to the performance control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process (see FIG. 5).

In step 131SGS149, the CPU 103 sets the game state designation command to be sent according to the game state, and ends the special symbol stop process. The game state designation command that has been set to be sent is sent to the performance control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process (see FIG. 5).

If the pattern determination period timer is running in step 131SGS131, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the pattern determination period timer by 1 (step 131SGS150) and determines whether the pattern determination period timer has timed out (step 131SGS151). If the pattern determination period timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 terminates the special pattern stop process. If the pattern determination period timer has timed out, the CPU 103 determines whether the derived stopped pattern is a losing pattern (step 131SGS152). If the derived stopped pattern is a losing pattern, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the normal special pattern process and terminates the special pattern stop process (step 131SGS153). If the derived stopped pattern is a jackpot pattern, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot release pre-processing and terminates the special pattern stop process (step 131SGS154).

[state transition]
Next, the state transition in this embodiment will be described. Figure 11-22 is a state transition diagram for explaining the state transition in this embodiment.

As shown in Figure 11-22, in the normal state (low probability/low base state), if a jackpot B occurs and the game ball passes through the high probability area (V switch 131SG023B1), the game is controlled to the high probability state, and if a jackpot A occurs, the game is controlled to the time-saving state A (time-saving state via jackpot (low probability/high base state)). Although not shown, even if a jackpot B occurs and the game ball does not pass through the high probability area (V switch 131SG023B1), the game is also controlled to the time-saving state A (time-saving state via jackpot). Also, even if it is a miss, if the rescue time-saving state is entered (if the number of variable displays reaches 900 without the next jackpot occurring after the RAM clear process or the end of the special probability state, or if the number of variable displays reaches 790 without the next jackpot occurring after the end of 110 variable displays in time-saving state A), it will be controlled to time-saving state B (time-saving state via rescue time-saving state (low probability/high base state)).

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-22, in the probability variable state (high probability/high base state), if either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs and the game ball passes through the probability variable area, the game will be controlled to the probability variable state again. Although not shown, if either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs and the game ball does not pass through the probability variable area, the game will be controlled to the time-saving state A (time-saving state via jackpot).

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-22, in time-saving state A (low probability/high base state), if either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs and the game ball passes through the probability variable area, the state is controlled to the probability variable state. Although not shown, if either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs and the game ball does not pass through the probability variable area, the state is controlled back to time-saving state A (time-saving state via jackpot). Also, in time-saving state A, if 110 variable displays end without a jackpot occurring, the state is controlled to the normal state.

As shown in FIG. 11-22, in time-saving state B (low probability/high base state), if either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs and the game ball passes through the probability variable area, the state is controlled to the probability variable state. Although not shown, if either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs and the game ball does not pass through the probability variable area, the state is controlled to the time-saving state A (time-saving state via jackpot) again. In time-saving state B, if 1100 variable displays are completed without a jackpot occurring, the state is controlled to the normal state. Furthermore, even if it is a miss, if it is a rescue time-saving state (if the number of variable displays reaches 900 without the next jackpot occurring after the RAM clear process or the end of the probability variable state, or if the number of variable displays reaches 790 without the next jackpot occurring after the end of 110 variable displays in time-saving state A), the state is controlled to the time-saving state B (time-saving state via rescue time-saving).

In this embodiment, if a jackpot occurs during time-saving state B and the game ball does not enter the special probability area, the game will transition to time-saving state A without exception, but this control mode is not limited to this. For example, the current remaining number of time-saving times may be compared with the number of time-saving times (110 times in this embodiment) that would occur if the game ball did not enter the special probability area (V switch 131SG023B1), and if the current remaining number of time-saving times is greater, the game may be configured to continue the current time-saving state B as is.

In this embodiment, although it is possible to execute a variable display of the first special symbol during the time-saving state or the probability of a special bonus state, this would be disadvantageous to the player, so the state transition is explained without assuming that the variable display of the first special symbol will be executed during the time-saving state or the probability of a special bonus state.

[Direction control process/preview notice]
As shown in Figures 11-23 and 11-24, in the advance notice setting process of this embodiment, the display mode of the active display and the reserved display is determined by setting the reserved display flag to either 0 or 2 at the timing when a start winning occurs (the timing when the start winning port winning designation command, pattern designation command, variable category command, and reserved memory number notification command are newly stored as reserved memory in the start winning time received command buffer shown in Figure 11-15 (B)), and the display mode of these active display and reserved display makes it possible to suggest the proportion of times the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state.

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-24, if the variable display result indicated by the pattern designation command is "miss" and the variable category indicated by the variable category command is "non-reach," it is determined that the pre-reading prediction will not be executed (the value of the pending display flag is set to "0") 95% of the time, the pre-reading prediction will be executed in presentation pattern α (the value of the pending display flag is set to "1") 5% of the time, and the pre-reading prediction will be executed in presentation pattern β (the value of the pending display flag is set to "2") 0% of the time.

In addition, if the variable display result indicated by the pattern designation command is "miss" and the variable category indicated by the variable category command is "other (normal reach)", it is determined that the pre-reading notice will not be executed (the value of the reserved display flag is set to "0") with a probability of 90%, the pre-reading notice will be executed in presentation pattern α (the value of the reserved display flag is set to "1") with a probability of 10%, and the pre-reading notice will be executed in presentation pattern β (the value of the reserved display flag is set to "2") with a probability of 0%.

In addition, if the variable display result indicated by the pattern designation command is "miss" and the variable category indicated by the variable category command is "super reach", it is determined that the pre-reading prediction will not be executed (the value of the pending display flag is set to "0") with a probability of 70%, the pre-reading prediction will be executed in presentation pattern α (the value of the pending display flag is set to "1") with a probability of 20%, and the pre-reading prediction will be executed in presentation pattern β (the value of the pending display flag is set to "2") with a probability of 10%.

In addition, if the variable display result indicated by the pattern designation command is "jackpot," it is determined that the pre-reading prediction will not be performed (the reserved display flag value is set to "0") at a rate of 5%, the pre-reading prediction will be performed in presentation pattern α (the reserved display flag value is set to "1") at a rate of 30%, and the pre-reading prediction will be performed in presentation pattern β (the reserved display flag value is set to "2") at a rate of 65%.

After the execution of the advance notice setting process, the pending display/active display update process (131SGS162), the remaining number of times to reach the rescue time reduction, etc. display update process (step 131SGS163), and the rescue time reduction arrival notification performance execution process (step 131SGS164) are executed. In the pending display/active display update process, a process is executed to start displaying the pending display and active display in a display mode according to the value of the pending display flag, a process is executed to erase the active display from the active display area 131SG005F at the timing of the end of the variable display, a process is executed to hide or start displaying the pending display and active display according to the progress of the performance during the variable display, and the like. In the rescue time reduction remaining number of times display update process, a process is executed to reduce and update the value of the rescue time reduction remaining number of times display 131SG005Z (see FIG. 11-1) displayed on the image display device 5 at the start of the variable display, a process is executed to hide or start displaying the rescue time reduction remaining number of times display 131SG005Z according to the progress of the performance during the variable display, and the like. In the rescue time-saving reaching notification display execution process, a process is executed to execute the rescue time-saving reaching notification display that notifies the player that the time-saving state B has been reached from the timing at which the variable display ends when the number of variable displays reaches 900.

[Variable display start setting process]
FIG. 11-25 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 11. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first judges whether the first variable display start command reception flag is set (step 131SGS601). If the first variable display start command reception flag is set, various command data stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" in the start winning reception command buffer 131SG194A is copied to the active display buffer 131SG194B (131SGS602). In addition, the first special chart reserved memory (various command data stored in association with the buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") in the start winning reception command buffer 131SG194A is shifted one by one to the upper position (step 131SGS603). At this time, the various command data stored in the buffer number "1-1" is erased because there is no destination to shift to.

Also, in step 131SGS601, if the first variable display start command reception flag is not on, it is determined whether the second variable display start command reception flag is set (step 131SGS604). If the second variable display start command reception flag is set, the various command data stored in association with buffer number "2-1" in the start winning reception command buffer 131SG194A is copied to the active display buffer 131SG194B (131SGS605). Also, the second special chart reserved memory (various command data stored in association with buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") in the start winning reception command buffer 131SG194A is shifted up one by one (step 131SGS606). At this time, the various command data stored in buffer number "2-1" is erased because there is no destination to shift to.

If the second special chart variable display start command reception flag is not on, the variable display start setting process ends.

After executing step 131SGS603 or step 131SGS6060, the performance control CPU 120 reads out a variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 131SGS607). Furthermore, it determines the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern according to the read variation pattern designation command and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (step 131SGS608).

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-26, when the variable display result is a "miss" and the fluctuation pattern is a non-reach (non-reach miss), the stopping pattern is determined to be a "non-reach" combination such as "124" or "578" (non-reach mode, non-reach miss mode) with a probability of 100%. Also, when the variable display result is a "miss" and the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach (normal reach miss), the stopping pattern is determined to be an even number "reach" combination such as "242" or "676" (even number reach mode, even number reach miss mode) with a probability of 95%, and a "reach" combination with an odd number other than 7 such as "131" or "545" (odd number reach mode, odd number reach miss mode) with a probability of 5%.

In addition, if the variable display result is "miss" and the variation pattern is super reach (super reach miss), the stopping pattern is determined to be a "reach" combination of even numbers such as "242" or "676" (even number reach mode, even number reach miss mode) with an 80% probability, a "reach" combination of odd numbers other than 7 such as "131" or "545" (odd number reach mode, odd number reach miss mode) with a 19% probability, and a "reach" combination of 7 symbols such as "767" or "787" ("7" reach mode, "7" reach miss mode) with a 1% probability.

If the variable display result is a "jackpot," the stopping symbols are determined to be a "reach" combination of even numbers such as "222" or "666" (even reach mode, even reach jackpot mode) with a probability of 20%, a "reach" combination of odd numbers other than 7 such as "111" or "555" (odd reach mode, odd reach jackpot mode) with a probability of 50%, and a "reach" combination of the 7 symbols "777" ("7" reach mode, "7" reach jackpot mode) with a probability of 30%.

In other words, the likelihood of a jackpot is highest when the decorative symbol is a "7" symbol, followed by a decreasing likelihood of a jackpot when an odd symbol other than a "7" is in reach, an even symbol is in reach, and then a non-reach (expected likelihood of a jackpot based on decorative symbol: reach with "7" symbol > reach with odd symbol other than a "7" > reach with even symbol > non-reach). For this reason, in this embodiment, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the decorative symbol will be in reach, and which symbol will be in reach.

In this embodiment, the expected probability of a jackpot is different depending on whether the decorative symbols are an even number combination or an odd number combination, but the present invention is not limited to this. The expected probability of a jackpot may be the same regardless of the decorative symbol combination that results in a jackpot, or the expected probability of a jackpot when a jackpot is reached may differ depending on the size of the numbers indicated by the decorative symbols.

Returning to FIG. 11-25, after determining the stopping pattern of the decorative symbols, the performance control CPU 120 executes a variable display preview performance determination process (step 131SGS609) to determine whether or not to execute a variable display preview performance that suggests the possibility that the variable display result will be a jackpot during the variable display.

Then, the presentation control CPU 120 selects a process table (presentation control pattern) according to the variation pattern, game status, variable display result, and the result of the variable display preview presentation determination process (step 131SGS610), and starts the process timer (step 131SGS611).

In addition, each process table has a performance control pattern set. Specifically, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, sound control execution data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A are arranged in chronological order in correspondence with each process data n (numbers 1 to N).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, speakers 8L, 8R as performance components, and operation unit (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.)) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1) (131SGS612). For example, to display an image corresponding to a fluctuation pattern on the image display device 5, it outputs a command to the display control unit 123. It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. It also outputs a control signal (sound number data) to the sound control board 13 to output sound from the speakers 8L, 8R.

In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display of the decorative pattern to vary according to a variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the variation pattern designation command, but the performance control CPU 120 may select a variation pattern to be used from multiple types of variation patterns that correspond to the variation pattern designation command.

Then, the variable display time timer is set to a value equivalent to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command (131SGS613). A predetermined time is also set to the variable display control timer (131SGS614). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, center, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, the display control unit 123 outputs a signal corresponding to the image data written to the VRAM to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing the variable display of the decorative patterns. Next, the value of the performance control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the performance processing during variable display (S172) (131SGS615).

In addition, in the variable display performance processing, the values of the process timer, variable display time timer, and variable display control timer are each set to -1. Then, control of the performance device is executed according to the value of the process timer, the variable display of the decorative pattern is realized as described above according to the value of the variable display control timer, and the variable display of the decorative pattern is stopped according to the value of the variable display time timer, and the value of the performance control process flag is set to a value according to the special pattern hit waiting processing (S173).

[About the effects during variable display]
When the performance control CPU 120 receives a first variable display start command or a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in the variable display start waiting process of step S170, it determines the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (confirmed decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not to execute a reach performance, the mode thereof, the execution start timing, etc. based on the variable pattern specified by the variable pattern designation command and the variable display results such as special patterns and decorative patterns specified by the variable display result designation command in the subsequent variable display start setting process of step S171, sets a performance control pattern that reflects the determined results, etc., and controls the variable display of the decorative pattern and the reach performance, etc. based on the set performance control pattern.

[About the production control pattern]
As shown in Figures 11-27 and 11-28, the performance control patterns are set for each of the variation patterns PA1-1 to 4, PA2-1 to 19, and PB1-1 to 18.

As the presentation control patterns corresponding to the fluctuation patterns PA1-1 to PA1-4, non-reach patterns 1 to 4 are set in which the decorative symbols do not reach a target state and are not reached. Fluctuation patterns PA1-1 and PA1-2 are fluctuation patterns designated in the normal state, PA1-3 is a fluctuation pattern selected in the time-saving state A or the probability variable state, and PA1-4 is a fluctuation pattern selected in the time-saving state B. In the corresponding non-reach patterns 1 to 4, the time until the variable display of the decorative symbols ends is set to be different depending on the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern.

The control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-1 is a pattern in which a normal reach is performed ("normal" in the figure) in which the decorative pattern is in a reach state, and then the reach is lost. The variation pattern PA2-1 is a variation pattern specified in the normal state, the time-saving state A, and the probability variable state.

The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-2 is set to a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach performance, a low base weak super reach A reach performance ("low base weak A" in the diagram) is executed, and then the reach is missed.The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-3 is set to a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach performance, a low base weak super reach B reach performance ("low base weak B" in the diagram) is executed, and then the reach is missed.

The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-4 is set to a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach performance, a low base weak super reach A reach performance is executed, and then a low base strong reach A reach performance ("low base strong A" in the diagram) is executed, followed by a reach miss.The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-5 is set to a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach performance, a low base weak super reach B reach performance is executed, and then a low base strong reach A reach performance is executed, followed by a reach miss.The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-6 is set to a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach performance, a low base strong reach A reach performance is executed, followed by a reach miss.

The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-7 is a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach performance, a low base weak super reach A reach performance is executed, and then a low base strong reach B reach performance ("low base strong B" in the diagram) is executed, after which the reach is missed.The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-8 is a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach performance, a low base weak super reach B reach performance is executed, and then a low base strong reach B reach performance is executed, after which the reach is missed.The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-9 is a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach performance, a low base strong reach B reach performance is executed, and then the reach is missed.

As a presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-10, a pattern is set in which, after the reach performance of a normal reach, a reach performance of a low base weak super reach A is executed, and then a reach performance of a low base strong reach C is executed, after which the reach is missed. As a presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-11, a pattern is set in which, after the reach performance of a normal reach, a reach performance of a low base weak super reach B is executed, and then a reach performance of a low base strong reach C is executed, after which the reach is missed. As a presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-12, a pattern is set in which, after the reach performance of a normal reach, a reach performance of a low base strong reach C is executed, after which the reach is missed.

The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-13 is a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach performance, a low base weak super reach A reach performance is executed, and then a low base strongest super reach reach performance ("low base strongest" in the diagram) is executed, followed by a reach miss. The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-14 is a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach performance, a low base weak super reach B reach performance is executed, and then a low base strongest super reach reach performance is executed, followed by a reach miss. The presentation control pattern corresponding to variation pattern PA2-15 is a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach performance, a low base strongest super reach reach performance is executed, followed by a reach miss.

Fluctuation patterns PA2-2 to PA2-15 are all fluctuation patterns specified in the normal state.

As a presentation control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-16, a pattern is set in which after the reach performance of a normal reach, a reach performance of a high base reach A ("high base A" in the figure) is executed, and then the reach is missed. As a presentation control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-17, a pattern is set in which after the reach performance of a normal reach, a reach performance of a high base reach B ("high base B" in the figure) is executed, and then the reach is missed. As a presentation control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-18, a pattern is set in which after the reach performance of a normal reach, a reach performance of a high base reach C ("high base C" in the figure) is executed, and then the reach is missed. As a presentation control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-19, a pattern is set in which after the reach performance of a normal reach, a reach performance of a high base reach D ("high base D" in the figure) is executed, and then the reach is missed.

Patterns PA2-16 to PA2-19 are all selected in time-saving state A and special state.

The presentation control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-1 is set to execute a normal reach presentation followed by a jackpot.

The presentation control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-2 is set to a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach performance, a low base weak super reach A reach performance is executed, and then a low base strong reach A reach performance is executed, followed by a jackpot.The presentation control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-3 is set to a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach performance, a low base weak super reach B reach performance is executed, and then a low base strong reach A reach performance is executed, followed by a jackpot.The presentation control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-4 is set to a pattern in which, after a normal reach reach performance, a low base strong reach A reach performance is executed, followed by a jackpot.

The presentation control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-5 is a pattern in which, after the reach performance of a normal reach, a reach performance of a low base weak super reach A is executed, and then a reach performance of a low base strong reach B is executed, followed by a jackpot.The presentation control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-6 is a pattern in which, after the reach performance of a normal reach, a reach performance of a low base weak super reach B is executed, and then a reach performance of a low base strong reach B is executed, followed by a jackpot.The presentation control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-7 is a pattern in which, after the reach performance of a normal reach, a reach performance of a low base strong reach B is executed, followed by a jackpot.

The presentation control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-8 is set to a pattern in which, after the reach performance of a normal reach, a reach performance of a low base weak super reach A is executed, and then a reach performance of a low base strong reach C is executed, followed by a jackpot.The presentation control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-9 is set to a pattern in which, after the reach performance of a normal reach, a reach performance of a low base weak super reach B is executed, and then a reach performance of a low base strong reach C is executed, followed by a jackpot.The presentation control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-10 is set to a pattern in which, after the reach performance of a normal reach, a reach performance of a low base strong reach C is executed, followed by a jackpot.

The presentation control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-11 is set to execute a normal reach reach performance, followed by a low base weak super reach A reach performance, then a low base strongest super reach reach performance, followed by a jackpot. The presentation control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PA2-12 is set to execute a normal reach reach performance, followed by a low base weak super reach B reach performance, then a low base strongest super reach reach performance, followed by a jackpot. The presentation control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-13 is set to execute a normal reach reach performance, followed by a low base strongest super reach reach performance, followed by a jackpot.

Fluctuation patterns PB1-1 to PB1-13 are all fluctuation patterns selected in normal conditions.

As a presentation control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-14, a pattern is set in which after the reach performance of a normal reach, a reach performance of a high base reach A is executed, followed by a jackpot. As a presentation control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-15, a pattern is set in which after the reach performance of a normal reach, a reach performance of a high base reach B is executed, followed by a jackpot. As a presentation control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-16, a pattern is set in which after the reach performance of a normal reach, a reach performance of a high base reach C is executed, followed by a jackpot. As a presentation control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-17, a pattern is set in which after the reach performance of a normal reach, a reach performance of a high base reach D is executed, followed by a jackpot.

Patterns PB1-14 to PB1-17 are all selected in time-saving state A and special state.

The effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern PB1-18 is set to a pattern in which a jackpot is achieved without executing the reach effect of a normal reach or super reach. The variation pattern PB1-18 is the variation pattern selected in the time-saving state B.

[About the flow of the presentation during variable display]
11-29 is a diagram showing the flow of the presentation during variable display in the normal state. The presentation control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the variable pattern designated by the variable pattern designation command is PA1-1 or PA1-2, controls the decorative pattern to be not in a reach state but in a non-reach miss state.

The presentation control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-1 or PB1-1, executes a normal reach reach presentation in which the decorative pattern is in a reach state, and then controls so that the reach is missed if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-1, and controls so that a jackpot is reached if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PB1-1.

The performance control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-2, it executes the reach performance of a normal reach, then executes the reach performance of a low base weak super reach A, and then notifies a miss as the performance result of the reach performance of a low base weak super reach A, and controls so that the reach is a miss.

The performance control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is PA2-3, it executes the reach performance of a normal reach, then executes the reach performance of a low base weak super reach B, and then notifies a miss as the performance result of the reach performance of the low base weak super reach B, and controls the reach to be a miss.

The performance control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-4 or PB1-2, it executes the normal reach reach performance, then executes the low base weak super reach A reach performance, and then executes the low base strong super reach A reach performance, and then, if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-4, it controls so that a miss is announced as the performance result of the low base strong super reach A reach performance, and the reach is a miss, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PB1-2, it controls so that a jackpot is announced as the performance result of the low base strong super reach A reach performance, and the jackpot is achieved.

The performance control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-5 or PB1-3, it executes the reach performance of a normal reach, then executes the reach performance of a low base weak super reach B, and then executes the reach performance of a low base strong super reach A, and then, if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-5, it controls so that a miss is announced as the performance result of the reach performance of the low base strong super reach A, and it controls so that the reach is a miss, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PB1-3, it controls so that a jackpot is announced as the performance result of the reach performance of the low base strong super reach A, and it is a jackpot.

The performance control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-6 or PB1-4, it executes the reach performance of a normal reach, and then executes the reach performance of a low base strong super reach A, and then, if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-6, it controls so that a miss is announced as the performance result of the reach performance of the low base strong super reach A, and the reach is a miss, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PB1-4, it controls so that a jackpot is announced as the performance result of the reach performance of the low base strong super reach A, and the jackpot is achieved.

The performance control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-7 or PB1-5, it executes the reach performance of a normal reach, then executes the reach performance of a low base weak super reach A, and then executes the reach performance of a low base strong super reach B, and then, if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-7, it controls so that a miss is announced as the performance result of the reach performance of the low base strong super reach B, and the reach is a miss, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PB1-5, it controls so that a jackpot is announced as the performance result of the reach performance of the low base strong super reach B, and the jackpot is achieved.

The performance control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-8 or PB1-6, it executes the reach performance of a normal reach, then executes the reach performance of a low base weak super reach B, and then executes the reach performance of a low base strong super reach B, and then, if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-8, it controls so that a miss is announced as the performance result of the reach performance of the low base strong super reach B, and the reach is a miss, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PB1-6, it controls so that a jackpot is announced as the performance result of the reach performance of the low base strong super reach B, and the jackpot is achieved.

The performance control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-9 or PB1-7, it executes the reach performance of a normal reach, and then executes the reach performance of a low base strong super reach B, and then, if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-9, it controls so that a miss is announced as the performance result of the reach performance of the low base strong super reach B, and the reach is a miss, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PB1-7, it controls so that a jackpot is announced as the performance result of the reach performance of the low base strong super reach B, and the jackpot is achieved.

The performance control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-10 or PB1-8, it executes the reach performance of a normal reach, then executes the reach performance of a low base weak super reach A, and then executes the reach performance of a low base strong super reach C, and then, if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-10, it controls so that a miss is announced as the performance result of the reach performance of the low base strong super reach C, and the reach is a miss, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PB1-8, it controls so that a jackpot is announced as the performance result of the reach performance of the low base strong super reach C, and the jackpot is achieved.

The performance control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-11 or PB1-9, it executes the reach performance of a normal reach, then executes the reach performance of a low base weak super reach B, and then executes the reach performance of a low base strong super reach C, and then, if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-11, it controls so that a miss is announced as the performance result of the reach performance of the low base strong super reach C, and the reach is a miss, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PB1-9, it controls so that a jackpot is announced as the performance result of the reach performance of the low base strong super reach C, and the jackpot is achieved.

The performance control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-12 or PB1-10, it executes the reach performance of a normal reach, and then executes the reach performance of a low base strong super reach C, and then, if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-12, it controls so that a miss is announced as the performance result of the reach performance of the low base strong super reach C, and the reach is a miss, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PB1-10, it controls so that a jackpot is announced as the performance result of the reach performance of the low base strong super reach C, and the jackpot is achieved.

The performance control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-13 or PB1-11, it executes the reach performance of a normal reach, then executes the reach performance of a low base weak super reach A, and then executes the reach performance of a low base strongest super reach, and then, if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-13, it controls so that a miss is announced as the performance result of the reach performance of the low base strongest super reach, and the reach is a miss, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PB1-11, it controls so that a jackpot is announced as the performance result of the reach performance of the low base strongest super reach, and the jackpot is achieved.

The performance control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-14 or PB1-12, it executes the reach performance of a normal reach, then executes the reach performance of a low base weak super reach B, and then executes the reach performance of a low base strongest super reach, and then, if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-14, it controls so that a miss is announced as the performance result of the reach performance of the low base strongest super reach, and the reach is a miss, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PB1-12, it controls so that a jackpot is announced as the performance result of the reach performance of the low base strongest super reach, and the jackpot is achieved.

The performance control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-15 or PB1-13, it executes the reach performance of a normal reach, and then executes the reach performance of a low base strongest super reach, and then, if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-15, it controls so that a miss is announced as the performance result of the reach performance of the low base strongest super reach, and the reach is a miss, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PB1-13, it controls so that a jackpot is announced as the performance result of the reach performance of the low base strongest super reach, and the jackpot is achieved.

In this way, in the normal state, a jackpot is announced as the result of the low base weak super reach A and B reach performance, and is not controlled to a jackpot.Only the reach performances of low base strong super reach A-C, which are executed via the low base weak super reach A and B reach performance, low base strongest reach, and low base strong super reach A-C, which are executed without going through the low base weak super reach A and B reach performance, and low base strongest super reach, will announce a jackpot as the result of the performance and be controlled to a jackpot.

Figure 11-30 is a diagram showing the flow of presentation during variable display in time-saving state A and high probability state. The presentation control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in time-saving state A and high probability state, and when the variable pattern specified by the variable pattern specification command is PA1-3, controls so that the decorative pattern does not become a reach state but becomes a non-reach miss.

The CPU 120 for controlling the presentation receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the time-saving state A or the probability variable state, and executes a normal reach presentation if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-1 or PB1-1, and then controls so that the reach is missed if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-1, and controls so that a jackpot is reached if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PB1-1.

The performance control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the time-saving state A or the probability variable state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-16 or PB1-14, it executes the reach performance of a normal reach, and then executes the reach performance of a high base super reach A, and then, if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-16, it controls so that a miss is announced as the performance result of the reach performance of the high base super reach A, and the reach is a miss, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PB1-14, it controls so that a jackpot is announced as the performance result of the reach performance of the high base super reach A, and the jackpot is achieved.

The performance control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the time-saving state A or the probability variable state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-17 or PB1-15, executes the reach performance of a normal reach, and then executes the reach performance of a high base super reach B, and then, if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-17, controls so that a miss is announced as the performance result of the reach performance of the high base super reach B, and controls so that the reach is a miss, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PB1-15, controls so that a jackpot is announced as the performance result of the reach performance of the high base super reach B, and controls so that a jackpot is announced.

The performance control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the time-saving state A or the probability variable state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-18 or PB1-16, it executes the reach performance of a normal reach, and then executes the reach performance of a high base super reach C, and then, if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-18, it controls so that a miss is announced as the performance result of the reach performance of the high base super reach C, and the reach is a miss, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PB1-16, it controls so that a jackpot is announced as the performance result of the reach performance of the high base super reach C, and the jackpot is achieved.

The performance control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the time-saving state A or the probability variable state, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-19 or PB1-17, executes the reach performance of a normal reach, and then executes the reach performance of a high base super reach D, and then, if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PA2-19, controls so that a miss is announced as the performance result of the reach performance of the high base super reach D, and controls so that the reach is a miss, and if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PB1-17, controls so that a jackpot is announced as the performance result of the reach performance of the high base super reach D, and controls so that a jackpot is announced.

In this way, in the time-saving state A and the probability variable state, the result of a jackpot or miss is announced in the normal presentation or in the reach presentation of high base super reaches A to D that are controlled after the normal presentation, and then it is controlled to a jackpot or miss, and no further reach presentation is executed from the high base super reaches A to D that are controlled after the normal presentation.

Figure 11-31 is a diagram showing the flow of the presentation during variable display in time-saving state B. The presentation control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in time-saving state B, and when the variable pattern specified by the variable pattern specification command is PA1-4, controls the decorative pattern so that it does not become a reach state but becomes a non-reach miss.

The performance control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the time-saving state B, and when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command is PB1-18, controls the decorative pattern so that it does not become a reach state but becomes a jackpot.

In this way, in time-saving state B, the game is controlled so that misses and big wins always result in a non-reach.

[About the Super Reach Production]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the reach performance of the super reach during the variable display. The reach performance of the super reach includes the reach performance of the low base weak super reach A, B, the low base strong super reach A to C, and the low base strongest super reach executed in the normal state as described above, and the reach performance of the high base super reach A to D executed in the time-saving state A and the probability variable state. In the following, the reach effects of normal reaches and super reaches may be simply referred to as normal reach effects and super reach effects, respectively, the reach effects of low base weak super reach A, low base weak super reach B, low base strong super reach A, low base strong super reach B, low base strong super reach C and low base strongest super reach may be simply referred to as low base weak reach A effects, low base weak reach B effects, low base strong reach A effects, low base strong reach B effects, low base strong reach C effects and low base strongest reach effects, respectively, and the reach effects of high base super reach A, high base super reach B, high base super reach C and high base super reach D may be simply referred to as high base reach A effects, high base reach B effects, high base reach C effects and high base reach effects, respectively.

The Super Reach effect is an effect that suggests the possibility of a jackpot, and also announces the final result of whether or not a jackpot will occur (for low base weak Super Reach A and B, the result will be whether it develops into low base strong Super Reach A-C or low base strongest Super Reach, or whether it will be a miss).

In addition, each type of super reach performance has a title set for it, and the super reach performance is made up of a title display part where the title of the super reach performance is displayed, and an introduction part that follows the title display part and ends when the performance result is announced.

[Variations of low base weak reach A and B effects]
In this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern for executing a low base weak reach A performance or a low base weak reach B performance does not include a fluctuation pattern in which a jackpot is reached without developing into other super reach performances after the execution of a low base weak reach A performance or a low base weak reach B performance, but it may also be a fluctuation pattern PB1-JA in which a jackpot is reached without developing into other super reach performances after the execution of a low base weak reach A performance, and a fluctuation pattern PB1-JB in which a jackpot is reached without developing into other super reach performances after the execution of a low base weak reach B performance.

In such a configuration, the presentation control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PB1-JA, it executes a normal reach presentation, then executes a low base weak reach A presentation, and controls so that a jackpot is announced as the presentation result of the low base weak reach A presentation, resulting in a jackpot, and when it receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is PB1-JB, it executes a normal reach presentation, then executes a low base weak reach B presentation, and controls so that a jackpot is announced as the presentation result of the low base weak reach B presentation, resulting in a jackpot. Therefore, in this configuration, in the introductory part of the low base weak reach A performance, it is either announced whether or not the performance will result in a jackpot or it will develop into another super reach performance, and in the introductory part of the low base weak reach B performance, it is either announced whether or not the performance will result in a jackpot or it will develop into another super reach performance.

In addition, the configuration may not include a variation pattern that develops into another super reach performance after the execution of the low base weak reach A or B performance. In such a configuration, in the introductory part of the low base weak reach A or B performance, it will be announced whether or not the performance will result in a jackpot.

In the following examples, a configuration may also be applied that includes a variation pattern that results in a jackpot without developing into other super reach effects after the execution of low base weak reach A and B effects. In this case, the configuration is set to have a higher jackpot expectancy for low base strong reach A to C effects and low base strongest reach effects than for low base weak reach A effects and low base weak reach A effects, and a determination ratio for variation patterns that result in a miss after the execution of low base weak reach A and B effects, and variation patterns that result in a jackpot without developing into other super reach effects after the execution of low base weak reach A and B effects.

[About the low base weak reach A performance]
FIG. 11-32 is a diagram showing the transition of the image displayed on the image display device 5 when the low base weak reach A performance is executed, and FIG. 11-33 is a timing chart showing the execution status of the low base weak reach A performance.

When the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state and, when a variable pattern corresponding to the low base weak super reach A is specified by the variable pattern specification command, it starts the variation of a relatively large size decorative pattern (decorative pattern (large)), and executes a normal reach performance in which the decorative pattern (large) of the type specified by the variable display result specification command at a predetermined timing stops in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R on the image display device 5 to create a reach state, as shown in FIG. 11-32 (a1). After that, it executes the operation promotion performance A described later, and, as shown in FIG. 11-32 (a2), executes a white flash performance in which the entire display area is displayed in white while maintaining the reserved display and active display of the first reserved memory display area 131SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F, and then starts the title display part of the low base weak reach A performance.

As shown in Figures 11-32 (a1) to (a3), the background (daytime sky background) of the changing decorative pattern (large) in the normal state that was displayed before the white flash performance changes to the background (corridor background) of the low base weak reach A performance after the white flash performance, and the decorative pattern (large) that was displayed in a reach mode before the white flash performance changes to a reach mode of a decorative pattern (small) that is smaller in size than the decorative pattern (large) after the white flash performance.

As shown in FIG. 11-33, the title display part of the low base weak reach A performance includes a title start period from when part of the title characters "Catch a Bakuchu!" of the low base weak reach A performance is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 until they are displayed in their fixed position, a title display period during which the title characters "Catch a Bakuchu!" are displayed in their fixed position, and a title end period from when the title characters "Catch a Bakuchu!" that were displayed in their fixed position disappear and switch to the introduction part.

When the performance control CPU 120 transitions to the title display part of the low base weak reach A performance, it first starts displaying the title start period. During the title start period of the low base weak reach A performance, as shown in Figures 11-32 (a3) to (a4), part of the title characters "Catch a Bakuchu!" are made to appear from the left side of the display area in a manner overlapping with the left decorative pattern (small) of the left and right decorative patterns (small) of the reach mode, and then the entire title characters "Catch a Bakuchu!" are moved toward their fixed position and stopped at the fixed position. When the title characters "Catch a Bakuchu!" are stopped at their fixed position, part of the title characters "Catch a Bakuchu!" are displayed in a manner overlapping with both the left and right decorative patterns (small) of the reach mode.

The small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach state will be any number between "1" and "9" ("2" in the figure), but during the title start period of the low base weak reach A performance, whether the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach state are any number between "1" and "9", part of the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu!" will appear overlapping with the left small decorative symbol on the left and right of the reach state, and when the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu!" are stationary in their fixed position, part of the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu!" will be displayed overlapping with both the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach state.

The performance control CPU 120 displays the title characters "Catch Bakuchu!" in a fixed position during the title start period, and then transitions to displaying the title display period. During the title display period of the low base weak reach A performance, as shown in Figures 11-32 (a4) to (a5), the enemy character "Bakuchu" appears behind the title characters "Catch Bakuchu!" displayed in a fixed position, and a subtitle "Try and catch him if you can!", which corresponds to the scene in which the enemy character "Bakuchu" appears, is displayed below the title characters "Catch Bakuchu!", and the audio of the line displayed in the subtitles is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. At this time, as shown in Figure 11-33, audio reading the title is not output. Also, as shown in Figure 11-33, the title display period of the low base weak reach A performance is executed for a longer time than the title start period of the low base weak reach A performance (see Figures 11-47 and 11-48).

After the title display period ends, the performance control CPU 120 transitions to displaying the title end period. During the title end period of the low base weak reach A performance, as shown in Figures 11-32 (a5) to (a6), the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu!" displayed in their fixed position are moved from their fixed position to the right side of the display area until all of the title characters disappear. As shown in Figure 11-33, the title end period of the low base weak reach A performance ends in a shorter time than the title start period and title display period of the low base weak reach A performance (see Figures 11-47 and 11-48). Also, as shown in Figure 11-33, the expectation indication display, which will be described later, is not displayed in the title display part of the low base weak reach A performance.

After the title end period ends, the performance control CPU 120 starts the introductory part of the low base weak reach A performance. As shown in FIG. 11-32 (a6) to (a7), the background at the start of the introductory part of the low base weak reach A performance is the same as the background of the title display part (the background of the hallway), the video scene that started from the title display part (the scene in which the enemy character "Bakuchu" appears) also continues throughout the introductory part, the line "Try and catch him if you can!" that was displayed in the title display part also continues to be displayed, and the audio of the line output from the speakers 8L and 8R also continues to be output. After that, as shown in FIG. 11-32 (a7) to (a8), at the timing when the audio output of the line "Try and catch him if you can!" that was displayed in the title display part ends, the scene switches to the next video scene of the introductory part (a scene in which the ally character "Yume Yume" chases the enemy character "Bakuchu").

When a variation pattern is specified by the variation pattern specification command to develop into either low base strong super reach A-C or low base strongest super reach after low base weak super reach A, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance executes a drop performance in which the movable body 32 falls at the end of the introduction part, and then develops into either low base strong reach A performance, low base strong reach B performance, low base strong reach C performance, or low base strongest reach performance. On the other hand, when a variation pattern is specified by the variation pattern specification command to develop into a reach miss after low base weak super reach A, the CPU 120 notifies the user that the ally character "Yume Yume" is unable to catch the enemy character "Bakuchu" at the end of the introduction part, and the low base weak reach A performance result is not a jackpot, and then displays on the image display device 5 a combination of decorative patterns (large) indicating a reach miss of the type specified by the variable display result specification command.

In a configuration including a variation pattern in which a jackpot is reached without developing into other super reach performances after the execution of a low base weak reach A performance, when a variation pattern in which a jackpot is reached without developing into other super reach performances after the execution of a low base weak reach A performance after a low base weak super reach A is specified by a variation pattern specification command, the performance control CPU 120 notifies the player of the performance result that a jackpot is reached (the game is controlled to a jackpot game state) as the performance result of the low base weak reach A performance at the end of the introductory part, and then displays on the image display device 5 a combination of decorative patterns (large) indicating the type of jackpot specified by the variable display result specification command.

[About the low base weak reach B performance]
FIG. 11-34 is a diagram showing the progression of the image displayed on the image display device 5 when the low base weak reach B performance is executed, and FIG. 11-35 is a timing chart showing the execution status of the low base weak reach B performance.

When the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state and a variable pattern corresponding to the low base weak super reach B is specified by the variable display result specification command, the CPU 120 starts the variation of the decorative pattern (large) and executes a normal reach performance in which the decorative pattern (large) of the type specified by the variable display result specification command is stopped in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R of the image display device 5 at a predetermined timing to set the reach state, as shown in FIG. 11-34 (b1). After that, the operation promotion performance A described later is executed, and as shown in FIG. 11-34 (b2), a white flash performance is executed in which the entire display area is displayed in white while maintaining the reserved display and active display of the first reserved memory display area 131SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F, and then the title display part of the low base weak reach B performance is started.

As shown in Figures 11-34 (b1) to (b3), the background (daytime sky background) of the changing decorative pattern (large) in the normal state that was displayed before the white flash performance changes to the background of the low base weak reach B performance (a background in which the characters "Yume Yume" and "Boingo" face each other on either side of a hockey table) after the white flash performance, and the decorative pattern (large) that was displayed in reach mode before the white flash performance changes to the reach mode of the decorative pattern (small) that is smaller in size than the decorative pattern (large) after the white flash performance.

As shown in FIG. 11-35, the title display part of the low base weak reach B performance includes a title start period from when a part of the title characters "Bilibili hockey showdown" of the low base weak reach B performance is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 until it is displayed in the fixed position, a title display period during which the title characters "Bilibili hockey showdown" are displayed in the fixed position, and a title end period from when the title characters "Bilibili hockey showdown" that were displayed in the fixed position disappear and switch to the introductory part.

When the CPU 120 for controlling the performance transitions to the title display part of the low base weak reach B performance, it first starts displaying the title start period. During the title start period of the low base weak reach B performance, as shown in FIG. 11-34 (b3) to (b4), part of the title characters "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" is made to appear from the left side of the display area in a manner overlapping with the left decorative pattern (small) of the left and right decorative patterns (small) of the reach mode, and then the entire title characters "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" are moved toward the fixed position and stopped at the fixed position. When the title characters "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" are stopped at the fixed position, part of the title characters "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" is displayed in a manner overlapping with both the left and right decorative patterns (small) of the reach mode.

The small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach state will be any of the numbers "1" to "9" ("2" in the figure), but during the title start period of the low base weak reach B performance, whether the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach state are any of the numbers "1" to "9", part of the title characters "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" will appear overlapping with the left small decorative symbol on the left and right of the reach state, and when the title characters "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" are stationary in their fixed position, part of the title characters "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" will be displayed overlapping with both the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach state.

The CPU 120 for controlling the performance displays the title characters "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" in a fixed position during the title start period, and then transitions to displaying the title display period. During the title display period of the low base weak reach B performance, as shown in FIG. 11-34 (b4) to (b5), a subtitle "Let's play hockey! I won't lose!" is displayed below the title characters "Bilibili Hockey Showdown", corresponding to the scene in which the friendly character "Yume Yume" and the enemy character "Boingo" face each other on the left and right, and the audio of the line displayed in the subtitle is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. At this time, as shown in FIG. 11-35, the audio of the title being read out is not output. Also, as shown in FIG. 11-35, the title display period of the low base weak reach B performance is executed for a longer time than the title start period of the low base weak reach B performance (see FIG. 11-47 and FIG. 11-48).

After the title display period ends, the performance control CPU 120 transitions to displaying the title end period. During the title end period of the low base weak reach B performance, as shown in (b5) to (b6), the title characters "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" displayed in a fixed position are moved from their fixed position to the right side of the display area until all of the title characters disappear. As shown in Figure 11-35, the title end period of the low base weak reach B performance ends in a shorter time than the title start period and title display period of the low base weak reach B performance (see Figures 11-47 and 11-48). Also, as shown in Figure 11-35, the expectation indication display, which will be described later, is not displayed in the title display part of the low base weak reach B performance.

After the title end period ends, the performance control CPU 120 starts the introductory part of the low base weak reach B performance. As shown in Figures 11-34 (b6) to (b7), the background at the start of the introductory part of the low base weak reach B performance is the same as the background of the title display part (the background in which the characters "Yume Yume" and "Boingo" face each other on either side of a hockey table), the video scene that started from the title display part (the scene in which the friendly character "Yume Yume" and the enemy character "Boingo" face each other on either side) also continues throughout the introductory part, the line that was displayed in the title display part "Let's play hockey! I won't lose!" also continues to be displayed, and the sound of the line output from speakers 8L and 8R also continues to be output. After that, as shown in Figure 11-34 (b7) to (b8), when the voice output of the line displayed in the title display part, "Let's play hockey! I won't lose!", ends, the scene switches to the next video scene in the introductory part (a scene in which the teammate character "Yume Yume" hits the puck back).

When a variation pattern is specified by the variation pattern specification command to develop into either low base strong super reach A-C or low base strongest super reach after low base weak super reach B, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance executes a drop performance in which the movable body 32 falls at the end of the introduction part, and then develops into either low base strong reach A performance, low base strong reach B performance, low base strong reach C performance, or low base strongest reach performance. On the other hand, when a variation pattern is specified by the variation pattern specification command to develop into a reach miss after low base weak super reach B, the CPU 120 notifies the user that the ally character "Yume Yume" was unable to win against the enemy character "Boingo" at the end of the introduction part, and the low base weak reach B performance is not a big win as a result of the performance, and then displays on the image display device 5 a combination of decorative patterns (large) indicating a reach miss of the type specified by the variable display result specification command.

In a configuration including a variation pattern in which a jackpot is reached without developing into other super reach effects after the execution of a low base weak reach B performance, when a variation pattern in which a jackpot is reached without developing into other super reach effects after the execution of a low base weak reach B performance is specified by a variation pattern specification command, the performance control CPU 120 notifies the player of the performance result that the ally character "Yume Yume" wins the game against the enemy character "Boingo" at the end of the introductory part and that the low base weak reach B performance results in a jackpot (the game is controlled to a jackpot game state), and then causes the image display device 5 to display a combination of decorative patterns (large) indicating the type of jackpot specified by the variable display result specification command.

[About the low base strong reach A performance]
FIG. 11-36 is a diagram showing the progression of the image displayed on the image display device 5 when the low base strong reach A performance is executed, and FIG. 11-37 is a timing chart showing the execution status of the low base strong reach A performance.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a low base strong super reach A is specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command, if the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern that develops from a normal reach via a low base weak super reach A or a low base weak super reach B, after executing the normal reach performance, it executes a low base weak reach A performance or a low base weak reach B performance, and develops it into a low base strong reach A performance. Also, when a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a low base strong super reach A is specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command, if the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern that develops directly from a normal reach, after executing the normal reach performance, it executes a selection performance described below, and develops it into a low base strong reach A performance.

When developing from a low base weak reach A or low base weak reach B performance, the performance control CPU 120 executes a drop performance in which the movable body 32 drops at the end of the low base weak reach A or low base weak reach B performance, and then starts the title display part of the low base strong reach A performance. In the drop performance, as shown in FIG. 11-36 (c1), while maintaining the display of the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right of the reach state, and the hold display and active display in the first hold memory display area 131SG005D, the second hold memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F, the background at the end of the low base weak reach A or low base weak reach B performance is switched to a background dedicated to the drop performance (a background with a pattern spreading radially from the center), and then the movable body 32 drops, and then the movable body 32 is raised to the initial position.

In addition, when a direct progression from a normal reach occurs, the performance control CPU 120 executes the selection performance described below, as shown in FIG. 11-36 (c1'), and then starts the title display part of the low base strong reach A performance. Details of the selection performance will be described later, but when the selection performance starts, the hold display and active display in the first hold memory display area 131SG005D, the second hold memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F are hidden.

As shown in FIG. 11-37, the title display part of the low base strong reach A performance includes a prologue display period before the title characters "Two people, catch a Bakuchu!" of the low base strong reach A performance are displayed, a title start period from when part of the title characters "Two people, catch a Bakuchu!" are displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 until they are displayed in their fixed position, a title display period during which the title characters "Two people, catch a Bakuchu!" are displayed in their fixed position, and a title end period until the title characters "Two people, catch a Bakuchu!" that were displayed in their fixed position disappear and switch to the introduction part.

When the performance control CPU 120 transitions to the title display part of the low base strong reach A performance, it first starts displaying the prologue display period.

During the prologue display period of the low base strong reach A effect transitioned from the drop effect, the background dedicated to the drop effect (background with a pattern radiating from the center), the display of the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right of the reach mode, and the reserved and active displays in the first reserved memory display area 131SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F are maintained, while the ally character "Yume Yume" is displayed on a layer in front of the background dedicated to the drop effect (background with a pattern radiating from the center), the reserved and active displays, and then the ally character "Yume Yume" is enlarged until the entire display area is filled.

In addition, during the prologue display period of the low base strong reach A effect transitioned from the selection effect, the display of the selection result image of the selection effect (here, the result image of the low base strong reach A effect) and the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right of the reach state are maintained, and the ally character "Yume Yume" is displayed on a layer in front of the selection result screen of the selection effect, and then the ally character "Yume Yume" is enlarged until the entire display area is filled.

After the prologue display period ends, the performance control CPU 120 transitions to the title start period.

As shown in Figure 11-36 (c1) to (c3), during the prologue display period transitioned from the drop effect, the background dedicated to the drop effect (a background with a pattern spreading out radially from the center) that was displayed before the entire display area was filled with the enlarged display of the ally character "Yume Yume" switches to the background of the low base strong reach A effect (a background in which the ally characters "Yume Yume" and "Jam" are displayed in the hallway) after the prologue display period ends, and the pending display and active display that were displayed before the entire display area was filled with the enlarged display of the ally character "Yume Yume" are hidden after the prologue display period ends. Note that the display of the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right of the reach mode is maintained even after the prologue display period ends.

Also, although not shown, during the prologue display period transitioned from the selection performance, the selection result image of the selection performance that was displayed before the display area was filled with the enlarged display of the ally character "Yume Yume" switches to the background of the low base strong reach A performance (the background where the ally characters "Yume Yume" and "Jam" are displayed in the hallway) after the prologue display period ends. The display of the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right of the reach state is maintained even after the prologue display period ends, and the pending display and active display that were hidden during the selection performance are maintained as hidden.

As shown in Figure 11-36 (c3) to (c4), during the title start period of the low base strong reach A performance, part of the title characters "Two people, catch the Bakuchu!" appears from the left side of the display area, overlapping with the left decorative pattern (small) of the left and right decorative patterns of the reach mode, and then the entire title characters "Two people, catch the Bakuchu!" are moved toward their fixed position and stopped at the fixed position. When the title characters "Two people, catch the Bakuchu!" are stopped at their fixed position, part of the title characters "Two people, catch the Bakuchu!" is displayed overlapping with both the left and right decorative patterns (small) of the reach mode.

The small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach state will be any number between "1" and "9" ("2" in the figure), but during the title start period of the low base strong reach A performance, whether the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach state are any number between "1" and "9", part of the title text "Two people, catch the explosive chu!" will appear overlapping with the left small decorative symbol on the left and right of the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach state, and when the title text "Two people, catch the explosive chu!" is stationary in its fixed position, part of the title text "Two people, catch the explosive chu!" will be displayed overlapping with both the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach state.

The CPU 120 for controlling the performance displays the title characters "Two people, catch the explosive chu!" in a fixed position during the title start period, and then transitions to displaying the title display period. During the title display period of the low base strong reach A performance, first, as shown in FIG. 11-36 (c4), the title characters "Two people, catch the explosive chu!" are displayed in a fixed position with the expectation indication display hidden for a predetermined time, and during that time, as shown in FIG. 11-37, a voice reading the title is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Next, as shown in FIG. 11-36 (c5) to (c6), an expectation indication display is displayed below the title characters "Two people, catch the explosive chu!" in a size smaller than the title characters "Two people, catch the explosive chu!". As shown in FIG. 11-37, the title display period of the low base strong reach A performance is executed for a longer time than the title start period of the low base strong reach A performance (see FIG. 11-47 and FIG. 11-48).

After the title display period ends, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance transitions to displaying the title end period. In the title end period of the low base strong reach A performance, as shown in FIG. 11-36 (c6) to (c7), the title characters "Two people, catch the explosive chu!" displayed in the fixed position are moved from the fixed position to the right side of the display area until all of the title characters disappear. In addition, the expectation indication display is also moved to the right side of the display area together with the title characters until all of them disappear. As shown in FIG. 11-37, the title end period of the low base strong reach A performance ends in a shorter time than the title start period and title display period of the low base strong reach A performance (see FIG. 11-47 and FIG. 11-48). In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-37, in the title display part of the low base strong reach A performance, the subtitles of the dialogue are not displayed as in the low base weak reach A performance and the low base weak reach B performance, and the sound of the dialogue is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

After the title end period ends, the performance control CPU 120 starts the introductory part of the low base strong reach A performance. As shown in Figures 11-36 (c3) to (c8), the background at the start of the introductory part of the low base strong reach A performance is the same as the background after the title start period in the title display part (the background where the ally characters "Yume Yume" and "Jam" are displayed in the hallway), and the video scene that starts from the title display part (the scene where the ally characters "Yume Yume" and "Jam" are displayed in the hallway) also continues through the introduction part. Also, as shown in Figures 11-36 (c8) and 11-37, after the start of the introduction part, the enemy character "Bakuchu" appears, and a subtitle of the line "Try and catch him if you can!" corresponding to the scene in which the enemy character "Bakuchu" appears is displayed, and the sound of the line displayed in the subtitle is output from speakers 8L and 8R.

In this way, in the low base strong reach A performance, during the title display part, audio is output from speakers 8L, 8R reading the title, but subtitles of the lines corresponding to the scene in the title display part are not displayed, and audio of the lines corresponding to the scene in the title display part is not output from speakers 8L, 8R. After the introduction part starts, subtitles of the lines corresponding to the scene in the introduction part are displayed, and audio of the lines corresponding to the scene in the introduction part is output from speakers 8L, 8R.

When a variation pattern designation command is used to designate a variation pattern resulting in a jackpot after a low base strong super reach A, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance notifies the player that the ally characters "Yume Yume" and "Jam" catch the enemy character "Bakuchu" at the end of the introductory part, and that the low base strong reach A performance is a jackpot (the game state is controlled to be a jackpot), and then causes the image display device 5 to display a combination of decorative symbols (large) indicating a jackpot of the type designated by the variable display result designation command. On the other hand, when a variation pattern designation command is used to designate a jackpot miss after a low base strong super reach A, the CPU 120 notifies the player that the ally characters "Yume Yume" and "Jam" cannot catch the enemy character "Bakuchu" at the end of the introductory part, and that the low base strong reach A performance is not a jackpot, and then causes the image display device 5 to display a combination of decorative symbols (large) indicating a jackpot miss of the type designated by the variable display result designation command.

[About the indication of the expectation of low base strong reach A performance]
In the title display part of the low base strong reach A performance, the image display device 5 displays the title text "Two people, catch the explosive chuu!" along with an expectation suggestion display in a size smaller than the title text "Two people, catch the explosive chuu!". The expectation suggestion display displayed in the title display part is composed of five star-shaped objects and the text "Expectation" displayed above the star-shaped objects to indicate that the star-shaped objects indicate the expectation, as shown in Fig. 11-36 (c5), and the number of star-shaped objects whose color has changed from black to gold among the five star-shaped objects suggests the expectation.

In the normal state in which the low base strong reach A performance is executed, an object indicating the number of reserved balls and an object indicating an active display may be displayed on the image display device 5. On the other hand, since the expectation indication displayed in the title display part also indicates the expectation level using multiple objects, if the hold indication and active display and the expectation indication are displayed simultaneously in the title display part, there is a risk that the objects constituting the hold indication and active display will be mistaken for objects in the expectation indication display. For this reason, in the title display part of the low base strong reach A performance in which the expectation indication is displayed, the hold indication and active display are not displayed simultaneously with the expectation indication, thereby preventing the objects constituting the hold indication and active display from being mistaken for objects in the expectation indication display.

In addition, since it is almost impossible for a game ball to enter the second start winning hole under normal circumstances, when the number of reserved balls in the first special chart is at its maximum (four) and is being displayed variably, a maximum of five objects may be displayed as reserved and active displays, which matches the number of objects indicating that the expectation level is at its maximum in the expectation level indication display. However, in the title display part of the low base strong reach A performance, the reserved and active displays are not displayed at the same time as the expectation level indication display, so even if the low base strong reach A performance is executed in a situation where a maximum of five objects are displayed as reserved and active displays, it is possible to prevent the objects displayed as reserved and active displays from being confused with the objects in the expectation level indication display, and the expectation level being mistakenly recognized as being at its maximum in the expectation level indication display.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-36, the pending display and active display are displayed during the prologue display period before the expectation indication is displayed in the title display part. However, the pending display and active display may be hidden from the start of the prologue display period. Even in such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the objects constituting the pending display and active display from being mistaken for objects in the expectation indication display.

Furthermore, when a low base strong reach A performance is executed, as shown in Figures 11-36 (c2) to (c3), during the prologue display period, the ally character "Yume Yume" is displayed on a background dedicated to the falling performance (a background with a pattern spreading out radially from the center) and on a layer in front of the pending display and active display, and then the ally character "Yume Yume" is enlarged until the entire display area is filled, and the pending display and active display that were displayed before the display area was filled by the enlarged display of the ally character "Yume Yume" are hidden after the prologue display period ends, so that the pending display and active display can be hidden without creating a sense of incongruity. In the example shown in FIG. 11-36, the characters are displayed in a layer in front of the pending and active displays, and are enlarged until the entire display area is filled, thereby hiding the pending and active displays that were displayed before the entire display area was filled. However, when a low base strong reach A performance is executed, a monochrome display performance may be executed in which the entire display area is displayed in a monochrome color such as white, except for the decorative pattern (small) of the reach mode, thereby erasing the pending and active displays that were displayed before the monochrome display performance. Even with this configuration, the pending and active displays can be hidden without any sense of incongruity.

In the title display part of the low base strong reach A performance, as shown in FIG. 11-36(c4), the title text "Two people, catch the explosive chu!" is displayed in a fixed position for a predetermined time with the expectation indication hidden, and then, as shown in FIG. 11-36(c5) to (c6), the expectation indication is displayed below the title text "Two people, catch the explosive chu!". At this time, as shown in FIG. 11-36(c5), in the initial stage, the color of the five star-shaped objects that make up the expectation indication is all displayed in black, and then, as shown in FIG. 11-36(c6), the color of three of the five star-shaped objects that correspond to the low base strong reach A performance is changed from black to gold, suggesting the expectation of a jackpot in the low base strong reach A performance.

When a low base weak reach A performance or a low base weak reach B performance progresses to a low base strong reach A performance, as shown in Figures 11-38 (x1) to (x2), if there are any reserved numbers remaining, the reserved display and active display are displayed until the entire display area is filled by the enlarged display of the ally character "Yume Yume" during the prologue display period, and in the subsequent title display part, without going through a stage where the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu together!" are displayed in a fixed position with the expectation indication display hidden, as shown in Figures 11-38 (x3) to (x4), five star-shaped objects that constitute the expectation indication display are displayed simultaneously with the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu together!", and then, if the color of the star-shaped objects is changed from black to gold, the objects that constitute the expectation indication display will be displayed immediately after the objects that constitute the reserved display and active display are hidden, which may cause confusion between the reserved display and active display and the expectation indication display. In contrast, in the example shown in FIG. 11-36, after the expectation indication display is hidden during the prologue display period, the expectation indication display is hidden during the title display period, and the title characters "Two people, catch a blast!" are kept displayed in a fixed position for a predetermined period of time, and then the expectation indication display is displayed below the title characters "Two people, catch a blast!", thereby preventing the pending and active displays from being confused with the expectation indication display.

[About the low base strong reach B performance]
FIG. 11-39 is a diagram showing the progression of the image displayed on the image display device 5 when the low base strong reach B performance is executed, and FIG. 11-40 is a timing chart showing the execution status of the low base strong reach B performance.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a low base strong super reach B is specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command, if the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern that develops from a normal reach via a low base weak super reach A or a low base weak super reach B, after executing the normal reach performance, it executes a low base weak reach A performance or a low base weak reach B performance, and develops it into a low base strong reach B performance. Also, when a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a low base strong super reach B is specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command, if the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern that develops directly from a normal reach, after executing the normal reach performance, it executes a selection performance described below, and develops it into a low base strong reach B performance.

When developing from a low base weak reach A or low base weak reach B performance, the performance control CPU 120 executes a drop performance in which the movable body 32 drops at the end of the low base weak reach A or low base weak reach B performance, and then starts the title display part of the low base strong reach B performance. In the drop performance, as shown in FIG. 11-39 (d1), while maintaining the display of the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right of the reach state, and the hold display and active display in the first hold memory display area 131SG005D, the second hold memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F, the background at the end of the low base weak reach A or low base weak reach B performance is switched to a background dedicated to the drop performance (a background with a pattern spreading radially from the center), and then the movable body 32 is dropped, and then the movable body 32 is raised to the initial position.

In addition, when a direct progression from a normal reach occurs, the performance control CPU 120 executes the selection performance described below, as shown in FIG. 11-39 (d1'), and then starts the title display part of the low base strong reach B performance. Details of the selection performance will be described later, but when the selection performance starts, the hold display and active display in the first hold memory display area 131SG005D, the second hold memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F are hidden.

As shown in FIG. 11-40, the title display part of the low base strong reach B performance includes a prologue display period before the title characters "Shingeki Robo Battle" of the low base strong reach B performance are displayed, a title start period from when a part of the title characters "Shingeki Robo Battle" is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 until they are displayed in their fixed position, a title display period during which the title characters "Shingeki Robo Battle" are displayed in their fixed position, and a title end period until the display of the title characters "Shingeki Robo Battle" that were displayed in their fixed position disappears and switches to the introduction part.

When the performance control CPU 120 transitions to the title display part of the low base strong reach B performance, it first starts displaying the prologue display period.

During the prologue display period of the low base strong reach B effect transitioned from the drop effect, the background dedicated to the drop effect (background with a pattern radiating from the center), the display of the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right of the reach state, and the reserved and active displays in the first reserved memory display area 131SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F are maintained, while the ally character "Yume Yume" is displayed on a layer in front of the background dedicated to the drop effect (background with a pattern radiating from the center), the reserved and active displays, and then the ally character "Yume Yume" is enlarged until the entire display area is filled.

In addition, during the prologue display period of the low base strong reach B effect transitioned from the selection effect, the display of the selection result image of the selection effect (here, the result image of the low base strong reach B effect) and the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right of the reach state are maintained, and the ally character "Yume Yume" is displayed on a layer in front of the selection result screen of the selection effect, and then the ally character "Yume Yume" is enlarged until the entire display area is filled.

After the prologue display period ends, the performance control CPU 120 transitions to the title start period.

As shown in Figure 11-39 (d1) to (d3), during the prologue display period transitioned from the drop effect, the background dedicated to the drop effect (a background with a pattern spreading out radially from the center) that was displayed before the entire display area was filled with the enlarged display of the ally character "Yume Yume" switches to a background dedicated to the title display of the low base strong reach B effect (a background with the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" and the enemy character "Robo" displayed on the left and right) after the prologue display period ends, and the pending display and active display that were displayed before the entire display area was filled with the enlarged display of the ally character "Yume Yume" are hidden after the prologue display period ends. Note that the display of the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right of the reach mode is maintained even after the prologue display period ends.

Also, although not shown, during the prologue display period transitioned from the selection performance, the selection result image of the selection performance that was displayed before the display area was filled entirely with the enlarged display of the ally character "Yume Yume" switches to a background dedicated to the title display of the low base strong reach B performance (a background in which the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" and the enemy character "Robo" are displayed on the left and right) after the prologue display period ends. Note that the display of the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right of the reach mode is maintained even after the prologue display period ends, and the pending display and active display that were hidden during the selection performance are maintained as hidden.

As shown in Figure 11-39 (d3) to (d4), during the title start period of the low base strong reach B performance, part of the title characters "Gekishin Robo Battle" are made to appear from the left side of the display area overlapping with the left decorative pattern (small) of the left and right decorative patterns of the reach mode, and then the entire title characters "Gekishin Robo Battle" are moved toward the fixed position and stopped at the fixed position. When the title characters "Gekishin Robo Battle" are stopped at the fixed position, part of the title characters "Gekishin Robo Battle" are displayed overlapping with both the left and right decorative patterns (small) of the reach mode.

The small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach state will be any number between "1" and "9" ("2" in the figure), but during the title start period of the low base strong reach B performance, whether the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach state are any number between "1" and "9", part of the title characters "Gekishin Robo Battle" will appear overlapping with the left small decorative symbol on the left and right of the reach state, and when the title characters "Gekishin Robo Battle" are stationary in a fixed position, part of the title characters "Gekishin Robo Battle" will be displayed overlapping with both the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach state.

The CPU 120 for controlling the performance displays the title characters "Gekishin Robo Battle" in a fixed position during the title start period, and then transitions to displaying the title display period. During the title display period of the low base strong reach B performance, first, as shown in FIG. 11-39 (d4), the title characters "Gekishin Robo Battle" are displayed in a fixed position with the expectation indication display hidden for a predetermined time, and during that time, as shown in FIG. 11-40, audio reading the title is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Next, as shown in FIG. 11-39 (d5) to (d6), an expectation indication display is displayed below the title characters "Gekishin Robo Battle" in a size smaller than the title characters "Gekishin Robo Battle". As shown in FIG. 11-40, the title display period of the low base strong reach B performance is executed for a longer time than the title start period of the low base strong reach B performance (see FIG. 11-47 and FIG. 11-48).

After the title display period ends, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance transitions to the display of the title end period. In the title end period of the low base strong reach B performance, as shown in FIG. 11-39 (d6) to (d7), the title characters "Gekishin Robo Battle" displayed in the fixed position are moved from the fixed position to the right side of the display area until all of the title characters disappear. In addition, the expectation indication display is also moved to the right side of the display area together with the title characters until all of them disappear. As shown in FIG. 11-40, the title end period of the low base strong reach B performance ends in a shorter time than the title start period and title display period of the low base strong reach B performance (see FIG. 11-47 and FIG. 11-48). In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-40, in the title display part of the low base strong reach B performance, no subtitles of the dialogue are displayed, as in the low base weak reach A performance and the low base weak reach B performance, and no sound of the dialogue is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

After the title end period ends, the performance control CPU 120 starts the introduction part of the low base strong reach B performance. As shown in FIG. 11-39 (d3) to (d8), the background at the start of the introduction part of the low base strong reach B performance is different from the background dedicated to title display in the title display part (the background where the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" and the enemy character "Robo" are displayed at the left and right positions), and at the start of the introduction part, it switches from the background dedicated to title display in the title display part to the background at the start of the introduction part of the low base strong reach B performance (the background where the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" and the enemy character "Robo" confront each other in the town). The introduction part of the low base strong reach B performance starts with a video scene in which the enemy character "Robo" faces forward at a position on the far side as seen from the player, and the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" face each other with their backs turned at a position on the near side as seen from the player. At this time, both the enemy character "Robo" located at the back as seen by the player, and the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" located at the front as seen by the player, are displayed in positions that overlap with the fixed positions where the title characters "Shocking Robot Battle" were displayed during the title display period of the title display part. Also, as shown in Figures 11-39 (d8) and 11-40, after the start of the introductory part, a subtitle for the line "I won't lose!" is displayed in accordance with the scene in which the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" confront the enemy character "Robo", and the sound of the line displayed in the subtitles is output from speakers 8L and 8R.

In this way, in the low base strong reach B performance, during the title display part, audio is output from speakers 8L, 8R reading the title, but subtitles of the lines corresponding to the scene in the title display part are not displayed, and audio of the lines corresponding to the scene in the title display part is not output from speakers 8L, 8R. After the introduction part starts, subtitles of the lines corresponding to the scene in the introduction part are displayed, and audio of the lines corresponding to the scene in the introduction part is output from speakers 8L, 8R.

When a variation pattern that results in a big win after a low base strong super reach B is specified by the variation pattern specification command, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance notifies the user that the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" win the battle against the enemy character "Robo" at the end of the introductory part, and that the low base strong reach B performance is a big win (the game state is controlled to a big win), and then causes the image display device 5 to display a combination of decorative symbols (large) indicating a big win of the type specified by the variable display result specification command. On the other hand, when a variation pattern that results in a reach miss after a low base strong super reach B is specified by the variation pattern specification command, the CPU 120 notifies the user that the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" lose the battle against the enemy character "Robo" at the end of the introductory part, and that the low base strong reach B performance is not a big win, and then causes the image display device 5 to display a combination of decorative symbols (large) indicating a reach miss of the type specified by the variable display result specification command.

[About the indication of the expectation of low base strong reach B performance]
In the title display part of the low base strong reach B performance, the expectation suggestion display is displayed on the image display device 5 in a size smaller than the title characters "Shattering Robot Battle" along with the title characters "Shattering Robot Battle". The expectation suggestion display displayed in the title display part is composed of five star-shaped objects and the characters "Expectation" displayed above the star-shaped objects to indicate that the star-shaped objects indicate the expectation, as shown in Fig. 11-39 (d5), and the number of star-shaped objects whose color has changed from black to gold among the five star-shaped objects suggests the expectation.

In the normal state in which the low base strong reach B performance is executed, an object indicating the number of reserved balls and an object indicating an active display may be displayed on the image display device 5, and if the reserved display and active display and the expectation level indication display are displayed simultaneously in the title display part, there is a risk that the objects constituting the reserved display and active display will be mistaken for objects in the expectation level indication display. For this reason, in the title display part of the low base strong reach B performance in which the expectation level indication display is displayed, the reserved display and active display are not displayed simultaneously with the expectation level indication display, thereby preventing the objects constituting the reserved display and active display from being mistaken for objects in the expectation level indication display.

In addition, in the title display part of the low base strong reach B performance, the pending and active displays are not displayed at the same time as the expectation level suggestion display, so even if the low base strong reach B performance is executed in a situation where a maximum of five objects are displayed as pending and active displays, it is possible to prevent confusion between the objects displayed as pending and active displays and the objects in the expectation level suggestion display, leading to a mistaken belief that the expectation level is at its maximum in the expectation level suggestion display.

Furthermore, the low base strong reach B performance may be configured so that the pending display and active display are hidden from the start of the prologue display period, and even in this configuration, it is possible to prevent the objects constituting the pending display and active display from being mistaken for objects indicating the expectation level.

When the low base strong reach B performance is executed, as shown in Fig. 11-39 (d2) to (d3), the ally character "Yume Yume" is displayed on the background dedicated to the falling performance (background with a pattern spreading out radially from the center) and on a layer in front of the reserved display and active display during the prologue display period, and then the ally character "Yume Yume" is enlarged until the display area is completely filled, and the reserved display and active display that were displayed before the display area was completely filled by the enlarged display of the ally character "Yume Yume" are hidden after the prologue display period ends, so that the reserved display and active display can be hidden without any sense of incongruity. Note that when the low base strong reach B performance is executed, a single-color display performance in which the entire display area is displayed in a single color such as white, except for the decorative pattern (small) of the reach mode, may be executed to erase the reserved display and active display that were displayed before the single-color display performance, and even in such a configuration, the reserved display and active display can be hidden without any sense of incongruity.

In the title display part of the low base strong reach B performance, as shown in FIG. 11-39 (d4), the title characters "Gekishin Robo Battle" are displayed in a fixed position with the expectation indication hidden for a predetermined time, and then, as shown in FIG. 11-39 (d5) to (d6), the expectation indication is displayed below the title characters "Gekishin Robo Battle". At this time, as shown in FIG. 11-39 (d5), in the initial stage, the color of the five star-shaped objects that make up the expectation indication is all displayed in black, and then, as shown in FIG. 11-39 (d6), the color of 3.5 star-shaped objects that correspond to the low base strong reach B performance among the five star-shaped objects is changed from black to gold to suggest the expectation of a jackpot in the low base strong reach B performance. This prevents the pending and active displays from being confused with the expectation indication.

[About the low base strong reach C performance]
As the low base strong reach C performance has many things in common with the previously described low base strong reach B performance, a drawing of the low base strong reach C performance will be omitted.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a low base strong super reach C is specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command, if the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern that develops from a normal reach via a low base weak super reach A or a low base weak super reach B, after executing the normal reach performance, it executes a low base weak reach A performance or a low base weak reach B performance, and develops it into a low base strong reach C performance. Also, when a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a low base strong super reach C is specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command, if the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern that develops directly from a normal reach, after executing the normal reach performance, it executes a selection performance described below, and develops it into a low base strong reach C performance.

When developing from a low base weak reach A or low base weak reach B performance, the performance control CPU 120 executes a drop performance in which the movable body 32 drops at the end of the low base weak reach A or low base weak reach B performance, and then starts the title display part of the low base strong reach C performance. In the drop performance, while maintaining the display of the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right of the reach state, and the hold display and active display in the first hold memory display area 131SG005D, the second hold memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F, the background at the end of the low base weak reach A or low base weak reach B performance is switched to a background dedicated to the drop performance (a background with a pattern spreading radially from the center), and then the movable body 32 drops, and then the movable body 32 is raised to the initial position.

In addition, when a direct progression from a normal reach occurs, the performance control CPU 120 executes the selection performance described below, and then starts the title display part of the low base strong reach B performance. The details of the selection performance will be described later, but when the selection performance starts, the hold display and active display in the first hold memory display area 131SG005D, the second hold memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F are hidden.

The title display part of the low base strong reach C performance includes a prologue display period before the title characters "Great Earthquake Robot Battle" of the low base strong reach C performance are displayed, a title start period from when part of the title characters "Great Earthquake Robot Battle" is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 until they are displayed in their fixed position, a title display period during which the title characters "Great Earthquake Robot Battle" are displayed in their fixed position, and a title end period until the title characters "Great Earthquake Robot Battle" that were displayed in their fixed position disappear and switch to the introductory part.

When the performance control CPU 120 transitions to the title display part of the low base strong reach C performance, it first starts displaying the prologue display period.

During the prologue display period of the low base strong reach C effect transitioned from the drop effect, the background dedicated to the drop effect (background with a pattern radiating from the center), the display of the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right of the reach state, and the reserved and active displays of the first reserved memory display area 131SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F are maintained, while the ally character "Yume Yume" is displayed on a layer in front of the background dedicated to the drop effect (background with a pattern radiating from the center), the reserved and active displays, and then the ally character "Yume Yume" is enlarged until the entire display area is filled.

In addition, during the prologue display period of the low base strong reach C effect transitioned from the selection effect, the display of the selection result image of the selection effect (here, the result image of the low base strong reach C effect) and the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right of the reach state are maintained, and the ally character "Yume Yume" is displayed on a layer in front of the selection result screen of the selection effect, and then the ally character "Yume Yume" is enlarged until the entire display area is filled.

After the prologue display period ends, the performance control CPU 120 transitions to the title start period.

During the prologue display period following the fall effect, the background dedicated to the fall effect (a background with patterns radiating from the center) that was displayed before the entire display area was filled with the enlarged display of the ally character "Yume Yume" switches to the background of the low base strong reach B effect (a background with ally characters "Yume Yume" and "Nana" and enemy character "Dai Robo" displayed on the left and right) after the prologue display period ends, and the pending display and active display that were displayed before the entire display area was filled with the enlarged display of the ally character "Yume Yume" are hidden after the prologue display period ends. Note that the display of the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right of the reach mode is maintained even after the prologue display period ends.

Also, although not shown, during the prologue display period transitioned from the selection performance, the selection result image of the selection performance that was displayed before the display area was filled with the enlarged display of the ally character "Yume Yume" switches to a background dedicated to the title display of the low base strong reach C performance (a background in which the ally characters "Yume Yume" and "Nana" and the enemy character "Dai Robo" are displayed on the left and right) after the prologue display period ends. Note that the display of the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right of the reach mode is maintained even after the prologue display period ends, and the pending display and active display that were hidden during the selection performance are maintained as hidden.

During the title start period of the low base strong reach C performance, part of the title characters "Daishin Robo Battle" appears from the left side of the display area, overlapping with the left decorative pattern (small) of the left and right decorative patterns of the reach mode, and then the entire title characters "Daishin Robo Battle" moves toward its fixed position and stops at the fixed position. When the title characters "Daishin Robo Battle" are stopped at the fixed position, part of the title characters "Daishin Robo Battle" is displayed overlapping with both the left and right decorative patterns (small) of the reach mode.

The small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode will be any number between "1" and "9" ("2" in the illustration), but during the title start period, whether the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode are any number between "1" and "9", part of the title characters "Dai Gekishin Robo Battle" will appear overlapping with the left small decorative symbol on the left and right of the reach mode, and when the title characters "Dai Gekishin Robo Battle" are stationary in a fixed position, part of the title characters "Dai Gekishin Robo Battle" will be displayed overlapping with both the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode.

The performance control CPU 120 displays the title characters "Dai Gekishin Robo Battle" in a fixed position during the title start period, and then transitions to displaying the title display period. During the title display period of the low base strong reach C performance, first, the title characters "Dai Gekishin Robo Battle" are displayed in a fixed position with the expectation indication display hidden, and this state is maintained for a predetermined time, during which time audio is output from speakers 8L and 8R reading out the title. Next, an expectation indication display is displayed below the title characters "Dai Gekishin Robo Battle" in a size smaller than the title characters "Dai Gekishin Robo Battle". The title display period of the low base strong reach C performance is executed for a longer time than the title start period of the low base strong reach C performance (see Figures 11-47 and 11-48).

After the title display period ends, the performance control CPU 120 transitions to displaying the title end period. During the title end period of the low base strong reach C performance, the title characters "Great Shock Robot Battle" displayed in the fixed position are moved from their fixed position to the right side of the display area until all of the title characters have disappeared. In addition, the expectation indication display is also moved to the right side of the display area together with the title characters until all of them have disappeared. The title end period of the low base strong reach C performance ends in a shorter time than the title start period and title display period of the low base strong reach C performance (see Figures 11-47 and 11-48). In addition, during the title display part of the low base strong reach C performance, no subtitles of the dialogue are displayed, as in the low base weak reach A performance and the low base weak reach B performance, and no sound of the dialogue is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

After the title end period ends, the performance control CPU 120 starts the introduction part of the low base strong reach C performance. The background at the start of the introduction part of the low base strong reach C performance is different from the background dedicated to title display in the title display part (the background where the ally characters "Yume Yume" and "Nana" and the enemy character "Dai Robo" are displayed on the left and right), and at the start of the introduction part, it switches from the background dedicated to title display in the title display part to the background at the start of the introduction part of the low base strong reach C performance (the background where the ally characters "Yume Yume" and "Nana" and the enemy character "Dai Robo" confront each other in the town). The introduction part of the low base strong reach C performance starts with a video scene in which the enemy character "Dai Robo" faces the front on the far side as seen from the player, and the ally characters "Yume Yume" and "Nana" face each other on the near side as seen from the player. At this time, both the enemy character "Big Robo", located at the back as seen by the player, and the ally characters "Yume Yume" and "Nana", located at the front as seen by the player, are displayed in positions that overlap with the fixed positions where the title characters "Great Shock Robot Battle" were displayed during the title display period of the title display part. In addition, after the start of the introductory part, a subtitle for the line "I'll never lose!" is displayed in accordance with the scene in which the ally characters "Yume Yume" and "Nana" confront the enemy character "Big Robo", and the sound of the line displayed in the subtitles is output from speakers 8L and 8R.

In this way, in the low base strong reach C performance, during the title display part, audio is output from speakers 8L, 8R reading the title, but subtitles of the lines corresponding to the scene in the title display part are not displayed, and audio of the lines corresponding to the scene in the title display part is not output from speakers 8L, 8R. After the introduction part starts, subtitles of the lines corresponding to the scene in the introduction part are displayed, and audio of the lines corresponding to the scene in the introduction part is output from speakers 8L, 8R.

When a variation pattern designation command is used to designate a variation pattern resulting in a jackpot after a low base strong super reach C, the CPU 120 notifies the player of the result of the low base strong reach C presentation that the ally characters "Yume Yume" and "Nana" win the battle against the enemy character "Dai Robo" at the end of the introductory part, and that the presentation result is a jackpot (the game state is controlled to a jackpot), and then causes the image display device 5 to display a combination of decorative symbols (large) indicating a jackpot of the type designated by the variable display result designation command. On the other hand, when a variation pattern designation command is used to designate a reach miss after a low base strong super reach C, the CPU 120 notifies the player of the result of the low base strong reach C presentation that the ally characters "Yume Yume" and "Nana" lose the battle against the enemy character "Dai Robo" at the end of the introductory part, and that the presentation result is not a jackpot, and then causes the image display device 5 to display a combination of decorative symbols (large) indicating a reach miss of the type designated by the variable display result designation command.

[About the indication of the expectation of low base strong reach C performance]
In the title display part of the low base strong reach C performance, the expectation indication is displayed on the image display device 5 in a size smaller than the title characters "Great Earthquake Robot Battle" along with the title characters "Great Earthquake Robot Battle". The expectation indication displayed in the title display part is composed of five star-shaped objects and the characters "Expectation" displayed above the star-shaped objects to indicate that the star-shaped objects indicate the expectation, and the expectation is indicated by the number of star-shaped objects that have changed color from black to gold among the five star-shaped objects.

In the normal state when the low base strong reach C performance is executed, an object indicating the number of reserved balls and an object indicating an active display may be displayed on the image display device 5, and if the reserved display and active display and the expectation level indication display are displayed simultaneously in the title display part, there is a risk that the objects constituting the reserved display and active display will be mistaken for objects in the expectation level indication display. For this reason, in the title display part of the low base strong reach C performance where the expectation level indication display is displayed, the reserved display and active display are not displayed simultaneously with the expectation level indication display, thereby preventing the objects constituting the reserved display and active display from being mistaken for objects in the expectation level indication display.

In addition, in the title display part of the low base strong reach C performance, the pending and active displays are not displayed at the same time as the expectation suggestion display, so even if the low base strong reach C performance is executed in a situation where a maximum of five objects are displayed as pending and active displays, it is possible to prevent confusion between the objects displayed as pending and active displays and the objects in the expectation suggestion display, leading to a mistaken belief that the expectation suggestion display is at its maximum.

Furthermore, in the low base strong reach C performance, the pending display and active display may be hidden from the start of the prologue display period, and even in this configuration, it is possible to prevent the objects constituting the pending display and active display from being mistaken for objects indicating the expectation level.

When the low base strong reach B performance is executed, the ally character "Yume Yume" is displayed on a background dedicated to the falling performance (a background with a pattern spreading out radially from the center) and on a layer in front of the reserved display and active display during the prologue display period, and then the ally character "Yume Yume" is enlarged until the entire display area is filled, and the reserved display and active display that were displayed before the display area was filled by the enlarged display of the ally character "Yume Yume" are hidden after the prologue display period ends, so that the reserved display and active display can be hidden without any sense of incongruity. When the low base strong reach C performance is executed, a monochrome display performance can be executed in which the entire display area is displayed in a monochrome color such as white, except for the decorative pattern (small) of the reach mode, etc., to erase the reserved display and active display that were displayed before the monochrome display performance, and even in this configuration, the reserved display and active display can be hidden without any sense of incongruity.

In the title display part of the low base strong reach C performance, the title characters "Dai Gekishin Robo Battle" are displayed in a fixed position for a predetermined time with the expectation indication hidden, and then the expectation indication is displayed below the title characters "Dai Gekishin Robo Battle". At this time, in the initial stage, the color of the five star-shaped objects that make up the expectation indication is all displayed in black, and then the color of four of the five star-shaped objects that correspond to the low base strong reach C performance is changed from black to gold, suggesting the expectation of a jackpot in the low base strong reach C performance. This prevents the pending and active displays from being confused with the expectation indication.

[About the Low Base Strongest Reach Production]
FIG. 11-41 is a diagram showing the transition of the image displayed on the image display device 5 when the low-base strongest reach presentation is executed, and FIG. 11-42 is a timing chart showing the execution status of the low-base strongest reach presentation.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the normal state, and when a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a low base strongest super reach is specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command, if the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern that develops from a normal reach via a low base weak super reach A or a low base weak super reach B, after executing the normal reach performance, it executes a low base weak reach A performance or a low base weak reach B performance, and develops it into a low base strongest reach performance. Also, when a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a low base strongest super reach is specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command, if the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern that develops directly from a normal reach, after executing the normal reach performance, it executes a selection performance described below, and develops it into a low base strongest reach performance.

When developing from a low base weak reach A or low base weak reach B performance, the performance control CPU 120 executes a drop performance in which the movable body 32 drops at the end of the low base weak reach A or low base weak reach B performance, and then starts the title display part of the low base strongest reach performance. In the drop performance, as shown in FIG. 11-41 (e1), while maintaining the display of the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right of the reach state, and the hold display and active display in the first hold memory display area 131SG005D, the second hold memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F, the background at the end of the low base weak reach A or low base weak reach B performance is switched to a background dedicated to the drop performance (a background with a pattern spreading radially from the center), and then the movable body 32 drops, and then the movable body 32 is raised to the initial position.

In addition, when a direct progression from a normal reach occurs, the performance control CPU 120 executes the selection performance described below, as shown in FIG. 11-41 (e1'), and then starts the title display part of the low-base strongest reach performance. Details of the selection performance will be described later, but when the selection performance starts, the hold display and active display in the first hold memory display area 131SG005D, the second hold memory display area 131SG005U, and the active display area 131SG005F are hidden.

As shown in FIG. 11-42, the title display part of the low-base strongest reach performance includes a title start period from when part of the title characters "Six people, catch a Bakuchu!" of the low-base strongest reach performance is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 until they are displayed in their fixed position, a title display period during which the title characters "Six people, catch a Bakuchu!" are displayed in their fixed position, and a title end period from when the title characters "Six people, catch a Bakuchu!" that were displayed in their fixed position disappear and switch to the introduction part.

When the performance control CPU 120 transitions to the title display part of the low-base strongest reach performance, it first starts displaying the title start period.

During the title start period of the low-base strongest reach performance, as shown in FIG. 11-41 (e3), the display of the left and right decorative symbols (small) of the reach mode is maintained, and the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu with 6 people!" are displayed in an expanded size where only a part of the characters is visible in the display area. At this time, the display area is displayed in such a manner that the entire display area is filled with a part of the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu with 6 people!". In addition, the part of the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu with 6 people!" displayed in the display area appears in such a manner that it overlaps with both the left and right decorative symbols (small) of the reach mode. After that, as shown in FIG. 11-41 (e4), the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu with 6 people!" are gradually reduced in size, and the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu with 6 people!", which have been reduced in size so that all of the characters of the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu with 6 people!" are visible in the display area, are stopped in their fixed position. When the title text "Six people, catch the Bakuchu!" is reduced in size and stationary in a fixed position, a portion of the title text "Six people, catch the Bakuchu!" for the low base strongest reach effect is displayed overlapping with both of the small decorative patterns on the left and right of the reach effect.

The small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode will be any number between "1" and "9" ("2" in the figure), but during the title start period of the low base strongest reach performance, whether the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode are any number between "1" and "9", the enlarged title text "Catch the Bakuchu with six people!" will appear overlapping with both the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode, and the reduced title text "Catch the Bakuchu with six people!" that is stationary in the fixed position will be displayed with a portion of it overlapping with both the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach mode.

As shown in Figures 11-41 (e1) to (e4), during the title start period transitioned from the falling effect, the background dedicated to the falling effect (a background with a pattern spreading radially from the center) that was displayed before the entire display area was filled with part of the enlarged-sized title characters "Six people, catch a Bakuchu!" is switched to a background dedicated to the title display of the low-base strongest reach effect (a background in which six friendly characters and the enemy character "Bakuchu" are displayed on the left and right), while the display area is filled with part of the enlarged-sized title characters "Six people, catch a Bakuchu!", and when the title characters "Six people, catch a Bakuchu!" are reduced in size and stationary in their fixed positions, the background dedicated to the title display of the low-base strongest reach effect is displayed as its background. Also, during the title start period that transitions from the falling effect, the pending and active displays that were displayed before the display area was filled with a portion of the enlarged title text "Catch the Bakuchu with six people!" are hidden while the display area is filled with a portion of the enlarged title text "Catch the Bakuchu with six people!". Note that the display of the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right of the reach mode is maintained even after the title start period ends.

In addition, during the title start period transitioned from the selection performance, the selection result image (here, the title image of the low-base strongest reach performance) of the selection performance that was displayed before the display area was completely filled with part of the enlarged-sized title text "Catch a Bakuchu with six people!" is switched to a background dedicated to the title display of the low-base strongest reach performance (a background in which six friendly characters and the enemy character "Bakuchu" are displayed on the left and right) while the display area is completely filled with part of the enlarged-sized title text "Catch a Bakuchu with six people!", and when the title text "Catch a Bakuchu with six people!" is stationary in a fixed position in a reduced size, the background dedicated to the title display of the low-base strongest reach performance is displayed as its background. Note that the display of the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right of the reach mode is maintained even after the end of the title start period, and the reserved display and active display that were hidden during the selection performance are maintained as hidden.

The CPU 120 for controlling the performance displays the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu with six people!" in a reduced size at a fixed position during the title start period, and then transitions to displaying the title display period. During the title display period of the low-base strongest reach performance, first, as shown in FIG. 11-41 (e4), the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu with six people!" are displayed at a fixed position with the expectation indication display hidden for a predetermined time, and during that time, as shown in FIG. 11-42, a voice reading the title is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Next, as shown in FIG. 11-41 (e5) to (e6), an expectation indication display is displayed below the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu with six people!" in a size smaller than the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu with six people!". As shown in FIG. 11-42, the title display period of the low-base strongest reach performance is executed for a longer time than the title start period of the low-base strongest reach performance (see FIG. 11-47 and FIG. 11-48).

After the title display period ends, the performance control CPU 120 transitions to displaying the title end period. During the title end period of the low-base strongest reach performance, as shown in FIG. 11-41 (e6) to (e7), the title characters "Catch a Bakuchu with Six People!", which are displayed in a reduced size and at a fixed position, are enlarged until the entire display area is filled with parts of the title characters "Catch a Bakuchu with Six People!". At this time, the title characters "Catch a Bakuchu with Six People!" are not enlarged in the opposite manner to when the title characters "Catch a Bakuchu with Six People!" are displayed in a reduced size during the title start period, but are enlarged in a manner different from the opposite manner to when the title characters "Catch a Bakuchu with Six People!" are displayed in a reduced size during the title start period until the entire display area is filled with parts of the title characters "Catch a Bakuchu with Six People!". That is, the path that each part of the title character follows as the title character "Catch the Bakuchu with six people!" shrinks during the title start period is different from the path that each part of the title character follows as the title character "Catch the Bakuchu with six people!" expands during the title end period. Therefore, the display area is completely filled with parts of the title character "Catch the Bakuchu with six people!" in a manner different from the manner in which the display area is completely filled at the start of the title start period. As shown in FIG. 11-42, the title end period of the low base strongest reach effect ends in a shorter time than the title start period and title display period of the low base strongest reach effect (see FIG. 11-47 and FIG. 11-48). Also, as shown in FIG. 11-42, in the title display part of the low base strongest reach effect, no subtitles of the dialogue are displayed, as in the low base weak reach A effect and the low base weak reach B effect, and no sound of the dialogue is output from speakers 8L and 8R.

After the title end period ends, the performance control CPU 120 starts the introductory part of the low base strongest reach performance. As shown in FIG. 11-41 (e4) to (e8), the background at the start of the introductory part of the low base strongest reach performance (a background in which six ally characters chase the enemy character "Bakuchu" in the city) is different from the background dedicated to title display in the title display part (a background in which six ally characters and the enemy character "Bakuchu" are displayed on the left and right), and after the title end period ends and the background dedicated to title display is completely filled with part of the title characters "Catch Bakuchu with six people!" during the title end period, it switches to the background at the start of the introductory part of the low base strongest reach performance. The introductory part of the low base strongest reach performance starts with a video scene in which six ally characters chase the enemy character "Bakuchu". Also, as shown in FIG. 11-41 (e8) and FIG. 11-42, after the introductory part starts, a subtitle is displayed with the line "Try and catch him if you can!" in response to the scene in which six friendly characters chase the enemy character "Bakuchu", and the audio of the line displayed in the subtitles is output from speakers 8L and 8R.

In this way, in the low base strongest reach performance, during the title display part, audio is output from speakers 8L, 8R reading the title, but subtitles of the lines corresponding to the scene in the title display part are not displayed, and audio of the lines corresponding to the scene in the title display part is not output from speakers 8L, 8R. After the introduction part starts, subtitles of the lines corresponding to the scene in the introduction part are displayed, and audio of the lines corresponding to the scene in the introduction part is output from speakers 8L, 8R.

When a variation pattern that results in a jackpot after a low-base strongest super reach is specified by the variation pattern specification command, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance notifies the player that the six ally characters catch the enemy character "Bakuchu" at the end of the introductory part and that the low-base strongest reach performance is a jackpot (the game state is controlled to be a jackpot), and then causes the image display device 5 to display a combination of decorative symbols (large) indicating a jackpot of the type specified by the variable display result specification command. On the other hand, when a variation pattern that results in a reach miss after a low-base strongest super reach is specified by the variation pattern specification command, the CPU 120 notifies the player that the six ally characters cannot catch the enemy character "Bakuchu" at the end of the introductory part and that the low-base strongest reach performance is not a jackpot, and then causes the image display device 5 to display a combination of decorative symbols (large) indicating a reach miss of the type specified by the variable display result specification command.

[About the indication of the expectation of the strongest low-base reach performance]
In the title display part of the low-base strongest reach performance, the image display device 5 displays the title text "Catch the explosive chuu with six people!" along with an expectation suggestion display in a size smaller than the title text "Catch the explosive chuu with six people!". The expectation suggestion display displayed in the title display part is composed of five star-shaped objects and the text "Expectation" displayed above the star-shaped objects to indicate that the star-shaped objects indicate the expectation, as shown in Fig. 11-41 (e6), and the expectation suggestion display is indicated by the number of star-shaped objects whose color has changed from black to gold among the five star-shaped objects.

In the normal state in which the low-base strongest reach performance is executed, an object indicating the number of reserved balls and an object indicating an active display may be displayed on the image display device 5, and if the reserved display and active display and the expectation level indication display are displayed simultaneously in the title display part, there is a risk that the objects constituting the reserved display and active display will be mistaken for objects in the expectation level indication display. For this reason, in the title display part of the low-base strongest reach performance in which the expectation level indication display is displayed, the reserved display and active display are not displayed simultaneously with the expectation level indication display, thereby preventing the objects constituting the reserved display and active display from being mistaken for objects in the expectation level indication display.

In addition, in the title display part of the low-base strongest reach performance, the pending and active displays are not displayed at the same time as the expectation indication, so even if the low-base strongest reach performance is executed in a situation where a maximum of five objects are displayed as pending and active displays, it is possible to prevent confusion between the objects displayed as pending and active displays and the objects in the expectation indication display, leading to a mistaken belief that the expectation indication display shows the highest expectation.

When the low-base strongest reach performance is executed, as shown in FIG. 11-41 (e2) to (e4), the title text "Catch the Bakuchu with 6 people!" is displayed in an enlarged size in which only a portion of the text is visible in the display area during the title start period, and then the size is reduced so that all the text is visible in the display area. When the background dedicated to the title display of the low-base strongest reach performance is displayed, the reserved display and active display that were displayed before the title start period are hidden, so that the reserved display and active display can be hidden without any sense of incongruity. When the low-base strongest reach performance is executed, a monochrome display performance in which the entire display area is displayed in a monochrome color such as white, except for the decorative pattern (small) of the reach mode, may be executed to erase the reserved display and active display that were displayed before the monochrome display performance. Even in such a configuration, the reserved display and active display can be hidden without any sense of incongruity.

In the title display part of the low-base strongest reach performance, as shown in FIG. 11-41(e4), the title text "Catch the Bakuchu with 6 people!" is displayed in a fixed position for a predetermined time with the expectation indication hidden, and then, as shown in FIG. 11-41(e5) to (e6), the expectation indication is displayed below the title text "Catch the Bakuchu with 6 people!". At this time, as shown in FIG. 11-41(e5), in the initial stage, the color of the five star-shaped objects that make up the expectation indication is all displayed in black, and then, as shown in FIG. 11-41(e6), the color of 4.5 star-shaped objects that correspond to the low-base strongest reach performance among the five star-shaped objects is changed from black to gold, suggesting the expectation of a jackpot in the low-base strongest reach performance. This prevents the pending and active displays from being confused with the expectation indication.

[Variations of the title display part]
Figure 11-43 is a diagram showing the transition of images in modified title display parts of low base strong reach A performance, low base strong reach B performance, low base strong reach C performance, and low base strongest reach performance.

When the performance control CPU 120 transitions to the title display part of the corresponding Super Reach performance, it first executes a blackout performance in which the entire display area is displayed in black, except for the display of the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right of the Reach state, as shown in FIG. 11-43 (f1). If the pending display and active display were displayed before the execution of the blackout performance, the pending display and active display are hidden when the blackout performance begins.

After the blackout effect continues for a predetermined period of time, the effect control CPU 120 displays an expectation indication (an expectation indication for the low-base strongest reach effect in FIG. 11-43(f2)) while maintaining the background of the entire display area in black, as shown in FIG. 11-43(f2).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 maintains the state in which the background of the entire display area is displayed in black and the expectation indication display is displayed for a predetermined time, and displays the title character of the corresponding super reach performance (the title character of the low-base strongest reach performance in Fig. 11-43 (f3) (f5)) in a fixed position and in a size larger than the expectation indication display, as shown in Fig. 11-43 (f3) (f5).

When the title letters of the corresponding Super Reach performance are displayed in their fixed positions, a portion of the title letters is displayed overlapping both the left and right decorative symbols (small) of the reach mode. The left and right decorative symbols (small) of the reach mode will be any of the numbers "1" to "9" ("2" in the figure), but even if the left and right decorative symbols (small) of the reach mode are any of the numbers "1" to "9," when displayed in their fixed positions, the title letters of the corresponding Super Reach performance will be displayed overlapping both the left and right decorative symbols (small) of the reach mode.

In addition, the title characters are displayed in one of the two modes, a white mode (FIG. 11-43 (f3)) or a red mode (FIG. 11-43 (f5)). Whether the title characters are displayed in white mode or red mode is determined in the variable display preview performance determination process of step 131SGS609 described above. In the variable display preview performance determination process, when a variable pattern including the execution of a low base strong reach A performance, a low base strong reach B performance, a low base strong reach C performance, and a low base strongest reach performance is specified, it is determined whether the title characters are displayed in white mode or red mode with a probability according to whether or not there is a jackpot, and it is determined whether the title characters are displayed in white mode or red mode with a probability that the rate of a jackpot when the title characters are displayed in red mode is higher than the rate of a jackpot when the title characters are displayed in white mode. Therefore, when the title characters are displayed in red during the title display part of the corresponding Super Reach performance, the expectation of a jackpot is higher than when the title characters are displayed in white.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 displays the expectation indication display and the title characters of the corresponding Super Reach performance, and then, as shown in Figure 11-43 (f4) (f6), while maintaining the display of the expectation indication display and the title characters of the corresponding Super Reach performance, displays a background corresponding to the title display part of the corresponding Super Reach performance, and outputs audio reading the title from speakers 8L, 8R. Meanwhile, in the title display part, no subtitles of the dialogue are displayed, as in the low base weak reach A performance and the low base weak reach B performance, and no audio of the dialogue is output from speakers 8L, 8R. Also, in the title display part, the title characters are displayed for a longer period of time than the time until the title characters are displayed after the start of the blackout performance (see Figures 11-47 and 11-48).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 transitions to the title end period. Note that the control of the title end period is the same as for each of the super reach performances described above, so a description of it will be omitted here.

In this modified version of the title display part, the title text of the corresponding Super Reach performance is larger than the expectation indication display, and the expectation level is indicated by whether it is white or red, which attracts the player's attention. However, by displaying the expectation indication display before the title text, the player's attention can be drawn to the expectation indication first.

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-43 (f2), whether the title characters are displayed in white or red, if the type of super reach presentation is the same, the expectation level indication is displayed in the same manner. This allows the player to pay attention to whether the title characters are displayed in white or red after the expectation level indication is displayed.

[About high base reach A to D performance]
Fig. 11-44 is a diagram showing the transition of the image displayed on the image display device 5 when the high base reach A to D performances are executed, and Fig. 11-44 is a timing chart showing the execution status of the high base reach A to D performances. Note that the high base reach A to D performances are common except for the type of enemy character that appears, the title name, and the expectation level suggested by the expectation level suggestion display, so here we will explain the high base reach A performance and omit the explanation of the high base reach B to D performances.

The performance control CPU 120 receives the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command in the time-saving state A or the probability variable state, and when a variation pattern corresponding to a high base super reach A is specified by the variation pattern specification command, it starts varying the decorative pattern (large), and executes a normal reach performance in which the decorative pattern (large) of the type specified by the variable display result specification command is stopped at the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R of the image display device 5 at a predetermined timing to create a reach state, as shown in FIG. 11-44 (g2). Then, the title display part of the high base reach A performance is started.

As shown in FIG. 11-45, the title display part of the high base reach A performance includes a title start period from when a part of the title characters "Battle Reach A" of the high base reach A performance is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 until they are displayed in their fixed position, a title display period during which the title characters "Battle Reach A" are displayed in their fixed position, and a title end period from when the title characters "Battle Reach A" that were displayed in their fixed position disappear and switch to the introduction part.

When the performance control CPU 120 transitions to the title display part of the high base reach A performance, it first starts displaying the title start period.

During the title start period of the high base reach A performance, as shown in FIG. 11-44 (g2), the display of the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right of the reach state is maintained, and the title characters "Battle Reach A" are displayed at an enlarged size such that only a portion of the characters is visible in the display area. At this time, the display area is displayed in such a manner that the entire display area is filled with a portion of the title characters "Battle Reach A". In addition, the portion of the title characters "Battle Reach A" that is displayed in the display area appears overlapping with both the decorative patterns (small) on the left and right of the reach state. After that, as shown in FIG. 11-44 (g3), the title characters "Battle Reach A" are gradually reduced in size, and the title characters "Battle Reach A", which has now been reduced to a size where all of the characters of the title characters "Battle Reach A" are visible in the display area, are stopped in a fixed position. When the title letters "Battle Reach A" are reduced in size and stationary in a fixed position, a portion of the title letters "Battle Reach A" is displayed overlapping both of the small decorative patterns on the left and right of the reach state.

The small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach state will be any number between "1" and "9" ("2" in the figure), but during the title start period of the high base reach A performance, whether the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach state are any number between "1" and "9", the title letters "Battle Reach A" that appear in an enlarged size will appear overlapping with both the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach state, and the title letters "Battle Reach A" that are displayed in a reduced size while stationary in a fixed position will be displayed with part of them overlapping with both the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach state.

As shown in Figures 11-44 (g1) to (g3), the background (night sky background) during the change of the decorative pattern (large) in the time-saving state A or the probability change state that was displayed before the entire display area was filled with a portion of the enlarged-sized title characters "Battle Reach A" is switched to a background dedicated to the title display of the high base reach A performance (a background in which the ally character "Yume Yume" and the enemy character "Masked Man" are displayed on the left and right) while the entire display area is filled with a portion of the enlarged-sized title characters "Battle Reach A", and when the title characters "Battle Reach A" are stationary in a fixed position at a reduced size, a background dedicated to the title display of the high base reach A performance is displayed as its background. In addition, the pending display and active display that were displayed before the entire display area was filled with a portion of the enlarged-sized title characters "Battle Reach A" are hidden while the entire display area is filled with a portion of the enlarged-sized title characters "Battle Reach A". Furthermore, the display of the small decorative symbols on the left and right of the reach state will remain even after the title start period ends.

The CPU 120 for controlling the performance displays the title characters "Battle Reach A" in a reduced size at a fixed position during the title start period, and then transitions to displaying the title display period. During the title display period of the high base reach A performance, first, as shown in FIG. 11-44 (g3), the title characters "Battle Reach A" are displayed at a fixed position with the expectation indication hidden for a predetermined time, and during that time, as shown in FIG. 11-45, audio is output from the speakers 8L and 8R to read out the title. Next, as shown in FIG. 11-44 (g4) to (g5), an expectation indication is displayed below the title characters "Battle Reach A" in a size smaller than the title characters "Battle Reach A". As shown in FIG. 11-45, the title display period of the high base reach A performance is executed for a longer time than the title start period of the high base reach A performance (see FIG. 11-47 and FIG. 11-48).

After the title display period ends, the performance control CPU 120 transitions to the display of the title end period. In the title end period of the high base reach A performance, as shown in Figures 11-44 (g5) to (g6), the title characters "Battle Reach A", which are displayed in a reduced size at a fixed position, are enlarged until the entire display area is filled with parts of the title characters "Battle Reach A". At this time, the title characters "Battle Reach A" are not enlarged in the opposite manner to when the title characters "Battle Reach A" are displayed in a reduced size during the title start period, but are enlarged in a manner different from the opposite manner to when the title characters "Battle Reach A" are displayed in a reduced size during the title start period until the entire display area is filled with parts of the title characters "Battle Reach A". In other words, the trajectory that each part of the title characters follows as the title characters "Battle Reach A" shrink during the title start period is different from the trajectory that each part of the title characters follows as the title characters "Battle Reach A" expand during the title end period. Therefore, the entire display area is filled with part of the title characters "Battle Reach A" in a manner different from the manner in which the entire display area is filled at the start of the title start period. As shown in FIG. 11-45, the title end period of the high base reach A effect ends in a time shorter than the title start period and title display period of the high base reach A effect (see FIG. 11-47 and FIG. 11-48). Also, as shown in FIG. 11-45, in the title display part of the high base reach A effect, no subtitles of the dialogue are displayed, as in the low base weak reach A effect and the low base weak reach B effect, and no sound of the dialogue is output from speakers 8L and 8R.

After the title end period ends, the performance control CPU 120 starts the introductory part of the high base reach A performance. As shown in FIG. 11-44 (g3) to (g7), the background at the start of the introductory part of the high base reach A performance (the background where the ally character "Yume Yume" and the enemy character "Masked Man" are fighting) is different from the background dedicated to title display in the title display part (the background where the ally character "Yume Yume" and the enemy character "Masked Man" are displayed on the left and right), and after the title end period ends and the background dedicated to title display is completely filled with part of the title characters "Battle Reach A" during the title end period, it switches to the background at the start of the introductory part of the high base reach A performance. The introductory part of the high base reach A performance starts with a video scene where the ally character "Yume Yume" and the enemy character "Masked Man" are fighting. Also, as shown in FIG. 11-44 (g7) and FIG. 11-45, after the introductory part starts, a subtitle for the line "Fight!" is displayed in response to the scene in which the friendly character "Yume Yume" and the enemy character "Masked Man" are fighting, and the voice of the line displayed in the subtitles is output from speakers 8L and 8R.

In this way, in the high bass reach A performance, during the title display part, audio is output from speakers 8L, 8R reading the title, but subtitles of the dialogue corresponding to the scene in the title display part are not displayed, and audio of the dialogue corresponding to the scene in the title display part is not output from speakers 8L, 8R. After the introduction part starts, subtitles of the dialogue corresponding to the scene in the introduction part are displayed, and audio of the dialogue corresponding to the scene in the introduction part is output from speakers 8L, 8R.

When a variation pattern designation command is used to designate a variation pattern resulting in a jackpot after a high base super reach A, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance notifies the user that the ally character "Yume Yume" wins the fight against the enemy character "Masked Man" at the end of the introductory part, and that the performance result of the high base reach A performance is a jackpot (controlling the game to a jackpot game state), and then causes the image display device 5 to display a combination of decorative symbols (large) indicating a jackpot of the type designated by the variable display result designation command. On the other hand, when a variation pattern designation command is used to designate a jackpot miss after a high base super reach A, the CPU 120 notifies the user that the ally character "Yume Yume" loses to the enemy character "Masked Man" at the end of the introductory part, and that the performance result of the high base reach A performance is not a jackpot, and then causes the image display device 5 to display a combination of decorative symbols (large) indicating a jackpot miss of the type designated by the variable display result designation command.

[About the indication of the expectation of high base reach A to D performance]
The expectation suggestion displays for the high base reach A to D effects are all common except for the degree of expectation suggested by the expectation suggestion display. Therefore, here we will explain the expectation suggestion display for the high base reach A effect and omit the explanation of the expectation suggestion displays for the high base reach B to D effects.

In the title display part of the high base reach A performance, the image display device 5 displays the title characters "Battle Reach A" along with an expectation indication in a smaller size than the title characters "Battle Reach A". As shown in FIG. 11-44 (g5), the expectation indication displayed in the title display part is composed of five star-shaped objects and the characters "Expectation" displayed above the star-shaped objects to indicate that the star-shaped objects indicate the expectation, and the expectation is indicated by the number of star-shaped objects that have changed color from black to gold among the five star-shaped objects.

In the time-saving state A or the probability bonus state in which the high base reach A performance is executed, an object indicating the number of reserved balls and an object indicating an active display may be displayed on the image display device 5, and if the reserved display and active display and the expectation level indication display are displayed simultaneously in the title display part, there is a risk that the objects constituting the reserved display and active display will be mistaken for objects in the expectation level indication display. For this reason, in the title display part of the high base reach A performance in which the expectation level indication display is displayed, the reserved display and active display are not displayed simultaneously with the expectation level indication display, thereby preventing the objects constituting the reserved display and active display from being mistaken for objects in the expectation level indication display.

In addition, since the game ball almost never enters the first start winning hole in the time-saving state A or the probability change state, when the number of reserved balls in the second special chart is at its maximum (four) and is being displayed variably, a maximum of five objects may be displayed as reserved and active displays, which matches the number of objects indicating that the expectation level is at its maximum in the expectation level indication display. However, in the title display part of the high base reach A performance, the reserved and active displays are not displayed at the same time as the expectation level indication display, so even if the high base reach A performance is executed in a situation where a maximum of five objects are displayed as reserved and active displays, it is possible to prevent the objects displayed as reserved and active displays from being confused with the objects in the expectation level indication display, and the expectation level being mistakenly recognized as being at its maximum in the expectation level indication display.

When the high base reach A performance is executed, as shown in Figures 11-44 (g1) to (g3), the title characters "Battle Reach A" are displayed in an enlarged size in which only a portion of the characters are visible in the display area during the title start period, and then reduced in size so that all characters are visible in the display area. When the background dedicated to the title display of the high base reach A performance is displayed, the pending display and active display that were displayed before the title start period are hidden, so that the pending display and active display can be hidden without any sense of incongruity. When the high base reach A performance is executed, a monochrome display performance can be executed in which the entire display area is displayed in a monochrome color such as white, except for the decorative pattern (small) of the reach mode, etc., to erase the pending display and active display that were displayed before the monochrome display performance. Even in this configuration, the pending display and active display can be hidden without any sense of incongruity.

In the title display part of the high base reach A performance, as shown in FIG. 11-44(g3), the title characters "Battle Reach A" are displayed in a fixed position with the expectation indication hidden for a predetermined time, and then, as shown in FIG. 11-44(g4) to (g5), the expectation indication is displayed below the title characters "Battle Reach A". At this time, as shown in FIG. 11-44(g4), in the initial stage, the color of the five star-shaped objects constituting the expectation indication is all displayed in black, and then, as shown in FIG. 11-44(g5), the color of three of the five star-shaped objects corresponding to the high base reach A performance (3.5 for the high base reach B performance, 4 for the high base reach C performance, and 4.5 for the high base reach D performance) is changed from black to gold, suggesting the expectation of a jackpot in the high base reach A performance. This prevents confusion between the pending and active displays and the expectation level indication.

[Title text display position]
FIG. 11-46 is a diagram showing the position where the title characters are displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. As shown in FIG.

As shown in Figures 11-46 (A) and (B), the image display device 5 has a rectangular display area 5L, but since the game board 2 is placed in front of it, the visible area in the display area 5L of the image display device 5 is the area that is visible through the opening 24 formed in the game board 2, that is, the area that is not covered by the components that make up the game board 2.

As described above, the performance control CPU 120 displays the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu!" in a fixed position during the title display period of the title display part of the low base weak reach A performance. In this case, the fixed position where the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu!" are displayed is a position where the title characters "Catch the Bakuchu!" overlap with the intersection of diagonal lines of the display area 5L of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 11-46(A), and a position where the title characters overlap with the intersection of diagonal lines of the visible square area 5S, which is the largest rectangular area within the visible area of the image display device 5 that is not obstructed by components of the game board 2, as shown in FIG. 11-46(B).

Similarly, the title text of the low base weak reach B effect is "Electric Hockey Showdown", the title text of the low base strong reach A effect is "Two people should catch the explosive chu!," the title text of the low base strong reach B effect is "Shocking Robot Battle," the title text of the low base strong reach C effect is "Super Shocking Robot Battle," the title text of the low base strongest reach effect is "Six people should catch the explosive chu!," the title text of the high base reach A effect is "Battle Reach A," the title text of the high base reach B effect is "Battle Reach B," and the title text of the high base reach C effect is " For both the title characters of the "Battle Reach C" and the title characters of the high base reach D performance "Battle Reach D," the fixed position at which the title characters are displayed during the title display period is a position where the title characters overlap with the intersection of diagonal lines of the display area 5L of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 11-46(A), and a position where the title characters overlap with the intersection of diagonal lines of the visible square area 5S, which is the largest rectangular area within the visible area of the image display device 5 that is not obstructed by components of the game board 2, as shown in FIG. 11-46(B).

Design changes are often made to gaming machines during the development stage, and a change in the design of the gaming board 2 may change the area of the display area 5L of the image display device 5 that is covered by the components that make up the gaming board 2, changing the visible area of the display area 5L. Also, gaming machines installed in gaming establishments may be taken back, refurbished, and resold, and in such cases, a change in the design of the gaming board 2 may change the area of the display area 5L of the image display device 5 that is covered by the components that make up the gaming board 2, changing the visible area of the display area 5L. In such cases, if the position of the title characters in the super reach performance is determined based on the display area 5L of the image display device 5, there is a risk that the display position of the title characters may deviate significantly from the center of the visible area.

In contrast to this, in this embodiment, in the title display part of any Super Reach performance, the fixed position where the title characters are displayed during the title display period is a position where the title characters overlap with the intersection of the diagonals of the display area 5L of the image display device 5, and also overlap with the intersection of the diagonals of the visible square area 5S, which is the largest rectangular area within the visible area of the image display device 5 that is not obstructed by components of the game board 2. Therefore, the title characters displayed at the fixed position during the title display period are displayed at a position where they overlap with both the intersection of the diagonals of the display area 5L and the intersection of the diagonals of the visible square area 5S. This prevents the display position of the title characters from deviating significantly from the center of the visible area even if the design of the game board 2 is changed due to design changes or when the game machine is reused.

[Super Reach performance duration]
FIG. 11-47 is a diagram showing the presentation time of each Super Reach performance, and FIG. 11-48 is a diagram showing one form of the relationship between the presentation times of each Super Reach performance.

As shown in Figure 11-47, the overall presentation time of the low base weak reach A presentation (the time from when the title display part starts to when the introductory part ends) is T1-1, the presentation time of the title display part is Tt1, of which the presentation time of the title start period is Tt1a, the presentation time of the title display period is Tt1b, and the presentation time of the title end period is Tt1c.

The overall presentation time of the low base weak reach B presentation is T1-2, the presentation time of the title display part is Tt1, of which the presentation time of the title start period is Tt1a, the presentation time of the title display period is Tt1b, and the presentation time of the title end period is Tt1c.

Note that while the overall presentation times for the low base weak reach A and low base weak reach B presentations are different, the presentation time for the title display part, the presentation time for the title start period, the presentation time for the title display period, and the presentation time for the title end period are all the same.

As shown in Figure 11-47, the overall presentation time of the low base strong reach A presentation is T2-1, the presentation time of the title display part is Tt2, of which the presentation time of the title start period is Tt2a, the presentation time of the title display period is Tt2b, and the presentation time of the title end period is Tt2c.

The overall presentation time of the low base strong reach B presentation is T2-2, the presentation time of the title display part is Tt2, of which the presentation time of the title start period is Tt2a, the presentation time of the title display period is Tt2b, and the presentation time of the title end period is Tt2c.

The overall presentation time of the low base strong reach C presentation is T2-3, the presentation time of the title display part is Tt2, of which the presentation time of the title start period is Tt2a, the presentation time of the title display period is Tt2b, and the presentation time of the title end period is Tt2c.

Note that the overall presentation times for the low base strong reach A performance, low base strong reach B performance, and low base strong reach C performance are different, but the presentation time for the title display part, the presentation time for the title start period, the presentation time for the title display period, and the presentation time for the title end period are all the same.

The overall presentation time of the low base strongest reach presentation is T3, the presentation time of the title display part is Tt3, of which the presentation time of the title start period is Tt3a, the presentation time of the title display period is Tt3b, and the presentation time of the title end period is Tt3c.

The overall presentation time for all high base reach presentations A to D is T4, the presentation time for all title display parts is Tt4, of which the presentation time for all title start periods is Tt4a, the presentation time for all title display periods is Tt4b, and the presentation time for all title end periods is Tt4c.

Comparing the overall presentation time of the super reach effects during the low base (normal state) in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-48 (A), the overall presentation time (T2-1, T2-2, T2-3) of the low base strong reach A effects, low base strong reach B effects, and low base strong reach C effects, which have a higher jackpot expectation than the low base weak reach A effects and low base weak reach B effects, is longer than the overall presentation time (T1-1, T1-2) of the low base weak reach A effects and low base weak reach B effects, and the overall presentation time (T3) of the low base strongest reach effect, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the low base strong reach A effects, low base strong reach B effects, and low base weak reach C effects, is set longer than the overall presentation time (T2-1, T2-2, T2-3) of the low base strong reach A effects, low base strong reach B effects, and low base weak reach C effects.

In addition, of the low base weak reach A performance and the low base weak reach B performance, the low base weak reach B performance, which has a higher expectation of developing into other super reach performances than the low base weak reach A performance, is set to be longer than the overall performance time (T1-1) of the low base weak reach A performance. In addition, the overall presentation time (T2-3) of the low base strong reach C performance, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the low base strong reach A performance and the low base strong reach B performance, among the low base strong reach A performance, low base strong reach B performance, is longer than the overall presentation time (T2-1, T2-2) of the low base strong reach A performance and the low base strong reach B performance, and the overall presentation time (T2-2) of the low base strong reach B performance, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the low base strong reach A performance, among the low base strong reach A performance and the low base strong reach B performance, is set longer than the overall presentation time (T2-1) of the low base strong reach A performance.

When comparing the presentation times of the title start period, title display period, and title end period in the title display part in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-48 (B), in all super reach presentations (low base weak reach A, B presentations, low base strong reach A-C presentations, low base strongest reach presentations, high base reach A-D presentations), the presentation time of the title display period (Tt1b/Tt2b/Tt3b/Tt4b) is longer than the presentation time of the title start period (Tt1a/Tt2a/Tt3a/Tt4a) and the presentation time of the title end period (Tt1c/Tt2c/Tt3c/Tt4c), and the presentation time of the title start period (Tt1a/Tt2a/Tt3a/Tt4a) is set longer than the presentation time of the title end period (Tt1c/Tt2c/Tt3c/Tt4c).

When comparing the presentation time of the title display part in the super reach performance in this embodiment, as shown in Figure 11-48 (C), the presentation time (Tt2) of the title display part of the low base strong reach A performance, low base strong reach B performance, and low base strong reach C performance, which have a higher expectation of a jackpot than the low base weak reach A performance and low base weak reach B performance, is longer than the presentation time (Tt1) of the title display part of the low base weak reach A performance and low base weak reach B performance, and the presentation time (Tt3) of the title display part of the low base strongest reach performance, which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the low base strong reach A performance, low base strong reach performance B, and low base weak reach C performance, is set longer than the presentation time (Tt2) of the title display part of the low base strong reach A performance, low base strong reach B performance, and low base strong reach C performance. In addition, the presentation time (Tt4) of the title display part of the high base reach A to D effects is set shorter than the presentation time (Tt1, Tt2, Tt3) of the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, the low base strong reach A to C effects, and the low base strongest reach effect.

In this embodiment, when comparing the presentation time of the title start period and the title display period in the low base strongest reach presentation and the high base reach A to D presentation, as shown in Figure 11-48 (D), the presentation time (Tt3a) of the title start period in the low base strongest reach presentation is set longer than the presentation time (Tt4a) of the title start period in the high base reach A to D presentation, and as shown in Figure 11-48 (E), the presentation time (Tt3b) of the title display period in the low base strongest reach presentation is set longer than the presentation time (Tt4b) of the title display period in the high base reach A to D presentation.

In this embodiment, when comparing the presentation time of the title start period in the super reach effects (low base weak reach A, B effects, low base strong reach A-C effects, low base strongest reach effect) during a low base (normal state), as shown in FIG. 11-48 (F), the presentation time (Tt2a) of the title start period of the low base strong reach A effect, low base strong reach B effect, and low base strong reach C effect, which have a higher jackpot expectation than the low base weak reach A effect and low base weak reach B effect, is longer than the presentation time (Tt1a) of the title start period of the low base weak reach A effect and low base weak reach B effect, and the presentation time (Tt3a) of the title start period of the low base strongest reach effect, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the low base strong reach A effect, low base strong reach effect B, and low base weak reach C effect, is set longer than the presentation time (Tt2a) of the title start period of the low base strong reach A effect, low base strong reach B effect, and low base strong reach C effect.

In this embodiment, when comparing the presentation time of the title display period in the super reach effects (low base weak reach A, B effects, low base strong reach A-C effects, low base strongest reach effect) during a low base (normal state), as shown in FIG. 11-48 (G), the presentation time (Tt2b) of the title display period of the low base strong reach A effects, low base strong reach B effects, and low base strong reach C effects, which have a higher jackpot expectation than the low base weak reach A effects and low base weak reach B effects, is longer than the presentation time (Tt1b) of the title display period of the low base weak reach A effects and low base weak reach B effects, and the presentation time (Tt3b) of the title display period of the low base strongest reach effect, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the low base strong reach A effects, low base strong reach effect B, and low base weak reach C effects, is set longer than the presentation time (Tt2b) of the title display period of the low base strong reach A effects, low base strong reach B effects, and low base strong reach C effects.

In this embodiment, when comparing the presentation time of the title end period in the super reach effects (low base weak reach A, B effects, low base strong reach A-C effects, low base strongest reach effect) during a low base (normal state), as shown in FIG. 11-48 (H), the presentation time (Tt2c) of the title end period of the low base strong reach A effect, low base strong reach B effect, and low base strong reach C effect, which have a higher jackpot expectation than the low base weak reach A effect and low base weak reach B effect, is longer than the presentation time (Tt1c) of the title end period of the low base weak reach A effect and low base weak reach B effect, and the presentation time (Tt3c) of the title end period of the low base strongest reach effect, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the low base strong reach A effect, low base strong reach effect B, and low base weak reach C effect, is set longer than the presentation time (Tt2c) of the title end period of the low base strong reach A effect, low base strong reach B effect, and low base strong reach C effect.

In this embodiment, when comparing the presentation time of the text display period (the period in the title display part that does not include the prologue period described below, which is the combined period of the title start period, title display period, and title end period) in the super reach presentations (low base weak reach A, B presentations, low base strong reach A-C presentations, low base strongest reach presentations) during a low base (normal state), as shown in Figure 11-48 (I), the low base strong reach A presentation, which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the low base weak reach A presentation and the low base weak reach B presentation, The presentation time (Tt2d) of the text display period of the low base strong reach B effect and the low base strong reach C effect is longer than the presentation time (Tt1d) of the text display period of the low base weak reach A effect and the low base weak reach B effect, and the presentation time (Tt3d) of the text display period of the low base strongest reach effect, which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the low base strong reach A effect, the low base strong reach B effect and the low base weak reach C effect, is set longer than the presentation time (Tt2d) of the text display period of the low base strong reach A effect, the low base strong reach B effect and the low base strong reach C effect.

In this embodiment, when comparing the presentation time of the title start period and the title display period in the super reach performance (low base weak reach A, B performance, low base strong reach A-C performance, low base strongest reach performance) during a low base (normal state), as shown in Figure 11-48 (J) (K), in all the super reach performances (low base weak reach A, B performance, low base strong reach A-C performance, low base strongest reach performance) during a low base (normal state), the presentation time of the title display period (Tt1b/Tt2b/Tt3b) is longer than the presentation time of the title start period (Tt1a/Tt2a/Tt3a), and the presentation time of the title start period (Tt1a/Tt2a/Tt3a) is set longer than the presentation time of the title end period (Tt1c/Tt2c/Tt3c).

In this embodiment, when comparing the overall presentation time of the super reach effects (low base weak reach A, B effects, low base strong reach A-C effects, low base strongest reach effects) during a low base (normal state) with the super reach effects (high base reach A-D effects) during a high base (time-saving state A and special probability state), as shown in Figure 11-48 (L), the overall presentation time (T4) of the super reach effects (high base reach A-D effects) during a high base (time-saving state A and special probability state) is set shorter than the overall presentation time (T1-1, T1-2, T2-1, T2-3, T3) of the super reach effects (low base weak reach A, B effects, low base strong reach A-C effects, low base strongest reach effects) during a low base (normal state).

[About the title text of the Super Reach performance]
FIG. 11-49 is a diagram showing one form of the relationship between the title characters and decorative patterns in the title display part in the super reach performance.

As shown in Figure 11-49 (A), the title text of the low base weak reach A performance is "Catch the Bakuchu!", the number of characters in the title is 10, the font size of the title characters (standard size per character) is FJ, and the size of the display area in which the title characters are displayed (the size of the area including all the title characters) is EJA.

The title text of the low base weak reach B performance is "Bilibili Hockey Showdown", the title has 10 characters, the font size of the title text is FJ, and the size of the display area in which the title text is displayed is EJB.

The title text of the low base strong reach A performance is "Catch the Bakuchu together!", the title has 13 characters, the font size of the title text is FK, and the size of the display area in which the title text is displayed is EKA.

The title of the low base strong reach B performance is "Shocking Robot Battle", the title has 7 characters, the font size of the title is FK, and the size of the display area in which the title is displayed is EKB.

The title text of the low base strong reach C performance is "Great Shock Robot Battle", the title has 8 characters, the font size of the title text is FK, and the size of the display area in which the title text is displayed is EKC.

The title text of the low base strongest reach performance is "Catch the Bakuchu with 6 people!", the title has 13 characters, the font size of the title text is FSK, and the display area size in which the title text is displayed is ESK.

Also, as shown in Figure 11-49 (A), the font size of the decorative pattern (large) before the development into the Super Reach performance is KD, and the font size of the decorative pattern (small) after the development into the Super Reach performance is KS.

Comparing the font sizes of the title characters in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-49 (B), the font size FK of the title characters in the low base strong reach A effects, low base strong reach B effects, and low base strong reach C effects, which have a higher expectation of a jackpot than the low base weak reach A effects and low base weak reach B effects, is larger than the font size FJ of the title characters in the low base weak reach A effects and low base weak reach B effects. Furthermore, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the title characters in the low base strong reach A effects, low base strong reach B effects, and low base strong reach C effects is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters that make up the title characters in the low base weak reach A effects and low base weak reach B effects.

In addition, the font size FSK of the title characters of the low base strongest reach effect, which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the low base strong reach A effect, the low base strong reach B effect, and the low base weak reach C effect, is a larger font size than the font size FK of the title characters of the low base strong reach A effect, the low base strong reach B effect, and the low base strong reach C effect. In addition, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the title characters of the low base strongest reach effect is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters that make up the title characters of the low base strong reach A effect, the low base strong reach B effect, and the low base strong reach C effect.

Also, as shown in Figure 11-49 (B), the font size FJ of the title characters in the low base weak reach A performance and the low base weak reach B performance, the font size FK of the title characters in the low base strong reach A performance, the low base strong reach B performance and the low base strong reach C performance, and the font size FSK of the title characters in the low base strongest reach performance are all font sizes smaller than the font size KD of the decorative pattern (large) before the development into a super reach performance, and are font sizes larger than the font size KS of the decorative pattern (small) after the development into a super reach performance. Furthermore, the size of the largest character among the characters that make up the title characters of the low base weak reach A performance and the low base weak reach B performance, the size of the largest character among the characters that make up the title characters of the low base strong reach A performance, the low base strong reach B performance, and the size of the largest character among the characters that make up the title characters of the low base strongest reach performance are all smaller than the size of the smallest character among the characters that can be used for the decorative pattern (large) before the performance develops into a super reach performance, and the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the title characters of the low base weak reach A performance and the low base weak reach B performance, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the title characters of the low base strong reach A performance, the low base strong reach B performance, and the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the title characters of the low base strongest reach performance are all larger than the size of the largest character among the characters that can be used for the decorative pattern (small) after the performance develops into a super reach performance.

Comparing the display area sizes of the title characters in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-49 (C), the display area sizes EKA, EKB, and EKC of the title characters of the low base strong reach A effects, low base strong reach B effects, and low base strong reach C effects, which have a higher expectation of a jackpot than the low base weak reach A effects and low base weak reach B effects, are larger than the display area sizes EJA and EJB of the title characters of the low base weak reach A effects and low base weak reach B effects, and the display area size ESK of the title characters of the low base strongest reach effects, which have a higher expectation of a jackpot than the low base strong reach A effects, low base strong reach B effects, and low base weak reach C effects, is larger than the display area sizes EKA, EKB, and EKC of the title characters of the low base strong reach A effects, low base strong reach B effects, and low base weak reach C effects.

[About the expected level indication]
FIG. 11-50 is a diagram showing the execution status of the expectation level indication display in the title display part of the super reach performance.

As shown in FIG. 11-50(A), the expectation level indication displayed in the title display section is composed of five star-shaped objects and the word "expectation level" displayed above the star-shaped objects to indicate that the star-shaped objects indicate the expectation level, and the expectation level is indicated by the number of star-shaped objects that have changed color from black to gold among the five star-shaped objects.

When the CPU 120 for controlling the performance performs an expectation indication display, as shown in FIG. 11-50(A), it first displays five star-shaped objects in black and displays the word "Expectation" to indicate that the star-shaped objects indicate the expectation, and then causes the star-shaped objects that are to change from black to gold to change in color in stages from black to gold, starting from the left. Also, when the CPU 120 for controlling the performance changes a star-shaped object from black to gold, it highlights the corresponding star-shaped object and then changes it to its normal gold display.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 11-50(B), the performance control CPU 120 enlarges the star-shaped object that changes color, changes its color to white so that it shines from the center toward the periphery, changes the entire enlarged object to white until the outline disappears, and then displays the star-shaped object with the entire object or half of it changed to gold. In particular, the second and third star-shaped objects are enlarged to a size where part of the enlarged star-shaped object overlaps with part of the text "Expectation" to indicate that the star-shaped object indicates the expectation. The performance control CPU 120 also highlights in a common manner whether changing the entire star-shaped object from a black color to gold or changing half of the star-shaped object to gold.

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-50(A), when changing multiple star-shaped objects to gold, the performance control CPU 120 starts highlighting the star-shaped object next to it at the timing (t1) before the highlighting of the star-shaped object that was started to be highlighted earlier ends and the normal display resumes. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 does not start highlighting the star-shaped object next to it until the highlighting of the star-shaped object that was started to be highlighted earlier ends at the timing (t2), and starts highlighting the star-shaped object next to it at the timing (t2) when the highlighting of the star-shaped object that was started to be highlighted earlier ends. In other words, the highlighting of two adjacent star-shaped objects overlaps, but three star-shaped objects are not highlighted at the same time.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-50(A), the performance control CPU 120 outputs an expectation level indication sound from speakers 8L, 8R at the timing when the highlighting of a star-shaped object begins, and when multiple star-shaped objects are changed to gold, ends the output of the expectation level indication sound associated with the highlighting of the star-shaped object that was previously started to be highlighted before the highlighting of the next star-shaped object begins, so that the sound is not output overlapping with the expectation level indication sound associated with the highlighting of the next star-shaped object.

[About selection effects]
Fig. 11-51 is a diagram showing the execution status of the selection effect. The selection effect is an effect that specifies which type of super reach effect will be executed when the low base strong reach A to C effect or the low base strongest reach effect is executed directly from the normal reach effect without going through the low base weak reach A effect or the low base weak reach B effect.

When a selection effect is executed, the effect control CPU 120 executes a normal reach effect as shown in FIG. 11-51 (h1), and then displays a window in the display area of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 11-51 (h2), and displays the title of the selection effect in the window. The title of the selection effect displays the message "Upgrade your reach!", suggesting that a selection effect will be executed.

Then, as shown in Fig. 11-51 (h2) to (h8), the performance control CPU 120 displays in the window a title image of the super reach performance, and an operation prompt image consisting of a button image imitating the push button 31B and the operation prompt text "Continuous hit!" to encourage continuous operation of the push button 31B. The title image of the super reach performance is an image with the same content as the display content during the title display period in the title display part of each super reach performance, and the title images of the low base strong reach performances A to C and the low base strongest reach performance also display an indication of the expectation level.

The performance control CPU 120 first displays, as the title image of the Super Reach performance displayed in the window, the title image of the low base weak reach A performance, which has a jackpot expectation rate of 0 and the lowest expectation rate of development into other Super Reach performances, and each time an operation of the number of times push button 31B corresponding to the title image of the displayed Super Reach performance is detected, it switches to the title image of the next Super Reach performance until it becomes the title image of the Super Reach performance corresponding to the type of fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command.

As shown in Figure 11-51 (h2) to (h8), the title images of the Super Reach effects displayed in the window are switched in the following order: the title image of the low base weak reach A effect, which has the lowest expectation of development into other Super Reach effects, followed by the title image of the low base weak reach B effect, which has a higher expectation of development into other Super Reach effects than the low base weak reach A effect, the title image of the low base strong reach A effect, which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the low base weak reach A and B effects, the title image of the low base strong reach B effect, which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the low base strong reach A effect, the title image of the low base strong reach C effect, which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the low base strong reach B effect, and the title image of the low base strongest reach effect, which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the low base strong reach C effect.

Then, when the title image of the super reach performance that corresponds to the type of fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command appears, the performance control CPU 120 detects the operation of the number of times push button 31B that corresponds to the title image of the displayed super reach performance, and displays a confirmation image in which the operation prompt image disappears and only the title image of the super reach performance is displayed in the window, as shown in Figure 11-51 (h9), notifies the player that the super reach performance of the displayed title image will be executed, and then transitions to the title display part of that super reach performance.

As shown in FIG. 11-52, the number of times that the push button 3B is operated to switch from the title image of the low base weak reach A effect to the title image of the low base weak reach B effect is three, the number of times that the push button 31B is operated to switch from the title image of the low base weak reach B effect to the title image of the low base strong reach A effect is four, the number of times that the push button 31B is operated to switch from the title image of the low base strong reach A effect to the title image of the low base strong reach B effect is eight, and the number of times that the push button 31B is operated to switch from the title image of the low base strong reach B effect to the title image of the low base strong The number of times the push button 31B is operated to switch to the title image of the reach C effect is 10, and the number of times the push button 31B is operated to switch from the title image of the low base strong reach C effect to the title image of the low base strongest reach effect is 15, and the higher the developmental attitude of the super reach effect of the switching title image to other super reach effects or the higher the expectation of a jackpot, the more times the push button 31B needs to be operated to switch to the next title image, and the more times the push button 31B needs to be operated.

Also, as shown in Figure 11-52, when a selection effect is executed, the low base weak reach A and B effects will never be executed, and a super reach effect with a jackpot expectation level equal to or higher than the low base strong reach A effect will always be executed, with the rate at which the low base strong reach A effect is executed being approximately 32.18%, the rate at which the low base strong reach B effect is executed being approximately 30.16%, the rate at which the low base strong reach C effect is executed being approximately 30.30%, and the rate at which the low base strongest reach effect is executed being approximately 7.36%.

The performance control CPU 120 also displays an expectation indication in the title images of the low base strong reach A-C performances and the low base strongest reach performance in the selection performance, similar to the title display part. However, the expectation indication in the title display part displays five star-shaped objects in black, and the multiple star-shaped objects that change from black to gold change from black to gold in stages in order from the left, whereas the expectation indication displayed in the selection performance displays the number of star-shaped objects that indicate the expectation of the corresponding super reach performance out of the five star-shaped objects in gold from the start.

The minimum time required for the title image of the Super Reach effect displayed in the selection effect to switch to the title image of the next Super Reach effect is the time obtained by multiplying the number of times corresponding to the title image of the Super Reach effect by the time required for one operation of the push button 31B. The time required for one operation of the push button 31B is approximately 80 ms, and when switching from the title image of the low base weak reach A effect to the title image of the low base weak reach B effect, the push button 31B must be operated three times, and the minimum time required in this case is approximately 240 ms.

Meanwhile, the time it takes for the star-shaped object in the expectation suggestion display in the title display part to change from black to highlighted and then to gold, i.e., the time it takes for the suggested expectation level to change by one step, is approximately 300 ms, which is set to be longer than the minimum time it takes to switch from the title image of the low base weak reach A performance to the title image of the low base weak reach B performance. For this reason, the performance control CPU 120 is able to switch the title image of the low base weak reach A performance to the title image of the low base weak reach B performance in a selection performance in a time shorter than the time it takes for the expected level suggested in the expectation suggestion display in the title display part to change by one step.

[About effects that can be performed during variable display]
FIG. 11-53 is a diagram showing effects that can be executed during variable display. As shown in FIG. 11-53, the effects that can be executed during variable display include an explanatory text display effect, a title color change effect, and operation prompt effects A to D.

The explanatory text display effect is an effect that can be executed during the prologue display period in the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C effects, and is an effect that displays explanatory text that suggests that there is a high chance of a jackpot.

The title color change effect is an effect that can be executed during the title display period in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, and is an effect that changes the color of the title letters from the initial white to red or gold.

Operation prompting effect A is an effect that can be executed in a normal reach effect, and displays an operation prompting image that prompts the operation of push button 31B, and notifies the player whether or not the effect will progress to a low base weak reach A effect or B effect depending on the operation of push button 31B. Note that operation prompting effect A may be configured to progress not only to a low base weak reach A effect or B effect, but also to a low base strong reach A to C effect or a low base strongest reach effect depending on the operation of push button 31B.

Operation prompting effect B is an effect that can be executed at the end of the introductory part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, and displays an operation prompting image (small) or an operation prompting image (large) that prompts the operation of push button 31B, and notifies the player whether or not the effect will develop into one of the low base strong reach A to C effects depending on the operation of push button 31B. Note that in a configuration in which the low base weak reach A and B effects are notified that a jackpot will be reached as a result of the effect, operation prompting effect B may be configured to notify the player of the result of the effect, whether or not a jackpot will be reached, depending on the operation of push button 31B.

Operation prompting effect C is an effect that can be executed in the middle of the introductory part of the low base strong reach A to C effects and the strongest reach effect, and displays an operation prompting image that prompts the operation of the push button 31B, and displays one of multiple types of cut-in images depending on the operation of the push button 31B.

Operation prompting effect D is an effect that can be executed at the end of the introductory part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, and displays an operation prompting image (small) or an operation prompting image (large) that prompts the user to operate the push button 31B, and notifies the user of the result of the effect, whether or not a jackpot has been reached, depending on the operation of the push button 31B.

The performance control CPU 120 determines in the preview performance determination process of the variable display start setting process whether or not to execute an explanatory text display performance during the variable display, whether or not to execute a title color change performance and to which color to change, whether or not to execute operation prompting performance A, whether or not to display either an operation prompting image (small) or an operation prompting image (large) in operation prompting performance B, whether or not to execute operation prompting performance C and whether or not to display either a cut-in image (A) or a cut-in image (B), and whether or not to display either an operation prompting image (small) or an operation prompting image (large) in operation prompting performance D.

As shown in FIG. 11-54(A), in the advance notice performance determination process, when a variation pattern in which the low base strong reach A to C performances are executed is identified, it is determined whether or not to execute the explanatory text display performance. At this time, when a variation pattern in which the performance result is a miss is identified, non-execution is determined 80% of the time, and execution is determined 20% of the time. Also, when a variation pattern in which the performance result is a jackpot is identified, non-execution is determined 20% of the time, and execution is determined 80% of the time. In this way, when a variation pattern in which the performance result is a jackpot is identified, execution of the explanatory text display performance is determined at a higher rate than when a variation pattern in which a miss is identified, so that the execution of the explanatory text display performance during the prologue display period in the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C performance suggests that there is a high possibility of a jackpot.

In this embodiment, the explanatory text display performance is executed during the prologue display period in the title display part, and the execution time of the low base strong reach A-C performance and the execution time of the title display part do not change regardless of whether the explanatory text display performance is executed in the title display part of the low base strong reach A-C performance. However, the low base strong reach A-C performance may be executed in a first variation pattern and a second variation pattern with a longer variation time than the first variation pattern as a variation pattern, and when the first variation pattern is specified, the explanatory text display performance is not executed, and when the second variation pattern is specified, the explanatory text display performance is executed using a variation time set longer than the first variation pattern. In such a configuration, whether or not to execute the explanatory text display performance is not determined in the preview performance determination process, but whether or not to execute the explanatory text display performance is determined depending on whether the first variation pattern or the second variation pattern is specified. In this case, the first and second variation patterns are determined so that when the explanatory text display effect is executed, the likelihood of a jackpot is higher than when the explanatory text display effect is not executed, and the execution of the explanatory text display effect in the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C effects suggests that there is a high likelihood of a jackpot.

As shown in Figure 11-54 (B), in the preview performance decision process, when a fluctuation pattern in which a low base weak reach A or B performance is executed is identified, it is decided whether or not to execute a title color change performance, and if so, what color to change to if a title color change performance is executed. At this time, when a fluctuation pattern in which the performance result is a miss is identified, non-execution (white) is decided 80% of the time, execution (red) is decided 20% of the time, and execution (gold) is not decided. Also, when a fluctuation pattern that develops into a low base strong reach A to C performance or a low base strongest reach performance is identified, non-execution (white) is decided 20% of the time, execution (red) is decided 75% of the time, and execution (gold) is decided 5% of the time. In this way, when a fluctuation pattern that develops into a low base strong reach A-C performance or a low base strongest reach performance is identified, the execution of the title color change performance is decided at a higher rate than when a fluctuation pattern that results in a miss is identified, so the change in color of the title letters in the title display part of the low base strong reach A and B performance suggests that there is a high possibility of development into a low base strong reach A-C performance or a low base strongest reach performance. Also, since execution (gold) is decided only when a fluctuation pattern that develops into a low base strong reach A-C performance or a low base strongest reach performance is identified, the change in color of the title letters to gold in the title display part of the low base strong reach A and B performance confirms that it will develop into a low base strong reach A-C performance or a low base strongest reach performance.

In addition, in a configuration that includes a fluctuation pattern that results in a jackpot without developing into another super reach effect after the execution of the low base weak reach A or B effect, when a fluctuation pattern that results in a jackpot is identified, the execution of the title color change effect is decided at a higher rate than when a fluctuation pattern that results in a miss is identified, and the color of the title letters in the title display part of the low base strong reach A or B effect may change to indicate the high possibility of a jackpot. Also, in such a configuration, execution (gold) may be decided only when a fluctuation pattern that results in a jackpot is identified, and the color of the title letters in the title display part of the low base strong reach A or B effect may change to gold to confirm a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 11-54(C), in the advance notice performance determination process, if a fluctuation pattern that results in a miss from the normal reach performance or a fluctuation pattern that develops from the normal reach performance to a low base weak reach A or B performance is identified, a decision is made as to whether or not to execute operation prompt performance A. At this time, if a fluctuation pattern that results in a miss is identified, non-execution is decided 50% of the time, and execution is decided 50% of the time. Also, if a fluctuation pattern that develops into a low base weak reach A or B performance is identified, execution is decided 100% of the time. In this way, execution is always decided when a fluctuation pattern that develops into a low base weak reach A or B performance is identified, and execution may also be decided when a fluctuation pattern that results in a miss is identified, so the execution of operation prompt performance A in a normal reach performance suggests the possibility of development into a low base weak reach A or B performance.

As shown in FIG. 11-54 (D), in the preview performance determination process, if a variation pattern is identified in which the performance result of a low base weak reach A, B performance is a miss, or a variation pattern in which a low base weak reach A, B performance develops into a low base strong reach A-C performance or a low base strongest reach performance, it is determined whether to display an operation prompt image (small) or an operation prompt image (large). At this time, if a variation pattern in which the performance result is a miss is identified, an operation prompt image (small) is determined 90% of the time, and an operation prompt image (large) is determined 10% of the time. Also, if a variation pattern in which the performance develops into a low base strong reach A-C performance or a low base strongest reach performance is identified, an operation prompt image (small) is determined 10% of the time, and an operation prompt image (large) is determined 90% of the time. In this way, when a fluctuation pattern that develops into a low base strong reach A-C performance or a low base strongest reach performance is identified, the operation prompting image (large) is determined out of the operation prompting image (small) and operation prompting image (large) at a higher rate than when a fluctuation pattern that results in a miss is identified, suggesting that when an operation prompting image (large) is displayed in operation prompting performance B at the end of the introductory part of a low base weak reach A, B performance, there is a higher possibility of it developing into a low base strong reach A-C performance or a low base strongest reach performance than when an operation prompting image (small) is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 11-54 (E), in the advance notice performance determination process, when a fluctuation pattern in which a low base strong reach A to C performance or a low base strongest reach performance is executed is identified, it is determined whether or not to execute operation prompt performance C, and if operation prompt performance C is executed, whether to display cut-in image (A) or cut-in image (B). At this time, when a fluctuation pattern in which the performance result is a miss is identified, non-execution is determined with a probability of 50%, execution (cut-in image (A)) is determined with a probability of 30%, and execution (cut-in image (B)) is determined with a probability of 20%. Also, when a fluctuation pattern in which the performance result is a jackpot is identified, non-execution is determined with a probability of 5%, execution (cut-in image (A)) is determined with a probability of 30%, and execution (cut-in image (B)) is determined with a probability of 65%. In this way, when a variation pattern that results in a jackpot is identified, the operation prompting performance C is executed at a higher rate than when a variation pattern that results in a miss is identified, so that the possibility of a jackpot is suggested by the execution of the operation prompting performance C at the end of the introductory part of the low base strong reach A to C performance. Also, when a variation pattern that results in a jackpot is identified, the cut-in image (B) out of the cut-in image (A) and the cut-in image (B) is displayed at a higher rate than when a variation pattern that results in a miss is identified, so that the operation prompting performance C is executed at the end of the introductory part of the low base strong reach A to C performance, so that the possibility of a jackpot is suggested to be higher when the cut-in image (B) is displayed than when the cut-in image (A) is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 11-54 (F), in the advance notice performance determination process, when a variation pattern in which a low base strong reach A to C performance or a low base strongest reach performance is executed is identified, it is determined whether to display an operation prompt image (small) or an operation prompt image (large). At this time, when a variation pattern in which the performance result is a miss is identified, an operation prompt image (small) is determined 90% of the time, and an operation prompt image (large) is determined 10% of the time. Also, when a variation pattern in which the performance result is a jackpot is identified, an operation prompt image (small) is determined 10% of the time, and an operation prompt image (large) is determined 90% of the time. In this way, when a variation pattern that results in a jackpot is identified, the operation prompting image (large) is determined at a higher rate than when a variation pattern that results in a miss is identified. Therefore, when an operation prompting image (large) is displayed in operation prompting effect D at the end of the introductory part of the low base strong reach A-C effects and the low base strongest reach effect, it is suggested that there is a higher possibility of a jackpot than when an operation prompting image (small) is displayed.

[About the explanatory text display]
FIG. 11-55 is a diagram showing the display status of the explanatory text displayed in the explanatory text display performance, and FIG. 11-56 is a timing chart showing the display status of the explanatory text displayed in the explanatory text display performance.

During the prologue display period of the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performances, the performance control CPU 120 displays the ally character "Yume Yume" as shown in Figures 11-55 (A) to (I), and then enlarges and displays the ally character "Yume Yume" until the entire display area is filled. When performing an explanatory text display performance during the prologue display period, the CPU 120 displays the explanatory text "Surprise!", "Peach tree", and "Great luck!" in order, which make up the explanatory text, on a layer in front of the background that is enlarged and displayed by the ally character "Yume Yume". At this time, the performance control CPU 120 first displays the explanatory text "Surprise!" while moving it from the right side of the display area toward the center at high speed in a leftward direction (Fig. 11-56 (t1)) as shown in Fig. 11-55 (A), and then, when it reaches the center, displays it while moving it slowly in a leftward direction (Fig. 11-56 (t2)) as shown in Fig. 11-55 (B), and then, after that, displays it while moving it again quickly in a leftward direction until it disappears from the display area as shown in Fig. 11-55 (C) (Fig. 11-56 (t3)).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 displays the explanatory text "peach tree" by moving it from the right side of the display area toward the center in a high-speed leftward direction (FIG. 11-56 (t4)), as shown in FIG. 11-55 (D), and when it reaches the center, by moving it slowly in a leftward direction (FIG. 11-56 (t5)), as shown in FIG. 11-55 (E), and then, by moving it again in a high-speed leftward direction until it disappears from the display area, as shown in FIG. 11-55 (F) (FIG. 11-56 (t6)).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 displays the explanatory text "Super Lucky!" while moving it from the right side of the display area toward the center at high speed in a leftward direction (Fig. 11-56 (t7)) as shown in Fig. 11-55 (G), and when it reaches near the center, displays it while moving it slowly in a leftward direction (Fig. 11-56 (t8)) as shown in Fig. 11-55 (H), and then displays it while moving it again quickly in a leftward direction until it disappears from the display area as shown in Fig. 11-55 (I) (Fig. 11-56 (t9)).

[About the title color change effect]
FIG. 11-57 is a diagram showing the execution status of the title color change effect, and FIG. 11-58 is a diagram showing the timing at which the color of the title characters changes in the title color change effect.

The performance control CPU 120 can execute a title color change performance in which the white title characters change to red or gold in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances.

During the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, the performance control CPU 120 makes some of the white title characters appear from the left side of the display area during the title start period, moves them towards a fixed position, and stops them at the fixed position. After that, the performance control CPU 120 displays the white title characters in a stationary state at the fixed position during the title display period, as shown in FIG. 11-57(A). Then, when it has not been decided to execute the title color change performance, the performance control CPU 120 outputs a specific sound from the speakers 8L and 8R after a time of t1 has elapsed from the start of the title display period, and maintains the white title characters in a stationary state at the fixed position, as shown in FIG. 11-57(B)(C), and then moves the white title characters displayed at the fixed position from the fixed position to the right side of the display area during the title end period until all of the title characters disappear.

On the other hand, when it is determined that a title color change effect is to be executed, the CPU 120 for controlling the effect outputs a specific sound from the speakers 8L and 8R after a time t1 has elapsed since the start of the title display period, and changes the title characters displayed in the fixed position to a state in which they appear to glow, as shown in FIG. 11-57(D). After a time t2 has elapsed, if a change to red has been determined, the CPU 120 changes the title characters to red, as shown in FIG. 11-57(E), and if a change to gold has been determined, the CPU 120 changes the title characters to gold, as shown in FIG. 11-57(F). After that, during the title end period, the CPU 120 moves the title characters from their fixed positions to the right side of the display area, while maintaining the changed color displayed in their fixed positions, until all of the title characters have disappeared. When the title characters are changed from a state in which they appear to glow to red or gold, the title characters have changed to red or gold when the light on the title characters clears.

As shown in Figures 11-58 (A) and (B), in the low base weak reach A and B performances, the presentation time T1 of the title start period of the title display part is set to 500 ms, the presentation time T2 of the title display period is set to 2200 ms, and the presentation time T3 of the title end period is set to 300 ms. During the title display period, the time t1 from the start of the title display period to when the title characters change to a state where they appear to glow is set to 800 ms, the time t2 from when the title characters change to a state where they appear to glow to when the title characters change to red or gold is set to 200 ms, and the time t3 from when the title characters change to red or gold to when the title display period ends is set to 1200 ms.

For this reason, as shown in FIG. 11-58 (C), when the color of the title characters changes from white to red or gold, the time (t3) during which the title characters are displayed in the changed red or gold form during the title display period is longer than the time (t1) during which the title characters are displayed in white form during the title display period, and the time (t3+T3) during which the title characters are displayed in the changed red or gold form during the title display part is longer than the time (T1+t1) during which the title characters are displayed in white form during the title display part.

[Regarding operation promotion performance A]
Figure 11-59 is a diagram showing the execution status of operation promotion presentation A.

The presentation control CPU 120 can execute operation promotion presentation A, which prompts the player to operate the push button 31B, during a normal reach presentation.

When it has been decided that operation prompting performance A will be performed, as shown in Figures 11-59 (A) and (B), during the execution of a normal reach performance in which the decorative pattern (large) is in a reach state, the performance control CPU 120 displays an operation prompting image (small) consisting of a button image (small) that resembles the push button 31B and operation prompting text (small) "Press!" that prompts the player to operate the push button 31B.

The button image (small) has a remaining time meter formed that indicates the remaining time of the valid period during which operation of the push button 31B is valid, and if operation of the push button 31B is detected before the remaining time meter reaches 0, or if the remaining time meter reaches 0, the performance control CPU 120 executes a whiteout performance in which the entire display area is displayed in white, as shown in Figure 11-59 (C), in the case of a fluctuation pattern that develops into a low base weak reach A or B performance, and then executes a low base weak reach A or B performance, as shown in Figure 11-59 (D).

On the other hand, in the case of a variation pattern that results in a loss, the performance control CPU 120 erases the operation prompt image (small) and stops the decorative pattern (large) in a loss state, as shown in Figure 11-59 (E).

[About operation promotion performance B]
Figure 11-60 is a diagram showing the execution status of operation promotion presentation B.

In low-base weak reach A and B performances, the performance control CPU 120 can execute operation promotion performance B, which encourages the operation of push button 31B at the end of the introductory part.

When the CPU 120 for controlling the performance has decided to execute operation prompting performance B and has decided to display an operation prompting image (small), it displays an operation prompting image (small) consisting of a button image (small) that imitates the push button 31B and operation prompting text (small) "Press!" that encourages the operation of the push button 31B at the end of the introductory part, as shown in FIG. 11-60 (A).

When the CPU 120 for controlling the performance has decided to execute the operation prompting performance B and to display the operation prompting image (large), as shown in Fig. 11-60 (B) (C), the CPU 120 for controlling the performance displays an operation prompting image (large) consisting of a button image (large) that imitates the push button 31B and is larger than the button image (small) and operation prompting text (large) "Press!" that prompts the operation of the push button 31B at the end of the introductory part. At this time, unlike when the CPU 120 for controlling the performance displays an operation prompting image (small) as shown in Fig. 11-60 (B), the CPU 120 for controlling the performance displays multiple button images (large) with a transparent background and combines these multiple button images (large) into one button image (large), and then displays an operation prompting image (large) consisting of a button image (large) and operation prompting text (large) "Press!" that prompts the operation of the push button 31B.

Both the button image (small) and the button image (large) have a remaining time meter formed, and if the operation of the push button 31B is detected before the remaining time meter reaches 0, or if the remaining time meter reaches 0, the performance control CPU 120 erases the operation prompt image (small) or operation prompt image (large) as shown in FIG. 11-60 (D) in the case of a fluctuation pattern that develops into a low base strong reach A-C performance or a low base strongest reach performance, and then executes a drop performance in which the movable body 32 falls, as shown in FIG. 11-60 (E).

On the other hand, in the case of a variation pattern that results in a miss, the performance control CPU 120 erases the operation prompt image (small) or operation prompt image (large) as shown in FIG. 11-60 (F) and executes a blackout performance in which the entire display area goes dark, and then notifies the user of a miss as the performance result as shown in FIG. 11-60 (G).

[About operation promotion performance C]
Figure 11-61 is a diagram showing the execution status of operation promotion presentation C.

The performance control CPU 120 can execute operation promotion performance C, which encourages the user to operate the push button 31B in the middle of the introductory part, in the low base strong reach performances A to C and the low base strongest reach performance.

When it has been decided to execute operation prompting performance C, the performance control CPU 120 displays an operation prompting image (small) consisting of a button image (small) that resembles the push button 31B and operation prompting text (small) "Press!" that prompts the player to operate the push button 31B in the middle of the introductory part, as shown in Figures 11-61 (A) and (B).

The performance control CPU 120 has determined that a cut-in image (A) is to be displayed, and if operation of the push button 31B is detected before the remaining time meter reaches zero, the operation prompt image (small) is erased as shown in FIG. 11-61 (C), and a cut-in image (A) showing the ally character "Nana" is displayed, and then the introductory part is continued as shown in FIG. 11-61 (F).

The performance control CPU 120 also determines that a cut-in image (B) is to be displayed, and if operation of the push button 31B is detected before the remaining time meter reaches zero, the operation prompt image (small) is erased as shown in FIG. 11-61 (D), and a cut-in image (B) showing the ally character "Jam" is displayed, and then the continuation of the introductory part is executed as shown in FIG. 11-61 (F).

In addition, whether it has been determined that a cut-in image (A) is to be displayed or that a cut-in image (B) is to be displayed, if the operation of the push button 31B is not detected before the remaining time meter reaches zero, the performance control CPU 120 erases the operation prompting image (small) while continuing the performance of the middle part of the introductory part, as shown in FIG. 11-61 (E), and executes the continuation of the introductory part, as shown in FIG. 11-61 (F).

[Regarding operation promotion performance D]
Figure 11-62 is a diagram showing the execution status of operation promotion presentation D.

The performance control CPU 120 can execute operation promotion performance D, which encourages the operation of the push button 31B at the end of the introductory part, in the low base strong reach performances A to C and the low base strongest reach performance.

When it has been decided that a small operation prompting image should be displayed, the performance control CPU 120 displays a small operation prompting image consisting of a small button image that resembles a push button 31B and small operation prompting text "Press!" encouraging the player to operate the push button 31B at the end of the introductory part, as shown in Figures 11-62 (A) and (B).

When it has been decided that an operation prompting image (large) is to be displayed, the performance control CPU 120 displays an operation prompting image (large) consisting of a button image (large) that imitates the push button 31B and is larger than the button image (small) and operation prompting text (large) "Press!" that prompts the operation of the push button 31B at the end of the introductory part, as shown in Fig. 11-62 (A) (G). At this time, unlike when displaying an operation prompting image (small), the performance control CPU 120 displays multiple button images (large) with a transparent background and performs a prompt introduction performance (see Fig. 11-60 (B)) in which these multiple button images (large) are combined into one button image (large), and then displays an operation prompting image (large) consisting of a button image (large) and operation prompting text (large) "Press!" that prompts the operation of the push button 31B.

When the operation of the push button 31B is detected before the remaining time meter reaches 0, or when the remaining time meter reaches 0, in the case of a variation pattern that indicates a jackpot, the presentation control CPU 120 executes a rainbow presentation in which a rainbow pattern swirls across the entire display area while the operation prompt image (small) or operation prompt image (large) gradually disappears, as shown in FIG. 11-62(C)(H), and then notifies the user of a jackpot as a presentation result, as shown in FIG. 11-62(D)(I).

On the other hand, in the case of a variation pattern that results in a miss, the performance control CPU 120 erases the operation prompt image (small) or operation prompt image (large) as shown in FIG. 11-62 (E) (J) and executes a blackout performance in which the entire display area goes dark, and then notifies the user of a miss as the performance result as shown in FIG. 11-62 (F) (K).

[About the operation promotion image]
Fig. 11-63 is a diagram showing the display mode of the operation prompting image. The performance control CPU 120 displays the button images constituting the operation prompting image (small) and the operation prompting image (large) while continuously moving alternately in the left and right direction as shown in Fig. 11-63 (A), and while continuously changing between the state where the button is not pressed and the state where the button is pressed. At this time, as shown in Fig. 11-63 (B), the interval at which the button image moves in the left and right direction is different from the interval at which the button changes from the state where the button is not pressed to the state where the button is pressed, and the action of the button image moving in the left and right direction and the action of the button changing from the state where the button is not pressed to the state where the button is pressed are not synchronized, resulting in a complex movement.

[About the start of the big win]
FIG. 11-64 shows the execution status of the jackpot start presentation.

As shown in FIG. 11-64(A), the presentation control CPU 120 stops the decorative pattern (large) in a jackpot state, and then executes the jackpot start presentation when it receives a jackpot start command that specifies the display of a presentation image indicating the start of the jackpot game state.

As shown in Figs. 11-64(B) to (G), the presentation control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display an image of a flickering flame as the background during the jackpot start presentation, and as shown in Fig. 11-64(B), first displays the first half of the title letters "BIG (REG)" of the jackpot title letters "BIG BONUS (REG BONUS)" in an enlarged size, as shown in Fig. 11-64(B), and then gradually reduces the first half of the title letters "BIG (REG)" until it is reduced in size so that the entirety is visible in the display area, as shown in Fig. 11-64(C), and displays it in a fixed position near the top center of the display area.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-64(D), the presentation control CPU 120 displays the latter half of the title letters "BONUS" of the jackpot title "BIG BONUS (REG BONUS)" in an enlarged size, and then, as shown in FIG. 11-64(E), gradually reduces the latter half of the title letters "BONUS" until it is reduced in size so that the entire latter half is visible in the display area, and displays it at the bottom of the fixed position near the center of the display area (below the first half of the title letters "BIG").

In this embodiment, if the jackpot type is a 6-round jackpot game state, the title text is displayed as "REG BONUS", and if the jackpot type is a 10-round jackpot game state, the title text is displayed as "BIG BONUS".

Next, as shown in Figures 11-64 (E) to (G), the presentation control CPU 120 displays the title letters "BIG BONUS" in their entirety in a fixed position, then gradually enlarges the title letters "BIG BONUS", and then, as shown in Figure 11-64 (H), starts the jackpot presentation and switches the display on the image display device 5 to the background of the jackpot game state.

When the performance control CPU 120 starts the jackpot performance, it first displays a right hit promotion image (large) and a right hit promotion image (small) to encourage the player to shoot the game ball toward the right game area 2R, as shown in FIG. 11-64 (H).

The right-hit promotion image (small) is composed of the message "right hit" (small) that encourages the player to shoot the game ball toward the right game area 2R, and an arrow image (small) that indicates the right direction. As shown in Figures 11-64 (H) (I), the presentation control CPU 120 displays the right-hit promotion image (small) in a position toward the top right of the display area from the start of the jackpot presentation until the end of the jackpot game state.

The right hit promotion image (large) is a message that encourages the player to shoot the game ball toward the right game area 2R, and is composed of the message "Right Hit" (large), which is larger in size than the right hit promotion image (small), and an arrow image (large), which is an arrow indicating the right direction and is larger in size than the arrow image (small).The presentation control CPU 120 repeatedly displays the right hit promotion image (large) in a manner that moves from the left side of the display area to the right side only for the first certain amount of time during the period from the start of the jackpot presentation until the end of the jackpot game state, as shown in Figures 11-64 (H) (I).

In addition, when the game is controlled to a jackpot game state, after the title characters are displayed in the jackpot start performance, the game is switched to during the jackpot game, and a right hit promotion image (small) and a right hit promotion image (large) that suggest the operation method of the jackpot game state (operation method of shooting the game ball toward the right game area 2R) are displayed. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 switches to the jackpot game at a timing a predetermined time before the timing at which control is performed on the main board 11 side that is advantageous by operating the game ball in the operation method of shooting the game ball toward the right game area 2R, and displays the right hit promotion image (small) and the right hit promotion image (large). Therefore, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the right hit promotion image (small) and the right hit promotion image (large) were displayed, control is performed that is advantageous by operating the game ball in the operation method of shooting the game ball toward the right game area 2R.

In addition, when the CPU 120 for controlling the performance displays the title characters during the jackpot start performance, and then ends the jackpot start performance, erases the title characters, and switches to the next performance, the CPU 120 erases the title characters of the jackpot start performance and switches to the next performance in a shorter time than when erasing the title characters during the title end period in the title display part of the super reach performance.

In particular, the performance control CPU 120 switches to the jackpot performance in one frame (the minimum unit of image update) after displaying the title characters in the jackpot start performance, and displays a right hit prompt image (small) and a right hit prompt image (large). In the title display part of the super reach performance, a title end period is set instead of one frame, and the title characters are erased over a certain period of time. However, if the title characters are erased over a similar period of time when the title characters are displayed in the jackpot start performance and the performance is switched to the jackpot performance and the right hit prompt image (small) and the right hit prompt image (large) are displayed, there is a risk that the game ball will be operated in a manner that shoots out toward the right game area 2R during the period in which the title characters are being erased. However, if the game ball is launched toward the right game area 2R at this timing, the control that gives an advantage by operating the game ball in a manner that shoots out toward the right game area 2R has not yet started, and the game ball will be wasted. In response to this, the presentation control CPU 120 displays the title text in the jackpot start presentation, and then in one frame (the smallest unit of image update), switches to the jackpot mid-presentation and displays the right-hit promotion image (small) and right-hit promotion image (large), thereby reducing the generation of wasted game balls.

[Display of remaining spins until Yu-time]
When the game control microcomputer 100 performs 900 variable displays without being controlled to a jackpot in a low probability state, it controls the game to a time-saving state B (in this embodiment, a play time with 1100 time-saving times) in which (1) time-saving control is performed 1100 times and (2) low probability control is performed 1100 times.

The performance control CPU 120 can also display on the image display device 5 the remaining number of times to reach rescue time-saving mode (hereinafter referred to as the remaining number of times until Yu-time) 131SG005Z (see Figure 11-1), which is the remaining variable display number of times until control is given to time-saving mode B (Yu-time).

As shown in FIG. 11-65(A), in the normal state, when a normal reach effect, low base weak reach A, B effect, low base strong reach A-C effect, or low base strongest reach effect is not being executed, the effect control CPU 120 displays the number of times remaining until Yu-Time in the upper left corner of the display area. The number of times remaining until Yu-Time 131SG005Z is displayed as "XXX times remaining" (XXX is a number between 0 and 900 depending on the number of times remaining). In this case, whether the number of times remaining until Yu-Time is between 0 and 900, the number of times remaining until Yu-Time 131SG005Z is displayed in characters of the same font size.

As shown in FIG. 11-65(B), the presentation control CPU 120 continues to display the remaining number of times until the Yu-Time 131SG005Z even during the execution of a normal reach presentation in which the decorative pattern (large) is in a reach state.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-65(C), when a normal reach effect develops into a low base weak reach A or B effect, the effect control CPU 120 continues to display the remaining number of times 131SG005Z until the Yu-Time even while the low base weak reach A or B effect is being executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 11-65(D)(E), if a miss is announced as the result of the low base weak reach A or B effect, the effect control CPU 120 continues to display the remaining number of times 131SG005Z until the Yu-Time even after the low base weak reach A or B effect has ended.

In addition, the configuration is such that a jackpot can be announced as the result of the low base weak reach A, B performance, and when a jackpot is announced as the result of the low base weak reach A, B performance, the remaining number of times until the Yu-time 131SG005Z continues to be displayed until the low base weak reach A, B performance ends, and the remaining number of times until the Yu-time 131SG005Z is erased at the end of the low base weak reach A, B performance. Furthermore, the remaining number of times until the Yu-time 131SG005Z may be erased at the point when the content indicating that a jackpot has been confirmed as the result of the low base weak reach A, B performance is displayed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-65(F), when a normal reach effect or a low base weak reach A or B effect develops into a low base strong reach A-C effect or a low base strongest reach effect, the effect control CPU 120 erases the remaining number of times 131SG005Z until the Yu-Time when the low base strong reach A-C effect or the low base strongest reach effect starts. At this time, when the effect develops from a normal reach effect, the effect control CPU 120 erases the remaining number of times 131SG005Z until the Yu-Time at the timing when the selection effect starts, and when the effect develops from a low base weak reach A or B effect, if it is a low base strong reach A-C effect, during the prologue display period of the title display part, the effect control CPU 120 erases the remaining number of times 131SG005Z until the Yu-Time together with the pending display and active display, and if it is a low base strongest reach effect, the effect control CPU 120 erases the remaining number of times 131SG005Z until the Yu-Time at the start of the title display part.

In addition, when progressing from a low base weak reach A or B performance, the hold display and active display as well as the remaining number of times until Yu-time 131SG005Z may be erased at the timing when the falling display associated with the execution of operation prompting display B starts (the timing shown in FIG. 11-60 (D)). This allows the timing for erasing the hold display, active display, and the remaining number of times until Yu-time 131SG005Z to be the same regardless of whether the performance progresses to a low base strong reach A to C performance or a low base strongest reach performance.

Then, when a miss is announced as the result of the low base strong reach A-C effect or the low base strongest reach effect, the effect control CPU 120 displays the remaining number of times 131SG005Z until the Yu-Time ends again after the low base strong reach A-C effect or the low base strongest reach effect ends, as shown in FIG. 11-65(G)(H). On the other hand, when a jackpot is announced as the result of the low base strong reach A-C effect or the low base strongest reach effect, the effect control CPU 120 keeps the remaining number of times 131SG005Z until the Yu-Time ends erased until the next time the normal state is reached, as shown in FIG. 11-65(I)(J).

In addition, if the operation prompting performance A is configured to develop into a low base strong reach A-C performance or a low base strongest reach performance in response to the operation of push button 31B, the remaining number of times until the Yu-time 131SG005Z may be continuously displayed while the operation prompting performance A is being executed, and the remaining number of times until the Yu-time 131SG005Z may be erased when the low base strong reach A-C performance or the low base strongest reach performance begins. In such a configuration, the remaining number of times until the Yu-time 131SG005Z is displayed in the operation prompting performance A, but the remaining number of times until the Yu-time 131SG005Z is not displayed in the operation prompting performance C and D in the subsequent low base strong reach A-C performance or the low base strongest reach performance.

[About the Yu-time start effect]
When the game control microcomputer 100 performs 900 variable display without being controlled by a jackpot in a low probability state, it controls to the time-saving state B (play time). At this time, the game control microcomputer 100 turns on the right hit lamp 131SG132 as shown in FIG. 11-66(C) and transmits a right hit LED lighting notification command. After that, the performance control CPU 120 stops the variable display when the remaining number of times until the play time is 0 as shown in FIG. 11-66(A)(B), and when it receives the right hit LED lighting notification command, it displays a right hit promotion image (small) that encourages the operation of shooting the game ball toward the right play area 2R as shown in FIG. 11-66(C). The timing of lighting the right hit lamp 131SG132 and the timing of displaying the right hit promotion image (small) are almost simultaneous, but the game control microcomputer 100 turns on the right hit lamp 131SG132 and then sends a right hit LED lighting notification command, and in response, the performance control CPU 120 displays the right hit promotion image (small), so that the right hit lamp 131SG132 lights up before the right hit promotion image (small) is displayed.

When the time-saving state B (Yu-time) is started, the game control microcomputer 100 keeps the right-hit lamp 131SG132 lit until the time-saving state B (Yu-time) ends. The right-hit promotion image (small) is composed of a message "right hit" (small) that encourages the player to shoot the game ball toward the right game area 2R, and an arrow image (small) that indicates the right direction. As shown in Figures 11-66 (C) to (H), when the time-saving state B (Yu-time) is started, the performance control CPU 120 displays the right-hit promotion image (small) in a position toward the upper right of the display area until the time-saving state B (Yu-time) ends.

When the variable display stops with the number of remaining plays until Yu-Time is 0 and a game state designation command that designates time-saving state B (Yu-Time) is received, the presentation control CPU 120 executes the Yu-Time start presentation as shown in Figures 11-66 (D) to (G).

The Yu-time start performance includes a title start period from when part of the Yu-time title characters "Yu-time entry" is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 until they are displayed in the fixed position, a title display period during which the title characters "Yu-time entry" are displayed in the fixed position, and a title end period from when the title characters "Yu-time entry" that were displayed in the fixed position disappear and switch to the Yu-time performance.

The performance control CPU 120 displays the title characters "Entering Yu-Time" in the same manner as when it displays the title characters "Six people, catch the explosive chu!" during the title start period, title display period, and title end period of the Yu-Time start performance.

In more detail, during the title start period, the performance control CPU 120 displays the title characters "Enter Yu Time" in an enlarged size where only a portion of the characters is visible in the display area, as shown in FIG. 11-66 (D). At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays the title characters "Enter Yu Time" in such a way that the entire display area is filled with a portion of the title characters "Enter Yu Time". After that, the performance control CPU 120 gradually reduces the title characters "Enter Yu Time" as shown in FIG. 11-66 (D) (E), and stops the title characters "Enter Yu Time" in a fixed position at a reduced size where all of the characters of the title characters "Enter Yu Time" are visible in the display area.

During the title start period, the performance control CPU 120 displays the title characters "Entering Yu-Time" in a reduced size at a fixed position, and then transitions to the display of the title display period. During the title display period, the performance control CPU 120 keeps the title characters "Entering Yu-Time" displayed in a fixed position and frozen, as shown in Figures 11-66 (E) and (F).

After the title display period ends, the performance control CPU 120 transitions to the display of the title end period. During the title end period, as shown in FIG. 11-66 (F) (G), the performance control CPU 120 enlarges the title characters "Enter Yu Time", which are displayed in a reduced size at a fixed position, until the entire display area is filled with parts of the title characters "Enter Yu Time". At this time, the title characters "Enter Yu Time" are not enlarged in the opposite manner to when the title characters "Enter Yu Time" are displayed in a reduced size during the title start period, but are enlarged in a manner different from the opposite manner to when the title characters "Enter Yu Time" are displayed in a reduced size during the title start period until the entire display area is filled with parts of the title characters "Enter Yu Time". In other words, the trajectory that each part of the title characters follows as the title characters "Enter Yu Time" shrink during the title start period is different from the trajectory that each part of the title characters follows as the title characters "Enter Yu Time" expand during the title end period. Therefore, the display area is completely filled with part of the title text "Entering Yu-Time" in a manner different from the manner in which the display area is completely filled at the start of the title start period. After that, as shown in FIG. 11-66(H), the display switches to the background of the Yu-Time presentation and the Yu-Time presentation begins.

During the Yu-Time start presentation, the presentation control CPU 120 displays a right-hit promotion image (large) that encourages the player to shoot the game ball toward the right play area 2R, in addition to the right-hit promotion image (small), and also displays an image warning about addiction (message: "Be careful not to get addicted!") below the display area.

The right hit promotion image (large) is a message that encourages the player to shoot the game ball toward the right game area 2R, and is composed of the message "Right hit" (large), which is larger in size than the right hit promotion image (small), and an arrow image (large), which is an arrow indicating the right direction and is larger in size than the arrow image (small).The presentation control CPU 120 repeatedly displays the right hit promotion image (large) in a manner that moves from the left side to the right side of the display area over the period during which the Yu-time start presentation is being executed, as shown in Figures 11-66 (D) to (G).

In addition, in this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled to the time-saving state B, and when the variable display result is a miss, it selects the variable pattern PA1-4 with a special chart variable time of 500 ms to perform the variable display, and when it is controlled to the time-saving state B, and when the variable display result is a jackpot, it selects the variable pattern PB1-18 with a special chart variable time of 500 ms + 15,000 ms to perform the variable display, and when the control of the time-saving state B starts, the performance control CPU 120 is configured to execute the Yu-time start performance during the period when the variable display according to these variable patterns is being performed. The microcomputer 100 may be configured to perform a variable display by selecting a time-saving B start variable pattern that has a longer variable time than the variable pattern PA1-4 and that has a variable time corresponding to the play time start presentation in the first variable display controlled to the time-saving state B, that is, in the variable display based on the first game ball winning the first start winning port and the second start winning port after controlling to the time-saving state B, when the variable display result is a miss, and the presentation control CPU 120 executes the play time start presentation during the period in which the variable display by the time-saving B start variable pattern is being performed in the first variable display controlled to the time-saving state B. In this configuration, the game control microcomputer 100 performs a variable display in the variable pattern PB1-18 with a special chart variable time of 500 ms + 15,000 ms when the variable display result is a jackpot in the first variable display controlled to the time-saving state B, and the presentation control CPU 120 may stop the decorative pattern (large) in a jackpot mode without executing the play time start presentation.

[About title characters, etc. 1]
Figure 11-67 is a diagram showing one form of the relationship between the title characters of the title display part in the super reach performance, the explanatory characters in the explanatory text display performance, the title characters of the jackpot start performance, the operation prompting characters (small) in the operation prompting performance (small), and the operation prompting characters (large) in the operation prompting performance (large).

As shown in Figure 11-67 (A), the title characters of the Super Reach performance are displayed in a stationary state during the title display period, and the background image at that time is a still image (low base strong reach B, C performance, low base strongest reach performance, high base reach A-D performance) or a moving image (low base weak reach A, B performance, low base strong reach A performance). In addition, the number of characters in the title characters of the Super Reach performance is 7 to 13 characters, the display time of the title characters of the Super Reach performance (the time from when all the characters constituting the title characters are displayed until at least a part of the characters are no longer displayed) is LR, the font size of the title characters of the Super Reach performance is FR, and the display area size in which the title characters of the Super Reach performance are displayed is ER.

As shown in Figure 11-67 (A), the explanatory characters are displayed in an operating state, and the background image at that time is an operating image. The number of explanatory characters is 3 to 6 characters, the display time of the explanatory characters (one explanatory character out of three explanatory characters) (the time from when all the characters constituting the explanatory characters are displayed until at least a part of the character string is no longer displayed) is LS, the font size of the explanatory characters is FS, and the display area size in which the explanatory characters (one explanatory character out of three explanatory characters) are displayed is ES.

As shown in FIG. 11-67(A), the title characters of the jackpot start performance are displayed in an operating state, and the background image at that time is an operating image. In addition, the number of characters in the title characters of the jackpot start performance is 8, the display time of the title characters of the jackpot start performance (the time from when all the characters constituting the title characters are displayed until at least a part of the characters are no longer displayed) is LB, the font size of the title characters of the jackpot start performance is FB, and the display area size in which the title characters of the jackpot start performance are displayed is EB.

As shown in FIG. 11-67(A), the operation prompting characters (small) are displayed in an operating state, and the background image at that time is an operation image. The number of characters in the operation prompting characters (small) is three, the display time of the operation prompting characters (small) (the effective operation period of the push button 31B during which the operation prompting characters (small) are displayed without the push button 31B being operated) is L1P, the font size of the operation prompting characters (small) is F1P, and the display area size in which the operation prompting characters (small) are displayed is E1P.

As shown in FIG. 11-67(A), the operation prompting characters (large) are displayed in an operating state, and the background image at that time is an operation image. The number of characters in the operation prompting characters (large) is three, the display time of the operation prompting characters (large) (the effective operation period of the push button 31B during which the operation prompting characters (large) are displayed without the push button 31B being operated) is L2P, the font size of the operation prompting characters (large) is F2P, and the display area size in which the operation prompting characters (large) are displayed is E2P.

In this embodiment, when comparing the display times of the title characters, explanatory characters, title characters, operation prompt characters (small), and operation prompt characters (large) of the super reach effect, as shown in Figure 11-67 (B), the display time LB of the title characters of the jackpot start effect is longer than the display times LR, LS, L1P, L2P of the title characters, explanatory characters, operation prompt characters (small) and operation prompt characters (large) of the super reach effect, the display time LR of the title characters of the super reach effect is longer than the display times LS, L1P, L2P of the explanatory characters, operation prompt characters (small) and operation prompt characters (large), and the display times LS, L1P of the operation prompt characters (small) and operation prompt characters (large) are set longer than the display time LS of the explanatory characters. In addition, the display times LR, LB, L1P, and L2P of the title characters of the super reach effect, the title characters of the jackpot start effect, the operation prompt characters (small), and the operation prompt characters (large) are all set to be longer than the display time required for all three explanatory characters that make up the explanatory text display effect to be displayed. Furthermore, the relationship between these display times holds regardless of the type of super reach effect.

In this embodiment, when comparing the font sizes of the title characters, explanatory characters, title characters of the jackpot start performance, operation prompt characters (small), and operation prompt characters (large) of the super reach performance, as shown in FIG. 11-67(C), the font size F2P of the operation prompt characters (large) is larger than the font sizes FR, FS, FB, and F1P of the title characters, explanatory characters, title characters of the jackpot start performance, and operation prompt characters (small) of the super reach performance. Furthermore, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the operation prompt characters (large) is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters that make up the title characters, explanatory characters, title characters of the jackpot start performance, operation prompt characters (small), and operation prompt characters (large) of the super reach performance.

In addition, the font size FB of the title character of the jackpot start performance is larger than the font size FR, F1P of the title character, explanatory character, and operation prompt character (small) of the super reach performance. In addition, the title character "BIG BONUS" of the jackpot start performance is first displayed in the first half "BIG" at the top of the fixed position, and then the second half "BONUS" is displayed at the bottom of the fixed position, and then the title character "BIG BONUS" is gradually enlarged and displayed. When the first half "BIG" is displayed at the top of the fixed position and the second half "BONUS" is displayed at the bottom of the fixed position, the size of the characters that make up the title character "BIG BONUS" is the smallest. In this configuration, the size of the title character of the jackpot start performance when the first half "BIG" is displayed at the top of the fixed position and the second half "BONUS" is displayed at the bottom of the fixed position is larger than the size of the title character, explanatory character, and operation prompt character (small) of the super reach performance. Furthermore, when the first half of "BIG" is displayed at the top of the fixed position and the second half of "BONUS" is displayed at the bottom of the fixed position, the size of the smallest character that makes up the title of the jackpot start performance is larger than the size of the largest character that makes up the title, explanation, operation prompt character (small), and operation prompt character (large) of the super reach performance.

The font size FR of the title characters of the Super Reach performance is larger than the font sizes FS and F1P of the explanatory characters and operation prompt characters (small). The size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the title characters of the Super Reach performance is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters that make up the explanatory characters and operation prompt characters (small).

The font size FS of the explanatory characters is larger than the font size F1P of the operation prompting characters (small). Furthermore, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the explanatory characters is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters that make up the operation prompting characters (small).

Furthermore, these font size and character size relationships apply regardless of the type of Super Reach performance.

In this embodiment, when comparing the display area sizes of the title character, explanatory character, title character, operation prompt character (small), and operation prompt character (large) of the super reach performance, as shown in FIG. 11-67 (D), the display area size E2P of the operation prompt character (large) is larger than the display area sizes ER, ES, EB, and E1P of the title character, explanatory character, title character, and operation prompt character (small) of the super reach performance. Also, the display area size EB of the title character of the jackpot start performance is larger than the display area sizes ER, ES, and E1P of the title character, explanatory character, and operation prompt character (small) of the super reach performance. Also, the display area size ES of the explanatory character is larger than the display area size E1P of the operation prompt character (small). Also, these display area size relationships hold regardless of the type of super reach performance.

[Title characters, etc. 2]
Figure 11-68 is a diagram showing one embodiment of the relationship between the title characters of the title display part in the super reach performance, the title characters of the jackpot start performance, the operation prompting characters (small) in the operation prompting performance (small), the operation prompting characters (large) in the operation prompting performance (large), the title characters of the Yu-time start performance, and the remaining number characters that constitute the remaining number of times until Yu-time.

As shown in FIG. 11-68(A), the display time of the title characters in the Super Reach performance (the time from when all the characters constituting the title characters are displayed until at least a part of the characters are no longer displayed) is LR, the font size of the title characters in the Super Reach performance is FR, and the size of the display area in which the title characters in the Super Reach performance are displayed is ER.

As shown in FIG. 11-68(A), the display time of the title characters of the jackpot start effect (the time from when all the characters constituting the title characters are displayed until at least a part of the characters are no longer displayed) is LB, the font size of the title characters of the jackpot start effect is FB, and the size of the display area in which the title characters of the jackpot start effect are displayed is EB.

As shown in FIG. 11-68 (A), the display time of the operation prompting character (small) (the effective operation period of the push button 31B during which the operation prompting character (small) is displayed without the push button 31B being operated) is L1P, the font size of the operation prompting character (small) is F1P, and the display area size in which the operation prompting character (small) is displayed is E1P.

As shown in FIG. 11-68 (A), the display time of the operation prompting character (large) (the effective operation period of the push button 31B during which the operation prompting character (large) is displayed without the push button 31B being operated) is L2P, the font size of the operation prompting character (large) is F2P, and the display area size in which the operation prompting character (large) is displayed is E2P.

As shown in FIG. 11-68(A), the display time of the title characters of the Yu-time start effect (the time from when all the characters constituting the title characters are displayed until at least a part of the characters are no longer displayed) is LY, the font size of the title characters of the Yu-time start effect is FY, and the size of the display area in which the title characters of the Yu-time start effect are displayed is EY.

As shown in FIG. 11-68(A), the font size of the remaining number of times until the Yu-time is FZ, and the size of the display area in which the remaining number of times until the Yu-time is displayed is EZ.

In this embodiment, when comparing the font sizes of the title characters of the Super Reach effect, the title characters of the jackpot start effect, the operation prompt character (small), the operation prompt character (large), the title characters of the Yu-time start effect, and the characters of the number of times remaining until Yu-time, as shown in FIG. 11-68(B), the font size F2P of the operation prompt character (large) is larger than the font sizes FR, FB, F1P, FY, and FZ of the title characters of the Super Reach effect, the title characters of the jackpot start effect, the operation prompt character (small), the title characters of the Yu-time start effect, and the characters of the number of times remaining until Yu-time. Furthermore, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the operation prompt character (large) is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters that make up the title characters of the Super Reach effect, the title characters of the jackpot start effect, the operation prompt character (small), the title characters of the Yu-time start effect, and the characters of the number of times remaining until Yu-time (remaining XXX times (X is a number between 0 and 900)). Additionally, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the operation prompt character (large) is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters that make up the remaining number of times until Yu-time, regardless of whether the number of times remaining until Yu-time is between 0 and 900.

Furthermore, the font size FB of the title characters of the jackpot start performance is larger than the font sizes FR, F1P, FY, and FZ of the title characters of the super reach performance, the operation prompt character (small), the title characters of the Yu-time start performance, and the characters indicating the number of times remaining until Yu-time. Furthermore, the size of the smallest character among the characters constituting the title characters of the jackpot start performance is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters constituting the title characters of the super reach performance, the operation prompt character (small), the title characters of the Yu-time start performance, and the characters indicating the number of times remaining until Yu-time. Furthermore, the size of the smallest character among the characters constituting the title characters of the jackpot start performance is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters constituting the characters indicating the number of times remaining until Yu-time, regardless of whether the number of times remaining until Yu-time is between 0 and 900.

Furthermore, the font size FY of the title characters of the Yu-time start effect is larger than the font sizes FR, F1P, and FZ of the title characters of the Super Reach effect, the operation prompt characters (small), and the remaining number of times until Yu-time. Furthermore, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the title characters of the Yu-time start effect is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters that make up the title characters of the Super Reach effect, the operation prompt characters (small), and the remaining number of times until Yu-time. Furthermore, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the title characters of the Yu-time start effect is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters that make up the remaining number of times until Yu-time, regardless of whether the remaining number of times until Yu-time is 0 to 900.

The font size FR of the title characters of the Super Reach performance is larger than the font sizes F1P and FZ of the operation prompt characters (small) and the remaining number of times until Yu-Time. The size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the title characters of the Super Reach performance is larger than the size of the operation prompt characters (small) and the largest character among the characters that make up the remaining number of times until Yu-Time. The size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the title characters of the Super Reach performance is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters that make up the remaining number of times until Yu-Time, regardless of whether the remaining number of times until Yu-Time is 0 to 900.

Furthermore, the font size F1P of the operation prompting characters (small) is a larger font size than the font size FZ of the remaining number of times until Yu-time. Furthermore, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the operation prompting characters (small) is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters that make up the remaining number of times until Yu-time. Furthermore, the size of the smallest character among the characters that make up the operation prompting characters (small) is larger than the size of the largest character among the characters that make up the remaining number of times until Yu-time, regardless of whether the remaining number of times until Yu-time is 0 to 900.

Furthermore, these font size and character size relationships apply regardless of the type of Super Reach performance.

In this embodiment, when comparing the display area sizes of the title characters of the Super Reach performance, the title characters of the jackpot start performance, the operation prompt character (small), the operation prompt character (large), the title characters of the Yu-time start performance, and the characters of the remaining number of times until Yu-time, as shown in FIG. 11-68(C), the display area size E2P of the operation prompt character (large) is larger than the display area sizes ER, EB, E1P, EY, and EZ of the title characters of the Super Reach performance, the title characters of the jackpot start performance, the operation prompt character (small), the title characters of the Yu-time start performance, and the characters of the remaining number of times until Yu-time. Also, the display area size EB of the title characters of the jackpot start performance is larger than the display area sizes ER, E1P, EY, and EZ of the title characters of the Super Reach performance, the operation prompt character (small), the title characters of the Yu-time start performance, and the characters of the remaining number of times until Yu-time. In addition, the display area size EY of the title character of the Yu-time start effect is larger than the display area sizes ER, E1P, and EZ of the title character of the Super Reach effect, the operation prompt character (small), and the remaining number of times until Yu-time. In addition, the display area size ER of the title character of the Super Reach effect is larger than the display area sizes E1P and EZ of the operation prompt character (small) and the remaining number of times until Yu-time. In addition, the display area size E1P of the operation prompt character (small) is larger than the display area size EZ of the remaining number of times until Yu-time. In addition, these display area size relationships hold regardless of the type of Super Reach effect.

In this embodiment, when comparing the display time of the title characters of the Super Reach performance and the Yu-Time start performance, as shown in FIG. 11-68 (D), the display time LY of the title characters of the Yu-Time start performance is set longer than the display time LR of the title characters of the Super Reach performance. Furthermore, the relationship between these display times holds regardless of the type of Super Reach performance.

Comparing the display mode of the title characters in the Super Reach effect and the Yu-Time start effect in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-68 (E), in the low base weak reach A, B effects and the low base strong reach A-C effects, during the title start period the title characters are displayed while moving from the left side of the display area to the center, and during the title end period the title characters are erased while moving from the center to the right side of the display area. On the other hand, in the low base strongest reach effect and the Yu-Time start effect, during the title start period the title characters are displayed in an enlarged manner and then reduced, and during the title end period the title characters are erased while expanding.

[LED placement]
The game effect lamps 9 in this embodiment include frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4.

As shown in FIG. 11-69, the LED frames LWL1 to LWL12 are provided to surround the upper position of the image display device 5 of the gaming machine frame 3 and the left side of the gaming area, and the LED frames LWR2 to LWR12 are provided to surround the right side of the gaming area of the gaming machine frame 3. The logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 are also disposed in a position corresponding to the logo "POWER II" formed on the front of the movable body 32. The decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 are also disposed in a position corresponding to the decorative portion formed on the gaming area 2L. The attacca lamps LA1 to LA4 are also disposed in a position near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the gaming board 2.

The frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 are full-color LEDs made up of RGB (Red, Green, Blue) light-emitting elements, the logo LEDs LL1-LL4 are red LEDs capable of emitting a single color red light, and the decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 are white LEDs capable of emitting a single color white light.

[Output mechanism to LED driver (lamp driver)]
FIG. 11-70 is a diagram for explaining the mechanism of output to the LED driver. In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 mounted on the performance control board 12 outputs brightness data for turning on/blinking/extinguishing one or more of the multiple LEDs included in the game effect lamp 9 to the LED driver (also called a lamp driver). In the following, the control of turning on/blinking/extinguishing a lamp such as an LED by the performance control CPU 120 is also called lamp control. The LED driver adjusts the current flowing through each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 that is the lamp control target, based on the brightness data received from the performance control CPU 120, in order to turn on/blink/extinguish each lamp. Each game effect lamp 9 turns on/blink/extinguish based on the current adjusted by the LED driver.

To explain more specifically, the ROM 121 of the performance control board 12 stores a brightness data table that contains brightness data for controlling each game effect lamp 9. The brightness data table includes an error brightness data table that is used when an error occurs, an SP reach brightness data table that is used during a super reach, and a background brightness data table.

Furthermore, the background brightness data table includes a normal background brightness data table used in a low probability low base state (normal state), a fanfare background brightness data table used in a fanfare state in which a fanfare effect is executed, a jackpot background brightness data table used during a round in a jackpot game state, an ending background brightness data table used in an ending state in which an ending effect is executed to notify the end of the jackpot game state, and a time-saving background brightness data table used in a low probability high base state (time-saving state).

The above-mentioned background brightness data tables are used without overlapping, and one of the background brightness data tables is used depending on which of the multiple game states, such as the normal state, fanfare state, jackpot game state, ending state, and time-saving state, the game is controlled to. In other words, the performance control CPU 120 uses one of the background brightness data tables for each game state being controlled, and outputs brightness data based on that background brightness data table to the LED driver. This causes each game effect lamp 9 to be lamp-controlled depending on the game state being controlled.

Furthermore, a priority is set for each of the error brightness data table, the SP reach brightness data table, and the background brightness data table. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-70, the error brightness data table, the SP reach brightness data table, and the background brightness data table have the highest priority when used.

For example, when the effect control CPU 120 outputs brightness data based on the normal background brightness data table in the normal state and the effect progresses to a super reach effect, it uses the SP reach brightness data table corresponding to the super reach effect in preference to the normal background brightness data table, and outputs brightness data based on the SP reach brightness data table to the LED driver. As a result, when the game effect lamp 9 is lamp-controlled in a manner corresponding to the normal state based on the normal background brightness data table and the effect progresses to a super reach effect, the game effect lamp 9 is lamp-controlled in a manner corresponding to the super reach effect based on the SP reach brightness data table. Note that during the period when the brightness data based on the SP reach brightness data table is output to the LED driver, the brightness data based on the normal background brightness data table is not output to the LED driver, but when the normal state is restored after the super reach effect ends, the brightness data based on the normal background brightness data table is output to the LED driver, and when a jackpot is hit and the fanfare state is entered, the brightness data based on the fanfare background brightness data table is output to the LED driver.

More specifically, the performance control CPU 120 uses a timer to measure the lamp control time corresponding to the game state being controlled, and outputs brightness data to the LED driver using the background brightness data table corresponding to the game state being controlled. However, when the performance progresses to a super reach performance, the SP reach brightness data table corresponding to the super reach performance is used preferentially over the background brightness data table to output brightness data to the LED driver. During this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues to update the timer value without stopping the measurement of the lamp control time using the background brightness data table. In other words, even while the performance control CPU 120 is lamp controlling the game effect lamp 9 based on the SP reach brightness data table, it continues to update the brightness data contained in the background brightness data table, but since the brightness data contained in the background brightness data table has a lower priority than the brightness data contained in the SP reach brightness data table, the brightness data contained in the background brightness data table is not output to the LED driver. After the Super Reach performance ends, the performance control CPU 120 starts outputting the luminance data contained in the background luminance data table to the LED driver again, starting from the continuation of the luminance data that was being updated.

Also, for example, when an error occurs while outputting brightness data based on the SP Reach brightness data table during a Super Reach performance, the performance control CPU 120 uses the error brightness data table corresponding to the error in preference to the SP Reach brightness data table, and outputs brightness data based on the error brightness data table to the LED driver. As a result, when an error occurs while the game effect lamp 9 is being lamp-controlled in a manner corresponding to the Super Reach performance based on the SP Reach brightness data table, the game effect lamp 9 is lamp-controlled in a manner corresponding to the error based on the error brightness data table. Note that while the brightness data based on the error brightness data table is being output to the LED driver, the brightness data based on the SP Reach brightness data table is not output to the LED driver, but when the error is released and the game returns to a Super Reach performance, the brightness data based on the SP Reach brightness data table is output to the LED driver.

More specifically, the performance control CPU 120 uses a timer to measure the time of lamp control corresponding to the super reach performance being controlled, and outputs brightness data to the LED driver using the SP reach brightness data table corresponding to the super reach performance. However, when an error occurs, the error brightness data table corresponding to the error is used in preference to the SP reach brightness data table to output brightness data to the LED driver. During this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues to update the value of the timer without stopping the measurement of the time of lamp control using the SP reach brightness data table. In other words, even while the performance control CPU 120 is lamp controlling the game effect lamp 9 based on the error brightness data table, it continues to update the brightness data included in the SP reach brightness data table, but since the brightness data included in the SP reach brightness data table has a lower priority than the brightness data included in the error brightness data table, the brightness data included in the SP reach brightness data table is not output to the LED driver. After the error is cleared, the performance control CPU 120 starts outputting the luminance data contained in the SP reach luminance data table to the LED driver again, starting from the continuation of the luminance data that had been continuously updated.

[Lighting state of the game effect lamp]
In this embodiment, the lamps of each game effect lamp 9 are controlled by the output of brightness data to the LED driver by the performance control CPU 120 as described above. In this embodiment, terms such as "off", "almost off", "on", and "blinking" are used to refer to the lighting of each game effect lamp 9. As described above, the states of each game effect lamp 9 according to "on" and "blinking" are also referred to as "lighting states".

The term "off" includes a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is not lit and has a brightness of 0. The term "almost off" includes a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is lit but has a very low brightness (for example, the brightness "1" described below).

For example, when the RGB (Red, Green, Blue) data defined as the brightness data is "000", the corresponding LED is "off". Also, when the brightness data (RGB data) is "111", the corresponding LED is lit in white with extremely low brightness. In this embodiment, the state of an LED when the RGB data is "111" is sometimes referred to as "almost off" for convenience.

When the R (Red) data defined as the brightness data of the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 is "0", the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 are "off". Also, when the brightness data (R data) of the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 is "1", the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 are lit at an extremely low brightness. In this embodiment, the state of the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 when the R data is "1" is sometimes referred to as "almost off" for convenience.

When the W (White) data, which is defined as the brightness data of the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, is "0", the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 are "off". Also, when the brightness data (W data) of the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 is "1", the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 are lit at an extremely low brightness. In this embodiment, the state of the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 when the W data is "1" is sometimes referred to as "almost off" for convenience.

The term "lighting" includes a constant lighting state in which the game effect lamp 9 is always on, a wave lighting state in which the multiple lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 are switched from off to on in sequence, and a hazy lighting state in which the game effect lamp 9 is dimly lit while changing brightness. Specifically, "lighting" includes lighting of the game effect lamp 9 when the brightness data is any of "2" to "F." The brightness data is hexadecimal data that can be specified from "0" to "F," with "0" being no brightness, "1" being the lowest brightness, and "F" being the highest brightness.

The term "blinking" includes a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is in a state other than the above-mentioned "off" or "on", and in which the brightness of each lamp when it is on alternates between a first brightness and a second brightness higher than the first brightness. For example, "blinking" includes repeating on and off or almost off, and specifically, "blinking" includes switching over time between a case in which the brightness data is any of "2" to "F" and a case in which the brightness data is "0" or "1". As described above, in this embodiment, there is a hazy lighting as a lighting state of the lamp, but the hazy lighting is a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is dimly lit while changing its brightness, whereas the blinking is a state in which all of the lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 are repeatedly lit and off or almost off.

[Explanation of the game effect lamp]
Next, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 will be explained with reference to Figures 11-71 to 12-36.

[Regarding lamp control of play effect lamps using a brightness data table]
The performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table stored in the ROM 121 to control one or more of the lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 to light/blink/turn off through lamp control.

Specifically, the display control unit 123 sets the sub-variation time according to the variation pattern command transmitted from the CPU 103 mounted on the main board 11. The sub-variation time is a counter that is decremented by one for each frame (33 ms) of the image to be displayed. When the sub-variation time reaches the timing to start displaying corresponding to each part (for example, various displays in each part of the super reach performance), the display control unit 123 performs display control of the image display device 5 based on the image data (video data, animation data) stored in the ROM 121. The display control unit 123 sets an extension command (for example, extension command BXXX (where "X" is any alphanumeric character)) corresponding to the performance display (performance scene) to be displayed on the image display device 5 according to the display control it is performing, and transmits the extension command to the performance control CPU 120. Based on the extension command received from the display control unit 123, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the address of the parent table corresponding to the performance display (performance scene) for which display control is performed by the display control unit 123.

Figure 11-71 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a brightness data table. As shown in Figure 11-71, for example, when the display control unit 123 performs display control on the title display part of a low base weak reach A performance, it sends an extension command (B421) for specifying the title display part of the low base weak reach A performance to the performance control CPU 120. Based on the extension command received from the display control unit 123, the performance control CPU 120 identifies the address of the parent table (weak reach common title (parent)) corresponding to the title display part of the low base weak reach A performance.

The parent table stores information specifying the lamps (illuminated locations) that are the subject of lamp control among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9, information specifying the child table to be referenced during lamp control corresponding to the lamps that are the subject of lamp control, and information specifying the maximum time for which lamp control is performed. Note that the parent table stores only information about lamps that are the subject of lamp control, and does not store information about lamps that are not the subject of lamp control.

For example, in the parent table shown in Figure 11-74, frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12 (XD_A_LWU_1_B421), logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 (XD_A_LLOGO_B421), decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 (XD_A_LSLMP_B421), and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4 (XD_A_LATAK_B421) are specified as targets for lamp control. In addition, a child table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE is specified corresponding to frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and 600,000 ms (600,000/10) is specified as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed by this child table. A child table: XD_J_LLOGO_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE is specified corresponding to logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, and 600,000 ms (600,000/10) is specified as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed by this child table. is specified, and a child table: XD_J_LSLMP_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE is specified corresponding to the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, with 600,000 ms (600,000/10) specified as the maximum time for lamp control by this child table, and a child table: XD_J_LATAK_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE is specified corresponding to the attaka lamps LA1 to LA4, with 600,000 ms (600,000/10) specified as the maximum time for lamp control by this child table.

As shown in FIG. 11-71, when the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control of a lamp specified in a parent table using a specified child table, for example, if 600,000 ms (10 minutes) is specified as the maximum time, the performance control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the counter every 10 ms to time this 600,000 ms (10 minutes). In other words, the performance control CPU 120 performs the counter subtraction process 60,000 times to time 600,000 ms (10 minutes). The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control of the target lamp using the child table specified by the parent table until a maximum of 600,000 ms (10 minutes) has been timed. In addition, if the performance control CPU 120 receives a new extended command before timing out a maximum of 600,000 ms (10 minutes) after receiving an extended command, it will stop the lamp control in progress and use the child table specified by the parent table specified by the newly received extended command to perform lamp control of the target lamp. Note that it is not anticipated that a performance display (performance scene) will take 600,000 ms, but the maximum time for lamp control using the child table is set to 600,000 ms, which is significantly longer than the time required for the performance display (performance scene). Even if the performance control CPU 120 does not receive the next extended command for some reason, it can continue the lamp control in progress for a maximum of 600,000 ms (10 minutes).

In the child table, for each lamp (illuminated location) that is the subject of lamp control among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9, information specifying the grandchild table to be referenced during lamp control and information specifying the execution time for which the lamp control is performed are stored in the order in which each lamp control is performed.

For example, in the child table shown in Figure 11-75, corresponding to the frame LED LWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LED LWR2 to LWR12 (XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE), the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1 and the execution time for lamp control by this grandchild table: 500 ms, the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 and the grandchild table The execution time for lamp control by grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3 and this grandchild table: 230 ms, and the execution time for lamp control by grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 and this grandchild table: 600,000 ms are specified as the order in which lamp control by these grandchild tables is executed.

In addition, in the child table shown in Figure 11-75, corresponding to logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 (XD_J_LLOGO_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE), the following are specified in the order in which lamp control by the grandchild tables is executed: grandchild table: XD___LLOGO_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1 and execution time for lamp control by this grandchild table: 500 ms, grandchild table: XD___LLOGO_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 and execution time for lamp control by this grandchild table: 500 ms, grandchild table: XD___LLOGO_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3 and execution time for lamp control by this grandchild table: 230 ms, grandchild table: XD___LLOGO_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 and execution time for lamp control by this grandchild table: 600,000 ms.

In the child table shown in FIG. 11-75, the following execution times are specified for the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 (XD_J_LSLMP_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE): grandchild table: XD_J_LSLMP_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1 and lamp control by this grandchild table: execution time: 500 ms, grandchild table: XD_J_LSLMP_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 and lamp control by this grandchild table: execution time: 500 ms, grandchild table: XD_J_LSLMP_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3 and lamp control by this grandchild table: execution time: 230 ms, grandchild table: X_J_LSLMP_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 and lamp control by this grandchild table: execution time: 600,000 ms, in the order in which lamp control by these grandchild tables is performed.

In the child table shown in Figure 11-75, corresponding to the attack lamps LA1 to LA4 (XD_J_LATAK_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE), the following execution time is specified in the order in which lamp control is performed by the grandchild table: XD_J_LATAK_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1 and this grandchild table: execution time for lamp control by this grandchild table: XD_J_LATAK_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 and this grandchild table: execution time for lamp control by this grandchild table: XD_J_LATAK_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3 and this grandchild table: execution time for lamp control by this grandchild table: X_J_LATAK_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 and this grandchild table: execution time for lamp control by this grandchild table: 230 ms, and execution time for lamp control by the grandchild table: X_J_LATAK_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 and this grandchild table: 600,000 ms, in which lamp control by these grandchild tables is performed.

As shown in Figure 11-71, when the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control of a target lamp using a grandchild table specified by a child table, it performs lamp control of the target lamp using the grandchild table specified first, for example, times the execution time corresponding to this grandchild table, and then performs lamp control of the target lamp using the grandchild table specified next, and repeats this process for all specified grandchild tables in the specified order. For example, in the case of the child table shown in Figure 11-75, for frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, lamp control is performed using grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1 until 500 ms is first clocked, then lamp control is performed using grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 until 500 ms is clocked, then lamp control is performed using grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3 until 230 ms is clocked, and then lamp control is performed using grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 until 600,000 ms is clocked. It is not anticipated that a performance display (performance scene) will take 600,000 ms, but by setting the maximum time for lamp control using the last specified grandchild table to 600,000 ms, which is significantly longer than the time required for the performance display (performance scene), the performance control CPU 120 can continue the ongoing lamp control for up to 600,000 ms (10 minutes) even if it does not receive the next extended command for some reason.

In addition, in the child table, when frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12 are the targets of lamp control, one grandchild table, XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1, may be specified as the grandchild table corresponding to frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, as shown in Figure 11-75, or two grandchild tables, XD___LWU_1_KYOTSU_CHANCE_AKA1_1 and XD___LWU_2_KYOTSU_CHANCE_AKA1_1, may be specified as the grandchild table corresponding to frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, as shown in Figure 11-75. When one grandchild table is designated as the grandchild table corresponding to the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, the performance control CPU 120 uses this one grandchild table to perform the same lamp control for both the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12. On the other hand, when two grandchild tables are designated as the grandchild tables corresponding to the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, the performance control CPU 120 uses one of the two grandchild tables to perform lamp control for the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, and uses the other grandchild table to perform lamp control for the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12. Therefore, when one grandchild table is specified as the grandchild table corresponding to frame LEDLWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDLWR2-LWR12, common lamp control is performed for frame LEDLWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDLWR2-LWR12, whereas when two grandchild tables are specified, individual lamp control is performed for frame LEDLWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDLWR2-LWR12.

The grandchild table stores, for each lamp (illuminated location) that is the subject of lamp control among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9, brightness data that is referenced during lamp control and information that specifies the execution time for which the lamp control is performed, in the order in which each lamp control is performed.

For example, in the grandchild table shown in FIG. 11-76, the following are set for frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12 (XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1): luminance data: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, execution time for lamp control using this luminance data: 100 ms, luminance data: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, execution time for lamp control using this luminance data: 120 ms, luminance data: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120 ms, brightness data: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120 ms, brightness data: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 40 ms are specified as the order in which lamp control using this brightness data is performed.

In the grandchild table shown in Figure 11-76, the following are specified for logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 (XD___LLOGO_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1): brightness data: 0x0000, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 100 ms, brightness data: 0xAAAA, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120 ms, brightness data: 0xAAAA, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120 ms, brightness data: 0xAAAA, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120 ms, brightness data: 0xAAAA, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120 ms, brightness data: 0xAAAA, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 40 ms.

In the grandchild table shown in Figure 11-76, the following are specified for decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 (XD___LSLMP_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1): brightness data: 0x00000, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 100 ms, brightness data: 0x00000, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120 ms, brightness data: 0x66666, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120 ms, brightness data: 0x66666, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 120 ms, brightness data: 0x66666, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 40 ms.

In the grandchild table shown in Figure 11-76, the following are specified for the Attacka lamps LA1 to LA4 (XD___LATAK_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1): luminance data: 0x000000, 0x000000, execution time for lamp control using this luminance data: 100 ms, luminance data: 0x000000, 0x000000, execution time for lamp control using this luminance data: 120 ms, luminance data: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, execution time for lamp control using this luminance data: 120 ms, luminance data: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, execution time for lamp control using this luminance data: 120 ms, luminance data: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, execution time for lamp control using this luminance data: 120 ms, luminance data: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, execution time for lamp control using this luminance data: 40 ms.

In the brightness data of the grandchild table frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and LEDLWR2 to LWR12 (XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1) shown in Figure 11-76, the values in the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL1, the values in the lowest 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL2 and LWR2, the values in the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL3 and LWR3, and the values in the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL4 and LWR4. The values of the lowest 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL4 and LWR4, the values of the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL5 and LWR5, the values of the lowest 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL6 and LWR6, the values of the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 7 and 8 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL7 and LWR7, and the values of the lowest 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 7 and 8 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL8 and LWR8.

In addition, as shown in Figure 11-81, when separate grandchild tables are specified for frame LED LWL1 to LWL12 (XD___LWU_1_KYOTSU_CHANCE_AKA1_1) and frame LED LWR2 to LWR12 (XD___LWU_2_KYOTSU_CHANCE_AKA1_1), in the brightness data for frame LED LWL1 to LWL12 (XD___LWU_1_KYOTSU_CHANCE_AKA1_1), the values of the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 represent the RGB values of frame LED LWL1. the first to third lowest digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL2, the fourth to sixth lowest digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL3, the first to third lowest digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL4, the fourth to sixth lowest digits of the data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL5, and the first to third lowest digits of the data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL6; and The values of the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 7 and 8 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL7, and the values of the lowest 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 7 and 8 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWL8. In the luminance data of frame LEDLWR2 to LWR12 (XD___LWU_2_KYOTSU_CHANCE_AKA1_1), the values of the lowest 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to number 2 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWR2, and the values of the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWR3. The values of the lowest digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWR4, the values of the lowest digits of the data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWR5, the values of the lowest digits of the data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWR6, the values of the lowest digits of the data corresponding to numbers 7 and 8 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWR7, and the values of the lowest digits of the data corresponding to numbers 7 and 8 indicate the RGB values of frame LEDLWR8.

In addition, in the brightness data of logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 (XD_J_LLOGO_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE) in the grandchild table shown in Figure 11-76, the value in the fourth lowest digit indicates the R (Red) value of logo LED LL1, the value in the third lowest digit indicates the R value of logo LED LL2, the value in the second lowest digit indicates the R value of logo LED LL3, and the value in the fourth lowest digit indicates the R value of logo LED LL4.

In addition, in the brightness data of decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 (XD_J_LSLMP_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE) in the grandchild table shown in Figure 11-76, the value in the fourth lowest digit indicates the W (White) value of decorative LED LS1, the value in the third lowest digit indicates the W value of decorative LED LS2, the value in the second lowest digit indicates the W value of decorative LED LS3, and the value in the fourth lowest digit indicates the W value of decorative LED LS4.

In the brightness data of the attacca lamps LA1 to LA4 (XD_J_LATAK_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE) in the grandchild table shown in Figure 11-76, the values in the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of attacca lamp LA1, the values in the lowest 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of attacca lamp LA2, the values in the lowest 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of attacca lamp LA3, and the values in the lowest 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of attacca lamp LA4.

The brightness data value corresponds to the current value output to the lamp that is the target of lamp control. The frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, and Attacka Lamps LA1-LA4 are composed of LEDs consisting of three elements, "R", "G", and "B", and the brightness data for each element corresponds to the current value output to each element. Specifically, the brightness data has 16 current values from 0 to F, and when the brightness data is 0, the current value is the minimum value (for example, 0), and when the brightness data is F, the current value is the maximum value. For example, when the brightness data of "A" is output to the "R" element, a current corresponding to the brightness data of "A" flows through the "R" element, when the brightness data of "1" is output to the "G" element, a current corresponding to the brightness data of "1" flows through the "G" element, and when the brightness data of "F" is output to the "G" element, a current corresponding to the brightness data of "F" flows through the "G" element.

The frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, and Attacca lamps LA1-LA4 can emit light in various colors by passing a current corresponding to brightness data through each RGB element. The frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, and Attacca lamps LA1-LA4 can also be lit in colors corresponding to each performance or character by emitting light based on brightness data. As an example, when data "F00" is output from an LED lamp to an LED as brightness data, a current corresponding to that data flows, causing the LED to light up in red. When data "F0F" is output from an LED lamp to an LED as brightness data, a current corresponding to that data flows, causing the LED to light up in magenta. When data "FF0" is output from an LED lamp to an LED as brightness data, causing a current corresponding to that data to flow, causing the LED to light up in yellow.

The logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 can emit red light with a brightness corresponding to the brightness data by passing a current corresponding to the brightness data through the R (Red) element, and the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 can emit white light with a brightness corresponding to the brightness data by passing a current corresponding to the brightness data evenly through the three "R", "G", and "B" elements.

As shown in Figure 11-71, when the performance control CPU 120 controls the target lamp by referring to the brightness data in the grandchild table, it performs the process of, for example, outputting the first specified brightness data to the LED driver, timing the execution time corresponding to this brightness data, and then outputting the next specified brightness data to the LED driver, for all specified brightness data, in the specified order. For example, in the case of the child table shown in FIG. 11-75, for frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, the following luminance data is output to the LED driver until 100 ms is first clocked: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000. Then, the following luminance data is output to the LED driver until 120 ms is clocked: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000. The CPU 120 outputs 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000 to the LED driver, and then outputs the following brightness data to the LED driver until 120 ms is clocked: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, and 0x5AA5AA. The CPU 120 then outputs 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA to the LED driver until 40 ms is clocked. The LED driver then passes a current corresponding to the received brightness data through the specified LED based on the received brightness data. This allows the performance control CPU 120 to control each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 via the LED driver.

As described above, the performance control CPU 120 has timers corresponding to each of the parent table, child table, and grandchild table, and performs lamp control based on the parent table, child table, and grandchild table while decrementing the timers at regular intervals (e.g., 10 ms intervals).

Specifically, the performance control CPU 120 starts outputting brightness data from the first specified location in the grandchild table, and when it has completed outputting brightness data up to the last specified location in the grandchild table, if the timer value corresponding to the child table specifying that grandchild table still remains, it starts outputting brightness data again from the first specified location in the grandchild table. On the other hand, if the timer value corresponding to the child table specifying that grandchild table becomes 0 while the performance control CPU 120 is outputting brightness data based on the grandchild table, it sets a timer corresponding to another child table specified by the parent table specifying that child table, and starts outputting brightness data from the first specified location in the grandchild table specified by that child table. This switches the grandchild table, and lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table after the switch.

The timer management of child tables by the performance control CPU 120 will be explained with reference to the figure. Figure 11-72 is a diagram to explain an example of lamp control using a grandchild table with timer management of a child table. As shown in Figure 11-72, in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE, 500 ms is specified as the time when lamp control is first performed for frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, and the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1 is specified, 500 ms is specified as the time when lamp control is second performed and the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 is specified, 230 ms is specified as the time when lamp control is third performed and the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3 is specified, and 600,000 ms is specified as the time when lamp control is fourth performed and the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 is specified. In the second and fourth grandchild tables: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2, the brightness data (RGB data) for frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 is "0x5AA499, 0x388499, 0x5AA499, 0x388499, 0x5AA499, 0x388499", "0x4995AA, 0x499388, 0x4995AA, 0x499388, 0x4995AA, 0x499388", "0x388499, 0x5AA499, 0x388499, 0x5AA499, 0x388499, 0x5AA499", "0x499388, 0x4995AA, It is specified that the data should be executed at 100 ms intervals in the order "0x499388, 0x4995AA, 0x499388, 0x4995AA". For ease of explanation, the luminance data in the first 100 ms will be called data 1, the luminance data in the second 100 ms will be called data 2, the luminance data in the third 100 ms will be called data 3, and the luminance data in the fourth 100 ms will be called data 4.

When the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control for the second specified grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 of the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE, it times the specified 500 ms by subtracting 1 from the counter every 10 ms, and outputs the brightness data of data 1, data 2, data 3, and data 4 to the LED driver at 100 ms intervals based on: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 until the time reaches 500 ms. However, after data 1 to data 4 have been output, if the time has not yet reached 500 ms, it again outputs the brightness data to the LED driver in order, starting from the first data 1. When the timer reaches 500 ms, the performance control CPU 120 stops outputting brightness data based on the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2, and starts outputting brightness data based on the next grandchild table specified by the child table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3.

In addition, when the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control for the fourth specified grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 of the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE, it times the specified 600,000 ms by subtracting 1 from the counter every 10 ms, and outputs the brightness data of data 1, data 2, data 3, and data 4 to the LED driver at 100 ms intervals based on: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 until the time reaches 600,000 ms. However, after data 1 to data 4 have been output, if the time has not yet reached 600,000 ms, it again outputs the brightness data to the LED driver in order, starting from the first data 1. When the time reaches 600,000 ms, the performance control CPU 120 stops outputting brightness data based on the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2. At this time, because the child table does not specify a next grandchild table, it starts outputting brightness data based on the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1, which was specified first in the child table. However, unless some abnormality occurs, the time will not reach 600,000 ms, and by receiving the next extension command from the display control unit 123 before the time reaches 600,000 ms, it will start outputting brightness data based on the parent table, child table, and grandchild table specified by the newly received extension command.

As shown in the parent table in Figure 11-74, the maximum time for lamp control by a child table is specified as 600,000 ms (10 minutes), and the 10-minute data in this parent table serves as a measure against malfunctions. In other words, the performance control CPU 120 switches parent tables to control the lamps based on the performance control commands from the main board 11, but even if some malfunction occurs while lamp control is being performed based on a certain parent table and the performance control CPU 120 does not receive a performance control command from the main board 11, lamp control is performed based on the same parent table for 10 minutes, so it is possible to prevent different lamp controls from being performed one after another from the point where the malfunction occurred.

In addition, as in the child table shown in Figure 11-75, the execution time for lamp control by the last-specified grandchild table is specified as 600,000 ms (10 minutes). The 10-minute data in this type of child table serves to prevent lamp control from being performed again by the first-specified grandchild table of the child table when the value of the timer corresponding to the child table becomes 0, because the parent table's timer is still remaining.

In addition, in the grandchild table, 600,000 ms (10 minutes) may be specified as the execution time of the lamp control that references the last specified brightness data. With this configuration, the 10-minute data in the brightness data serves to prevent lamp control from being performed again using the brightness data specified at the beginning of the grandchild table when the timer corresponding to the grandchild table has reached 0, due to the timer of the child table still remaining. In this way, by setting the brightness data specified at the end of the grandchild table to 10-minute data, the lamp is maintained at a fixed light emission, preventing the problem of continuous changes in the lamp lighting. Furthermore, by specifying brightness data spanning 600,000 ms (10 minutes) at the end of the grandchild table specified at the end of the child table, the problem of continuous changes in the lamp lighting can be more effectively prevented.

[Brightness data table used for Super Reach performance 1]
FIG. 11-73 is a diagram showing a brightness data table used in the super reach performance.

The execution time of the title display part is the same for the low base weak reach A performance and the low base weak reach B performance, and as shown in FIG. 11-73, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 in the title display part using a common weak reach common title that defines the lighting mode of the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances as a brightness data table, whether the low base weak reach A performance or the low base weak reach B performance is executed.

In addition, when the performance control CPU 120 executes the low base weak reach A and B performances, it executes a title color change performance in the title display part, and when changing the title characters to red, it controls the lamp of the game effect lamp 9 using the common title common chance up red, which defines the light emission mode when changing the title characters to red in the title color change performance as a brightness data table, whether it is the title display part of the low base weak reach A performance or the title display part of the low base weak reach B performance, and when it executes the title color change performance in the title display part and changes the title characters to gold, it controls the lamp of the game effect lamp 9 using the common title common chance up gold, which defines the light emission mode when changing the title characters to gold in the title color change performance as a brightness data table, whether it is the title display part of the low base weak reach A performance or the title display part of the low base weak reach B performance.

The execution time of the introduction part differs between the low base weak reach A performance and the low base weak reach B performance, and as shown in Figure 11-73, when a low base weak reach A performance is executed, in the introduction part, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a weak reach system weak reach A introduction in which the light emission mode specific to the introduction part of the low base weak reach A performance is defined as a brightness data table, and when a low base weak reach B performance is executed, in the introduction part, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a weak reach system weak reach B introduction in which the light emission mode specific to the introduction part of the low base weak reach B performance is defined as a brightness data table.

The execution time of the title display part is the same for the low base strong reach A performance, the low base strong reach B performance, and the low base strong reach C performance, and as shown in FIG. 11-73, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 in the title display part using a common strong reach common title that defines the lighting mode of the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C performances as a brightness data table, whether it is executing the low base strong reach A performance, the low base strong reach B performance, or the low base strong reach C performance.

The execution time of the introduction part differs between the low base strong reach A performance, the low base strong reach B performance, and the low base strong reach C performance. As shown in FIG. 11-73, when a low base strong reach A performance is executed, in the introduction part, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a strong reach system strong reach A introduction in which the light emission mode specific to the introduction part of the low base strong reach A performance is defined as a brightness data table. When a low base strong reach B performance is executed, in the introduction part, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a strong reach system strong reach B introduction in which the light emission mode specific to the introduction part of the low base strong reach B performance is defined as a brightness data table. In the introduction part, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a strong reach system strong reach C introduction in which the light emission mode specific to the introduction part of the low base strong reach C performance is defined as a brightness data table.

As shown in FIG. 11-73, when executing a low-base strongest reach presentation, the presentation control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 in the title display part and introduction part using a strongest reach system strongest reach title introduction that defines a series of light emission patterns from the title display part to the introduction part of the low-base strongest reach presentation as a brightness data table.

The execution time of the title display part is the same for high base reach A performance, high base reach B performance, high base reach C performance, and high base reach D performance, and as shown in FIG. 11-73, the performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp of the game effect lamp 9 in the title display part using a common high base reach series common title which defines the lighting mode of the title display part of the high base reach A to D performances as a brightness data table, whether it is executing a high base reach A performance, a high base reach B performance, a high base reach C performance, or a high base reach D performance.

The execution time of the title display part is the same for the high base reach A performance, high base reach B performance, high base reach C performance, and high base reach D performance, but as shown in Figure 11-73, when a high base reach A performance is executed, in the introduction part, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a high base reach type reach A introduction in which the lighting mode specific to the introduction part of the high base reach A performance is defined as a brightness data table, and when a high base reach B performance is executed, in the introduction part, the lighting mode specific to the introduction part of the high base reach B performance is defined as a brightness data table. The lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a high base reach-type reach B introduction that defines the light emission mode specific to the introduction part of the high base reach C presentation as a brightness data table, and when a high base reach C presentation is executed, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a high base reach-type reach C introduction that defines the light emission mode specific to the introduction part of the high base reach C presentation as a brightness data table, and when a high base reach D presentation is executed, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a high base reach-type reach D introduction that defines the light emission mode specific to the introduction part of the high base reach D presentation as a brightness data table.

In this way, whether a low base weak reach A performance is executed or a low base weak reach B performance is executed, the title display part uses a common weak reach-type common title as the brightness data table to control the lamp of the game effect lamp 9, so the storage capacity of the brightness data table can be saved, while in the introduction part, whether a low base weak reach A performance is executed or a low base weak reach B performance is executed, the lamp of the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a separate weak reach-type weak reach A introduction and weak reach-type weak reach B introduction, respectively, so that in the introduction part of the low base weak reach A performance and the low base weak reach B performance, it is possible to make the game effect lamp 9 emit light in different modes depending on the performance content of each, and the performance effect in the introduction part until the performance result is introduced in the super reach performance can be enhanced.

In this embodiment, whether a low base weak reach A performance is executed or a low base weak reach B performance is executed, the title display part uses a common weak reach common title as a brightness data table to control the lamp of the game effect lamp 9. However, the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances includes a weak reach title start which defines a unique lighting pattern for the title start period from when part of the title characters are displayed until they are displayed in a fixed position, and a weak reach title display which defines a unique lighting pattern after the title display period in which the title characters are displayed in a fixed position. When the display control unit 123 starts display control of the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, By sending an extended command specifying the start of a reach-type title, the performance control CPU 120 uses the brightness data table: weak reach-type title start to control the lamps of frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and attacka lamps LA1 to LA4, and when the display control unit 123 starts display control of the title display period of the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, by sending an extended command specifying the weak reach-type title display, the performance control CPU 120 may use the brightness data table: weak reach-type title display to control the lamps of frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and attacka lamps LA1 to LA4. Also, in such a configuration, depending on whether it is a low base weak reach A performance or a low base weak reach B performance, the brightness data table: either the start of a weak reach title or the display of a weak reach title may be a common brightness data table, and the other may be a separate brightness data table with individual contents set for each.

In addition, when executing the low base weak reach A or B performance, when executing a title color change performance in the title display part, whether it is a low base weak reach A performance or a low base weak reach B performance, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a common title common chance up red (title common chance up gold) as the brightness data table, so the storage capacity of the brightness data table can be saved.

In addition, whether a low base strong reach A performance is executed, whether a low base strong reach B performance is executed, or whether a low base strong reach C performance is executed, in the title display part, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a common strong reach common title as the brightness data table, so that the storage capacity of the brightness data table can be saved. On the other hand, in the introduction part, when a low base strong reach A performance is executed, whether a low base strong reach B performance is executed, or whether a low base strong reach C performance is executed, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a separate strong reach A system strong reach introduction, strong reach B system strong reach introduction, or strong reach C system strong reach introduction, so that in the introduction part of the low base strong reach A performance, low base strong reach B performance, and low base strong reach C performance, it is possible to make the game effect lamp 9 emit light in different modes according to the respective performance contents, and the performance effect in the introduction part until the performance result is introduced in the super reach performance can be enhanced.

In this embodiment, whether a low base strong reach A performance is executed, a low base strong reach B performance is executed, or a low base strong reach C performance is executed, the title display part uses a common strong reach common title as a brightness data table to control the lamp of the game effect lamp 9. Among the title display parts of the low base strong reach A to C performances, there is a strong reach title start which defines a unique lighting pattern for the prologue display period and the title start period from when a part of the title characters are displayed until they are displayed in a fixed position, and a strong reach title display which defines a unique lighting pattern after the title display period in which the title characters are displayed in a fixed position, and the display control unit 123 controls the title display parts of the low base strong reach A to C performances. When display control of the strong base weak reach A to C performance is started, the performance control CPU 120 may use the brightness data table: strong reach title start to send an extended command specifying the start of a strong reach title, so that the performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps of frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4, and when the display control unit 123 starts display control of the title display period of the title display part of the strong base weak reach A to C performance, the performance control CPU 120 may use the brightness data table: strong reach title display to control the lamps of frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4. Also, in such a configuration, depending on whether it is a low base strong reach A performance, a low base strong reach B performance, or a low base strong reach C performance, the brightness data table: either the start of a strong reach title or the display of a strong reach title may be a common brightness data table, and the other may be a separate brightness data table with individual contents set for each.

In addition, the title display parts of the low base strong reach A to C performances include a strong reach prologue that defines a unique lighting pattern for the prologue display period, a strong reach title start that defines a unique lighting pattern for the title start period from when part of the title characters are displayed until they are displayed in a fixed position, and a strong reach title display that defines a unique lighting pattern after the title display period in which the title characters are displayed in a fixed position. When the display control unit 123 starts display control of the title display parts of the low base strong reach A to C performances, it sends an extension command that specifies the strong reach prologue, and the performance control CPU 120 uses the brightness data table: strong reach prologue to control the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4, and the display control unit 123 However, by sending an extended command specifying a strong reach title start when starting display control of the title start period of the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C performance, the performance control CPU 120 can control the lamps of frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and attacka lamps LA1 to LA4 using the brightness data table: strong reach title start, and by sending an extended command specifying a strong reach title display when the display control unit 123 starts display control of the title display period of the title display part of the strong base weak reach A to C performance, the performance control CPU 120 can control the lamps of frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and attacka lamps LA1 to LA4 using the brightness data table: strong reach title display. Also, in such a configuration, depending on whether it is a low base strong reach A performance, a low base strong reach B performance, or a low base strong reach C performance, the brightness data table: strong reach prologue, strong reach title start, or strong reach title display may be a common brightness data table for at least one table, and the remaining tables may be separate brightness data tables with individual contents set for each.

In addition, the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C performance includes a strong reach prologue that defines a unique lighting pattern during the prologue display period, and a strong reach title display that defines a unique lighting pattern after the title start period from when part of the title characters are displayed until they are displayed in a fixed position. When the display control unit 123 starts display control of the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C performance, it sends an extension command that specifies the strong reach prologue, and the performance control CPU 120 uses the brightness data table: strong reach prologue. When the display control unit 123 starts display control of the title start period of the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C performance, it transmits an extended command specifying the strong reach title display, so that the performance control CPU 120 can control the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12 and the attacca lamps LA1 to LA4 using the brightness data table: strong reach title display. Also, in such a configuration, depending on whether it is a low base strong reach A performance, a low base strong reach B performance, or a low base strong reach C performance, the brightness data table: strong reach prologue, strong reach title display can be a common brightness data table for one of the brightness data tables, and a separate brightness data table with individual contents set for the other.

In addition, whether a high base reach A performance is executed, whether a high base reach B performance is executed, whether a high base reach C performance is executed, or whether a high base reach D performance is executed, in the title display part, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a common high base reach common title as the brightness data table, so that the storage capacity of the brightness data table can be saved. On the other hand, in the introduction part, when a high base reach A performance is executed, whether a high base reach B performance is executed, whether a high base reach C performance is executed, or whether a high base reach D performance is executed, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a separate high base reach A performance introduction, high base reach B performance introduction, high base reach C performance introduction, or high base reach D performance introduction, so that in the introduction part of the high base reach A performance, high base reach B performance, high base reach C performance, or high base reach D performance, it is possible to make the game effect lamp 9 have different light emission modes according to the respective performance contents, and the performance effect in the introduction part until the performance result is introduced in the super reach performance can be enhanced.

In this embodiment, whether a high base reach A performance is executed, a high base reach B performance is executed, a high base reach C performance is executed, or a high base reach D performance is executed, the title display part is configured to use a common high base reach series common title as a brightness data table to control the lamp of the game effect lamp 9. Among the title display parts of the high base reach A to D performances, there are a high base reach series title start which defines a unique lighting pattern for the title start period from when a part of the title characters are displayed until they are displayed in a fixed position, and a high base reach series title display which defines a unique lighting pattern after the title display period in which the title characters are displayed in a fixed position, and the display control unit 123 controls the title display parts of the high base reach A to D performances. When starting display control of the title display period of the title display part of the high base reach A to D performances, the display control unit 123 may send an extended command specifying the high base reach title display, so that the performance control CPU 120 can control the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and the attacca lamps LA1 to LA4 using the brightness data table: high base reach title display.When starting display control of the title display period of the title display part of the high base reach A to D performances, the display control unit 123 may send an extended command specifying the high base reach title display, so that the performance control CPU 120 can control the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and the attacca lamps LA1 to LA4 using the brightness data table: high base reach title display. Also, in such a configuration, depending on whether it is a high base reach A performance, a high base reach B performance, a high base reach C performance, or a high base reach D performance, the brightness data table: either the high base reach title start or the high base reach title display may be a common brightness data table, and the other may be a separate brightness data table with individual contents set for each.

In addition, when a low-base strongest reach performance in which the execution time of the title display part is not shared with other super reach performances is executed, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a strongest reach series strongest reach title introduction in the title display part and introduction part, which defines a series of light emission patterns from the title display part to the introduction part of the low-base strongest reach performance as a brightness data table, so the number of brightness data tables can be reduced.

In this embodiment, whether a low base weak reach A performance is executed or a low base weak reach B performance is executed, the title display part uses a common weak reach common title as the brightness data table to control the lamp of the game effect lamp 9. However, when a low base weak reach A performance is executed, the title display part uses a weak reach A title that defines the light emission mode specific to the title display part of the low base weak reach A performance as the brightness data table of the title display part to control the lamp of the game effect lamp 9. When a low base weak reach B performance is executed, the title display part uses a weak reach B title that defines the light emission mode specific to the title display part of the low base weak reach B performance as the brightness data table of the title display part to control the lamp of the game effect lamp 9. This makes it possible to set the game effect lamp 9 to a different light emission mode depending on the content of each performance in the title display part of the low base weak reach A performance and the low base weak reach B performance, thereby enhancing the performance effect in the title display part in the super reach performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, whether a low base strong reach A performance is executed, a low base strong reach B performance is executed, or a low base strong reach C performance is executed, the title display part is configured to use a common strong reach system common title as the brightness data table to control the lamp of the game effect lamp 9. When a low base strong reach A performance is executed, the title display part is configured to use a strong reach system strong reach A title that defines the lighting mode specific to the title display part of the low base strong reach A performance as the brightness data table of the title display part to control the lamp of the game effect lamp 9, and when a low base strong reach B performance is executed, the title display part is configured to use a strong reach system strong reach A title that defines the lighting mode specific to the title display part of the low base strong reach B performance as the brightness data table of the title display part. When performing a low base strong reach C performance, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 may be performed using a strong reach series strong reach B title that defines a lighting pattern specific to the title display part of the low base strong reach C performance as the brightness data table of the title display part, and the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 may be performed using a strong reach series strong reach C title that defines a lighting pattern specific to the title display part of the low base strong reach C performance. This makes it possible to set the game effect lamp 9 to a different lighting pattern according to the content of each performance in the title display parts of the low base strong reach A performance, low base strong reach B performance, and low base strong reach C performance, and enhances the performance effect in the title display part in the super reach performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, whether a high base reach A performance is executed, a high base reach B performance is executed, a high base reach C performance is executed, or a high base reach D performance is executed, the title display part is configured to use a common high base reach series common title as a brightness data table to control the lamp of the game effect lamp 9; however, when a high base reach A performance is executed, the lamp of the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a high base reach series reach A title that defines the light emission mode specific to the title display part of the high base reach A performance as the brightness data table of the title display part, and when a high base reach B performance is executed, the lamp of the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a high base reach series reach B title that defines the light emission mode specific to the title display part of the high base reach B performance as the brightness data table of the title display part. When a high base reach C performance is executed, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 may be performed using a high base reach series reach C title in which the lighting mode specific to the title display part of the high base reach C performance is defined as the brightness data table of the title display part, and when a high base reach D performance is executed, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 may be performed using a high base reach series reach D title in which the lighting mode specific to the title display part of the high base reach D performance is defined as the brightness data table of the title display part. This makes it possible to set the game effect lamp 9 to a different lighting mode depending on the content of each performance in the title display parts of the high base reach A performance, high base reach B performance, high base reach C performance, and high base reach D performance, thereby enhancing the performance effect in the title display part in the super reach performance.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a low base strongest reach performance is executed, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a strongest reach system strongest reach title introduction in the title display part and introduction part, which defines a series of light emission modes from the title display part to the introduction part of the low base strongest reach performance as a brightness data table. However, when a low base strongest reach performance is executed, the game effect lamp 9 may be controlled using a strongest reach system strongest reach title in which a light emission mode specific to the title display part of the low base strongest reach performance is defined as a brightness data table for the title display part, and the game effect lamp 9 may be controlled using a strongest reach system strongest reach introduction in which a light emission mode specific to the introduction part of the low base strongest reach performance is defined as a brightness data table for the introduction part.

In addition, in this embodiment, when low base weak reach A and B performances are executed, the lamp of the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a common weak reach system common title as the brightness data table of the title display part, and the lamp of the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the weak reach system weak reach A introduction and the weak reach system weak reach B introduction as the brightness data table of the introduction part, respectively. However, when a low base weak reach A performance is executed, the lamp of the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the weak reach system weak reach A title introduction that defines a series of light emission modes from the title display part to the introduction part of the low base weak reach A as the brightness data table in the title display part and the introduction part, and when a low base weak reach B performance is executed, the lamp of the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the weak reach system weak reach B title introduction that defines a series of light emission modes from the title display part to the introduction part of the low base weak reach B as the brightness data table in the title display part and the introduction part, and by doing so, the number of brightness data tables can be reduced.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a low base strong reach A to C performance is executed, the lamp of the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a common strong reach system common title as the brightness data table of the title display part, and the lamp of the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, and strong reach system strong reach C introduction as the brightness data table of the introduction part, respectively. However, when a low base strong reach A performance is executed, in the title display part and introduction part, the lamp of the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using strong reach system strong reach A title introduction, which defines a series of light emission modes from the title display part to the introduction part of the low base strong reach A performance, as the brightness data table, and when a low base strong reach B performance is executed, in the title display part and introduction part, the lamp of the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using strong reach system strong reach B title introduction, which defines a series of light emission modes from the title display part to the introduction part of the low base strong reach B performance, as the brightness data table. When a low base strong reach C performance is executed, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a strong reach system strong reach B title introduction that defines a series of light emission modes from the title display part to the introduction part as a brightness data table in the title display part and introduction part, and when a low base strong reach D performance is executed, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a strong reach system strong reach D title introduction that defines a series of light emission modes from the title display part to the introduction part of the low base strong reach D performance as a brightness data table in the title display part and introduction part, and by doing so, the number of brightness data tables can be reduced.

In addition, in this embodiment, when high base reach A to D performances are executed, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a common high base reach common title as the brightness data table of the title display part, and the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using high base reach reach A introduction, high base reach reach B introduction, high base reach reach C introduction, and high base reach reach D introduction as the brightness data table of the introduction part, respectively. When a high base reach A performance is executed, in the title display part and introduction part, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a high base reach reach A title introduction, which defines a series of light emission modes from the title display part to the introduction part of the high base reach A performance, as the brightness data table, and when a high base reach B performance is executed, in the title display part and introduction part, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a high base reach B title introduction, which defines a series of light emission modes from the title display part to the introduction part of the high base reach A performance, as the brightness data table. The lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a high base reach-type reach B title introduction that defines a series of light emission modes from the title display part to the introduction part of the base reach B performance, and when a high base reach C performance is executed, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a high base reach-type reach C title introduction that defines a series of light emission modes from the title display part to the introduction part of the high base reach C performance as a brightness data table in the title display part and introduction part, and when a high base reach D performance is executed, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 is performed using a high base reach-type reach D title introduction that defines a series of light emission modes from the title display part to the introduction part of the high base reach D performance as a brightness data table in the title display part and introduction part, and by doing so, the number of brightness data tables can be reduced.

[Brightness data table used for Super Reach performance 2]
The following describes the settings of the brightness data table used in the super reach performance. As described above, the brightness data table is composed of a parent table, a child table, and a grandchild table, but in the brightness data table described below, only some of the parent table, child table, and grandchild table are shown, and the other tables may be omitted.

[Brightness data table used in the title display part of low base weak reach A and B effects]
Figure 11-74 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the brightness data table: weak reach common title used when the display control unit 123 receives the extended command: B421 sent when performing display control of the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B performances, Figure 11-75 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the brightness data table: weak reach common title, and Figures 11-76 to 11-78 are diagrams showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the brightness data table: weak reach common title.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the extension command B421, it specifies the parent table of the weak reach common title based on the extension command B421. As shown in FIG. 11-74, the parent table of the weak reach common title is set to perform lamp control for frame LED LWL1-LWL12 and frame LED LWR2-LWR12 for a maximum of 600,000 ms by referring to the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE, and when the performance control CPU 120 receives the extension command B421, it performs lamp control for frame LED LWL1-LWL12 and frame LED LWR2-LWR12 by referring to the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE specified by the parent table of the weak reach common title.

Child table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE contains the grandchild tables and execution times for frames LEDLWL1 to LWL12 and frames LEDLWR2 to LWR12 in the order of reference, as shown in Figure 11-75.

The performance control CPU 120 first controls the lamps by referencing the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1 (Figure 11-76) that is set first in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE. As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12 are turned off for 340 ms, and then the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12 are lit in blue for 160 ms.

Then, when the performance control CPU 120 has timed 500 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_1, it performs lamp control by referencing the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 (Figure 11-77), which is the second grandchild table set in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE. As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12 light up in a blue color, and the brightness changes every 100 ms.

Then, when the performance control CPU 120 has timed 500 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2, it performs lamp control by referencing the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3 (Figure 11-78) that is set third in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE. As a result, some of the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12 are turned off and the rest are lit in blue, with the parts that are turned off and the parts that are lit changing every 30 ms or 20 ms.

Then, when the performance control CPU 120 has timed 230 ms, which is the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_3, it performs lamp control by referencing the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE1_2 (Figure 11-77), which is set as the fourth grandchild table in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_JAKU_KYOTU_TYTLE. As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12 light up in a blue color, and the brightness changes every 100 ms.

Then, when the display control unit 123 receives an extension command (B400 or B40F) sent when controlling the display of the introductory part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, the performance control CPU 120 switches to lamp control using a brightness data table based on the newly received extension command. As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12 will continue to light up in a blue-based color and change brightness every 100 ms until a new extension command is received, and when a new extension command is received, they will switch to a lighting mode based on the received extension command.

As shown in Figure 11-74, the parent table for weak reach common titles has child tables set up that also refer to the logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4. These child tables also have grandchild tables etc. set up in order of execution to refer to, and these grandchild tables also have brightness data etc. set up in order of execution to refer to. The performance control CPU 120 refers to the child table specified in the parent table, the grandchild table specified in the child table, and the brightness data specified in the grandchild table to control the logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 in the same procedure as above.

As a result, the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 will change from off to red until 500 ms have elapsed, then stay red until 500 ms have elapsed, with the brightness changing every 100 ms, then go from red to almost off until 230 ms have elapsed, then stay red again, and continue to stay red and change brightness every 100 ms until a new extended command is received.

In addition, the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 change from an off state to white until 500 ms have passed, then stay white until 500 ms have passed, and the brightness changes every 100 ms, then go from white to a nearly off state until 230 ms have passed, and then stay white again, and continue to stay white and change brightness every 100 ms until a new extended command is received.

The attacca lamps LA1 to LA4 will change from off to blue until 500 ms have elapsed, then stay lit in blue until 500 ms have elapsed, and the brightness will change every 100 ms, then go from blue to almost off until 230 ms have elapsed, and then stay lit in blue again, and the brightness will continue to change every 100 ms until a new extended command is received.

As shown in Figure 11-152 (A), in the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B performances, the period from the start is the title start period of 500 sm, followed by the title display period of 2200 ms, followed by the title end period of 300 ms. Therefore, in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, lamp control is performed based on the brightness data table: weak reach common title, so that in the title start period (the period from the start of the title display part to 500 ms elapsed) in which the title characters move from the left side of the display area toward their fixed position, the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, and the attacca lamps LA1-LA4 change from an off state to blue, the logo LEDs LL1-LL4 change from an off state to red, and the decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 change from an off state to white (lamp control based on the grandchild table (1) specified by the child table in Figure 11-75). In addition, during the title display period when the title characters remain stationary in a fixed position and the title end period (the period from the start of the title display period to the end of the title display part) when the title characters move from the fixed position to the right, the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12 and the attacca lamps LA1 to LA4 are lit in a blue color until 500 ms have elapsed, and the brightness changes every 100 ms (lamp control by grandchild table (2) specified by the child table in Figure 11-75), and then by the time 230 ms have elapsed, they go from blue to a nearly off state and then light up in blue again (lamp control by grandchild table (3) specified by the child table in Figure 11-75), and then they are lit in a blue color again, and the state of the brightness changing every 100 ms continues (lamp control by grandchild table (4) specified by the child table in Figure 11-75). In addition, the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 will light up red until 500 ms have elapsed, and the brightness will change every 100 ms (lamp control by grandchild table (2) specified by the child table in Figure 11-75), and then within 230 ms, they will go from red to almost off, and then light up red again (lamp control by grandchild table (3) specified by the child table in Figure 11-75), and then they will light up red again, and the state of the brightness changing every 100 ms will continue (lamp control by grandchild table (4) specified by the child table in Figure 11-75). In addition, the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 are lit in white until 500 ms have elapsed, and the brightness changes every 100 ms (lamp control by grandchild table (2) specified by the child table in FIG. 11-75), then go from white to almost off once and then back to white within 230 ms (lamp control by grandchild table (3) specified by the child table in FIG. 11-75), after which they are lit in white again and the brightness continues to change every 100 ms (lamp control by grandchild table (4) specified by the child table in FIG. 11-75).

In addition, after 3000 ms has elapsed since the start of the title display part, the display control unit 123 receives an extended command (B400 or B40F) sent in conjunction with starting display control of the introductory part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, and the lamp control based on the brightness data table: weak reach common title ends and switches to lamp control based on the brightness data table corresponding to the introductory part of the low base weak reach A and B performances.

In this way, when the performance control CPU 120 receives the extended command B421, it performs lamp control based on the brightness data table: weak reach common title based on the extended command B421, so that the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 change in light color and light pattern according to the title start period in which the title characters move from the left side of the display area towards their fixed position, and the title end period in which the title characters move from their fixed position towards the right side.

[Brightness data table used in title color change effect (red)]
Figure 11-79 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the brightness data table: title common chance up red used when the display control unit 123 receives the extended command: B511 sent when performing display control of the title color change effect that changes the title text from white to red, Figure 11-80 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the brightness data table: title common chance up red, and Figures 11-81 to 11-83 are diagrams showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the brightness data table: title common chance up red.

When controlling the display of a title color change effect in which the title characters change from white to red in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, the display control unit 123 transmits an extension command 511 at the timing when the title characters change (1,300 ms after the start of the title display part).

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the extension command B511, it specifies the parent table (Fig. 11-79) for the title common chance up red based on the extension command 511, and controls the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 by referring to the child table (Fig. 11-80) specified by the parent table, the grandchild tables (Figs. 11-81 to 83) specified by the child table, and the brightness data specified by the grandchild tables.

As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, and the attacca lamps LA1-LA4 will flash white at 40 ms intervals until 200 ms have elapsed, then they will be lit in red until 1200 ms have elapsed, and their brightness will change at 20 ms intervals, after which they will gradually turn off from red at 280 ms, and will remain off until a new extended command is received.

In addition, the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 will remain off until 200 ms have elapsed, then will remain red until 1200 ms have elapsed, with the brightness changing at 20 ms intervals, after which they will gradually turn off from red at 280 ms, and will remain off until a new extended command is received.

In addition, the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 flash white at 40 ms intervals until 200 ms have elapsed, then remain lit in white until 1200 ms have elapsed, and their brightness changes at 20 ms intervals, after which they gradually turn off from white at 280 ms, and remain off until a new extended command is received.

As shown in Figure 11-152 (B), the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B performances is the title start period from the start of 500 ms, followed by the title display period of 2200 ms, followed by the title end period of 300 ms. Also, when executing a title color change performance in which the color changes from white to red, the title characters are displayed in a manner that makes them appear to glow for 200 ms 800 ms after the start of the title display period, after which the title characters change to red, and after a further 1200 ms the transition to the title end period begins.

Therefore, after the start of the title display period, extended command B511 is received at the timing to execute the title color change effect, and lamp control is performed based on the brightness data table: Title Common Chance Up Red, so that during the period in which the title characters are displayed in a manner that appears to glow (the period up to 200 ms after extended command B511 is received), frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12 and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4 flash white, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 are turned off, and decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 flash white (lamp control based on grandchild table (5) specified by the child table in Figure 11-80). In addition, until the title characters change to red and the title end period begins (the period from 200 ms after receiving extension command B511 until another 1,200 ms has passed), frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12 and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4 light up in red and change brightness at 20 ms intervals, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 light up in red and change brightness at 20 ms intervals, and decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 light up in white and change brightness at 20 ms intervals (lamp control by grandchild table (6) specified by the child table in Figure 11-80). Also, during the title end period (the period 1,400 ms after receiving extension command B511) when the title characters move from their fixed position to the right and disappear, the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12 and the attacca lamps LA1-LA4 gradually turn off from red, the logo LEDs LL1-LL4 gradually turn off from red, and the decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 gradually turn off from white (lamp control by grandchild table (7) specified by the child table in Figure 11-80).

In addition, after 3000 ms has elapsed since the start of the title display part, the display control unit 123 receives an extended command (B400 or B40F) sent in conjunction with starting display control of the introductory part of the low base weak reach A and B performance, and the lamp control based on the brightness data table: title common chance up red ends and switches to lamp control based on the brightness data table corresponding to the introductory part of the low base weak reach A and B performance.

[Brightness data table used in title color change effect (gold)]
Figure 11-84 is a diagram showing the settings of the parent table of the Brightness Data Table: Title Common Chance Up Gold used when the display control unit 123 receives the extended command: B512 sent when performing display control of the title color change effect that changes the title text from white to gold, Figure 11-85 is a diagram showing the settings of the child table of the Brightness Data Table: Title Common Chance Up Gold, and Figures 11-86 to 11-88 are diagrams showing the settings of the grandchild table of the Brightness Data Table: Title Common Chance Up Gold.

When controlling the display of a title color change effect in which the title characters change from white to gold in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, the display control unit 123 transmits an extension command 512 at the timing when the title characters change (1,300 ms after the start of the title display part).

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the extension command B512, it specifies the parent table (Fig. 11-84) of the Title Common Chance Up Gold based on the extension command 512, and controls the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 by referring to the child table (Fig. 11-85) specified by the parent table, the grandchild tables (Figs. 11-86-88) specified by the child tables, and the brightness data specified by the grandchild tables.

As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, and the attacca lamps LA1-LA4 will flash white at 40 ms intervals until 200 ms have elapsed, then they will light up in yellow until 1200 ms have elapsed, and their brightness will change at 20 ms intervals, after which they will gradually turn off from yellow at 280 ms, and will remain off until a new extended command is received.

In addition, the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 will remain off until 200 ms have elapsed, then will remain red until 1200 ms have elapsed, with the brightness changing at 20 ms intervals, after which they will gradually turn off from red at 280 ms, and will remain off until a new extended command is received.

In addition, the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 flash white at 40 ms intervals until 200 ms have elapsed, then remain lit in white until 1200 ms have elapsed, and their brightness changes at 20 ms intervals, after which they gradually turn off from white at 280 ms, and remain off until a new extended command is received.

As shown in Figure 11-152 (B), the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B performances is the title start period from the start of 500 ms, followed by the title display period of 2200 ms, followed by the title end period of 300 ms. Also, when executing a title color change performance in which the color changes from white to gold, the title characters are displayed in a manner that makes them appear to glow for 200 ms 800 ms after the start of the title display period, after which the title characters change to gold, and after a further 1200 ms the transition to the title end period begins.

Therefore, after the start of the title display period, the extended command B512 is received at the timing to execute the title color change effect, and lamp control is performed based on the brightness data table: Title Common Chance Up Gold, so that during the period in which the title characters are displayed in a manner that appears to glow (the period up to 200 ms after receiving the extended command B512), the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12 and the attacca lamps LA1 to LA4 flash white, the logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 are turned off, and the decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 flash white (lamp control based on the grandchild table (8) specified by the child table in Figure 11-85). In addition, until the title characters change to gold and the title end period begins (the period from 200 ms after receiving extension command B512 until another 1,200 ms has passed), frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12 and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4 light up in yellow and change brightness at 20 ms intervals, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4 light up in red and change brightness at 20 ms intervals, and decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5 light up in white and change brightness at 20 ms intervals (lamp control by grandchild table (9) specified by the child table in Figure 11-85). Also, during the title end period (the period 1,400 ms after receiving extension command B512) when the title characters move from their fixed position to the right and disappear, the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12 and the attacca lamps LA1-LA4 gradually turn off from yellow, the logo LEDs LL1-LL4 gradually turn off from red, and the decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 gradually turn off from white (lamp control by grandchild table (10) specified by the child table in Figure 11-85).

In addition, after 3000 ms has elapsed since the start of the title display part, the display control unit 123 receives an extended command (B400 or B40F) sent in conjunction with starting display control of the introductory part of the low base weak reach A and B performance, and the lamp control based on the brightness data table: title common chance up gold ends and switches to lamp control based on the brightness data table corresponding to the introductory part of the low base weak reach A and B performance.

[Modification of the brightness data table used in the title color change effect]
In this embodiment, in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, regardless of whether or not a title change performance is performed, the performance control CPU 120 uses the brightness data table: weak reach system common title to control the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and the attacca lamps LA1 to LA4. If a title change performance is not performed, the CPU 120 uses the brightness data table: weak reach system common title to control the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, and the attacca lamps LA1 to LA4. When lamp control is performed to perform a title change presentation, an extended command specifying title common chance up red or title common chance up gold, which is sent from the display control unit 123 at the timing of performing display control to change the color of the title characters, is received, and from the time the color of the title characters changes, lamp control of frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12 and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4 is performed using the brightness data table: title common chance up red or title common chance up gold.

In contrast to this, in this modified example, the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances is provided with a brightness data table: weak reach common title (white) in which brightness data is set when no title change performance is performed, a brightness data table: weak reach common title (red) in which brightness data is set when a title change performance is performed in which the title characters change to red in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, and a brightness data table: weak reach common title (gold) in which brightness data is set when a title change performance is performed in which the title characters change to gold. When the display control unit 123 starts display control of the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, if no title change performance is performed, the performance control CPU 120 uses the brightness data table: weak reach common title (white) to send an extended command that specifies the weak reach common title (white) to the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, the attacker lamp When the display control unit 123 starts display control of the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, in order to perform a title change performance in which the title characters are changed to red, the performance control CPU 120 transmits an extension command specifying the weak reach common title (red) to control the lamps LA1 to LA4 of the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12 and the attack lamps LA1 to LA4 using the brightness data table: weak reach common title (red). When the display control unit 123 starts display control of the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, if a title change performance is performed in which the title characters change to gold, an extension command specifying the weak reach common title (gold) is sent, and the performance control CPU 120 uses the brightness data table: weak reach common title (gold) to control the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and the frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12 and the attacker lamps LA1 to LA4.

This allows the performance control CPU 120 to control the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, and the attacca lamps LA1-LA4 in a lighting mode that corresponds to each situation: when no title change performance is performed in the title display part of the base weak reach A and B performances, when a title change performance in which the title characters change to red is performed, or when a title change performance in which the title characters change to gold is performed.

[Brightness data table used in the introduction part of the low base weak reach A performance]
Fig. 11-89 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the brightness data table: weak reach system weak reach A introduction, which is used when the display control unit 123 receives the extension command: B400 sent when performing display control of the introduction part in the low base weak reach A performance, Fig. 11-90 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the brightness data table: weak reach system weak reach A introduction, and Figs. 11-91 to 11-95 are diagrams showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the brightness data table: weak reach system weak reach A introduction. Note that the child table and grandchild table are omitted except for some setting contents.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the extended command B400, it specifies the parent table (Fig. 11-89) for the weak reach system weak reach A introduction based on the extended command B400, and controls the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 by referring to the child table (Fig. 11-90) specified by the parent table, the grandchild tables (Figs. 11-91 to 95) specified by the child table, and the brightness data specified by the grandchild tables.

In particular, the child table shown in Figure 11-90 has a grandchild table set with an execution time corresponding to the time when the performance scene changes in the introductory part of the low base weak reach A performance, an illumination color corresponding to the performance scene, and an illumination mode, and further, the grandchild tables shown in Figures 11-91 to 95 have brightness data set with illumination color and illumination mode corresponding to the characters etc. appearing in the performance scene.

As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, the attacca lamps LA1-LA4, the logo LEDs LL1-LL4, and the decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 will change color and pattern according to the scene and characters appearing in the introductory part of the low base weak reach A performance.

[Brightness data table used in the introduction part of the low base weak reach B performance]
Fig. 11-96 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the brightness data table: weak reach system weak reach B introduction used when the display control unit 123 receives the extension command: B40F sent when performing display control of the introduction part in the low base weak reach B performance, Fig. 11-97 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the brightness data table: weak reach system weak reach B introduction, and Figs. 11-99 to 11-103 are diagrams showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the brightness data table: weak reach system weak reach B introduction. Note that the child table and grandchild table are omitted except for some setting contents.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the extension command B40F, it specifies the parent table (Fig. 11-96) for the weak reach system weak reach B introduction based on the extension command B40F, and controls the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 by referring to the child table (Fig. 11-97) specified by the parent table, the grandchild tables (Figs. 11-98 to 103) specified by the child table, and the brightness data specified by the grandchild tables.

In particular, the child table shown in Figure 11-97 is set with a grandchild table that sets the execution time according to the time when the performance scene changes in the introductory part of the low base weak reach B performance, the light emission color according to the performance scene, and the light emission mode, and further, the grandchild tables shown in Figures 11-98 to 103 are set with brightness data that sets the light emission color and light emission mode according to the characters, etc. that appear in the performance scene.

As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, the attacca lamps LA1-LA4, the logo LEDs LL1-LL4, and the decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 will change color and pattern according to the scene and characters that appear in the introductory part of the low base weak reach B performance.

[Brightness data table used in the title display part of low base strong reach A to C effects]
Figure 11-104 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the brightness data table: strong reach common title used when the display control unit 123 receives the extension command: B517 sent when performing display control of the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performance, Figure 11-105 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the brightness data table: strong reach common title, and Figures 11-106 to 11-109 are diagrams showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the brightness data table: strong reach common title.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the extension command B517, it specifies the parent table (Fig. 11-105) of the strong reach common title based on the extension command B517, and controls the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 by referring to the child table (Fig. 11-106) specified by the parent table, the grandchild tables (Figs. 11-107-109) specified by the child table, and the brightness data specified by the grandchild tables.

In particular, the child table shown in Figure 11-106 is set with grandchild tables that set the execution time corresponding to the time when the performance scenes change, such as the prologue display period, title start period, title display period, and title end period that make up the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performance, as well as the light emission color and light emission mode corresponding to the performance scene, and further, the grandchild tables shown in Figures 11-107 to 109 are set with brightness data that sets the light emission color and light emission mode corresponding to the characters that appear in the performance scene.

As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, the Attacka Lamps LA1-LA4, the logo LEDs LL1-LL4, and the decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 will change color and pattern according to the scene and characters appearing in the title display part of the low base strong reach A-C performance.

[Brightness data table used in the introductory part of the low base strong reach A performance]
Fig. 11-110 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the brightness data table: strong reach system strong reach A introduction, which is used when the display control unit 123 receives the extension command: B500 transmitted when performing display control of the introduction part in the low base strong reach A performance, Fig. 11-111 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the brightness data table: strong reach system strong reach A introduction, and Fig. 11-112 to Fig. 11-117 are diagrams showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the brightness data table: strong reach system strong reach A introduction. Note that the child table and grandchild table are omitted except for some setting contents.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the extended command B500, it specifies the parent table (Fig. 11-110) for the strong reach system strong reach A introduction based on the extended command B500, and controls the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 by referring to the child table (Fig. 11-111) specified by the parent table, the grandchild tables (Figs. 11-112 to 117) specified by the child tables, and the brightness data specified by the grandchild tables.

In particular, the child table shown in Figure 11-111 has a grandchild table set with an execution time corresponding to the time when the scene of the performance changes in the introductory part of the low base strong reach A performance, an illumination color corresponding to the performance scene, and an illumination mode, and further, the grandchild tables shown in Figures 11-112 to 117 have brightness data set with illumination color and illumination mode corresponding to the characters etc. appearing in the performance scene.

As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, the attacca lamps LA1-LA4, the logo LEDs LL1-LL4, and the decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 will change color and pattern to match the scene and characters appearing in the introductory part of the low base strong reach A performance.

[Brightness data table used in the introduction part of the low base strong reach B performance]
Fig. 11-118 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the brightness data table: strong reach system strong reach B introduction, which is used when the display control unit 123 receives the extension command: B504 transmitted when performing display control of the introduction part in the low base strong reach B performance, Fig. 11-119 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the brightness data table: strong reach system strong reach B introduction, and Fig. 11-120 to Fig. 11-124 are diagrams showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the brightness data table: strong reach system strong reach B introduction. Note that the child table and grandchild table are omitted except for some setting contents.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the extension command B504, it specifies the parent table (Fig. 11-118) for the strong reach system strong reach B introduction based on the extension command B504, and controls the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 by referring to the child table (Fig. 11-119) specified by the parent table, the grandchild tables (Figs. 11-120-124) specified by the child tables, and the brightness data specified by the grandchild tables.

In particular, the child table shown in Figure 11-119 has a grandchild table set with an execution time corresponding to the time when the scene of the performance changes in the introductory part of the low base strong reach B performance, an illumination color corresponding to the performance scene, and an illumination mode, and further, the grandchild tables shown in Figures 11-120 to 124 have brightness data set with illumination color and illumination mode corresponding to the characters etc. appearing in the performance scene.

As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, the attacca lamps LA1-LA4, the logo LEDs LL1-LL4, and the decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 will change color and pattern according to the scene and characters that appear in the introductory part of the low base strong reach B performance.

[Brightness data table used in the introductory part of low base strong reach C performance]
When the performance control CPU 120 receives the extension command B505 transmitted when the display control unit 123 performs display control of the introductory part in a low base strong reach C performance, it specifies a parent table (not shown) for the strong reach C introduction of the strong reach system based on the extension command B505, and controls the lamps of frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4 by referring to the child table (not shown) specified by the parent table, the grandchild table (not shown) specified by the child table, and the brightness data specified by the grandchild table.

In particular, the child table of the strong reach system strong reach C introduction is set with a grandchild table that sets the execution time according to the time when the performance scene changes in the introductory part of the low base strong reach C performance, the light emission color according to the performance scene, and the light emission mode, and further, the grandchild table of the strong reach system strong reach C introduction is set with brightness data that sets the light emission color and light emission mode according to the characters etc. that appear in the performance scene in the introductory part of the low base strong reach C performance.

As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, the attacca lamps LA1-LA4, the logo LEDs LL1-LL4, and the decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 will change color and pattern according to the scene and characters that appear in the introductory part of the low base strong reach C performance.

[Brightness data table used in low-base strongest reach performance]
Fig. 11-125 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the brightness data table: strongest reach system strongest reach title introduction, which is used when the display control unit 123 receives the extension command: B600 transmitted when performing display control of the low-base strongest reach performance, Fig. 11-126 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the brightness data table: strongest reach system strongest reach title introduction, and Fig. 11-127 to Fig. 11-135 are diagrams showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the brightness data table: strongest reach system strongest reach title introduction. Note that the child table and grandchild table are omitted except for some setting contents.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the extension command B600, it specifies the parent table (Fig. 11-126) for the strongest reach system strongest reach title introduction based on the extension command B600, and controls the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 by referring to the child table (Fig. 11-127) specified by the parent table, the grandchild tables (Figs. 11-128 to 135) specified by the child table, and the brightness data specified by the grandchild tables.

In particular, the child table shown in Figure 11-126 has grandchild tables set with execution times corresponding to the time it takes for the scenes of the performance to change from the title display part of the low base strongest reach performance to the end of the introductory part, and light emission colors and light emission modes corresponding to the performance scenes.Furthermore, the grandchild tables shown in Figures 11-127 to 135 have brightness data set with light emission colors and light emission modes corresponding to the characters, etc. appearing in the performance scenes.

As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, the Attacka Lamps LA1-LA4, the logo LEDs LL1-LL4, and the decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 will change color and pattern according to the scene and characters that appear in the introductory part of the low base strongest reach performance.

[Brightness data table used in the title display part of high base reach A to D performance]
Figure 11-136 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the brightness data table: high bass reach common title used when the display control unit 123 receives the extension command: B605 sent when performing display control of the title display part in the high bass reach A to D performances, Figure 11-137 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the brightness data table: high bass reach common title, and Figures 11-138 to 11-140 are diagrams showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the brightness data table: high bass reach common title.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the extension command B605, it specifies the parent table (Fig. 11-136) of the high base reach common title based on the extension command B605, and controls the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 by referring to the child table (Fig. 11-137) specified by the parent table, the grandchild table (Fig. 11-138-140) specified by the child table, and the brightness data specified by the grandchild table.

In particular, the child table shown in Figure 11-137 is set with grandchild tables that set the execution time corresponding to the time when the performance scene changes, such as the title start period, title display period, and title end period that make up the title display part in the high base reach A to D performance, and the light emission color and light emission mode corresponding to the performance scene, and further, the grandchild tables shown in Figures 11-138 to 140 are set with brightness data that sets the light emission color and light emission mode corresponding to the characters, etc. that appear in the performance scene.

As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, the attacca lamps LA1-LA4, the logo LEDs LL1-LL4, and the decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 will change color and pattern according to the scenes and characters appearing in the title display parts of the high base reach A-D performances.

[Brightness data table used in the introduction part of high base reach A performance]
Fig. 11-141 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the parent table of the brightness data table: high base reach type reach A introduction used when the display control unit 123 receives the extension command: B606 sent when performing display control of the introduction part in the high base reach A performance, Fig. 11-142 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the child table of the brightness data table: high base reach type reach A introduction, and Figs. 11-143 to 11-145 are diagrams showing the setting contents of the grandchild table of the brightness data table: high base reach type reach A introduction. Note that the child table and grandchild table have been omitted except for some setting contents.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the extension command B606, it specifies the parent table (Fig. 11-141) for the introduction of high base reach type reach A based on the extension command B606, and controls the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 by referring to the child table (Fig. 11-142) specified by the parent table, the grandchild tables (Figs. 11-143 to 145) specified by the child table, and the brightness data specified by the grandchild tables.

In particular, the child table shown in Figure 11-142 has a grandchild table set with an execution time corresponding to the time when the performance scene changes in the introductory part of the high base reach A performance, and a light emission color and light emission mode corresponding to the performance scene, and further, the grandchild tables shown in Figures 11-143 to 145 have brightness data set with light emission color and light emission mode corresponding to the characters etc. appearing in the performance scene.

As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, the attacca lamps LA1-LA4, the logo LEDs LL1-LL4, and the decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 will change color and pattern according to the scene and characters appearing in the introductory part of the high base reach A performance.

[Brightness data table used in the introduction part of high base reach B performance]
Fig. 11-146 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the brightness data table: parent table of high base reach type reach B introduction used when the display control unit 123 receives the extension command: B607 transmitted when performing display control of the introduction part in the high base reach B performance, and Fig. 11-147 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the brightness data table: child table of high base reach type reach B introduction. Note that the child table is omitted except for some setting contents, and all grandchild tables are omitted.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the extension command B607, it specifies the parent table (Figure 11-146) for the introduction of the high base reach system reach B based on the extension command B607, and controls the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 by referring to the child table (Figure 11-147) specified by the parent table, the grandchild table (not shown) specified by the child table, and the brightness data specified by the grandchild table.

In particular, the child table shown in Figure 11-147 has a grandchild table set with an execution time corresponding to the time when the performance scene changes in the introductory part of the high base reach B performance, an illumination color corresponding to the performance scene, and illumination mode, and further, the grandchild table for the high base reach type reach B introduction has brightness data set with illumination color and illumination mode corresponding to the characters etc. that appear in the performance scene in the introductory part of the high base reach B performance.

As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, the attacca lamps LA1-LA4, the logo LEDs LL1-LL4, and the decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 will change color and pattern according to the scene and characters appearing in the introductory part of the high base reach B performance.

[Brightness data table used in the introduction part of high base reach C performance]
Fig. 11-148 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the brightness data table: parent table of high base reach type reach C introduction used when the display control unit 123 receives the extension command: B608 transmitted when performing display control of the introduction part in the high base reach C performance, and Fig. 11-149 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the brightness data table: child table of high base reach type reach C introduction. Note that the child table is omitted except for some setting contents, and all grandchild tables are omitted.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the extension command B608, it specifies the parent table (Fig. 11-148) for the introduction of the high base reach type reach C based on the extension command B608, and controls the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 by referring to the child table (Fig. 11-149) specified by the parent table, the grandchild table (not shown) specified by the child table, and the brightness data specified by the grandchild table.

In particular, the child table shown in Figure 11-148 has a grandchild table set with an execution time corresponding to the time when the performance scene changes in the introductory part of the high base reach C performance, an illumination color corresponding to the performance scene, and illumination mode, and further, the grandchild table for the high base reach type reach C introduction has brightness data set with illumination color and illumination mode corresponding to the characters etc. that appear in the performance scene in the introductory part of the high base reach C performance.

As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, the attacca lamps LA1-LA4, the logo LEDs LL1-LL4, and the decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 will change color and pattern according to the scene and characters appearing in the introductory part of the high base reach C performance.

[Brightness data table used in the introduction part of high base reach D performance]
Fig. 11-150 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the brightness data table: parent table of high base reach type reach D introduction used when the display control unit 123 receives the extension command: B609 transmitted when performing display control of the introduction part in the high base reach D performance, and Fig. 11-151 is a diagram showing the setting contents of the brightness data table: child table of high base reach type reach D introduction. Note that the child table is omitted except for some setting contents, and all grandchild tables are omitted.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the extension command B609, it specifies the parent table (Fig. 11-150) for the introduction of the high base reach type reach D based on the extension command B609, and controls the lamps of the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4 by referring to the child table (Fig. 11-151) specified by the parent table, the grandchild table (not shown) specified by the child table, and the brightness data specified by the grandchild table.

In particular, the child table shown in Figure 11-150 has a grandchild table set with an execution time corresponding to the time when the performance scene changes in the introductory part of the high base reach D performance, an illumination color corresponding to the performance scene, and illumination mode, and further, the grandchild table for the high base reach type reach D introduction has brightness data set with illumination color and illumination mode corresponding to the characters etc. appearing in the performance scene in the introductory part of the high base reach D performance.

As a result, the frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12 and frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, the attacca lamps LA1-LA4, the logo LEDs LL1-LL4, and the decorative LEDs LS1-LS5 will change color and pattern according to the scene and characters appearing in the introductory part of the high base reach D performance.

[Effect 1]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a super reach performance after the decorative pattern displayed on the image display device 5 becomes a reach state. The super reach performance is composed of a title display part that displays the corresponding title character, and an introduction part until the performance result is notified. Then, the decorative pattern is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the super reach performance, and the title character corresponding to the super reach performance is displayed in the title display part so as to use the display position of the decorative pattern that has become a reach state. In this way, when the decorative pattern becomes a reach state, the player will pay attention to which decorative pattern has become a reach state, but by displaying the title character corresponding to the super reach performance using the display position of the decorative pattern that has become a reach state in the title display part in the super reach performance, the player can naturally pay attention to the title character, and as a result, the title display can be performed preferably.

In addition, since the likelihood of a big win differs depending on whether the decorative pattern that has reached the reach state is an odd number pattern or an even number pattern, when the decorative pattern reaches the reach state, the player will pay attention to which decorative pattern has reached the reach state, which will also draw more attention to the title text.

In addition, a decorative symbol (large) is displayed in reach mode before the title display part in the Super Reach performance, and then the decorative symbol (large) displayed in reach mode is reduced to a smaller decorative symbol (small), and the title characters corresponding to the Super Reach performance are displayed in a position that uses the reduced decorative symbol (small). In this way, the reduced display of the decorative symbol (large) attracts the player's attention, and the title characters corresponding to the Super Reach performance are displayed in a position that uses the reduced decorative symbol (small), making it easier to draw attention to the title characters.

In addition, in the title display part of the Super Reach performance, at the timing when the decorative pattern in the reach mode is displayed, the title text corresponding to the Super Reach performance is displayed so that it overlaps with the decorative pattern in the reach mode, making it easier to focus attention on the title text.

In addition, the super reach effects include low base weak reach A and B effects, and low base strong reach A to C effects, which have a higher chance of winning than the low base weak reach A and B effects. The title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects and the title characters corresponding to the low base strong reach A to C effects appear overlapping with one of the decorative patterns (the decorative pattern on the left) of the decorative patterns that have become a reach mode, making it easier to draw attention to the title display.

The Super Reach effect also includes a low base strongest reach effect, which has a higher chance of winning than the low base strong reach effects A to C, and the title characters corresponding to the low base strongest reach effect appear overlapping with both decorative patterns (decorative patterns on both sides) that have become reach modes, so the title characters corresponding to the low base strongest reach effect can be displayed in a more impactful manner.

In addition, the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects, the title characters corresponding to the low base strong reach A to C effects, and the title characters corresponding to the low base strongest reach effects appear overlapping with one of the decorative patterns that have reached the reach state (the decorative pattern on the left) or both decorative patterns (the decorative patterns on both sides) and are then displayed in their fixed positions, and even during the period when they are displayed in their fixed positions, they are displayed overlapping with part of the decorative patterns on both sides that have reached the reach state, making it easier to draw attention to the title characters even after they are displayed in their fixed positions.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attakka lamps LA1 to LA4), and in the title display part of the super reach performance, uses a brightness data table for title display (weak reach system common title, strong reach system common title, high base reach system The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of weak reach A for weak reach systems, introduction of weak reach B for weak reach systems, introduction of strong reach A for strong reach systems, introduction of strong reach B for strong reach systems, introduction of strong reach C for strong reach systems, introduction of reach A for high base reach systems, introduction of reach B for high base reach systems, introduction of reach C for high base reach systems, introduction of reach D for high base reach systems). In this way, in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the game effect lamp 9 can be illuminated in a suitable illumination mode according to the title display. As a result of these, the title display can be performed suitably.

[Effect 2]
In this embodiment, after the decorative pattern displayed on the image display device 5 becomes a reach state, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the low base weak reach A, B performance and the low base strong reach A to C performance. The low base weak reach A, B performance and the low base strong reach A to C performance are each composed of a title display part that displays the corresponding title character and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. When an odd-numbered decorative pattern is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the low base weak reach A, B performance, title letters corresponding to the low base weak reach A, B performance are displayed in the title display part so as to use the display position of the odd-numbered decorative pattern in the reach state, when an even-numbered decorative pattern is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the low base weak reach A, B performance, title letters corresponding to the low base weak reach A, B performance are displayed in the title display part so as to use the display position of the even-numbered decorative pattern in the reach state, when an odd-numbered decorative pattern is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performance, title letters corresponding to the low base strong reach A to C performance are displayed in the title display part so as to use the display position of the odd-numbered decorative pattern in the reach state, and when an even-numbered decorative pattern is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performance, title letters corresponding to the low base strong reach A to C performance are displayed in the title display part so as to use the display position of the even-numbered decorative pattern in the reach state. By doing this, when a decorative pattern reaches a reach state, the player will pay attention to which decorative pattern has reached the reach state. However, by displaying the title letters corresponding to the low base weak reach A, B effects and the low base strong reach A to C effects using the display position of the decorative pattern that has reached the reach state in the title display part of the low base weak reach A, B effects and the low base strong reach A to C effects, the player can naturally pay attention to the title letters, and as a result, the title can be displayed in an optimal manner.

In addition, since the likelihood of a big win differs depending on whether the decorative pattern that has reached the reach state is an odd number pattern or an even number pattern, when the decorative pattern reaches the reach state, the player will pay attention to which decorative pattern has reached the reach state, which will also draw more attention to the title text.

[Effect 3]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute low base weak reach A, B performance, low base strong reach A to C performance, and low base strongest reach performance after the decorative pattern displayed on the image display device 5 becomes a reach state. The low base weak reach A, B performance, low base strong reach A to C performance, and low base strongest reach performance are each composed of a title display part that displays the corresponding title character, and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. When an odd-numbered decorative pattern is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the low base weak reach A, B performance, the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A, B performance are displayed in the title display part using the display position of the odd-numbered decorative pattern that has become the reach state, when an even-numbered decorative pattern is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the low base weak reach A, B performance, the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A, B performance are displayed in the title display part using the display position of the even-numbered decorative pattern that has become the reach state, when an odd-numbered decorative pattern is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performance, the title characters corresponding to the low base strong reach A to C performance are displayed in the title display part using the display position of the odd-numbered decorative pattern that has become the reach state. When an even-numbered decorative pattern is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performances, title characters corresponding to the low base strong reach A to C performances are displayed in the title display part so as to use the display position of the even-numbered decorative pattern in the reach state, when an odd-numbered decorative pattern is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the low base strongest reach performance, title characters corresponding to the low base strongest reach performance are displayed in the title display part so as to use the display position of the odd-numbered decorative pattern in the reach state, and when an even-numbered decorative pattern is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the low base strongest reach performance, title characters corresponding to the low base strongest reach performance are displayed in the title display part so as to use the display position of the even-numbered decorative pattern in the reach state. By doing this, when a decorative pattern reaches a reach state, the player will pay attention to which decorative pattern has reached the reach state. However, by displaying the title letters corresponding to the low base weak reach A, B effects, the low base strong reach A-C effects, and the low base strongest reach effects using the display positions of the decorative patterns that have reached the reach state in the title display parts of the low base weak reach A, B effects, the low base strong reach A-C effects, and the low base strongest reach effects, the player can naturally pay attention to the title letters, and as a result, the title display can be performed preferably.

In addition, since the likelihood of a big win differs depending on whether the decorative pattern that has reached the reach state is an odd number pattern or an even number pattern, when the decorative pattern reaches the reach state, the player will pay attention to which decorative pattern has reached the reach state, which will also draw more attention to the title text.

[Effect 4]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a super reach performance after the decorative pattern displayed on the image display device 5 becomes a reach state. The super reach performance includes a title display part that displays the corresponding title character, and an introduction part until the performance result is notified. Then, the decorative pattern is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the super reach performance, and the title character corresponding to the super reach performance is displayed in the title display part so as to use the display position of the decorative pattern that has become a reach state. In this way, when the decorative pattern becomes a reach state, the player will pay attention to which decorative pattern has become a reach state, but by displaying the title character corresponding to the super reach performance using the display position of the decorative pattern that has become a reach state in the title display part in the super reach performance, the player can naturally pay attention to the title character, and as a result, the title display can be performed preferably.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attakka lamps LA1 to LA4), and in the title display part of the super reach performance, uses a brightness data table for title display (weak reach system common title, strong reach system common title, high base reach system The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of weak reach A for weak reach systems, introduction of weak reach B for weak reach systems, introduction of strong reach A for strong reach systems, introduction of strong reach B for strong reach systems, introduction of strong reach C for strong reach systems, introduction of reach A for high base reach systems, introduction of reach B for high base reach systems, introduction of reach C for high base reach systems, introduction of reach D for high base reach systems). In this way, in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the game effect lamp 9 can be illuminated in a suitable illumination mode according to the title display. As a result of these, the title display can be performed suitably.

[Effect 5]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a low base strong reach B performance that has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the low base weak reach B performance and the low base weak reach B performance. The low base weak reach B performance and the low base strong reach B performance are composed of both a title display part that displays the corresponding title character and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. In addition, in the low base weak reach B performance, the ally character "Yume Yume" and the enemy character "Boingo" are used, and the ally character "Yume Yume" announces that a jackpot will be reached, and in the low base strong reach B performance, the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" and the enemy character "Robo" are used, and the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" announce that a jackpot will be reached. In the introductory part of the low base strong reach B performance, the display is started in a manner in which the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" are arranged in the foreground and the enemy character "Robo" is arranged in the background, and in the introductory part of the low base weak reach B performance, the display is started in a manner in which the ally character "Yume Yume" is arranged in the foreground and the enemy character "Boingo" is not arranged in the background (the ally character "Yume Yume" and the enemy character "Boingo" face each other on the left and right). In this way, for the low base weak reach B performance, which has a relatively high expectation of a jackpot, the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana", which are notified of a jackpot, are arranged in the foreground and the enemy character "Robo" is arranged in the background, allowing the player to empathize and making it easier for the player to intuitively recognize that the expectation of a jackpot is high, and as a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

Also, ally characters are characters who are given benefits if they win a battle, and enemy characters are characters who are not given benefits if they win a battle, and at the start of the introductory part of the low base strong reach B performance, the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" are displayed in a position in front with their backs to you, and the enemy character "Robo" is displayed in a position in the back facing you, with the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" facing the enemy character "Robo", and for the low base strong reach B performance, which has a relatively high expectation, the player and the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" are facing in the same direction, making it easier for the player to empathize and recognize that there is a high expectation of a jackpot.

In addition, in the introductory part of the low base strong reach B performance, the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" and the enemy character "Robo" are displayed in a position that includes the display area where the title characters were displayed in the title display part, so that when the title characters disappear, the player who was focusing on the title characters will naturally turn their attention to the ally characters "Jam" and "Nana" and the enemy character "Robo".

[Effect 6]
In this embodiment, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance can execute low base strong reach A to C performances that have a higher jackpot expectation than the low base weak reach A and B performances and a longer performance time than the low base weak reach A and B performances. The low base weak reach A and B performances and the low base strong reach A to C performances are each composed of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is notified. In addition, the low base weak reach A and B performances and the low base strong reach A to C performances all use dialogue subtitles. In the low base weak reach A and B performances, the title characters and dialogue subtitles are displayed in the title display part, and in the introduction part, the dialogue subtitles that were displayed in the title display part are continuously displayed, while in the low base strong reach A to C performances, the dialogue subtitles are not displayed in the title display part, and the title characters are displayed. In this manner, the low base strong reach A to C effects, which have a relatively high probability of winning and a long execution time, are displayed so that the title text and dialogue subtitles do not overlap as much as possible, while in the low base weak reach A and B effects, which have a relatively low probability of winning and a short execution time, even if the dialogue subtitles and title text overlap, the display of the title text is completed first so that the player can also focus on the dialogue subtitles, making it possible to provide the title text and dialogue subtitles appropriately, and as a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

In addition, when the title text and dialogue subtitles are displayed in the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B performances, in the subsequent introductory part, the performance scene does not change until the dialogue subtitles that were displayed simultaneously with the title text end, so it is possible to draw attention to the title text and then to the dialogue subtitles.

In addition, when title text and dialogue subtitles are displayed in the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B performances, the audio corresponding to the dialogue subtitles is output while the audio corresponding to the title text is not output, making it easier to hear the audio corresponding to the dialogue subtitles.

[Effect 7]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the low base strongest reach performance and the high base reach A to D performance. The low base strongest reach performance and the high base reach A to D performance are configured to include both a title display part that displays the corresponding title character and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. In addition, the title display of the low base strongest reach performance and the high base reach A to D performance is composed of multiple characters ("Catch the explosive chu with six people!", "Battle reach A (Battle reach B to D)"). Then, in the title display part of the low base strongest reach performance and the high base reach A to D performance, the title characters are started to be displayed at an enlarged size where only a portion of the multiple characters are visible, and the display size is gradually reduced from the enlarged size, and the title characters are displayed at a reduced size where all of the multiple characters are visible. In this way, in the title display part of the low base strongest reach performance and the high base reach A to D performance, the multiple characters are displayed at an enlarged size where only a portion of the multiple characters are visible, and then the size gradually decreases until the title characters are displayed at a reduced size where all of the characters are visible, which allows the player to focus their attention on the title characters.

In addition, before the title display part of the low base strongest reach performance begins, the movable body 32 is operated so as to overlap with the front side of the image display device 5, and a background dedicated to the falling performance is displayed during the period in which the falling performance is executed from when the movable body 32 operates until the movable body 32 returns to its initial position, and when the movable body 32 returns to its initial position, the title characters are displayed in an enlarged size in which not all of the characters that make up the title characters are visible and the display area is filled so that the background becomes unvisible, and then the reduced-sized title characters and a background dedicated to the title display are displayed. In this way, the title characters are displayed in an impactful way, while at the same time the background can be switched without any sense of incongruity, allowing the title characters to be viewed favorably by the player.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, attacca lamps LA1-LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display part of the high base reach A-D performances, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using a brightness data table for title display (common title for high base reach systems), and in the introduction part of the high base reach A-D performances, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of high base reach system reach A, introduction of high base reach system reach B, introduction of high base reach system reach C, introduction of high base reach system reach D). In this way, in the title display part of the high base reach A to D performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so the game effect lamp 9 can be illuminated in an appropriate lighting mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

In addition, in the low base strongest reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled in the title display part and the introduction part using one brightness data table (strongest reach title introduction) corresponding to the title display part and the introduction part. However, in the title display part of the low base strongest reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (brightness data table composed of brightness data corresponding to the title display part of the low base strongest reach performance (strongest reach type strongest reach title)), and in the introduction part of the low base strongest reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (brightness data table composed of brightness data corresponding to the title display part of the low base strongest reach performance (strongest reach type strongest reach introduction)). With such a configuration, in the title display part of the low base strongest reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the game effect lamp 9 can be illuminated in a suitable illumination mode according to the title display, and as a result, the title display can be performed suitably.

[Effect 8]
In this embodiment, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance can execute the low base strongest reach performance and the high base reach A to D performance. The low base strongest reach performance and the high base reach A to D performance are configured to include both a title display part in which the corresponding title characters are displayed and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. The title display of the low base strongest reach performance and the high base reach A to D performance is configured with multiple characters ("Catch the explosive chu with six people!", "Battle reach A (Battle reach B to D"). In the title display part of the low base strongest reach performance and the high base reach A to D performance, the multiple characters are enlarged from the state in which the multiple characters are displayed, thereby ending the title display part and displaying the background at the start of the introduction part. In this way, the player pays attention to the title characters in the title display part, and the title characters can be suitably used to switch to the background corresponding to the next introduction part without any awkwardness.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, attacca lamps LA1-LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display part of the high base reach A-D performances, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using a brightness data table for title display (common title for high base reach systems), and in the introduction part of the high base reach A-D performances, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of high base reach system reach A, introduction of high base reach system reach B, introduction of high base reach system reach C, introduction of high base reach system reach D). In this way, in the title display part of the high base reach A to D performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so the game effect lamp 9 can be illuminated in an appropriate lighting mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

In addition, in the low base strongest reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled in the title display part and the introduction part using one brightness data table (strongest reach title introduction) corresponding to the title display part and the introduction part. However, in the title display part of the low base strongest reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (brightness data table composed of brightness data corresponding to the title display part of the low base strongest reach performance (strongest reach type strongest reach title)), and in the introduction part of the low base strongest reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (brightness data table composed of brightness data corresponding to the title display part of the low base strongest reach performance (strongest reach type strongest reach introduction)). With such a configuration, in the title display part of the low base strongest reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the game effect lamp 9 can be illuminated in a suitable illumination mode according to the title display, and as a result, the title display can be performed suitably.

[Effect 9]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute low base weak reach A, B performance, and low base strong reach A to C performance. The low base weak reach A, B performance, and low base strong reach A to C performance are each composed of a title display part that displays the corresponding title character, and an introduction part until the performance result is notified. Also, unlike the execution time (T1-1 to 2) of the title display part in the low base weak reach A, B performance and the execution time (T2-1 to 3) of the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performance, each title display part is composed of a title start period from when the title character starts to be displayed to when it is displayed at a fixed position, a title display period that is displayed at a fixed position, and a title end period from when the title character is displayed at the fixed position to when it is displayed at the end. And, in the title display part in the low base weak reach A, B performance, and in the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performance, the title character is displayed so that the title display period is longer than the title start period and the title end period, and the title start period is longer than the title end period. In this way, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the low base weak reach A, B effects and the low base strong reach A to C effects, the title display period displayed at the fixed position is made the longest, so that attention can be drawn to the type of title characters. Also, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the low base weak reach A, B effects and the low base strong reach A to C effects, the title start period until the title is displayed at the fixed position is made longer than the title end period from the display of the fixed position to the end of the display, so that it is possible to arouse interest in which title characters will be displayed. Also, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the low base weak reach A, B effects and the low base strong reach A to C effects, the title display part can be made easier to understand by making the relationship between the execution times of the title start period, title display period, and title end period common.

[Effect 10]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the super reach performance in both the normal state and the probability variable state, which is more advantageous than the normal state. The super reach performance in the normal state and the probability variable state are both configured to include a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is notified. Also, the execution time (T1-1 to 2, T2-1 to 3, T3) of the title display part in the super reach performance in the normal state is different from the execution time (T4) of the title display part in the super reach performance in the probability variable state, and both title display parts are configured to include a title start period from when the title characters start to be displayed to when they are displayed at the fixed position, a title display period that is displayed at the fixed position, and a title end period from when the title characters are displayed at the fixed position to when they end being displayed. And, in the title display part in the super reach performance in the normal state and in the title display part in the super reach performance in the probability variable state, the title characters are displayed so that the title display period is longer than the title start period and the title end period, and the title start period is longer than the title end period. In this way, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the super reach performance in the normal state and the super reach performance in the probability variable state, the title display period displayed at the fixed position is made the longest, so that the type of title character can be drawn to attention. Also, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the super reach performance in the normal state and the super reach performance in the probability variable state, the title start period until the title is displayed at the fixed position is made longer than the title end period until the display at the fixed position is ended, so that it is possible to incite which title character is displayed. Also, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the super reach performance in the normal state and the super reach performance in the probability variable state, the title display part can be made easy to understand by making the execution time relationship of the title start period, title display period, and title end period common.

In addition, the execution time (T4) of the title display part of the Super Reach performance in the special probability state is shorter than the execution time (T1-1 to 2, T2-1 to 3, T3) of the title display part of the Super Reach performance in the normal state. Since the execution time of the title display part in the Super Reach performance executed in the special probability state is relatively short, gameplay in the special probability state can be played at a good tempo, while the execution time of the title display part in the Super Reach performance executed in the normal state is relatively long, so it can be thoroughly hyped up.

In addition, the Super Reach performance executed in the probability variable state, regardless of the type, has a higher chance of winning than the low base weak reach A and B performances, which have a lower chance of winning among the Super Reach performances executed in the normal state, and even if the execution time of the title display part in the Super Reach performance executed in the probability variable state is relatively short, the player can expect a jackpot just by having the Super Reach performance executed.

In addition, the execution time of the Super Reach effect and the execution time of the title display part are the same for all types of Super Reach effects executed in the special probability state, but among the Super Reach effects executed in the normal state, the execution time of the Super Reach effect and the execution time of the title display part are the same, so even if the execution time of the Super Reach effect and the execution time of the title display part are the same regardless of the type of Super Reach effect executed in the special probability state, the execution of the Super Reach effect alone can give the player hope for a jackpot.

In addition, among the super reach effects executed in the normal state, the execution time of the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C effects, which have a higher jackpot expectation than the low base weak reach A and B effects, is set to be longer than the execution time of the title display part in the low base weak reach AB effect, and the execution time of the title display part in the low base strongest reach effect, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the low base strong reach A to C effects, is set to be longer than the execution time of the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C effects. By doing this, in the normal state, the execution time of the title display part is longer for the super reach effect with a higher jackpot expectation, so it can be effectively excited.

In addition, among the super reach effects executed in the normal state, the execution time of the title display period in which the title characters are displayed in a fixed position in the low base strong reach A-C effects, which have a higher jackpot expectation than the low base weak reach A and B effects, is set to be longer than the execution time of the title display period in the low base weak reach AB effects, and the execution time of the title display period in the low base strongest reach effects, which have a higher jackpot expectation than the low base strong reach A-C effects, is set to be longer than the execution time of the title display period in the low base strong reach A-C effects. By doing this, in the normal state, the higher the jackpot expectation of the super reach effect, the longer the execution time of the title display period in which the title characters are displayed in a fixed position, so it can be more exciting.

[Effect 11]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a super reach performance. The super reach performance includes both a title display part that displays the corresponding title character and an introduction part until the performance result is notified. The title display part includes a title start period from when the title character starts to be displayed at the fixed position until it is displayed at the fixed position, a title display period that is displayed at the fixed position, and a title end period from when the title character is displayed at the fixed position until it is ended. In the title display part, the title character is displayed so that the title display period is longer than the title start period and the title end period, and the title start period is longer than the title end period. In this way, the title display period displayed at the fixed position is made the longest, so that attention can be drawn to the type of title character. In addition, by making the title start period until it is displayed at the fixed position longer than the title end period from when the title character is displayed at the fixed position until it is ended, it is possible to incite which title character is displayed. In addition, even if the execution time of the title display part differs between the super reach performance in the normal state and the super reach performance in the probability change state, the title display part can be made easier to understand by making the relationship between the execution times of the title start period, the title display period, and the title end period common.

[Effect 12]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the low base strong reach A to C performance and the low base strongest reach performance. The low base strong reach A to C performance and the low base strongest reach performance are configured to include both a title display part that displays the corresponding title character and an introduction part until the performance result is notified. Also, as shown in FIG. 11-43, in the title display part of the low base strongest reach performance and the low base strong reach A to C performance, it is possible to display the title character in a white form and a red form that has a higher jackpot expectation than the white form. Then, in the title display part of the low base strongest reach performance and the low base strong reach A to C performance, the corresponding expectation indication is displayed, and then the title character is displayed in a size larger than the expectation indication. In this case, in both cases of displaying the title character in a white form and displaying it in a red form, the expectation indication is displayed in a common form. In this way, the title characters corresponding to the low base strongest reach effects and the low base strong reach A to C effects are larger in size than the expectation suggestion display, and the expectation level is suggested by its appearance, so that it attracts the attention of the player, but by displaying the expectation suggestion display before the title characters, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the expectation suggestion first. Also, whether the title characters are displayed in white or red, the expectation suggestion display is performed in a common manner, so that the player can be drawn to the appearance of the subsequent title characters.

[Effect 13]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the low base strong reach B performance and the low base strong reach C performance, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the low base strong reach B performance. The low base strong reach B and C performances are composed of both a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. In addition, the expectation suggestion display is displayed in the first mode (3.5 stars) in the title display part of the low base strong reach B performance, and the expectation suggestion display is displayed in the second mode (4 stars) in the title display part of the low base strong reach C performance. At this time, the expectation suggestion display in the title display part of the low base strong reach B performance and the expectation suggestion display in the title display part of the low base strong reach C performance are highlighted in a common manner. By doing this, development costs can be reduced by making the highlighting a common mode whether the expectation level indication is displayed in a first manner in the title display part of a low base strong reach B performance, or whether the expectation level indication is displayed in a second manner in the title display part of a low base strong reach C performance.

The expectation indication display is composed of multiple star-shaped objects, and in the low base strong reach B performance, the expectation is indicated by N (N is an integer) + 0.5 (3.5) objects, and in the low base strong reach C performance, the expectation is indicated by N + 1 (4) objects, and each star-shaped object is highlighted, and the highlighting is performed in a common manner whether one object is highlighted or 0.5 objects are highlighted. In this way, the highlighting is performed in a common manner whether one star-shaped object is highlighted or 0.5 star-shaped objects are highlighted, thereby reducing development costs.

In addition, in the expectation suggestion display, the time when one star-shaped object is highlighted and the time when 0.5 star-shaped objects are highlighted are the same. By doing this, the time when one star-shaped object is highlighted and the time when 0.5 star-shaped objects are highlighted are the same, which can reduce development costs.

In addition, in the expectation indication display, a common expectation indication sound is output whether a single star-shaped object is highlighted or a 0.5 star-shaped object is highlighted. In this way, a common expectation indication sound is output whether a single star-shaped object is highlighted or a 0.5 star-shaped object is highlighted, thereby reducing development costs.

The performance control CPU 120 also controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacker lamps LA1-LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display part of the low base strong reach B and C performances, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using a brightness data table for title display (strong base common title), and in the introduction part of the low base strong reach B and C performances, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using the brightness data table for each introduction part (strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction). In this way, in the title display part of the low base strong reach B and C performances, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the game effect lamps 9 can be illuminated in a suitable illumination mode according to the title display. As a result of these, the title display can be performed suitably.

In the low base strong reach B and C performances, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a common brightness data table (strong base common title) in the title display part, but in the title display part of the low base strong reach B performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display in the low base strong reach B performance (brightness data table (strong reach strong reach B title) composed of brightness data corresponding to the title display part of the low base strong reach B performance). In the title display part of the low base strong reach C performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display in the low base strong reach C performance. The game effect lamp 9 may be controlled using a data table (a brightness data table (strong reach series strong reach C title) composed of brightness data corresponding to the title display part of the low base strong reach C performance). With such a configuration, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using different brightness data tables for title display for the title display part of the low base strong reach B performance and the title display part of the low base strong reach C performance, so that the game effect lamp 9 can be illuminated in an appropriate illumination mode according to the title display, and as a result, the title display can be performed appropriately.

[Effect 14]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the low base strong reach A to C performances, the low base strongest reach performance, and the high base reach A to D performances. The low base strong reach A to C performances, the low base strongest reach performance, and the high base reach A to D performances are configured to include a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is notified. In addition, the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C performances, the low base strongest reach performance, and the high base reach A to D performances can display an expectation suggestion display composed of multiple star-shaped objects. In the expectation suggestion display, the first star-shaped object is highlighted, and then, while continuing the highlighting of the first star-shaped object, the second star-shaped object is highlighted, and then, the highlighting of the first star-shaped object is ended, and the third star-shaped object is highlighted. By doing this, in the expectation indication display, highlighting of the second star-shaped object begins before highlighting of the first star-shaped object ends, but highlighting of the third star-shaped object does not begin until highlighting of the first star-shaped object ends, making it easier to recognize the number of objects suggesting the expectation of a jackpot.

In addition, in the expectation indication display, an expectation indication sound is output each time a star-shaped object is highlighted, and after the output of the expectation indication sound for the highlighting of one star-shaped object has finished, an expectation indication sound for the highlighting of the next object is output. In this way, the emphasis sound for the highlighting of one object and the emphasis sound for the highlighting of the next object do not overlap, making it easier to recognize the number of objects indicating the expectation.

The expectation level suggestion display is composed of multiple star-shaped objects and the text "expectation level" indicating that the star-shaped objects indicate the expectation level, and the star-shaped objects are highlighted in a size that overlaps with the text "expectation level." In this way, highlighting the star-shaped objects draws attention to both the multiple star-shaped objects that make up the expectation level suggestion display and the text indicating that the star-shaped objects indicate the expectation level.

In this embodiment, when some of the multiple star-shaped objects are highlighted, the highlighting of the star-shaped objects is superimposed on text indicating that the star-shaped objects indicate the degree of expectation. However, for all star-shaped objects, the highlighting of the star-shaped objects may be superimposed on text indicating that the star-shaped objects indicate the degree of expectation.

[Effect 15]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the low base strong reach A to C performance, the low base strongest reach performance, and the high base reach A to D performance. The low base strong reach A to C performance, the low base strongest reach performance, and the high base reach A to D performance are configured to include both a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is notified. In addition, it is possible to display multiple pending displays corresponding to variable displays that have not yet started, and it is possible to display an expectation suggestion display composed of multiple star-shaped objects in the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C performance, the low base strongest reach performance, and the high base reach A to D performance. And, in the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performance, the low base strongest reach performance, and the high base reach A to D performance, the pending display is not displayed simultaneously with the expectation suggestion display. By doing this, an expectation indication display consisting of a plurality of objects is displayed in the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performances, the low base strongest reach performances, and the high base reach A to D performances, while the hold display is not displayed simultaneously with the expectation indication display, thereby preventing the hold display from being mistakenly recognized as the expectation indication display.

In particular, the maximum number of pending displays and active displays corresponding to the variable displays that have been started will match the maximum number of star-shaped objects that make up the expectation indication display, but even if a low base strong reach A-C performance, a low base strongest reach performance, or a high base reach A-D performance is executed when the maximum number of pending displays and active displays are displayed, it is possible to prevent the pending displays and active displays from being mistakenly recognized as the maximum number of star-shaped objects that make up the expectation indication display.

In addition, by erasing the hold display when a monochrome display effect is executed in which the display area is displayed in a monochrome color before the start of the title display part, the hold display can be ended without any awkwardness.

In addition, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attack lamps LA1-LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display part of the low base strong reach A-C performance and the high base reach A-D performance, the CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attack lamps LA1-LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data. In the title display part of the low base strong reach A-C performance and the high base reach A-D performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of strong reach A of the strong reach system, introduction of strong reach B of the strong reach system, introduction of strong reach C of the strong reach system, introduction of high base reach system reach A, introduction of high base reach system reach B, introduction of high base reach system reach C, introduction of high base reach system reach D). In this way, in the title display part of the low base strong reach A-C performance and the high base reach A-D performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the game effect lamp 9 can be illuminated in a suitable illumination mode according to the title display. As a result of these, the title display can be performed in a suitable manner.

In addition, in the low base strongest reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled in the title display part and the introduction part using one brightness data table (strongest reach title introduction) corresponding to the title display part and the introduction part. However, in the title display part of the low base strongest reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display (brightness data table composed of brightness data corresponding to the title display part of the low base strongest reach performance (strongest reach type strongest reach title)), and in the introduction part of the low base strongest reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (brightness data table composed of brightness data corresponding to the title display part of the low base strongest reach performance (strongest reach type strongest reach introduction)). With such a configuration, in the title display part of the low base strongest reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the game effect lamp 9 can be illuminated in a suitable illumination mode according to the title display, and as a result, the title display can be performed suitably.

[Effect 16]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute low base strong reach A to C performances and high base reach A to C performances. The low base strong reach A to C performances and high base reach A to C performances are configured to include both a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. In addition, in the title display part of the low base strong reach A performance/high base reach A performance, it is possible to display an expectation suggestion display composed of a first number (3) of star-shaped objects, in the title display part of the low base strong reach B performance/high base reach B performance, it is possible to display an expectation suggestion display composed of a second number (3.5) of star-shaped objects that is greater than the first number, in the title display part of the low base strong reach C performance/high base reach C performance, it is possible to display an expectation suggestion display composed of a third number (4) of star-shaped objects that is greater than the second number. The difference between the first number (3) and the second number (3.5) is the same (0.5) as the difference between the second number (3.5) and the third number (4), and the difference between the expected jackpot when a low base strong reach C effect/high base reach C effect corresponding to the third number (4) is executed and the expected jackpot when a low base strong reach B effect/high base reach B effect corresponding to the second number (3.5) is executed is greater than the difference between the expected jackpot when a low base strong reach B effect/high base reach B effect corresponding to the second number (3.5) is executed and the expected jackpot when a low base strong reach A effect/high base reach A effect corresponding to the first number (3). By doing this, when the number of star-shaped objects displayed as an expectation indication display in the title display part increases from the first number (3) to the second number (3.5) and when it increases from the second number (3.5) to the third number (4), the increase in the number of star-shaped objects is the same as when it increases from the second number (3.5) to the third number (4). However, the increase in the expectation of a jackpot is greater when it increases from the second number (3.5) to the third number (4) than when it increases from the first number (3) to the second number (3.5). Therefore, as the number of star-shaped objects increases, the player can expect a jackpot that is greater than the number of increased star-shaped objects, while at the same time, a player will not be overly led to expect a jackpot when the number of star-shaped objects is small.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a low-base strongest reach performance/high-base reach D performance, and can display an expectation indication display consisting of a star-shaped object of the fourth number (4.5) that is greater than the third number (4) in the title display part in the low-base strongest reach performance/high-base reach D performance, and the difference in numbers (0.5) between the third number (4) and the fourth number (4.5) is smaller than the difference in numbers (1) between the first number (3) and the third number (4), and the low-base strongest reach performance corresponding to the fourth number (4.5) can be displayed. The difference between the probability of a jackpot when a low base strong reach C performance/high base reach D performance corresponding to the third number (4) is executed and the probability of a jackpot when a low base strong reach C performance/high base reach C performance corresponding to the third number (4) is executed is greater than the difference between the probability of a jackpot when a low base strong reach C performance/high base reach C performance corresponding to the third number (4) is executed and the probability of a jackpot when a low base strong reach B performance/high base reach B performance corresponding to the first number (3) is executed. By doing this, the increase in the number of star-shaped objects displayed as the expectation indication in the title display part is smaller when the number of star-shaped objects increases from the third number (4) to the fourth number (4.5) than when it increases from the first number (3) to the third number (4), but the increase in the expectation of a jackpot is greater when it increases from the third number (4) to the fourth number (4.5) than when it increases from the first number (3) to the third number (4). Therefore, the more the number of star-shaped objects increases, the more the player can expect a jackpot even if the number of increased star-shaped objects is small.

In addition, the difference between the third number (4) and the fourth number (4.5) is 0.5, and the difference between the first number (3) and the third number (4) is 1, so it is more likely to be a jackpot when the number of star-shaped objects displayed as an expectation indication in the title display part increases by 0.5 from the third number (4) to the fourth number (4.5) than when the number increases by 1 from the first number (3) to the third number (4).

In addition, the difference between the probability of a jackpot when a high base reach C effect corresponding to the third number (4) is executed in a probability variable state that is more favorable than the normal state and the probability of a jackpot when a high base reach B effect corresponding to the second number (3.5) is executed is greater than the difference between the probability of a jackpot when a low base strong reach C effect corresponding to the third number (4) is executed in the normal state and the probability of a jackpot when a low base strong reach B effect corresponding to the second number (3.5) is executed. In this way, it can be expected that a jackpot will occur when the number of star-shaped objects displayed as the probability suggestion display in the title display part increases in a probability variable state that is more favorable than the normal state.

[Effect 17]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute low base strong reach A to C performances that have a higher jackpot expectation than the low base weak reach A and B performances and the low base weak reach A and B performances in the normal state. The low base weak reach A and B performances and the low base strong reach A to C performances are each composed of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. The title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performances has a longer execution time than the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B performances, and while the expectation suggestion display is displayed in the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performances, the expectation suggestion display is not displayed in the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B performances. By doing this, the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performances, which have a relatively high level of expectation, is longer than the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B performances, which have a relatively low level of expectation, and while an expectation suggestion display is displayed in the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performances, an expectation suggestion display is not displayed in the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B performances, so that the player can intuitively recognize that the low base strong reach A to C performances have a higher level of expectation than the low base weak reach A and B performances.

In addition, the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performance is composed of a prologue display period and a title character display period in which the title characters are displayed (title start period, title display period, title end period), while the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B performance does not have a prologue display period and is composed only of the title character display period, and the title character display period of the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performance is longer than the title character display period of the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B performance. By doing this, since the title character display period of the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performance is longer than the title character display period of the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B performance, it is possible to make the user physically recognize that the low base strong reach A to C performance has a higher expectation than the low base weak reach A and B performance.

The performance control CPU 120 can also execute a low base strongest reach performance that has a higher jackpot expectation than the low base strong reach A to C performances under normal conditions, and the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performances is composed of a prologue display period and a title character display period in which the title characters are displayed (title start period, title display period, title end period), and the title display part in the low base strongest reach performance does not have a prologue display period and is composed only of the title character display period, and the title character display period of the title display part in the low base strongest reach performance is longer than the title character display period of the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performance. By doing this, the title character display period of the title display part in the low base strongest reach performance is longer than the title character display period of the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performance, so that the user can physically recognize that the low base strongest reach performance has a higher expectation than the low base strong reach A to C performance.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, attacca lamps LA1-LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display parts of the low base weak reach A, B performances and the low base strong reach A-C performances, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using the brightness data tables for each title display (weak reach system common title, strong reach system common title), and in the introduction parts of the low base weak reach A, B performances and the low base strong reach A-C performances, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using the brightness data tables for each introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction). In this way, in the title display parts of the low base weak reach A and B effects and the low base strong reach A to C effects, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so the game effect lamp 9 can be illuminated in an appropriate lighting mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed in an appropriate manner.

[Effect 18]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute low base strong reach A to C performances that have a higher jackpot expectation than the low base weak reach A and B performances and the low base weak reach A and B performances in a normal state. The low base weak reach A and B performances and the low base strong reach A to C performances are configured to include both a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is notified. In addition, in the low base weak reach A and B performances, there are cases where a jackpot is notified as a performance result, and cases where a miss is notified as a performance result, and cases where it develops into another super reach performance, and in the low base strong reach A to C performances, there are cases where a jackpot is notified as a performance result, and cases where a miss is notified as a performance result. And, while an expectation suggestion display is displayed in the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performances, an expectation suggestion display is not displayed in the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B performances. By doing this, an expectation indication display is displayed in the title display part in low base strong reach A to C performances, which may directly notify the player that a jackpot will occur, while an expectation indication display is not displayed in the title display part in low base weak reach A and B performances, which do not directly notify the player that a jackpot will occur, thereby preventing the player from having excessive expectations due to the low base weak reach A and B performances.

In addition, in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, it is possible to display the title text in a golden form, which confirms that the performance will develop into another super reach performance, so it is possible to draw the player's attention even in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, where the expectation indication display is not displayed.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, attacca lamps LA1-LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display parts of the low base weak reach A, B performances and the low base strong reach A-C performances, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using the brightness data tables for each title display (weak reach system common title, strong reach system common title), and in the introduction parts of the low base weak reach A, B performances and the low base strong reach A-C performances, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using the brightness data tables for each introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction). In this way, in the title display parts of the low base weak reach A and B effects and the low base strong reach A to C effects, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so the game effect lamp 9 can be illuminated in an appropriate lighting mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed in an appropriate manner.

[Effect 19]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute low base strong reach A to C performances and low base strongest reach. The low base strong reach A to C performances and low base strongest reach are configured to include both a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is notified. In addition, the low base strong reach A to C performances and low base strongest reach may be executed via a selection performance using title characters corresponding to a plurality of super reach performances, and it is possible to display an expectation degree suggestion display together with the title characters in the title display part and selection performance of the low base strong reach A to C performances and low base strongest reach. Then, when displaying the expectation degree suggestion display in the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C performances and low base strongest reach, an expectation degree suggestion display composed of a plurality of star-shaped objects is displayed in stages, and when displaying the expectation degree suggestion display in the selection performance, an expectation degree suggestion display composed of a plurality of star-shaped objects is not displayed in stages. By doing this, when the expectation suggestion display is displayed in the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C performances and the low base strongest reach, the expectation suggestion display made up of a plurality of star-shaped objects is displayed in stages, whereas when the expectation suggestion display is displayed in the selection performance, the expectation suggestion display made up of a plurality of star-shaped objects is not displayed in stages, thereby eliminating the annoyance caused by the expectation suggestion display being displayed in stages not only in the title display part but also in the selection performance preceding it.

The selection effect changes stepwise from a Super Reach effect with a low probability of winning to a Super Reach effect with a high probability of winning by operating push button 31B, and the time required for one step in the selection effect, i.e., the minimum time required to switch to the title image of the next Super Reach effect, may be shorter than the time required for one step in the indication of the probability of winning in the title display part of the Low Base Strong Reach A-C effects and the Low Base Strongest Reach, i.e., the time it takes for the star-shaped object to change from black to highlighted and then to gold, giving a sense of speed to the gradual change in the selection effect.

The selection effect changes step by step from the current Super Reach effect to a Super Reach effect with one step higher chance of winning, and the number of times the push button 31B needs to be operated to change to the next effect increases with each step. This makes it possible to make the player anxious as the chance of winning the Super Reach effect increases.

In addition, if the low base strong reach A-C effects or the low base strongest reach are selected through the selection effect, the title display part of that super reach effect will start. By doing this, even if the low base strong reach A-C effects or the low base strongest reach are executed through the selection effect, the title display part will start, making it easier for the player to determine which super reach effect was ultimately executed.

[Effect 20]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a super reach performance. The super reach performance includes a title display part that displays the corresponding title character, and an introduction part until the performance result is notified. In addition, after the super reach performance notifies that a jackpot will be won, the title character corresponding to the jackpot game state can be displayed in the jackpot start performance. The title character of the jackpot start performance is displayed in a manner with a larger movement than the title character of the super reach performance. In this way, the situation in which the title character is displayed in the super reach performance is a situation in which it is not yet clear whether or not a jackpot will be won, whereas the situation in which the title character of the jackpot start performance is displayed is a situation after it has already been notified that a jackpot will be won, and it is possible to celebrate the control of the jackpot game state by moving the title character of the jackpot start performance more greatly.

In this embodiment, the title characters are displayed in a stationary state in the title display part of the Super Reach performance, but the title characters may be displayed in a moving manner in the title display part of the Super Reach performance. Even in such a configuration, the title characters of the jackpot start performance can be displayed in a manner with greater movement than the title characters of the Super Reach performance, allowing you to celebrate being controlled into a jackpot game state.

In addition, in the title display part of the Super Reach performance, when the title characters are displayed, a background dedicated to the title display is displayed (Low Base Strong Reach B, C performance, Low Base Strongest Reach performance, High Base Reach A-D), and the background of the title characters in the jackpot start performance is displayed in a manner with greater movement than the background dedicated to the title display in the Super Reach performance. By doing this, the background of the title characters in the jackpot start performance can also be moved more greatly, allowing you to celebrate the fact that you have been controlled into a jackpot game state.

In this embodiment, the background dedicated to the title display in the Super Reach performance is a still image, but the background dedicated to the title display in the Super Reach performance may also be a moving image, and even in this configuration, the background of the title characters in the jackpot start performance is displayed in a manner with more movement than the background dedicated to the title display in the Super Reach performance, so that it is possible to celebrate the control of the jackpot game state.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attakka lamps LA1 to LA4), and in the title display part of the super reach performance, uses a brightness data table for title display (weak reach system common title, strong reach system common title, high base reach system The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of weak reach A for weak reach systems, introduction of weak reach B for weak reach systems, introduction of strong reach A for strong reach systems, introduction of strong reach B for strong reach systems, introduction of strong reach C for strong reach systems, introduction of reach A for high base reach systems, introduction of reach B for high base reach systems, introduction of reach C for high base reach systems, introduction of reach D for high base reach systems). In this way, in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the game effect lamp 9 can be illuminated in a suitable illumination mode according to the title display. As a result of these, the title display can be performed suitably.

[Effect 21]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a super reach performance. The super reach performance includes a title display part that displays the corresponding title character, and an introduction part until the performance result is notified. In addition, in the operation prompting performances B and D in the introduction part of the super reach performance, it is possible to display operation prompting characters (small) that prompt the player to operate the push button 31B. At this time, the operation prompting characters (small) are displayed in a manner that moves more than the title characters corresponding to the super reach performance. In this way, the operation prompting characters (small) displayed in the introduction part prompt the player to perform an action (operation), and by moving them more than the title characters displayed in the title display part, it is possible to intuitively prompt the player to perform an action (operation).

In addition, in operation prompting effects B and D in the introductory part of the super reach effect, it is possible to display operation prompting characters (large) that prompt the player to operate the push button 31B and suggest a more favorable situation than the operation prompting characters (small), and both the operation prompting characters (small) and the operation prompting characters (large) are displayed in a manner that causes greater movement than the title characters corresponding to the super reach effect. In this way, whether the operation prompting characters (small) or (large) are moved more than the title characters displayed in the title display part, it is possible to intuitively prompt the player to take action (operate).

In this embodiment, the title characters are displayed in a stationary state in the title display part of the Super Reach performance, but the title characters may be displayed in a moving manner in the title display part of the Super Reach performance. Even in this configuration, the operation prompting characters (small) are displayed in a manner with greater movement than the title characters of the Super Reach performance, thereby intuitively encouraging the player to take action (operate). Also, even in this configuration, both the operation prompting characters (small) and the operation prompting characters (large) are displayed in a manner with greater movement than the title characters corresponding to the Super Reach performance, and whether the operation prompting characters (small) or (large) are moved more than the title characters displayed in the title display part, intuitively encouraging the player to take action (operate).

In addition, the number of characters (3) of the operation prompt characters (small) is less than the number of characters (7-13) of the title characters of the Super Reach performance, so the content of the characters can be recognized even if the operation prompt characters (small) are moved a lot.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attakka lamps LA1 to LA4), and in the title display part of the super reach performance, uses a brightness data table for title display (weak reach system common title, strong reach system common title, high base reach system The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of weak reach A for weak reach systems, introduction of weak reach B for weak reach systems, introduction of strong reach A for strong reach systems, introduction of strong reach B for strong reach systems, introduction of strong reach C for strong reach systems, introduction of reach A for high base reach systems, introduction of reach B for high base reach systems, introduction of reach C for high base reach systems, introduction of reach D for high base reach systems). In this way, in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the game effect lamp 9 can be illuminated in a suitable illumination mode according to the title display. As a result of these, the title display can be performed suitably.

[Effect 22]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 is capable of executing a super reach performance. The super reach performance is composed of a title display part that displays the corresponding title character, and an introductory part until the performance result is announced. Also, in the title display part of the super reach performance, explanatory characters that explain the contents of the super reach performance can be displayed. At this time, the explanatory characters are displayed in a manner that has greater movement than the title characters that correspond to the super reach performance. In this way, the additionally displayed explanatory characters are displayed in a manner that has greater movement than the title characters, so that attention can be drawn to the fact that explanatory characters have been added in addition to the title characters.

In this embodiment, the title characters are displayed in a stationary state in the title display part of the super reach performance, but the title characters may be displayed in a moving manner in the title display part of the super reach performance. Even in such a configuration, the explanatory characters are displayed in a manner that has more movement than the title characters of the super reach performance, so that attention can be drawn to the fact that explanatory characters have been added in addition to the title characters.

In addition, the explanatory text suggests that the Super Reach performance is advantageous, so the presence of the explanatory text draws even more attention.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attakka lamps LA1 to LA4), and in the title display part of the super reach performance, uses a brightness data table for title display (weak reach system common title, strong reach system common title, high base reach system The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of weak reach A for weak reach systems, introduction of weak reach B for weak reach systems, introduction of strong reach A for strong reach systems, introduction of strong reach B for strong reach systems, introduction of strong reach C for strong reach systems, introduction of reach A for high base reach systems, introduction of reach B for high base reach systems, introduction of reach C for high base reach systems, introduction of reach D for high base reach systems). In this way, in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the game effect lamp 9 can be illuminated in a suitable illumination mode according to the title display. As a result of these, the title display can be performed suitably.

[Effect 23]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the low base strong reach A to C performances that have a higher jackpot expectation than the low base weak reach A and B performances and the low base weak reach A and B performances. The low base weak reach A and B performances and the low base strong reach A to C performances each include a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is notified. The title characters corresponding to the low base strong reach A to C performances are displayed in a larger character size than the title title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B performances. By doing this, the title characters corresponding to the low base strong reach A to C performances with a relatively high expectation are displayed in a larger character size than the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B performances with a relatively low expectation, so that even just the title characters can be recognized by the user that the low base strong reach A to C performances have a higher jackpot expectation than the low base weak reach A and B performances.

In addition, the number of characters (10) that make up the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A, B effects is greater than the number of characters (7, 8) that make up the title characters corresponding to the low base strong reach B, C effects, but the display area size of the title characters corresponding to the low base strong reach B, C effects is larger than the display area size of the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A, B effects. By doing this, the display area size occupied by one character is larger for the title characters corresponding to the low base strong reach B, C effects, so that the player can intuitively recognize that the low base strong reach B, C effects have a higher chance of winning than the low base weak reach A, B effects.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, attacca lamps LA1-LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display parts of the low base weak reach A, B performances and the low base strong reach A-C performances, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using the brightness data tables for each title display (weak reach system common title, strong reach system common title), and in the introduction parts of the low base weak reach A, B performances and the low base strong reach A-C performances, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using the brightness data tables for each introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach A introduction, strong reach system strong reach B introduction, strong reach system strong reach C introduction). In this way, in the title display parts of the low base weak reach A and B effects and the low base strong reach A to C effects, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so the game effect lamp 9 can be illuminated in an appropriate lighting mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed in an appropriate manner.

[Effect 24]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a super reach performance after the decorative pattern displayed on the image display device 5 becomes a reach state. The super reach performance is composed of a title display part that displays the corresponding title character, and an introduction part until the performance result is notified. In addition, a decorative pattern (large) is displayed in a reach state before the title display part in the super reach performance, and then the decorative pattern (large) displayed in the reach state is reduced to a small decorative pattern (small). At this time, at least one character of the title character corresponding to the super reach performance is displayed in a size larger than the decorative pattern (small). In this way, at least one character of the title character corresponding to the super reach performance is displayed in a size larger than the reduced decorative pattern (small), so that the title character can be focused on in the title display part.

In addition, all characters of the title letters corresponding to the Super Reach performance are displayed smaller than the decorative pattern (large) and larger than the decorative pattern (small). By doing this, the decorative pattern (large) can be clearly recognized when the Reach state is reached, and thereafter, the decorative pattern (large) is reduced to a decorative pattern (small), and each character that makes up the title letters is displayed larger than the decorative pattern (small), so that attention can be drawn to the title letters in the title display part.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attakka lamps LA1 to LA4), and in the title display part of the super reach performance, uses a brightness data table for title display (weak reach system common title, strong reach system common title, high base reach system The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of weak reach A for weak reach systems, introduction of weak reach B for weak reach systems, introduction of strong reach A for strong reach systems, introduction of strong reach B for strong reach systems, introduction of strong reach C for strong reach systems, introduction of reach A for high base reach systems, introduction of reach B for high base reach systems, introduction of reach C for high base reach systems, introduction of reach D for high base reach systems). In this way, in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the game effect lamp 9 can be illuminated in a suitable illumination mode according to the title display. As a result of these, the title display can be performed suitably.

[Effect 25]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a super reach performance. The super reach performance includes a title display part that displays the corresponding title character, and an introduction part until the performance result is notified. In addition, in the operation prompting performances B and D in the introduction part of the super reach performance, an operation prompting character (small) that prompts the player to operate the push button 31B can be displayed. In addition, after the fact that a jackpot will be won is notified by the super reach performance, a title character corresponding to the jackpot game state can be displayed in the jackpot start performance. Then, the title character of the jackpot start performance is displayed larger than the operation prompting character (small). In this way, the situation in which the operation prompting character (small) is displayed in the super reach performance is a situation in which it is not yet clear whether or not a jackpot will be won, whereas the situation in which the title character of the jackpot start performance is displayed is a situation after it has already been notified that a jackpot will be won, and it is possible to celebrate the control to the jackpot game state by displaying the title character of the jackpot start performance larger than the operation prompting character (small).

The title characters of the jackpot start performance are composed of "BIG" or "REGULAR" and "BONUS", and after "BIG" or "REGULAR" is displayed at the top of the fixed position, "BONUS" is displayed at the bottom of the fixed position, and after "BONUS" is displayed at the bottom of the fixed position, "BIG" or "REGULAR" displayed at the top of the fixed position and "BONUS" displayed at the bottom of the fixed position are gradually enlarged. Furthermore, "BIG" or "REGULAR" and "BONUS" are displayed at the smallest size when displayed at the top and bottom of the fixed position, and the size of the characters when "BIG" or "REGULAR" and "BONUS" are displayed at the top and bottom of the fixed position is larger than the size of the characters that make up the operation prompt characters (small). By doing this, the characters that make up the title characters for the jackpot start performance are always displayed larger than the characters that make up the operation prompt characters (small), making it even more congratulatory to be in control of the jackpot game state.

In addition, the smallest character in the string of characters that make up the title characters of the jackpot start performance is larger than the largest character in the string of characters that make up the operation prompt characters (small). By doing this, no matter which character you focus on, the title characters of the jackpot start performance are displayed larger than the operation prompt characters (small), so you can be more congratulated on being controlled into the jackpot game state.

It is also possible to display special prompting characters (large) that suggest a more favorable situation than the small prompting characters, and the large prompting characters are displayed larger than the title characters of the jackpot start performance, allowing the player to sense the favorable situation.

In addition, the smallest character in the string of characters that make up the operation prompt character (large) is displayed larger than the largest character in the string of characters that make up the title character of the jackpot start performance, so that no matter which character the player focuses on, the operation prompt character (large) is displayed larger than the title character of the jackpot start performance, allowing the player to sense the advantageous situation.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attakka lamps LA1 to LA4), and in the title display part of the super reach performance, uses a brightness data table for title display (weak reach system common title, strong reach system common title, high base reach system The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of weak reach A for weak reach systems, introduction of weak reach B for weak reach systems, introduction of strong reach A for strong reach systems, introduction of strong reach B for strong reach systems, introduction of strong reach C for strong reach systems, introduction of reach A for high base reach systems, introduction of reach B for high base reach systems, introduction of reach C for high base reach systems, introduction of reach D for high base reach systems). In this way, in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the game effect lamp 9 can be illuminated in a suitable illumination mode according to the title display. As a result of these, the title display can be performed suitably.

[Effect 26]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a super reach performance. The super reach performance includes a title display part that displays the corresponding title character, and an introduction part until the performance result is notified. In addition, after the super reach performance notifies that a jackpot will be won, the title character corresponding to the jackpot game state can be displayed in the jackpot start performance. Then, the title character of the jackpot start performance is displayed larger than the title character corresponding to the super reach performance. In this way, the situation in which the title character is displayed in the super reach performance is a situation in which it is not yet clear whether or not a jackpot will be won, whereas the situation in which the title character of the jackpot start performance is displayed is a situation after it has already been notified that a jackpot will be won, and it is possible to celebrate the control of the jackpot game state by displaying the title character of the jackpot start performance larger than the title character corresponding to the super reach performance.

The Super Reach performance also includes multiple types of Super Reach performance with different title characters, and the title character of the performance that starts the jackpot is displayed larger than the title character that corresponds to any of the types of Super Reach performance, thereby celebrating the fact that the game has been controlled to a jackpot gaming state.

In addition, the smallest character in the string of characters that make up the title characters of the jackpot start performance is displayed larger than the largest character in the string of characters that make up the title characters corresponding to any type of super reach performance, so no matter which character you focus on, the title characters of the jackpot start performance will be displayed larger than the title characters that correspond to the super reach performance, so you can celebrate being controlled into a jackpot gaming state even more.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attakka lamps LA1 to LA4), and in the title display part of the super reach performance, uses a brightness data table for title display (weak reach system common title, strong reach system common title, high base reach system The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of weak reach A for weak reach systems, introduction of weak reach B for weak reach systems, introduction of strong reach A for strong reach systems, introduction of strong reach B for strong reach systems, introduction of strong reach C for strong reach systems, introduction of reach A for high base reach systems, introduction of reach B for high base reach systems, introduction of reach C for high base reach systems, introduction of reach D for high base reach systems). In this way, in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the game effect lamp 9 can be illuminated in a suitable illumination mode according to the title display. As a result of these, the title display can be performed suitably.

[Effect 27]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute low base weak reach A and B performances. The low base weak reach A and B performances are composed of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. In addition, in the operation prompting performance A executed before the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B performances, it is possible to display operation prompting characters (small) that prompt the player to operate the push button 31B. Then, the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B performances are displayed larger than the operation prompting characters (small). In this way, the operation prompting characters (small) are displayed before the title display part, and the title characters displayed thereafter are displayed larger than the operation prompting characters (small), so that attention can be drawn to the title characters.

In addition, after the operation prompting characters (small) are displayed, the game progresses to the low base weak reach A and B performance, and the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B performance begins. By doing this, the operation prompting characters (small) are displayed before the title display part in the series of events, and the title characters that are displayed afterwards are displayed larger than the operation prompting characters (small), drawing attention to the title characters.

In addition, the smallest character among the characters that make up the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects) is displayed larger than the largest character among the characters that make up the operation prompt characters (small), so no matter which character you focus on, you can draw attention to the title characters.

The performance control CPU 120 also controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacker lamps LA1-LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title), and in the introduction part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using the brightness data table for each introduction part (weak reach introduction weak reach A, weak reach introduction weak reach B). In this way, in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the game effect lamps 9 can be illuminated in a suitable illumination mode according to the title display. As a result of these, the title display can be performed suitably.

[Effect 28]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute low base weak reach A and B performances. The low base weak reach A and B performances are configured to include a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is notified. In addition, in the operation prompting performance A executed before the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B performances, it is possible to display an operation prompting character (small) that prompts the player to operate the push button 31B. In addition, after the low base weak reach A and B performances notify that a jackpot will be generated, it is possible to display the title character of the jackpot start performance corresponding to the controlled jackpot game state. Then, the title character of the jackpot start performance is displayed larger than the title character corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B performances, and the title character corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B performances is displayed larger than the operation prompting character (small). By doing this, the situation where the title characters are displayed in the low base weak reach A and B performances is one in which it is not yet clear whether or not a jackpot will occur, whereas the situation where the title characters of the jackpot start performance are displayed is one in which it has already been announced that a jackpot will occur, and by displaying the title characters of the jackpot start performance larger than the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B performances, it is possible to celebrate the control of the jackpot game state. Also, by displaying the operation prompt characters (small) before the title display part, and displaying the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B performances displayed afterwards larger than the operation prompt characters (small), it is possible to draw attention to the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B performances.

In addition, after the operation prompt character (small) is displayed, it progresses to the low base weak reach A, B performance, the title display part of the low base weak reach A, B performance starts, and after the low base weak reach A, B performance notifies the player that a jackpot will occur, the title character of the jackpot start performance is displayed. In this way, the operation prompt character (small) is displayed before the title display part in the series of events, and the title character corresponding to the low base weak reach A, B performance that is displayed afterwards is displayed larger than the operation prompt character (small), so that attention can be drawn to the title character corresponding to the low base weak reach A, B performance, and after the low base weak reach A, B performance notifies the player that a jackpot will occur, the title character of the jackpot start performance is displayed larger than the title character corresponding to the low base weak reach A, B performance, so that the player can celebrate being controlled to a jackpot game state.

The performance control CPU 120 also controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacker lamps LA1-LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title), and in the introduction part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using the brightness data table for each introduction part (weak reach introduction weak reach A, weak reach introduction weak reach B). In this way, in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the game effect lamps 9 can be illuminated in a suitable illumination mode according to the title display. As a result of these, the title display can be performed suitably.

[Effect 29]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a super reach performance. The super reach performance includes a title display part that displays the corresponding title character, and an introduction part until the performance result is notified. In addition, after the super reach performance notifies that a jackpot will be won, the title character corresponding to the jackpot game state can be displayed in the jackpot start performance. The title character of the jackpot start performance is displayed for a longer time than the title character corresponding to the super reach performance. In this way, the situation in which the title character is displayed in the super reach performance is a situation in which it is not yet clear whether or not a jackpot will be won, whereas the situation in which the title character of the jackpot start performance is displayed is a situation after it has already been notified that a jackpot will be won, and it is possible to celebrate the control of the jackpot game state by displaying the title character of the jackpot start performance for a longer time than the title character corresponding to the super reach performance.

In addition, the time from when all the characters constituting the title characters of the jackpot start performance are displayed until at least a part of the characters are no longer displayed is longer than the time from when a part of the characters constituting the title characters corresponding to the super reach performance is displayed until all of the characters are no longer displayed. By doing this, the time during which the title characters of the jackpot start performance, which has a congratulatory meaning, are clearly visible is made longer than the time during which the title characters corresponding to the super reach performance, which is intended to increase the possibility of a jackpot, are displayed, thereby giving the player a sense of satisfaction.

In addition, after the title letters of the jackpot start performance are displayed, the title letters of the jackpot start performance are switched to a right hit promotion image (small) and a right hit promotion image (large) which suggest the operation method during the jackpot game state, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since they switched to the right hit promotion image (small) and right hit promotion image (large), advantageous control is exercised by operating using the operation method suggested by the right hit promotion image (small) and right hit promotion image (large) (an operation method for shooting the game ball towards the right game area 2R), and the time taken to switch from the title letters of the jackpot start performance to the right hit promotion image (small) and right hit promotion image (large) is shorter than the time taken to end the title letters corresponding to the super reach performance. By doing this, the title characters of the jackpot start performance are switched to the right hit prompt image (small) and right hit prompt image (large) in a short time, and then after a specified period of time has passed, control is performed that gives an advantage to the player by operating in the manner suggested by the right hit prompt image (small) and right hit prompt image (large), preventing the player from being disadvantaged by changing the operating method from the period when the title characters of the jackpot start performance ends.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attakka lamps LA1 to LA4), and in the title display part of the super reach performance, uses a brightness data table for title display (weak reach system common title, strong reach system common title, high base reach system The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of weak reach A for weak reach systems, introduction of weak reach B for weak reach systems, introduction of strong reach A for strong reach systems, introduction of strong reach B for strong reach systems, introduction of strong reach C for strong reach systems, introduction of reach A for high base reach systems, introduction of reach B for high base reach systems, introduction of reach C for high base reach systems, introduction of reach D for high base reach systems). In this way, in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the game effect lamp 9 can be illuminated in a suitable illumination mode according to the title display. As a result of these, the title display can be performed suitably.

[Effect 30]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a super reach performance. The super reach performance includes a title display part that displays the corresponding title character, and an introduction part until the performance result is notified. In addition, in the operation prompting performances B and D in the introduction part of the super reach performance, an operation prompting character (small) that prompts the player to operate the push button 31B can be displayed. In addition, after the fact that a jackpot will be won is notified by the super reach performance, a title character corresponding to the jackpot game state can be displayed in the jackpot start performance. Then, the title character of the jackpot start performance is displayed for a longer time than the operation prompting character (small). In this way, the situation in which the operation prompting character (small) is displayed in the super reach performance is a situation in which it is not yet clear whether or not a jackpot will be won, whereas the situation in which the title character of the jackpot start performance is displayed is a situation after it has already been notified that a jackpot will be won, and it is possible to celebrate the control to the jackpot game state by displaying the title character of the jackpot start performance for a longer time than the operation prompting character (small).

The operation prompting character (small) is displayed until the prompted operation is performed or the time during which the prompted operation is valid has elapsed, and the time during which the title character of the jackpot start performance is displayed is longer than the time from when the operation prompting character (small) is displayed until the time during which the prompted operation is valid has elapsed without the prompted operation being performed. By doing this, it is possible to celebrate the fact that the jackpot game state has been controlled by displaying the title character of the jackpot start performance for a longer period of time than the time during which the operation prompting character (small) is displayed without the prompted operation being performed.

In addition, the time from when all the characters constituting the title character of the jackpot start performance are displayed until at least a part of the character string disappears is longer than the time during which the operation prompt character (small) is displayed. By doing this, the time during which the title character of the jackpot start performance, which has a congratulatory meaning, is clearly visible is longer than the time during which the operation prompt character (small), which is intended to encourage the player to operate, is displayed, giving the player a sense of satisfaction.

It is also possible to display large operation prompting characters that suggest a more advantageous situation than small operation prompting characters, where small operation prompting characters are displayed without any prompting introduction effect, and large operation prompting characters are displayed after the prompting introduction effect has been executed. The time that the title characters of the jackpot start effect are displayed is longer than the time that large operation prompting characters are displayed. In this way, the time that the congratulatory advantageous state name display is displayed is longer than the time that large operation prompting characters accompanied by a prompt introduction display are displayed, giving the player a sense of satisfaction.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attakka lamps LA1 to LA4), and in the title display part of the super reach performance, uses a brightness data table for title display (weak reach system common title, strong reach system common title, high base reach system The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of weak reach A for weak reach systems, introduction of weak reach B for weak reach systems, introduction of strong reach A for strong reach systems, introduction of strong reach B for strong reach systems, introduction of strong reach C for strong reach systems, introduction of reach A for high base reach systems, introduction of reach B for high base reach systems, introduction of reach C for high base reach systems, introduction of reach D for high base reach systems). In this way, in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the game effect lamp 9 can be illuminated in a suitable illumination mode according to the title display. As a result of these, the title display can be performed suitably.

[Effect 31]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute low base weak reach A and B performances. The low base weak reach A and B performances are composed of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. In addition, in the operation prompting performance A executed before the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B performances, an operation prompting character (small) that prompts the player to operate the push button 31B can be displayed. Then, the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B performances are displayed for a longer time than the operation prompting character (small). In this way, the operation prompting character (small) is displayed before the title display part, and the title characters displayed thereafter are displayed for a longer time than the operation prompting character (small), so that the player can pay attention to the title characters.

In addition, the time from when all the characters making up the title are displayed until at least a part of the characters disappears is longer than the time that the action prompt character (small) is displayed. By doing this, the time that the title display is clearly visible is longer than the time that the prompt character display, which is intended to encourage the player to take an action, is displayed, making it possible to draw attention to the title characters.

It is also possible to display operation prompting characters (large) which suggest a more favorable situation than operation prompting characters (small), with operation prompting characters (small) being displayed as characters encouraging an operation without an introductory prompt, and operation prompting characters (large) being displayed as characters encouraging an operation after an introductory prompt has been executed. The time period during which the title characters are displayed is longer than the time period during which the operation prompting characters (large) are displayed. In this way, the time period during which the title display is displayed is longer than the time period during which operation prompting characters (large) accompanied by an introductory prompt are displayed, drawing attention to the title characters.

The performance control CPU 120 also controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacker lamps LA1-LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title), and in the introduction part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using the brightness data table for each introduction part (weak reach introduction weak reach A, weak reach introduction weak reach B). In this way, in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the game effect lamps 9 can be illuminated in a suitable illumination mode according to the title display. As a result of these, the title display can be performed suitably.

[Effect 32]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute low base weak reach A and B performances. The low base weak reach A and B performances are configured to include a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is notified. In addition, in the operation prompting performance A executed before the title display part in the low base weak reach A and B performances, an operation prompting character (small) that prompts the player to operate the push button 31B can be displayed. In addition, after the fact that a jackpot will be obtained is notified by the low base weak reach A and B performances, the title character of the jackpot start performance corresponding to the controlled jackpot game state can be displayed. Then, the title character of the jackpot start performance is displayed for a longer time than the title character corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B performances, and the title character corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B performances is displayed for a longer time than the operation prompting character (small). By doing this, the situation in which the title characters are displayed in the low base weak reach A and B performances is one in which it is not yet clear whether or not a jackpot will occur, whereas the situation in which the title characters of the jackpot start performance are displayed is one in which it has already been announced that a jackpot will occur, and by displaying the title characters of the jackpot start performance for a longer period of time than the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B performances, it is possible to celebrate the fact that the game is controlled to a jackpot game state. Also, by displaying the operation prompt characters (small) before the title display part, and displaying the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B performances displayed thereafter for a longer period of time than the operation prompt characters (small), it is possible to draw attention to the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B performances.

The performance control CPU 120 also controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacker lamps LA1-LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title), and in the introduction part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using the brightness data table for each introduction part (weak reach introduction weak reach A, weak reach introduction weak reach B). In this way, in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the game effect lamps 9 can be illuminated in a suitable illumination mode according to the title display. As a result of these, the title display can be performed suitably.

[Effect 33]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute low base weak reach A, B performance, and low base strong reach A to C performance in the normal state, and can execute high base reach A to D performance in the probability variable state that is more advantageous than the normal state. The low base weak reach A, B performance, low base strong reach A to C performance, and high base reach A to D performance in the probability variable state are configured to include a title display part that displays the corresponding title character and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. In addition, the low base strong reach A to C performance has a higher jackpot expectation than the low base weak reach A, B performance, the high base reach B to D performance has a higher jackpot expectation than the high base reach A performance, and the high base reach A performance has a higher jackpot expectation than the low base weak reach A, B performance. Then, the expectation degree suggestion display is displayed in the title display part of the low base strong reach A to C performances, the high base reach A performance, and the high base reach B to D performances, and the expectation degree suggestion display is not displayed in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances. By doing this, since the low base weak reach A and B performances in the normal state have a lower jackpot expectation than the low base strong reach A to C performances in the normal state, the expectation degree suggestion display is displayed in the low base strong reach A to C performances, but the expectation degree suggestion display is not displayed in the low base weak reach A and B performances, so that excessive expectations of a jackpot due to the low base weak reach A and B performances are not generated. On the other hand, although the high base reach A performance in a special probability state, which is more favorable than the normal state, has a lower expectation of a jackpot than the high base reach B to D performance in the special probability state, it has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the low base weak reach A and B performances in the normal state. Therefore, by displaying an expectation indication display in both the high base reach A performance and the high base reach B to D performance, it is possible to expect a jackpot in both the high base reach A performance and the high base reach B to D performance.

[Effect 34]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a super reach performance both in the normal state and in a probability variable state that is more advantageous than the normal state. The super reach performance in the normal state and the super reach performance in the probability variable state are both configured to include a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. The title display part of the super reach performance in the probability variable state is shorter than the title display part of the super reach performance in the normal state. In this way, the title display part of the super reach performance in the probability variable state is shorter than the title display part of the super reach performance in the normal state, and the game in the probability variable state can be played at a good tempo.

In addition, even if the frequency with which the Super Reach performance is executed during the special probability state is higher than the frequency with which the Super Reach performance is executed during the normal state, the title display part of the Super Reach performance during the special probability state is shorter than the title display part of the Super Reach performance during the normal state, allowing play in the special probability state to proceed at a good tempo.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attakka lamps LA1-LA4), and in the title display part of the super reach performance in the normal state and the super reach performance in the probability change state, it also uses the brightness data table for title display (weak reach system common title, strong reach system common title, high base reach system common title, The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of weak reach A for weak reach systems, introduction of weak reach B for weak reach systems, introduction of strong reach A for strong reach systems, introduction of strong reach B for strong reach systems, introduction of strong reach C for strong reach systems, introduction of reach A for high base reach systems, introduction of reach B for high base reach systems, introduction of reach C for high base reach systems, introduction of reach D for high base reach systems) in the super reach performance in the normal state and in the introduction part of the super reach performance in the probability change state. In this way, in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the game effect lamp 9 can be illuminated in a suitable illumination mode according to the title display. As a result of these, the title display can be performed suitably.

[Effect 35]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the low base strong reach performance, which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the low base strong reach performance A to C and the low base strong reach performance A to C. The low base strong reach performance A to C and the low base strongest reach performance are configured to include both a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. In addition, when the game control microcomputer 100 performs 900 variable displays without being controlled by a jackpot in the normal state, it controls to the time-saving state B (play time), which is more advantageous than the normal state. In the title display part in the low base strong reach A to C performances, the title characters are displayed in a display mode in which the title characters are displayed while moving from the left side of the display area to the center, and in the title display part in the low base strongest reach performance, the title characters are displayed in a display mode in which the title characters are displayed reduced from an enlarged display, and when controlled to the time-saving state B (Yu-time), in the Yu-time start performance, the title characters of the Yu-time start performance are displayed in a display mode in which the title characters are displayed reduced from an enlarged display, similar to the title display part in the low base strongest reach performance. In this way, when controlled to the time-saving state B (Yu-time), in the Yu-time start performance, the title characters of the Yu-time start performance are displayed in the same display mode as the title characters of the low base strongest reach performance, which has a relatively high expectation of a jackpot, so that it can be recognized that the time-saving state B (Yu-time) is highly advantageous.

In addition, when the title characters are erased in the Yu-time start performance, they are erased in a display mode in which they are enlarged as they are erased, similar to when the title characters are erased in the title display part of the low-base strongest reach performance. By doing this, when the title characters are erased in the Yu-time start performance, they are erased in the same display mode as when the title characters are erased in the low-base strongest reach performance, which has a relatively high expectation of a jackpot, so that the time-saving state B (Yu-time) can be recognized as being highly advantageous.

[Effect 36]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a super reach performance. The super reach performance includes a title display part that displays the corresponding title character, and an introduction part until the performance result is notified. In addition, when the game control microcomputer 100 performs 900 variable displays without being controlled to a jackpot in the normal state, it controls to a time-saving state B (play time) that is more advantageous than the normal state. When controlled to the time-saving state B (play time), the title character of the play time start performance is displayed in the play time start performance, and the size of the characters constituting the title character of the play time start performance is larger than the size of the characters constituting the title character corresponding to the super reach performance. By doing so, the situation in which the title character is displayed in the super reach performance is a situation in which it is not yet clear whether or not a jackpot will be generated, while the title character of the play time start performance is a situation in which it is controlled to the time-saving state B (play time), and the characters constituting the title character of the play time start performance are displayed larger than the characters constituting the title character corresponding to the super reach performance, so it is possible to celebrate being controlled to the time-saving state B (play time).

The Super Reach performance also includes multiple types of Super Reach performance with different title characters, and the characters that make up the title characters of the Yu-Time start performance are larger than the characters that make up the title characters that correspond to any type of Super Reach performance. By doing this, the characters that make up the title characters of the Yu-Time start performance are displayed larger than the characters that make up the title characters that correspond to any type of Super Reach performance, so you can celebrate being controlled to time-saving state B (Yu-Time).

In addition, the smallest character among the characters that make up the title characters of the Yu-Time start effect is larger than the largest character among the characters that make up the title characters corresponding to any type of Super Reach effect. By doing this, no matter which character you focus on, the title characters of the Yu-Time start effect will be displayed larger than the title characters that correspond to the Super Reach effect, so you can celebrate being controlled to the time-saving state B (Yu-Time) even more.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attakka lamps LA1 to LA4), and in the title display part of the super reach performance, uses a brightness data table for title display (weak reach system common title, strong reach system common title, high base reach system The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of weak reach A for weak reach systems, introduction of weak reach B for weak reach systems, introduction of strong reach A for strong reach systems, introduction of strong reach B for strong reach systems, introduction of strong reach C for strong reach systems, introduction of reach A for high base reach systems, introduction of reach B for high base reach systems, introduction of reach C for high base reach systems, introduction of reach D for high base reach systems). In this way, in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the game effect lamp 9 can be illuminated in a suitable illumination mode according to the title display. As a result of these, the title display can be performed suitably.

[Effect 37]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a super reach performance. The super reach performance includes a title display part that displays the corresponding title character, and an introduction part until the performance result is notified. In addition, when 900 variable displays are performed in the normal state without being controlled to a jackpot, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to a time-saving state B (play time) that is more advantageous than the normal state. When controlled to the time-saving state B (play time), the title character of the play time start performance is displayed in the play time start performance, and the display time of the title character of the play time start performance is longer than the display time of the title character corresponding to the super reach performance. In this way, the situation in which the title character is displayed in the super reach performance is a situation in which it is not yet clear whether or not a jackpot will be generated, while the title character of the play time start performance is a situation in which it is controlled to the time-saving state B (play time), and the title character of the play time start performance is displayed longer than the title character corresponding to the super reach performance, so it is possible to celebrate being controlled to the time-saving state B (play time).

In addition, the time from when all the characters constituting the title characters of the Yu-Time start effect are displayed until at least a part of the characters are no longer displayed is longer than the time from when a part of the characters constituting the title characters corresponding to the Super Reach effect is displayed until all of the characters are no longer displayed. By doing this, the time during which the title characters of the Yu-Time start effect, which has a congratulatory meaning, are clearly visible is longer than the time during which the title characters corresponding to the Super Reach effect, which is intended to increase the possibility of a jackpot, are displayed, giving the player a sense of satisfaction.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attakka lamps LA1 to LA4), and in the title display part of the super reach performance, uses a brightness data table for title display (weak reach system common title, strong reach system common title, high base reach system The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of weak reach A for weak reach systems, introduction of weak reach B for weak reach systems, introduction of strong reach A for strong reach systems, introduction of strong reach B for strong reach systems, introduction of strong reach C for strong reach systems, introduction of reach A for high base reach systems, introduction of reach B for high base reach systems, introduction of reach C for high base reach systems, introduction of reach D for high base reach systems). In this way, in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the game effect lamp 9 can be illuminated in a suitable illumination mode according to the title display. As a result of these, the title display can be performed suitably.

[Effect 38]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a super reach performance. The super reach performance includes a title display part that displays the corresponding title character, and an introduction part until the performance result is notified. In addition, when 900 variable displays are performed in the normal state without being controlled by a jackpot, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to a time-saving state B (play time) that is more advantageous than the normal state. In addition, in the normal state, it is possible to display the remaining number of times until the play time, which indicates the remaining number of times until the time-saving state B (play time). And, the size of the characters constituting the title characters corresponding to the super reach performance is larger than the size of the characters constituting the remaining number of times until the play time. In this way, the title characters corresponding to the super reach performance are displayed larger than the characters constituting the remaining number of times until the play time, so that attention can be drawn to the title characters corresponding to the super reach performance.

The super reach effect includes low base weak reach A and B effects, and low base strong reach A to C effects, which have a higher jackpot expectation than low base weak reach A and B effects, and the remaining number of times until Yu-time is displayed during the execution of low base weak reach A and B effects, but not during the execution of low base strong reach A to C effects. By doing this, the remaining number of times until Yu-time is displayed in low base weak reach A and B effects, which have a low jackpot expectation, so that the player can be aware of the number of times until time-saving state B (Yu-time), while in low base strong reach A to C effects, which have a high jackpot expectation, the remaining number of times until Yu-time is not displayed, so that the player can focus on the content of the effect. Also, since time-saving state B (Yu-time) is more likely to result in a jackpot that is more favorable than in the normal state, the player's disappointment can be alleviated when there are few remaining times until time-saving state B (Yu-time).

In addition, if the selection effect progresses to a low base strong reach A-C effect without going through the low base weak reach A or B effect, the remaining number of times until Yu-Time is not displayed even during the selection effect. This prevents the remaining number of times until Yu-Time from interfering with the selection effect that determines a super reach effect of low base strong reach A-C or higher, and also reduces the player's disappointment when there are only a few times remaining until the time-saving state B (Yu-Time).

In addition, when a jackpot is announced in the low base strong reach A-C performance, the character of the number of times remaining until the play time is not displayed again, and the jackpot game state is controlled, and when a miss is announced in the low base strong reach A-C performance, the character of the number of times remaining until the play time is displayed again after the low base strong reach A-C performance ends. In this way, when a jackpot is announced in the low base strong reach A-C performance, the character of the number of times remaining until the play time is not displayed again, so that the disappointment of the player can be alleviated when there are few remaining times until the time-saving state B (play time). In addition, when a miss is announced in the low base strong reach A-C performance, the character of the number of times remaining until the play time is displayed again after the low base strong reach A-C performance ends, so that the player can feel relieved as soon as possible when there are few remaining times until the time-saving state B (play time).

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table composed of brightness data to control the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attakka lamps LA1 to LA4), and in the title display part of the super reach performance, uses a brightness data table for title display (weak reach system common title, strong reach system common title, high base reach system The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of weak reach A for weak reach systems, introduction of weak reach B for weak reach systems, introduction of strong reach A for strong reach systems, introduction of strong reach B for strong reach systems, introduction of strong reach C for strong reach systems, introduction of reach A for high base reach systems, introduction of reach B for high base reach systems, introduction of reach C for high base reach systems, introduction of reach D for high base reach systems). In this way, in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the game effect lamp 9 can be illuminated in a suitable illumination mode according to the title display. As a result of these, the title display can be performed suitably.

[Effect 39]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a super reach performance. The super reach performance includes a title display part that displays the corresponding title character, and an introduction part until the performance result is notified. In addition, when 900 variable displays are performed in the normal state without being controlled by a jackpot, the game control microcomputer 100 controls the game to a time-saving state B (play time) that is more advantageous than the normal state. In addition, in the operation prompting performances A to D that are executed at a timing related to the super reach performance, it is possible to display an operation prompting character (small) that prompts the player to operate the push button 31B. In addition, in the normal state, it is possible to display a character indicating the remaining number of times until the time-saving state B (play time) is controlled. And, the size of the character that constitutes the operation prompting character (small) is larger than the size of the character that constitutes the character indicating the remaining number of times until the play time. In this way, the operation prompting character (small) is displayed larger than the character that constitutes the character indicating the remaining number of times until the play time, so that it is possible to draw attention to the operation prompting character (small) and effectively prompt the player to perform an action (operation).

In addition, when the low base strong reach A-C performances among the super reach performances are executed, if the operation prompt character (small) is displayed in the operation prompt performance A executed before the title display part, the character indicating the number of times remaining until Yu-time is displayed at the same time, whereas if the operation prompt character (small) is displayed in the operation prompt performance D executed at the end of the introduction part, the character indicating the number of times remaining until Yu-time is not displayed. By doing this, the character indicating the number of times remaining until Yu-time is displayed at the same time as the prompt character display operation prompt character (small) before the development into the low base strong reach A-C performance, it is possible to make the player aware of the number of times until the time-saving state B (Yu-time), and by not displaying the character indicating the number of times remaining until Yu-time in the operation prompt character (small) in the introduction part, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not a jackpot will be announced.

In addition, when the low base strong reach A-C effects are executed, in the operation prompting effect A executed before the title display part, only the operation prompting character (small) is displayed out of the operation prompting character (small) and the operation prompting character (large), which suggests a more favorable situation than the operation prompting character (small), whereas in the operation prompting effect D executed at the end of the introductory part, both the operation prompting character (small) and the operation prompting character (large) can be displayed, and when the operation prompting character (large) is displayed in the low base strong reach A-C effects, the character showing the number of times remaining until the play time is not displayed at the same time. By doing this, in addition to being notified of whether or not a jackpot will be hit, it is possible to draw attention to the fact that the operation prompting character (large) is displayed, suggesting a more favorable situation.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display part of the super reach performance, controls the game effect lamps 9 using a brightness data table for title display (common title for weak reach systems, common title for strong reach systems), and in the introduction part of the super reach performance, controls the game effect lamps 9 using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of weak reach A for weak reach systems, introduction of weak reach B for weak reach systems, introduction of strong reach A for strong reach systems, introduction of strong reach B for strong reach systems, introduction of strong reach C for strong reach systems). In this way, in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so the game effect lamp 9 can be illuminated in an appropriate illumination mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

[Effect 40]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a super reach performance. The super reach performance includes a title display part that displays the corresponding title character, and an introduction part until the performance result is notified. In addition, when 900 variable displays are performed in the normal state without being controlled by a jackpot, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to a time-saving state B (play time) that is more advantageous than the normal state. In addition, after the fact that a jackpot will be won is notified by the super reach performance, the title character of the jackpot start performance corresponding to the controlled jackpot game state can be displayed. In addition, in the normal state, the remaining number of times until the play time, which indicates the remaining number of times until the time-saving state B (play time), can be displayed. Then, before displaying the title character of the jackpot start performance, the remaining number of times until the play time is erased, and the size of the characters constituting the title character of the jackpot start performance is larger than the size of the characters constituting the remaining number of times until the play time. By doing this, the situation in which the title characters of the jackpot start performance are displayed is one in which it has already been notified that a jackpot has occurred, and the characters indicating the number of times remaining until Yu-time are unnecessary, so the characters indicating the number of times remaining until Yu-time are erased before the title characters of the jackpot start performance are displayed, and the characters constituting the title characters of the jackpot start performance are displayed larger than the characters constituting the number of times remaining until Yu-time, so that the player can be congratulated for being controlled into the jackpot game state.

In addition, regardless of the number of remaining plays until time-saving state B (Yu-time), the size of the characters that make up the characters for the number of remaining plays until Yu-time is the same, and the size of the characters that make up the title characters of the jackpot start performance is larger than the size of the characters that make up the characters for the number of remaining plays until Yu-time. By doing this, regardless of the number of remaining plays until time-saving state B (Yu-time), the characters that make up the title characters of the jackpot start performance are displayed larger than the characters that make up the characters for the number of remaining plays until Yu-time, so you can celebrate being controlled to the jackpot gaming state.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 performs the variable display using a time-saving B start variable pattern having a longer variable time than the variable pattern normally used in the time-saving state B (Yu-time) in the variable display caused by the game ball first entering the first start winning port or the second start winning port in the time-saving state B (Yu-time). By doing this, the Yu-time start presentation can be executed with a variable period according to the time-saving B start variable pattern in the first variable in the time-saving state B (Yu-time).

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacca lamps LA1-LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display part of the super reach performance, controls the game effect lamps 9 using a brightness data table for title display (common title for weak reach systems, common title for strong reach systems), and in the introduction part of the super reach performance, controls the game effect lamps 9 using a brightness data table for the introduction part (introduction of weak reach A for weak reach systems, introduction of weak reach B for weak reach systems, introduction of strong reach A for strong reach systems, introduction of strong reach B for strong reach systems, introduction of strong reach C for strong reach systems). In this way, in the title display part of the super reach performance, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introductory part, so the game effect lamp 9 can be illuminated in an appropriate illumination mode according to the title display. As a result, the title can be displayed appropriately.

[Effect 41]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute low base weak reach A and B performances. The low base weak reach A and B performances are configured to include a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is notified. In addition, it is possible to change and display the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B performances from a white state to a red or gold state. Then, when the title characters are changed from a white state to a red or gold state in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, the time during which the title characters are displayed in the red or gold state is longer than the time during which the title characters are displayed in the white state. In this way, when the title characters are changed from a white state to a red or gold state in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, the title characters in the red or gold state, i.e., the title characters in the state after the change, are displayed longer than the title characters in the white state, i.e., the state before the change, so that it is possible to reliably recognize that the white state has been changed to red or gold.

In addition, in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performance, the title characters may be changed from a white state to a red or gold state, or may remain in the white state. When the title characters are changed from a white state to a red or gold state, a specific sound is outputted when a time of t1 has elapsed since the start of the title display period, and when the title characters are not changed and remain in the white state, a specific sound is outputted without changing the white state when a time of t1 has elapsed since the start of the title display period. In this way, a specific sound is outputted when the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B performance change from a white state to a red or gold state at a specific timing, and also when the title characters do not change and remain in the white state at a specific timing, so that it can be expected that the specific sound will change to a red or gold state.

In addition, when the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B effects change from a white state to another state, a specific sound is output whether the character changes to a red state or a gold state, so that the output of the specific sound draws attention to the type of state the character changes to.

The performance control CPU 120 also controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1-LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2-LWR12, logo LEDs LL1-LL4, decorative LEDs LS1-LS5, and attacker lamps LA1-LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data, and in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using a brightness data table for title display (weak reach common title), and in the introduction part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, it controls the game effect lamps 9 using the brightness data table for each introduction part (weak reach introduction weak reach A, weak reach introduction weak reach B). In this way, in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled using a brightness data table for title display that is different from the brightness data table for the introduction part, so that the game effect lamps 9 can be illuminated in a suitable illumination mode according to the title display. As a result of these, the title display can be performed suitably.

[Effect 42]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute low base weak reach A and B performances. The low base weak reach A and B performances are composed of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. In addition, it is possible to change and display the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B performances from a white state to a red state, or a gold state that suggests a higher probability of winning than the red state. And, in either case of changing the title characters from a white state to a red state or a gold state in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, the characters are displayed so as to change from the white state to a common display state and then to the red state or the gold state. By doing this, whether the title characters are changed from a white form to a red form or from a white form to a gold form in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances, they are changed to a common display form and then changed to the red form or the gold form. Therefore, by changing from the white form to the common display form, until the common display form changes to the red form or the gold form, the player can expect until the end that the display will change to the gold form, which has a higher probability of winning than the red form,

The common display mode is one in which the characters that make up the title text are illuminated, and when the light clears, they change to a red or gold color. By doing this, it is possible to encourage the characters that make up the title text to change to a red or gold color by illuminating them.

[Effect 43]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute low base weak reach A and B performances. The low base weak reach A and B performances are composed of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data. The performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 using a common brightness data table for the title display part (weak reach common title) in both the title display part of the low base weak reach A performance and the title display part of the low base weak reach B performance, controls the game effect lamp 9 using a brightness data table for the low base weak reach A performance (weak reach weak reach A introduction) in the introduction part of the low base weak reach A performance, and controls the game effect lamp 9 using a brightness data table for the low base weak reach B performance (weak reach weak reach B introduction) in the introduction part of the low base weak reach B performance. In this way, the brightness data table corresponding to the title display part is common for two different super reach performances, preventing an increase in cost and capacity, and the brightness data table corresponding to each of the introduction parts is the brightness data table corresponding to each of the introduction parts, so that the period until the notification of whether or not a jackpot will be obtained can be suitably aroused, and as a result, a suitable title display can be performed.

[Effect 44]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the low base weak reach A, B performance and the low base strong reach A to C performance, which have a higher jackpot expectation than the low base weak reach A, B performance. The low base weak reach A, B performance and the low base strong reach A to C performance each include a title display part that displays the corresponding title character and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attack lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data. The presentation control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 using a common title display part brightness data table (weak reach type common title) in the title display part of the low base weak reach A presentation and in the title display part of the low base weak reach B presentation, controls the game effect lamp 9 using a common title display part brightness data table (strong reach type common title) in the title display part of the low base strong reach A presentation, in the title display part of the low base strong reach B presentation and in the title display part of the low base strong reach C presentation, and controls the game effect lamp 9 using a common title display part brightness data table (strong reach type common title) in the introduction part of the low base weak reach A presentation. The game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the low base weak reach B presentation (introduction of weak reach B of a weak reach system) and in the introduction part of the low base strong reach A presentation, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for the low base strong reach A presentation (introduction of strong reach A of a strong reach system) and in the introduction part of the low base strong reach B presentation, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for the low base strong reach B presentation (introduction of strong reach B of a strong reach system) and in the introduction part of the low base strong reach C presentation, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the brightness data table for the low base strong reach C presentation (introduction of strong reach C of a strong reach system). In this way, the brightness data table corresponding to the title display part is common for two types of super reach effects with high expectations and two types of super reach effects with low expectations, thereby preventing an increase in cost and capacity, and by using the corresponding brightness data table for each of the introductory parts, it is possible to appropriately stimulate the period until it is announced whether or not a jackpot has been hit, and as a result, an appropriate title display can be performed.

[Effect 45]
In this embodiment, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance can execute the low base weak reach A, B performance, the low base strong reach A to C performance, which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the low base weak reach A, B performance, and the low base strongest reach performance, which has an even higher expectation of a jackpot than the low base strong reach A to C performance. The low base weak reach A, B performance, the low base strong reach A to C performance, and the low base strongest reach performance each include a title display part that displays the corresponding title character, and an introduction part until the performance result is notified. The CPU 120 for controlling the performance controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attack lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data. The presentation control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 using a common title display part brightness data table (weak reach type common title) in the title display part of the low base weak reach A presentation and in the title display part of the low base weak reach B presentation, controls the game effect lamp 9 using a common title display part brightness data table (strong reach type common title) in the title display part of the low base strong reach A presentation, controls the game effect lamp 9 using a common title display part brightness data table (strong reach type common title) in the title display part of the low base strong reach A presentation, controls the game effect lamp 9 using a brightness data table for title display for low base strongest reach presentation (strongest reach type strongest reach title) in the title display part of the low base strongest reach presentation, and controls the game effect lamp 9 using a brightness data table for low base weak reach A presentation (weak reach type weak reach title) in the introduction part of the low base weak reach A presentation. In the introduction part of the low base weak reach B presentation, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the low base weak reach B presentation (weak reach system weak reach B introduction), in the introduction part of the low base strong reach A presentation, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the low base strong reach A presentation (strong reach system strong reach A introduction), in the introduction part of the low base strong reach B presentation, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the low base strong reach B presentation (strong reach system strong reach B introduction), in the introduction part of the low base strong reach C presentation, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the low base strong reach C presentation (strong reach system strong reach C introduction), and in the introduction part of the low base strongest reach presentation, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using a brightness data table for the low base strongest reach presentation (strongest reach system strongest reach introduction). In this way, the brightness data table corresponding to the title display part is common for two types of super reach effects with high expectation and two types of super reach effects with low expectation, thereby preventing an increase in cost and capacity, and by using the brightness data table corresponding to each of the introduction parts, the period until the announcement of whether or not a jackpot will be won can be suitably excited, resulting in a suitable title display. Furthermore, the low-base strongest reach effect with the highest expectation is heightened in interest by providing dedicated brightness data tables for the title display part and introduction part, respectively, resulting in a suitable title display.

[Effect 46]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute low base weak reach A and B performances. The low base weak reach A and B performances are composed of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. In addition, it is possible to change and display the title characters corresponding to the low base weak reach A and B performances from a white state to a red state, or a gold state that suggests a higher probability of a jackpot than the red state. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attack lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data. Then, when the color of the title letters is not changed in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 using the brightness data table: weak reach system common title (white) in which brightness data is set for when a title change performance is not performed, and when the color of the title letters is changed to red or gold in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 using the brightness data table: weak reach system common title (red) or weak reach system common title (gold) in which brightness data is set for when a title change performance is performed, and regardless of whether the color of the title letters is changed in the introduction part of the low base weak reach A and B effects, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 using the brightness data table for the common introduction part (weak reach system weak reach A introduction, weak reach system weak reach B introduction). In this way, whether the title characters are not changed to red or gold in the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performances or are changed to the second form, the brightness data table corresponding to each introduction part is made common, preventing an increase in costs and capacity, and by using the corresponding brightness data table for each title display part, it is possible to appropriately present the title characters in either the case where the color is not changed or where the color is changed to red or gold, resulting in an appropriate title display.

[Effect 47]
In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute low base weak reach A and B performances. The low base weak reach A and B performances are composed of a title display part that displays the corresponding title characters, and an introduction part until the performance result is announced. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (frame LEDs LWL1 to LWL12, frame LEDs LWR2 to LWR12, logo LEDs LL1 to LL4, decorative LEDs LS1 to LS5, and attacca lamps LA1 to LA4) using a brightness data table composed of brightness data. In addition, the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performance includes a title start period from when the title characters start to be displayed at the fixed position, and a title display period and a title end period after the title characters are displayed at the fixed position, and the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 using a brightness data table (weak reach title start) that defines a light emission pattern specific to the title start period during the title start period of the title display part of the low base weak reach A and B performance, and controls the game effect lamp 9 using a brightness data table (weak reach title display) that defines a light emission pattern specific to the title display period and after during the title display period and title end period. In this way, by using the brightness data table corresponding to the title start period from when the title characters start to be displayed at the fixed position during the low base weak reach A and B performance, the brightness data table corresponding to the title display period and title end period after the title characters are displayed at the fixed position, and the brightness data table corresponding to the introduction part, the period during which the title characters are displayed and the period until the notification of whether or not the advantageous state will be obtained can be suitably stimulated, and as a result, a suitable title display can be performed.

In addition, depending on whether it is a low base weak reach A presentation or a low base weak reach B presentation, a common brightness data table is used for either the brightness data table corresponding to the title start period or the brightness data table corresponding to the title display period and title end period, and a separate brightness data table with individual contents is set for the other.By using a common brightness data table for either the brightness data table corresponding to the title start period or the brightness data table corresponding to the title display period and title end period, it is possible to prevent an increase in costs and capacity, and by using a brightness data table corresponding to each of the other periods, it is possible to appropriately present whether it is a low base weak reach A presentation or a low base weak reach B presentation, and as a result, it is possible to perform an appropriate title display.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention also includes modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention.

Next, other forms for implementing the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below based on examples.

The gaming machine of form 48 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player,
A game value granting means capable of granting a game value (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the low-value processing shown in FIG. 12-17 );
A game stop control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the game stop process shown in FIG. 12-17 ) that can control the game to a game stop state in which the progress of the game is stopped when a predetermined condition based on the game value granted by the game value granting means (for example, the MY counter value reaches 98194) is established;
A state control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 12-20) capable of controlling a special state (for example, a time-saving state or a probability-changing state) which is different from the advantageous state and is advantageous to the player, and a non-special state (for example, a normal state) which is different from the advantageous state and is less advantageous to the player than the special state;
a grant information display means capable of displaying information regarding the game value granted by the game value granting means (e.g., the value of the prize ball counter) as a grant information display when the advantageous period including the special state ends (e.g., as shown in FIG. 12-54, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 displays the value of the prize ball counter as a second pattern determination period performance);
A special notification effect execution means capable of executing a special notification effect to notify the player that the game will be controlled to the special state during a special period after the end of the advantageous state (for example, as shown in Figs. 12-51 and 12-53, a part in which the effect control CPU 120 displays the fact that the game will be controlled to a time-saving state or a probability variable state as an ending effect for 20 seconds after the end of a jackpot game);
Equipped with
The grant information display means is capable of displaying the grant information display during the special period when the predetermined condition is satisfied while being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, as shown in Figs. 12-52 and 12-56, when the MY counter value reaches 98194 during a jackpot game, the performance control CPU 120 displays the value of the prize ball counter as a game stop performance after the jackpot game ends).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the marketability of a gaming machine that can be controlled to a game stop state can be improved.

The gaming machine of embodiment 49 is
The added information display means
When the game is stopped, the award information display can be displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-57 and FIG. 12-58, a portion where the value of the prize ball counter is displayed as a game stop effect).
When the game is stopped, in addition to the above-mentioned granted information display, a call prompting display is displayed to prompt the user to call an employee of the game arcade where the game machine is installed (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-60 as modified example 005SG-1, a portion in which, after displaying the value of the prize ball counter as a game stop effect, a display is displayed to prompt the user to call an employee of the game arcade where the pachinko game machine 1 is installed in addition to the value of the prize ball counter).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the game by making the player aware of information regarding the game value that had been granted up until the game was controlled to the game stopped state, and by urging the player to call an employee of the amusement facility when the game has been controlled to the game stopped state, it is possible to make it easier for the employee of the amusement facility to deal with the gaming machine that has been controlled to the game stopped state.

The gaming machine of form 50 is
Equipped with a light emitting means (e.g., a play effect lamp 9) capable of emitting light;
The advantageous period is a period that ends when the predetermined condition is met (for example, when the MY counter value reaches 98194) or when a special condition different from the predetermined condition is met (for example, when 100 variable displays are executed without being controlled to a jackpot game state in a time-saving state or a probability-changing state).
The grant information display includes a first grant information display that is displayed for a first period when the advantageous period ends based on the establishment of the predetermined condition (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-52, a portion in which the prize ball counter value is displayed for 15 seconds as a first game stop effect based on the MY counter value reaching 98194), and a second grant information display that is displayed for a second period shorter than the first period when the advantageous period ends based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-50, a portion in which the prize ball counter value is displayed for 10 seconds as a second pattern determination period effect based on the execution of 100 variable displays without being controlled to a jackpot game state in a time-saving state or a probability-changing state).
When the second award information display is displayed, the light emitting means emits light in a predetermined pattern over the second period (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-50, during the second symbol determination period performance, the game effect lamp flashes at a cycle T1 for 10 seconds),
When the first grant information display is displayed, the light emitting means emits light in the predetermined pattern for the second period, and then the light emitting means emits light in the predetermined pattern until the first period has elapsed (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-52, in a game stop performance, after the game effect lamp 9 is blinked in a cycle T1 for 10 seconds as a first game stop performance, the game effect lamp 9 continues to blink in the cycle T1 of the pachinko game machine 1).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by illuminating the light-emitting means in a common predetermined pattern when the first grant information display is displayed and when the second grant information is displayed, data for illuminating the light-emitting means can be reused when the first grant information display is displayed and when the second grant information is displayed, thereby reducing the manufacturing costs of the gaming machine while differing the display periods of each grant information display when the first grant information display is displayed and when the second grant information is displayed.

The gaming machine of form 51 is
A gaming machine in which a game medium can be played by flowing down a first path (e.g., a left game area 2L) or a second path (e.g., a right game area 2R) different from the first path,
The advantageous period is a period that ends when the predetermined condition is satisfied or when a special condition different from the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the consecutive win state ends when the MY counter value reaches 98194 and when 100 variable displays are executed without being controlled to a jackpot game state in a time-saving state or a probability-changing state).
The non-special state is a state in which it is more advantageous for the player to let the gaming medium flow down the first path than to let the gaming medium flow down the second path (for example, the normal state is a gaming state in which it is more advantageous for the player to shoot the gaming ball toward the left gaming area 2L than to shoot the gaming ball toward the right gaming area 2R).
A first path flow promotion effect execution means (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the left hit promotion display process shown in FIG. 12-38) capable of executing a first path flow promotion effect that encourages the game medium to flow down the first path,
The grant information display means can display the grant information in different manners when the advantageous period ends based on the establishment of the previous predetermined condition and when the advantageous period ends based on the establishment of the previous special condition (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-54(C) and FIG. 12-57(F), the display manner is different when the value of the prize ball counter is displayed as the first game stop effect because the MY counter value has reached 98,194, and when the value of the prize ball counter is displayed as the second pattern determination period effect because 100 variable displays have been executed without being controlled to the jackpot game state in the time-saving state or the probability change state).
The first route flow promotion performance execution means includes:
When the advantageous period ends based on the establishment of the special condition, the first path flow promotion effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-54, in the case where 100 variable displays are executed without being controlled to the jackpot game state in the time-saving state or the probability variable state, the left hit promotion display is displayed when the game is controlled to the normal state).
When the advantageous period ends based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, the first path flow promotion effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-57 and FIG. 12-58, when the MY counter value reaches 98194, the left hit promotion display is not displayed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the additional information display can be suitably displayed according to the situation. Also, the first path flow down promotion effect can be suitably executed according to the state to which the additional information is transferred after the additional information display.

The gaming machine of form 52 is
The advantageous period is a state in which allowing the gaming medium to flow down the second path is more advantageous to the player than allowing the gaming medium to flow down the first path (for example, in a consecutive win state including a jackpot gaming state, a time-saving state, and a probability-changing state, a portion in which a gaming state in which shooting the gaming ball toward the right gaming region 2R is more advantageous to the player than shooting the gaming ball toward the left gaming region 2L).
The award information display includes a first award information display that is displayed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-52, a portion in which the prize ball counter value is displayed for 15 seconds as a first game stop effect based on the MY counter value reaching 98194), and a second award information display that is displayed based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-50, a portion in which the prize ball counter value is displayed as a second pattern determination period effect based on the execution of 100 variable displays without being controlled to a jackpot game state in a time-saving state or a probability-changing state).
A second path flow promotion effect execution means (for example, a part in which the effect control CPU 120 executes the right hit promotion display process shown in FIG. 12-38) capable of executing a second path flow promotion effect that encourages the game medium to flow down the second path,
The second path flow-down promotion effect execution means is capable of executing the second path flow-down promotion effect when the second award information display is displayed, while restricting the execution of the second path flow-down promotion effect when the first award information display is displayed (for example, as shown in Figures 12-50, 12-52, 12-54, 12-57, and 12-58, when the value of the prize ball counter is displayed as the effect during the second pattern determination period, a right-hit promotion display is displayed, while when the value of the prize ball counter is displayed as the first game stop effect, the right-hit promotion display is not displayed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when the second grant information display is displayed, the game is controlled to a stopped state, so that by restricting the execution of the second path flow promotion performance when the second grant information display is displayed, it is possible to prevent the game medium from flowing down to the second path when the game is stopped.

The gaming machine of embodiment 53 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs a variable display based on the establishment of an execution condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a first start winning hole or a second start winning hole),
The award information display includes a first award information display that is displayed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-52, a portion in which the prize ball counter value is displayed for 15 seconds as a first game stop effect based on the MY counter value reaching 98194), and a second award information display that is displayed based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-50, a portion in which the prize ball counter value is displayed as a second pattern determination period effect based on the execution of 100 variable displays without being controlled to a jackpot game state in a time-saving state or a probability-changing state).
A storage means (for example, a game control data storage area 005SG150 shown in FIG. 12-12) capable of storing information related to variable display that has not yet been executed as reserved storage;
A special suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a special suggestion effect that suggests that the reserved memory stored in the storage means includes a reserved memory corresponding to the variable display controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a part in which the effect control CPU 120 executes the revival notification effect shown in FIG. 12-61 as modified example 005SG-2);
Equipped with
The special suggestion performance execution means
The special suggestion performance can be executed in relation to the display of the second grant information display (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-61(D), a part in which a revival notification performance can be executed in the performance during the second pattern determination period);
The special suggestion performance is not executed in relation to the display of the first given information display (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-61 (D), a part in which a revival notification performance is not executed in a game stop performance),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when the first grant information is displayed, the game is controlled to a stopped state, and by not executing a special suggestion effect in relation to the display of the first grant information, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the player's interest in the game due to not being controlled to an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of form 54 is
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., a time-saving state) and a second special state (e.g., a probability-changing state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first special state,
The grant information display means is capable of displaying the grant information display in a common manner when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the first special state and when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the second special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-57(E) to FIG. 12-57(H), when the MY counter value reaches 98194 when the game state is in a time-saving state and when the MY counter value reaches 98194 when the game state is in a probability-changing state, a portion in which a game stop effect is executed in the same manner).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the data used to display the grant information when a specified condition is met in the first special state and when a specified condition is met in the second special state can be standardized, thereby reducing the manufacturing costs of the gaming machine.

The gaming machine of embodiment 55 is
The non-special state is a state in which the amount of game value awarded is smaller than that of the advantageous period including the special state (for example, in the normal state, game balls can only enter the first start winning hole and the general winning hole 10, while in the consecutive win state including the jackpot game state, the time-saving state, and the probability change state, game balls can enter the jackpot winning hole and the second start winning hole, so that the number of game balls paid out is greater than in the normal state).
When the predetermined condition is satisfied in the non-special state, the grant information display means does not display the grant information display (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-57(A) to FIG. 12-57(B), in the first game stop presentation when the MY counter value reaches 98194 in the normal state, the value of the prize ball counter is not displayed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, since the amount of game value awarded in a non-special state is smaller than that in an advantageous period including a special state, by not displaying the award information when a specified condition is met in a non-special state, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

The gaming machine of embodiment 56 is
A game stop notification effect execution means (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the game stop effect process shown in FIG. 12-38) capable of executing a game stop notification effect (for example, a game stop effect) that notifies that the game is controlled to the game stop state,
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., a time-saving state) and a second special state (e.g., a probability-changing state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first special state,
The game stop notification effect execution means is capable of executing the game stop notification effect in a common manner when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the first special state and when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the second special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-57(E) to FIG. 12-57(H), a part in which the game stop effect is executed in the same manner when the MY counter value reaches 98194 when the game state is in a time-saving state and when the MY counter value reaches 98194 when the game state is in a probability variable state).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the data used to execute the game stop notification display when a specified condition is met in the first special state and when a specified condition is met in the second special state can be standardized, thereby reducing the manufacturing costs of the gaming machine.

The gaming machine of embodiment 57 is
The game stop notification effect execution means is capable of executing the game stop notification effect in different manners when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the special state and when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the non-special state (for example, as shown in Figs. 12-57(A) to 12-57(H), a part in which a game stop effect is executed in different manners when the MY counter value reaches 98194 when the game state is in a normal state and when the MY counter value reaches 98194 when the game state is in a time-saving state or a probability variable state).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the game stop notification presentation can be executed appropriately depending on whether a predetermined condition is met, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The gaming machine of embodiment 58 is
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., a time-saving state) and a second special state (e.g., a probability-changing state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first special state,
A game stop suggestion effect execution means (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the game stop suggestion effect process shown in FIG. 12-38 ) is provided, which is capable of executing a game stop suggestion effect (for example, a game stop suggestion effect) that suggests that the game will be controlled to the game stop state based on the fact that a specific condition has been satisfied (for example, the MY counter value has reached 95001) before the predetermined condition is satisfied,
The game stop suggestion effect execution means is capable of executing the game stop suggestion effect in a common manner when the specific condition is established in the first special state and when the specific condition is established in the second special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-55(D) to FIG. 12-55(F), when the MY counter value reaches 95001 when the game state is in a time-saving state and when the MY counter value reaches 95001 when the game state is in a probability variable state, the part in which the game stop suggestion effect is executed in the same manner).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the data used to execute the game stop suggestion display when a specific condition is met in the first special state and when a specific condition is met in the second special state can be standardized, thereby reducing the manufacturing costs of the gaming machine.

The gaming machine of embodiment 59 is
The game stop suggestion effect execution means is capable of executing the game stop suggestion effect in different manners when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the special state and when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the non-special state (for example, as shown in Figs. 12-55(A) to 12-55(F), a part in which the game stop suggestion effect is executed in different manners when the MY counter value reaches 95001 when the game state is in the normal state and when the MY counter value reaches 95001 when the game state is in the time-saving state or the probability variable state).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the game stop suggestion effect can be executed appropriately depending on whether a predetermined condition is met, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The gaming machine of form 60 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs a variable display based on the establishment of an execution condition (e.g., the entry of a gaming ball into a first start winning hole or a second start winning hole),
A storage means (for example, a game control data storage area 005SG150 shown in FIG. 12) capable of storing information related to variable display that has not yet been executed as reserved storage;
A special notification effect execution means (e.g., a portion in which the effect control CPU 120 executes the pre-reading notice setting process shown in FIG. 12-38 ) capable of executing a special notification effect (e.g., a portion in which the pre-reading notice display is displayed in the shape of a "V" as a pre-reading notice effect) that notifies that the pre-reading notice stored in the storage means includes a pre-reading notice corresponding to the variable display controlled to the advantageous state;
Equipped with
The special notification effect execution means, in a predetermined period before the predetermined condition is satisfied, restricts the execution of the special notification effect when the reserved memories stored in the storage means include a plurality of reserved memories corresponding to the variable display controlled to the advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-40(B), when the MY counter value is 95001 or more (95001 to 98194) and there are two or more reserved memories that will result in a jackpot, the determination ratio of the display pattern γ that displays the reserved display as the letter "V" is set to 0%).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, even if a special notification effect has been executed, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the game being controlled to a game stop state before being controlled to an advantageous state multiple times.

The gaming machine of embodiment 61 is
A means for executing advantageous state suggestion effect (e.g., a preview effect) that suggests that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state while the variable display is being executed is provided (e.g., a portion that executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 12-38 after the effect control CPU 120 executes the preview effect determination process shown in FIG. 12-43),
The advantageous state suggestion effect includes a first advantageous state suggestion effect (e.g., as shown in FIG. 12-45, a preview effect of effect pattern X or effect pattern Y) and a second advantageous state suggestion effect (e.g., as shown in FIG. 12-45, a preview effect of effect pattern Z) that suggests a higher probability of being controlled in the advantageous state than the first advantageous state suggestion effect,
The advantageous state suggestion effect execution means limits the execution of the second advantageous state suggestion effect during a specific period before the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the MY counter value is 95001 to 98194, the determination ratio of the effect pattern Z is set to 0%),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the occurrence of an event in which, for example, even if a second advantageous state suggestion display is executed during the variable display, a predetermined condition is met during the variable display and the game is controlled to a stop state before being controlled to the advantageous state, thereby making it possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the occurrence of an event.

The gaming machine of form 62 is
the predetermined condition includes a first predetermined condition and a second predetermined condition different from the first predetermined condition,
The game stop control means includes:
When the game machine is controlled to the non-special state, the game value awarded by the game value awarding means reaches a specific value, which is regarded as the first predetermined condition being satisfied, and the game machine can be controlled to the game stop state (for example, as shown in Figs. 12-55(A) to 12-55(C), a part in which a game in the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped based on the MY counter value reaching 98194 when the game state is a normal state).
When the game value granted by the game value granting means in the advantageous state during the advantageous period reaches the specific value, the second predetermined condition is satisfied, and the game can be controlled to the game stop state after the advantageous state ends (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-56, when the MY counter value reaches 98194 during a jackpot game, the game in the pachinko game 1 is stopped after the jackpot game ends).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the game stop state can be suitably controlled depending on whether the first predetermined condition or the second predetermined condition is satisfied.

The gaming machine of embodiment 63 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of receiving a signal output from a gaming device capable of executing processing related to a gaming medium (e.g., a payout control board 21TM037 or a card unit 21TM050),
a gaming medium dispensing means capable of dispensing gaming media based on a signal output from the gaming device (for example, a portion in which a payout control board 21TM037 drives a payout motor 21TM289 based on the PRDY signal being ON and both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal being ON, and pays out a predetermined number (for example, 125) of loan balls to a player);
The gaming medium providing means, when controlled to the game stop state, limits the provision of gaming media based on a signal output from the gaming device (for example, as a modified example 005SG-5, as shown in FIG. 12-64, when a game is stopped in the pachinko gaming machine 1, by stopping the output of a connection confirmation signal from the main board 11, a part that does not lend new gaming balls even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated by the player).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when the game device is controlled to be in a game stop state, appropriate control can be exercised regarding the provision of game media based on the signal output from the game device.

The gaming machine of form 64 is
a specific process execution means (e.g., a portion in which the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes the payout control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 12-34) capable of executing specific processes including at least a first process related to the provision of gaming media based on a signal output from the gaming device (e.g., a portion in which the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes the prize ball lending control process shown in FIG. 12-34) and a second process related to a return operation for returning a storage medium in which information related to the gaming media is stored (e.g., a portion in which the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes the prepaid card unit control process shown in FIG. 12-34);
The specific process execution means, in the game stop state, restricts the execution of the first process but does not restrict the execution of the second process (for example, as shown in modified example 005SG-5, when a game is stopped in the pachinko game machine 1, the output of a connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is stopped so that new game balls are not loaned out, while the return switch 21TM063 can be operated to return the prepaid card to the player).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent problems from occurring due to the storage medium not being returned when play is stopped.

The gaming machine of embodiment 65 is
a game medium-related display means (e.g., a number display LED21TM060) capable of displaying a game medium-related display (e.g., a display of a balance of a prepaid card) related to the number of game media that can be provided by the game medium providing means;
The game medium-related display is displayed in a different manner when the game is controlled to the game-stopped state and when the game is not controlled to the game-stopped state (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-62 as variation example 005SG-3, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a playable state, the degree display LED21TM060 displays a numerical value corresponding to the remaining amount of the prepaid card, and when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a play-stop state, the degree display LED21TM060 displays a display indicating that play is no longer possible).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the player can easily recognize whether or not the game has been controlled to a game stop state based on the manner in which the game medium-related display is displayed on the game medium-related display means.

The gaming machine of embodiment 66 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of receiving a signal output from a gaming device (e.g., a payout control board 21TM037 or a card unit 21TM050) capable of executing processing related to gaming media,
a game medium providing means capable of providing game media based on a signal output from the game device (for example, a payout control board 21TM037 drives a payout motor 21TM289 based on the PRDY signal being ON and both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal being ON, and pays out a predetermined number of loan balls (for example, 125 balls) to a player);
a specific process execution means (e.g., a portion in which the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes the payout control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 12-34) capable of executing specific processes including at least a first process related to the provision of gaming media based on a signal output from the gaming device (e.g., a portion in which the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes the prize ball lending control process shown in FIG. 12-34) and a second process related to a return operation for returning a storage medium in which information related to the gaming media is stored (e.g., a portion in which the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes the prepaid card unit control process shown in FIG. 12-34);
The specific process execution means is capable of executing the specific process when the game is stopped (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-34, the payout control CPU 21TM371 is a part that can execute each process including the payout control timer interrupt process even when the game is stopped in the pachinko game machine 1).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, since the storage medium can be returned even when the game is stopped, it is possible to prevent troubles caused by the storage medium not being returned when the game is stopped. Also, since no complicated processing is required when the game is stopped, it is possible to prevent unintended malfunctions in specific processing.

The gaming machine of embodiment 67 is
When the game is controlled to the game stop state and the grant information display is displayed, a return operation related display regarding the return operation of the storage medium can be displayed (for example, as shown in Figures 12-53, 12-57, and 12-58, when the game is controlled from a jackpot game state to a time-saving state or a probability change state, a portion is displayed as an ending effect urging the player not to forget to take out the prepaid card, and when the value of the prize ball counter is displayed as a first game stop effect, a portion is displayed as a second game stop effect urging the player not to forget to take out the prepaid card).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when the gaming machine is controlled to a game stop state, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems such as a player forgetting to return the storage medium and leaving the gaming machine.

The gaming machine of embodiment 68 is
The return operation related display is a display that is displayed in a first situation when the advantageous state is controlled to the special state (for example, when the big win game state is controlled to a time-saving state or a probability change state), and in a second situation when the game is controlled to the game stop state and the grant information display is displayed (for example, when the value of the prize ball counter is displayed as a first game stop performance),
The manner of the display related to the return operation displayed in the first situation and the manner of the display related to the return operation displayed in the second situation are at least partially common (for example, as shown in Figs. 12-53, 12-57, and 12-58, when the game is controlled from the jackpot game state to the time-saving state or the probability change state, and when the value of the prize ball counter is displayed as the first game stop effect, the display urging the player not to forget to take the prepaid card is displayed in the same manner).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, at least a portion of the data for displaying the return operation related display displayed in the first situation and the return operation related display displayed in the second situation can be made common, thereby reducing the manufacturing costs of the gaming machine.

The gaming machine of embodiment 69 is
The information display means (e.g., a display monitor 21TM029) is provided for displaying information about the game value granted by the game value granting means (e.g., a winning combination ratio or a consecutive combination ratio),
The information display means displays differently when the pachinko game machine 1 is in the game-stopped state and when the pachinko game machine 1 is not in the game-stopped state (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-63 as a modified example 005SG-4, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a playable state (playable state), various winning information such as consecutive win ratios and hand ratios is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, whereas when the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped (entered into a game-stopped state), a display different from the winning information is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 to indicate that the game is no longer playable).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to conveniently recognize whether or not the game has been controlled to a game stop state based on the display mode displayed on the information display means.

The gaming machine of embodiment 70 is
An operating means (e.g., a clear switch 92) that can be operated when the gaming machine is powered on;
An initialization process execution means for executing an initialization process of the gaming machine based on the operation of the operation means when the power supply to the gaming machine is turned on (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the initialization process of step S8 in the gaming control main process shown in FIG. 12-16 );
Equipped with
The initialization process execution means includes:
When the gaming machine is controlled to the game-stopped state, the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, and then, when the gaming machine is powered on, the initialization process is executed based on the operation of the operation means, thereby enabling the gaming machine to be controlled to a playable state (for example, when play on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, and then, the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1 together with the operation of the clear switch 92, thereby executing the initialization process, and making the pachinko gaming machine 1 playable).
The power supply to the gaming machine is stopped when the gaming machine is controlled to the game-stopped state, and the gaming machine can be controlled to the game-stopped state based on the fact that the operation means is not operated when the gaming machine is subsequently powered on (for example, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped while a game is stopped on the pachinko gaming machine 1, and then the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1 without operating the clear switch 92, a recovery process is executed to restore the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state in which play is stopped).
The gaming machine further includes an error notification means capable of executing an error notification when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped while the gaming machine is controlled to the gaming stop state, and the gaming machine is subsequently controlled to the gaming stop state based on the fact that the operation means is not operated when the gaming machine is powered on (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-65 as a modified example 005SG-6, when the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off and then power is turned on again to the pachinko gaming machine 1 without operating the clear switch 92 (the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a hot start), a part that executes an error notification on the image display device 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 after the start-up that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is still in a stopped state and that prompts the user to power on the pachinko gaming machine 1 while operating the clear switch 92).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, an error notification can be sent to the employees of the gaming facility where the gaming machine is set up to let them know that the gaming stopped state continues when the gaming machine is turned on, thereby reducing the risk that the gaming machine will be left in the gaming stopped state from the time the power is turned on.

The gaming machine of form 71 is
A specific signal output means (e.g., an information output circuit 112) capable of outputting a specific signal (e.g., a security signal) to the outside is provided,
The gaming stop state includes a first gaming stop state and a second gaming stop state different from the first gaming stop state,
The game stop control means includes:
The first game stop state can be controlled based on the establishment of a predetermined condition based on the game value granted by the game value granting means (for example, a part where a game on the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped when the MY counter value reaches 98194),
The second game stop state can be controlled based on the establishment of a condition different from the predetermined condition (for example, a part in which a game on the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped due to the occurrence of a game stop error),
The specific signal output means is capable of outputting the specific signal in a common output manner when the device is controlled to the first game stop state and when the device is controlled to the second game stop state (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-29, when the MY counter value reaches 98194 and when a game stop error occurs, a security signal is output until the supply of power to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped (until the power is turned off)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a specific signal is output in a common output manner when the gaming machine is controlled to the first game stop state and when it is controlled to the second game stop state, making it easier for employees of the gaming facility in which the gaming machine is installed to understand that the gaming machine has been controlled to the game stop state.

The gaming machine of form 72 is
The device is provided with an error determination means (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes main error processing as shown in FIG. 12-17) capable of determining the occurrence of a plurality of errors including a first error (for example, a start port 2 abnormal winning error) and a second error having a higher importance than the first error (for example, a radio wave error, a magnet error, a game ball guide lid operation error),
The game stop control means is capable of controlling to the second game stop state in relation to the determination of the occurrence of the second error (for example, a part in which a game is stopped due to the occurrence of a radio wave error, a magnet error, a game ball guide lid operation error, etc.),
The specific signal output means is
The specific signal can be output when it is determined that the first error has occurred and when it is determined that the second error has occurred (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-29, when a start port 2 abnormal winning error, a radio wave error, a magnet error, or a game ball guide cover operation error occurs, the information output circuit 112 outputs a security signal).
The specific signal can be output for different periods when it is determined that the first error has occurred and when it is determined that the second error has occurred (for example, when a start port 2 abnormal winning error occurs, a security signal is output for four minutes, whereas when a radio wave error, a magnet error, or a game ball guide cover operation error occurs, a security signal is output until the supply of power to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped (until the power is turned off)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it becomes possible for an employee of the amusement facility where the gaming machine is installed to determine whether an error that has occurred in the gaming machine is a first error or a second error based on the output period of the specific signal, thereby enabling an employee of the amusement facility where the gaming machine is installed to take appropriate measures against the error that has occurred.

The gaming machine of form 73 is
A setting means is provided that can set the ratio of the control to the advantageous state (for example, as shown in modified example 005SG-7, a part that can set a plurality of set values by operating a specific setting means and changes the ratio of the variable display result being a jackpot depending on which set value is set),
The gaming stop state further includes a third gaming stop state different from the first gaming stop state and the second gaming stop state,
The game stop control means is capable of controlling the game to the third game stop state based on conditions different from the first game stop state and the second game stop state (for example, as shown in modified example 005SG-7, a portion in which the CPU 103 stops the game on the pachinko game machine 1 by putting the pachinko game machine 1 into a setting changeable state);
The third game stop state is a state related to the setting by the setting means,
The specific signal output means, when controlled to the third game stop state, is capable of outputting the specific signal for a period different from the first game stop state and the second game stop state (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-67(C), the information output circuit 112 outputs a security signal for 5 seconds after the setting value is changed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when the gaming machine is controlled to any of the game stop states, an employee of the gaming facility in which the gaming machine is installed can determine whether or not the game stop state is the third game stop state set by the setting means based on the output period of the specific signal, thereby reducing the risk of the third game stop state being mistaken for the first game stop state or the second game stop state.

The following describes an embodiment of the gaming machine according to the present invention with reference to the drawings. In the following, the near side of FIG. 1 is the front (front face, front) side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the far side is the rear (rear face, back) side, and the description is based on the up, down, left and right directions when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front side. Note that the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment is the surface facing the player playing with the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, in the description of each step in the flowchart, for example, "Step S1" may be abbreviated to "S1" or "005SGS1", "Normal reach" may be abbreviated to "N reach", and "Super reach" may be abbreviated to "SP reach".

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
Fig. 12-1 is a front view of a pachinko game machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is broadly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and game balls as game media are shot into this game area by a predetermined ball shooting device.

Note that the "variable display" of special symbols refers to, for example, the display of multiple types of special symbols in a variable manner. Variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative symbols described below, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that variations also include a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed flashing. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as the display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described below). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or variation.

The special pattern variably displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A is also called the "first special pattern," and the special pattern variably displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B is also called the "second special pattern." A special pattern game using the first special pattern is also called the "first special pattern game," and a special pattern game using the second special pattern is also called the "second special pattern game." There may be only one type of special pattern display device that variably displays the special patterns.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (electro luminescence) device, and displays various presentation images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various presentation images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, multiple types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) that are different from the special patterns are variably displayed as decorative identification information. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. The special game and the variable display of decorative patterns that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

The lower part of the screen of the image display device 5 is provided with display areas (first pending memory display area 5D, second pending memory display area 5U) for displaying pending displays corresponding to variable displays whose execution is pending.

The number of reserved variable displays is also called the reserved memory number. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also called the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also called the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also called the total reserved memory number.

A first hold display device 25A and a second hold display device 25B, each of which includes a plurality of LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold display device 25A displays the first hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second hold display device 25B displays the second hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided to the right of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning hole that is always kept in a constant open state so that game balls can enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and a first special game can be started based on the game ball being detected by a first start hole switch 22A provided in the winning ball device 6A.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) forms a second start winning port that changes between a closed state and an open state by the first solenoid 81 (see FIG. 12-2). The variable winning ball device 6B, for example, has a movable piece that can move forward and backward above the second start winning port, and when the first solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable piece advances, so that the tip of the movable piece covers the top of the second start winning port, and the second start winning port is in a closed state where game balls cannot enter (also referred to as the second start winning port being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the first solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable piece retreats from above the second start winning port, so that the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state where game balls can enter the second start winning port (also referred to as the second start winning port being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start winning hole, the game ball is detected by the first start hole switch 22A provided in the winning ball device 6A, and a predetermined number of prize balls (e.g., three) are paid out and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to having a movable piece as long as it can change between a closed state and an open state.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 12-1, three positions at the lower left of the game area and one position above the variable winning ball device 6B), there are provided general winning openings 10 that are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the general winning opening 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) are paid out as prize balls based on the game ball being detected by the general winning switch 25 (see FIG. 12-2).

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a second solenoid 82 (see Figure 12-2), and the large winning opening door forms the large winning opening as a specific area that can be switched between an open state and a closed state.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the second solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door 711 (for the special electric device) is in the OFF state, the large prize opening door closes the large prize opening (first state), preventing game balls from entering (passing through) the large prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the second solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door is in the ON state, the large prize opening door opens the large prize opening (second state), allowing game balls to enter the large prize opening more easily.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 15 balls) are paid out as prize balls based on the game ball being detected by the first count switch 23 provided in the special variable prize ball device 7. When a game ball enters the large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball enters the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each winning port, including the general winning port 10, is also called a "winning". In particular, a winning ball into the starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) is also called a starting winning port.

The details will be described later, but in addition to the first count switch 23 described above, the special variable winning ball device 7 of this embodiment is also provided with a second count switch 24 capable of detecting game balls. The second count switch 24 is a switch for detecting a game ball that has entered the large winning hole during a jackpot game state described below, and for controlling the game state after the jackpot game state to a high probability state (high base state) described below.

A normal symbol display device 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (the lower left of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 12-1). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers showing "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbols may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

A pass gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided to the right of the image display device 5. When the game ball passes through the pass gate 41, a regular game is executed.

Below the normal symbol display device 20, a normal symbol pending display device 25C is provided. The normal symbol pending display device 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal symbol pending memory count, which is the number of normal symbol games pending execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the direction and speed of the game balls, and numerous obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an outlet is provided to take in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports. In addition, on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1, an outlet switch 26 is provided to further detect game balls detected by the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the first count switch 23, the second count switch 24, and the general winning switch 25, and the game balls detected by the outlet switch 26 are discharged outside the pachinko game machine 1 (see Figure 12-4).

The game area in this embodiment is composed of a left game area 2L, which is an area formed to the left of the image display device 5, where game balls can flow down to enter the general winning port 10 and the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A, and a right game area 2R, which is an area formed to the right of the image display device 5, where game balls can flow down to enter the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the special winning port formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and can pass through the passing gate 41.

Speakers 8L, 8R for playing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 on the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the playing area. Furthermore, an attacca lamp 9c is provided near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the gaming board 2.

A movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (above the image display device 5 in FIG. 12-1). The movable body 32 is also provided with a movable body lamp 9d.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided, which is operated by the player or the like to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or gaming balls lent by a predetermined ball lending machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may also be provided with a payout section (ball supply tray) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. Operations on the stick controller 31A are detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 12-2).

At a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that the player can press to give a predetermined command. The operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 12-2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

(Outline of game progress)
A game ball is launched toward the game area by a player rotating a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through a passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display device 20. If a game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period when the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on the passing cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on the passing is put on hold up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal winning". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal losing". When it becomes a "normal winning", an opening control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 6B (the second starting winning port becomes an open state).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B.

In addition, if the game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when the special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to the jackpot game state described below (when a start winning occurs but the special game based on the start winning cannot be played immediately), the special game based on that entry will be put on hold until a specified upper limit number (for example, 4) is reached.

In special game, if a specific special symbol (a jackpot symbol, for example, "7"; the actual symbol varies depending on the type of jackpot, as described below) is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it is a "jackpot", and if a special symbol other than the jackpot symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it is a "loss".

After the display result in the special game becomes "jackpot," the game is controlled to a jackpot game state, which is an advantageous state for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until the opening period (e.g., 29 seconds) has elapsed, or until the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 10), whichever comes first. The open period is the maximum period during which the large prize opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as the maximum opening period. This cycle in which the large prize opening is open is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until the predetermined maximum number of times (10 times or 4 times) is reached.

In the jackpot gaming state, the player can get prize balls by making the gaming ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The more rounds there are in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the upper limit opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

The "jackpot" has a set type of jackpot. For example, there are multiple types of opening modes of the jackpot opening (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time-saving state, special state, etc.), and the jackpot type is set according to these. There may be jackpot types that offer many prize balls, jackpot types that offer few prize balls, or jackpot types that offer almost no prize balls.

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state or the probability of a special symbol changing state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol changing time (the period during which the special symbol changes) more than in the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole by shortening the average regular symbol changing time (the period during which the regular symbol changes) more than in the normal state and by increasing the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in the regular symbol game more than in the normal state. The time-saving state and the probability of a special symbol changing efficiency (especially the second special symbol) are improved in these states, so they are advantageous to the player.

The time-saving state or the probability bonus state will continue until one of the ending conditions is met first, such as the specified number of special games being played or the start of the next big win game state. The ending condition of the specified number of special games being played is also called the number-cutting (number-cutting time-saving, etc.).

The normal state refers to a game state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state and a probability-varying state, and is a state in which the pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in the normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified return process is not executed after the power is turned on).

The state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called the high base state, and the state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called the low base state.

Here, the normal state in this embodiment is a game state in which the player mainly shoots game balls toward the left game area 2L, and some of these game balls enter the general winning port 10 or the start winning port, and prize balls are paid out and the first special pattern is displayed variably. Also, the normal state is a game state in which the player shoots game balls toward the right game area 2R, and some of these game balls can be detected by the gate switch 21 (some of the game balls can pass through the gate 41), but the probability of a normal winning based on the gate switch 21 detecting a game ball is lower than in the time-saving state (low probability high base state) or the probability-changing state (high probability high base state), and the opening period of the second start winning port when a normal winning occurs is set shorter than in the time-saving state or the probability-changing state. Also, the normal state is not a jackpot game state, so the jackpot winning port is not opened. From the above, in the normal state, it is more advantageous for the player to shoot the game ball toward the left game area 2L than toward the right game area 2R.

On the other hand, the time-saving state and the probability-changing state in this embodiment are game states in which the player shoots game balls toward the left game area 2L, some of which enter the general winning port 10 or the start winning port, and prize balls are paid out and the first special symbol is displayed variably, but the player shoots game balls toward the right game area 2R, and some of these game balls can be detected by the gate switch 21 (some of the game balls can pass through the gate 41). Here, the time-saving state and the probability-changing state are game states in which the probability of a normal winning is higher than in the normal state, and the opening period of the second start winning port when a normal winning occurs is set longer than in the normal state. In other words, the time-saving state and the probability-changing state are game states in which it is easier for game balls to enter the second start winning port than in the normal state.

Furthermore, as will be described in detail later, when the variable display result of the variable display of the special pattern (variable display of the second special pattern) when the game ball enters the second start winning port is a jackpot, the rate at which the game is controlled to a jackpot game state with a greater number of rounds and the rate at which the game ball passes through the second count switch 24 during the jackpot game (the rate at which the game ball is controlled to a high probability state after the jackpot game ends) are set higher than when the variable display result of the variable display of the special pattern (variable display of the first special pattern) when the game ball enters the first start winning port is a jackpot. In other words, the time-saving state and the high probability state are game states in which it is more advantageous for the player to shoot the game ball toward the right game area 2R than toward the left game area 2L.

As shown in FIG. 12-1, the special variable winning ball device 7 is provided in the right game area 2R, so in a jackpot game state, game balls flowing down the right game area 2R are more likely to win in the large winning hole than game balls flowing down the left game area 2L. In other words, the jackpot game state is a game state in which it is more advantageous for the player to shoot game balls toward the right game area 2R than toward the left game area 2L.

(Progression of the performance, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects to notify the progress of the game or to liven up the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effects are described below. The effects are executed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, the effects may be executed as sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, turning on or off the game effect lamp 9, operating the movable body 32, or as an effect using any effect device including some or all of these.

As an effect that is executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the image display device 5, a variable display of decorative patterns begins in response to the start of the first or second special pattern game. At the timing when the display result (also called the determined special pattern) in the first or second special pattern game is displayed statically, the determined decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns is also displayed statically (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts to when it ends, the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, which will be described later.

In addition, when the above-mentioned reach state occurs during the variable display of the decorative symbols, a reach effect is executed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple types of reach effects are executed with different rates (also called jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation) of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" depending on the performance state. Reach effects include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than a normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative patterns (for example, "7") are displayed stopped in line on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of a "probability jackpot" that is controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state (as described below, a jackpot in which part of the game ball is detected by the second count switch 24 during the jackpot game), odd numbered decorative symbols (e.g., "7") are displayed stopped in a line, and in the case of a "non-probability jackpot (normal jackpot)" that is not controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state (as described below, a jackpot in which part of the game ball is not detected by the second count switch 24 during the jackpot game), even numbered decorative symbols (e.g., "6") may be displayed stopped in a line. In this case, odd numbered decorative symbols are also called probability jackpot symbols, and even numbered decorative symbols are also called non-probability jackpot symbols (normal symbols). After a reach state is reached with a non-probability jackpot symbol, a promotion effect that finally results in a "probability jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special game is a "miss," the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") as a "non-reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss," after the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination as a "reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display) described above. In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. Preview effects include a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently being executed, and a pre-reading preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is reserved). As a pre-reading preview effect, an effect that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, a pseudo consecutive performance may be executed in which a single variable display appears to be multiple variable displays by temporarily pausing the decorative pattern during the variable display and then restarting the variable display.

Even during a jackpot game state, a jackpot performance is executed to notify the player of the jackpot game state. The jackpot performance may include a performance to notify the player of the number of rounds, or an upgrade performance to show that the value of the jackpot game state is increasing.

In addition, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo performance is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like, as shown in Fig. 12-2. In addition, various boards, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board, are arranged on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also equipped. The various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit mounting boards configured to realize specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on the electronic circuit board.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17, and by operating the power switch 91 (turning it ON), power from an AC power source such as an external power source such as a commercial power supply, such as 100V AC, can be supplied from the power supply board 17 to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 is equipped with, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), and a power supply circuit for converting a specified DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (for example, 12V DC or 5V DC).

The main board 11 is the main control board, and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of special games (including reserved game management), execution of regular games (including reserved game management), jackpot game status, game status, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, an information output circuit 112, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes the program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processes that control the progress of the game (processing that realizes the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as data on fluctuation patterns, performance control commands, and various tables referenced when making various decisions) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are preserved for a certain period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be deployed to the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is configured to include, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the first special pattern display device 4A, the second special pattern display device 4B, the normal pattern display device 20, the first hold display device 25A, the second hold display device 25B, the normal hold display device 25C, etc., solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switches (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), first count switch 23), and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The switch circuit 110 receives a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, an IC with a built-in watchdog timer, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal is turned off when the specified power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a specified value, and is turned on when the period during which the specified power supply voltage is below the specified value continues for longer than the power-off reference time. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, pressing the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The output circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (e.g., signals to turn on the first solenoid 81, the second solenoid 82, and the third solenoid 83) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the first solenoid 81 for the normal electric device, the second solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door, and the third solenoid 83 for the regulating member 712. The information output circuit 112 outputs various signals, such as security signals, from the terminal board 21TM016.

As shown in Figures 12-2 and 12-4, the main board 11 is provided with a display monitor 21TM029 that can be seen from the rear side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the display monitor 21TM029 also has the function of displaying various winning information related to winning. In addition, a display changeover switch 21TM030 is provided on the left side of the display monitor 21TM029, and the information displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 can be changed by operating the display changeover switch 21TM030.

As shown in FIG. 12-4, the main board 11 is enclosed in a board case 21TM201 made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and a display monitor 21TM029 (e.g., 7-segment) is arranged in the center of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 21TM030 is arranged to the left of the display monitor 21TM029. The display monitor 21TM029 and the display changeover switch 21TM030 are arranged on the front side when the main board 11 is viewed. Since the main board 11 cannot be viewed when the gaming machine frame 3 is not opened, the front side when viewing the main board 11 is the front side when viewing the back side of the gaming board 2 with the gaming machine frame 3 open, which is different from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front side when viewing the main board 11 may be the same as the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In addition, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) counts the number of game balls entering each winning port (big winning port, second start winning port, first start winning port, general winning port, hereinafter also referred to as "entry area"), and various winning information such as consecutive win ratio and role ratio based on the count is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. By displaying this winning information, various winning information such as consecutive win ratio and role ratio after installation in the game center can be confirmed. In other words, the manufacturer of the pachinko game machine 1 usually designs the game board so that game balls enter the general winning port at a predetermined frequency (so that it passes the test). In addition, when conducting the test, it is confirmed whether game balls enter the general winning port at a predetermined frequency. Furthermore, even after the pachinko game machine 1 is installed, it is confirmed what adjustments have been made and whether game balls enter the general winning port at the designed frequency as a result of the adjustments. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, it is possible to recognize what adjustments have been made to the pachinko gaming machine 1 after it has been installed.

Also connected to the main board 11 are a magnetic sensor 005SG060 capable of detecting magnetism, a radio wave sensor 005SG070 capable of detecting radio waves, a large prize door sensor 005SG091 capable of detecting the opening of the large prize door, a full tank sensor 005SG093 capable of detecting when the upper tray is full of game balls, and a ball exhaustion sensor 005SG094 capable of detecting when the supply balls have run out.

Figure 12-3 is a block diagram showing components related to payout such as the payout control board 21TM037 and the ball payout device 21TM097. As shown in Figure 12-3, the payout control board 21TM037 is equipped with a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 including a payout control CPU 21TM371. In this embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is a one-chip microcomputer, and at least a RAM is built in. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370, RAM (not shown), ROM (not shown) storing the payout control program, and I/O ports, etc., constitute the payout control board 21TM037. In other words, the payout control board 21TM037 is realized by the payout control CPU 21TM371, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 having a RAM and ROM, and an I/O port. The I/O port may also be built into the dispensing control microcomputer 21TM370.

The detection signals from the out-of-bulb switch 21TM187, the full tank switch 21TM048, and the dispensed number count switch 21TM301 are input to the I/O port 21TM372f of the dispensed number count switch 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. In this embodiment, the detection signal from the dispensed number count switch 21TM301 is input to the dispensed control microcomputer 21TM370, and then output to the main board 11 via the I/O port 21TM372a and the output circuit 21TM373B.

As shown in FIG. 12-3, the payout control board 21TM037 is connected to a game machine frame/door frame open sensor 21TM300, which includes a game machine frame open sensor that detects the opening of the game machine frame 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2, and a door frame open sensor that detects the opening of the glass door frame 3a that covers the front of the game board 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and also has the function of determining the occurrence of various abnormalities (errors) based on the detection signals output from these sensors. Note that the detection signal when the game machine frame 3 is detected to be open and the detection signal when the glass door frame 3a is detected to be open are input to different terminals, so that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can distinguish between the open state of the game machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a.

The detection signal from the payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is input to the I/O port 21TM372e of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. The payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is a sensor consisting of a light-emitting element (LED) and a light-receiving element for detecting the rotational position of the payout motor 21TM289, and is used to detect when a game ball is stuck, i.e., when the ball is stuck. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037 stops the ball payout process when the detection signal from the ball out switch 21TM187 indicates a ball out state or when the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates a full tank state.

Furthermore, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates a full tank state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs a low-level full tank signal to the launch board 21TM090 to stop the ball launch from the ball launching device. The launch motor signal to the launch motor 21TM094 output by the AND circuit 21TM091 of the launch board 21TM090 is transmitted from the launch board 21TM090 to the launch motor 21TM094. The full tank signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is input to one input side of the AND circuit 21TM091 mounted on the launch board 21TM090, and the drive signal from the drive signal generation circuit 21TM092 (a signal for driving the launch motor 21TM094 and a signal that serves to supply power from the power supply board) is input to the other input side of the AND circuit 21TM091. The launch motor signal of the AND circuit 21TM091 is then input to the launch motor 21TM094. In other words, while the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is outputting a full tank signal, the output of the launch motor signal to the launch motor 21TM094 is stopped.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has a built-in serial communication circuit 21TM380 for inputting and outputting (sending and receiving) signals via serial communication with the game control microcomputer 100. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 exchange (send and receive) signals (prize ball request signal, received ACK signal) at regular intervals (for example, 1 second) via the serial communication circuits 21TM505 and 21TM380 to confirm the connection between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. That is, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a signal (a prize ball request signal in this embodiment) for confirming the connection at regular intervals via the serial communication circuit 21TM505, and when the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives a prize ball request signal from the game control microcomputer 100, it transmits a signal (a reception ACK signal) notifying the same to the game control microcomputer 100. In this embodiment, specific data is placed on the prize ball request signal or the reception ACK signal, so that specific data is exchanged between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 at the timing of transmitting and receiving the prize ball request signal or the reception ACK signal. For example, when a prize is won, the game control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out by changing a predetermined bit of the prize ball request signal, and transmits the set prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout ball payout operation is completed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets data indicating the end of the prize ball by changing a predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and transmits the set received ACK signal to the game control microcomputer 100. Also, when a predetermined error (such as a ball loan, full tank, or out of ball error) occurs, data indicating the content of the error is set by changing a predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and transmits the set received ACK signal to the game control microcomputer 100. The specific signal exchange by serial communication between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is described in detail in Figures 12-32 and 12-35.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs a prize ball information signal indicating the number of prize balls paid out and a ball loan number signal indicating the number of loaned balls to the terminal board (including the frame external terminal board and the board external terminal board) 21TM160 via the output port 21TM372b. Note that a driver circuit is installed outside the output port 21TM372b, but is omitted from Figure 12-3.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 also outputs an error signal to the 7-segment error display LED 21TM374 via output port 21TM372c. Furthermore, it outputs a signal to turn on/off the winning ball LED 21TM053 and the out-of-ball LED 21TM054 via output port 21TM372b. A detection signal from the error release switch 21TM375 for releasing the error state is input to the input port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037. The error release switch 21TM375 is used to release the error state by a software reset.

Furthermore, the drive signal to the payout motor 21TM289 from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is transmitted to the payout motor 21TM289 in the payout mechanism part of the ball payout device 21TM097 via the output port 21TM372a and the relay board 21TM072. Note that a driver circuit (motor drive circuit) is installed outside the output port 21TM372a, but is omitted from Figure 12-3.

The card unit 21TM050, which is installed adjacent to the gaming machine, is equipped with a microcomputer for controlling the card unit. The card unit 21TM050 is also provided with a usable indicator lamp, a connected table direction indicator lamp, a card insertion indicator lamp, and a card insertion slot. The interface board (relay board) 21TM066 is connected to the degree indicator LED 21TM060, ball lending available LED 21TM061, ball lending switch 21TM062, and return switch 21TM063.

The interface board 21TM066 sends to the card unit 21TM050 a ball loan switch signal indicating that the ball loan switch 21TM062 has been operated and a return switch signal indicating that the return switch 21TM063 has been operated in response to the player's operation. In addition, the card unit 21TM050 sends to the interface board 21TM066 a card balance display signal indicating the balance of the prepaid card and a ball loan available display signal. Between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037, a connection signal (VL signal), a unit operation signal (BRDY signal), a ball loan request signal (BRQ signal), a ball loan completion signal (EXS signal), and a pachinko start-up signal (PRDY signal) are transmitted and received via the input port 21TM372f and the output port 21TM372d. An interface board 21TM066 is interposed between the card unit 21TM050 and the dispensing control board 21TM037. Therefore, signals such as connection signals (VL signals) are sent and received between the card unit 21TM050 and the dispensing control board 21TM037 via the interface board 21TM066, as shown in FIG. 12-9-2.

When the power supply of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037 outputs a PRDY signal to the card unit 21TM050. Also, when the power supply is turned on, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a VL signal. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 determines whether the card unit 21TM050 is connected or not based on the input state of the VL signal. When a card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated to input a ball lending switch signal, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037. When a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037.

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 then raises the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050, and when it detects the falling edge of the BRQ signal from the card unit 21TM050, it drives the payout motor 21TM289 and pays out a specified number of loaned balls to the player. Then, when the payout is completed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 lowers the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050. Thereafter, on condition that the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 is not in the ON state, it executes prize ball payout control when it receives a payout command signal from the game control microcomputer 100.

The power supply voltage AC24V used by the card unit 21TM050 is supplied from the dispensing control board 21TM037. That is, power is supplied from the power supply board to the card unit 21TM050 via the dispensing control board 21TM037 and the interface board 21TM066. In this example, a fuse to protect the card unit 21TM050 is provided in the AC24V power supply line to the card unit 21TM050 arranged in the interface board 21TM066, preventing a voltage above a predetermined voltage from being supplied to the card unit 21TM050.

In this embodiment, the degree display LED 21TM060, ball lending LED 21TM061, ball lending switch 21TM062, and return switch 21TM063 are installed in a predetermined position (for example, above the ball supply tray (upper tray)) in the pachinko game machine 1. Therefore, by moving the line of sight downward from the playing area during play, the player can recognize whether or not game balls can be borrowed and the remaining amount for borrowing game balls (prepaid card balance) from the lighting state of the degree display LED 21TM060 and ball lending LED 21TM061. Furthermore, the player can borrow game balls by operating the ball lending switch 21TM062, and can receive a prepaid card on which the number of prize balls acquired and the remaining amount are stored by operating the return switch 21TM063 from the card unit 21TM050.

As shown in FIG. 12-2, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 in accordance with the progress of the game as part of controlling the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. The presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various determination results in the main board 11 (for example, the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable pattern used when executing the special game (described in detail later)), the game status (for example, the start or end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot opening, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notifying errors, and notifying of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes the programs stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for executing performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The presentation control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute a presentation based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the content of the operation).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the performance based on instructions to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays a performance image on the image display unit 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display unit 5 based on an instruction to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal designating the on/off state of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the performance image and to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal to operate the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or to a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the turning on and off of the lamp.

The performance control CPU 120 may be configured to execute control of audio output, turning on/off the lamp (such as supplying a sound designation signal or a lamp signal), and controlling the movable body 32 (such as supplying a signal to operate the movable body 32).

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for performance) used to execute various performances. The random numbers for performance may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for taking in performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

The boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with the pachinko game machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

Figure 12-5 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a performance control command used in this embodiment. The performance control command is, for example, two bytes in length, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (type of command). The first bit of the MODE data (bit 7) is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in Figure 12-4 (A) is only an example, and other command formats may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 12-5(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. Command 81XXH is a variable pattern designation command that specifies the variable pattern (variable time (variable display time)) of the decorative symbols (also called performance symbols) that are variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol game. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is set according to the instructions by the performance control command. In addition, in the variable pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the specified variable pattern, etc.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result specification command, which is a presentation control command that specifies a variable display result such as a special pattern or a decorative pattern. In the variable display result specification command, as shown in FIG. 12-4 (B), for example, different EXT data is set depending on the result of the determination (predetermination result) of whether the variable display result (also called the variable display result) is a "miss" or a "jackpot", and the result of the determination of which of several types of jackpot type should be used if the variable display result is a "jackpot".

For example, as shown in FIG. 12-5(B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "miss". Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "jackpot A". Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "jackpot B". Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "jackpot C".

Command 8FXXH is a pattern determination command that specifies the stopping (determination) of the change in the decorative patterns in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5. The pattern determination command is also a command for notifying the pattern determination period. For example, as shown in FIG. 12-5 (B), command 8F00H is a first pattern determination command that specifies that the pattern determination period is 0.5 seconds, and command 8F01H is a second pattern determination command that specifies that the pattern determination period is 10 seconds. Command 95XXH is a game state designation command that specifies the current game state of the pachinko game machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current game state of the pachinko game machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state where time-saving control is not performed (low probability low base state, normal state), command 9501H is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state where time-saving control is performed (low probability high base state, time-saving state), and command 9502H is a third game state designation command corresponding to a game state where time-saving control and probability variable control are performed (high probability high base state, probability variable state). Command 96XXH is an error notification command that notifies that an error has occurred. In the error notification command, for example, different EXT data is set depending on the error that has occurred.

Command A0XXH is a jackpot start command (also called a "fanfare command") that specifies the display of a presentation image indicating the start of a jackpot game. Command A1XXH is a large prize opening open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening is in an open state during a jackpot game state. Command A2XXH is a large prize opening post-open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening has changed from an open state to a closed state during a jackpot game state. Command A3XXH is a jackpot end command that specifies the display of a presentation image at the end of a jackpot game.

In the jackpot start command and jackpot end command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result, for example by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result command. Alternatively, in the jackpot start command and jackpot end command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be made different from the correspondence in the variable display result command. In the jackpot opening notification command and the jackpot opening after notification command, for example, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed in the jackpot state (for example, "1" to "10") described later.

Command B100H is a first start port entry designation command that notifies the first start condition for executing a special symbol game using a first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (first start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A being detected by the first start port switch 22A. Command B200H is a second start port entry designation command that notifies the second start condition for executing a special symbol game using a second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (second start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B being detected by the second start port switch 22B.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command that notifies the first reserved memory number so that the reserved memory number of special charts can be specified. Command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command that notifies the second reserved memory number so that the reserved memory number of special charts can be specified. The first reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the first start port entry designation command is transmitted, for example, based on the first start condition being satisfied when the game ball passes (enters) the first start port. The second reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the second start port entry designation command is transmitted, for example, based on the second start condition being satisfied when the game ball passes (enters) the second start port. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command may be sent in response to the start of execution of the special game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is met (when the pending memory number is reduced).

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total pending memory number may be sent. In other words, the total pending memory number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total pending memory number.

Commands C4XXH and C6XXH are presentation control commands (prize winning judgment result designation commands) that indicate the contents of the winning judgment result. Of these, command C4XXH is a pattern designation command that indicates whether the variable display result will be a "jackpot" or not, the type of jackpot (probable win, non-probable win, or sudden probability win), and whether it will be a small win, as the winning judgment result. Command C6XXH is a variable category designation command that indicates whether the random number value for variable pattern determination will be a "non-reach", "super reach", or "other", as the winning judgment result. Command C700H is a presentation control command that designates the execution of a customer waiting demonstration (customer waiting demo presentation) on the image display device 5, based on the fact that the pachinko game machine 1 is not in a jackpot game, the variable display of special symbols is not being executed, and the game is in a non-playing state in which there is no reserved memory.

Command D100H is a V win notification command that notifies the player that the game ball has been detected by the second count switch 24 and that it has been determined that the game state will be controlled to a special state after the jackpot game ends (the occurrence of a V win).

Command D3XXH is a prize ball number notification command that notifies the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of game balls by the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the first count switch 23, the general winning switch 25, etc.

Command E0XXH is an MY counter value notification command for notifying the MY counter value for monitoring the difference between the number of prize balls paid out since the pachinko gaming machine 1 was started with the operation of the clear switch 92 and the number of game balls detected by the out switch 26 (net increase in the number of prize balls). As shown in FIG. 12-8 (D), E000H is a first MY counter value notification command indicating that the MY counter value is 0 to 90000, E001H is a second MY counter value notification command indicating that the MY counter value is 90001 to 95000, and E002H is a third MY counter value notification command indicating that the MY counter value is 95001 to 98194. Command F000H is a game stop notification command notifying that the game is stopped based on the MY counter value reaching the default value of 98194.

The commands shown in FIG. 12-5(A) are merely examples, and some of these commands may not be included, or different commands may be used instead of these commands, or different commands may be added to these commands. For example, a prize ball number notification command may be provided to specify the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game balls having entered each winning slot, a gate passage notification command to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, and a notification command to notify the remaining number of variable display times for which the special bonus control or time-saving control will be executed.

Figure 12-6 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in Figure 12-6, in this embodiment, on the main board 11 side, the numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of big win, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the random number value MR4 for determining the normal chart display result are controlled so as to be countable. Note that random number values other than these may be used to enhance the game effect. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count the numerical data indicating some or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 may count the numerical data indicating some of the random number values MR1 to MR4 by updating various numerical data by software using a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting unit (not shown).

The random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control the variable display result of a special symbol or the like in a special symbol game to a "jackpot" and to a jackpot game state, and takes a value in the range of "0" to "65535", for example. The random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is a random number value used to determine the jackpot type to be either "jackpot A", "jackpot B", or "jackpot C" when the variable display result is a "jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "0" to "299", for example.

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special patterns and decorative patterns to one of several types prepared in advance, and can take a value in the range of "1" to "997", for example.

The random number value MR4 for determining the normal symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display device 20 is a "normal symbol hit" or a "normal symbol miss", and takes a value in the range of "3" to "23", for example.

The random number MR5 used to determine the initial value of MR4 is a random number used to determine the initial value of the random number MR4, and ranges, for example, from "3" to "23".

Figure 12-7 shows the variation patterns in this embodiment. In this embodiment, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for the cases where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" and a "reach", respectively, and for the case where the variable display result is a "jackpot". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also called a "non-reach miss variation pattern"), and the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is a "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also called a "reach miss variation pattern"). The non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the miss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "jackpot" is called a jackpot variation pattern.

There are two types of jackpot fluctuation patterns and reach fluctuation patterns: a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach performance is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach performance is executed. Note that in this embodiment, one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more types of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Also, in this embodiment, two types of fluctuation patterns, super reach α and super reach β, are provided as super reach fluctuation patterns, but the present invention is not limited to this, and three or more types of super reach fluctuation patterns or only one type may be provided.

Of these variation patterns, for the big win variation pattern and the small win variation pattern, after the same special chart variation time as the miss variation pattern, an additional 15 seconds of special chart display time is set up to execute a congratulatory performance to congratulate the player that the variable display result is a big win.

In this embodiment, the jackpot fluctuation pattern and the miss fluctuation pattern have the same period until the variable display result is notified, preventing the player from knowing in advance whether the variable display result is a jackpot or a miss based on the length of the period until the variable display result is notified.

In this embodiment, as described later, the determination ratio of each variation pattern is set so that the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach, and therefore the longer the special chart variation time is in the normal reach variation pattern and the super reach variation pattern, the higher the jackpot expectation becomes.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described below, these fluctuation patterns are determined using only the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, a random number value for determining the type of fluctuation pattern may be provided, and the type of fluctuation pattern may first be determined from these random number values for determining the type of fluctuation pattern, and then the fluctuation pattern belonging to the determined type may be determined.

The ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores not only the game control program but also various table data used to control the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of judgment tables prepared for the CPU 103 to make various judgments and decisions. The ROM 101 also stores table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation pattern table that stores a plurality of variation patterns that are the variation modes of each pattern in a variable display such as a special pattern or a normal pattern.

Figure 12-8 is an explanatory diagram of the method of determining the variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the variation pattern determination table to be selected varies depending on the special symbol design of the variable display to be executed, the display result of the variable display, the number of reserved memories, the game status, etc.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12-8, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the jackpot variation pattern determination table is selected; when the game state is normal (low probability low base state), the number of reserved special patterns for the variable display target is one or less, and the variable display result is a miss, the miss variation pattern determination table A is selected; when the game state is normal (low probability low base state), the number of reserved special patterns for the variable display target is two to three, and the variable display result is a miss, the miss variation pattern determination table B is selected; and when the game state is a time-saving state or a probability change state (low probability high base state or high probability high base state) and the variable display result is a miss, the miss variation pattern determination table C is selected.

In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, of the possible values of the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, 1 to 20 are assigned to the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern PB1-1, 21 to 370 are assigned to the super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern PB1-2, and 371 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern PB1-3.

In the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A, of the possible values of 1 to 997 for the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, 1 to 500 are assigned to the non-reach miss fluctuation pattern PA1-1, 501 to 900 are assigned to the normal reach miss fluctuation pattern PA2-1, 901 to 970 are assigned to the super reach α miss fluctuation pattern PA2-2, and 971 to 977 are assigned to the super reach β miss fluctuation pattern PA2-3.

In the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B, of the possible values of 1 to 997 for the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, 1 to 500 are assigned to the non-reach miss fluctuation pattern PA1-2, 501 to 900 are assigned to the normal reach miss fluctuation pattern PA2-1, 901 to 970 are assigned to the super reach α miss fluctuation pattern PA2-2, and 971 to 977 are assigned to the super reach β miss fluctuation pattern PA2-3.

In the loss fluctuation pattern determination table C, the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take a value from 1 to 997, and the values from 1 to 997 are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation patterns PA1-3.

Figure 12-9 shows an example of the configuration of a display result determination table stored in ROM 101. In this embodiment, a common display result determination table is used for the first special chart and the second special chart, but the present invention is not limited to this, and separate display result determination tables may be used for the first special chart and the second special chart.

The display result determination table is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" before a determined special pattern that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in a special pattern game using a first special pattern by the first special pattern display device 4A or a special pattern game using a second special pattern by the second special pattern display device 4B, based on a random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result.

In the display result determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result is assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" or "miss" depending on whether the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state) or a probability change state (high probability state).

In the display result judgment table, the table data indicating the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is judgment data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the special chart display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot". In the display result judgment table, when the game state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values are assigned to the special chart display result of a "jackpot" than when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, in the probability variable state (high probability state) in which probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot game state is higher (about 1/100 in this embodiment) than the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot game state when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state) (about 1/200 in this embodiment). That is, in the display result judgment table, judgment data is assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control to a jackpot game state so that when the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 is in a probability variable state (high probability state), the probability of deciding to control to a jackpot game state is higher than when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state.

In other words, when the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the jackpots shown in FIG. 12-9(A), the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol will be a jackpot (jackpot A to jackpot C). In addition, determining whether or not to determine whether or not to determine whether or not to determine whether or not to control the game to a jackpot game state also means determining whether or not to set the stopped symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B as a jackpot symbol.

Figures 12-9 (B) and (C) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in ROM 101. Of these, Figure 12-9 (B) is a table when the jackpot type is determined using reserved memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning slot (i.e., when the first special symbol is variably displayed). Also, Figure 12-9 (C) is a table when the jackpot type is determined using reserved memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning slot (i.e., when the second special symbol is variably displayed).

The jackpot type determination table is a table that is referenced to determine the type of jackpot as one of jackpot A to jackpot B based on the random number (MR2) for determining the type of jackpot when a decision is made to make the variable display result a jackpot pattern. In this embodiment, as shown in Figures 12-9 (B) and (C), the jackpot type determination table (for the first special pattern) has jackpot A and jackpot B, while the jackpot type determination table (for the second special pattern) has jackpot B and jackpot C.

Now, the jackpot types in this embodiment will be explained using FIG. 12-8 (E). In this embodiment, the jackpot types are set as jackpot A to jackpot C.

Of these jackpots A through C, jackpot A and B are jackpots that are repeated four times (so-called 4 rounds) in which the jackpot opening changes to the second state that is advantageous to the player, and jackpot C is a jackpot that is repeated ten times (so-called 10 rounds) in which the jackpot opening changes to the second state that is advantageous to the player.

Furthermore, after the end of the jackpot game state of jackpot A to jackpot C, time-saving control is executed for a maximum of 100 variable displays, and, on the condition that the game ball is detected by the second count switch 24 in the first round, high probability control is executed for a maximum of 100 variable displays.

Note that jackpot A is a type of jackpot in which the large prize opening is opened in opening pattern KP-1 in the first round, and in the second round and subsequent rounds in opening pattern KP-3, while jackpot B and jackpot C are types of jackpot in which the large prize opening is opened in opening pattern KP-2 in the first round, and in the second round and subsequent rounds in opening pattern KP-3.

Here, the configuration of the special variable winning ball device 7 in this embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 12-10, a large winning opening is formed at the upper end of the special variable winning ball device 7. As described above, when the second solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door 711 (for the special electric device) is in the off state, the large winning opening door closes the large winning opening (first state), preventing game balls from entering (passing through) the large winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the second solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is in the on state, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening (second state), making it easier for game balls to enter the large winning opening.

As shown in FIG. 12-10, the special variable winning ball device 7 has a game ball flow path 750 through which game balls that have entered the large winning opening can flow down. The game ball flow path 750 has a main path 740 (area along the solid line in FIG. 12-10) through which game balls that have passed through the large winning opening can pass, and a branch path 741 (area along the dotted line in FIG. 12-10) that branches downward from the main path 740. At the upper end of the branch path 741, a regulating member 712 that can advance and retreat in the forward and backward directions by driving the third solenoid is provided. When the third solenoid 83 is in the off state, the regulating member 712 protrudes into the game ball flow path 750 to prevent the game ball from entering the branch path 741, and when the third solenoid 83 is in the on state, the regulating member 712 retreats from the game ball flow path 750 to allow the game ball to enter the branch path 741.

A second count switch 24 is provided downstream of the branch path 741, and the game balls are detected by the second count switch 24 as they pass through it. The game balls that flow down the main path 740 and the game balls that flow down the branch path 741 are finally guided to the back side of the game board 2 through a through hole (not shown) formed in the game board 2, and are then detected by the out switch 26.

As shown in FIG. 12-11(A), the opening pattern KP-1 is an opening pattern in which the second solenoid 82 is in the OFF state from the start timing T1 to the timing T2 of the round game, and the second solenoid 82 is in the ON state from the timing T2 to the timing T3, so that the large prize opening is in the open state (second state) from the timing T2 to the timing T3. The opening pattern KP-1 is also an opening pattern in which the third solenoid 83 is in the ON state from the start timing T1 to the timing T2 of the round game, and the third solenoid 83 is in the OFF state from the timing T2 to the timing T3. In other words, the opening pattern KP-1 is an opening pattern in which, during the period in which the large prize opening is in the open state, the game ball that has entered the large prize opening cannot pass through the second count switch 24 because the regulating member 712 prevents the game ball from entering the branch path 741.

As shown in FIG. 12-11(B), the opening pattern KP-2 is an opening pattern in which the second solenoid 82 is on from the start timing T1 of the round game to timing T4 (T4: timing between timing T2 and timing T3), and the second solenoid 82 is off from the timing T4, so that the large prize opening is in an open state (second state) from timing T1 to timing T4. The opening pattern KP-2 is also an opening pattern in which the third solenoid 83 is on from the start timing T1 to timing T2 of the round game, and is off from the timing T2 to timing T3. In other words, the opening pattern KP-2 is a solution pattern in which the large prize opening is in an open state from timing T1 to timing T4, and the game ball that entered the large prize opening can enter the branch path 741 and pass through the second count switch 24 from timing T1 to timing T2.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 12-11(C), the aforementioned opening pattern KP-3 is an opening pattern in which the second solenoid 82 is in the OFF state from the start timing T1 of the round game to timing T2, and the second solenoid 82 is in the ON state from timing T2 to timing T3, so that the large prize opening is in the open state (second state) from timing T2 to timing T3. Note that in opening pattern KP-3, the third solenoid is in the OFF state and never in the ON state. In other words, opening pattern KP-3 is an opening pattern in which, during the period in which the large prize opening is in the open state, a game ball that has entered the large prize opening cannot pass through the second count switch 24 because the regulating member 712 prevents the game ball from entering the branch path 741.

In other words, as shown in FIG. 12-9 (D), even if the player shoots the game ball toward 2R in the right game area during the jackpot play, the game ball does not pass through the second count switch 24, so that the time-saving control is executed for a maximum of 100 variable displays after the jackpot play ends, while the probability control is not executed (controlled to the time-saving state) (effectively a non-probability variable jackpot). Also, for jackpots B and C, if the player shoots the game ball toward 2R in the right game area during the jackpot play, the game ball passes through the second count switch 24 with an extremely high probability (almost 100%), so that the time-saving control and probability variable control are executed (controlled to the probability variable state) for a maximum of 100 variable displays after the jackpot play ends (effectively a probability variable jackpot).

In this embodiment, if the variable display result of the first special symbol in the normal state is a jackpot, the player shoots the game ball toward the right game area 2R from the start of the jackpot game, causing the game ball to enter the large prize opening, and the prize ball is paid out, and after the jackpot game ends, the game state is controlled to a time-saving state or a probability variable state, and the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed by the player continuing to shoot the game ball toward the right game area 2R. Here, as shown in FIG. 12-9 (C), if the variable display result of the second special symbol is a jackpot, the jackpot type will be either jackpot B or jackpot C, which are essentially probability variable jackpots, so that after the jackpot game ends, the game state will be controlled to probability variable state with an extremely high probability. As described above, the state in which the game is controlled to a jackpot game state based on the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal state, and then the player mainly shoots the game ball toward the right game area 2R, repeating the time-saving state, the probability variation state, and the jackpot game state, is called the consecutive win state.

In this embodiment, three types of jackpots are provided, jackpot A to jackpot C, but the present invention is not limited to this, and there may be four or more types of jackpots, or two or less types.

The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 12-2 may be a backup RAM, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power source created in a specified power supply board. In other words, even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped, part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 are saved for a certain period of time (until the capacitor serving as the backup power source discharges and the backup power source is unable to supply power). In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, i.e., the control state of the game control means (such as a special chart process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls may be saved in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary to restore the control state to before the occurrence of a power outage, etc., based on the data, when the power is restored after a power outage, etc. occurs. In addition, the data corresponding to the control state and the data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

In this RAM 102, for example, a game control data holding area 005SG150 as shown in FIG. 12-12 is provided as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The game control data holding area 005SG150 shown in FIG. 12-12 includes a first special chart reserve memory section 005SG151A, a second special chart reserve memory section 005SG151B, a normal chart reserve memory section 005SG151C, a game control flag setting section 005SG152, a game control timer setting section 005SG153, a game control counter setting section 005SG154, and a game control buffer setting section 005SG155.

The first special symbol reservation memory unit 005SG151A stores reservation data for a special symbol game (a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) that has not yet started, but in which a game ball has passed (entered) through the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A and a start winning (first start winning) has occurred. As an example, the first special symbol reservation memory unit 005SG151A associates reservation numbers with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game ball) into the first start winning port, and stores, as reservation data, random number values MR1 for determining the variable display result, random number values MR2 for determining the type of winning, and numerical data indicating random number values MR3 for determining the variation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc., based on the establishment of the first start condition when the game ball passes (enters), until the number of memories reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The reserved data stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 005SG151A thus indicates that the execution of a special chart game using the first special chart is reserved, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached based on the variable display result (special chart display result) in this special chart game.

The second special symbol reservation memory unit 005SG151B stores reservation data for a special symbol game (a special symbol game using a second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B) that has not yet started, but in which a game ball has passed (entered) through the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a start winning (second start winning) has occurred. As an example, the second special symbol reservation memory unit 005SG151B associates reservation numbers with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game ball) into the second start winning port, and stores, as reservation data, numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the variable display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of winning, and the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc., based on the establishment of the second start condition when the game ball passes (enters), until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The reserved data stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit 005SG151B thus indicates that the execution of a special chart game using the second special chart is on hold, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached based on the variable display result (special chart display result) in this special chart game.

The reserved information (first reserved information) based on the establishment of the first start condition by the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning port, and the reserved information (second reserved information) based on the establishment of the second start winning condition by the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning port may be stored in a common reserved memory unit in association with the reserved number. In this case, start port data indicating whether the game ball passed (entered) the first or second start winning port may be included in the reserved information and stored in association with the reserved number.

The normal symbol reserve memory unit 005SG151C stores reserved information for normal symbol games that have not yet been started by the normal symbol display device 20, even though the game ball that passed through the passing gate 41 has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the normal symbol reserve memory unit 005SG151C associates the game balls with reserved numbers in the order in which they passed through the passing gate 41, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the normal symbol display result extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the passage of the game ball as reserved data, until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 005SG152 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated depending on the progress of the game on the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 005SG152 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 005SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 005SG153 stores data indicating the timer values of multiple types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 005SG154 is provided with multiple types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 005SG154 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 005SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting some or all of the game random numbers in a manner that allows the CPU 103 to update them by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 005SG154, random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR4, are stored as random count values, and the numerical data indicating each random number is updated periodically or irregularly according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the updating operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scrambling or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 104.

The game control buffer setting unit 005SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 005SG155 stores data indicating the buffer values in each of multiple types of buffers.

The ROM 121 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in FIG. 12-2 stores not only performance control programs but also various data tables used to control performance operations. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data constituting multiple judgment tables prepared so that the performance control CPU 120 can make various judgments, decisions, and settings, and pattern data constituting various performance control patterns.

As an example, the ROM 121 stores a presentation control pattern table that stores multiple types of presentation control patterns that the presentation control CPU 120 uses to control presentation operations by various presentation devices (e.g., the image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, presentation model, etc.). The presentation control patterns correspond to various presentation operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 and are composed of data indicating the control content. The presentation control pattern table may store, for example, a presentation control pattern for when a special chart is displayed variably, a preview presentation control pattern, various presentation control patterns, etc.

The special symbol variable display performance control pattern corresponds to a number of different variation patterns and is composed of data indicating the control contents of various performance operations, such as the variable display operation of decorative symbols, the reach performance, the re-draw performance, and the like, during the period from when the special symbol starts to vary in the special symbol game until the confirmed special symbol that is the special symbol display result is derived and displayed, or various performance display operations that do not involve the variable display of decorative symbols. The advance notice performance control pattern is composed of data indicating the control contents of the performance operation that becomes the advance notice performance that is executed in response to advance notice patterns, of which multiple patterns are prepared in advance. The various performance control patterns correspond to various performance operations that are executed depending on the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 and are composed of data indicating the control contents.

The control patterns for controlling the presentation of special charts during variable display may include, for example, multiple types of reach presentation control patterns in which the presentation manner in each reach presentation is different for each variation pattern that executes the reach presentation.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in Figure 12-2 is provided with a performance control data holding area 005SG190 as shown in Figure 12-13(A) as an area for holding various data used to control performance operations. The performance control data holding area 005SG190 shown in Figure 12-13(A) includes a performance control flag setting unit 005SG191, a performance control timer setting unit 005SG192, a performance control counter setting unit 005SG193, and a performance control buffer setting unit 005SG194.

The performance control flag setting unit 005SG191 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated according to the performance operation state, such as the display state of the performance image on the screen of the image display device 5, and the performance control commands sent from the main board 11. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 005SG191 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit 005SG192 is provided with multiple types of timers that are used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as the display operation of a performance image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the performance control timer setting unit 005SG192 stores data indicating the timer values of each of the multiple types of timers.

The performance control counter setting unit 005SG193 is provided with multiple types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control counter setting unit 005SG193 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit 005SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting unit 005SG194 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of multiple types of buffers.

In this embodiment, the data constituting the start winning time receiving command buffer 005SG194A as shown in FIG. 12-13 (B) is stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting unit 005SG194. The start winning time receiving command buffer 005SG194A has a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total reserved memory number of the first special symbol reserved memory (for example, "4") and a storage area (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") corresponding to the first special symbol being displayed variably. The start winning time receiving command buffer 005SG194A also has a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total reserved memory number of the second special symbol reserved memory (for example, "4") and a storage area (area corresponding to buffer number "2-0") corresponding to the second special symbol being displayed variably. When a start win occurs at the first start win port or the second start win port, a set of three commands, namely, a start win designation command (first start win designation command or second start win designation command), a pattern designation command, and a reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command or second reserved memory number notification command), is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special pattern reserved memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special pattern reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 005SG194A are provided with storage areas (entries) for storing these start win designation commands, pattern designation commands, variable category designation commands, and reserved memory number notification commands separately for the first special pattern reserved memory and the second special pattern reserved memory.

The contents of these storage areas (entries) are shifted up one at a time when the start condition is met and the variable display of the top reserved memory (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") begins, as described below, and the contents of buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0", which stores the contents of the reserved memory for which the start condition is met, are cleared in the decorative pattern change stop process that is executed when the variable display ends.

Furthermore, in the start winning reception command buffer 005SG194A of this embodiment, memory areas for setting the reserved display flag indicating the display mode of the reserved display to be displayed on the image display device 5 in the advance preview performance described below are secured for each of the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special chart reserved memory and the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special chart reserved memory.

When a first winning entry is made to the first winning entry, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance stores the command from the top (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the first special symbol reserved memory in the command buffer 005SG194A for receiving the command at the time of winning, and when a second winning entry is made to the second winning entry, the CPU 120 stores the command from the top (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the second special symbol reserved memory in the command buffer 005SG194A for receiving the command at the time of winning. When a winning entry is made to the first winning entry, the command from the starting entry designation command to the reserved memory number notification command is sent in sequence. Therefore, when a command is received, the command from the starting entry designation command, the pattern designation command, the variable category designation command, and the reserved memory number notification command are stored in the storage area corresponding to the last "1" to "4" of the buffer number corresponding to the first or second special symbol reserved memory in that order.

Whenever the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the commands stored in the start winning time reception command buffer 005SG194A shown in FIG. 12-12(B) are deleted from the entry corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that just ended (the entry with buffer number "1-0" or "2-0"), and the contents stored in the entry corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that is about to start (the entry corresponding to buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") and the contents stored in the entries after the reserved memory of the variable display that is about to start are shifted. For example, when the variable display of the decorative pattern of the first special pattern reserved memory is ended in the storage state shown in FIG. 12-12(B), the commands stored in buffer number "0" are deleted, the commands stored in buffer number "1" are shifted to buffer number "0", the commands stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" are shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1", and the commands stored in the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes the area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending memory that is variably displayed at that time.

In this embodiment, when the performance control CPU 120 executes the command analysis process (S75), it determines whether or not it has received a start winning designation command, a pattern designation command, a variable category designation command, or a pending memory count notification command. If these commands have been received, these commands are stored at the top of the free space in the start winning time reception command buffer 005SG194A as pending memory for each special pattern.

(Display monitor)
Next, the display of the display monitor 21TM029 in this embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIG. 12-14(A), the display monitor 21TM029 has a first display section 21TM029A, a second display section 21TM029B, a third display section 21TM029C, and a fourth display section 21TM029D. The first display section 21TM029A to the fourth display section 21TM029D are each composed of a seven-segment display made up of seven segments forming the figure "8," and a dot located at the bottom right of the seven-segment display. These first display section 21TM029A to the fourth display section 21TM029D are capable of lighting up or flashing in red.

In addition, in the embodiment, the display control of the display monitor 21TM029 is performed using the non-test areas of the entire area of the ROM 101 and RAM 102 when testing the pachinko gaming machine 1.

As shown in Fig. 12-14 (B) and Fig. 12-14 (C), the display monitor 21TM029 can display Base L, which is the base value (real-time value during measurement) calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) for every 6000 outs in all game states, Base 1, which is the base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) for the first 6000 outs in all game states, Base 2, which is the base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) for every 6000 outs in the second game states, and Base 3, which is the base value calculated in the normal state (low probability low base state) for every 6000 outs in the third game states, as shown in Fig. 12-14 (B) and Fig. 12-14 (C). Base L, Base 1, Base 2, and Base 3 are displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 as percentages.

When actually displaying base L on the display monitor 21TM029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A to display "bL.", which is the abbreviation for base L, and "L." is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values of "00" to "99") are displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C and the fourth display unit 21TM029D. When displaying base 1 on the display monitor 21TM029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A to display "b1.", which is the abbreviation for base, and "1." is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values of "00" to "99") are displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C and the fourth display unit 21TM029D. In addition, when displaying base 2 on the display monitor 21TM029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A to display the abbreviation "b2." for the base, and "2." is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B, while the upper two digits of the calculated value (values of "00" to "99") are displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C and the fourth display unit 21TM029D. In addition, when displaying base 3 on the display monitor 21TM029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A to display the abbreviation "b3." for the base, and "3." is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B, while the upper two digits of the calculated value (values of "00" to "99") are displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C and the fourth display unit 21TM029D.

In this embodiment, the display monitor 21TM029 is controlled by the main board 11 (CPU 103) to sequentially display base L, base 1, base 2, and base 3. For example, as shown in FIG. 12-15, the main board 11 controls the display monitor 21TM029 to switch the display in the order of base L → base 1 → base 2 → base 3 at 5 second intervals.

(Operation)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operations of the main board 11, main processing for game control)
First, a description will be given of the main operations of the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. Figures 12-16 are flowcharts showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 12-16, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to disabled (step S1). Then, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). The initial settings include setting the stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and settings to make the RAM 102 accessible.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery condition is satisfied. The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is OFF (step S3; Yes), backup data is present (step S4; Yes), and the backup RAM is normal (step S5; Yes). When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, if the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, for example, an ON clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an ON clear signal is input, it is determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. The backup data may be stored in the RAM 102, which is the backup RAM for game control. In step S3, it is determined whether the recovery condition can be satisfied by checking or inspecting the presence or absence of backup data and the presence or absence of data errors.

If the recovery condition is met (steps S3, S4, S5; Yes), recovery processing (step S6) and command transmission at the time of recovery (step S7) are executed, followed by setting processing of the serial communication circuit 21TM505 (step S10a) and random number circuit setting processing (step S10b). The recovery processing of step S6 sets a working area based on the contents stored in RAM 102. By setting the working area using the backup data stored in RAM 102, the game state when the power supply was stopped is restored, and if, for example, a special symbol was changing, it is sufficient if the change of the special symbol can be resumed from the state before the stoppage.

In the recovery process (step S6) of this embodiment, the state of the game stop flag in the backup data is checked, and it is determined whether the game stop flag was set when the power failure occurred. The game stop flag is a flag indicating that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to a game stop state. If the game stop flag was set when the power failure occurred (if game play on the pachinko gaming machine 1 was stopped when the power failure occurred), the MY counter value described below is restored from the backup data, and if the game stop flag was not set when the power failure occurred (if game play was possible on the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the power failure occurred), the MY counter value described below is not restored from the backup data, and the MY counter value is set to "0".

In the setting process of step S10b, a connection confirmation signal is output from the output circuit 21TM067 of the main board 11 to the input circuit 21TM373A of the payout control board 21TM037 (see Figures 12-30 and 12-31). In addition, the serial communication circuit 21TM505 of the game control microcomputer 100 and the serial communication circuit 21TM380 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are set to a state in which communication can be performed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (No in any of steps S3, S4, and S5), the initialization process (step S8) and the transmission of the initialization command (step S9) are performed, and then the setting process of the serial communication circuit 21TM505 is performed (step S10a) and the random number circuit setting process (step S10b) is performed. The initialization process of step S8 includes a clearing process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and the initial values are set in the working area by the execution of the clearing process. In particular, the initialization process (step 8) of this embodiment includes a process for clearing the game stop flag and setting the MY counter value to "0" regardless of the contents of the backup data. In other words, in this embodiment, when a power interruption occurs when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a game stop state and the power is turned on together with the operation of the clear switch 92, the pachinko game machine 1 is started in a playable state (normal game state).

After executing the random number circuit setting process (step S10b), the CPU 103 sets the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time (e.g., every 2 ms) (step S11), and permits the interrupt (step S12). After that, the process enters into a loop. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

(Game control timer interrupt processing)
After executing the game control main process, the CPU 103 receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, and then executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of Fig. 12-17. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in Fig. 12-17 starts, the CPU 103 first executes a power failure detection process (step S20) for determining whether the power supply has been cut off, and a game stop start process (step S20a) for monitoring whether the game is to be stopped. Then, it determines whether a game stop flag (described later) is set (step S20b).

If the game stop flag is set (step S20b; No), the value of the special pattern process flag is identified (step S20c), and it is determined whether the value of the identified special pattern process flag corresponds to any of the pre-jackpot opening processing, the jackpot opening processing, and the post-jackpot opening processing (step S20d).

If the game stop flag is not set (step S20b; No) or the value of the identified special pattern process flag is a value corresponding to either the pre-jackpot opening processing, the processing during the jackpot opening, or the processing after the jackpot opening (step S20d; Yes), the CPU 103 executes a predetermined switch processing to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the first count switch 23, the second count switch 24, the general winning switch 25, and the out switch 26 via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, a prize ball process (step S21a) is performed to set up the payout of prize balls when game balls are detected at the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the first count switch 23, and the general winning switch 25, a winning information process (step S21b) is performed to calculate a base value (see FIG. 12-14(C)) based on the detection of game balls at the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the first count switch 23, the second count switch 24, the general winning switch 25, and the out switch 26, and a winning information display control process (step S21c) is performed to display the calculated base value on the display monitor 21TM029 as shown in FIG. 12-15. In addition, a predetermined main side error process is performed to diagnose abnormalities in the pachinko game machine 1, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After this, a predetermined information output process is executed to output data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots that have occurred), start information (information indicating the number of start wins), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability fluctuation state has been reached) that is supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process is executed to update at least a portion of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, the execution and reservation management of the special symbol game, the control of the jackpot game state, the control of the game state, etc. are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process at each timer interrupt, enabling the execution and reservation management of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), and the opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol hit". The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display device 20, and the number of reserved normal symbols is displayed by lighting up the normal symbol reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed. Then, the CPU 103 executes a command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set a performance control command for transmission in each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, a process is performed to transmit the performance control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the performance control board 12. After executing the command control processing, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

If the value of the identified special pattern process flag does not correspond to any of the pre-jackpot opening processing, the jackpot opening processing, or the post-jackpot opening processing, a game stop process (step S20e) is executed to stop the game on the pachinko game machine 1, and the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

(Power interruption detection process)
12-18 is a flowchart showing the power interruption detection process. In the power interruption detection process, the CPU 103 first judges whether or not a power interruption signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board (not shown) has dropped below a predetermined value (005SGS081). If there is no power interruption signal (005SGS081; N), the process ends. If there is a power interruption signal (005SGS081; Y), the CPU 103 specifies backup data including information stored in the RAM 122 (005SGS082) and stores the specified backup data in a backup data storage area provided in the RAM 122 (005SGS083). Then, the CPU 103 creates check data used to restore the backup data and stores it in the backup data storage area (005SGS084), and then proceeds to a loop process in which no process is executed until the pachinko game machine 1 is powered off.

The data that is backed up includes the game stop flag, special symbol process flag value, MY counter value, first special symbol reserved memory, second special symbol reserved memory, regular symbol reserved memory, variable special symbol designation buffer value, time-saving flag, special chance flag, time-saving count counter value, jackpot flag, etc.

Figure 12-19 is a flowchart showing the game stop monitoring process. In the game stop monitoring process, the CPU 103 first determines whether any of the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the first count switch 23, the general winning switch 25, and the out switch 26 has been turned on in the switch process (005SGS051). If any of the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the first count switch 23, the general winning switch 25, and the out switch 26 has been turned on in the switch process (005SGS051; Y), a value corresponding to the switch that has been turned on is added to the MY counter value (005SGS052).

After execution of 005SGS052, or if none of the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the first count switch 23, the general winning switch 25, and the out switch 26 are in the on state during the switch processing (005SGS051; N), the CPU 103 determines whether the out switch 26 is in the on state during the switch processing (005SGS053). If the out switch 26 is in the on state during the switch processing, and the MY counter value is not 0 (005SGS054; N), the MY counter value is decremented by 1 (005SGS055).

After execution of 005SGS055, if the out switch 26 is not turned on in the switch processing (005SGS053; N), or if the MY counter value is 0 (005SGS054; Y), the CPU 103 identifies the MY counter value (005SGS056) and determines whether the MY counter value is 98194 or greater (005SGS057). If the MY counter value is not 98194 or greater (005SGS057; N), the game stop monitoring processing is terminated, and if the MY counter value is 98194 or greater (005SGS057; Y), the game stop flag is set and the game stop monitoring processing is terminated (005SGS058).

In this embodiment, the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped (the pachinko game machine 1 is controlled to a game stop state) when the MY counter value reaches 98194. Here, the reason why the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped when the MY counter value reaches 98194 will be described in detail. First, in conventional pachinko game machines, a jackpot is selected by lottery with a predetermined probability, so that a lucky player could win more than the designed number of prize balls (for example, 100,000 balls) by winning the jackpot multiple times in one day, although the probability is extremely low. For this reason, in order to prevent players from excessively encouraging gambling in pachinko machines, it is no longer sufficient to simply limit the conventional jackpot probability, the rate at which consecutive wins continue (the rate at which the game state continues to be controlled between the jackpot game state, the time-saving state, and the special probability state without passing through the normal state), and the number of prize balls that can be won in one jackpot game; a mechanism is needed to limit the number of prize balls that a player can win in one day's play on pachinko machines.

For the above reasons, in this embodiment, an MY counter value is set, and play on the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped when the MY counter value reaches 98194. The MY counter value "98194" for stopping play on the pachinko game machine 1 is a value that allows the jackpot game to be played to the last round of play without the MY counter value reaching "100000," and allows the maximum number of prize balls to be paid out to the player, even when taking into account over-entry into the jackpot slot during jackpot play (entering more game balls than expected during jackpot play, also known as over-entry) and prize balls from other prize slots.

(Special pattern processing)
Fig. 12-20 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S25 shown in Fig. 12-17 as the special symbol process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning judgment process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a start winning, store the reserved information in a specified area of the RAM 102, and update the reserved memory number. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of big win) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as reserved information. In addition, a process for predicting and judging the display result and the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value may be executed. After the reserved information and the reserved memory number are stored, a transmission setting is performed to transmit a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the judgment results such as the occurrence of a start winning, the reserved memory number, and the predictive judgment. The performance control command at the time of the start winning that has been transmitted and set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special pattern process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 12-17.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S117 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S117), a transmission setting is made to transmit a performance control command corresponding to each step to the performance control board 12.

The normal special symbol processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this normal special symbol processing, a determination is made as to whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reserved information. In addition, in the normal special symbol processing, based on a random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be a "jackpot" and, if it is a "jackpot", the type of jackpot is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the normal special symbol processing, a determined special symbol (either a jackpot symbol or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in response to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the normal special symbol processing is terminated. Note that the special symbol game using the second special symbol may be executed in preference to the special symbol game using the first special symbol (also called special symbol 2 priority consumption). Also, the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also known as winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which decision values compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a pre-determined result of whether or not the display result is a "jackpot". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when a fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2" and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special game (special game variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of the variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special pattern change process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "2". This special pattern change process includes a process for making settings to change the special pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B, and a process for measuring the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special pattern change time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change has reached the special pattern change time, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "3", and the special pattern change process ends.

The special symbol stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". This special symbol stop process includes a process for setting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to stop the variation of the special symbol and to stop displaying (deriving) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. If the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, if the display result is a "miss", the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0". If the display result is a "miss", when the time-saving state or the probability variable state is in control and the variable display that has ended is the 100th variable display in the time-saving state or the probability variable state, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop process ends.

The pre-opening process for the jackpot in step S114 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "4". This pre-opening process for the jackpot includes a process for starting the execution of a round in the jackpot game state and setting the jackpot opening port to an open state, based on the display result being "jackpot", etc. When the jackpot opening port is opened, a process for supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening port is executed. At this time, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the maximum open period for the jackpot opening port and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", and the pre-opening process for the jackpot is completed.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process of measuring the time that has elapsed since the jackpot opening was opened, and a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the jackpot opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 23. It also includes a process of setting the V winning notification command to be sent to the performance control board 12 based on the detection of a game ball by the second count switch 24. The V winning notification command that has been set for sending is sent to the performance control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process (see FIG. 12-17). Then, when the jackpot opening is returned to the closed state, a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door is executed, and the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "6", and the jackpot opening process is terminated.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "6". This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of times the round that opens the big prize opening has been executed has reached a set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. When the number of times the round has been executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", whereas when the number of times the round has been executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "7". When the value of the special chart process flag is updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7". This jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation is executed as a presentation operation that notifies the end of the jackpot game state has elapsed, and a process of making various settings for starting special rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When such settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

(Start winning judgment process)
FIG. 12-21 is a flow chart showing the start winning judgment process (S101) shown in FIG. 12-20. In the start winning judgment process, the CPU 103 first judges whether the first start opening switch 22A is on or not based on a detection signal from the first start opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A (005SGS101). At this time, if the first start opening switch 22A is on (005SGS101; Y), it judges whether the first special chart reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special chart game using the first special chart, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number) (005SGS102). The CPU 103 may specify the first special chart reserved memory number by reading the first reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 005SG154, for example. When the number of reserved first special charts in 005SGS102 is not the upper limit (005SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 005SG155 is set to "1" (005SGS103).

When the first start port switch 22A is off in 005SGS101 (005SGS101; N) or when the first special symbol reserved memory number has reached the upper limit in 005SGS102 (005SGS102; Y), the second start port switch 22B, which is provided corresponding to the second start entry port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, is judged to be on or not (005SGS104). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (005SGS104; Y), it is judged to be whether the second special symbol reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the second special symbol, has reached a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number) (005SGS105). The CPU 103 can specify the number of reserved second special figures by, for example, reading the second reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the second reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 005SG154. When the second reserved memory count in 005SGS105 is not the upper limit value (005SGS105;N), for example, the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 005SG155 is set to "2" (S106).

After executing any of the processes 005SGS103 and 005SGS106, the number of reserved memories corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, is updated to add 1 (005SGS107). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first reserved memory count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second reserved memory count value is added by 1. Thus, the first reserved memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning port and the first start condition corresponding to the special game using the first special game is established. In addition, the second reserved memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning port and the second start condition corresponding to the special game using the second special game is established. At this time, the total reserved memory number is also updated to add 1 (005SGS108). For example, the total reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 005SG154, can be updated to add 1.

After executing the process of 005SGS108, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the winning type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 005SG154 (005SGS109). The numerical data indicating each random number value thus extracted is stored by being set as reserved information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special chart reserved memory unit according to the start port buffer value (005SGS110). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 005SG151A, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit 005SG151B.

The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the type of hit are used to determine whether the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "big hit" or a "small hit", and further to determine the type of big hit if the variable display result is a "big hit". The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol. By executing the processing of 005SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used to determine the variable display state including the variable display result and the variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol.

Following the processing of 005SGS110, the sending setting of the start port winning designation command according to the start port buffer value is performed (005SGS111). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, and the setting is performed to send the first start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, and the setting is performed to send the second start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. The start port winning designation command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special pattern process processing is completed, by executing the command control processing of S27 shown in FIG. 12-4.

Following the processing of 005SGS111, the CPU 103 executes a winning random number value determination process (005SGS112). After that, it sets up to send a pending memory number notification command to the performance control board 12, for example by storing the storage address of the pending memory number notification command table in the ROM 101 in a buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer (005SGS113). The pending memory number notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example by executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 12-17 after the special symbol process process is completed.

After executing the process of 005SGS113, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is "1" (005SGS114). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" (Y in 005SGS114), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (005SGS115), and then the process of 2390SGS104 is started. In contrast, if the start port buffer value is "2" (N in 005SGS114), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (005SGS116), and then the start winning process is terminated. This ensures that the process based on the detection of both valid start winnings can be completed reliably, even if both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect the start winning of a valid game ball.

(Random value judgment process when winning)
FIG. 12-22(A) is a flow chart showing an example of a process executed by the 005SGS112 in FIG. 12-21 as a winning random number value determination process. In this embodiment, when the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started, the special symbol normal process determines whether or not to control the special symbol display result (the variable display result of the special symbol) as a "jackpot" to a jackpot game state. In addition, in the variable pattern setting process, a variable pattern that specifically specifies the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is determined. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected at the start winning hole (the first start winning hole or the second start winning hole), the CPU 103 executes the winning random number value determination process of S112 to determine whether or not it is determined that the jackpot symbol or the small winning symbol is derived and displayed as the special symbol display result. As a result, before the variable display of special patterns and decorative patterns based on the detection of a gaming ball entering the starting winning hole begins, in other words, before it is determined whether or not a jackpot will be reached at the start of the variable display, it is determined that the special pattern display result will be a "jackpot," and based on this determination result, the performance control CPU 120, etc., will execute a pre-reading notice (pending display performance), as described below.

In the winning random number value judgment process shown in FIG. 12-22, the CPU 103 identifies the current game state (005SGS121), and selects and sets the display result judgment table shown in FIG. 12-9(A) (005SGS122). After that, it is judged whether the numerical data indicating the start port buffer value and the random number value MR1 for special chart display result judgment extracted in 005SGS109 of FIG. 12-21 is within a predetermined jackpot judgment range in the game state identified in 005SGS121 (005SGS123). In the jackpot judgment range, individual judgment values assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" in the display result judgment table selected by the process of 005SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 can compare the random number value MR1 with each judgment value one by one to judge whether there is a judgment value that matches the random number value MR1. Alternatively, numerical values indicating the minimum (lower limit) and maximum (upper limit) judgment values included in the jackpot judgment range may be set, and the CPU 103 may compare the random number value MR1 with the minimum and maximum values of the jackpot judgment range to determine whether the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot judgment range. In this case, by determining that the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot judgment range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number value MR1 is determined to be a "jackpot".

If 005SGS123 determines that the number is not within the jackpot determination range, i.e., if it is determined that the number will not be a jackpot when the variable display is selected (005SGS123; N), the sending of a pattern designation command corresponding to a miss is set (005SGS128). Also, it determines whether or not the time-saving flag is set, i.e., whether or not the current game state is a time-saving state or a guaranteed bonus state (005SGS129). If the time-saving flag is not set (005SGS129; N), it selects miss fluctuation pattern determination table A and proceeds to 005SGS138 (005SGS130), and if the time-saving flag is set (005SGS129; Y), it selects miss fluctuation pattern determination table C and proceeds to 005SGS138.

Also, if 005SGS123 determines that it is within the jackpot determination range, that is, if it determines that a jackpot will occur during variable display (005SGS123; Y), it selects the numeric data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination extracted in 005SGS109 of FIG. 12-21 and the jackpot type determination table according to the start port buffer value (see FIG. 12-9 (B) and FIG. 12-9 (C)), determines the jackpot type (005SGS132), executes the sending setting of the designation command according to the determined jackpot type (005SGS133), and selects the jackpot variable pattern determination table and proceeds to 005SGS138.

In the processing of 005SGS138, each fluctuation pattern determination table set in each step and numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination are used to determine a fluctuation category according to the range of determination values that includes the random number value MR3 (005SGS138). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12-22(B), at least when the variable display result is "miss", a variable category that will have a variable display mode of "non-reach" regardless of the total number of reserved memories, a variable category that will have a variable display mode of "super reach", and an "other" variable category that will have a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach), are provided, and it is sufficient to be able to determine whether such a variable category is determined based on the random number value MR3.

After that, a variable category designation command according to the result of the processing of 005SGS138 is set up to be sent to the performance control board 12 (005SGS132), and the winning random number value determination process is terminated.

The commands set for transmission are sent to the performance control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process shown in Figure 12-17.

(Special pattern normal processing)
FIG. 12-23 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of FIG. 12-20 as the normal special symbol process. In the normal special symbol process shown in FIG. 12-23, the CPU 103 first judges whether the second special symbol reserved memory number is "0" or not (005SGS161). The second special symbol reserved memory number is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of 005SGS161, it is sufficient to read the second reserved memory number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit and judge whether the read value is "0" or not.

When the number of reserved second special charts in 005SGS161 is other than "0" (005SGS161;N), the following reserved data stored in the second special chart reserved memory section corresponding to reserved number "1" are read out (005SGS162): a random number value MR1 for determining the result of the special chart display, a random number value MR2 for determining the type of big win, and a random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern. The numerical data read out at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a random number buffer for fluctuation.

Following the processing of 005SGS162, the second special chart reserved memory count value and the total reserved memory count value are updated by subtracting 1 from each other, and the second special chart reserved memory count and the total reserved memory count are updated. Specifically, the reserved data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than reserved number "1" in the second special chart reserved memory unit (for example, entries corresponding to reserved numbers "2" to "4") are shifted to higher values by one entry at a time (005SGS163).

After that, the variable special chart designation buffer value, which is the stored value in the variable special chart designation buffer, is updated to "2" (005SGS164), and then the process moves to 005SGS169.

On the other hand, when the second special pattern reserved memory number is "0" in 005SGS161 (005SGS161; Y), it is determined whether the first special pattern reserved memory number is "0" (005SGS165). The first special pattern reserved memory number is the reserved memory number of the special pattern game using the first special pattern by the first special pattern display device 4A. For example, in the processing of 005SGS165, the game control counter setting unit reads the first reserved memory number count value stored in the first reserved memory number counter and determines whether the read value is "0". In this way, the processing of 005SGS165 is executed when it is determined that the second special pattern reserved memory number is "0" in 005SGS161, and determines whether the first special pattern reserved memory number is "0". As a result, the special pattern game using the second special pattern is started in priority to the special pattern game using the first special pattern.

The special chart game using the second special chart is not limited to being executed with priority over the special chart game using the first special chart, and the special chart game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) the first start winning port or the second start winning port and the start winning occurs. In this case, a table may be provided that stores data that can identify the order in which the start winning occurs, and it may be possible to determine whether to start the special chart game using the first special chart or the second special chart from the stored data.

When the first special chart reserved memory number in 005SGS165 is other than "0" (005SGS165;N), the reserved data stored in the first special chart reserved memory section corresponding to reserved number "1" is read out as numerical data indicating a random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, a random number value MR2 for determining the type of big win, and a random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern (005SGS166). The numerical data read out at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a fluctuation random number buffer.

Following the processing of 005SGS166, the first special chart reserved memory count value and the total reserved memory count value are updated by subtracting 1 from each other, and the first special chart reserved memory count and the total reserved memory count are updated, and the data in the first special chart reserved memory section is updated. Specifically, the reserved data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than reserved number "1" in the first special chart reserved memory section (for example, entries corresponding to reserved numbers "2" to "4") are shifted to higher values by one entry at a time (005SGS167).

After that, the variable special chart designation buffer value, which is the stored value in the variable special chart designation buffer, is updated to "1" (005SGS168), and then the process moves to 005SGS169.

In the 005SGS169, the display result judgment table shown in FIG. 12-9(A) is selected and set as the table to be used for determining whether the special pattern display result, which is the variable display result of the special pattern, is to be a "jackpot" or a "miss". Next, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for special pattern display result judgment stored in the variable random number buffer is compared with the judgment value assigned to each special pattern display result of "jackpot" or "miss" to determine whether the special pattern display result is a "jackpot" or a "miss".

When 005SGS170 determines that it is a "jackpot" (005SGS170; Y), the jackpot flag is set to ON (005SGS172). At this time, the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 12-9(B) and FIG. 12-9(C)) is selected and set as the table to be used to determine the jackpot type as one of several types (005SGS173). For example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is 1, the first special symbol jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 12-9(B) is selected and set, and if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is 2, the second special symbol jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 12-9(C) is selected and set. By referencing the jackpot type determination table thus set, the system determines which of several types of jackpot types the jackpot type will be, depending on whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer matches with the determination value assigned to each of the jackpot types "jackpot A", "jackpot B", or "jackpot C" in the jackpot type determination table (005SGS174).

Corresponding to the jackpot type thus determined, the jackpot type buffer value, which is the storage value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit, is set (005SGS175), for example, to store the determined jackpot type. As an example, if the jackpot type is "jackpot A", the jackpot type buffer value is set to "0", if the jackpot type is "jackpot B", the jackpot type buffer value is set to "1", and if the jackpot type is "jackpot C", the jackpot type buffer value is set to "2". After processing 005SGS175, proceed to 005SGS176. If 005SGS170 determines that the jackpot is a "miss" (005SGS170; N), proceed to 005SGS176 without executing the processes of 005SGS172 to 005SGS175.

In 005SGS176, the CPU 103 sets a fixed special symbol in response to the pre-determined result of whether or not to control to a jackpot game state (whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on) and the determined jackpot type in the jackpot game state. As an example, in response to the pre-determined result of the special symbol display result being "miss", a special symbol showing the "-" symbol, which is a miss symbol, is set as the fixed special symbol. Also, when the special symbol display result is determined to be "jackpot" in 005SGS170, if the jackpot type in 005SGS174 is "jackpot A", a special symbol showing the number "1" is set as the fixed special symbol. Also, if the jackpot type is "jackpot B", a special symbol showing the number "2" is set as the fixed special symbol. Also, if the jackpot type is "jackpot C", a special symbol showing the number "3" is set as the fixed special symbol. Note that these fixed special symbols are just examples, and other fixed special symbols may be set, or multiple types of symbols may be set as fixed special symbols.

After the confirmed special symbol is set in 005SGS176, the MY counter value is identified (005SGS176a), the MY counter value notification command transmission setting corresponding to the MY counter value is performed (005SGS176b), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" which corresponds to the variable pattern setting processing (005SGS177), and then the normal processing of the special symbol is terminated.

In addition, in the processing of 005SGS176b, if the MY counter value is 0 to 90000, the first MY counter value notification command is sent, if the MY counter value is 90001 to 95000, the second MY counter value notification command is sent, and if the MY counter value is 95001 to 98194, the third MY counter value notification command is sent. As described above, since only three types of MY counter notification commands are provided in this embodiment, the CPU 103 does not need to send MY counter value notification commands corresponding to each value of 0 to 98194, so the number of types of commands sent by the CPU 103 to the performance control board 12 can be reduced, and the processing load of the CPU 103 can be reduced. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 can grasp the approximate value of the MY counter value at each start timing of the variable display of the special pattern.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, the first to third MY counter value notification commands are used to notify the performance control CPU 120 of the approximate MY counter value, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the performance control CPU 120 may be notified of a specific MY counter value. For example, in addition to the first to third MY counter value notification commands described above, the CPU 103 may provide a command (E1XXH) to notify the value of the thousands digit of the MY counter value, a command (E2XXH) to notify the value of the hundreds digit of the MY counter value, a command (E3XXH) to notify the value of the tens digit of the MY counter value, and a command (E4XXH) to notify the value of the ones digit of the MY counter value, and the performance control CPU 120 may be able to identify the value of each digit by the value set as "XX" (EXT data) of each command. In this way, the performance control PU 120 can receive the first to third MY counter value notification commands, E1XXH, E2XXH, E3XXH, and E4XXH, to determine the exact MY counter value each time a variable display is executed.

If the number of reserved memories for the special symbol game using the first special symbol in 005SGS165 is "0" (005SGS165; Y), a specified demo display setting is performed (005SGS178), and then the normal special symbol processing is terminated. In this demo display setting, it is determined whether or not a performance control command (customer waiting demo designation command) that designates a demonstration display (execution of a customer waiting demo performance) by, for example, displaying a specified performance image on the image display device 5 has been transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. At this time, if the customer waiting demo designation command has already been transmitted, the demo display setting is terminated as is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, transmission settings are performed to transmit the customer waiting demo designation command, and then the demo display setting is terminated.

The MY counter value notification command set for transmission in 005SGS176b and the customer waiting demo designation command set for transmission in 005SGS178 are sent to the performance control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process shown in Figure 12-17.

(Variation pattern setting process)
Fig. 12-24 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in S111 of Fig. 12-20 as a fluctuation pattern setting process. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 first selects one fluctuation pattern determination table from the multiple fluctuation pattern determination tables shown in Fig. 12-8 according to the variable display result, the game state, the number of reserved memories, etc. (005SGS161). Then, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the value of the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination extracted in 005SGS109 of Fig. 12-21 and the selected fluctuation pattern determination table (005SGS162).

Then, the CPU 103 performs settings to start the variation of the special pattern so that either a special pattern game using the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A or a special pattern game using the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B is started according to the variable special pattern designation buffer value. As an example, if the variable special pattern designation buffer value is "1", settings are performed to send a drive signal to update the display of the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A. On the other hand, if the variable special pattern designation buffer value is "2", settings are performed to send a drive signal to update the display of the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B (005SGS163).

Following the processing of 005SGS163, settings are made to send various commands for when the special symbol starts to change (005SGS164). For example, when the special symbol change designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 stores the setting data indicating the storage address (first address) in the ROM 101 of the first change start command table prepared in advance in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 005SG155 in order to sequentially send the game state designation command, the first variable display start command, the variable pattern designation command, the variable display result designation command, and the first reserved memory number notification command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. On the other hand, when the variable special chart designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 stores the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the second variable start command table prepared in advance in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 005SG155 in order to sequentially transmit the game state designation command, the second variable display start command, the variable pattern designation command, the variable display result designation command, and the second reserved memory number notification command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. Note that the various commands for which the transmission setting has been performed are transmitted to the performance control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process shown in FIG. 12-4.

After executing the process of 005SGS164, a special pattern variable display time is set, which is the variable display time of the special pattern according to the result of the determination of the variation pattern (005SGS165). The special pattern variable display time, which is the variable display time of the special pattern, is the time required from the start of the variable display of the special pattern in the special pattern game until the confirmed special pattern, which is the variable display result (special pattern display result), is displayed stationary. Thereafter, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "2", which is the value corresponding to the special pattern variation process (005SGS166), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

The commands set for transmission are sent to the performance control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process shown in FIG. 12-12.

(Special symbol stop processing)
Fig. 12-25 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in S113 of Fig. 12-20 as the special symbol stop process. In the normal special symbol process, the CPU 103 first judges whether or not the symbol determination period timer, which indicates that the variable display is stopped, is operating (005SGS201). If the symbol determination period timer is not operating (005SGS201; N), the CPU 103 derives and displays the stopped symbol of the special symbol (005SGS202), sets the transmission setting of the symbol determination command (005SGS203), and judges whether or not the big win flag is set (005SGS204).

When the jackpot flag is set (005SGS204; Y), if the time-saving flag or the probability of winning is set, the time-saving flag and the probability of winning are cleared (005SGS205). Furthermore, depending on the type of jackpot, the transmission setting of one of the hit start 1 designation command to hit start 3 designation command and the transmission setting of the game state designation command indicating the normal state are performed (005SGS207, 005SGS208), and a value corresponding to "0.5 seconds" is set as the value of the pattern determination period timer corresponding to the selected variation pattern (005SGS209).

The CPU 103 also sets the transmission of a pattern determination command according to the value of the set pattern determination period timer (005SGS210), and ends the special pattern stop process.

On the other hand, if the jackpot flag is not set (005SGS204; N), it is further determined whether the high probability flag or the time-saving flag is set (005SGS220, 005SGS221). If the high probability flag is set (005SGS220; Y), or if the high probability flag is not set but the time-saving flag is not set (005SGS220; N and 005SGS221; Y), the value of the time-saving count counter, which indicates the number of variable display times of the remaining time-saving control in the time-saving state (high probability high base state, low probability high base state), is decremented by 1 (005SGS222).

Then, the CPU 103 judges whether the value of the time-saving count counter has reached 0 (005SGS223). If the value of the time-saving count counter has reached 0 (005SGS223; Y), the CPU 103 clears the time-saving flag and the guaranteed bonus flag that are set (005SGS224), sets the symbol determination period timer to a value corresponding to "10 seconds", and proceeds to 005SGS227 (005SGS225).

If both the sure-win flag and the time-saving flag are not set (005SGS220;N and 005SGS221;N) and the time-saving counter value is not 0 (005SGS223;N), the symbol determination period timer is set to a value corresponding to "0.5 seconds" and the process proceeds to 005SGS227 (005SGS226).

The processing of 005SGS227 sets the sending of a game state designation command according to the state of the time-saving flag and the probability bonus flag, and executes the processing of 005SGS210 described above to end the special symbol stop processing.

If the pattern determination period timer is running (005SGS201; Y), the CPU 103 decrements the value of the pattern determination period timer by 1 (005SGS231), and determines whether the pattern determination period timer has timed out after decrementing the value by 1 (005SGS232). If the pattern determination period timer has not timed out (005SGS232; N), the special pattern stop process is terminated, and if the pattern determination period timer has timed out (005SGS232; Y), it determines whether the stopped pattern is a losing pattern (005SGS233).

If the stopped symbol is a losing symbol (005SGS233; Y), the value of the special symbol process flag is set to a value corresponding to the normal special symbol processing and the special symbol stopping processing is terminated (005SGS324); if the stopped symbol is not a losing symbol (005SGS233; N), the jackpot display time timer corresponding to the jackpot type is set (005SGS236), the jackpot start command transmission setting corresponding to the jackpot type is performed (005SGS237), the value of the special symbol process flag is set to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (005SGS238), and the special symbol stopping processing is terminated.

(Jackpot end processing)
FIG. 12-26 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in S117 of FIG. 12-20 as the jackpot end processing.

In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot end display timer is operating, i.e., whether the timer is counting (005SGS321). If the jackpot end display timer is not operating (005SGS321;N), the jackpot end display timer is set to a value equivalent to "20 seconds" as the display time corresponding to the time for which the jackpot end display is performed on the image display device 5 (jackpot end display time) (005SGS322), and the processing ends.

On the other hand, if the jackpot end display timer is running (005SGS321; Y), the value of the jackpot end display timer is decremented by 1 (005SGS323). The CPU 103 then checks whether the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, i.e., whether the jackpot end display time has elapsed (005SGS324). If it has not elapsed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (005SGS324; Y), the CPU 103 sets a time-saving flag indicating that control is being exercised in the time-saving state, and sets the time-saving count counter to "100", which is the maximum variable display count for which time-saving control is exercised. Furthermore, the CPU 103 determines whether the second count switch 24 has been turned on during the jackpot game, that is, whether a V win has occurred (005SGS327). Incidentally, whether a V win has occurred can be determined, for example, by setting a V win flag in response to the second count switch 24 being turned on during the jackpot game, and then determining whether the V win flag is set.

If the second count switch 24 is turned on during jackpot play (005SGS327; Y), the sure-change flag is set (005SGS328), and the value of the special symbol process flag is set to a value corresponding to the normal special symbol processing, and the jackpot end processing is terminated (005SGS329). On the other hand, if the second count switch 24 is not turned on during jackpot play (005SGS327; N), the value of the special symbol process flag is set to a value corresponding to the normal special symbol processing, and the jackpot end processing is terminated (005SGS329).

(Game stop processing)
FIG. 12-27 is a flowchart showing an example of a game stop process executed in S20e of FIG. 12-17.

In the game stop process, the CPU 103 first determines whether the game stop notification command sent flag, which indicates that the game stop notification command has been sent to the presentation control board 12, is set (005SGS331). If the game stop notification command sent flag is set (005SGS331; Y), the game stop process is terminated, and if the game stop notification command sent flag is not set (005SGS331; N), the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, the first reserved display device 25A, the second reserved display device 25B, and the normal reserved display device 25C are all turned off (005SGS332).

In addition, the CPU 103 sets the sending of a game stop notification command (005SGS333) and sets the game stop notification command sent flag (005SGS334). In addition, the CPU 103 sets the output of a security signal based on the game stop (output of the game stop notification command) (005SGS335), and ends the game stop process. The game stop notification command is sent to the performance control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process shown in FIG. 12-17. In addition, in the process of 005SGS335, for example, a security signal may be output to the information output circuit 112, so that the security signal is output from the information output circuit 112 for a predetermined period of time.

As described above, the game is stopped by executing the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 12-17, the game stop monitoring process shown in FIG. 12-19, and the game stop process shown in FIG. 12-27. In particular, as shown in FIG. 12-28, in the normal, time-saving, and probability-variable game states, the game is stopped when the MY counter value reaches 98194, while in the case where the MY counter value reaches 98194 during a jackpot game, the game is stopped when the jackpot game ends (all rounds of play end). In this embodiment, once the game stop flag is set, there is no means for clearing the game stop flag, except when the power is turned on to the pachinko game machine 1 together with the operation of the clear switch 92 (the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a cold start). In other words, once the MY counter value reaches 98194 during a jackpot game and the game stop flag is set, even if the player subsequently shoots the game ball toward the left game area 2L, preventing the game ball from entering the jackpot opening, and the MY counter value becomes less than 98194, the pachinko game machine 1 is controlled to a game stop state upon the end of the jackpot game.

Furthermore, if the MY counter value reaches 98194 during a jackpot game and the game stop flag is set, and a power interruption occurs in the jackpot game state, the game is backed up in the power interruption detection process with the game stop flag set. Therefore, when the power is turned on to the pachinko game machine 1 without the clear switch 92 being operated, the pachinko game machine 1 starts up in the jackpot game state rather than the game stop state. In other words, even though the game stop flag is set, the pachinko game machine 1 starts up in the jackpot game state, so no special error notification or the like is executed in this state. Then, after the jackpot game ends, the game is controlled to the game stop state based on the fact that the game stop flag is set.

As shown in FIG. 12-29(B), when the MY counter value reaches the specified value of 98194, play is stopped and a security signal is output from the terminal board 16 until the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off. When the MY counter value reaches the specified value of 98194 and play is stopped, the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off once, and then the clear switch 92 is operated and the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on again to execute the initialization process (step 8 in FIG. 12-16), so that the machine becomes playable. In other words, the condition for releasing the play-stop state is to start up the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the initialization process (cold start).

When play is stopped on the pachinko gaming machine 1, if the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off and then turned back on without operating the clear switch 92, backup data is created in the power interruption detection process when the power is turned off, and when the power is turned back on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, a recovery process (step 6 in FIG. 12-16) is executed, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is restored to a state in which play is stopped based on the backup data.

(Main side error processing)
Here, the main side error processing shown in Fig. 12-17 will be described. In the main side error processing, for example, an abnormality determination process is executed to determine whether or not an abnormality has occurred by referring to the detection status of each switch and sensor, and if it is determined that an abnormality has occurred, the determined abnormality is specified.

For example, as shown in FIG. 12-29(A), the CPU 103 determines the occurrence of a radio wave error based on the detection of a predetermined radio wave by the radio wave sensor 005SG070, determines the occurrence of a magnetic error based on the detection of a magnetic field of a predetermined strength or greater by the magnetic sensor 005SG060, determines the occurrence of a game ball guide lid operation error based on the fact that the special variable winning ball device 7 is open other than during a big win game or a small win game, in other words, that the big win door sensor 005SG091 detects the opening of the big win door other than during a big win game or a small win game, and determines the occurrence of a second start winning in a low base state. Based on this (the second start port switch 22B detects a game ball in a low base state), it is determined that a start port 2 abnormal winning error has occurred; based on the controller sensor unit 35A detecting an abnormality such as the inability to detect the operation of the stick controller 31A, it is determined that a controller connection error has occurred; based on the door open sensor 005SG090 detecting that the game machine frame 3 is open, it is determined that a door open error has occurred; and based on the ball out sensor 005SG094 detecting that the supply balls have run out, it is determined that a ball out error has occurred.

A priority order is assigned to these errors, and in the event that multiple errors occur at the same time, the error notification command corresponding to the error with the highest priority is set to be sent, and the CPU 103 executes the command control process shown in FIG. 12-17 so that the error notification command that has been set to be sent is sent to the performance control board 12.

If a game stop error occurs, the CPU 103 sets a game stop flag and executes the processes of S20c to S20e shown in FIG. 12-17 to stop the game. In addition, the CPU 103 sets the transmission setting for an error notification command according to the error that occurred. The error notification command that has been set for transmission is sent to the performance control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process shown in FIG. 12-17.

In this embodiment, when the above game stop errors (radio wave error, magnet error, game ball guide lid operation error) occur, if a jackpot game is in progress, the game will not be stopped until the jackpot game ends, but the present invention is not limited to this. When a game stop error (radio wave error, magnet error, game ball guide lid operation error) occurs, the game may be stopped immediately regardless of whether a jackpot game is in progress or not.

Furthermore, if any of these game stop errors occur and game play is stopped, the power to the pachinko game machine 1 is turned off once, and then the clear switch 92 is operated and the power is turned back on to the pachinko game machine 1, thereby executing the initialization process (step S8), and the game stop error is cleared. In other words, the condition for clearing the radio wave error, magnet error, and game ball guide lid operation error is to start up the pachinko game machine 1 (cold start) along with the initialization process.

When an error (game stop error) with a top three priority occurs, a security signal is output from the terminal board 16 to a management computer or a management device such as a machine counter installed in the gaming center where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed. Note that the security signal in this case is output from the time the game stop error occurs until the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off.

Among these errors, for the errors with a priority of 4th or lower, the release conditions and the output mode of the security signal are different for each error that occurs. Specifically, when a start port 2 abnormal winning error occurs, the start port 2 abnormal winning error is released based on the passage of 300 seconds from the occurrence, and the security signal is output for 4 minutes from the occurrence. When an illegal winning error occurs, the illegal winning error is released based on the passage of 30 seconds from the occurrence, and the security signal is output from the occurrence until the power supply of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned off. When a controller connection error occurs, the controller connection error is released based on the passage of 60 seconds from the occurrence, and the security signal is output from the occurrence until the power supply of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned off. When a door open error occurs, the door open error is released based on the closing of the door (game machine frame 3), and the security signal is not output. When a bulb-out error occurs, the bulb-out error is cleared (when a replacement bulb is supplied) and no security signal is output.

In this embodiment, the radio wave error, magnet error, and game ball guide lid operation error are exemplified as being released by turning off the power to the pachinko game machine 1 and then powering on the pachinko game machine 1 while operating the clear switch, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the radio wave error, magnet error, and game ball guide lid operation error may be released by turning off the power to the pachinko game machine 1 and then powering on the pachinko game machine 1 without operating the clear switch (starting the pachinko game machine 1 with a hot start).

In addition, in this way, in cases where the radio wave error, magnet error, and game ball guide lid operation error are cleared by turning on the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 after the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off without operating the clear switch, the security signal based on the radio wave error, magnet error, and game ball guide lid operation error may be output for a predetermined period of time (e.g., four minutes) after the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on.

(Handling prize balls)
Next, the prize ball process (S21a) in the main process will be described. First, the payout control signal (connection confirmation signal) and the prize ball request signal (payout control command) transmitted and received between the main board 11 and the payout control board 21TM037 will be described.

Figure 12-30 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a control signal output from the game control microcomputer 100 to the payout control board 21TM037. In this embodiment, a connection confirmation signal is sent and received as a control signal between the main board 11 and the payout control board 21TM037 to perform various controls related to payout control, etc. As shown in Figure 12-30 (A), the connection confirmation signal is output when the main board 11 starts up (when the game control microcomputer 100 starts the game control main processing), and is a signal (connection confirmation signal of the main board 11) for notifying the payout control board 21TM037 that the main board 11 has started up. The connection confirmation signal also indicates that a state in which prize balls can be paid out is available. The connection confirmation signal is output via the I/O port 21TM057 and output circuit 21TM067 of the game control microcomputer 100, and is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the input circuit 21TM373A and I/O port 21TM372e of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Each connection confirmation signal is 1 bit of data and is transmitted by one signal line. The connection confirmation signal is ready to be output by setting an initial value to the bit corresponding to the connection confirmation signal of output port 0 by the processing of S6 and S8 executed when the power is turned on (specifically, the connection confirmation signal is output by the processing of S21TM2080 shown in FIG. 12-34, but may be output at the timing of S6 and S8 shown in FIG. 12-16).

The payout control microcomputer 21TM370, like the game control microcomputer 100, has a built-in serial communication circuit 21TM380. In addition, various payout control commands are sent and received between the serial communication circuit 21TM505 built into the game control microcomputer 100 and the serial communication circuit 21TM380 built into the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The configuration and function of the serial communication circuit 21TM380 built into the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is similar to the configuration and function of the serial communication circuit 21TM505 built into the game control microcomputer 100.

Figure 12-30 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the control commands transmitted and received between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control board 21TM037. In this embodiment, various control commands (prize ball request signals) are transmitted and received between the microcomputers of the main board 11 and the payout control board 21TM037 to perform various controls related to payout control, etc.

As mentioned above, the prize ball request signal and the received ACK signal are composed of 8 bits of data (8-digit binary data), and are output as a control command indicating a specific content depending on the content of the set 8-bit data.

The connection check command is a control command sent from the game control microcomputer 100 at regular intervals (1 s) to check whether the connection between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is normal. The data content of the connection check command is "A0 (H)", or "1010000".

The connection OK command is a control command for notifying that the connection state between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is normal, and is a control command that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 transmits as a response signal in response to receiving the connection confirmation command. The data content of the connection OK command is "8x (H)", i.e. "10000xxx". Here, if a prize ball error (an abnormal state in which the prize ball payout operation based on a winning prize or the ball lending payout operation based on a ball lending request cannot be performed normally) occurs, the first bit "x" is set to "1". Also, if a full tank error occurs, the second bit "x" is set to "1". Also, if a ball out error occurs, the third bit "x" is set to "1". Also, if a door open error occurs, the fourth bit "x" is set to "1". In this way, while checking the connection between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the game control microcomputer 100 can be notified of the occurrence of a specified error in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

The prize ball number command is a control command for notifying the number of game balls (0 to 14) for which a payout request is made, and is a control command sent by the game control microcomputer 100 based on the occurrence of a win. The data content of the prize ball number command is "5x (H)", i.e. "0101xxxx". In this embodiment, when a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 22A or the second start port switch 22B, three prize balls are paid out, when a game ball is detected by the general win switch 25 corresponding to the general win port 10, ten prize balls are paid out, and when a game ball is detected by the first count switch 23, fourteen prize balls are paid out. Therefore, when a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B, a prize ball number command "01010011" is sent to notify the number of prize balls of 3, when a game ball is detected by the prize port switch corresponding to the general prize port 10, a prize ball number command "01011010" is sent to notify the number of prize balls of 10, and when a game ball is detected by the first count switch 23, a prize ball number command "01011110" is sent to notify the number of prize balls of 14. Note that the connection confirmation command and the prize ball number command are configured to be sent as a prize ball request signal. Note that the prize ball number command is sent in place of the connection confirmation command at the timing when the connection confirmation command is sent based on the establishment of the prize ball payout condition (occurrence of a prize, etc.). In this embodiment, as described above, the upper four bits are set to data corresponding to the number of prize balls, but the upper four bits may be common and the lower four bits may be set to data corresponding to the number of prize balls.

The prize ball end command is a control command indicating that the prize ball operation (prize ball payout operation) has ended, and is a control command that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 transmits based on the end of the prize ball operation. The data content of the prize ball end command is "50 (H)", i.e. "01010000". The prize ball end command is transmitted in place of the connection OK command at the timing when the connection OK command is transmitted based on the end of the prize ball operation. In this embodiment, the prize ball end command is not configured to set data indicating error information. This is because the prize ball end command is transmitted only once when the prize ball operation has ended, so even if error information is not transmitted at that timing, it is possible to set data indicating error information in the next connection OK command and transmit it. Data indicating error information may be set in the lowest 4 bits of the prize ball end command.

The prize ball preparation command is a control command that notifies the player that a certain error has occurred and the prize ball operation has not ended, and is a control command that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sends based on the occurrence of a certain error during the execution of the prize ball operation. The data content of the connection OK command is "8x (H)", i.e. "10000xxx". Here, if a prize ball error occurs, the first bit "x" is set to "1". If a full tank error occurs, the second bit "x" is set to "1". If a ball out error occurs, the third bit "x" is set to "1". If a door open error occurs, the fourth bit "x" is set to "1". In this way, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can notify the game control microcomputer 100 that a certain error has occurred during the execution of the prize ball operation and the prize ball operation has not ended, and can also notify the game control microcomputer 100 of the content of the error. Like the connection OK command, the prize ball preparation command notifies that a specific error has occurred by changing the contents of the lowest four bits (changing a specific bit) depending on the error state. The connection OK command, prize ball preparation command, and prize ball end command are configured so that one of the commands is sent as a reception ACK signal. The prize ball preparation command is a command (signal) that is output not only when an error occurs and the prize ball operation cannot be executed, but also when the prize ball operation is being executed.

The prize ball preparation command is sent in place of the connection OK command when an error occurs and the prize ball operation cannot be performed, at the same time that the connection OK command is sent.

Figure 12-31 is a block diagram showing signal lines etc. used for transmitting and receiving the control signal shown in Figure 12-30 (A) and the control command shown in Figure 12-30 (B). As shown in Figure 12-31, the connection confirmation signal is output by the game control microcomputer 100 via the output circuit 21TM067 and input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the input circuit 21TM373A. In addition, the connection confirmation command and the prize ball number command among the control commands are output from the serial communication circuit 21TM505 built into the game control microcomputer 100 and input to the serial communication circuit 21TM380 built into the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Among the control commands, the connection OK command, the prize ball end command, and the prize ball preparation command are output from the serial communication circuit 21TM380 built into the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 and input into the serial communication circuit 21TM505 built into the game control microcomputer 100. Note that in FIG. 12-31, two signal lines (a signal line for sending a prize ball request signal and a signal line for sending a received ACK signal) are shown as signal lines for serial communication, but in reality, the prize ball request signal and the received ACK signal are sent and received over a single signal line.

Next, we will explain the transmission and reception of signals (prize ball request signal, received ACK signal; control commands) between the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer during normal operation. The prize ball request signal consists of a connection confirmation command and a prize ball number command, and the received ACK signal consists of a connection OK command, a prize ball end command, and a prize ball preparation command.

Figure 12-32 is a sequence diagram showing the transmission and reception of signals between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during normal operation. As shown in Figure 12-32, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the serial communication circuit 21TM505 to check whether the signal line connection between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has not been cut. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal via the serial communication circuit 21TM380, it transmits a connection OK command as a reception ACK signal to the game control microcomputer 100. When the game control microcomputer 100 receives the connection OK command as a reception ACK signal, it transmits the connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal after 1 s (1 second) has elapsed from the time of reception. The game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the above-described communication process to check the connection as long as the connection status is normal.

(Payout control main process)
Next, the operation of the payout control board 21TM037 will be described. FIG. 12-23 is a flowchart showing the main process (payout control main process) executed by the payout control board 21TM037. In the main process, the payout control CPU 21TM371 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 first performs the necessary initial settings. That is, the payout control CPU 21TM371 first sets interrupt prohibition (S21TM1810). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (S21TM1820), and the stack pointer is set to the stack pointer designated address (S21TM1830). In addition, the payout control CPU 21TM371 sets the built-in device register (S21TM1840), sets the CTC and PIO (S21TM1850), and then sets the RAM to an accessible state (S21TM1860). In addition, the initial value of the unpaid prize ball counter is set to 0000 (H) (S21TM1870).

In this embodiment, one channel of the built-in CTC is used in timer mode. Therefore, in the setting process of the built-in device register of S21TM1840 and the process of S21TM1850, register settings are made to set the channel to be used in timer mode, register settings to allow interrupt generation, and register settings to set the interrupt vector. The interrupt from that channel is then used as a timer interrupt. If it is desired to generate a timer interrupt every 2 ms, for example, a value equivalent to 2 ms is set as the initial value in a specified register (time constant register).

The interrupt vector set for the channel set to timer mode (channel 3 in this embodiment) corresponds to the starting address of the timer interrupt process. Specifically, the starting address of the timer interrupt process is specified by the value set in the I register and the interrupt vector. In the timer interrupt process, a payout control process that controls the payout means (including at least a process for driving the payout motor 21TM289 in response to a command signal regarding the payout of prize balls from the main board, and may also include a process for driving the payout motor 21TM289 in response to a ball lending request) is executed.

In this embodiment, interrupt mode 2 is also set in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Therefore, it is possible to use interrupt processing based on the count-up of the built-in CTC. It is also possible to set the interrupt processing start address according to the interrupt vector sent by the CTC. The interrupt based on the count-up of CTC channel 3 (CH3) is an interrupt that occurs when the CPU's internal clock (system clock) counts down and the register value becomes "0", and is used as a timer interrupt.

Next, the payout control CPU 21TM371 first performs a RAM clear process (S21TM1880). It also sets initial values for flags and counters in the RAM area (S21TM1890). The process of S21TM1890 includes a process of setting the unpaid prize balls counter initial value to the unpaid prize balls counter.

The payout control CPU 21TM371 also executes a serial communication circuit setting process to initialize the serial communication circuit 21TM380 (S21TM1900). In this case, the payout control CPU 21TM371 performs settings to allow the serial communication circuit 21TM380 to communicate serially with the game control microcomputer 100, following a process similar to the serial communication circuit setting process (see S21TM2560) performed by the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100.

When the serial communication circuit 21TM380 is initialized, the payout control CPU 21TM371 initializes the priority of the interrupt process to be executed in response to an interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 21TM380 (S21TM1910). In this case, the payout control CPU 21TM371 initializes the priority of the interrupt process according to a process similar to the priority initialization process performed by the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100.

Then, the CTC register provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is set so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically (S21TM1920). That is, a value equivalent to the timer interrupt occurrence interval is set as an initial value in a specified register (time constant register). Then, since interrupts are prohibited in S21TM1810 of the initial setting process, interrupts are permitted before the initialization process is completed (S21TM1930). After that, a loop process is entered in which the occurrence of a timer interrupt is monitored.

As described above, in this embodiment, the built-in CTC of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is set to repeatedly generate timer interrupts. When a timer interrupt occurs, the payout control CPU 21TM371 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 executes timer interrupt processing.

(Payout control timer interrupt processing)
FIG. 12-34 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process (dispense control timer interrupt process) executed by the dispensing control board 21TM037. In the timer interrupt process, the dispensing control CPU 21TM371 of the dispensing control microcomputer 21TM370 executes the following process as the dispensing control process. First, the dispensing control CPU 21TM371 executes an input determination process (S21TM2010). The input determination process is a process that detects the state of bits 4 to 6 of input port 0 and bits 3 to 6 of input port 1, and reflects the detection result in a predetermined byte of RAM (called an input status flag). In the dispensing control process, when control is performed based on the state of bits 4 to 6 of input port 0 and bits 3 to 6 of input port 1, the state of the input status flag is checked instead of checking the state of the input port directly.

Next, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes the payout motor control process (S21TM2020). In the payout motor control process, when the payout motor 21TM289 should be driven, processing is performed to output the payout motor φ1 to φ4 patterns to output port 0.

The payout control CPU 21TM371 also executes a prepaid card unit control process that communicates with the card unit 21TM050 (S21TM2030). The prepaid card unit control process in this embodiment includes a process of writing data on the number of prize balls paid out to the player to the prepaid card based on the operation of the return switch 21TM063, and a process of ejecting the prepaid card with the prize ball data written therein from the card unit 21TM050 and returning it to the player. The payout control CPU 21TM371 also executes a main control communication process (S21TM2035) that will be described later. Furthermore, the payout control CPU 21TM371 also executes a prize ball lending control process that controls the payout of loan balls in response to a ball lending request from the card unit 21TM050, and also executes a prize ball lending control process that controls the payout of the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball number command from the main board (S21TM2040).

The payout control CPU 21TM371 then executes error processing to detect various errors (S21TM2050). It also executes information output processing to output prize ball information and ball loan information to be output outside the gaming machine (S21TM2060). It also executes display control processing to make a predetermined display on the error display LED 21TM374 according to the result of the error processing, and to light up the prize ball LED 21TM053 and the blown bulb LED 21TM054 (S21TM2070).

In this embodiment, when various errors (for example, a full tank error, a bulb out error, or a prepaid card unit not connected error) are detected in the error processing described below, an error bit corresponding to the detected error is set. Then, in the display control processing of S21TM2070, based on the error bit being set, the payout control CPU21TM371 displays a predetermined message on the error display LED21TM374. Also, in the display control processing, the payout control CPU21TM371 controls the turning on of the prize ball LED21TM053 when prize balls are being paid out. Also, when the prize ball payout has been completed, it controls the turning off of the prize ball LED21TM053.

In addition, in this embodiment, RAM areas (output port 0 buffer, output port 1 buffer, output port 2 buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port are provided, and the payout control CPU 21TM371 outputs the contents of the output port 0 buffer, output port 1 buffer, and output port 2 buffer to the output port (S21TM2080: output processing). The output port 0 buffer, output port 1 buffer, and output port 2 buffer are updated by the payout motor control processing (S21TM2020), prepaid card control processing (S21TM2030), main control communication processing (S21TM2035), information output processing (S21TM2060), and display control processing (S21TM2070).

Next, the operation of the payout control CPU 21TM371 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 to send and receive various commands in the main control communication process of S21TM2035 will be described. As shown in FIG. 12-31, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has a built-in serial communication circuit 21TM380 that serially communicates various commands with the game control microcomputer 100. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the prize ball number command shown in FIG. 12-30 (B) from the game control microcomputer 100 using the serial communication circuit 21TM380. In addition, when the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the prize ball number command, it uses the serial communication circuit 21TM380 to send the prize ball ACK command "D2" as a reception confirmation signal.

Similarly to the CPU 103 of the gaming control microcomputer 100, when an interrupt request is received from the serial communication circuit 21TM380 while the payout control CPU 21TM371 is in the interrupt-enabled state, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes interrupt processing according to the interrupt cause for which the serial communication circuit 21TM380 made the interrupt request. In this embodiment, when the payout control CPU 21TM371 determines that the interrupt cause is that the serial communication circuit 21TM380 has received received data, it executes reception-time interrupt processing. In this case, the payout control CPU 21TM371 sets a reception-time interrupt flag indicating that the serial communication circuit 21TM380 is receiving received data. Note that the payout control CPU 21TM371 may read data from the reception data register of the serial communication circuit 21TM380 in the reception-time interrupt processing, rather than setting the reception-time interrupt flag. In this case, for example, the payout control CPU 21TM371 determines whether the received data that has been read is a prize ball number command in the reception interrupt process. Also, if the received data is a prize ball number command, the payout control CPU 21TM371 may add the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball number command to the unpaid prize ball number counter. In this way, in the main control communication process described below, it is not necessary to determine whether the received data is a prize ball number command based on the reception interrupt flag being set, and to execute the process of adding the number of prize balls to the unpaid prize ball number counter.

(Communication between the main board, dispensing control board, and card unit)
Fig. 12-35 is a timing diagram for explaining communication between the main board 11, the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050 of the gaming machine. When power supply to the gaming machine is started and the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is ON, the payout control board 21TM037 sets the PRDY signal to ON when the payout operation is possible. The connection confirmation signal is set to ON by the serial communication circuit setting process, which is the process of S10a shown in Fig. 12-16 (see Fig. 12-30 (A)). When power supply is started, the card unit 21TM050 sets the VL signal as a connection signal to ON.

When a card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated to input a ball lending switch signal, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being ON. In other words, it sets the BRDY signal to ON. When a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being ON. In other words, it sets the BRQ signal to ON.

Then, based on the PRDY signal being ON and both the BRDY and BRQ signals being ON, the payout control board 21TM037 sets the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 to the ON state, and when it detects the falling edge (OFF) of the BRQ signal from the card unit 21TM050, it drives the payout motor 21TM289 and pays out a predetermined number of loaned balls (for example, 125 balls) to the player. The payout control board 21TM037 then sets the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 to the OFF state. In other words, it sets the EXS signal to the OFF state.

(Prize ball payout control)

Figure 12-36 is a timing diagram showing the transmission and reception of signals between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during normal operation. As shown in Figure 12-36, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, it receives a connection OK command as a reception ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the game control microcomputer 100 receives the connection OK command as a reception ACK signal, it again transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal after 1 s (1 second) has elapsed from the time of reception. The game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the above-mentioned communication process for connection confirmation as long as the connection status is normal.

If a win occurs when the communication process for connection confirmation is not being executed (between receiving the connection OK command as a received ACK signal and sending the connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal), the game control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of prize balls in the prize ball request signal and sends the prize ball number command as the set prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the prize ball number command as a prize ball request signal, it pays out the number of prize balls specified in the prize ball number command, and when the payout of the prize balls (prize ball payout operation) is completed, it sends a prize ball end command as a received ACK signal to the game control microcomputer 100. When the game control microcomputer 100 receives the prize ball end command as a received ACK signal, it sends a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal 1 s (1 second) after the time of reception.

Although not shown, if a prize is won during the execution of the communication process for connection confirmation (between sending a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal and receiving a connection OK command as a received ACK signal), the game control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of prize balls in the prize ball request signal, and transmits the prize ball number command as the set prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 after receiving a connection OK command as a received ACK signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the prize ball number command as a prize ball request signal, it pays out the number of prize balls specified by the prize ball number command, and when the payout of the prize balls (prize ball payout operation) is completed, it transmits a prize ball end command as a received ACK signal to the game control microcomputer 100. In addition, while the prize ball is being paid out (prize ball payout operation), a prize ball preparation command is sent to the game control microcomputer 100 as a received ACK signal.

(Main operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be described. When the performance control board 12 receives a power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 12-37. When the performance control main process shown in FIG. 12-37 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clearing the RAM 122, setting various initial values, and setting the registers of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12. In addition, it executes an initial operation control process (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return it to its initial position and control to perform a predetermined operation check.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on or not (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, for example based on the register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, an interrupt occurs to receive a performance control command from the main board 11, in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 becomes ON. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt to be prohibited, but if a CPU that does not automatically become interrupt prohibited is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt prohibition command (DI command). In response to an interrupt due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, among the input ports included in the I/O 125. The performance control command taken in at this time is stored in a performance control command reception buffer provided in, for example, the RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then sets the interrupt to permitted and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various presentation control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the presentation control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read presentation control commands are performed. For example, the read presentation control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in the RAM 122 is turned on so that which presentation control command was received and the contents specified by the presentation control command can be confirmed by the presentation control process process, etc. In addition, if the presentation control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process, for example, control is performed to operate various performance devices, such as the display operation of the performance image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LEDs, and the driving operation of the movable body 32. In addition, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are made regarding the control contents of the performance operations using the various performance devices in accordance with the performance control commands, etc. transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process in step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 side is updated by software. After executing step S77, an error notification process is executed (step S78). In the error notification process, for example, control is performed to notify an error that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by displaying an image on the image display device 5, outputting sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, lighting the game effect lamp 9, etc. Then, after executing step S78, a demo performance process is executed (step S79). In the demo performance process, for example, the performance control CPU 120 operates a customer waiting demo start waiting timer based on receiving a customer waiting demo designation command from the CPU 103. Then, if a new variable display is not started during the operation period of the customer waiting demo start waiting timer, a customer waiting demo performance is executed based on the time-out of the customer waiting demo start waiting timer. Note that if a new variable display is started during the execution of a demo performance, the demo performance being executed is interrupted. Then, the process returns to step S73. Before returning to step S73, other processes may be performed.

(Performance control process)

Figure 12-38 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 of Figure 12-37 as the presentation control process processing. In the presentation control process processing shown in Figure 12-38, the presentation control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a game stop notification command has been received (step S160a). If a game stop notification command has been received (step S160a; Y), the value of the presentation control process flag is updated to "6", which is the value corresponding to the game stop presentation processing, and the process proceeds to step S160c (step S160b). If a game stop notification command has not been received (step S160a; N), the process proceeds to step S160c.

In step 160c, the presentation control CPU 120 judges whether the value of the presentation control process flag is "6", which is the value corresponding to the game stop presentation processing. If the value of the presentation control process flag is "6" (step 160c; Y), the process proceeds to step S164. If the value of the presentation control process flag is not "6" (step 160c; N), the process executes the pre-reading advance notice presentation setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading advance notice presentation setting process, for example, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing the pre-reading advance notice presentation are made based on the presentation control command at the time of the start winning transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process is executed to display the hold display based on the number of hold memories identified from the presentation control command.

After the execution of the pre-reading notice performance setting process, a prize ball number summation process (step S162) is executed to tally up the number of prize balls paid out in each jackpot game state during the period from when the normal game state is controlled to the jackpot game state until the normal game state is controlled again, and a game stop suggestion performance process (step S163) is executed to execute a game stop suggestion performance that suggests to the player that game on the pachinko game machine 1 will be stopped, and then the process proceeds to step S164.

In the prize ball count summing process, the value of the prize ball count counter is set to 0 when the game is controlled to switch from the normal state to the jackpot game state, and during the jackpot game, the process of adding up the value of the prize ball counter is executed each time a prize ball count notification command corresponding to a prize ball winning into the jackpot winning port is received.

In addition, in step S164, the presentation control CPU 120 executes a right-hit promotion display process to display a right-hit promotion display on the image display device 5 in the jackpot game state, time-saving state, or probability bonus state, which urges the player to shoot the game ball toward the right game area 2R.

In addition, in step 165, the presentation control CPU 120 executes a left hit promotion display process to display a left hit promotion display on the image display device 5 when the game state is controlled to the normal state from the time-saving state or the probability change state, encouraging the player to shoot the game ball toward the left game area 2L.

After executing the processing of step S165, the performance control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processing of steps S170 to S177 as described below, depending on the value of a performance process flag provided in, for example, RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various performances such as reach performances and various advance notice performances are executed, and the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the change pattern specified by the performance control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute a performance) that reflects the determined result is set. After that, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display performance process of step S172 is a process executed when the performance process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the movable body 32, to output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and to turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14, thereby executing various performance controls during the variable display of the decorative pattern. After performing such performance control, for example, in response to the reading of an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the performance control pattern, or the reception of a command specifying the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern from the main board 11, the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3" and the performance process during variable display ends.

The special winning wait process of step S173 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "3". In this special winning wait process, the presentation control CPU 120 judges whether or not a presentation control command designating the start of a jackpot game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a presentation control command designating the start of a jackpot game state is received, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "4". Also, when a command designating the start of a jackpot game state is not received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it is judged that the display result in the special winning game was a "miss", and the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value of "0". When the value of the presentation process flag is updated, the special winning wait process is terminated.

The jackpot performance process of step S174 is a process executed when the performance process flag value is "4". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the jackpot game state is to be ended, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the ending performance process, and the jackpot performance process is ended. In addition, the jackpot performance process of this embodiment is also a process of executing a V winning notification performance based on receiving a V winning notification command notifying that a game ball has been detected by the second count switch 24 during a jackpot game.

The ending presentation process of step S175 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "5". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the set contents. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

The game stop effect process of step S177 is executed when the effect process flag value is "7". In this game stop effect process, the effect control CPU 120 executes a game stop effect indicating that play on the pachinko game machine 1 has been stopped based on the reception of a game stop notification command. In this embodiment, once play has been stopped on the pachinko game machine 1, the game stop effect will not be replayable unless the power is turned OFF and the clear switch 92 is operated while the power is turned ON to start the machine (starting with a cold start). Therefore, once play has been stopped, the game stop effect will continue to be executed unless the power is turned OFF.

(Preview preview performance setting process)
Fig. 12-39 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S161 of Fig. 12-38 as the pre-reading advance notice performance setting process. In the pre-reading advance notice performance setting process shown in Fig. 12-39, the performance control CPU 120 first checks the start winning time reception command buffer 005SG194A (step 005SGS241), and determines whether there is an entry with the hold display flag not set (step 005SGS242).

If there is no entry with the pending display flag not set (step 005SGS242; N), proceed to step 005SGS252. If there is an entry with the pending display flag not set (step 005SGS242; Y), it is further determined whether the symbol designation command of the entry is the first symbol designation command, that is, whether the symbol designation command is a command indicating a miss (step 005SGS243). If the symbol designation command of the entry is not the first symbol designation command, that is, if it is a command indicating a jackpot (step 005SGS243; N), the numerical range of the MY counter value is identified (step 005SGS244). The numerical range of the MY counter value may be identified, for example, from the received MY counter value notification command (see FIG. 12-5 (D)).

The performance control CPU 120 also identifies the number of reserved memories that will result in a jackpot from the start winning time reception command buffer 005SG194A (step 005SGS245), and determines the display pattern of the reserved display based on the fact that the reserved memory stored as the entry is a jackpot reserved memory, the number of reserved memories that will result in a jackpot, and the numerical range of the MY counter value (005SGS246).

In step 005SGS246, for example, the determination is made as to whether or not to execute the pre-reading preview performance and the display pattern (preview type) based on the determination ratios shown in Figures 12-40 (A) and 12-40 (B).

Specifically, there are three types of display patterns (preview types) for the preview preview performance: display pattern α, display pattern β, and display pattern γ. When the display pattern for the preview preview performance is determined to be display pattern α, the reserved memory display is displayed in a white square (◇) in the first reserved memory display area 5D or the second reserved memory display area 5U, when the display pattern (preview type) for the preview preview performance is determined to be display pattern β, the reserved memory display is displayed in a white star (☆) in the first reserved memory display area 5D or the second reserved memory display area 5U, and when the display pattern (preview type) for the preview preview performance is determined to be display pattern γ, the reserved memory display is displayed in the alphabet letter "V" in the first reserved memory display area 5D or the second reserved memory display area 5U. In addition, when the preview preview performance is not executed, the reserved display is displayed in a white circle (◯) in the first reserved memory display area 5D or the second reserved memory display area 5U.

In addition, in step 005SGS246, as shown in FIG. 12-40(A), if the MY counter value is between 0 and 95000, if the MY counter value is 95001 or more and the number of reserved memories that will result in a jackpot is one, then based on the fact that the reserved memory is a reserved memory that will result in a jackpot, it is determined that there is a 5% chance that the pre-reading preview performance will not be performed (the reserved display will be displayed as a white circle), there is a 25% chance that the pre-reading preview performance will be performed in display pattern α (the reserved display will be displayed as a white square), there is a 65% chance that the pre-reading preview performance will be performed in display pattern β (the reserved display will be displayed as a white star), and there is a 5% chance that the pre-reading preview performance will be performed in display pattern γ (the reserved display will be displayed as a "V" letter).

In addition, in step 005SGS246, if the MY counter value is 95001 or more and the number of reserved memories that will result in a jackpot is two or more, as shown in FIG. 12-40(B), based on the fact that the reserved memory is a reserved memory that will result in a jackpot, it is determined not to execute the look-ahead preview performance (displaying the reserved display as a white circle) 5% of the time, to execute the look-ahead preview performance with display pattern α (displaying the reserved display as a white square) 30% of the time, to execute the look-ahead preview performance with display pattern β (displaying the reserved display as a white star) 65% of the time, and to execute the look-ahead preview performance with display pattern γ (displaying the reserved display as a "V" letter)

In addition, in step 005SGS243, if the symbol designation command of the entry is the first symbol designation command, that is, if it is a command indicating a miss (step 005SGS243; Y), the variable category designation command of the entry is identified (step 005SGS248), and based on the identified variable category, it is determined whether or not to execute a pre-reading preview performance and the display pattern (step 005SGS249).

In step 005SGS249, the presence or absence of a pre-reading preview performance and the display pattern (pre-notice type) are determined at a determination rate as shown in FIG. 12-40(C). For example, as shown in FIG. 12-40(C), if the variable category is "non-reach", based on the fact that the reserved memory is a miss reserved memory, it is determined at a rate of 95% not to execute the pre-reading preview performance (displaying the reserved display as a white circle), at a rate of 5% to execute the pre-reading preview performance with display pattern α (displaying the reserved display as a white square), at a rate of 0% to execute the pre-reading preview performance with display pattern β (displaying the reserved display as a white star), and at a rate of 0% to execute the pre-reading preview performance with display pattern γ (displaying the reserved display as a "V").

In addition, if the variable category is "Other (Normal Reach)", based on the fact that the reserved memory is a losing reserved memory, there is a 75% chance that the look-ahead preview performance will not be executed (the reserved display will be displayed as a white circle), there is a 20% chance that the look-ahead preview performance will be executed with display pattern α (the reserved display will be displayed as a white square), there is a 5% chance that the look-ahead preview performance will be executed with display pattern β (the reserved display will be displayed as a white star), and there is a 0% chance that the look-ahead preview performance will be executed with display pattern γ (the reserved display will be displayed as a "V" letter).

If the variable category is "Super Reach," then, based on the fact that the reserved memory is a losing reserved memory, there is a 65% chance that the look-ahead preview performance will not be executed (the reserved display will be displayed as a white circle), there is a 25% chance that the look-ahead preview performance will be executed with display pattern α (the reserved display will be displayed as a white square), there is a 10% chance that the look-ahead preview performance will be executed with display pattern β (the reserved display will be displayed as a white star), and there is a 0% chance that the look-ahead preview performance will be executed with display pattern γ (the reserved display will be displayed as a "V" letter).

In other words, as shown in Figures 12-40(A) to 12-40(C), in this embodiment, when the pre-reading preview effect is not executed (when the reserved display is displayed as a white circle), the rate of being controlled to the jackpot game state is set lower than when the pre-reading preview effect is executed (when the reserved display is displayed as a white square, star, or "V" shape).

Furthermore, when the pre-reading preview performance is executed, the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state is set to be the lowest when the pre-reading preview performance is executed with display pattern α, and the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state is set to be the highest when the pre-reading preview performance is executed with display pattern γ (probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state depending on whether the pre-reading preview performance is executed and the display pattern (expectation of jackpot): pre-reading preview performance not executed < pre-reading preview performance executed with display pattern α < pre-reading preview performance executed with display pattern β < pre-reading preview performance executed with display pattern γ).

In particular, the display pattern γ is a display pattern that notifies the player that the game is in a jackpot game state, and the display pattern γ is set so that it cannot be determined when the MY counter value is 95001 or more and there are multiple reserved memories that would result in a jackpot.

After executing the process of step 005SGS246 or step 005SGS149, the performance control CPU 120 sets the pending display flag of the entry to a flag value according to whether or not the pre-reading preview performance is to be executed and the display pattern (step 005SGS247). For example, if it is determined that the pending display preview performance is not to be executed, the pending display flag of the entry is set to "0", if it is determined that the pending display preview performance is to be executed in display pattern α, the pending display flag of the entry is set to "1", if it is determined that the pending display preview performance is to be executed in display pattern β, the pending display flag of the entry is set to "2", if it is determined that the pending display preview performance is to be executed in display pattern γ, the pending display flag of the entry is set to "3", and the process proceeds to step 005SGS252.

Then, in step 005SGS252, the reserved display is updated based on the memory contents (value of the reserved display flag) of the start winning reception command buffer 005SG194A (step 005SGS252). As a result, the reserved memory newly stored in the start winning reception command buffer 005SG194A is displayed in a display mode corresponding to one of the "0", "1", "2", and "3" set in the reserved display flag. Also, when the variable display is executed and the memory contents of the start winning reception command buffer 005SG194A are shifted, the reserved display in the first reserved memory display area 5D and the second reserved memory display area 5U provided at the lower position of the image display device 5 is updated according to the memory contents of the start winning reception command buffer 005SG194A after the shift.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12-8-18(B), if the number of first special reserved memories is one, one reserved memory display is displayed. As for the display mode of this reserved memory display, if the flag value of the reserved display flag corresponding to the reserved memory is "0", it is displayed in the display mode of "○" as shown in FIG. 12-8-18(B), if the flag value of the reserved display flag is "1", it is displayed in the display mode of "◇", and if the flag value of the reserved display flag is "2", it is displayed in the display mode of "☆". If the number of first special reserved memories is two, two reserved memory displays are displayed, and each reserved memory display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 5D in a mode corresponding to the flag value set in the reserved display flag of the corresponding reserved memory. Also, if the number of first special reserved memories is three, three reserved memory displays are displayed, and each reserved memory display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 5D in a mode corresponding to the flag value set in the reserved display flag of the corresponding reserved memory. Also, if the number of first special reserved memories is four, four reserved memory displays are displayed, and each reserved memory display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 5D in a manner according to the flag value set in the reserved display flag of the corresponding reserved memory.

In this embodiment, the processing of step 005SGS252 is executed in the pre-reading preview performance setting processing, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the processing for updating the hold display in the first hold memory display area 5D and the second hold memory display area 5U may be executed separately as a processing different from the pre-reading preview performance setting processing (for example, a hold display update processing).

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, when a start winning entry into the first start winning port and a start winning entry into the second start winning port occur simultaneously, both the reserved memory in which the command at the time of the start winning entry in the first special chart is newly stored and the reserved memory in which the command at the time of the start winning entry in the second special chart is newly stored are subject to the decision to execute or not execute the pre-reading preview performance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in such a case, it may be decided to execute or not execute only one of the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the first special chart and the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the second special chart.

Specifically, when the game state is a normal state in which high opening control is not performed, the decision to execute or not execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the first special chart is given priority over the decision to execute or not execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the second special chart. Then, when it is decided to execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the first special chart, it is decided not to execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the second special chart, and when it is decided not to execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the first special chart, it is decided to execute or not execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the second special chart.

On the other hand, when the game state is a time-saving state or a probability-changing state in which high-opening control is performed, the decision to execute or not execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the second special chart is given priority over the decision to execute or not execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the first special chart. Then, when it is decided to execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the second special chart, it is decided not to execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the first special chart, and when it is decided not to execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the second special chart, it is decided to execute or not execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the first special chart.

(Game stop indication processing)
Fig. 12-41 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S163 of Fig. 12-38 as the game stop suggestion presentation process. In the game stop suggestion presentation process shown in Fig. 12-41, the presentation control CPU 120 first judges whether the game stop suggestion presentation process timer is operating (step 005SGS401). If the game stop suggestion presentation process timer is not operating (step 005SGS401; N), it further judges whether the third MY counter value notification command is received (step 005SGS402). If the third MY counter value notification command is not received (step 005SGS402; N), the game stop suggestion display processing is terminated. If the third MY counter value notification command is received, that is, if the MY counter value is in the range of 95001 to 98194 (step 005SGS402), the game status is identified (step 005SGS403), and it is determined whether the identified game status is a normal status (step 005SGS404).

If the identified game state is the normal state (step 005SGS404; Y), a process table for game stop suggestion effects corresponding to the normal state is selected, and the process proceeds to step 005SGS407 (step 005SGS405). Also, if the identified game state is either the time-saving state or the high probability state (step 005SGS404; N), a process table for game stop suggestion effects corresponding to the time-saving state or the high probability state is selected, and the process proceeds to step 005SGS407 (step 005SGS406).

Then, in step 005SGS407, the presentation control CPU 120 starts the game stop suggestion presentation process timer in process data 1 of the process table of the selected game stop suggestion presentation (step 005SGS407). In this embodiment, the game stop suggestion presentation process table corresponding to each game stop suggestion presentation is stored in advance in the ROM 121.

Then, the presentation control CPU 120 starts controlling the presentation devices (image display device 5 as a presentation component, game effect lamp 9 as a presentation component, speakers 8L, 8R as presentation components, stick controller 31A, push button 31B, etc.) according to the contents of the first process data 1 in the set game stop suggestion presentation process table (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1, etc.), and ends the game stop suggestion presentation processing (step 005SGS408).

In addition, if the game stop suggestion presentation process timer is operating in step 005SGS401 (step 005SGS401; Y), the game stop suggestion presentation process timer value is decremented by 1 (step 005SGS409), and it is determined whether the game stop suggestion presentation process timer has timed out (step 005SGS410). If the game stop suggestion presentation process timer has not timed out (step 005SGS410; N), the process proceeds to step 005SGS414. If the game stop suggestion presentation process timer has timed out (step 005SGS410; Y), it is determined whether the game stop suggestion presentation process timer that has timed out is the last game stop suggestion presentation process timer (step 005SGS411). If the game stop suggestion presentation process timer that has expired is the last game stop suggestion presentation process timer (step 005SGS411; Y), the processing of steps 005SGS407 and 005SGS408 is executed to end the game stop suggestion presentation process.

In addition, if the game stop indication process timer that has expired is not the last game stop indication process timer (step 005SGS411; N), the process data for the game stop indication is switched (step 005SGS412). That is, the game stop indication process timer setting value next set in the game stop indication process table is set to the process timer, restarting the next process timer (game stop indication process timer), and proceeding to step 005SGS414 (step 005SGS413).

In addition, in step 005SGS414, the control state for the presentation device (presentation components) is executed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control execution data, etc. contained in the process data for the game stop suggestion presentation according to the value of the game stop suggestion presentation process timer, and the game stop suggestion presentation process is terminated.

As described above, in this embodiment, in the normal state, time-saving state, or special state, the game stop indication effect is started based on the MY counter value reaching 95001, and these game stop indication effects are repeatedly executed until the game is stopped in the pachinko game machine 1.

In addition, different game stop suggestion effect process tables are selected when the game state is normal and when the game state is time-saving or special probability state, so the presentation mode of the game stop suggestion effect executed in the normal state is different from the presentation mode of the game stop suggestion effect executed in the time-saving or special probability state.

In this embodiment, the embodiment shows an example of a form in which the pachinko game machine 1 suggests that the game will be stopped by executing a game stop suggestion effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. As a game stop suggestion effect, the number of balls remaining until the game is stopped (net increase in the number of balls) may be notified to the player by displaying it on the image display device 5 or by outputting sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. In this way, when the number of balls remaining until the game is stopped is notified as a game stop suggestion effect, for example, a command (out notification command) that notifies that the out switch 26 has detected a game ball is provided as a command that the CPU 103 can send to the performance control board 12, and a performance MY counter whose value can be increased or decreased by the reception of the out notification command or the number of winning balls notification command is provided, and it is possible to execute whether or not to execute a game stop suggestion effect and to notify the number of balls remaining until the game is stopped (net increase in the number of balls).

As described above, when the game stop indication effect is executed based on the MY counter value for effect, for example, if the data on the effect control board 12 side is reset due to a momentary power outage or if the command from the CPU 103 is not received properly, the MY counter for effect may not be able to grasp the accurate MY counter value. For this reason, when the CPU 120 for effect control is able to grasp (identify) the MY counter value for effect, the game stop indication effect notifies the number of balls remaining until the game is stopped, while when the CPU 120 for effect control is unable to grasp (identify) the MY counter value for effect, the game stop indication effect may only suggest that the game will stop, such as by displaying "Game stop imminent" (see FIG. 12-55), rather than the specific number of balls remaining until the game is stopped.

Furthermore, if it is possible to implement a notification of the number of balls remaining until gameplay is stopped (net increase in number of balls) as a game stop indication effect, as described above, in addition to the first to third MY counter value notification commands, the commands that the CPU 103 can send to the effect control board 12 may include a command to notify the thousands digit of the MY counter value (E1XXH), a command to notify the hundreds digit of the MY counter value (E2XXH), a command to notify the tens digit of the MY counter value (E3XXH), and a command to notify the ones digit of the MY counter value (E4XXH), and the effect control CPU 120 may be able to identify the value of each digit by the value set as the "XX" (EXT data) of each command. By doing this, even if the presentation control CPU 120 is unable to determine the MY counter value due to an inability to receive each command accurately, the presentation control CPU 120 will be able to determine the correct MY counter value at the start of the next variable display, and will be able to accurately notify the number of balls remaining until the game is stopped (net increase in the number of balls) as a game stop indication presentation.

In addition, in this embodiment, the state in which the game stop flag is set in the jackpot game state also means that the game stop suggestion presentation is being executed, but if a power outage occurs in the pachinko game machine 1 in this state, the pachinko game machine 1 starts in the jackpot game state, so the CPU 103 cannot send the MY counter value notification command with the start of a new variable display, and the presentation control CPU 120 cannot resume the game stop suggestion presentation. Therefore, when the pachinko game machine starts in the jackpot game state, the CPU 103 sends a game stop flag state notification command indicating whether the game stop flag is set or not at the time of startup to the presentation control board 12, and the presentation control CPU 120 may resume the game stop suggestion presentation based on the fact that the game stop flag is set from the game stop flag state notification command.

(Right-hit promotion display processing)
Fig. 12-42 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S164 of Fig. 12-38 as the right-hit promotion display process. In the right-hit promotion display process shown in Fig. 12-42, the performance control CPU 120 first judges whether the value of the performance control process flag is "4" indicating the performance processing during a jackpot (step 005SGS421). If the value of the performance control process flag is "4" indicating the performance processing during a jackpot (step 005SGS421; Y), it judges whether the right-hit promotion display is already being displayed on the image display device 5 (step 005SGS422). If the right-hit promotion display is already being displayed on the image display device 5 (step 005SGS422; Y), the right-hit promotion display processing is terminated, and if the right-hit promotion display is not yet displayed on the image display device 5 (step 005SGS422; N), the display of the right-hit promotion display is started at a predetermined position on the image display device 5 (for example, the upper center of the display area of the image display device 5), and the right-hit promotion display processing is terminated (step 005SGS423).

If the value of the presentation control process flag is not "4" indicating presentation processing during a jackpot (step 005SGS421; N), it is further determined whether the value of the presentation control process flag is "0" indicating variable display start waiting processing (step 005SGS424). If the value of the presentation control process flag is "0" indicating variable display start waiting processing, it is determined whether the game state is normal (step 005SGS425). If the game state is a time-saving state, a probability variable state, or a jackpot game state (step 005SGS425; N), the right-hit promotion display processing is terminated, and if the game state is normal (005SGS425; Y), it is further determined whether the right-hit promotion display is being displayed on the image display device 5 (step 005SGS426).

If the right-hit prompting display is not currently being displayed on the image display device 5 (step 005SGS426; N), the right-hit prompting display process is terminated. If the right-hit prompting display is currently being displayed on the image display device 5 (005SGS426; Y), the display of the right-hit prompting display is terminated and the right-hit prompting display process is terminated (step 005SGS427).

If the value of the presentation control process flag is not "0" indicating variable display start waiting processing (step 005SGS424; N), it is further determined whether the value of the presentation control process flag is "6" indicating game stop presentation processing (step 005SGS428). If the value of the presentation control process flag is "6" indicating game stop presentation processing (step 005SGS428; Y), the display of the right hit promotion display is terminated and the right hit promotion display processing is terminated (step 005SGS427), and if the value of the presentation control process flag is not "6" indicating game stop presentation processing (step 005SGS428; N), the right hit promotion display processing is terminated.

As described above, in this embodiment, the display of the right-hit prompting display is started on the image display device 5 by controlling to the jackpot gaming state based on the variable display in the normal state. In addition, the right-hit prompting display is configured to continue to be displayed in the time-saving state, the special probability state, and the jackpot gaming state until 100 variable displays are executed without being controlled to the jackpot gaming state in the time-saving state (until it is controlled to the normal state again).

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 12-43 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the performance control process shown in FIG. 12-39. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first judges whether the first variable display start command reception flag is on or not (step 005SGS431). If the first variable display start command reception flag is on (step 005SGS431; Y), the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special chart reserved memory in the start winning reception command buffer 005SG194A are shifted up by one buffer number (step 005SGS432). Note that the contents of the buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so they are erased.

Specifically, the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-1" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-0", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-2" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-1", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-3" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-2", and the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-4" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-3".

Also, if the first variable display start command reception flag is off in step 005SGS431 (step 005SGS431; N), it is determined whether the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 005SGS433). If the second variable display start command reception flag is off (step 005SGS433; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 005SGS433; Y), the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special chart reservation memory in the start winning time reception command buffer 005SG194A are shifted up by one buffer number (step 005SGS434). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so it is erased.

Specifically, the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-1" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-0", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-2" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-1", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-3" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-2", and the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-4" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-3".

After executing step 005SGS432 or step 005SGS434, the performance control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 005SGS435).

Next, the display result (stopping pattern) of the decorative pattern is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (i.e., the received display result designation command) (step 005SGS436). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern according to the display result designated by the display result designation command, and stores data indicating the determined stopping pattern of the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area.

In this embodiment, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to jackpot A, the performance control CPU 120 determines, for example, a combination of decorative patterns (jackpot pattern) in which three patterns are aligned in even numbers as the stopping pattern. When the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to jackpot B, the stopping pattern is determined from among multiple combinations of odd numbers other than "7" (for example, combinations of decorative patterns such as "111", "333", "555", and "999"). When the received variable display result designation command is the fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to jackpot C, the stopping pattern is determined to be a combination of decorative patterns in which "7" patterns are aligned. Also, if the received variable display result designation command is a first variable display result designation command corresponding to a miss, if the fluctuation pattern is a non-reach miss fluctuation pattern, a combination of decorative patterns in which three patterns are not aligned (non-reach miss miss pattern) is determined as the stopping pattern, and if the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach miss or super reach miss fluctuation pattern, a combination of decorative patterns in which the left and right patterns are aligned but the inner pattern is not aligned (for example, a reach miss miss pattern such as "121" or "434") is determined as the stopping pattern.

When determining these stopping symbols, the performance control CPU 120 may, for example, extract a random number for determining the stopping symbol, and determine the stopping symbol of the decorative symbol using a stopping symbol determination table in which data indicating the combination of decorative symbols is associated with a numerical value. In other words, the stopping symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating the combination of decorative symbols that corresponds to the numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

In this embodiment, when the variable display result is a jackpot, if the jackpot type is jackpot A, the jackpot pattern is determined to be a combination of even numbers, and if the jackpot type is jackpot B, the jackpot pattern is determined to be a combination of odd numbers other than "7". However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to provide a case where the jackpot pattern is determined to be a combination of odd numbers other than "7" when the jackpot type is A, or a case where the jackpot pattern is determined to be a combination of even numbers when the jackpot type is jackpot B. Furthermore, it is also possible to provide a case where the jackpot pattern is determined to be a combination of odd numbers or even numbers other than "7" when the jackpot type is jackpot C.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 executes the preview performance determination process (step 005SGS438), and then selects a performance control pattern (process table) according to the variable pattern designation command (step 005SGS439). Then, it starts the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table (step 005SGS440).

In addition, in the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, sound control execution data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A are arranged in chronological order in correspondence with each process data n (numbered 1 to N).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, speakers 8L, 8R as performance components, and operation unit (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.)) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1) (step 005SGS441). For example, to display an image corresponding to a fluctuation pattern on the image display device 5, it outputs a command to the display control unit 123. It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. It also outputs a control signal (sound number data) to the sound control board 13 to output sound from the speakers 8L, 8R.

In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display of the decorative pattern to vary according to a variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the variation pattern designation command, but the performance control CPU 120 may select a variation pattern to be used from multiple types of variation patterns that correspond to the variation pattern designation command.

Then, the variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern designation command (step 005SGS442). A predetermined time is also set to the variable display control timer (step 005SGS443). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, center, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, the display control unit 123 outputs a signal corresponding to the image data written to the VRAM to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing the variable display (variation) of the decorative patterns. Next, the value of the performance control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the variable display in progress performance process (step S172), and the variable display start setting process is terminated (step 005SGS444).

(Preview performance decision process)
Fig. 12-44 is a flow chart showing the preview performance determination process (step 005SGS438) in the variable display start setting process shown in Fig. 12-43. In the preview performance determination process, the performance control CPU 120 first specifies the variable display result and the variation pattern of the variable display from the read variation pattern designation command and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (step 005SGS451), and specifies the range of the MY counter value from the received MY counter value notification command (step 005SGS452). Then, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the preview performance and the performance pattern of the preview performance according to the specified variable display result, variation pattern, and range of the MY counter value (step 005SGS453).

The preview performance in this embodiment is, for example, a character preview performance in which a character is displayed on the image display device 5, and the character displayed differs depending on the performance pattern. In addition, the character preview performance has a different rate at which the variable display result becomes a jackpot depending on the character displayed (performance pattern).

For example, as shown in FIG. 12-45(A), when the variable display result is a jackpot and the range of the MY counter value is 0 to 95,000, there is a 15% chance that the preview performance will not be performed, a 30% chance that the preview performance will be performed in performance pattern X (displaying character X as the character preview performance), a 50% chance that the preview performance will be performed in performance pattern Y (displaying character Y as the character preview performance), and a 5% chance that the preview performance will be performed in performance pattern Z (displaying character Z as the character preview performance).

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-45 (B), when the variable display result is a jackpot and the range of the MY counter value is 95001 to 98194, there is a 15% chance that the preview performance will not be performed, a 30% chance that the preview performance will be performed in performance pattern X (displaying character X as the character preview performance), a 55% chance that the preview performance will be performed in performance pattern Y (displaying character Y as the character preview performance), and a 0% chance that the preview performance will be performed in performance pattern Z (displaying character Z as the character preview performance).

As shown in FIG. 12-45(C), when the variable display result is a miss and the fluctuation pattern is a non-reach, a 95% probability is set to not execute the preview performance, a 5% probability is set to execute the preview performance in performance pattern X (displaying character X as the character preview performance), a 0% probability is set to execute the preview performance in performance pattern Y (displaying character Y as the character preview performance), and a 0% probability is set to execute the preview performance in performance pattern Z (displaying character Z as the character preview performance). Also, when the variable display result is a miss and the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach, a 70% probability is set to not execute the preview performance, a 25% probability is set to execute the preview performance in performance pattern X (displaying character X as the character preview performance), a 5% probability is set to execute the preview performance in performance pattern Y (displaying character Y as the character preview performance), and a 0% probability is set to execute the preview performance in performance pattern Z (displaying character Z as the character preview performance). Then, if the variable display result is a miss and the variable pattern is a super reach, there is a 50% chance that the preview performance will not be performed, a 30% chance that the preview performance will be performed in performance pattern X (displaying character X as the character preview performance), a 20% chance that the preview performance will be performed in performance pattern Y (displaying character Y as the character preview performance), and a 0% chance that the preview performance will be performed in performance pattern Z (displaying character Z as the character preview performance).

In other words, in this embodiment, when the preview performance is executed, the variable display result is set to be a jackpot at a higher rate than when the preview performance is not executed. Furthermore, when the preview performance is executed, the variable display result is set to be a jackpot at the lowest rate when the preview performance is executed in performance pattern X, and the variable display result is set to be a jackpot at the highest rate when the preview performance is executed in performance pattern Z (the rate at which the variable display result is a jackpot depending on whether or not the preview performance is executed and the performance pattern (expected jackpot): preview performance not executed < preview performance executed in performance pattern X < preview performance executed in performance pattern Y < preview performance executed in performance pattern Z).

In particular, the presentation pattern Z in this embodiment is a presentation pattern that notifies the player that the variable display result is a jackpot, but it is a presentation pattern that can only be determined when the MY counter value is in the range of 0 to 95,000, and is set not to be determined when the MY counter value is 95,001 or greater.

Returning to FIG. 12-44, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided in step 005SGS453 to execute a preview performance (step 005SGS454). If it has not been decided to execute a preview performance (step 005SGS454; N), the preview performance decision process ends, and if it has been decided to execute a preview performance (step 005SGS454; Y), the preview performance start waiting timer is set and the preview performance decision process ends (step 005SGS455).

When the preview performance start waiting timer is set, the performance control CPU 120 decrements the value of the preview performance start waiting timer by 1 each time the variable display performance process (step 172) is executed, and when the preview performance start waiting timer times out, it selects a preview performance process table corresponding to the determined performance pattern and starts the preview performance process timer. After that, the preview performance can be executed by subtracting the value of the preview performance process timer each time the variable display performance process is executed, implementing the control content of the process data corresponding to the preview performance process timer value, switching the preview performance process timer and process data, etc.

In this embodiment, a form in which a character preview performance can be executed as a preview performance is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the preview performance may be determined to be other types of preview performance than a character preview performance, such as a step-up preview in which the preview image changes in stages, or a group preview in which a group of specified characters crosses the display area. When determining these different types of preview performance, the timing to start the preview performance differs depending on the type of preview performance, so a different period depending on the type of preview performance can be set in the preview performance start waiting timer.

(Waiting for special drawing)
Fig. 12-46 is a flow chart showing the special symbol hit waiting process (step S173) in the performance control process shown in Fig. 12-38. In the special symbol hit waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 first judges whether or not a jackpot start command has been received (step 005SGS800). If the jackpot start command has not been received (step 005SGS800; N), it further judges whether or not the performance process timer is operating during the pattern determination period (step 005SGS801). If the performance process timer is not operating during the pattern determination period (step 005SGS801; N), it judges whether or not the first symbol determination command has been received in the variable display performance process (step 005SGS803). If a first pattern determination command is received during the variable display performance processing (step 005SGS803; Y), a process table for the pattern determination period performance (first pattern determination period performance) corresponding to the pattern determination period being 0.5 seconds is selected and the process proceeds to step 005SGS807 (step 005SGS804).

In addition, in this embodiment, the first pattern determination period performance, as shown in FIG. 12-49, only displays the determined stop pattern during the pattern determination period until the start of the next variable display, and does not perform other image display, LED illumination, sound effect output, etc.

In addition, if a second pattern determination command is received during the variable display performance process (step 005SGS803; N), the performance control CPU 120 identifies the value of the prize ball count counter (step 005SGS805), selects a process table for the performance during the pattern determination period (performance during the second pattern determination period) in accordance with the pattern determination period being 10 seconds, and proceeds to step 005SGS807 (step 005SGS806).

In addition, in this embodiment, the second symbol determination period presentation, as shown in FIG. 12-49, is a presentation that displays on the image display device 5 the fact that the game state will be controlled from the time-saving state or the probability of winning state to the normal state, and the value of the prize ball counter, based on the fact that 100 variable displays have been executed in the time-saving state or the probability of winning state without being controlled to the jackpot game state.

Then, in step 005SGS807, the performance control CPU 120 starts a performance process timer for the pattern determination period corresponding to the pattern determination period, and starts controlling the performance devices (image display device 5 as a performance component, game effect lamp 9 as a performance component, speakers 8L, 8R as performance components, stick controller 31A, push button 31B, etc.) according to the contents of the first process data 1 in the process table for the performance during the selected pattern determination period (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1, etc.), and ends the special pattern hit waiting process (step 005SGS808).

If the effect process timer is operating during the pattern determination period (step 005SGS801; Y), the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the effect process timer during the pattern determination period by 1 (step 005SGS809) and determines whether the effect process timer has timed out during the pattern determination period (step 005SGS810). If the effect process timer has not timed out during the pattern determination period (step 005SGS810; N), the effect device is controlled according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer during the pattern determination period to end the special pattern hit waiting process (step 005SGS811), and if the effect process timer during the pattern determination period has timed out (step 005SGS810; Y), it determines whether the effect process timer during the pattern determination period that has timed out is the final effect process timer during the pattern determination period (step 005SGS812).

If the pattern determination period performance process timer that has expired is not the last pattern determination period performance process timer (step 005SGS812; N), the process data is switched (step 005SGS813), and the performance process timer for the next pattern determination period is started (step 005SGS814). Then, the performance device is controlled according to the contents of the next process data (step 005SGS815), and the special pattern hit waiting process is terminated.

In addition, if the pattern determination period performance process timer that has expired is the final pattern determination period performance process timer (step 005SGS812; Y), the value of the performance control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step 005SGS816), and the special pattern hit waiting process is terminated.

Then, if a command to start a jackpot is received (step 005SGS800; Y), the value of the performance control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the performance processing during the jackpot (step 005SGS817), and the special winning wait processing ends.

(Ending Production Processing)
Fig. 12-47 is a flow chart showing the ending effect process (step S175) in the effect control process shown in Fig. 12-38. As shown in Fig. 12-49, the ending effect in this embodiment is an effect that displays an image on the image display device 5 for 20 seconds after the end of the big win game, which indicates that the game state will be controlled to a time-saving state or a probability-changing state, and urges the player to prevent forgetting to take out the prepaid card.

In the ending production processing, the production control CPU 120 first determines whether the ending production process timer is running (step 005SGS822). If the ending production process timer is not running (step 005SGS821; N), it selects a process table for the ending production (step 005SGS822) and starts the ending production process timer (step 005SGS823). It also controls the production device according to the contents of process data 1 (step 005SGS824), and ends the ending production processing.

On the other hand, if the ending production process timer is running (step 005SGS821; Y), the value of the ending production process timer is decremented by 1 (step 005SGS825), and it is determined whether the ending production process timer has timed out (step 005SGS826). If the ending production process timer has not timed out (step 005SGS826; N), control of the production device is executed according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the ending production process timer (step 005SGS831), and the ending production processing is terminated.

If the ending production process timer has timed out, it is determined whether the ending production process timer that has timed out is the last ending production process timer (step 005SGS827). If the ending production process timer that has timed out is not the last ending production process timer (step 005SGS827; N), the process data is switched (step 005SGS828) and the next ending production process timer is started (step 005SGS829). Then, the production device is controlled according to the contents of the next process data (step 005SGS830), and the ending production processing is terminated.

If the ending production process timer that has expired is the last ending production process timer (step 005SGS827; Y), the value of the production control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step 005SGS832), and the ending production process is terminated.

(Game stop effect processing)
FIG. 12-48 is a flow chart showing the game stop effect processing (step S177) in the effect control process processing shown in FIG. 12-38. As shown in FIG. 12-49, the game stop effect in this embodiment is composed of a first game stop effect and a second game stop effect executed after the first game stop effect. Among them, the first game stop effect is an effect that displays the fact that the game has been stopped on the image display device 5 for 15 seconds after the game has been stopped. In addition, the first game stop effect is also an effect that displays the value of the prize ball counter on the image display device 5 when the game is stopped in a time-saving state or a probability change state. And, the second game stop effect is an effect that displays an image on the image display device 5 that encourages the prevention of forgetting to take out the prepaid card over the period from the end timing of the first game stop effect to the time when the supply of power to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped (power off).

In the game stop effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether the second game stop effect process timer is operating (step 005SGS841). If the second game stop effect process timer is not operating (step 005SGS841; N), it further determines whether the first game stop effect process timer is operating (step 005SGS842).

If the first game stop effect process timer is not running (step 005SGS842; N), the effect control CPU 120 identifies the value of the prize ball counter (step 005SGS843a) and identifies the game status (step 005SGS843b). Then, it selects a process table for the first game stop effect according to the game status (step 005SGS844). It also starts the first game stop effect process timer (step 005SGS845), controls the effect device according to the contents of process data 1 (step 005SGS846), and ends the game stop effect processing.

If the first game stop effect process timer is operating (step 005SGS842; Y), the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the first game stop effect process timer by 1 (step 005SGS847) and determines whether the first game stop effect process timer has timed out (step 005SGS848). If the first game stop effect process timer has not timed out (step 005SGS848; N), the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the first game stop effect process timer (step 005SGS583) and ends the game stop effect processing. If the first game stop effect process timer has timed out (step 005SGS848; Y), it determines whether the first game stop effect process timer that has timed out is the last game stop effect process timer (step 005SGS849).

If the first game stop effect process timer that has expired is not the last first game stop effect process timer (step 005SGS849; N), the process data is switched (step 005SGS850) and the next first game stop effect process timer is started (step 005SGS851). Then, the effect device is controlled according to the contents of the next process data (step 005SGS852), and the game stop effect processing is terminated.

If the first game stop effect process timer that has expired is the last game stop effect process timer (step 005SGS849; Y), then the second game stop effect process table is selected (step 005SGS854) and the second game stop effect process timer is started (step 005SGS855). Then, the effect device is controlled according to the contents of process data 1 (step 005SGS856), and the game stop effect process is terminated.

Next, if the second game stop effect process timer is operating (step 005SGS841; Y), the value of the second game stop effect process timer is decremented by 1 (step 005SGS857), and it is determined whether the second game stop effect process timer has timed out (step 005SGS858). If the second game stop effect process timer has not timed out (step 005SGS858; N), the effect device is controlled according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the second game stop effect process timer (step 005SGS863), and the game stop effect processing is terminated. Also, if the second game stop effect process timer has timed out (step 005SGS858; Y), it is determined whether the second game stop effect process timer that has timed out is the last second game stop effect process timer (step 005SGS589).

If the second game stop effect process timer that has expired is not the last second game stop effect process timer (step 005SGS589; N), the process data is switched (step 005SGS860) and the next second game stop effect process timer is started (step 005SGS861). In addition, the effect device is controlled according to the contents of the next process data (step 005SGS862), and the game stop effect process is terminated. On the other hand, if the second game stop effect process timer that has expired is the last second game stop effect process timer, the processes of steps 005SGS855 and 005SGS856 are executed to terminate the game stop effect process.

As described above, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute the first pattern determination period performance, the second pattern determination period performance, the ending performance, the first game stop performance, and the second game stop performance shown in Figure 12-49.

As shown in FIG. 12-50, the second symbol determination period effect is executed for 10 seconds after the 100th variable display (miss variable display) in the time-saving state or the probability bonus state ends. During the execution period of the second symbol determination period effect, the right-hit prompt display is continuously executed from the time-saving state on the image display device 5, and the right-hit prompt display becomes non-existent when the second symbol determination period effect ends. Furthermore, during the execution period of the second symbol determination period effect, the game effect lamp 9 is repeatedly flashed at a cycle of T1. When the second symbol determination period ends, the game effect lamp 9 goes off once and then starts to light up in a manner corresponding to the normal state.

As shown in FIG. 12-51, the ending performance is executed for 20 seconds after the end of the jackpot game, and during the execution period of the ending performance, the right-hit prompt display is executed continuously from the jackpot game state on the image display device 5. Furthermore, during the execution period of the ending performance, the flashing of the game effect lamp 9 is executed repeatedly at a cycle of T2. When the ending performance ends, the game effect lamp 9 goes out once and then starts to light up in a manner that corresponds to the game state after the jackpot game (high probability state or time-saving state).

As shown in Figures 12-52 (A) and 12-52 (B), the game stop effect may be executed when the MY counter value reaches 98194 at a time other than during a jackpot game, or when the MY counter value reaches 98194 during a jackpot game.

As shown in FIG. 12-52(A), if the MY counter value reaches 98194 at a timing other than during a jackpot game, if a variable display is being executed at that timing, the variable display is stopped, and if a right-hit prompting display is being displayed on the image display device 5, the right-hit prompting display is hidden, and the first game stop effect is executed for 15 seconds. Then, from the timing when the first game stop effect ends, the second game stop effect is executed for the timing until the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped.

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-52(B), if the MY counter value reaches 98194 during a jackpot game, the right-hit prompt display is hidden when the jackpot game ends, and the first game stop effect is executed for 15 seconds. Then, from the end of the first game stop effect, the second game stop effect is executed until the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped.

As shown in Fig. 12-52(A) and Fig. 12-52(B), in the first game stop performance of this embodiment, the game effect lamp 9 is made to flash in cycle T1 by using the same data as that for flashing the game effect lamp 9 in the second symbol stop period performance for the first 10 seconds. Also, in the 5 seconds after the 10 seconds corresponding to the performance period of the second symbol stop period performance and in the second game stop performance following the first game stop performance, the game effect lamp 9 is made to flash in cycle T1 by continuing to use the same data as that for flashing the game effect lamp 9 in the second symbol stop period performance.

(Performance mode)
Next, the presentation modes of the ending presentation, the presentation during the second pattern determination period, the game stop suggestion presentation, the game stop presentation, and the demo display presentation in this embodiment will be explained with reference to Figures 12-53 to 12-59.

First, as shown in Fig. 12-53(A) to Fig. 12-53(D), when the variable display result is a jackpot in the normal state, the decorative symbols are derived and displayed in a combination that indicates a jackpot on the image display device 5, and the jackpot game starts. At this time, the right-hit prompt display starts to be displayed on the upper end of the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 12-53(D), during a jackpot game, the player can select the music to be output from the speakers 8L, 8R by operating the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B, and the title of the music currently being output from the speakers 8L, 8R is displayed at a specified position on the image display device 5 (in this embodiment, the lower left of the display area of the image display device 5). Also, at the lower right of the image display device 5, the number of prize balls that can be paid out during the jackpot game and the number of prize balls that have been paid out during the jackpot game are displayed.

When the big win game ends, an ending effect is displayed indicating that the game state will be controlled to a time-saving state or a special state ("Chance time has arrived!" as shown in FIG. 12-53(E)) and the value of the prize ball counter is displayed. The ending effect also includes the display of an image encouraging the player to not forget to remove the prepaid card and a message encouraging the player to not become addicted to the game, as shown in FIG. 12-53(F) and FIG. 12-53(G).

Also, as shown in Fig. 12-54(A) to Fig. 12-54(D), if 100 variable displays are executed without the variable display result becoming a jackpot in the time-saving state or the probability-changing state (if time-saving control is executed for 100 variable displays without being controlled to the jackpot game state), the second symbol determination period performance is executed from the timing when the 100th variable display ends. As the second symbol determination period performance, a display is displayed indicating that the game state is controlled to the normal state (a display of "chance time ended"), along with the value of the prize ball counter (the value of the number of prize balls paid out during the jackpot game from the first hit until the control to the normal state). Then, after the second symbol determination period performance ends, a left hit promotion display is displayed to encourage the player to shoot the game ball toward the left game area 2L for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds).

As shown in Fig. 12-55(A) to Fig. 12-55(F), in the normal state, the time-saving state, and the special probability state, when the MY counter value reaches 95001 as a result of a game ball entering one of the winning slots, a game stop suggestion image (display of "game stop imminent") indicating that the game will soon stop in the pachinko game machine 1 is displayed at both the left and right ends of the display area of the image display device 5 as a game stop suggestion effect from the start of the next variable display. Note that in this embodiment, as shown in Fig. 12-55(C) and Fig. 12-55(F), the display mode of the game stop suggestion image displayed when the MY counter value reaches 95001 in the normal state is different from the display mode of the game stop suggestion image displayed when the MY counter value reaches 95001 in the time-saving state or the special probability state.

Also, as shown in Figures 12-56(A) to 12-56(F), if the MY counter value reaches 95001 as a result of the game ball entering one of the winning slots during a jackpot game, after the jackpot game ends, a game stop suggestion image will be displayed as a game stop suggestion effect from the start timing of the first variable display in the time-saving state or the probability bonus state.

As shown in Figures 12-57(A) to 12-57(H), after the game stop suggestion effect has started, if the MY counter value reaches 98194 due to the game ball entering one of the winning slots, the first game stop effect will be executed, followed by the second game stop effect.

As shown in Fig. 12-57(A) to Fig. 12-57(D), if the MY counter value reaches 98194 when the game state is normal, the first game stop effect is displayed to indicate that the game has stopped because the MY counter value has reached 98194. On the other hand, as shown in Fig. 12-57(E) to Fig. 12-57(H), if the MY counter value reaches 98194 when the game state is time-saving or high probability, the first game stop effect is displayed to indicate that the game has stopped because the MY counter value has reached 98194, to congratulate the MY counter value for reaching 98194, and to display the value of the prize ball counter. In other words, in this embodiment, the presentation mode of the first game stop effect is different when the game state is normal and when the game state is time-saving or high probability.

As shown in Figures 12-57(C), 12-57(D), 12-57(G), and 12-57(H), the second game stop effect displays a message urging the player not to forget to remove the prepaid card regardless of the game status, and a message urging the player to call an employee of the game facility set for the pachinko game machine 1 because game play has stopped.

In addition, for the first game stop effect and the second game stop effect in this embodiment, the right hit prompt display is hidden from the start timing of the first game stop effect, and the effect images of the first game stop effect and the second game stop effect (see Figures 12-57 (B) to 12-57 (D), 12-57 (F) to 12-57 (H)) are displayed overlapping each other so that the previous decorative patterns, reserved displays, game value stop suggestion effects, small patterns, etc. are not visible. As a result, for example, even if the game on the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped because the MY counter value reaches 98194 during the execution of the variable display, it is possible to hide the decorative patterns and other effect images displayed as still images on the image display device 5 from the player, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which the appearance becomes poor.

In addition, as the first game stop effect in this embodiment, it is assumed that the player is playing the game while operating the mobile terminal and is therefore looking away from the image display device 5, and a sound that is higher in pitch or louder than the sound output during the variable display is output from the speakers 8L and 8R so that the player notices the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 (the image indicating that the game has stopped, as shown in Figure 12-57 (B) and Figure 12-57 (F)).

Furthermore, as the second game stop effect in this embodiment, in order to make it easy for the amusement arcade employees to recognize, a display urging the player to call an amusement arcade employee is displayed (see Figures 12-57 (D) and 12-57 (H)), and a sound urging the player to call an amusement arcade employee is repeatedly output from speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, if the audio urging the player to call an arcade employee is output for a long period of time before the arcade employee arrives, it may be stressful for the player of the pachinko machine 1 and other players in the vicinity. Therefore, the audio urging the player to call an arcade employee may be output at intervals (for example, outputting audio for one minute followed by an interval of five minutes, and repeating this), or after outputting audio urging the player to call an arcade employee for a predetermined period of time (for example, one minute), the audio output from speakers 8L, 8R may not be executed thereafter.

As shown in Fig. 12-52(A) and Fig. 12-52(B), the embodiment illustrates an example in which the game effect lamp 9 flashes in cycle T1 during the execution of the first game stop effect and the execution of the second game stop effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. In the first game stop effect, the game effect lamp 9 may be illuminated (flashing or lit) in a manner corresponding to the first game stop effect, while in the second game stop effect, the game effect lamp 9 may be illuminated in a manner different from the first game stop effect as a manner corresponding to the second game stop effect. In particular, in the second game stop effect, some or all of the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d constituting the game effect lamp 9 may be illuminated so that an employee of the game parlor can easily identify that the game has been stopped in the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, as a second game stop effect, some or all of the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d that make up the game effect lamp 9 may be illuminated at a higher brightness than during variable display or jackpot play, so that the employees of the game arcade can easily identify that play has stopped on the pachinko game machine 1.

As shown in Fig. 12-58(A) to Fig. 12-58(H), if the variable display result is a jackpot when the game stop suggestion effect is executed, a message is displayed indicating that the game will stop after the jackpot game (the "ENDING FEVER!" display shown in Fig. 12-58(B)) and the jackpot game starts. If the MY counter value reaches 98194 during the jackpot game, the jackpot game continues to the final round of play without interruption, as shown in Fig. 12-58(E) to Fig. 12-58(H). When the jackpot game ends, the ending effect is executed after the end of the conventional jackpot game, but after the first game stop effect is executed in the same manner as the first game stop effect in the time-saving state or the probability change state, the second game stop effect is executed.

As shown in Fig. 12-59(A) and Fig. 12-59(B), when the game state is normal, time-saving, or probability-change state, if the variable display of special symbols or decorative symbols is not being executed and there is no reserved memory, the customer waiting demo performance will start when the period during which the variable display is not executed reaches a predetermined period (for example, one minute). As the customer waiting demo performance in this embodiment, first, as shown in Fig. 12-59(B), a display is displayed for six seconds indicating that the machine is equipped with an ending function that stops the game when the MY counter value reaches 98194. Next, an introductory movie introducing the effects executed in this pachinko game machine 1, gameplay, etc. is displayed for 30 seconds. Note that while the introductory movie is being displayed, the display indicating that the machine is equipped with the aforementioned ending function continues to be displayed.

When the introductory movie ends, the display of the fact that the machine is equipped with an ending function also ends, and instead, as a customer waiting demo, the manufacturer logo of the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 12-59 (D) is displayed for three seconds, a display encouraging the player to avoid becoming addicted to the game shown in FIG. 12-59 (E) is displayed for six seconds, and a display of the fact that the machine is equipped with an ending function shown in FIG. 12-59 (F) is displayed for six seconds.

Finally, as shown in FIG. 12-59(H), the display of key visual images including the main character appearing in the performance of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the title of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed for 5 minutes. After that, the displays of FIG. 12-59(B) to FIG. 12-59(H) are executed repeatedly as a customer waiting demo performance. The displays of these customer waiting demo performances end when the game ball enters the first start winning slot or the second start winning slot, starting the variable display of special patterns and decorative patterns.

In this embodiment, an example is given of a form in which a customer waiting demo effect can be executed when the game state is either the normal state, the time-saving state, or the probability bonus state, the variable display of special symbols or decorative symbols is not being executed, and there is no reserved memory. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when a customer waiting demo effect is executed during the execution of a game stop suggestion effect, for example, the image displayed on the image display device 5 as the game stop suggestion effect may be displayed in priority over the image of the customer waiting demo effect by drawing the image displayed on the image display device 5 as the game stop suggestion effect on a layer with a higher priority than the image displayed on the image display device 5 as the customer waiting demo effect.

In addition, as described above, when the game stop suggestion effect and the customer waiting demo effect are executed in parallel, the image of the game stop suggestion effect may be temporarily hidden during the period when the display is different from the display indicating that the pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with an ending function and during the period when the display is more important than other displays, such as the period when the pachinko game machine 1 manufacturer's logo is displayed or the period when the display encourages players to prevent addiction to the game is displayed. By doing this, when the game stop suggestion effect and the customer waiting demo effect are executed in parallel, the player can be made to easily recognize the manufacturer of the pachinko game machine 1, and it is possible to more effectively educate the player about preventing addiction to the game.

As described above, in the pachinko game machine 1 in this embodiment, the game can be stopped on the condition that the MY counter value reaches 98194. In addition, in the pachinko game machine 1, if the game state is controlled to the time-saving state after being controlled to the jackpot game state, and 100 variable displays are executed in the time-saving state without being controlled to the jackpot game state, as shown in Figs. 12-50 and 12-54, during the pattern regular period of the 100th variable display, the game state is controlled to the normal state as a performance during the second pattern determination period, and the number of prize balls paid out in the jackpot game state in the consecutive win state, that is, the value of the prize ball counter, is displayed. Furthermore, after the jackpot game ends when the MY counter value has not reached 98194, as shown in Figs. 12-51 and 12-53, the game state is controlled to the time-saving state or the probability variable state as an ending performance. As shown in FIG. 12-56, when the MY counter value reaches 98194 during a jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 12-52 and FIG. 12-58, after the jackpot game is played to the end, the value of the prize ball counter is displayed as a game stop effect instead of an ending effect, thereby improving the marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 that can stop the game.

In particular, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the value of the prize ball counter is displayed at the end of a consecutive win state including a time-saving state, thereby making it possible for the player to recognize the number of prize balls paid out in a jackpot game during the consecutive win state and increasing the player's interest in the game. Even if the MY counter value reaches 98194 while controlled in a jackpot game state, the value of the prize ball counter is displayed as a game stop effect after the jackpot game ends, making it possible for the player to recognize the number of prize balls paid out until the game is stopped on the pachinko gaming machine 1 and further increasing the player's interest in the game.

In this embodiment, when the MY counter value does not reach 98194, the value of the prize ball counter is displayed as an ending effect for 20 seconds after the end of the jackpot game, while when the MY counter value reaches 98194, the value of the prize ball counter is displayed as a game stop effect (first game stop effect) for 15 seconds after the end of the jackpot game. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the MY counter value reaches 98194, the value of the prize ball counter may be displayed as a game stop effect (first game stop effect) for 20 seconds, the same as when the MY counter value does not reach 98194 after the end of the jackpot game.

As shown in FIG. 12-50, in the second symbol determination period performance, the game effect lamp is blinked for 10 seconds with a cycle T1, while in the game stop performance, as shown in FIG. 12-52, the game effect lamp 9 is blinked for 10 seconds with a cycle T1 as the first game stop performance, and then the game effect lamp 9 continues to blink for 5 seconds with the cycle T1 of the pachinko game machine 1. In particular, in this embodiment, by making the game effect lamp 9 blink with a common cycle in the second symbol determination period performance and the first game stop performance, the data for blinking the game effect lamp 9 can be reused in the second symbol determination period performance and the first game stop performance, and the manufacturing cost of the pachinko game machine 1 can be reduced while making the period for displaying the value of the prize ball counter different between the second symbol determination period performance and the first game stop performance.

In this embodiment, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in a common predetermined pattern during the second symbol determination period performance and the first game stop performance by flashing the game effect lamp 9 with a cycle of T1, but the present invention is not limited to this. As a form in which the game effect lamp 9 is lit in a common predetermined pattern during the second symbol determination period performance and the first game stop performance, the game effect lamp 9 may be lit in the same color or with the same brightness.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12-54(C) and FIG. 12-57(F), the display mode is different between the case where the value of the prize ball counter is displayed as the first game stop effect because the MY counter value has reached 98194, and the case where the value of the prize ball counter is displayed as the second pattern determination period effect because 100 variable displays have been executed in the time-saving state or the probability change state without being controlled to the jackpot game state, so that the value of the prize ball counter can be displayed in a mode according to the situation. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 12-54, when 100 variable displays have been executed in the time-saving state or the probability change state without being controlled to the jackpot game state, the left hit promotion display is displayed when controlled to the normal state, while as shown in FIG. 12-57 and FIG. 12-58, when the MY counter value has reached 98194 and the game has stopped, the left hit promotion display is not displayed, so that it is possible to appropriately execute the left hit promotion display according to the state to which the state transitions after the display of the prize ball counter value is made.

In addition, in the consecutive win state of this embodiment, the right hit promotion display is displayed on the image display device 5 to encourage the player to shoot the game ball toward the right game area 2R. Furthermore, as shown in Figures 12-50, 12-52, 12-54, 12-57, and 12-58, when the value of the prize ball counter is displayed as the second pattern determination period performance, the right hit promotion display is displayed, while when the value of the prize ball counter is displayed as the first game stop performance, the right hit promotion display is not displayed. In other words, when the value of the prize ball counter is displayed as the first game stop performance, the game on the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped, so by not displaying the right hit promotion display when the value of the prize ball counter is displayed as the first game stop performance, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being shot toward the right game area 2R when the game is stopped.

In this embodiment, an example is shown in which the right-hit promotion display is hidden when the value of the prize ball counter is displayed as the first game stop effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. When the value of the prize ball counter is displayed as the first game stop effect, the right-hit promotion display may be displayed smaller than before the value of the prize ball counter is displayed as the first game stop effect, or the right-hit promotion display may be displayed in a position that is more difficult for the player to see.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in Figures 12-57 (E) to 12-57 (H), the value of the prize ball counter is displayed as a game stop effect in the same manner when the MY counter value reaches 98194 when the game state is in the time-saving state and when the MY counter value reaches 98194 when the game state is in the special probability state. This makes it possible to standardize the data used to display the value of the prize ball counter as a game stop effect when the MY counter value reaches 98194 when the game state is in the time-saving state and when the MY counter value reaches 98194 when the game state is in the special probability state, thereby reducing the manufacturing costs of the pachinko game machine 1.

In this embodiment, the game stop effect is executed in the same manner when the MY counter value reaches 98194 when the game state is in the time-saving state and when the MY counter value reaches 98194 when the game state is in the high probability state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game stop effect may be executed in different manners when the MY counter value reaches 98194 when the game state is in the time-saving state and when the MY counter value reaches 98194 when the game state is in the high probability state. In this way, it becomes possible for the player to easily recognize whether the game was stopped in the time-saving state or the high probability state.

The normal state of this embodiment is a state in which game balls can generally only enter the first start port and the general winning port 10, and the number of game balls that enter these winning ports is less than in the time-saving state, the special probability state, and the big win game state. As shown in Figures 12-57(A) to 12-57(B), in the first game stop presentation when the MY counter value reaches 98194 in the normal state, the prize ball counter value is not displayed, so that the player's interest in the game is prevented from decreasing when the game on the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in the normal state by the prize ball counter value being displayed.

In addition, as shown in Figures 12-57 (E) to 12-57 (H), the game stop effect is executed in the same manner when the MY counter value reaches 98194 when the game state is in the time-saving state and when the MY counter value reaches 98194 when the game state is in the high probability state. Therefore, the data used to execute the game stop effect can be standardized when the MY counter value reaches 98194 in the time-saving state and when the MY counter value reaches 98194 in the high probability state, thereby reducing the manufacturing costs of the pachinko game machine 1.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 12-57(A) to 12-57(H), when the MY counter value reaches 98194 while the game state is normal, the game stop effect is executed in a different manner when the MY counter value reaches 98194 while the game state is in a time-saving state or a special probability state, so that it is possible to execute the game stop effect appropriately depending on the state when the MY counter value reaches 98194.

In this embodiment, the game stop effect is executed in a different manner when the MY counter value reaches 98194 when the game state is normal and when the MY counter value reaches 98194 when the game state is in a time-saving state or a special probability state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The game stop effect may be executed in a different manner when the MY counter value reaches 98194 when the game state is normal, when the MY counter value reaches 98194 when the game state is in a time-saving state, and when the MY counter value reaches 98194 when the game state is in a special probability state. In this way, it is possible to execute the game stop effect more appropriately depending on the state when the MY counter value reaches 98194.

In addition, as shown in Figures 12-55 (D) to 12-55 (F), the game stop suggestion effect is executed in the same manner when the MY counter value reaches 95001 when the game state is in the time-saving state and when the MY counter value reaches 95001 when the game state is in the high probability state. Therefore, the data used to execute the game stop suggestion effect can be standardized when the MY counter value reaches 95001 when the game state is in the time-saving state and when the MY counter value reaches 95001 when the game state is in the high probability state, thereby reducing the manufacturing costs of the pachinko game machine 1.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 12-55(A) to 12-55(F), when the MY counter value reaches 95001 while the game state is normal, the game stop suggestion effect is executed in a different manner when the MY counter value reaches 95001 while the game state is in a time-saving state or a special probability state. Therefore, the game stop suggestion effect can be executed appropriately according to the state when the MY counter value reaches 95001, thereby increasing interest in the game.

In this embodiment, the game stop suggestion effect is executed in a different manner when the MY counter value reaches 98194 when the game state is normal and when the MY counter value reaches 98194 when the game state is in a time-saving state or a special probability state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The game stop suggestion effect may be executed in a different manner when the MY counter value reaches 98194 when the game state is normal, when the MY counter value reaches 98194 when the game state is in a time-saving state, and when the MY counter value reaches 98194 when the game state is in a special probability state. In this way, it is possible to execute the game stop suggestion effect more appropriately depending on the state when the MY counter value reaches 98194.

In addition, in this embodiment, a reserved display effect can be executed as a pre-reading notice effect. As the effect pattern of the reserved display effect, three display patterns, display pattern α to display pattern γ, are provided as the display pattern of the reserved display, and the rate at which the reserved display is controlled to the jackpot game state (the expected probability of a jackpot) differs depending on which display pattern the reserved display is displayed in. In particular, in this embodiment, display pattern γ suggests that the game will be controlled to the jackpot game state at a rate of 100% (a display pattern that notifies the game state of a jackpot game), while the rate at which the display pattern γ is determined as the display pattern for the reserved display is set to 0% when the MY counter value is 95001 or more and there are two or more reserved memories that will result in a jackpot. In this way, in this embodiment, even if the reserved display is displayed in display pattern γ, it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing due to the game being stopped in the pachinko game machine 1 before the game is controlled to the jackpot game state multiple times.

In this embodiment, when the MY counter value is 95001 or more and there are two or more reserved memories that will result in a jackpot, the determination ratio of the display pattern γ, which indicates that the display pattern of the reserved display will be controlled to a jackpot game state, is set to 0%, as an example. However, this invention is not limited to this. For example, even when the MY counter value is 95001 or more and there are two or more reserved memories that will result in a jackpot, the presence or absence of restrictions on the determination of the display pattern γ may be varied depending on the game state, or the degree of restrictions on the determination of the display pattern γ may be varied depending on the game state.

For example, even if the MY counter value is 95001 or more and there are two or more reserved memories that will result in a jackpot, if the game state is normal, the determination rate of display pattern γ may be set to 0%, while if the game state is in a time-saving state or a probability-change state, the determination rate of display pattern γ may be set to 5%. By doing this, for example, if the reserved display is displayed in display pattern γ during the execution of a game stop suggestion performance, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the reserved display is variable and controlled to a jackpot game state before the game on the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, during the variable display, the advance notice performance can be executed in any one of performance patterns X to Z, and the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state (expected probability of a jackpot) differs depending on which performance pattern the advance notice performance is executed in. In particular, performance pattern Z in this embodiment suggests that the game will be controlled to the jackpot game state with a 100% probability (performance pattern that notifies the game will be controlled to the jackpot game state), while the probability of the performance pattern Z being determined as the performance pattern of the advance notice performance is set to 0% when the MY counter value is 95001 or more. In this way, in this embodiment, for example, even if the advance notice performance is executed in performance pattern Z during the variable display, the game on the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped before the game is controlled to the jackpot game state because the MY counter value has reached 98194 during the variable display, so that it is possible to prevent a decrease in the player's interest in the game from occurring.

In this embodiment, when the MY counter value is 95001 or more, only the determination ratio of the performance pattern Z, which has the highest jackpot expectation as the performance pattern of the preview performance, is set to 0%, but the present invention is not limited to this. When the MY counter value is 95001 or more, the determination ratio of the performance pattern Y, which has a lower jackpot expectation than the performance pattern Z and a higher jackpot expectation than the performance pattern X, may also be set to 0%, or the preview performance may not be executed at all.

In addition, in this embodiment, if the MY counter value reaches 98194 in the normal state, the time-saving state, or the probability variable state, the game on the pachinko game machine 1 is immediately stopped, whereas if the MY counter value reaches 98194 in the jackpot game state, the game on the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped when the jackpot game state is controlled to the time-saving state or the probability variable state, so that the game on the pachinko game machine 1 can be stopped suitably. In particular, in this embodiment, even if the MY counter value reaches 98194 in the jackpot game state, the game is not stopped until the jackpot game ends, so that the occurrence of an excessively disadvantageous event for the player, such as the jackpot game state ending midway, is prevented.

As shown in FIG. 12-34, in the payout control timer interrupt process of this embodiment, a series of processes are executed regardless of whether or not the game is stopped in the pachinko game machine 1. In other words, in this embodiment, even if the game is stopped in the pachinko game machine 1, the player operates the ball loan switch 21TM062 to execute the prize ball loan control process, thereby executing the loan of game balls, and the player operates the return switch 21TM063 to execute the prepaid card unit control process, thereby executing the return of the prepaid card, etc. For this reason, for example, when the game is stopped in the pachinko game machine 1, it is possible to return the prepaid card, so that it is possible to prevent the occurrence of troubles caused by the prepaid card not being returned when the game is stopped in the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, since no complex process is required as the payout control timer interrupt process when the game is stopped in the pachinko game machine 1, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of unintended malfunctions in the series of processes in the payout control timer interrupt process.

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-57, when the MY counter value reaches 98194, a game stop effect is displayed on the image display device 5, urging the player not to forget to remove the prepaid card. This can prevent problems such as the player forgetting to return the prepaid card (operating the return switch 21TM063) and leaving the pachinko gaming machine 1 when play on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 12-56 and 12-57, in this embodiment, even in the ending performance after the end of a jackpot game, a message urging the player not to forget to remove the prepaid card is displayed on the image display device 5 in the same manner as the game stop performance, so that at least a portion of the data for displaying the message urging the player not to forget to remove the prepaid card as the game stop performance and the ending performance can be made common, thereby reducing the manufacturing costs of the pachinko game machine 1.

In this embodiment, the image display device 5 displays a message urging the player not to forget to remove the prepaid card as a game stop effect or ending effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. In the game stop effect, the message urging the player not to forget to remove the prepaid card may be displayed in a larger area than the ending effect, in more colors than the ending effect, or for a longer period of time than the ending effect, in a manner that is easier for the player to recognize than when the ending effect is being executed, thereby more reliably preventing the occurrence of problems such as the player forgetting to return the prepaid card and leaving the pachinko game machine 1.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment, the game is stopped when the MY counter value reaches 98194 or when a game stop error such as a radio wave error, a magnet error, or a game ball guide lid operation error occurs. Furthermore, in both cases, when the MY counter value reaches 98194 or when the game stop error occurs, the information output circuit 112 outputs a security signal until the power supply of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned off, so that the output of the security signal makes it easier for employees of the game arcade in which the pachinko game machine 1 is installed to know that the game of the pachinko game machine 1 has been stopped. In particular, when the game is stopped as described above, the security signal is output until the power supply of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned off, so that it is possible to prevent employees of the game arcade from overlooking the fact that the game of the pachinko game machine 1 has been stopped.

In addition to the above-mentioned game stop error, the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment can also detect errors that have a lower priority for outputting a security signal than game stop errors, such as a start port 2 abnormal winning error. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 12-29, when a start port 2 abnormal winning error occurs, a security signal is output for four minutes, unlike when the MY counter value reaches 98194 or a game stop error occurs. In other words, in this embodiment, the output period of the security signal is different when a game stop error occurs and when an error that has a lower priority than the game stop error and does not stop the game occurs. Therefore, employees of the game arcade where the pachinko game machine 1 is installed can easily determine whether an error that has occurred in the pachinko game machine 1 is a game stop error based on the output period of the security signal, and can take appropriate measures against the error that has occurred.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention also includes modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention.

For example, in the above embodiment, as shown in Figure 12-58, when the MY counter value reaches 98,194, the value of the prize ball counter is displayed as the first game stop effect, and then a display is displayed as the second game stop effect, urging the player to call an employee of the amusement parlor where the pachinko game machine 1 is installed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 055SG-1, as shown in Figures 12-60 (A) to 12-60 (C), when the MY counter value reaches 98,194, the value of the prize ball counter is displayed as the game stop effect, and then a display is displayed that urges the player to call an employee of the amusement parlor where the pachinko game machine 1 is installed in addition to the prize ball counter value. In this way, the player can be made aware of the prize balls that had been awarded before play was stopped, improving game instruction, and by encouraging the player to call an employee of the game arcade when play has been stopped, it becomes easier for the employee to take action, such as cutting off the supply of power to the pachinko game machine 1 where play has been stopped.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a form was exemplified in which a look-ahead preview effect (hold display preview effect) that suggests to the player the percentage of the game state being controlled to a jackpot game state depending on the display mode of the hold display can be executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in Figure 12-61 (A) as modified example 005SG-2, the second special pattern hold memory (hold memory corresponding to the variable display of up to four second special patterns executed after the game state is controlled to the normal state) after the 100th variable display in the time-saving state or the probability variable state may be excluded from the execution of the look-ahead preview effect.

In addition, in this way, when the second special reserved memory after the 100th variable display in the time-saving state or the probability change state is excluded from the execution of the pre-reading notice performance, if there is a reserved memory in these second special reserved memories in which the variable display result is a jackpot, as shown in Figures 12-61 (A) to 12-61 (C), it may be possible to execute a revival notification performance (in this embodiment, a performance in which multiple stars are displayed across the display area of the image display device 5 as shown in Figure 12-61 (C)) that notifies that the variable display result will be a jackpot in the variable display based on the second special reserved memory after being controlled to the normal state in the performance during the second pattern determination period.

As shown in FIG. 12-61(D), there may be a second special chart reserved memory in which the variable display result is a jackpot even at the start timing of the game stop effect. In this case, since the game has already been stopped, the revival notification effect may not be executed while the game stop effect is being executed. In this way, by not executing the revival effect while the game stop effect is being executed, it is possible to prevent a decline in the player's game skill due to not being controlled to a jackpot game state.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the degree display LED21TM060 is placed on the top of the upper tray of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and a form is exemplified in which the degree display LED21TM060 can display the remaining amount for borrowing gaming balls (the balance of a prepaid card), but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in Figures 12-62 (A) and 12-62 (B) as variant example 005SG-3, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a state where it is possible to play (playable state), the degree display LED21TM060 can display the remaining amount for borrowing gaming balls (the balance of a prepaid card), while when play is stopped on the pachinko gaming machine 1 (the game is stopped), the degree display LED21TM060 can display a value different from the remaining amount (the balance of a prepaid card) to indicate that play is no longer possible. In this way, in addition to the game stop effect on the image display device 5, the display mode of the degree display LED 21TM060 allows the player to easily recognize whether or not play on the pachinko game machine 1 has been stopped.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a display monitor 21TM029 visible from the rear side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided, and various winning information such as consecutive win ratios and role ratios is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 005SG-4, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a state where it is playable (playable state), various winning information such as consecutive win ratios and role ratios is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, while when play on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped (the game is stopped), as shown in Figure 12-63, the display monitor 21TM029 may display information different from the winning information, indicating that play is no longer possible. In this way, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes unplayable, an employee of the gaming parlor or the like can easily confirm that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in an unplayable state by visually checking the display monitor 21TM029 from the rear side of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an example was given of a form in which a connection confirmation signal is output from the pachinko gaming machine 1 (main board 11) to the payout control board 21TM037, and the payout control board 21TM037 drives the payout motor 21TM289 based on the PRDY signal being ON and both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal being ON, thereby making it possible to lend out a predetermined number of game balls; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a variant example 005SG-5, when play is stopped in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the output of the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 may be stopped. When the output of the connection confirmation signal is stopped in this way, the output of the PRDY signal, BRDY signal, and BRQ signal is also stopped. As a result, after play on the pachinko game machine 1 has stopped, that is, while the game stop display is being executed, the lending of new game balls (the prize ball lending control process shown in FIG. 12-34) can be prevented even if the player operates the ball lending switch 21TM062.

In this modified example, when play is stopped on the pachinko game machine 1, the output of the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is stopped so that new game balls are not lent out (the prize ball lending control process shown in FIG. 12-34). However, the present invention is not limited to this. When play is stopped on the pachinko game machine 1, the output of the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 may be stopped so that new game balls are not lent out, while the prepaid card may be returned to the player by operating the return switch 21TM063. In this way, it is possible to prevent problems such as the prepaid card not being returned to the player even when play is stopped on the pachinko game machine 1.

In the above embodiment, when play is stopped because the MY counter value has reached 98194, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off and then the clear switch 92 is operated and power is applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 again (the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start), thereby making the pachinko gaming machine 1 playable. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in Figures 12-65(A) to 12-65(D) as modified example 005SG-6, when play is stopped in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off and then the clear switch 92 is operated and power is applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 again (the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start), thereby making the pachinko gaming machine 1 playable. On the other hand, when the power is turned on again to the pachinko gaming machine 1 (the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start) without operating the clear switch 92 after the power is turned off to the pachinko gaming machine 1, an error notification that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is still in a stopped state and that urges the user to turn on the pachinko gaming machine 1 while operating the clear switch 92 may be displayed as an image on the image display device 5 or output as a sound from the speakers 8L, 8R. In this way, the error notification can be used to make the instructor at the amusement facility where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed aware that the game was stopped when the pachinko gaming machine 1 was turned on, thereby reducing the risk that the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be left in a stopped state since it was turned on.

In addition, since starting the pachinko gaming machine 1 while the game is stopped is an abnormal state, the above-mentioned error notification may be output from speakers 8L and 8R at a louder volume than the sound output during play (normal state, time-saving state, special probability state, jackpot game state) or during the game stop performance.

In the above embodiment, a form was exemplified in which it was possible to determine whether the variable display result would be a jackpot at a rate of 1 according to the game state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as shown in FIG. 12-65 as modified example 005SGS-7, multiple setting values may be set by operating a specific setting means, and the rate at which the variable display result will be a jackpot may be varied depending on which setting value is set. Note that when any setting value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this way, the set setting value can be reflected by turning off the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and turning the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 on again while operating the clear switch 92 (cold start).

In addition, in this way, when the rate at which the game is controlled to the jackpot game state is changed according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the CPU 103 may output a setting change state notification command to notify the presentation control board 12 that the setting value is in a changeable setting value state when the setting value is changed, and the presentation control board 12 (presentation control CPU 120) may execute a presentation to notify that the setting value is in a changeable setting value state based on receiving the setting change state notification command. Furthermore, the CPU 103 may stop the game of the pachinko game machine 1 and output a security signal from the information output circuit 112 together with outputting the setting change state notification command. The output period of the security signal may be different from the output period of the security signal based on the MY counter value reaching 98194 or the output period of the security signal when other errors are detected (for example, 5 seconds after the setting value is changed as shown in FIG. 12-67 (C)). In this way, when play on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, it is possible to check from outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 whether the stop in play is due to the occurrence of a specific error, the MY counter value reaching 98194, or the setting value being changeable, so that a stop in play due to the setting value being changeable is prevented from being mistaken for a stop in play due to the MY counter value reaching 98194 or the detection of another error.

In this modified example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is put into a setting value changeable state to stop play on the pachinko gaming machine 1 (putting the machine in a game stop state), but the present invention is not limited to this. In addition to the setting value changeable state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may also be put into a setting confirmation state in which the set setting can be confirmed by employees of the gaming facility, etc.

In addition, in the above embodiment and this modified example, an example was given of a form in which play on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to the occurrence of a magnet error or radio wave error, but the present invention is not limited to this. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the above-mentioned setting value confirmation state, it is expected that an employee of the gaming parlor will approach the pachinko gaming machine 1 to check the setting value, so sensors for detecting play stop errors such as the magnetic sensor 005SG060 and the radio wave sensor 005SG070 may be disabled to prevent the pachinko gaming machine 1 from entering a play stop state due to a malfunction of sensors such as the magnetic sensor 005SG060 and the radio wave sensor 005SG070.

In addition, in this modified example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is put into a setting value confirmation state, thereby enabling the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 to be confirmed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to a game stop state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be prevented from transitioning to the setting value confirmation state.

In addition, in this modified example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set in a setting value changeable state, thereby making it possible to change the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to a play stop state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be set in a setting value changeable state, making it possible to change the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In this case, by cold starting the pachinko gaming machine 1, it becomes automatically possible to play on the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to a jackpot gaming state with a probability according to the set setting value.

In addition, in the above embodiment, if the MY counter value reaches 98194 while the game state is in the time-saving state or the probability of winning, the game on the pachinko game machine 1 is immediately stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this. If the MY counter value reaches 98194 while the game state is in the time-saving state or the probability of winning, the game state may be controlled to the normal state, or the game on the pachinko game machine 1 may be stopped after the next big win game ends.

In addition, in the above embodiment, even if the MY counter value reaches a value close to 98194 (for example, 98000), if the MY counter value does not reach 98194 during the jackpot game, the game can be continued. However, the present invention is not limited to this. If the MY counter value is controlled to the jackpot game state when the MY counter value is a value close to 98194, the game on the pachinko game machine 1 may be stopped even if the MY counter value has not reached 98194 at the end of the jackpot game. In this way, for example, it is possible to prevent a strategy play such as delaying the stop of the game on the pachinko game machine 1 until a jackpot game with a large number of rounds such as jackpot C is executed by deliberately not hitting the game ball in a jackpot game with a small number of rounds such as jackpot B.

In the above embodiment, an ending presentation is executed for 20 seconds after the end of the jackpot game state, regardless of the type of jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the execution period of the ending presentation may differ depending on the type of jackpot. Even if the execution period of the ending presentation differs depending on the type of jackpot in this way, if the MY counter value reaches 98194 during a jackpot game, the value of the prize ball counter may be displayed as the first game stop presentation for a certain period of time (for example, a uniform 15 seconds) after the end of each jackpot game.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a form was exemplified in which a right-hit promotion display was displayed on the image display device 5 in consecutive win states including a jackpot game state, a time-saving state, and a probability-change state, but the present invention is not limited to this. In consecutive win states, in addition to or instead of the right-hit promotion display, an LED (right-hit lamp) may be turned on to encourage the player to shoot the game ball toward the right game area 2R, making it easier for the player to understand that the consecutive win state is a game state in which the game ball is shot toward the right game area 2R. Note that the right-hit lamp may be constantly lit in the consecutive win state, the same as the display period of the right-hit promotion display.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the MY counter value reaches 98194 in the time-saving state or the probability of winning state, the right-hit promotion display is hidden along with the start of the game stop effect. However, if both the display of the right-hit promotion display and the lighting of the right-hit lamp can be executed in the consecutive win state as described above, the right-hit promotion display may be hidden and the right-hit lamp may be turned off because the game has stopped in the pachinko game machine 1, that is, the game state in which the game ball is not shot toward the right game area 2R, or the right-hit promotion display and the lighting of the right-hit lamp may continue based on the fact that the game has stopped in the pachinko game machine 1 but the time-saving flag has been set. Furthermore, when the MY counter value reaches 98194, the CPU 103 may clear the time-saving flag or the probability of winning flag, and based on the time-saving flag or the probability of winning flag being cleared, the right-hit promotion display may be hidden and the right-hit lamp may be turned off.

In the above embodiment, as shown in Figs. 12-57 to 12-58, when the MY counter value reaches 98194, the second game stop effect is displayed to urge the player not to forget to remove the prepaid card and to call an employee of the game parlor set for the pachinko game machine 1 because the game has stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the second game stop effect may be displayed to urge the player not to forget to remove the prepaid card and to prevent the player from becoming addicted to the game, as in the ending effect. In this way, at least a part of the data for executing the second game stop effect and the data for executing the ending effect can be made common, thereby reducing the manufacturing costs of the pachinko game machine 1.

In the above embodiment, when the MY counter value reaches 98194, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, the first reserved symbol display device 25A, the second reserved symbol display device 25B, and the normal reserved symbol display device 25C are all turned off to inform the player that play on the pachinko game machine 1 has stopped. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the MY counter value reaches 98194, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, the first reserved symbol display device 25A, the second reserved symbol display device 25B, and the normal reserved symbol display device 25C may all be turned on to inform the player that play on the pachinko game machine 1 has stopped.

In addition, in the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12-17, when play on the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped, the CPU 103 is unable to execute winning information processing. Therefore, when play on the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped while prize balls are being paid out, calculation of the winning ratio and consecutive ratio cannot be executed at the timing when the play is stopped, and ultimately, there is a risk of a large error occurring between the consecutive ratio and winning ratio displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 and the actual consecutive ratio and winning ratio. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if play on the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped while prize balls are being paid out, it is possible to enable the CPU 103 to execute winning information processing, and to reduce the error occurring between the consecutive ratio and winning ratio displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 and the actual consecutive ratio and winning ratio.

In addition, in this embodiment, the power is turned on to the pachinko game machine 1, and the presentation control CPU 120 performs the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as controlling the movable body 32 to return to its initial position and controlling a predetermined operation check (performing the initial operation control process). However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned off once while play on the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped, and the power is turned on again without operating the clear switch 92, the pachinko game machine 1 will start while play is stopped, so the presentation control CPU 120 may not perform the above-mentioned initial operation control process, or may perform only a part of the initial operation control process.

In the above embodiment, when the MY counter value reaches 98194, the CPU 103 executes the game stop process to transmit the game stop notification command only once, but the present invention is not limited to this. Considering the case where the game stop notification command is not normally received on the presentation control board 12 side, the game stop notification command may be transmitted multiple times, or each time the CPU 103 executes the game stop process. In this way, the game stop notification command can be reliably received on the presentation control board 12 side,
This makes it possible to prevent malfunctions such as a game stop effect not being executed even though the game has been stopped.

In the above embodiment, a counter that counts the difference between the number of prize balls paid out and the number of out balls (net increase in number of balls) in the pachinko game machine 1 is used to determine whether or not to put the pachinko game machine 1 into a play-stop state, and the MY counter value does not become a value below the initial value of 0 even when the out switch 26 is turned ON. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a counter that counts the difference between the number of prize balls paid out and the number of out balls (net increase in number of balls) in the pachinko game machine 1 and the number of out balls (so-called difference ball counter) that becomes a value below the initial value every time the out switch 26 is turned ON may be used to determine whether or not to put the pachinko game machine 1 into a play-stop state.

When the MY counter in this embodiment is used to determine whether or not to put the pachinko gaming machine 1 into a game stop state, the counter value will never be lower than the initial value, so the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be controlled to a game stop state when the counter value reaches 98,194, except in a jackpot game state. In other words, the maximum number of prize balls that a player can win is 98,194.

On the other hand, when the difference ball counter is used to determine whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 should be put into a game stop state, the counter value may be lower than the initial value. Therefore, if the game transitions to a consecutive win state when the counter value is lower than the initial value, the player can receive prize balls equal to the difference in the initial value from the point when the game was controlled to the consecutive win state, in addition to the upper limit of "98194".

In the above embodiment, the game is stopped when the MY counter value reaches 98194 regardless of whether the game state is normal, time-saving, or high probability, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the MY counter value at which the game is stopped may differ depending on the game state. For example, when the game state is normal, the game is stopped when the MY counter value reaches 98194, while when the game state is time-saving or high probability, the game may be stopped when the MY counter value reaches 96398, which is a value that does not reach 100000 even if a 10-round jackpot is executed twice. In particular, as described above, when the game state is a time-saving or high probability state in which it is easier to win a 10-round jackpot than in the friendship state, the MY counter judgment value at which the game is stopped can be made smaller than the MY counter judgment value (98194) at which the game is stopped in the normal state, thereby reducing the risk that the player will acquire excessive prize balls before the game is stopped.

In the above embodiment, the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine 1 that is controlled to a high probability state after a jackpot game ends when a game ball is detected by the second count switch 24 during the jackpot game, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the present invention may be applied to a pachinko game machine that can be controlled to a small jackpot game state in which the large prize opening is opened like in the jackpot game state, and that is controlled to the jackpot game state when the game ball passes through a specific area during the small jackpot game, or a pachinko game machine that, when controlled to a high probability state after a jackpot game ends, continues to be in the high probability state until it is next controlled to the jackpot game state.

In addition, in the above embodiment, spherical gaming balls (pachinko balls) were used as an example of gaming media, but the gaming media is not limited to spherical gaming media and may be non-spherical gaming media such as medals.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine was applied as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to a slot machine in which, for example, a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using gaming value, one game ends when a variable display result is derived from a variable display device that can variably display multiple types of identifiable patterns, and a prize can be won depending on the variable display result derived from the variable display device.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to slot machines and other enclosed gaming machines that enclose gaming media and award points based on winning. Furthermore, a gaming machine capable of playing games is one that at least allows playing games, and is not limited to pachinko gaming machines or slot machines, and may be a general gaming machine.

1 Pachinko game machine 2 Game board 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 9 Game effect lamp 11 Main board 12 Performance control board 31B Push button 31B
32 Movable body 100 Game control microcomputer 120 Performance control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A counter value relating to a difference between a game value used in a game and a game value to be awarded can be calculated;
It is possible to control a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state,
After the advantageous state ends, the special state can be controlled;
When the counter value is controlled to the special state and reaches an operating value during variable display, a game stop control is performed to stop the progress of the game;
When the counter value becomes the operation value while the game is being controlled to the advantageous state, the game stop control is not performed during the advantageous state , and after the advantageous state ends, the game stop control is performed without controlling the game to the special state;
When the game is controlled to the special state and the counter value reaches an operating value during the variable display, and the game stop control is performed, a predetermined message is displayed indicating that the game progress is stopped;
When the counter value reaches an operating value while the game is being controlled to be in the advantageous state, and when the game stop control is performed after the advantageous state ends, a warning display is displayed to alert the player, and then the predetermined message display is displayed;
The predetermined message display, which is displayed when the counter value reaches the operating value during the variable display while the game is being controlled to the special state and the game stop control is performed , and the predetermined message display, which is displayed when the counter value reaches the operating value at a predetermined timing while the game is being controlled to the advantageous state and the game stop control is performed after the advantageous state ends, are a common display.
When the power is turned off during the game stop control and the power is turned on without initialization, the game stop control is not terminated,
When the power is turned off during the game stop control and the power is turned on with initialization, the game stop control ends.
The gaming machine is controlled to the advantageous state, and when a power outage occurs and the power is turned on while the counter value is at an operating value, the gaming machine is restored to the advantageous state, and after the advantageous state ends, the gaming stop control is performed without controlling to the special state .

Images